Service Manual Coulter GEN'S

COULTER Analytical Stations
Service Manual
Volume I
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000
COPYRIGHT 1989 - 1995

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
I
II
III
IV
PNEU
60 PSI
AC LINE
AC
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
DC
V
VI
VII
VIII
POWER SUPPLY
PN 4277219B (July 2001)

COULTER CORPORATION
A Beckman Coulter Company
Miami, Florida 33196-2500 USA
LEGAL NOTICES
Beckman Coulter, Inc. makes no representation that, upon furnishing this service manual, the holder of the manual will have
the necessary technical capabilities and know-how to properly troubleshoot and repair any of the equipment specified in the
manual. Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability whatsoever, including consequential and incidental damages, resulting
from improper operation of Beckman Coulter instruments after maintenance of Beckman Coulter instruments has been
performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc. Furthermore, Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability
whatsoever for any personal injury or property damage resulting from maintenance and/or repair of Beckman Coulter
instruments performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc.
READ ALL PRODUCT MANUALS AND CONSULT WITH BECKMAN COULTER-TRAINED PERSONNEL
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OPERATE INSTRUMENT.
HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:
WARNING
CAUTION
IMPORTANT -
Might cause injury.

Might cause damage to the instrument.
Might cause misleading results.
Beckman Coulter, Inc. urges its customers to comply with all national health and safety standards such as the use of barrier
protection. This may include, but it is not limited to, protective eyewear, gloves, and suitable laboratory attire when
operating or maintaining this or any other automated laboratory analyzer.
"This Service Manual contains confidential information of Beckman Coulter, Inc. and its receipt or possession does not
convey any rights to reproduce, disclose its contents, or to manufacture, use, or sell anything it may describe.
Reproduction, disclosure, or use without specific written authorization of Beckman Coulter, Inc. is strictly forbidden."
Copyright Beckman Coulter, Inc. 2001
All rights reserved.
REVISION STATUS
Initial Issue, 2/01
Released by CN 036250-0300
Software Version: Analyzer 2C; Workstation 3A
Revision B, 7/01
Released by CN 036830-0198
Software Version GENS System: Analyzer 4A; Workstation 4A1
Software Version LH 750 System: Analyzer 1A; Workstation 1A
This revision incorporates information for the LH 750 System. As part of adding the LH 750 System
information, the red and yellow traffic light icons were replaced with text in the error message tables. In
addition, Heading 9.6 is now divided into three sections, Headings A.6, A.7, and A.8, to accomodate
location illustrations for the LH750 Systems Diluter. This revision also includes information from service
memos 1745, 1891 (solid state RF Detector Preamp card), 1898 (laser bar-code reader), 1987 (probe-wipe
assembly with moveable backwash cup and sweep-flow reservoir with level sensor), and 3011.
This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent software version affects the
information in this document, the changes will be included on minor revision change pages or summarized on a Notice of
Information Update form and will be released by service memo.
PN 4277219B
iii
REVISION STATUS
iv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
LEGAL NOTICES
REVISION STATUS, iii
1
PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION, 1.1-1
1.1
MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

Scope, 1.1-1
Intended Audience, 1.1-1
Organization, 1.1-2
Numbering Format, 1.1-3
Special Headings, 1.1-3
Warning, 1.1-3
Caution, 1.1-3
Important, 1.1-3
Attention, 1.1-4
Note, 1.1-4
Conventions, 1.1-4
1.2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

Electronic, 1.2-1
Biological, 1.2-1
Laser, 1.2-2
Laser Beam Hazards, 1.2-2
Radiation Hazards, 1.2-2
Troubleshooting, 1.2-6
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1

2.1
INTRODUCTION TO THE GENS AND LH 750 SYSTEMS, 2.1-1

Summary, 2.1-1
Function, 2.1-1
CBC Parameters, 2.1-1
WBC Differential Parameters, 2.1-1
Reticulocyte Parameters, 2.1-1
Research Only Parameters, 2.1-2
Description, 2.1-2
Components, 2.1-2
Systems, 2.1-2
Diagnostic Products, 2.1-5
Physical Specifications, 2.1-5
Performance Specifications and Characteristics, 2.1-5
Leakage Current Specifications, 2.1-5
Operation, 2.1-6
Aspiration Modes, 2.1-6
Test Modes, 2.1-6
Operating Procedures, 2.1-6
2.2
POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.2-1

Summary, 2.2-1
Main Components, 2.2-1
CONTENTS VOLUME I
vi
2.3
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.3-1

Summary, 2.3-1
2.4
DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.4-1

Summary, 2.4-1
2.5
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND

DISTRIBUTION, 2.5-1
Summary, 2.5-1
Electronic Power Supply Overview, 2.5-1
Transient Voltage Suppressor, 2.5-1
Fuses, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Supply, 2.5-2
Function, 2.5-2
Input, 2.5-2
Outputs, 2.5-2
Fans, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Filter Card, 2.5-2
Main Power Supply Cable, 2.5-3
Backplane Voltage Bus, 2.5-3
Local Power Supplies, 2.5-4
2.6
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP, 2.6-1

Summary, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Development, 2.6-1
IBUS, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Distribution and Function, 2.6-1
Power-Up Signals, 2.6-4
POWER ON Signal, 2.6-4
AMC Power-Up Sequence, 2.6-5
SYSTEM RESET Signal, 2.6-5
PNEU ON Signal, 2.6-6
Power-Off Signals, 2.6-6
2.7
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE

ANALYZER, 2.7-1
Summary, 2.7-1
API Card, 2.7-1
Function, 2.7-1
Monitors, 2.7-2
Switches, 2.7-2
Input, 2.7-2
Outputs, 2.7-2
R/W/P SC/A Card, 2.7-3
Function, 2.7-3
Monitors, 2.7-4
Connectors, 2.7-4
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Inputs, 2.7-4
Outputs, 2.7-4
APS1 Card, 2.7-4
Function, 2.7-4
Input, 2.7-5
Outputs, 2.7-5
Monitors, 2.7-6
LED, 2.7-6
Test Points, 2.7-6
APS2 Card, 2.7-6
Function, 2.7-6
Input, 2.7-7
Outputs, 2.7-7
Monitors, 2.7-8
LED, 2.7-8
Test Points, 2.7-8
PN 4277219B
2.8

DILUTER, 2.8-1
Summary, 2.8-1
Diff Power Supply Card, 2.8-1
Function, 2.8-1
Monitors, 2.8-2
Connectors, 2.8-2
Input, 2.8-2
Outputs, 2.8-2
Laser Interlock Switch, 2.8-2
Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Output, 2.8-3
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Outputs, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-4
Connectors, LEDs and Test Points, 2.8-4
2.9
PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM, 2.9-1

Summary, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Overview, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Development, 2.9-2
Pressure Development, 2.9-2
Vacuum Development, 2.9-3
Monitors, 2.9-3
Pneumatic Levels and Status, 2.9-3
Temperature Monitoring, 2.9-3
vii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Pressure Distribution, 2.9-4

30 Psi, 2.9-4
5 Psi, 2.9-4
Vacuum Distribution, 2.9-4
High Vacuum, 2.9-5
Low Vacuum, 2.9-5
PVT Card, 2.9-5
Function, 2.9-5
Input, 2.9-6
Monitors, 2.9-6
Connectors, 2.9-6
2.10 POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL, 2.10-1
Summary, 2.10-1
System Power Controller Card, 2.10-1
Function, 2.10-1
Inputs, 2.10-2
Monitors, 2.10-2
Connectors and LEDs, 2.10-3
System Power Controller Display, 2.10-3
Function, 2.10-3
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply, 2.10-4
Insufficient Ac Input, 2.10-4
Power Supply Overheating, 2.10-5
Pressing POWER OFF, 2.10-5
2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL, 2.11-1
Summary, 2.11-1
System Control Overview, 2.11-1
AMC, 2.11-2
Function, 2.11-2
RESET Switch, 2.11-2
DIP Switches and Jumpers, 2.11-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, 2.11-4
Function, 2.11-4
Switches, 2.11-5
RS/Opto Intfc Card, 2.11-5
Function, 2.11-5
Connectors, 2.11-5
Scope Module, 2.11-6
Function, 2.11-6
Inputs, 2.11-7
2.12 DILUTER CONTROL, 2.12-1
Summary, 2.12-1
DILUTER PROCESSOR vs DILUTER CPU Cards - the Old and New Diluter
Interconnects, 2.12-2
DILUTER PROCESSOR CARD, 2.12-2
Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-2
viii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
DILUTER CPU CARD, 2.12-2

Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-3
Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules, 2.12-3
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-3
Connectors, 2.12-3
Diluter 1 Card, 2.12-3
Styles in Use, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-4
Monitoring, 2.12-5
Function, 2.12-6
Inputs, 2.12-7
Monitoring, 2.12-7
BD ADJ Card, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Connectors, Test Points, and Adjustments, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Inputs, 2.12-9
Connectors and LED, 2.12-9
Function, 2.12-9
Inputs, 2.12-11
Diluter/Numeric Keypad, 2.12-11
Function, 2.12-11
Contrast Adjustment, 2.12-11
2.13 REAGENT HANDLING, 2.13-1
Summary, 2.13-1
Reagent Input, 2.13-1
Reagent Reservoir Module, 2.13-2
Function, 2.13-2
Monitoring the Reagent Level, 2.13-4
Reservoir Interface Card, 2.13-5
Function, 2.13-5
Inputs, 2.13-5
Connectors, 2.13-5
Reagent Distribution, 2.13-6
Diluent/Cleaning Agent Chamber, 2.13-7
Function, 2.13-7
PN 4277219B
ix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Backwash Tank, 2.13-8

Function, 2.13-8
Testing, 2.13-8
Backwash Manifold, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Sheath Tank, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Testing, 2.13-10
Sweep-Flow Reservoir, 2.13-10
Function, 2.13-10
Testing, 2.13-10
System-Flush Cycle, 2.13-11
Waste Collection and Monitoring, 2.13-11
Waste Collection, 2.13-11
Waste Level Monitoring, 2.13-11
2.14 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION, 2.14-1
Summary, 2.14-1
Specimen Transport System Overview, 2.14-1
Cassette Transport Assembly (CTA), 2.14-2
Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Function, 2.14-3
LED Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Laser Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-4
Types of Bar Codes Used, 2.14-5
Bar-Code Label Specifications, 2.14-5
Sensor Distribution Card, 2.14-5
Function, 2.14-5
Input, 2.14-6
2.15 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT, 2.15-1
Summary, 2.15-1
Moving a Cassette from the Loading Bay to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-1
Initiating the Automatic-Mode Cycle, 2.15-1
Retrieving the Cassette from the Loading Bay, 2.15-1
Placing the Cassette on the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Moving the Cassette Across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Detecting a Tube at the Piercing Station, 2.15-4
Positioning the Tube for Sample Acquisition, 2.15-4
Piercing the Cap of the Specimen Tube, 2.15-5
Identifying the Specimen, 2.15-5
Pushing the Tube Back into the Cassette, 2.15-6
Moving a Cassette to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
Removing a Cassette from the Rocker Bed, 2.15-7
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, 2.16-1

Summary, 2.16-1
Automatic-Mode, 2.16-1
Aspirating a Sample, 2.16-1
Segmenting the Sample, 2.16-2
Cleaning the Blood Pathways, 2.16-3
Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.17 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION, 2.17-1
Summary, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump, 2.17-1
Function, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
Aspiration Pump - Manual-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Aspiration Pump - Automatic-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Adjustable Stops, 2.17-4
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV), 2.17-5
Function, 2.17-5
BSV Ports, 2.17-6
Shear Valves, 2.17-7
Hardware Description, 2.17-7
Diff and Retic Segment Valves, 2.17-7
Stained Retic Segment Valve, 2.17-9
Shear Valve Ports, 2.17-10
Needle Assembly, 2.17-11
Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
Function, 2.17-13
Operation, 2.17-14
Aspiration Messages, 2.17-15
Hand Detector, 2.17-16
Probe-Wipe Module, 2.17-17
Function, 2.17-17
Monitoring, 2.17-18
2.18 CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA, 2.18-1
Summary, 2.18-1
Making the Sample Dilutions, 2.18-2
Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
Sensing Area, 2.18-4
Aperture Vacuum, 2.18-4
Aperture Current, 2.18-4
Timing the Data Collection in the GENS System, 2.18-5
WBC and RBC Data, 2.18-5
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good
pulses can vary the histogram data collection time., 2.18-6
WBC Histogram, 2.18-6
PN 4277219B
xi
CONTENTS VOLUME I
RBC Histogram, 2.18-6

Plt Histogram, 2.18-6
Timing the Data Collection in the LH 750 System, 2.18-6
WBC and RBC Count Data, 2.18-6
WBC, RBC, and Plt Histograms, 2.18-6
Determining the Hgb, 2.18-8
2.19 CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA, 2.19-1
Summary, 2.19-1
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GENS System), 2.19-1
Function, 2.19-1
CAL Pulses, 2.19-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-2
Function, 2.19-2
CAL Pulses, 2.19-3
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card (GENS System), 2.19-3
Function, 2.19-3
Input, 2.19-5
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-5
Function, 2.19-5
Input, 2.19-6
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card, 2.19-6
Function, 2.19-6
Input, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Parameters, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Results on the GENS System, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Results on the LH 750 System, 2.19-7
2.20 VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA, 2.20-1
Summary, 2.20-1
VCS Measurements, 2.20-1
V - Volume (DC), 2.20-1
C - Conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
S - Light Scatter (LS), 2.20-1
Opacity (OP), 2.20-1
Rotated Light Scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
Linear Light Scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
Applying the VCS Technology, 2.20-2
DC and RF Currents, 2.20-2
Laser Light Source, 2.20-2
Flow-Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-3
Data Collection, 2.20-5
2.21 VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA, 2.21-1
Summary, 2.21-1
Electronic Overview, 2.21-1
xii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
RF Detector Preamp Card, 2.21-2

Function, 2.21-2
Inputs, 2.21-2
Outputs, 2.21-2
Monitoring, 2.21-4
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor, 2.21-4
Function, 2.21-4
ANALOG 5 Card, 2.21-6
Function, 2.21-6
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, 2.21-7
Function, 2.21-7
Inputs, 2.21-8
Switch, 2.21-8
2.22 VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS, 2.22-1
Summary, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the GENS System, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
Sensing the Diff Sample, 2.22-4
Diff Analysis Reagent System, 2.22-4
COULTER IntelliKinetics Application, 2.22-5
Ambient Temperature Thermistors, 2.22-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps, 2.22-6
Reagent Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
Dispensing the High Volume, 2.22-7
Dispensing the Low Volume, 2.22-8
Determining the Diff Parameters, 2.22-10
2.23 VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS, 2.23-1
Summary, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the GENS System, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
Sensing the Retic Sample, 2.23-5
Retic Analysis Reagent System, 2.23-5
Regulating the Temperature in the Stain Chamber, 2.23-6
Regulating the Temperature in the Peltier Module, 2.23-6
Determining the Retic Parameters, 2.23-6
2.24 SAMPLE REPORTING, 2.24-1
Summary, 2.24-1
Sample Data Set, 2.24-2
CBC Analysis on the GENS System, 2.24-2
RBC and WBC Counts and Histograms, 2.24-2
MCV, 2.24-3
RDW, 2.24-3
Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct, 2.24-3
Hgb, 2.24-4
RBC Indices, 2.24-4
PN 4277219B
xiii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.24-5

MCV, 2.24-5
RDW, 2.24-6
Hgb, 2.24-7
RBC Indices, 2.24-7
Diff Analysis, 2.24-7
Nucleated RBC Counts (NRBC), 2.24-9
Retic Analysis, 2.24-9
Sample Flags, Codes and Messages, 2.24-10
2.25 CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW, 2.25-1
Why Calibrate?, 2.25-1
Calibration Tests, 2.25-1
Steps to Calibration, 2.25-1
Preliminary, 2.25-1
Latex Voltage Calibration, 2.25-2
Flow Rate Calibration, 2.25-5
Manual Mode-to-Automatic Mode Calibration, 2.25-7
When to Calibrate, 2.25-8
3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1

PART A: GENS SYSTEM INSTALLATION
xiv
3.1
GENS SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.1-1

Operator Training, 3.1-1
Carton Arrival and Condition, 3.1-1
Instrument Site, 3.1-1
Space and Accessibility, 3.1-1
Ventilation, 3.1-3
Remote Communication System (RCS) Requirement, 3.1-3
Electrical Requirements, 3.1-3
Drainage, 3.1-4
Ambient Temperature and Humidity, 3.1-4
Altitude, 3.1-5
Earthquake-Prone Regions, 3.1-5
Installation Supplies, 3.1-5
3.2
INSTALLING THE GENS SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.2-1
3.3
UNPACKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.3-1

Tools/Supplies Needed for Installing the Analytical Station, 3.3-1
Unpacking, 3.3-1
3.4
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GENS SYSTEM, 3.4-1

Connecting the dc Power Cable, 3.4-1
Connecting the IBUS Cable, 3.4-2
Connecting the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GENS System, 3.4-2
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus, 3.4-4
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RF Detector Preamp Card, 3.4-5
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RS/Opto Intfc Card, 3.4-6
Connecting the Workstation to the Analytical Station, 3.4-7
3.5
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GENS SYSTEM, 3.5-1

Connecting the Pneumatic Lines, 3.5-1
Installing the Pickup Tubes and the Reagent Lines, 3.5-1
3.6
SETTING UP THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.6-1

Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.6-1
Setting Up the GENS System Diluter, 3.6-3
Setting Up the Analyzer, 3.6-9
3.7
CHECKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.7-1

Power Up Checks, 3.7-1
Analyzer Checks, 3.7-2
Adjusting the Analyzer Display and Accessing the Revision Levels, 3.7-2
Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings, 3.7-3
Entering System Serial Numbers and Revisions at the Workstation, 3.7-4
3.8
TESTING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

WORKSTATION, 3.8-1
Reagent Cycles, 3.8-1
Priming Cycles, 3.8-1
Startup Cycle, 3.8-1
System Verification, 3.8-3
Whole Blood Verification, 3.8-3
SlideMaker Installation, 3.8-3
SlideStainer Installation, 3.8-3
Report Completion, 3.8-3
System Installation Report, 3.8-3
Instrument Reference Report Form, 3.8-3
Service Call Report, 3.8-3
3.9
GENS SYSTEM AND GENS CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.9-1

PART B: LH 750 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.10-1

Ventilation, 3.10-3
Drainage, 3.10-4
Altitude, 3.10-5
PN 4277219B
xv
CONTENTS VOLUME I
3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.11-1

Opening the Cartons, 3.11-1
Unpacking and Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.11-2
Unpacking the Diluter, 3.11-5
Unpacking the Analyzer, 3.11-5
3.12 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.12-1
Accessing the Connections, 3.12-1
Connecting the Analyzer to Preamp Cable, 3.12-4
3.13 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.13-1
3.14 SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER, 3.14-1
Setting Up the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.14-1
3.15 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.15-1
Unpacking and Checking the Workstation, 3.15-1
3.16 CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.16-1
Closing Up the Instrument for Testing, 3.16-4
3.17 TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND
WORKSTATION, 3.17-1
3.18 LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.18-1
xvi
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
PN 4277219B
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1

4.1
POWER DOWN/POWER UP, 4.1-1

Analytical Station Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-1
Power Up, 4.1-1
Workstation Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-2
Power Up, 4.1-2
4.2
ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS, 4.2-1

Purpose, 4.2-1
Procedure, 4.2-1
Verification, 4.2-1
4.3
ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS, 4.3-1

Purpose, 4.3-1
Procedure, 4.3-1
Verification, 4.3-2
4.4
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, 4.4-1

Procedure, 4.4-1
Verification, 4.4-2
4.5
AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS, 4.5-1

Purpose, 4.5-1
Procedure, 4.5-1
Verification, 4.5-1
4.6
ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.6-1

Purpose, 4.6-1
Procedure, 4.6-1
4.7
DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.7-1

Purpose, 4.7-1
Bar-Code Decoder Card Replacement, 4.7-1
Removal, 4.7-1
Installation, 4.7-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card Relocation or Replacement (LH 750 System), 4.7-2
Relocation or Removal, 4.7-2
xvii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Installation, 4.7-3
Diluter Card Replacements (except Bar-Code Decoder, Six-Channel Preamp, and
Reservoir Interface Cards), 4.7-3
Removal, 4.7-3
Installation, 4.7-4
4.8
CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES, 4.8-1

Purpose, 4.8-1
Procedures, 4.8-1
4.9
CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE, 4.9-1

Purpose, 4.9-1
Procedure, 4.9-1
4.10 CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, 4.10-1

Purpose, 4.10-1
Procedure, 4.10-1
Verification, 4.10-3
4.11 MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION, 4.11-1
Purpose, 4.11-1
Collecting the Data, 4.11-1
4.12 FAN REPLACEMENT, 4.12-1
Purpose, 4.12-1
Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-1
Procedure, 4.12-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-2
Procedure, 4.12-2
Analyzer Fans, 4.12-3
Procedure, 4.12-3
4.13 REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL, 4.13-1
Purpose, 4.13-1
Removal, 4.13-1
4.14 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT, 4.14-1
Purpose, 4.14-1
Removal, 4.14-1
xviii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Installation, 4.14-2
4.15 DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT, 4.15-1
Purpose, 4.15-1
Procedure, 4.15-1
4.16 AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT, 4.16-1
Purpose, 4.16-1
Cleaning, 4.16-1
Replacement, 4.16-2
Removal, 4.16-2
4.17 MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.17-1
Purpose, 4.17-1
Replacement, 4.17-1
4.18 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.18-1
Purpose, 4.18-1
Removal, 4.18-1
4.19 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT, 4.19-1
Purpose, 4.19-1
SPC Display Test, 4.19-1
Replacement, 4.19-1
4.20 BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT, 4.20-1
Purpose, 4.20-1
Removal, 4.20-1
4.21 BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.21-1
Purpose, 4.21-1
Replacement, 4.21-1
PN 4277219B
xix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.22 CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.22-1
Purpose, 4.22-1
Volume Check, 4.22-1
Pump Troubleshooting, 4.22-4
Replacement, 4.22-5
4.23 DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.23-1
Purpose, 4.23-1
Dispenser Troubleshooting, 4.23-5
Replacement, 4.23-6
4.24 STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.24-1
Purpose, 4.24-1
Replacement, 4.24-7
4.25 RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT, 4.25-1
Purpose, 4.25-1
Pump Replacement, 4.25-6
4.26 CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 4.26-1
Purpose, 4.26-1
Replacement, 4.26-3
4.27 ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.27-1
Purpose, 4.27-1
Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-1
High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-3
Replacement, 4.27-6
xx
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.28 DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.28-1
Purpose, 4.28-1
Low Volume Check, 4.28-1
High Volume Check, 4.28-4
Replacement, 4.28-8
4.29 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT, 4.29-1
Purpose, 4.29-1
Replacement, 4.29-8
4.30 REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.30-1
Purpose, 4.30-1
Float Sensor/Reservoir Cap Replacement, 4.30-1
Removal, 4.30-1
Reagent Reservoir Solenoid Replacement, 4.30-3
Procedure, 4.30-3
Reservoir Interface Card Replacement, 4.30-4
Procedure, 4.30-4
4.31 CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK, 4.31-1
Purpose, 4.31-1
Preliminary Checks, 4.31-1
Timing Check, 4.31-1
4.32 HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.32-1
Purpose, 4.32-1
Replacement, 4.32-1
Hgb Lamp Voltage Adjustment, 4.32-2
4.33 WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA
COLLECTION, 4.33-1
Purpose, 4.33-1
PN 4277219B
xxi
CONTENTS VOLUME I

Screen Capture, 4.33-1
List-Mode Data Collection, 4.33-1
4.34 CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT, 4.34-1
Purpose, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the GENS System, 4.34-1
Adjustment, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
Adjustment, 4.34-2
4.35 BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT, 4.35-1
Purpose, 4.35-1
Removal, 4.35-1
4.36 ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT, 4.36-1
Purpose, 4.36-1
Adjustment, 4.36-1
4.37 UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.37-1
Purpose, 4.37-1
Procedure, 4.37-1
4.38 UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.38-1
Purpose, 4.38-1
Procedure, 4.38-1
4.39 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.39-1
Purpose, 4.39-1
Removal, 4.39-1
4.40 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.40-1
Purpose, 4.40-1
Removal, 4.40-1
xxii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Lift Function Test, 4.40-3

Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment, 4.40-3
4.41 TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.41-1
Purpose, 4.41-1
Replacement, 4.41-1
Top Left Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
Top Right Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
4.42 FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.42-1
Purpose, 4.42-1
Flipper Check and Adjustment, 4.42-1
4.43 ROCKER BED REMOVAL, 4.43-1
Purpose, 4.43-1
Removal, 4.43-1
4.44 ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.44-1
Purpose, 4.44-1
Bed Sensor Flag Check and Adjustment, 4.44-1
Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-2
Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-3
Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-4
4.45 BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.45-1
Purpose, 4.45-1
Removal, 4.45-1
Bed Rock Rate Adjustment, 4.45-2
4.46 TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.46-1
Purpose, 4.46-1
Replacement, 4.46-1
4.47 TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.47-1
Purpose, 4.47-1
PN 4277219B
xxiii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.48 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS, 4.48-1
Purpose, 4.48-1
Procedure, 4.48-1
4.49 BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.49-1
Purpose, 4.49-1
Procedure, 4.49-1
4.50 BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.50-1
Purpose, 4.50-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-1
Removal, 4.50-1
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-2
Removal, 4.50-2
4.51 BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS, 4.51-1
Purpose, 4.51-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-1
Set Up, 4.51-1
Park Tab Verification, 4.51-2
Center Adjustment, 4.51-3
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment, 4.51-4
Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-8
Adjustments, 4.51-8
4.52 LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS, 4.52-1
Purpose, 4.52-1
Tool/Supplies Needed, 4.52-1
Speed Check, 4.52-1
Electrical Checks, 4.52-2
4.53 BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.53-1
Purpose, 4.53-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-1
Adjustment, 4.53-1
xxiv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-2

Adjustment, 4.53-2
4.54 BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE, 4.54-1
Purpose, 4.54-1
Alignment, 4.54-1
4.55 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.55-1
Purpose, 4.55-1
Retic Module, 4.55-1
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-2
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-3
Random Access Module, 4.55-4
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module, 4.55-5
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-6
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-7
4.56 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.56-1
Purpose, 4.56-1
Performance Test, 4.56-1
4.57 NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.57-1
Purpose, 4.57-1
Replacement, 4.57-1
Bellow Up and Bellows Down Sensor Adjustment, 4.57-2
4.58 PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT
REPLACEMENTS, 4.58-1
Purpose, 4.58-1
Tools/Materials Needed, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Test, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement, 4.58-2
Cleaning Truck Alignment, 4.58-5
Initial Adjustment, 4.58-5
Final Adjustment, 4.58-6
PN 4277219B
xxv
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment, 4.58-6

4.59 HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT, 4.59-1
Purpose, 4.59-1
Procedure, 4.59-1
4.60 BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.60-1
Purpose, 4.60-1
BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator Replacement, 4.60-1
Procedure, 4.60-1
BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement, 4.60-3
Procedure, 4.60-3
Probe Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.60-4
4.61 USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS, 4.61-1
Purpose, 4.61-1
Using the System Verification Report, 4.61-1
Using the Instrument Reference Report, 4.61-2
Using the System Installation Report, 4.61-2
4.62 RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT, 4.62-1
Purpose, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-2
4.63 STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.63-1
Purpose, 4.63-1
Procedure, 4.63-1
4.64 PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.64-1
Purpose, 4.64-1
Procedure, 4.64-1
xxvi
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.65 HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.65-1

Purpose, 4.65-1
Procedure, 4.65-1
4.66 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION, 4.66-1
Purpose, 4.66-1
Procedure, 4.66-1
4.67 DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT, 4.67-1
Purpose, 4.67-1
Removal, 4.67-1
4.68 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.68-1
Purpose, 4.68-1
Procedure, 4.68-1
4.69 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.69-1
Purpose, 4.69-1
Procedure, 4.69-1
4.70 CBC APERTURE CHECKS, 4.70-1
Purpose, 4.70-1
Procedure, 4.70-1
4.71 VCS OPTIMIZATION, 4.71-1
Purpose, 4.71-1
A. Preliminary Checks, 4.71-5
B. Pump Volume Checks, 4.71-5
C. VCS Flow Rate Adjustment, 4.71-5
D. RF Detector Preamp Card Adjustments, 4.71-6
E. DC and RF Verification, 4.71-6
F. Flow Cell Cleaning, 4.71-6
G. Laser and Flow-Cell Alignment, 4.71-6
H. LS Gain Adjustment, 4.71-6
I. LS Verification, 4.71-6
J. RMS Noise Check, 4.71-7
K. LATRON Verification, 4.71-7
L. VCS Verification, 4.71-7
PN 4277219B
xxvii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.72 INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS, 4.72-1

Purpose, 4.72-1
Procedure, 4.72-1
4.73 FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, 4.73-1
Purpose, 4.73-1
Procedure, 4.73-1
4.74 RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS, 4.74-1
Purpose, 4.74-1
RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment, 4.74-2
Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum
Tube, 4.74-3
C1/C20 Adjustment, 4.74-4
RF and DC Gain Adjustment, 4.74-5
4.75 VCS NOISE CHECKS, 4.75-1
Purpose, 4.75-1
DC Verification, 4.75-1
RF Verification, 4.75-2
LS Verification, 4.75-9
RMS Noise Check, 4.75-10
4.76 LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT, 4.76-1
Purpose, 4.76-1
Flow-Cell Z-Axis (Focus) Alignment, 4.76-2
Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Alignment, 4.76-5
Flow-Cell Y-Axis Final Alignment, 4.76-7
4.77 LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT, 4.77-1
Purpose, 4.77-1
Procedure, 4.77-1
4.78 LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 4.78-1
Purpose, 4.78-1
Procedure, 4.78-1
4.79 FLOW CELL CLEANING, 4.79-1
Purpose, 4.79-1
xxviii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I

Procedure, 4.79-1
4.80 LENS BLOCK CLEANING, 4.80-1
Purpose, 4.80-1
Procedure, 4.80-1
4.81 SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS, 4.81-1
Purpose, 4.81-1
4.82 LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT, 4.82-1
Purpose, 4.82-1
Removal, 4.82-1
4.83 RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL, 4.83-1
Purpose, 4.83-1
Removal, 4.83-1
INDEX, INDEX-1
TRADEMARKS
ILLUSTRATIONS
1.2-1
1.2-2
1.2-3
1.2-4
1.2-5
2.1-1
2.1-2
2.1-3
2.1-4
2.2-1
2.2-2
2.3-1
2.3-2
2.3-3
2.3-4
2.3-5
2.4-1
2.4-2
2.4-3
PN 4277219B
Laser Warning and Certification Labels, Laser with Protective Housing, 1.2-3
Laser Warning and Certification Labels on the Laser Beam Cover, 1.2-4
Laser Warning Labels on the Handheld Scanner, 1.2-4
Laser Warning Labels on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing On, 1.2-5
Laser Warning Label on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing Cut Away, 1.2-5
GENS System Units, 2.1-3
GENS Cell Units, 2.1-3
LH 750 System Units, 2.1-4
LH 750 System Units with Optional LH SlideMaker and LH SlideStainer , 2.1-4
Power Supply Component Locations, Old Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
Power Supply Component Locations, New Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
GENS System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, 2.3-3
GENS System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-3
LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, Cover Down, 2.3-4
LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View without Cover, 2.3-4
LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-4
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-4
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panels, 2.4-4
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-5
xxix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.4-4
2.4-5
2.4-6
2.4-7
2.4-8
2.4-9
2.4-10
2.4-11
2.4-12
2.4-13
2.4-14
2.4-15
2.5-1
2.5-2
2.5-3
2.6-1
2.6-2
2.6-3
2.6-4
2.6-5
2.6-6
2.6-7
2.7-1
2.7-2
2.7-3
2.7-4
2.8-1
2.8-2
2.8-3
2.9-1
2.9-2
2.9-3
2.10-1
2.10-2
2.11-1
2.11-2
2.11-3
2.11-4
2.11-5
2.12-1
2.12-2
2.12-3
xxx
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and

Compartment, 2.4-5
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment, 2.4-6
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-6
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-7
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-8
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panel, 2.4-8
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-9
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Center Rear Panel, 2.4-9
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-11
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-11
Electronic Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.5-1
Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the GENS System, 2.5-3
Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the LH 750 System, 2.5-4
Control Voltage Development and Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects), 2.6-2
Control Voltage Development and Distribution (New Diluter
Interconnects), 2.6-2
+5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (Old Diluter
+5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (New Diluter
POWER ON Signal, System Power Controller Card, 2.6-4
AMC Power-Up Signals, 2.6-5
API Card Block Diagram, 2.7-1
R/W/P SC/A Card Block Diagram, 2.7-3
APS1 Card Block Diagram, 2.7-5
Diff Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-1
Laser Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.8-3
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-4
Pneumatic Supply Components, Old Style Power Supply, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Supply Components, New Style Power Supply, 2.9-2
Pneumatic On Signals on the System Power Controller Card, 2.9-4
System Power Controller Card and System Power Controller Display Block
Diagram, 2.10-1
System Control Overview Block Diagram, 2.11-1
RESET Signal Block Diagram, 2.11-3
Analyzer RESET Button, 2.11-3
COMM INTERFACE Card Communication Links, 2.11-4
RS/Opto Intfc Card Communication Links, 2.11-6
Diluter Control Overview, 2.12-1
Diluter 1 Card Power Supply Distribution, 2.12-4
Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit, 2.12-10
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.12-4
2.12-5
2.12-6
2.12-7
2.13-1
2.13-2
2.13-3
2.13-4
2.13-5
Stain Chamber Heater Circuit, 2.12-10

Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit, 2.12-11
Diluter Keypad on the GENS System, 2.12-12
Numeric Keypad on the LH 750 System, 2.12-12
Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-1
Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-2
Reagent Reservoir Module, Old Style (GENS System), 2.13-3
Reagent Reservoir Module, New Style (GENS System), 2.13-4
Reagent Reservoir Module, Modified New Style (GENS System and LH 750
System), 2.13-4
2.13-6 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-6
2.13-7 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 2.13-7
2.13-8 Backwash Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-8
2.13-9 Sheath-Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-10
2.14-1 Specimen Transport Block Diagram, 2.14-1
2.14-2 Cassette Transport Assembly, 2.14-2
2.14-3 LED Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-3
2.14-4 Laser Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-4
2.15-1 Initiating the Automatic Cycle, 2.15-1
2.15-2 Bed Position Sensors, 2.15-2
2.15-3 Bed Locks, 2.15-2
2.15-4 From Loading Bay to Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
2.15-5 Moving across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
2.15-6 Detecting Specimen Tubes, 2.15-4
2.15-7 Positioning Tube for Sampling, 2.15-4
2.15-8 Piercing the Tube, 2.15-5
2.15-9 Scanning Bar-Code Labels, 2.15-5
2.15-10Pushing Tube into Cassette, 2.15-6
2.15-11Moving to Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
2.15-12Rocker Bed to Unloading Bay, 2.15-7
2.16-1 Aspiration Path in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-1
2.16-2 Aspiration through the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-3 Delivering CBC Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-4 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-3
2.16-5 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-3
2.16-6 Backwashing the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-7 Cross-Rinse in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-8 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-5
2.16-9 Aspiration Path in the Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.16-10Aspiration through the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-11Delivering CBC Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-12Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-7
2.16-13Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-7
2.16-14Backwashing the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-15Cross-Rinse in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-16Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-8
2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Components, 2.17-2
2.17-2 Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
2.17-3 Aspiration in Manual Mode, 2.17-3
PN 4277219B
xxxi
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode, 2.17-3

2.17-5 Adjusting the Low, Manual-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-6 Adjusting the High, Automatic-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-7 BSV Ports, 2.17-6
2.17-8 Aspirate Sample, 2.17-7
2.17-9 Deliver Sample, 2.17-8
2.17-10Backwash Sample Groove, 2.17-8
2.17-11Wash Cleaning Groove, 2.17-8
2.17-12Backwash Sample Loop, 2.17-8
2.17-13Aspirate Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-14Deliver Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-16Rinse Aspiration Pathway, 2.17-10
2.17-17Diff and Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-10
2.17-18Stained Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-11
2.17-19Needle Assembly Components, 2.17-12
2.17-20Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
2.17-21Bubble/Blood Detector Operation, 2.17-14
2.17-22Manual-Mode Aspiration Station Components, 2.17-17
2.18-1 CBC Analysis in the GENS System Block Diagram, 2.18-1
2.18-2 CBC Analysis in the LH 750 System Block Diagram, 2.18-2
2.18-3 CBC Sample Processing Components on GENS System Analytical Stations that
Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
2.18-5 CBC Sample Processing Components on LH 750 System Analytical
Stations, 2.18-4
2.18-6 Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-5
2.18-7 Data Collection Timing on the GENS System, 2.18-5
2.18-8 Data Collection Timing LH 750 System, 2.18-7
2.18-9 Hgb Sensing Area, 2.18-8
2.18-10Hgb Signal Flow, 2.18-8
2.19-1 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP Card Block Diagram, 2.19-1
2.19-2 Six-Channel Preamp Card Block Diagram, 2.19-3
2.19-3 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-4
2.19-4 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.19-5 PLATELET PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.20-1 Applying the VCS Technology, 2.20-3
2.20-2 Light Scatter Path, 2.20-3
2.20-3 Hydrodynamically Focused Cells, 2.20-4
2.20-4 Flow Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-4
2.21-1 VCS Technology Block Diagram, 2.21-1
2.21-2 RF Detector Preamp Card (with Vacuum Tube) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
2.21-3 RF Detector Preamp Card (Solid State) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
2.21-4 LS Sensor Regions, 2.21-4
2.21-5 Light Scatter Preamp Module Block Diagram, 2.21-5
2.21-6 ANALOG 5 Card Block Diagram, 2.21-6
2.21-7 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.21-7
2.22-1 Diff Sample Processing Components on the GENS System, 2.22-1
xxxii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.22-2 Diff Blood Sample and Reagent Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the GENS
System, 2.22-2
2.22-3 Diff Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
2.22-4 Diff Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.22-3
2.22-5 Diff Sample Analysis Flow, 2.22-4
2.22-6 Ambient Temperature Sensor Location, 2.22-5
2.22-7 Diff Lytic Reagent Pump and Diff Preservative Pump Components, 2.22-6
2.22-8 Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
2.22-9 Dispensing High Volume, 2.22-7
2.22-10Dispensing Low Volume, 2.22-8
2.22-11Adjusting the Low Volume, 2.22-9
2.22-12Adjusting the High Volume, 2.22-9
2.23-1 Retic Sample Processing Components on the GENS System, 2.23-1
2.23-2 Retic Blood Sample and Stain Delivery to Stain Chamber on the GENS
System, 2.23-2
2.23-3 Stained Sample and Clearing Solution Delivery to Retic Chamber on the GENS
System, 2.23-2
2.23-4 Retic Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
2.23-5 Retic Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Stain Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-6 Stained Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Retic Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-7 Retic Sample Analysis Flow, 2.23-5
2.23-8 Stain Heater Block Diagram, 2.23-6
2.23-9 Peltier Module, Cross Section, 2.23-6
2.24-1 Sample Data Flow on the GENS System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-1
2.24-2 Sample Data Flow on the LH 750 System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-2
2.24-3 Diff Analysis Two-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-4 Diff Analysis Three-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-5 NRBC Signature Position, 2.24-9
2.24-6 NRBC Location on WBC Histogram, 2.24-9
2.24-7 Retic Analysis DataPlot, 2.24-10
2.25-1 Latex Voltage Test Window, 2.25-3
2.25-2 Voltage Matching Test Window, 2.25-4
2.25-3 Flow Rate Test Window, 2.25-7
3.1-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS System without
SlideMaker, 3.1-1
3.1-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS System with
SlideMaker, 3.1-2
3.1-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS Cell, 3.1-2
3.1-4 Location of Fans on the GENS System, 3.1-3
3.1-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the GENS System, 3.1-4
3.1-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the GENS System, 3.1-5
3.3-1 Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons, 3.3-1
3.3-2 Main Components Layout on the GENS System, 3.3-2
3.3-3 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the GENS System, 3.3-3
3.3-4 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the GENS System, 3.3-3
PN 4277219B
xxxiii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
3.4-1
3.4-2
3.4-3
3.4-4
3.4-5
3.4-6
3.4-7
3.4-8
3.5-1
3.5-2
3.5-3
3.6-1
3.6-2
3.6-3
3.6-4
3.6-5
3.6-6
3.6-7
3.6-8
3.6-9
3.6-10
3.7-1
3.7-2
3.7-3
3.8-1
3.8-2
3.10-1
3.10-2
3.10-3
3.10-4
3.10-5
3.10-6
3.11-1
3.11-2
3.11-3
3.11-4
3.11-5
3.11-6
3.11-7
3.11-8
xxxiv
Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GENS System, 3.4-1

Connecting the IBUS Cable on the GENS System, 3.4-2
Opening the Diluter Side Doors, 3.4-3
Routing the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GENS System, 3.4-3
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the GENS System, 3.4-4
Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital
Backplane, 3.4-5
Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on
the GENS System, 3.4-6
Connecting the Workstation to the Diluter on the GENS System, 3.4-7
Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the GENS System, 3.5-1
Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK Lytic
Reagent on the GENS System, 3.5-2
Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the GENS
System, 3.5-3
Removing Power Supply Shipping Brackets, 3.6-1
Location of Power Supply Air Filter, 3.6-2
Connecting Main ac Power Cable to Power Supply, 3.6-3
Removing GENS System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.6-3
Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the GENS System, 3.6-4
Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the GENS System, 3.6-5
Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the GENS System, 3.6-6
Checking Rocker Bed Movement and Bed Position Sensor Condition on the
GENS System, 3.6-7
Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the GENS
System, 3.6-8
AMC, COMM INTERFACE Card, and DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Locations,
GENS System, 3.6-9
Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the GENS System, 3.7-1
Power On Checks on the GENS System, 3.7-2
Accessing the Revision Levels on the GENS System, 3.7-3
GENS System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.8-1
GENS System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.8-2
Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System without
SlideMaker, 3.10-1
Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System with
SlideMaker, 3.10-2
Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System, 3.10-2
Location of Fans on the LH 750 System, 3.10-3
Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the LH 750 System, 3.10-4
Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the LH 750 System, 3.10-5
Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons, 3.11-1
Main Components Layout for the LH 750 System, 3.11-4
Removing the Left and Right Analytical Station Columns, 3.11-5
Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
3.12-1
3.12-2
3.12-3
3.12-4
3.12-5
3.12-6
3.12-7
3.13-1
3.13-2
3.13-3
3.14-1
3.14-2
3.14-3
3.14-4
3.14-5
3.14-6
3.14-7
3.15-1
3.16-1
3.16-2
3.16-3
3.17-1
3.17-2
4.2-1
4.3-1
4.3-2
4.3-3
4.3-4
4.3-5
4.3-6
4.3-7
4.3-8
4.3-9
4.3-10
4.3-11
4.3-12
4.3-13
4.3-14
4.4-1
4.6-1
4.6-2
4.6-3
4.7-1
PN 4277219B

Connecting the Main Power Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-2
Connecting the IBUS Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-3
Routing the Analyzer to Preamp Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-4
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5
Routing the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane on
the LH 750 System, 3.12-6
Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the LH 750 System, 3.13-1
Reagent on the LH 750 System, 3.13-2
Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the LH 750
System, 3.13-3
Removing LH 750 System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.14-1
Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the LH 750 System, 3.14-1
Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the LH 750 System, 3.14-2
Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the LH 750 System, 3.14-3
LH 750 System, 3.14-3
Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the LH 750
System, 3.14-4
Setting Up the LH 750 System Analyzer, 3.14-4
Connecting the Workstation to the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.15-1
Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the LH 750 System, 3.16-1
Power On Checks on the LH 750 System, 3.16-2
Accessing the Revision Levels on the LH 750 System, 3.16-3
LH 750 System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.17-1
LH 750 System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.17-2
Accessing the Analyzer SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1
Accessing the Analyzer SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1
Electronic Test Displays, 4.3-3
Count Test Displays, 4.3-4
Diff Analog Pulses Test Display, 4.3-4
VCS LATRON Control Display, 4.3-4
Volume Display, 4.3-5
Conductivity Display, 4.3-5
Light Scatter Display, 4.3-5
Phase Adjust Display, 4.3-6
Light Scatter Drift Displays, 4.3-6
F55 Displays, 4.3-6
CBC + Diff Displays, 4.3-7
CBC Only Displays, 4.3-7
Diff Only Displays, 4.3-7
Diff Analog Pulses Test Display on the GENS System VCS Calibration
Screen, 4.4-1
Removing an Analyzer Circuit Card, 4.6-1
Removing the BD ADJ Card, 4.6-2
Removing the Scope Module, 4.6-2
Removing the Bar-Code Decoder Card, 4.7-1
xxxv
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.7-2
4.9-1
4.9-2
4.12-1
4.12-2
4.12-3
4.13-1
4.13-2
4.14-1
4.15-1
4.15-2
4.16-1
4.16-2
4.17-1
4.18-1
4.19-1
4.20-1
4.20-2
4.21-1
4.22-1
4.22-2
4.22-3
4.22-4
4.22-5
4.23-1
4.23-2
4.23-3
4.23-4
4.23-5
4.23-6
4.24-1
4.24-2
4.24-3
4.24-4
4.24-5
4.24-6
4.24-7
4.25-1
4.25-2
4.25-3
4.25-4
4.25-5
xxxvi
Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card

Cover, 4.7-3
Latex Voltage Window, 4.9-2
Voltage Matching Window, 4.9-3
Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-2
Removing the Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-3
Removing an Analyzer Fan, 4.12-4
Removing the Power Supply Cover, 4.13-1
Removing the Power Supply Left Panel, 4.13-2
Replacing the Compressor, 4.14-1
Removing the Dump Valve, Old Style Power Supply, 4.15-1
Removing the Dump Valve, New Style Power Supply, 4.15-2
Accessing the Air Water Separator, 4.16-2
Disconnecting the Air Water Separator, 4.16-3
Removing the Compressor Motor Controller Card, 4.17-1
Removing the System Power Controller Card, 4.18-2
Removing the System Power Controller Display, 4.19-2
Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, New Style Power Supply, 4.20-1
Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, Old Style Power Supply, 4.20-2
Removing the Bulk Power Filter Card, 4.21-1
Setting Up the Instrument for the CBC Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.22-2
Reading a Meniscus, 4.22-3
Pump Adjustments, 4.22-3
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the CBC Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.22-4
Replacing the CBC Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.22-6
Setting Up the Instrument for the Diluent Dispenser Volume Check, 4.23-2
Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-3
Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-4
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diluent Delivery, 4.23-5
Replacing the Diluent Dispenser, 4.23-7
Setting Up the GENS System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
Reading the Meniscus, 4.24-3
Stain Pump Adjustments on the Retic Module, 4.24-4
Stain Pump Adjustments on the Random Access Module, 4.24-4
Setting Up the GENS System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-5
Setting Up the LH 750 System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-6
Setting Up the GENS System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Retic Clearing Solution
Delivery, 4.25-5
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.25-6
4.26-1
4.26-2
4.26-3
4.27-1
4.27-2
4.27-3
4.27-4
4.28-1
4.28-2
4.28-3
4.28-4
4.28-5
4.28-6
4.29-1
4.29-2
4.29-3
4.29-4
4.29-5
4.29-6
4.30-1
4.30-2
4.31-1
4.31-2
4.31-3
4.32-1
4.34-1
4.34-2
4.35-1
4.35-2
4.36-1
4.37-1
4.38-1
4.39-1
4.40-1
4.40-2
4.40-3
4.41-1
4.42-1
4.43-1
4.44-1
4.44-2
4.44-3
4.45-1
PN 4277219B
Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump, 4.25-6

Setting Up the Instrument, 4.26-2
Replacing the Cleaning Agent Pump, 4.26-3
Manual-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-2
Automatic-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-4
Setting Up for Troubleshooting Aspiration Pump, 4.27-5
Replacing the Aspiration Pump, 4.27-7
Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.28-2
Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Lytic Reagent (ELYSE), 4.28-3
Low Volume Pump Adjustments, 4.28-4
High Volume Pump Adjustments, 4.28-6
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.28-7
Replacing the Diff Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.28-9
Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Preservative Volume Check, 4.29-2
Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Preservative (SLYSE), 4.29-3
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Preservative
Delivery, 4.29-7
Replacing the Diff Preservative Pump, 4.29-9
Reagent Reservoir Components, Old Style, 4.30-1
Reagent Reservoir Components, New Style, 4.30-2
WBC Bath Tubing Disconnected for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing
Hookup, 4.31-2
Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the GENS
System, 4.31-2
Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the LH 750
System, 4.31-3
Replacing the Hgb Lamp, 4.32-1
Brightness Potentiometer Location on the GENS System Scope Module, 4.34-1
Contrast Potentiometer Location on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
Disconnecting Pneumatic Tubing from the Belt Advance Cylinder, 4.35-1
Tube Detector Assembly Allen Screw, 4.35-2
Belt Drive Assembly, Front View, Upside Down, 4.36-1
Removing the Under Left Stack Switch, 4.37-1
Removing the Under Right Stack Switch, 4.38-1
Removing the Lift Up Switch, 4.39-1
Removing the Lift Up Switch, 4.40-1
Removing the Lift Cylinder from the Cassette Transport Assembly
Channel, 4.40-2
Lift Up Switch Activator Setscrew, 4.40-4
Removing the Top Left or Top Right Safety Switch, 4.41-1
Adjusting the Flippers, 4.42-1
Left Pivot Pin and Retaining Setscrew, 4.43-1
Bed Position Sensor Locations, 4.44-1
Bed Position Flag/Sensor Adjustment Screws, 4.44-2
Bed Rock Cylinder Location, 4.44-3
Bed Rock Cylinder Location, 4.45-1
xxxvii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate, 4.45-2

4.46-1 Tube Detector Stop Position Adjustment, 4.46-2
4.47-1 Tube Detector Height Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.49-1 Bar-Code Test Screen with Typical Data, 4.49-1
4.51-1 Bar-Code Scanner Home Position Alignment, 4.51-2
4.51-2 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment with Stripper Plate, 4.51-3
4.51-3 Bar-Code Scanner Housing and Mounting Block, 4.51-4
4.51-4 Tubing to Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder, Clamped, 4.51-4
4.51-5 BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block Installed, 4.51-6
4.51-6 Bar-Code Scanner Adjustment Point Locations, 4.51-6
4.51-7 Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
4.51-9 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment Components, 4.51-10
4.51-10Bar-Code Scanner and Mounting Block, 4.51-10
4.52-1 Bar-Code Scanner Card Pins and Test Points, 4.52-2
4.53-1 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Guide Rod Magnet, 4.53-1
4.53-2 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Mounting Bracket, 4.53-2
4.54-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Jumper and Pin Locations, 4.54-2
4.54-2 Comparing Cassette and Tube Label Waveforms, 4.54-5
4.55-1 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
4.55-2 Moving the Hand-Detector Mounting Bracket, 4.55-5
4.55-3 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the
4.57-1 Removing the Needle Cap-Piercer Module, 4.57-1
4.58-2 Captive Screws Securing Probe-Wipe Module to BSV Module, 4.58-2
4.58-3 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Stationary Backwash
Cup, 4.58-3
4.58-4 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-4
4.58-5 Alignment of the Cleaning Truck Bracket in a Module with Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-5
4.59-1 Replacing the Hand-Detector Assembly, 4.59-1
4.60-1 Accessing the BSV Insulator, Housing and Spring, 4.60-2
4.60-2 Installing the BSV Components, 4.60-2
4.60-3 Probe Position Sensor Orientation, 4.60-4
4.62-1 Removing the Retic Motor from the Retic Module, 4.62-1
4.62-2 Removing the Retic Motor from the Random Access Module, 4.62-3
4.63-1 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Retic Module, 4.63-1
4.63-2 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Random Access
Module, 4.63-2
4.64-1 Peltier Module, Rear and Front View, 4.64-1
4.65-1 Stain Heater Connector, 4.65-1
4.66-1 Diff Preservative Pump Low Volume Adjustments, 4.66-2
4.66-2 Diff Preservative Pump High Volume Adjustments, 4.66-3
4.67-2 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Retic Module, 4.67-2
xxxviii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.67-3
4.68-1
4.69-1
4.69-2
4.71-1
4.74-1
Replacing the Diff Heater on a Random Access Module, 4.67-2

Replacing the Diff Mixing Chamber, 4.68-1
Releasing the Ground Wire for the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-1
Removing the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-2
VCS Optimization Procedure Flow, 4.71-2
Backplane, 4.74-2
4.74-2 RF Detector Preamp Card Test Points and Adjustments, 4.74-3
4.75-1 Acceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-2 Unacceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-3 Acceptable Dynamic DC Noise, 4.75-2
4.75-4 Acceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-5 Unacceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-6 Acceptable Dynamic RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-7 RF 60 Hz, 4.75-5
4.75-8 RF 60 Hz with Noise Spikes, 4.75-5
4.75-9 Normal RF Random Baseline, 4.75-5
4.75-10RF Output with Bubble Trapped in Sheath 2, 4.75-6
4.75-11Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-12Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-13Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise 22 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-14Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise >100 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-15LATRON Control Sample with a Good RF Tube and Box, 4.75-7
4.75-16LATRON Control Sample with Bad RF Tube and Box, 4.75-8
4.75-17RF Output Running LATRON Control (LEAK at Flow Cell Fitting), 4.75-8
4.75-18LATRON Control Run with DC Gain Drop, 4.75-8
4.75-19Acceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-20Unacceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-21Acceptable Dynamic LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.76-1 Laser and Flow Cell Alignment Workflow, 4.76-2
4.76-2 Flow-Cell Z-Axis Alignment, 4.76-3
4.76-3 Scatter Sensor Laser Diffraction, 4.76-4
4.76-4 Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Adjustment, 4.76-5
4.76-5 Laser Reflected Light Beam with Special Shield Installed, 4.76-6
4.76-6 Laser Diffraction Pattern on Paper, 4.76-7
4.79-1 Wetting Applicator with Alcohol, 4.79-2
4.79-2 Wiping Front of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4.79-3 Wiping Rear of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4.80-1 Removing the Lens Block, 4.80-1
4.82-1 Removing an Analyzer Door Gas Spring, 4.82-1
4.83-2 Captive Screws Securing Random Access Module, 4.83-2
TABLES
2.2-1
2.3-1
2.4-1
2.6-1
2.7-1
PN 4277219B
Power Supply (PS) Components, 2.2-1

Analyzer (ANA) Components, 2.3-1
Diluter (DIL) Components, 2.4-1
+5.2 Control Voltage Distribution, 2.6-4
APS1 Card Power Status LED Indications, 2.7-6
xxxix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.7-2
2.10-1
2.17-1
2.17-2
2.17-3
2.17-4
2.17-5
2.17-6
2.20-1
2.22-1
2.25-1
3.6-1
3.14-1
4.2-1
4.2-2
4.2-3
4.2-4
4.2-5
4.2-6
4.2-7
4.2-8
4.3-1
4.6-1
4.7-1
4.30-1
4.31-1
4.54-1
4.54-2
4.71-1
4.75-1
4.81-1
xl

System Power Controller Display Status LEDs, 2.10-4
Aspiration Pump Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions, 2.17-1
Summary of the BSV Positions, 2.17-5
BSV Ports, 2.17-6
Diff and Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-10
Stained Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-11
Flow Cell Ports, 2.20-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps Pneumatic Signals and Piston
Positions, 2.22-8
Pinch Valves with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips on the GENS System, 3.6-6
Pinch Valves on the LH 750 System with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips, 3.14-2
Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options, 4.2-2
Analyzer ELECTRONIC TESTS MENU Options, 4.2-4
Analyzer DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU Options, 4.2-4
Analyzer SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Options, 4.2-5
Analyzer DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
Analyzer MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
Analyzer DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-6
Analyzer DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU Options, 4.2-6
Analyzer Scope Modes, 4.3-3
Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions, 4.6-4
Diluter Cards Replacement Instructions, 4.7-4
Reagent Priming Functions and LEVEL Messages, 4.30-3
Conditions Affecting Lytic Reagent/Diluent Delivery Timing, 4.31-4
Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label, 4.54-3
Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label, 4.54-4
Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.71-3
RF Troubleshooting Table, 4.75-4
Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches, 4.81-1
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
1
INTRODUCTION, 1.1-1
1.1
MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

Scope, 1.1-1
Intended Audience, 1.1-1
Organization, 1.1-2
Numbering Format, 1.1-3
Special Headings, 1.1-3
Warning, 1.1-3
Caution, 1.1-3
Important, 1.1-3
Attention, 1.1-4
Note, 1.1-4
Conventions, 1.1-4
1.2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

Electronic, 1.2-1
Biological, 1.2-1
Laser, 1.2-2
Laser Beam Hazards, 1.2-2
Radiation Hazards, 1.2-2
Troubleshooting, 1.2-6
ILLUSTRATIONS
1.2-1
1.2-2
1.2-3
1.2-4
1.2-5
PN 4277219B
Laser Warning and Certification Labels, Laser with Protective Housing, 1.2-3
Laser Warning and Certification Labels on the Laser Beam Cover, 1.2-4
Laser Warning Labels on the Handheld Scanner, 1.2-4
Laser Warning Labels on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing On, 1.2-5
Laser Warning Label on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing Cut Away, 1.2-5
1-i
CONTENTS
1-ii
PN 4277219B
1INTRODUCTION 1
1.1
MANUAL DESCRIPTION
Scope
This manual provides the reference information and procedures needed for repairing and
maintaining the Analytical Station (Power Supply, Diluter and Analyzer) of the COULTER
GENS System, the GENS Cell, the LH 750 System, and the LH 750 Cell. It is available
both online and in hard copy. The online manual is released on the Service Resource Kit
CD-ROM, PN 6417471.
This manual does not cover information and procedures for the Analytical Station already
covered in the instruments Online Help Systems or in the following customer documents:
COULTER GENS System
COULTER LH 750 System
Getting Started, PN 4237304
Getting Started, PN 4277302
Reference, PN 4237221
Reference, PN 4277248
Operators Guide, PN 4237222
Operators Guide, PN 4277249
Special Procedures and

Troubleshooting, PN 4237223
Special Procedures and

Troubleshooting, PN 4277250
Master Index, PN 4237224
Master Index, PN 4277301
Host Transmission Specification,

PN 4237306
Host Transmission Specification,

PN 4277303
AccuFlex Detailed Principles of Operation, PN 4237403
To service the Workstation, refer to the COULTER GENS Workstation Configuration,

PN 9023572, or the COULTER LH 700 Series Workstation Configuration, PN 9023736. Both
documents are included on the Service Resource Kit CD-ROM.
To service the COULTER GENS SM SlideMaker or the COULTER LH SlideMaker, refer to
the Slide Making Modules Service Manual, PN 4276985.
To service the COULTER GENS ST SlideStainer or the COULTER LH SlideStainer, refer to
the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual, PN 4237601.
Any service memo that affects the information in this manual will include either minor
revision change pages or a Notice of Information Update form for this manual. A Notice of
Information Update form will summarize the changes and will list the specific headings,
figures, and tables affected.
Intended Audience
To use this manual effectively, you need the following:
PN 4277219B
An operators knowledge of the GENS System and the LH 750 System
The GENS System Basic Service Certification
1.1-1
INTRODUCTION
A thorough understanding of t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Basic electronic and pneumatic principles and devices

Hematology terms and concepts
The Coulter Principle
VCS technology
COULTER Histogram Differential and Interpretive Reporting
Reagent systems
Quality control
Troubleshooting techniques.
The ability to t
t
t
t
Read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology

Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology
Use a digital multimeter and an oscilloscope
Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology.
Organization
The information in this manual is organized into10 chapters. In the printed manual, the
chapters are separated into two volumes. Volume I contains Chapters 1 through 4; Volume II
contains Chapters 5 through 10. To make it easier to access the information:
r
In the online manual, each page or screen has t
A Contents button linked to a master table of contents.
An Illustrations button linked to a master list of illustrations.
A Tables button linked to a master list of tables.
An Index button linked to an alphabetic index.
In the printed manual, there is a volume-specific table of contents at the beginning of

each volume, a chapter-specific table of contents at the beginning of each chapter, and an
alphabetic index for the entire manual at the end of each volume.
CHAPTER 1, INTRODUCTION, includes a brief description of this manual, a list of

supporting documents, and essential safety information.
CHAPTER 2, INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, includes the function and location of each
major component and an explanation of the instruments operation by system.
CHAPTER 3, INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to install the
Analytical Station
CHAPTER 4, SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to
service and repair the Analytical Station. Each procedure includes a purpose, a list of needed
tools and supplies, instructions and a verification procedure.
CHAPTER 5, MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to maintain
the Analytical Station and to verify the system is operating correctly.
CHAPTER 6, SCHEMATICS is provided for the insertion of instrument schematics.
1.1-2
PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 7, TROUBLESHOOTING, contains problem descriptions, including a complete

list of error messages, with troubleshooting actions and tips. Use the information in this
chapter in conjunction with the procedures in Chapter 4 to locate and correct instrument
problems.
CHAPTER 8, PARTS LISTS, includes a master list of the field replaceable components (FRC)
and field replaceable units (FRU) for the Analytical Station; illustrations of these components;
and illustrations of the alignment tools designed for the instrument, with specifications.
CHAPTER 9, APPENDICES, is provided for the addition of reference material and includes
Appendix A, QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION. Appendix A contains instrument
specifications and tolerances, jumper and switch settings, test point and connector locations,
function tables and software menu trees.
CHAPTER 10 contains a list of ABBREVIATIONS used in this manual and a GLOSSARY of
terms.
Numbering Format
Each chapter of this manual is further divided into topics that are numbered sequentially,
beginning at one. The numbering format for the topic heading, which is called the primary
heading, is chapter number, decimal point, topic number. For example, the primary heading
number for the fifth topic covered in Chapter 2 is 2.5.
The page, figure and table numbers are tied directly to the primary heading number. For
example, Heading 2.5 begins on page 2.5-1, the first figure under Heading 2.5 is Figure 2.5-1
and the first table under Heading 2.5 is Table 2.5-1.
Note: Primary headings always begin on the top of a right-hand page.
Special Headings
Throughout this manual WARNING, CAUTION, IMPORTANT, ATTENTION and Note
headings are used to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important or helpful
information.
Warning
A WARNING indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can cause serious personal
injury. The word WARNING is in bold-faced text in the printed manual and is red in the
online manual.
Caution
A CAUTION indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can cause damage to
equipment. The word CAUTION is in bold-faced text in the printed manual and is red in the
online manual.
Important
An IMPORTANT indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored can result in erroneous
test results. The word IMPORTANT is in bold-faced text in the printed manual and is red in
the online manual.
PN 4277219B
1.1-3
INTRODUCTION
Attention
An ATTENTION contains information that is critical for the successful completion of a
procedure and/or operation of the instrument. The word ATTENTION is in bold-faced text in
the printed manual and is red in the online manual.
Note
A Note contains information that is important to remember or helpful in performing a
procedure.
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions to make the material clearer and more concise.
An example is given below each explanation.
1.
Messages that appear on any of the three screens - Analyzer, Diluter or Workstation - are
in italics.
At the Analyzer, verify the SYSTEM STATUS is READY.
2.
Keys on the Diluter keypad are in capital letters and are boldfaced.
At the Diluter keypad, press START/CONT.
3.
Keys on the Workstation are boxed.

Press ++ to log on.
4.
Menu titles and selections on the Analyzer screen are in capital letters.
At the Analyzer, from the MAIN MENU select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
5.
Selections on the Workstation screen that are icons are represented by that icon in text.
At the Workstation, select

6.
tt
to display the CBC Calibration window.
Selections on the Workstation screen that are not icons are boldfaced.
At the Workstation Command Center, select PRIME from the Process Control box.
7.
Information that is to be typed is in Courier font.

Type the password Service.
8.
Whenever keys are to be pressed in succession, the keys are printed with a space but no
punctuation between the keys.
At the Diluter keypad, press F 1 1 ENTER.
9.
Whenever keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are printed with a plus sign
between the keys.
Press + to display the Workstation Task List.
10. The software path to a specific function or screen on the Analyzer or Workstation
appears with the double solid-right triangle ( tt ) symbol between succeeding screen
options.
From the SERVICE MENU, select DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES tt MORE
DIAGNOSTICS tt DIAGNOSTICS DUMP tt MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX.
1.1-4
PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
11. When the word "select" is used in conjunction with one of the screens and its associated
keys, you are to press the key or keys necessary to display the desired screen or to initiate
the desired function.
At the Analyzer, from the SERVICE MENU select SYSTEM RUN to access the SYSTEM
RUN screen. (In this example, you need to press only one key, the key next to the
SYSTEM RUN prompt, to accomplish the desired task.)
At the Diluter keypad, select F27 to dispense CBC lytic reagent. (In this example, you
need to press four keys, the F, 2, 7, and ENTER keys, to accomplish the desired task.)
12. The meaning of the words "double-click," which are used together as a verb, varies
depending on the pointing device used.
r
For a mouse it means, press the left mouse button twice.
For a light pen it means, press the light pen against the screen twice.
For a touch screen it means, touch the screen with your finger twice.
13. The meaning of the words "right-click," which are used together as a verb, varies
depending on the pointing device used.
r
For a mouse it means, press the right mouse button.
For a light pen with a button it means, press the button.
14. In the electronic version of the manual:

a.
Links to additional information are in blue and are underlined.

Adjust the RF Detector Preamp card so the RMS noise is at the lowest setting. See
C1/C20 Adjustment under Heading 4.74.
To access the linked information, select the blue, underlined text.
b.
The material is divided into many small sections (electronic files).

r
Every primary heading is a separate file and whenever possible the amount of
material contained within one primary heading is limited to four to ten pages.
If a primary heading must be large, such as the illustrated parts list, invisible
breaks are added to the electronic file to further divide it.
To move from one section (electronic file) to the next in an HTML version of the
manual, use the right and left arrows on the navigation bars displayed at the top and
bottom of each section.
PN 4277219B
1.1-5
INTRODUCTION
1.1-6
PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section covers safety precautions that you must take whenever you are working on the
Analytical Station. In addition, always follow any safety precautions included in that
procedure.
Electronic
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Rings or jewelry can contact exposed electronic components, causing
personal injury from electric shock. Remove rings and other metallic jewelry before performing
maintenance or service on the electronic components of the instrument.
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the Analytical Station
is attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down the Analytical Station
completely as instructed under Heading 4.1 before removing covers to access electronic components.
CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. If you remove or replace a circuit card or other
electronic component while the power is ON, damage to the component can occur. To prevent damage to
circuit cards and other electronic components, always turn OFF the power before removing or replacing the
component.
CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives,
add-in circuit cards and other electronic components. Perform any procedures where there is a possibility
of ESD damage at an ESD workstation or wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to a metallic part of the
chassis connected to an earth ground.
Biological
WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself before servicing
the Analytical Station with the door open, you can be injured or contaminated. To prevent possible injury or
contamination, always wear gloves, a lab coat and eye protection when servicing the instrument with the
doors open.
WARNING Risk of contamination. Biohazardous contamination can occur from contact with the waste
container and its associated tubing if not handled with care. Avoid skin contact. Clean up spills immediately.
Dispose of the contents of the waste container in accordance with the local regulations and acceptable
laboratory procedures.
Use care when working with pathogenic materials. Means must be available to decontaminate
the instrument, provide ventilation and to dispose of waste liquid. Refer to the following
publications for further guidance on decontamination.
PN 4277219B
Biohazards Safety Guide, 1974, National Institute of Health
Classifications of Etiological Agents on the Basis of Hazards, 3d ed., June 1974, Center
for Disease Control, U.S. Public Health Service.
1.2-1
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Laser
Laser Beam Hazards
The laser, located in the Triple Transducer module, is a unique light source that shows
characteristics different from conventional light sources. The safe use of the laser depends
upon familiarity with the instrument and with the properties of coherent, intense beams of
light.
WARNING Risk of personal injury. The laser beam can cause eye damage if viewed either directly or
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metallic surface). Avoid direct exposure to the
beam. Do not view it directly or with optical instruments except from special service tools as directed in this
manual.
Eye and skin damage, as well as instrument damage, can be caused by the laser beam. The
laser has enough power to ignite substances placed in the beam path, even at a distance.
Indirect contact with the laser beam from reflective surfaces (such as jewelry) is called
specular reflection and might also cause damage.
Use the following precautions:
r
Never look directly into the laser light source or at scattered laser light from any
reflective surface. Never look down into the beam's source.
As a precaution against accidental exposure to the output beam or its reflection, wear
proper laser safety glasses when performing service or maintenance procedures on the
system.
Do not use lasers in the presence of flammable material or explosives; these include
volatile substances such as alcohol, solvents and ether.
Avoid direct exposure and indirect reflection of the laser beam to your skin.
Assure that any spectators are not potentially exposed to a hazardous condition.
Do not leave the laser unattended if there is a chance that an unauthorized person may
try to use it.
Radiation Hazards
WARNING Risk of personal injury from radiation exposure. Performing procedures other than those
specified in this manual can result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not use any controls, make any
adjustments, or perform any procedures other than those specified in this manual.
In its design and manufacture of the GENS System, the GENS Cell, the LH 750 System, and
the LH 750 Cell, Coulter Corporation has complied with the requirements governing the use
and application of a laser as stipulated in regulatory documents issued by the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services, and by the National Center for Devices and
Radiological Health (CDRH). In compliance with these regulatory documents, every measure
has been taken to ensure the health and safety of users, laboratory personnel and service
personnel from the possible dangers of laser use. The laser is classified as Class I, when it is in
the system with the protective housing in place.
Note: As installed in the Triple Transducer Module (TTM) safety fixture, the laser presents no
radiation hazard to users and the instrument complies with 21 CFR 1040.
1.2-2
PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CDRH-approved labels are placed near or on those covers that when removed might expose
laser radiation.
r
See Figure 1.2-1 for the label and its location on the laser head.
See Figure 1.2-2 for the labels and their locations on the beam cover between the laser
head and the sampling compartment. Both figures show the certification labels.
See Figure 1.2-3 for the label and its location on the PSC handheld scanner.
See Figures 1.2-4 and 1.2-5 for the labels and their locations on the laser bar-code reader
mounted on the Diluter.
Note: As installed in the bar-code reader assembly, the laser presents no radiation hazard
to users and complies with 21 CFR 1040.
Figure 1.2-1 Laser Warning and Certification Labels, Laser with Protective Housing
Located on
back of unit
THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS
TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTION 1040. 10
AND 1040. 11.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Manufactured:
DATE
19
COULTER CORPORATION
Miami, Fla. 33196
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.
by:
TM
E N
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
7219001B
PN 4277219B
1.2-3
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Figure 1.2-2 Laser Warning and Certification Labels on the Laser Beam Cover
Laser on
lamp
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AND INTERLOCKDEFEATED.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE.
Electromagnetic
shield
LASER RADIATION
IS EMITTED FROM
THIS APERTURE
1096 Mellon Avenue

Manteca, CA 95337
MODEL
MANUFACTURED
SERIAL NO.
AVOID EXPOSURE
Flow
cell
THIS LASER DOES NOT

COMPLY WITH 21 CFR 1040.
USE ONLY AS A COMPONENT.
PATENT NOS
4352,185 4631,727
4750,182 4864,583
MADE
IN
USA
Laser
Laser interlock switch

(Behind Laser module)
Tamperproof
screws
7219002B
Figure 1.2-3 Laser Warning Labels on the Handheld Scanner
AVOID EXPOSURE-LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE

CAUTION-LASER LIGHT WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
PSC INC.
WEBSTER, NY 14580
NYS9412 4.5 - 14 Vdc
CAUTION
LASER LIGHT
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
670 nm LASER DIODE
1.0 mW MAX OUTPUT
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE;
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040
UL 1950
E125538
LISTED
4.5-14 Vdc
ACCESSORY 115-250 mA
IB62
PROCTECTED BY U.S. PATENTS
4,652,750 4,639,606
4,603,262 5,019,698
5,200,597 5,212,371 5,237,161
& OTHER U.S. & FOREIGN
PATENTS ISSUED & PENDING
ACCESSORY, ONLY FOR USE WITH UL LISTED PRODUCTS
NOT USER SERVICEABLE, OPENING CASE VOIDS WARRANTY
1.2-4
7221031A
PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Figure 1.2-4 Laser Warning Labels on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing On
LASER RADIATION
EMISSION INDICATOR (LED)
G EN
TM
CAUTION
Laser radiation when open

and interlock defeated.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
CAUTION
Laser radiation when open and
interlock defeated.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
LASER
ON
CAUTION
L ASER LIGHT -
Tamper-proof screws
6 70nm DIODE L ASER

1 .0 MILLI WATT MAXIMUM
CAUTION
LASER LIGHT -
DONOT STAREINTO BEAM
670nm DIODE LASER

0.5MILLIWATTMAXIMUM
PULSE DURATION 10s

CLASSIILASERPRUDUCT
0008412H
Figure 1.2-5 Laser Warning Label on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing Cut Away
C A U T I O N
LASER RADIATION
THIS LASER DOES NOT COMPLY
WITH 21 CFR 1040
OPTICAL GLASS LENSES
PN 4277219B
1.2-5
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Troubleshooting
Bring the following warning to the customer's attention before advising that customer to
perform any service, maintenance or troubleshooting procedures on the instrument.
WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself while performing
service, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, residual fluids in the instrument can injure or
contaminate you. Coulter recommends barrier protection, such as appropriate safety glasses, lab coat, and
gloves, be worn throughout the performance of service, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures to
avoid contact with cleaners and residual fluids in the instrument.
1.2-6
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
PN 4277219B
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1

2.1
INTRODUCTION TO THE GENS AND LH 750 SYSTEMS, 2.1-1

Summary, 2.1-1
Function, 2.1-1
CBC Parameters, 2.1-1
WBC Differential Parameters, 2.1-1
Reticulocyte Parameters, 2.1-1
Research Only Parameters, 2.1-2
Description, 2.1-2
Components, 2.1-2
Systems, 2.1-2
Diagnostic Products, 2.1-5
Physical Specifications, 2.1-5
Performance Specifications and Characteristics, 2.1-5
Leakage Current Specifications, 2.1-5
Operation, 2.1-6
Aspiration Modes, 2.1-6
Test Modes, 2.1-6
Operating Procedures, 2.1-6
2.2
POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.2-1

Summary, 2.2-1
2.3
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.3-1

Summary, 2.3-1
2.4
DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.4-1

Summary, 2.4-1
2.5
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND

DISTRIBUTION, 2.5-1
Summary, 2.5-1
Electronic Power Supply Overview, 2.5-1
Transient Voltage Suppressor, 2.5-1
Fuses, 2.5-2
Function, 2.5-2
Input, 2.5-2
Outputs, 2.5-2
Fans, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Filter Card, 2.5-2
Main Power Supply Cable, 2.5-3
Backplane Voltage Bus, 2.5-3
Local Power Supplies, 2.5-4
2-i
CONTENTS
2-ii
2.6
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP, 2.6-1

Summary, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Development, 2.6-1
IBUS, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Distribution and Function, 2.6-1
Power-Up Signals, 2.6-4
POWER ON Signal, 2.6-4
AMC Power-Up Sequence, 2.6-5
PNEU ON Signal, 2.6-6
Power-Off Signals, 2.6-6
2.7

ANALYZER, 2.7-1
Summary, 2.7-1
API Card, 2.7-1
Function, 2.7-1
Monitors, 2.7-2
Switches, 2.7-2
Input, 2.7-2
Outputs, 2.7-2
R/W/P SC/A Card, 2.7-3
Function, 2.7-3
Monitors, 2.7-4
Connectors, 2.7-4
Inputs, 2.7-4
Outputs, 2.7-4
APS1 Card, 2.7-4
Function, 2.7-4
Input, 2.7-5
Outputs, 2.7-5
Monitors, 2.7-6
LED, 2.7-6
Test Points, 2.7-6
APS2 Card, 2.7-6
Function, 2.7-6
Input, 2.7-7
Outputs, 2.7-7
Monitors, 2.7-8
LED, 2.7-8
Test Points, 2.7-8
2.8

DILUTER, 2.8-1
Summary, 2.8-1
Diff Power Supply Card, 2.8-1
Function, 2.8-1
Monitors, 2.8-2
Connectors, 2.8-2
Input, 2.8-2
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
Outputs, 2.8-2
Laser Interlock Switch, 2.8-2
Function, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Output, 2.8-3
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Outputs, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-4
Connectors, LEDs and Test Points, 2.8-4
2.9
PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM, 2.9-1

Summary, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Overview, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Development, 2.9-2
Pressure Development, 2.9-2
Vacuum Development, 2.9-3
Monitors, 2.9-3
Pneumatic Levels and Status, 2.9-3
Temperature Monitoring, 2.9-3
Pressure Distribution, 2.9-4
30 Psi, 2.9-4
5 Psi, 2.9-4
Vacuum Distribution, 2.9-4
High Vacuum, 2.9-5
Low Vacuum, 2.9-5
PVT Card, 2.9-5
Function, 2.9-5
Input, 2.9-6
Monitors, 2.9-6
Connectors, 2.9-6
2.10 POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL, 2.10-1

Summary, 2.10-1
System Power Controller Card, 2.10-1
Function, 2.10-1
Inputs, 2.10-2
Monitors, 2.10-2
Function, 2.10-3
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply, 2.10-4
Insufficient Ac Input, 2.10-4
Power Supply Overheating, 2.10-5
Pressing POWER OFF, 2.10-5
PN 4277219B
2-iii
CONTENTS
2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL, 2.11-1

Summary, 2.11-1
System Control Overview, 2.11-1
AMC, 2.11-2
Function, 2.11-2
RESET Switch, 2.11-2
DIP Switches and Jumpers, 2.11-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, 2.11-4
Function, 2.11-4
Switches, 2.11-5
RS/Opto Intfc Card, 2.11-5
Function, 2.11-5
Connectors, 2.11-5
Function, 2.11-6
Inputs, 2.11-7
2.12 DILUTER CONTROL, 2.12-1
Summary, 2.12-1
DILUTER PROCESSOR vs DILUTER CPU Cards - the Old and New Diluter
Interconnects, 2.12-2
DILUTER PROCESSOR CARD, 2.12-2
Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-2
DILUTER CPU CARD, 2.12-2
Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-3
Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules, 2.12-3
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-3
Connectors, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-4
Monitoring, 2.12-5
Function, 2.12-6
Inputs, 2.12-7
Monitoring, 2.12-7
BD ADJ Card, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Connectors, Test Points, and Adjustments, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Inputs, 2.12-9
Connectors and LED, 2.12-9
2-iv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS

Function, 2.12-9
Inputs, 2.12-11
Diluter/Numeric Keypad, 2.12-11
Function, 2.12-11
Contrast Adjustment, 2.12-11
2.13 REAGENT HANDLING, 2.13-1
Summary, 2.13-1
Reagent Input, 2.13-1
Reagent Reservoir Module, 2.13-2
Function, 2.13-2
Reservoir Interface Card, 2.13-5
Function, 2.13-5
Inputs, 2.13-5
Connectors, 2.13-5
Reagent Distribution, 2.13-6
Diluent/Cleaning Agent Chamber, 2.13-7
Function, 2.13-7
Backwash Tank, 2.13-8
Function, 2.13-8
Testing, 2.13-8
Backwash Manifold, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Sheath Tank, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Testing, 2.13-10
Sweep-Flow Reservoir, 2.13-10
Function, 2.13-10
Testing, 2.13-10
System-Flush Cycle, 2.13-11
Waste Collection and Monitoring, 2.13-11
Waste Collection, 2.13-11
Waste Level Monitoring, 2.13-11
2.14 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION, 2.14-1
Summary, 2.14-1
Specimen Transport System Overview, 2.14-1
Cassette Transport Assembly (CTA), 2.14-2
Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Function, 2.14-3
LED Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Laser Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-4
Types of Bar Codes Used, 2.14-5
Bar-Code Label Specifications, 2.14-5
PN 4277219B
2-v
CONTENTS
Sensor Distribution Card, 2.14-5

Function, 2.14-5
Input, 2.14-6
2.15 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT, 2.15-1
Summary, 2.15-1
Moving a Cassette from the Loading Bay to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-1
Initiating the Automatic-Mode Cycle, 2.15-1
Retrieving the Cassette from the Loading Bay, 2.15-1
Placing the Cassette on the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Moving the Cassette Across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Detecting a Tube at the Piercing Station, 2.15-4
Positioning the Tube for Sample Acquisition, 2.15-4
Piercing the Cap of the Specimen Tube, 2.15-5
Identifying the Specimen, 2.15-5
Pushing the Tube Back into the Cassette, 2.15-6
Moving a Cassette to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
Removing a Cassette from the Rocker Bed, 2.15-7
2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, 2.16-1
Summary, 2.16-1
Automatic-Mode, 2.16-1
Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.17 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION, 2.17-1
Summary, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump, 2.17-1
Function, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
Aspiration Pump - Manual-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Aspiration Pump - Automatic-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV), 2.17-5
Function, 2.17-5
BSV Ports, 2.17-6
Shear Valves, 2.17-7
Hardware Description, 2.17-7
Diff and Retic Segment Valves, 2.17-7
Stained Retic Segment Valve, 2.17-9
Shear Valve Ports, 2.17-10
Needle Assembly, 2.17-11
2-vi
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13

Function, 2.17-13
Operation, 2.17-14
Hand Detector, 2.17-16
Probe-Wipe Module, 2.17-17
Function, 2.17-17
Monitoring, 2.17-18
2.18 CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA, 2.18-1
Summary, 2.18-1
Making the Sample Dilutions, 2.18-2
Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
Aperture Vacuum, 2.18-4
Aperture Current, 2.18-4
Timing the Data Collection in the GENS System, 2.18-5
WBC and RBC Data, 2.18-5
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good
pulses can vary the histogram data collection time., 2.18-6
Timing the Data Collection in the LH 750 System, 2.18-6
WBC and RBC Count Data, 2.18-6
WBC, RBC, and Plt Histograms, 2.18-6
Determining the Hgb, 2.18-8
2.19 CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA, 2.19-1
Summary, 2.19-1
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GENS System), 2.19-1
Function, 2.19-1
CAL Pulses, 2.19-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-2
Function, 2.19-2
CAL Pulses, 2.19-3
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card (GENS System), 2.19-3
Function, 2.19-3
Input, 2.19-5
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-5
Function, 2.19-5
Input, 2.19-6
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card, 2.19-6
Function, 2.19-6
Input, 2.19-7
PN 4277219B
2-vii
CONTENTS
Determining the CBC Parameters, 2.19-7

Determining the CBC Results on the GENS System, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Results on the LH 750 System, 2.19-7
2.20 VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA, 2.20-1
Summary, 2.20-1
VCS Measurements, 2.20-1
V - Volume (DC), 2.20-1
C - Conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
S - Light Scatter (LS), 2.20-1
Opacity (OP), 2.20-1
Rotated Light Scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
Linear Light Scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
DC and RF Currents, 2.20-2
Laser Light Source, 2.20-2
Flow-Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-3
Data Collection, 2.20-5
2.21 VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA, 2.21-1
Summary, 2.21-1
Electronic Overview, 2.21-1
RF Detector Preamp Card, 2.21-2
Function, 2.21-2
Inputs, 2.21-2
Outputs, 2.21-2
Monitoring, 2.21-4
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor, 2.21-4
Function, 2.21-4
ANALOG 5 Card, 2.21-6
Function, 2.21-6
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, 2.21-7
Function, 2.21-7
Inputs, 2.21-8
Switch, 2.21-8
2.22 VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS, 2.22-1
Summary, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the GENS System, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
Sensing the Diff Sample, 2.22-4
Diff Analysis Reagent System, 2.22-4
Ambient Temperature Thermistors, 2.22-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps, 2.22-6
Reagent Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
Dispensing the High Volume, 2.22-7
Dispensing the Low Volume, 2.22-8
2-viii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
Determining the Diff Parameters, 2.22-10

2.23 VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS, 2.23-1
Summary, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the GENS System, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
Sensing the Retic Sample, 2.23-5
Retic Analysis Reagent System, 2.23-5
Regulating the Temperature in the Stain Chamber, 2.23-6
Regulating the Temperature in the Peltier Module, 2.23-6
Determining the Retic Parameters, 2.23-6
2.24 SAMPLE REPORTING, 2.24-1
Summary, 2.24-1
Sample Data Set, 2.24-2
CBC Analysis on the GENS System, 2.24-2
MCV, 2.24-3
RDW, 2.24-3
Hgb, 2.24-4
RBC Indices, 2.24-4
CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.24-5
MCV, 2.24-5
RDW, 2.24-6
Hgb, 2.24-7
RBC Indices, 2.24-7
Diff Analysis, 2.24-7
Nucleated RBC Counts (NRBC), 2.24-9
Retic Analysis, 2.24-9
Sample Flags, Codes and Messages, 2.24-10
2.25 CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW, 2.25-1
Why Calibrate?, 2.25-1
Calibration Tests, 2.25-1
Steps to Calibration, 2.25-1
Preliminary, 2.25-1
Latex Voltage Calibration, 2.25-2
Flow Rate Calibration, 2.25-5
Manual Mode-to-Automatic Mode Calibration, 2.25-7
ILLUSTRATIONS
2.1-1
2.1-2
2.1-3
2.1-4
PN 4277219B
GENS System Units, 2.1-3

GENS Cell Units, 2.1-3
LH 750 System Units, 2.1-4
LH 750 System Units with Optional LH SlideMaker and LH SlideStainer , 2.1-4
2-ix
CONTENTS
2.2-1
2.2-2
Power Supply Component Locations, Old Style Power Supply, 2.2-2

Power Supply Component Locations, New Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
2.3-1
2.3-2
2.3-3
2.3-4
2.3-5
GENS System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, 2.3-3

GENS System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-3
LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, Cover Down, 2.3-4
LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View without Cover, 2.3-4
LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-4
2.4-1
2.4-2
2.4-3
2.4-4
2.4-14
2.4-15
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-4
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panels, 2.4-4
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-5
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and
Compartment, 2.4-5
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment, 2.4-6
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-6
GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-7
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-8
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panel, 2.4-8
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-9
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Center Rear Panel, 2.4-9
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-11
LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-11
2.5-1
2.5-2
2.5-3
Electronic Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.5-1

Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the GENS System, 2.5-3
Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the LH 750 System, 2.5-4
2.6-1
2.6-2
2.6-5
2.6-6
2.6-7
Control Voltage Development and Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects), 2.6-2

Control Voltage Development and Distribution (New Diluter
+5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (Old Diluter
+5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (New Diluter
POWER ON Signal, System Power Controller Card, 2.6-4
AMC Power-Up Signals, 2.6-5
2.7-1
2.7-2
2.7-3
2.7-4
API Card Block Diagram, 2.7-1

R/W/P SC/A Card Block Diagram, 2.7-3
2.8-1
Diff Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-1
2.4-5
2.4-6
2.4-7
2.4-8
2.4-9
2.4-10
2.4-11
2.4-12
2.4-13
2.6-3
2.6-4
2-x
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2.8-2
2.8-3
Laser Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.8-3

Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-4
2.9-1
2.9-2
2.9-3
Pneumatic Supply Components, Old Style Power Supply, 2.9-1

Pneumatic Supply Components, New Style Power Supply, 2.9-2
Pneumatic On Signals on the System Power Controller Card, 2.9-4
2.10-1 System Power Controller Card and System Power Controller Display Block
Diagram, 2.10-1
2.10-2 System Power Controller Display, 2.10-3
2.11-1
2.11-2
2.11-3
2.11-4
2.11-5
System Control Overview Block Diagram, 2.11-1

RESET Signal Block Diagram, 2.11-3
Analyzer RESET Button, 2.11-3
COMM INTERFACE Card Communication Links, 2.11-4
RS/Opto Intfc Card Communication Links, 2.11-6
2.12-1
2.12-2
2.12-3
2.12-4
2.12-5
2.12-6
2.12-7
Diluter Control Overview, 2.12-1

Diluter 1 Card Power Supply Distribution, 2.12-4
Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit, 2.12-10
Stain Chamber Heater Circuit, 2.12-10
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit, 2.12-11
Diluter Keypad on the GENS System, 2.12-12
Numeric Keypad on the LH 750 System, 2.12-12
2.13-1
2.13-2
2.13-3
2.13-4
2.13-5
2.13-8
2.13-9
Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-1
Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-2
Reagent Reservoir Module, Old Style (GENS System), 2.13-3
Reagent Reservoir Module, New Style (GENS System), 2.13-4
Reagent Reservoir Module, Modified New Style (GENS System and LH 750
System), 2.13-4
Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-6
Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 2.13-7
Backwash Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-8
Sheath-Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-10
2.14-1
2.14-2
2.14-3
2.14-4
Specimen Transport Block Diagram, 2.14-1

Cassette Transport Assembly, 2.14-2
LED Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-3
Laser Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-4
2.15-1
2.15-2
2.15-3
2.15-4
2.15-5
2.15-6
2.15-7
2.15-8
Initiating the Automatic Cycle, 2.15-1

Bed Position Sensors, 2.15-2
Bed Locks, 2.15-2
From Loading Bay to Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Moving across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Detecting Specimen Tubes, 2.15-4
Positioning Tube for Sampling, 2.15-4
Piercing the Tube, 2.15-5
2.13-6
2.13-7
PN 4277219B
2-xi
CONTENTS
2.15-9 Scanning Bar-Code Labels, 2.15-5

2.15-10Pushing Tube into Cassette, 2.15-6
2.15-11Moving to Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
2.15-12Rocker Bed to Unloading Bay, 2.15-7
2.16-1 Aspiration Path in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-1
2.16-2 Aspiration through the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-3 Delivering CBC Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-4 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-3
2.16-5 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-3
2.16-6 Backwashing the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-7 Cross-Rinse in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-8 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-5
2.16-9 Aspiration Path in the Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.16-10Aspiration through the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-11Delivering CBC Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-12Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-7
2.16-13Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-7
2.16-14Backwashing the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-15Cross-Rinse in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-16Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-8
2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Components, 2.17-2
2.17-2 Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
2.17-3 Aspiration in Manual Mode, 2.17-3
2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode, 2.17-3
2.17-5 Adjusting the Low, Manual-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-6 Adjusting the High, Automatic-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-7 BSV Ports, 2.17-6
2.17-8 Aspirate Sample, 2.17-7
2.17-9 Deliver Sample, 2.17-8
2.17-10Backwash Sample Groove, 2.17-8
2.17-12Backwash Sample Loop, 2.17-8
2.17-13Aspirate Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-14Deliver Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-16Rinse Aspiration Pathway, 2.17-10
2.17-17Diff and Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-10
2.17-18Stained Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-11
2.17-19Needle Assembly Components, 2.17-12
2.17-20Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
2.17-21Bubble/Blood Detector Operation, 2.17-14
2.17-22Manual-Mode Aspiration Station Components, 2.17-17
2.18-1 CBC Analysis in the GENS System Block Diagram, 2.18-1
2.18-2 CBC Analysis in the LH 750 System Block Diagram, 2.18-2
Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
2-xii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
2.18-5 CBC Sample Processing Components on LH 750 System Analytical
Stations, 2.18-4
2.18-6 Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-5
2.18-7 Data Collection Timing on the GENS System, 2.18-5
2.18-8 Data Collection Timing LH 750 System, 2.18-7
2.18-9 Hgb Sensing Area, 2.18-8
2.18-10Hgb Signal Flow, 2.18-8
2.19-1
2.19-2
2.19-3
2.19-4
2.19-5
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP Card Block Diagram, 2.19-1

Six-Channel Preamp Card Block Diagram, 2.19-3
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-4
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.20-1
2.20-2
2.20-3
2.20-4

Light Scatter Path, 2.20-3
Hydrodynamically Focused Cells, 2.20-4
Flow Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-4
2.21-1
2.21-2
2.21-3
2.21-4
2.21-5
2.21-6
2.21-7
VCS Technology Block Diagram, 2.21-1

RF Detector Preamp Card (with Vacuum Tube) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
RF Detector Preamp Card (Solid State) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
LS Sensor Regions, 2.21-4
Light Scatter Preamp Module Block Diagram, 2.21-5
ANALOG 5 Card Block Diagram, 2.21-6
DIFF PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.21-7
2.22-1 Diff Sample Processing Components on the GENS System, 2.22-1

2.22-2 Diff Blood Sample and Reagent Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the GENS
System, 2.22-2
2.22-3 Diff Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
2.22-4 Diff Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.22-3
2.22-5 Diff Sample Analysis Flow, 2.22-4
2.22-6 Ambient Temperature Sensor Location, 2.22-5
2.22-7 Diff Lytic Reagent Pump and Diff Preservative Pump Components, 2.22-6
2.22-8 Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
2.22-9 Dispensing High Volume, 2.22-7
2.22-10Dispensing Low Volume, 2.22-8
2.22-11Adjusting the Low Volume, 2.22-9
2.22-12Adjusting the High Volume, 2.22-9
2.23-1 Retic Sample Processing Components on the GENS System, 2.23-1
2.23-2 Retic Blood Sample and Stain Delivery to Stain Chamber on the GENS
System, 2.23-2
2.23-3 Stained Sample and Clearing Solution Delivery to Retic Chamber on the GENS
System, 2.23-2
2.23-4 Retic Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
PN 4277219B
2-xiii
CONTENTS
2.23-5 Retic Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Stain Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-6 Stained Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Retic Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-7 Retic Sample Analysis Flow, 2.23-5
2.23-8 Stain Heater Block Diagram, 2.23-6
2.23-9 Peltier Module, Cross Section, 2.23-6
2.24-1 Sample Data Flow on the GENS System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-1
2.24-2 Sample Data Flow on the LH 750 System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-2
2.24-3 Diff Analysis Two-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-4 Diff Analysis Three-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-5 NRBC Signature Position, 2.24-9
2.24-6 NRBC Location on WBC Histogram, 2.24-9
2.24-7 Retic Analysis DataPlot, 2.24-10
2.25-1 Latex Voltage Test Window, 2.25-3
2.25-2 Voltage Matching Test Window, 2.25-4
2.25-3 Flow Rate Test Window, 2.25-7
TABLES
2.2-1
Power Supply (PS) Components, 2.2-1
2.3-1
Analyzer (ANA) Components, 2.3-1
2.4-1
Diluter (DIL) Components, 2.4-1
2.6-1
+5.2 Control Voltage Distribution, 2.6-4
2.7-1
2.7-2

2.10-1 System Power Controller Display Status LEDs, 2.10-4

2.17-1
2.17-2
2.17-3
2.17-4
2.17-5
2.17-6
Aspiration Pump Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions, 2.17-1

Summary of the BSV Positions, 2.17-5
BSV Ports, 2.17-6
Diff and Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-10
Stained Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-11
2.20-1 Flow Cell Ports, 2.20-5

2.22-1 Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps Pneumatic Signals and Piston
Positions, 2.22-8
2.25-1 When to Calibrate, 2.25-8
2-xiv
PN 4277219B
2INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION 2
2.1
INTRODUCTION TO THE GENS AND LH 750 SYSTEMS

Summary
This section briefly describes the function, the main components and systems, and the
operating modes of the GENS System (Figure 2.1-1), the GENS System with a GENS SM
SlideMaker and GENS ST SlideStainer - also referred to as a GENS Cell (Figure 2.1-2), the
LH 750 System (Figure 2.1-3), and the LH 750 System with an LH SlideMaker and
LH SlideStainer - also referred to as an LH 755 (Figure 2.1-4). This section also references the
appropriate customer documents and/or headings within this document for more details.
Function
The GENS System and the LH 750 System are quantitative, automated hematology
analyzers, leukocyte differential counters, and reticulocyte counters For In Vitro Diagnostic
Use in clinical laboratories. These instruments can perform a complete blood count (CBC),
WBC differential, and reticulocyte analysis on a whole-blood sample. The LH 750 System can
also perform a CBC on a prediluted sample.
The specific parameters analyzed are listed below. For a description of the methods used to
derive these parameters, refer to the Online Help System or to Chapter 3 of the Reference
manual. For details about the components used to perform the analysis, see the appropriate
headings in this chapter.
The GENS Systems and LH 750 Systems with a SlideMaker and SlideStainer also create
blood smears on clean microscopic slides using a segment of blood aspirated at the Analytical
Station, transport those slides to the SlideStainer, and stain them.
CBC Parameters
The CBC consists of: white blood cell count (WBC), red blood cell count (RBC), hemoglobin
(Hgb), mean corpuscular volume (MCV), hematocrit (Hct), mean corpuscular hemoglobin
(MCH), mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration (MCHC), red cell distribution width
(RDW), platelet count (Plt) and mean platelet volume (MPV). See Headings 2.18 and 2.19 for
details about the components used to perform the CBC analysis.
WBC Differential Parameters
The WBC differential consists of the percent and number of the following WBC populations:
lymphocytes (LY% and LY#), monocytes (MO% and MO#), neutrophils (NE% and NE#),
basophils (BA% and BA#) and eosinophils (EO% and EO#). See Headings 2.20, 2.21 and 2.22
for details about the components used to perform the WBC differential analysis.
The LH 750 System can also derive the percentage of nucleated RBCs from the WBC
differential and report the nucleated RBCs (NRBC% and NRBC#).
Reticulocyte Parameters
Reticulocyte analysis consists of the percent and number of reticulocytes (RET% and RET#),
the mean reticulocyte volume (MRV), and the immature reticulocyte fraction (IRF). See
Headings 2.20, 2.21 and 2.23 for details about the components used to perform the
reticulocyte analysis.
PN 4277219B
2.1-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
Research Only Parameters

The following additional platelet and reticulocyte parameters are considered For Research
Use Only. Not for use in diagnostic procedures and require the authorization of a research
usage agreement before they are enabled: the plateletcrit (Pct), the platelet distribution width
(PDW), the percent and number of high light scatter reticulocytes (HLR% and HLR#), and
the mean sphered cell volume (MSCV).
The PDW value is used as an internal check on the reported platelet parameters, the Plt and
MPV.
Description
Components
The GENS System (Figure 2.1-1) and the LH 750 System (Figure 2.1-3) consist of an
Analytical Station and a Workstation, with an optional SlideMaker and SlideStainer
(Figures 2.1-2 and 2.1-4). This manual provides information on the Analytical Stations only.
The Analytical Station consists of three units: the Power Supply, Analyzer, and Diluter. This
chapter contains illustrations identifying the main components and/or assemblies in each of
these units, and tables summarizing their functions. These illustrations and tables are
grouped by unit as follows:
r
Power Supply (See Heading 2.2.)
Analyzer (See Heading 2.3.)
Diluter (See Heading 2.4.)
Systems
The GENS System and the LH 750 System comprise many smaller systems, each performing
a specific function. This chapter includes a description of the following systems:
r
Electronic Power (See Headings 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8.)
Pneumatic Power (See Heading 2.9.)
Power Development Control (See Heading 2.10.)
System Control (See Heading 2.11.)
Diluter Control (See Heading 2.12.)
Reagent Handling (See Heading 2.13.)
Specimen Transport (See Headings 2.14 and 2.15.)
Sample Acquisition (See Headings 2.16 and 2.17.)
CBC Analysis (See Headings 2.18, 2.19 and 2.25.)

Note: Heading 2.25 provides on overview of the calibration procedures for the CBC
Analysis parameters.
2.1-2
VCS Technology (See Headings 2.20, 2.21, 2.22 and 2.23.)
Sample Reporting (See Heading 2.24.)
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.1-1 GENS System Units

ANALYTICAL STATION
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
ANALYZER
WORKSTATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
DILUTER
R
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN S
PNEU
60 PSI
AC LINE
AC
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
6498044B
Figure 2.1-2 GENS Cell Units

ANALYTICAL STATION
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
ANALYZER
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
SLIDESTAINER
DIFF
RETICS
WORKSTATION
SLIDEMAKER
TM
DILUTER
R
POWER
TURBO
RESET
GEN S
GenS St
PNEU
60 PSI
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
AC LINE
AC
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
6498043B
PN 4277219B
2.1-3
Figure 2.1-3 LH 750 System Units

A n a ly tic a l S ta tio n
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
A n a ly z e r
I
II
II I
IV
V
S T A T U S : R E A D Y
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
R IN S E
S T A R T U P
T E S T M O D E
A S P IR A T IO N S /T U B E 0 1
M A IN
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
S H U T D O W N
M E N U
C E
P R E M IX
S T A R T
C O N T
W o r k s ta tio n
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
V I
V II
V II I
T
E
D ilu te r
N E C
M u ltiS y n c L C D
1 7 0 0 m +
GEN S
PPNEU
N E U
TTEMP
E M P
6600 PSI
P S I
3300 PSI
P S I
55 PSI
P S I
VACUUM
AAC
C LLINE
IN E
6600 330.0
0 . 0 44.9
. 9 2288 1115
15
AAC
C
DDCC
P o w e r
S u p p ly
P O W E R S U P P L Y
6 4 9 8 1 1 7 B
Figure 2.1-4 LH 750 System Units with Optional LH SlideMaker and LH SlideStainer
Analytical Station
Analyzer
SlideStainer
Workstation
SlideMaker
Diluter
GEN S
PNEU
TEMP
60 PSI
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
AC LINE
AC
DC
Power
Supply
6498118B
2.1-4
PN 4277219B
Diagnostic Products
Refer to the Online Help System or to Chapter 1 of the Reference manual for the diagnostic
products used on the instrument.
Physical Specifications
See Heading 3.1, Preinstallation Checklist, for the physical specifications needed to install the
instrument. For any other physical specifications, refer to the Online Help System or to
Chapter 4 of the Reference manual.
Performance Specifications and Characteristics
See Appendix A, QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, for the performance specifications
needed to service the instrument. For any other performance specifications or performance
characteristics (including interfering substances), refer to the Online Help System or to
Chapter 4 of the Reference manual.
Leakage Current Specifications
Coulter instruments are evaluated and approved to Underwriters Laboratories Standard 1262,
Laboratory Equipment. Testing was performed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL).
Leakage current is tested per Section 6.7 - EXCEPTION:
Equipment required to have primary circuit filtering to meet Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) regulations may have a Leakage Current at accessible parts of more
than 500 A, but must not exceed 5.0 mA.
Coulter instruments such as the GENS System and the LH 750 System and their peripherals
incorporate primary circuit filtering to meet EMC requirements, therefore the exception in
UL Standard 1262, Section 6.7 is applicable and allows a leakage current as high as 5.0 mA.
Computer systems, such as the Workstation for the GENS System and the LH 750 System,
and their peripherals are evaluated and approved to Underwriters Laboratories Standard 478,
Information Processing and Business Equipment, prior to being approved for use with
Coulter instruments. Leakage current is tested per Section 28 A, paragraph 28 A.3,
EXCEPTION:
A unit that requires electromagnetic interference filters or filtering capacitors or both for
functional performance or to meet EMC regulations (for example FCC regulations) may
have Leakage Current in excess of 500 A but must not exceed 3.5 mA.
Computers and their peripherals used with the GENS System and the LH 750 System
employ EMC filtering devices as described in UL 478 Section 28 A, paragraph 28 A.3,
EXCEPTION; therefore the maximum allowable leakage current is 3.5 mA.
PN 4277219B
2.1-5
Operation
Aspiration Modes
The instrument has two aspiration modes, the Automatic mode and the Manual mode.
In the Automatic mode, the operator loads the specimen tubes into cassettes and stacks the
cassettes into the loading bay of the Diluter. From the loading bay the cassettes are lowered
onto a rocker bed belt that advances the cassettes to the automatic cap-piercing mechanism.
While advancing, and between sample aspirations, the cassettes are rocked back and forth to
mix the specimens. The specimen tubes and cassettes are identified by bar-code labels that are
read automatically as the specimen is being sampled.
In the Manual mode, the operator enters the specimen ID, uncaps the specimen tube and
presents the open specimen tube to the aspirator tip. The cycle starts automatically when the
operators hand interrupts the path of optical sensors (the hand detector).
In the LH 750 System the operator can also run prediluted blood samples in the Manual
mode. The operator makes the dilution outside of the instrument and enters the dilution
factor at the Workstation. The software uses the dilution factor to calculate the whole blood
results from the diluted sample results.
The aspiration modes are described in the Online Help System and in Chapter 3 of the
Reference manual. For further details on how the specimen transport system works, see
Headings 2.14 and 2.15. For details on how aspiration occurs, see Headings 2.16 and 2.17.
Test Modes
The instrument has five test mode options: CBC/DIFF/RETIC, CBC/DIFF, CBC ONLY,
CBC/RETIC, and RETIC ONLY.
In the GENS System, the operator batches the specimen tubes by the test mode needed and
selects the test mode for the batch at the Analyzer.
In the LH 750 System, the instrument changes the test mode as needed for each specimen
tube according to the tests selected for that specimen on the ToDo List. This process, which is
referred to as random access, eliminates the need to batch specimen tubes.
Operating Procedures
Refer to the Operators Guide or the Online Help System for the operating procedures.
2.1-6
PN 4277219B
POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS
2.2

Summary
The Power Supply provides and monitors the main electronic power to the Analyzer and
Diluter and the pneumatic power (vacuum and pressure) to the Diluter. This section
identifies the main components and/or assemblies in the Power Supply, briefly describing
their functions and showing their locations.
For more details, see the Electronic Power System, Headings 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8, and the
Pneumatic Power System, Heading 2.9.
Main Components
Table 2.2-1 lists the main components or assemblies in the Power Supply, in alphabetic order,
with the abbreviation, where applicable, and functions of each. Figure 2.2-1 shows the
locations of these components or assemblies in the old style Power Supply; Figure 2.2-2
shows their locations in the new style Power Supply.
Note: The new style Power Supply has additional vents to improve air flow and keep the
Power Supply from overheating.
Table 2.2-1 Power Supply (PS) Components
Component
Abbreviation
Functions
Bulk Power Supply
Converts ac line voltage to dc power supply voltages.
Bulk Power Filter Card
Filters switching noise from Bulk Power Supply voltages.
Compressor/Vacuum Pump
Develops vacuum and pressures.
Motor Controller Card
Provides the driver and power for the compressor/vacuum pump.
Power Supply Exhaust Fan
One of two automatic, variable-speed fans used to cool the Power

Supply. Used as an exhaust fan.
Power Supply Intake Fan
One of two automatic variable-speed fans used to cool the Power

Supply. Used as an intake fan.
System Power Controller Display SPC Display
Displays pneumatic and voltage levels and status.
System Power Controller Card
Provides power management control and monitoring functions.
PN 4277219B
SPC
2.2-1
Figure 2.2-1 Power Supply Component Locations, Old Style Power Supply
System Power
Controller
Display
Bulk
Power
Filter
card
Power
Supply
exhaust
fan
System Power
Controller
card
Motor
Controller
card
Bulk
Power
Supply
Power Supply
intake fan
Pneumatic
Power Supply
Compressor/
vacuum pump
6498071A
Figure 2.2-2 Power Supply Component Locations, New Style Power Supply
System Power
Controller
Display
System Power
Controller
card
Power Supply
intake fan
Bulk
Power
Filter
card
Power
Supply
exhaust
fan
Motor
Controller
card
Bulk
Power
Supply
Pneumatic
Power Supply
Compressor/
vacuum pump
6498072A
2.2-2
PN 4277219B
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS
2.3

Summary
The Analyzer:
r
Controls the System reset and power up sequence.
Controls the electronic sequencing of all operating cycles.
Accumulates pulses generated in the Diluter.
Analyzes the CBC pulses.
Sends the data to the Workstation as each cycle is completed.
The main central processing unit (CPU) responsible for system control, task scheduling and
synchronization, and sample analysis is housed on the Analyzer Microcontroller card (AMC)
in the Analyzer. This section identifies the main components and/or assemblies in the
Analyzer, briefly describing their functions and showing their locations.
Main Components
Table 2.3-1 lists the main components in the Analyzer, in alphabetic order, with the
abbreviation, where applicable, and functions of each. Figures Figures 2.3-1 through 2.3-5
show the locations of these components and are referenced in Table 2.3-1.
Table 2.3-1 Analyzer (ANA) Components
Figure Reference
Component
Abbreviation Functions
GENS LH 750
System System
AMC (Analyzer Microcontroller

card)
AMC
Houses main CPU for instrument.
2.3-1
2.3-4
Analog backplane
Interconnect for signals on left (analog) side of

Analyzer
2.3-2
2.3-5
Analyzer fans (2)
Two automatic, temperature controlled,

variable-speed fans used to cool the Analyzer
2.3-2
2.3-5
API (Aperture Current)-SIGNAL

GENERATOR card
API
Develops aperture current and test pulses
2.3-1
N/A
APS1 (Analyzer Power Supply 1)

card
APS1
Local power supply for analog side of Analyzer
2.3-1
2.3-4
APS2 (Analyzer Power Supply 2)

card
APS2
Local power supply for digital side of Analyzer
2.3-1
2.3-4
System bus connector between Analog, Digital

and CRT backplanes
2.3-2
2.3-5
Power distribution bus for +48 V1 dc, 48 V1 dc

return, and system ground
2.3-2
2.3-5
Installed on Analytical Stations with a

Diluter 2 RBD card to provides test points for the
bubble/blood detector adjustments and the lyse
timing procedure.
N/A
2.3-3
Backplane Interconnect (2 used)

Backplane voltage bus
BD (blood detector) ADJ (adjust)
card
PN 4277219B
BVB
2.3-1
Table 2.3-1 Analyzer (ANA) Components (Continued)

Figure Reference
Component
Abbreviation Functions
GENS LH 750
System System
COMM (Communication)
INTERFACE card
Comm Intfc
Communication link for AMC.
2.3-1
2.3-4
CRT backplane
Interconnect for Scope Module signals.
2.3-2
2.3-5
CRT buttons
Allows operator access to the options on the

interface menu.
DIFF (Differential) PROCESSOR

card
Processes VCS signals and routes diff and retic

raw data to the Workstation.
2.3-1
2.3-4
Digital backplane
Interconnect for signals on right (digital) side of

Analyzer
2.3-2
2.3-5
DILUTER CPU card
Controls all Diluter cycles as directed by the AMC

and communicates directly with the Keypad and
Display Interface card (the numeric keypad)
N/A
2.3-4
DILUTER PROCESSOR card
Diff Proc
2.3-3
Dil Proc
Controls all Diluter cycles as directed by the AMC 2.3-1
N/A
Keyboard and Display Interface

card
Part of numeric keypad. See Diluter/Numeric

Keypad under Heading 2.12, DILUTER
CONTROL.
N/A
2.12-6
Numeric keypad
Provides POWER ON/OFF signals and operator

interface
N/A
2.3-3
PLATELET PROCESSOR card
Plt Proc
Provides channelizing circuitry for platelet

histograms.
2.3-1
2.3-4
RED PRE-AMP (Preamplifier)

card
RED
PRE-AMP
One of two Red/White Pre-Amp cards used on

the GENS System to amplify pulses from the
apertures. Amplifies RBC and platelet data
2.3-1
N/A
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
R/W Proc
Provides editing circuitry and counters for RBC

and WBC count and histograms
2.3-1
N/A
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card
R/W Proc 2
Provides editing circuitry and event and wait

N/A
counters for RBC and WBC count and histograms
2.3-4
R/W/P (Red,White, Platelet) SC/A

(Signal Conditioner/Analyzer)
card
SC/A
LH 750 System only: Develops aperture voltage

and test pulses. Amplifies and conditions pulses
from the Six-Channel Preamp card.
N/A
2.3-4
Displays system status, messages, and operator

interface menu
2.3-1
2.3-4
Scope Module
VCS ANALOG card
ANALOG
Amplifies VCS signals
2.3-1
2.3-4
WHITE PRE-AMP (Preamplifier)

card
WHITE
PRE-AMP
One of two Red/White Pre-Amp cards used on

the GENS System to amplify pulses from the
apertures. Amplifies WBC data
2.3-1
N/A
2.3-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.3-1 GENS System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View

AMC
APS1
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR
WHITE PRE-AMP
COMM INTERFACE
DILUTER PROCESSOR
DIFF PROCESSOR
RED PRE-AMP
PLATELET
PROCESSOR
APS2
SCOPE
MODULE
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR
ANALOG
7253059B
Figure 2.3-2 GENS System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View
FANS
BACKPLANE
INTERCONNECTS
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
CRT
BACKPLANE
BACKPLANE
VOLTAGE
BUS
ANALOG
BACKPLANE
PN 4277219B
7253060A
2.3-3
Figure 2.3-3 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, Cover Down
CRT
buttons
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
S H U T D O W N
R IN S E
T E S T M O D E
M A IN
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
3
5
C E
P R E M IX
VI
VII
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
Numeric
keypad
VIII
ID
N
M E N U
6498115B
Figure 2.3-4 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View without Cover
A P S 1
A M C
C O M M IN T E R F A C E
D IL U T E R C P U
D IF F P R O C E S S O R
R /W /P S C /A
C o v e r p la te
B D A D J
C o v e r p la te
P L A T E L E T
P R O C E S S O R
R E D /W H IT E
P R O C E S S O R 2
A P S 2
V C S A N A L O G
S c o p e
m o d u le
6 4 9 8 1 2 4 B
Figure 2.3-5 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View

Backplane
voltage BUS
Analog
backplane
Fans
Backplane
interconnects
Digital
backplane
CRT
backplane
6498183B
2.3-4
PN 4277219B
DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS
2.4

Summary
The Diluter transports, aspirates, pipettes, dilutes, mixes, lyses and generates pulses from
patient and control samples. To accomplish these tasks the Diluter provides the local power
and control for the solenoids and motors, level sensors, specimen transport assembly and
bar-code scanning components used to process the blood samples. This section identifies the
circuit cards and the main assemblies in the Diluter, briefly describing their functions and
showing their locations.
Note: Two configurations of the GENS Systems Analytical Station are currently in use, one
that uses the diluent reservoir (the original configuration) and one that bypasses the diluent
reservoir. The locations of the components discussed in this section are the same in both
configurations.
For a description of the fluidic components in the Diluter and the associated location
diagrams, see Main Diluter Fluidic Components under Heading A.6.
Main Components
Table 2.4-1 lists all the circuit cards and the main assemblies in the Diluter, in alphabetic
order, with the abbreviation, where applicable, and the functions of each. Figures 2.4-1
through 2.4-15 show the locations of the components described in Table 2.4-1 and are
referenced in the table.
Table 2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components
Figure Reference
Component
Abbreviation
Functions
GENS LH 750
System System
Bar-Code Decoder card
BCD
Decodes signals from the bar-code scanner.
2.4-6
2.4-14
Bar-code scanner
assembly
BCS
Scans bar-code labels on tubes and cassettes to identify

specimen.
2.4-2
2.4-9
Cassette transport
assembly
CTA
Mechanical components for handling cassettes in the

Automatic mode. Consists of the:
2.4-1
2.4-8
Provides power for laser power supply, and DC and RF

voltages for the flow cell.
2.4-4
2.4-12
Processes samples for diff analysis.
2.4-3
2.4-10
Develops power for and manages the Hgb lamp and

bar-code scanner, keyboard controller and
hand-detector sensor inputs.
2.4-4
2.4-12
r Loading bay
r Unloading bay
r Rocker bed
r Piercing station.
Differential Power Supply
card
Diff PS
Diff module
Diluter 1 card
Dil 1
Note: Two styles are currently in use. For details, see

Diluter 1 Card under Heading 2.12, DILUTER
CONTROL.
PN 4277219B
2.4-1
Table 2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components (Continued)

Figure Reference
Component
Abbreviation
Functions
Diluter 2 card
Dil 2
Manages blood detectors, reagent heaters, probe-wipe

motor and reagents reservoirs.
GENS LH 750
System System
2.4-5
2.4-13
2.4-5
2.4-13
Note: Four styles are currently in use. For details, see

CONTROL.
Diluter 3 card
Dil 3
Manages solenoids and mixing motors and houses a

SlideMaker interface.
Note: Three styles are currently in use. For details, see
CONTROL.
Diluter 4 Card
Dil 4
Houses drivers for the heaters, thermistors, and Peltier

module.
2.4-7
2.4-15
Diluter Cbl (Cable)

Adapter card
Cable Adpt
Routes IBUS signals between Power Supply and left

and right sides of Diluter.
2.4-5
2.4-13
Provides POWER ON/OFF signals and operator

interface.
2.4-1
N/A
Provides local power to the Diluter 2 and Diluter 3 cards

and to the solid state RF Detector Preamp card if one is
installed.
2.4-5
2.4-13
Hgb cuvette assembly
Consists of Hgb cuvette, lamp and preamp. Used to

photometrically analyze WBC dilution for Hgb
concentration.
2.4-2
2.4-9
Keyboard and Display

Interface card
Part of Diluter control keypad. See Diluter/Numeric

Keypad under Heading 2.12, DILUTER CONTROL.
2.12-6
N/A
Laser
Coherent light source used for LS channel.
2.4-3
2.4-10
Consists of Laser Power module and Laser Reference 4

card:
r Laser Power module - Develops power for laser
2.4-4
2.4-12
Houses amplification and logic circuitry for the light

scatter signals.
2.4-3
2.4-10
PVT card
Monitors flow cell pressures, count vacuum and

ambient temperature (backup sensor).
2.4-4
2.4-12
Random Access module
LH 750 System only: Segments the diff and retic

samples and processes samples for retic analysis.
N/A
2.4-10
Diluter keypad
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply card
Laser Power Supply
Sol/Opt PS
Laser PS
r Laser Reference 4 card - Develops laser reference

voltage.
Light Scatter Preamplifier
module
LS Preamp
Reagent Reservoir
module
Rgt Res
Provides level sensing and internal reagent storage to

trap bubbles during reagent change.
2.4-7
2.4-15
Reservoir Interface card
Rgt Res Intfc
Interfaces reagent reservoir solenoids and sensors.
2.4-7
2.4-15
2.4-2
PN 4277219B
Table 2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components (Continued)

Figure Reference
Component
Abbreviation
Retic module
RF Detector Preamp
(Preamplifier) Card
RF Preamp
Functions
GENS LH 750
System System
GENS System only: Segments the diff and retic

samples and processes samples for retic analysis.
2.4-3
N/A
Generates RF and DC current, detects RF voltage, and

amplifies RF and DC pulses from the flow cell.
2.4-3
2.4-10
Routes signals between the Diluter, Workstation and

Analyzer.
2.4-4
2.4-12
Contains components for pipetting blood samples in

the Automatic and Manual modes.
2.4-3
2.4-10
Note: Two styles are currently in use. For details, see RF

Detector Preamp Card under Heading 2.21, VCS
TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE
DATA.
RS/Opto Intfc (Interface)
card
RS/O Intfc
Sampling Station
Sensor Distribution card
Sensor Dist
Connections for Diluter sensors for access by the

Diluter 1 card.
2.4-4
2.4-12
Six-Channel Aperture
Preamp (Preamplifier)
card
Six-Channel
Preamp
LH 750 System only: Amplifies WBC, RBC, and platelet

pulses from the apertures.
N/A
2.4-11
Triple Transducer module
TTM
Contains components for VCS technology pulse

generation. Triple refers to the three measurements:
volume (DC), conductivity (RF) and scatter (LS).
2.4-3
2.4-10
PN 4277219B
2.4-3
Figure 2.4-1 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed
GEN S
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
LOADING BAY
UNLOADING BAY
ROCKER BED
PIERCING
STATION
KEYPAD
7253265A
Figure 2.4-2 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panels
6 4 9 8 2 3 7 B
B a r-c o d e
s c a n n e r
2.4-4
H g b c u v e tte
a s s e m b ly
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-3 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover
SAMPLING STATION
RF DETECTOR
PREAMP CARD
DIFF MODULE
TRIPLE
TRANSDUCER
MODULE
RETIC
MODULE
7253267B
LIGHT SCATTER
PREAMP MODULE
LASER
Figure 2.4-4 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and Compartment
RS/OPTO
INTFC CARD
LASER POWER
SUPPLY
PVT
CARD
DIFF POWER
SUPPLY CARD
DILUTER 1
CARD
SENSOR
DISTRIBUTION
CARD
7253158A
PN 4277219B
2.4-5
Figure 2.4-5 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment
DILUTER CBL
ADAPTER CARD
DILUTER 3
CARD
DILUTER/
SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER
SUPPLY CARD
DILUTER 2
CARD
7253159A
Figure 2.4-6 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD
7253160A
2.4-6
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-7 GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors
Diluter 4
card
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reagent
Reservoir
module
(old style)
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reagent
Reservoir
module
(new style)
7253428E
PN 4277219B
2.4-7
Figure 2.4-8 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
R IN S E
T E S T M O D E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
C E
S H U T D O W N
Unloading bay
M A IN
D E T E C T : O N
P R E M IX
VI
VII
VIII
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
M E N U
Loading bay
Rocker bed
Piercing
station
6498114B
Figure 2.4-9 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panel
Bar-code
scanner
2.4-8
Hgb cuvette
assembly
6498116B
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-10 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover
Diff module
RF Detector
Preamp card
Sampling Station
Triple
Transducer
module
Random
Access module
6498119B
Light Scatter
Preamp module
Laser
Figure 2.4-11 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Center Rear Panel
Six-Channel Aperture
Preamp card
6498199B
PN 4277219B
2.4-9
Figure 2.4-12 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and Compartment
RS/Opto
Intfc card
Laser Power
Supply
PVT
card
Diff Power
Supply card
Diluter 1
card
Sensor
Distribution
card
6498120B
Figure 2.4-13 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment
Diluter Cbl
Adapter card
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
T E S T M O D E
M A IN M E N U
B L O O D D E T E C T : O N
VI
VII
VIII
Diluter/
Solenoid/
Optics Power
Supply card
Diluter 3
card
Diluter 2
card
6498121B
2.4-10
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-14 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door
Bar-Code
Decoder
card
6498122B
Figure 2.4-15 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors
Diluter 4
card
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reagent
Reservoir
module
6498123B
PN 4277219B
2.4-11
2.4-12
PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION
2.5

Summary
The electronic power system converts the ac input line voltage to the main dc voltages needed
in the Analytical Station. This section describes the power development in the Power Supply
and subsequent distribution to local power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter.
For more information about the electronic power system, see Heading 2.6 for a description of
the control voltage development and the power-up sequence, Heading 2.7 for a description of
the Analyzer power supplies, and Heading 2.8 for a description of the Diluter power supplies.
For troubleshooting information, see Heading 7.4.
Electronic Power Supply Overview

Turning on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker on the Power Supply routes ac voltage through
the transient voltage suppressor to the Bulk Power Supply. The Bulk Power Supply develops
the main and auxiliary dc voltages for the Power Supply. The System Power Controller card
monitors the Power Supply outputs and manages the power-up sequence in the Power
Supply. Refer to the block diagram of the Electronic Power Supply, Figure 2.5-1, as you read
this section. Refer to Figure 2.2-1 for the location of the components in the Power Supply.
Figure 2.5-1 Electronic Power Supply Block Diagram
SPC DISPLAY
PNEUMATIC
TRANSDUCERS
SPC
CARD
J5
+5.2 V
CONTROL
IBUS
Pin 2
RS485
COMPRESSOR
+48 V2
+5.2 V CONTROL
+48 V1
LEDS
MOTOR
CONTROLLER
CARD
PRESSURE
DUMP VALVE
+12 V
F3
+48 V2
+12 V
MAIN
POWER
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TVS3
MONITOR
VOLTAGES
F1
AC
INPUT
BULK POWER
SUPPLY
F2
+48 V1
+48 V2
+5.2 V CONTROL
+12 V
+12 V
BULK
POWER
FILTER
CARD
+48 V1
J4
48 V1 RETURN
SYSTEM GROUND
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
6498238B
Transient Voltage Suppressor

The ac input goes through a transient voltage suppressor (TVS3) in the ac input jack to
minimize transient spikes as they occur. The transient voltage suppressor eliminates high
voltage transients, such as caused by lightning strikes, without affecting the main operating
voltage.
PN 4277219B
2.5-1
Fuses
Two fuses in the ac input line to the Bulk Power Supply protect the Bulk Power Supply from
overcurrent. A third fuse in the ac input line to the System Power Controller card protects the
System Power Controller card from overcurrent.
Bulk Power Supply

Function
The Bulk Power Supply compensates automatically for ac line voltage and frequency and uses
individual ac-to-dc power supplies to develop the Power Supply dc voltages.
The Bulk Power Supply generates two +48 supply voltages and two auxiliary voltages, +5.2
control voltage and +12 Vdc.
r
The +48 supply voltages power the Analytical Station and the compressor/vacuum
pump.
The +5.2 control voltage ensures orderly System power up and reset.
The +12 Vdc powers the Power Supply cooling fans and the dump valve.
Each of the voltages uses a floating return and the two +48 Vdc supplies and the +5.2 control
voltage are filtered to improve noise isolation. The +12 Vdc is not filtered.
The Bulk Power Supply contains an internal fan and thermistor for heat regulation.
Input
90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz
Outputs
+ 5.2 control Vdc - used throughout the system to manage power up, power down and reset
+12 Vdc - used to power the Power Supply cooling fans and the pneumatic dump valve
+48 V1 dc - routed to backplane voltage bus for distribution to local power supplies in the
Analyzer and Diluter
+48 V2 dc - used to power the compressor/vacuum pump
Note: All Bulk Power Supply output voltages are referenced to their respective returns.
Fans
The Power Supply is cooled by two automatic, temperature controlled, variable-speed fans
(an intake and an exhaust), each with a thermistor to provide input for speed regulation. The
fans are powered by the +12 Vdc from the Bulk Power Supply. For the location of the fans
within the Power Supply, refer to Figure 2.2-1 and Figure 2.9-1 for the old style Power Supply,
Figure 2.2-2 and Figure 2.9-2 for the new style Power Supply.
Note: On the new style Power Supply, additional vents have been added to improve cooling.

The +5.2 control Vdc, the +48 V1 dc and the +48 V2 dc lines are routed through the Bulk
Power Filter card to reduce the switching noises on their outputs.
2.5-2
PN 4277219B
Main Power Supply Cable

The Power Supply cable carries the +48 V1 dc, +48 V1 dc return and system ground from the
Bulk Power Filter card to the backplane voltage bus.
Backplane Voltage Bus

The backplane voltage bus (refer to Figure 2.3-2 or Figure 2.3-5 for location) is the
distribution point for routing the +48 V1 dc, 48 V1 dc return, and system ground to the
Analyzer and Diluter local power supplies. See Figure 2.5-2 for the distribution on the
GENS System, Figure 2.5-3 for the distribution on the LH 750 System.
Figure 2.5-2 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the GENS System
BACKPLANE
VOLTAGE BUS
APS 2
CARD
+15, -15, +5 V
+12 V CRT
APS 1
CARD
ANALYZER
FANS
+12 V FAN
+15, -15, +5 V
+82 V
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
SCOPE
MODULE
ANALOG
BACKPLANE
+150 V
API
CARD
ZAP VOLTAGE
RED AP
CURRENT
RED
PRE-AMP
CARD
RED
BATH
ZAP VOLTAGE
WHITE AP
CURRENT
DILUTER/
SOLENOID/
OPTICS
POWER
SUPPLY
CARD
+15, -15, +5 V
+24 V
+6 V
+15, -15, +5 V
-5, +9, -9 V
DILUTER 4
CARD
+48 V1
48 V1 RETURN
SYSTEM GROUND
PN 4277219B
WHITE
BATH
MOTORS
USED FOR:
SOLENOIDS
FOR SOLID STATE
RF DETECTOR PREAMP ONLY.
DIFF
+300 V
+6.3 V
POWER SUPPLY
+15, -15, +5 V
CARD
MONITORING
+12 V
DILUTER 1
CARD
WHITE
PRE-AMP
CARD
+12 V
RF DETECTOR
PREAMP CARD
LASER POWER
SUPPLY
LASER
FLOW
CELL
HGB LAMP VOLTAGE

SENSOR DISTRIBUTION CARD
BAR-CODE DECODER CARD/SCANNER
PELTIER MODULE FAN
6498128B
2.5-3
Figure 2.5-3 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the LH 750 System

Backplane
voltage bus
APS 2
card
Analyzer
fans
+12 V FAN
Digital
backplane
+15, -15, +5 V
+12 V CRT
APS 1
card
SC/A
card
Analog
backplane
+15, -15, +5 V
+150 V
Scope
module
+82 V
ZAP voltage
(RBC apertures)
+ 82 V
15 V
ZAP voltage
(WBC apertures)
+ 150 V
Diluter
Solenoid/
Optics
Power
Supply
card
+15, -15, +5 V
+24 V
Diff
+300 V
+6.3 V
Power Supply
+15, -15, +5 V
card
Monitoring
+12 V
Diluter 1
card
+7.2 V
+15, -15, +5 V
-5, +9, -9 V
Diluter 4
card
+48 V1
48 V1 RETURN
SYSTEM GROUND
+12 V
Red
bath
Six-Channel
Preamp card
Aperture
Voltage
White
bath
Motors
Used for
solenoids
RF Detector
Preamp card
Laser Power
Supply
Laser
Hgb lamp voltage
Flow
cell

Bar-Code Decoder card/scanner
Peltier module fan
6498129B
Local Power Supplies

The +48 V1 dc inputs to the Analyzer and Diluter local power supplies contain hard wire
fuses to protect the local power supplies from overvoltage.
The local power supplies are filtered to suppress noise and also use floating grounds or
returns to reduce high frequency switching noise. This method reduces wiring, noise
susceptibility and ground loop problems. It also increases efficiency over conventional
designs. For a description of these power supplies, see:
r
r
2.5-4
Heading 2.7, Electronic Power System - Local Power Supplies in the Analyzer
Heading 2.8, Electronic Power System - Local Power Supplies in the Diluter.
PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP
2.6

Summary
When the MAIN POWER circuit breaker at the Power Supply is turned on, ac is applied to
the Bulk Power Supply, but only the +5.2 control voltage is routed from the Bulk Power
Supply to the Analyzer and Diluter. To distribute the other voltages, it is necessary to press
POWER ON on the Diluter, initiating the power-up sequence. This section describes the
development of the control voltage and the power-up sequence. This section also describes
the power-off sequence.
power development in the Power Supply, Heading 2.7, for a description of the Analyzer
power supplies, and Heading 2.8 for a description of the Diluter power supplies. For
troubleshooting information, see Heading 7.4.
Control Voltage Development

see Figure 2.6-1. Turning on the main circuit breaker on the Power Supply routes ac line
voltage to the Bulk Power Supply. The Bulk Power Supply generates the +5.2 control voltage
and the control voltage return. From the Bulk Power Supply the +5.2 control voltage is routed
through the Bulk Power Filter card to reduce switching noise from the supply, and then to the
System Power Controller card to be distributed via the IBUS cable.
The distribution of the +5.2 control voltage via the IBUS cable differs, depending on whether
the Analytical Station has the original (old) Diluter interconnects used in the GENS System
or the current (new) Diluter interconnects used in the LH 750 System. The primary difference
between the two designs is the path the +5.2 control voltage takes from the IBUS cable
through the Diluter. Compare Figures 2.6-1 and 2.6-2, and Figures 2.6-3 and 2.6-4.
IBUS
For details about the IBUS, see Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules under
Heading 2.12, Diluter Control.
Control Voltage Distribution and Function

See Figure 2.6-3 (old Diluter interconnects) and Figure 2.6-4 (new Diluter interconnects).
When the +5.2 control voltage reaches the APS1 and APS2 cards, the LEDs on the front of the
cards turn yellow. As soon as the +5.2 control voltage is available in the System, the
instrument is ready for the POWER ON button on the Diluter/numeric keypad to be pressed.
Table 2.6-1 describes the functions of the +5.2 control voltage.
PN 4277219B
2.6-1
Figure 2.6-1 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects)
+ 5.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE
TVS3
AC
IN
IBUS
Bulk
Power
Supply
N
G
Bulk Power
Filter
card
System
Power
Controller
card
AMC
CONTROL RETURN
APS1
card
Power Supply
Analyzer
APS2
card
DIL 1
card
Diluter
Diluter
keypad
6498152B
Figure 2.6-2 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (New Diluter Interconnects)
+ 5.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE
TVS3
AC L
IN N
G
Bulk
Power
Supply
Bulk Power
Filter
card
IBUS
System
Power
Controller
card
AMC
CONTROL RETURN
APS1
card
Power Supply
Analyzer
APS2
card
Diluter
Numeric
keypad
6498151B
2.6-2
Keyboard
and Display
Interface
card
DILUTER
CPU card
DIL 1
card
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.6-3 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects)
A C IN
M A IN
B R E A K E R
D IL U T E R
D IL U T E R
K E Y P A D
B U L K P O W E R
S U P P L Y A N D F IL T E R
O F F
O N
C O N T R O L
R E T U R N
C O N T R O L
R E T U R N
J 1
6
3 8
3 8
1 7
3 1
3 3
4 5
C T R L G N D
+ 5 .2 C T R L
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
3 2
3 2
3 1
3 3
4 5
J 5
1 2
J 1
S E N S O R
D IS T R IB U T IO N
C A R D
J 5
P O W E R
S U P P L Y
S Y S T E M P O W E R
C O N T R O L L E R C A R D
1 7
+ 5 .2 C O N T R O L
J 1
+ 5 .2 C O N T R O L
P O W E R O N
J 2
2
1
P O W E R
O F F
6
D IL U T E R C A B L E
A D A P T E R C A R D
J 1
1
2
5
6
D IL U T E R 1
C A R D
G N
+ 5 .2 C O
P O W E
P O W E
J 7
1
N T R O L
2
R O N
5
R O F F
6
D
2
1
J 4
J 8
2
R S /O
IN T
C A
1 2
1
J 2
J 1 9
A N A L Y Z E R
T P 1 6
(O N B A C K P L A N E )
T P 1 7
(O N B A C K P L A N E )
5 6
P T O
F C
R D
5 6
2
5
C O N T R O L
R E T U R N
D IG IT A L
B A C K P L A N E
+ 5 .2 C O N T R O L
6 4 9 8 1 7 4 B
A M C
A P S 1
C A R D
Y E
W H
C O
P R
L L O
E N
N T R
E S E
A P S 2
C A R D
Y E
W H
C O
P R
L L O
E N
N T R
E S E
5 .2 V
O L
N T
5 .2 V
O L
N T
Figure 2.6-4 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (New Diluter Interconnects)
AC IN
MAIN
BREAKER
BULK POWER
SUPPLY AND FILTER
CONTROL
RETURN
+ 5.2 CONTROL
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER CARD
J1 1 2
DILUTER
J2
ON
OFF
POWER ON
POWER OFF
CONTROL GND
DILUTER
1
CARD
J6
GND
1
+5.2 CONTROL
2
POWER ON
5
6 POWER OFF
P/A
5 DILUTER CPU 10
11
12
CARD
12
4
PN 4277219B
POWER
OFF
J4 1 2 5 6
J4
6498175B
1 2 5 6
DILUTER CABLE
ADAPTER CARD
12 5
J1 4
5 6
POWER ON
NUMERIC
KEYPAD
POWER
SUPPLY
J7
1
2
5
6
J8
1 2 5 6
RS/OPTO
INTFC
CARD
1 2 5 6
J2
POWER
POWER ON
OFF CONTROL
J19
CONTROL GND
RETURN
1 2 5 6
POWER ON
DIGITAL
POWER OFF
BACKPLANE
+ 5.2 CONTROL
ANALYZER
TP16
(ON BACKPLANE)
TP17
(ON BACKPLANE)
AMC
APS1
CARD
YELLOW
WHEN 5.2 V
CONTROL
PRESENT
APS2
CARD
YELLOW
WHEN 5.2 V
CONTROL
PRESENT
2.6-3
Table 2.6-1 +5.2 Control Voltage Distribution

Component
Function
AMC
Replaces battery voltage for the system clock and RAM.

Generates high POWER FAIL signal.
APS1 card
Provides power to indicate the status of the card.
APS2 card
Provides power to indicate the status of the card.
Keyboard and Display Interface card (GENS

System only)
Supplies the POWER ON/POWER OFF signals.
System Power Controller card
Generates high POWER ON and POWER FAIL signals.
Power-Up Signals
POWER ON Signal
Pressing POWER ON on the Diluter/numeric keypad closes the power on switch. Closing the
power on switch applies control return, forcing the POWER ON signal low. Refer to
Figure 2.6-3 (old Diluter interconnects) and Figure 2.6-4 (new Diluter interconnects).
At the System Power Controller card, the low POWER ON signal causes the V1 RETURN
signal to go low. The low V1 RETURN signal goes to the Bulk Power Supply and enables the
+48 V1 dc output to the backplane voltage bus in the Analyzer. See Figure 2.6-5.
Figure 2.6-5 POWER ON Signal, System Power Controller Card
/ P W R F A IL
F r o m B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly
P L D
(2 0 m s
d e la y )
U 3 9
P W R F A IL
A M C
P O W E R D O W N
5 V c o n tro l
/ V 1 O F F
T P 2 0
5 V
K e y p a d
/ V 1 R E T U R N
P O W E R O N
F F
T P 1 9
U 8
P O W E R O F F
+ 5 V c o n tro l
T o B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly
T P 1 8
/ V 2 R E T U R N
/ P N E U O N
/ T E M P P N E U
T P 1 7
7 2 1 9 0 2 0 B
Troubleshooting Tip: You can enable V1 for troubleshooting by placing a jumper across J20/J19.
The backplane voltage bus distributes +48 V1 dc, +48 V1 dc return and system ground from
the Power Supply to local power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter. The local power
supplies develop the additional voltages needed.
2.6-4
PN 4277219B
AMC Power-Up Sequence

The AMC power-up sequence resets the main processor unit, which generates the SYSTEM
RESET signal. See Figure 2.6-6.
Figure 2.6-6 AMC Power-Up Signals
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
P O W E R D O W N
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
D IS A B L E
C M O S M E M
(P W R F A IL )
R e s e t
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
T IM E R
C L O C K
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
P O W E R U P
D IS A B L E R A M
1 S E C O N D
R E S E T
(T O C P U 8 0 1 8 6 )
S Y S T E M
C L O C K
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
T IM E R
7219028B
When the AMC receives +5 Vdc from the APS2 card:

1.
The DISABLE CMOS MEM (PWR FAIL) signal to the AMC changes to a low signal and
triggers the Power Up signal to a high.
2.
The DISABLE RAM signal is pulled up for 1 second, disabling access to the RAM.
3.
The low RESET signal goes to the 80186 processor on the AMC. The 80186 processor
generates a high signal. This signal is inverted and generates the SYSTEM RESET signal.
SYSTEM RESET Signal

From the AMC, the SYSTEM RESET is routed as shown in Figure 2.6-7 to initialize
controllers, memory devices and interface devices, establishing communication links.
The COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card routes the SYSTEM RESET signal to the DIFF
PROCESSOR card as a high DIFF RESET signal.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System) generates a DIL RESET signal. The DIL RESET signal:
PN 4277219B
1.
Initializes the device drivers, bringing the devices to a nonhazardous, ready state.
2.
Sends the START COMPRESSOR command to the System Power Controller card.
3.
Checks the reagent and waste container levels.
4.
Initiates the drain, rinse and backwash functions, preparing the Analytical Station for
cycling.
2.6-5
Figure 2.6-7 SYSTEM RESET Signal

DISABLE
CMOS MEM
(PWR FAIL)
MANUAL
RESET
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
CARD
DIFF
RESET
DIFF
PROCESSOR
CARD
KEYBOARD
AND DISPLAY
INTERFACE
CARD
AMC
SYSTEM RESET
80186
CPU
CRT
DISPLAY 4
CARD
APS1
CARD
DILUTER
PROCESSOR/
DILUTER CPU
CARD*
PLATELET
PROCESSOR
CARD
API/
SC/A
CARD*
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR
CARD
APS2
CARD
DIL
RESET
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER
CARD
DILUTER
DILUTER 1
CARD
DILUTER 2
CARD
PNEU
ON
DILUTER 3
CARD
POWER SUPPLY
MOTOR
CONTROLLER
CARD
6498153B
* Two circuit cards are listed. The first card is used in the GENS System, the second in the LH 750 System.
A RESET signal is only routed to the keypad in the LH 750 System.
PNEU ON Signal
During system reset, the DILUTER PROCESSOR (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU
(LH 750 System) card sends a START COMPRESSOR command through the IBUS to the
System Power Controller card. The System Power controller card generates a PNEU ON
signal that turns on an optocoupler. The PNEU ON signal from the optocoupler and the V2
RETURN signal are connected to a wired-OR circuit with the TEMP PNEU signal. Refer to
Figure 2.6-5.
If all three signals are low, the V2 RETURN signal enables an optocoupler LED in the Bulk
Power Supply, which enables the +48 V2 dc output. The +48 V2 dc is routed to the Motor
Controller card to turn on the compressor/vacuum pump. When the compressor/vacuum
pump is on, it generates vacuum and pressures as described under Heading 2.9, Pneumatic
Power System.
Power-Off Signals
Refer to Figure 2.6-5. Pressing POWER OFF on the Diluter/numeric keypad:
2.6-6
1.
Applies CONTROL RETURN to U8.
2.
U8 turns on an optoisolator that pulls the V1 OFF signal low.
3.
The low V1 OFF signal starts a 20 milliseconds timer on U39 that holds the V1 RETURN
low until it expires.
4.
When the V1 RETURN signal goes high, the +48 V1 dc power supply is shut down.
PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE ANALYZER
2.7

Summary
The electronic power system uses power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter to develop
voltages locally. This section describes the functions, inputs, outputs and monitors of the
Analyzer power supply cards: the API-SIGNAL GENERATOR (API), Red/White/Platelet
Signal Conditioner/Analyzer (R/W/P SC/A) card, Analyzer Power Supply 1 (APS1), and
Analyzer Power Supply 2 (APS2) cards. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for locations of the cards.
power development in the Power Supply, Heading 2.6 for a description of the control voltage
development and the power-up sequence, and Heading 2.8 for a description of the local
power supplies in the Diluter.
API Card
Function
The API card contains the circuits that develop and regulate aperture current for the CBC
apertures on the GENS System. See Figure 2.7-1.
Figure 2.7-1 API Card Block Diagram
DC-TO-DC
POWER
SUPPLY
+48 VDC
+48 V RETURN
DCDC MON
+250 V
RED CUR ON
SYSRST
RED
AUTOCAL
DAC
API
CONTROLLER
SYSTEM BUS
WHITE
AUTOCAL
DAC
WHITE CUR ON
CAL
COMMAND
7253112A
PN 4277219B
DAC
VOLT
REG
RED 1
REDMON 1
VOLT
REG
RED 2
REDMON 2
VOLT
REG
RED 3
REDMON 3
RIA 1
RIA 2
RIA 3
MONITOR SW
AND ADC
VOLT
REG
WHT 1
WHTMON 1
VOLT
REG
WHT 2
WHTMON 2
VOLT
REG
WHT 3
WHTMON 3
WIA 1
WIA 2
WIA 3
CALPULSES
2.7-1
Voltage Regulation - The dc-to-dc power supply converts +48 Vdc to +250 Vdc. When the
AMC sends a command to turn on aperture current, the API card generates the RED CUR ON
signal. The RED CUR ON signal enables the output of the +250 Vdc power supply and turns
on the red voltage regulators. The WHT CUR ON signal turns on the white voltage
regulators.
The individual regulators are adjustable using the Analyzer software options on the SERVICE
MENU, CBC LATEX CALIBRATION screen. The acceptable adjustment ranges for the red
and white aperture current are listed in Table A.1-3.
Calibration Pulses - The API card routes the CAL COMMAND signal to the RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards. Then the API card generates the test pulses and routes the pulses to the
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards.
r
Ramp test. Generates the same number of each of the different size pulses to check the
CBC count and sizing circuitry. Checking the linearity also checks the noise levels in the
instrument.
Precision test 3. Generates a series of pulses of identical height and uses a predetermined
set of histograms to verify the accuracy and precision of parameters derived from sizing
circuitry data.
ATTENTION: The ramp and precision pulses are not multiplied by the calibration factors. For
this reason the values are not changed by calibration and it is not necessary to re-establish
reference values after calibration.
Input
+48 Vdc from the analog backplane
Outputs
r
Three red aperture currents, RIA 1, 2,

and 3, for use at the RED PRE-AMP
card
Three white aperture currents, WIA 1,

2, and 3, for use at the WHITE
PRE-AMP card
Test pulses for ramp and precision tests
Monitors
The API card:
r
Develops reference voltages for each voltage regulator, REDMON 1, 2, and 3 and
WHTMON 1, 2, and 3.
Develops reference voltage for the +250 Vdc, DCDC MON.
Switches
See Figure A.2-2 for the location of the DIP switches on the AP1 card. For the correct settings,
see Table A.2-3 and Table A.2-4.
2.7-2
PN 4277219B
R/W/P SC/A Card

Function
The R/W/P SC/A card contains the circuits that:
r
Develop and regulate high voltage for the CBC apertures on the LH 750 System.
Receive and condition aperture signals from the Six-Channel Preamp card, including DC
restoration. See Figure 2.7-2.
Generate programmable calibration pulses.
Figure 2.7-2
R/W/P SC/A Card Block Diagram

P 1 A , P 1 B
B U S in te r fa c e
a n d
d ig ita l lo g ic
J 2
D ig ita l
I/F
T e s t
C A L p u ls e
g e n e ra to r
P 2
R E D
L P F
(X 3 )
R E D (X 3 )
S ix - C h a n n e l
P re a m p
c a rd
D IF F R X
(X 6 )
M D A C
(X 6 )
W H IT E
L P F
(X 3 )
W H IT E (X 3 )
Z A P
c o n tro l
+ 2 5 0 V d c
P re a m p I/F
d c -to -d c
p o w e r s u p p ly
P 1 C , P 1 D
R E D (X 3 )
D C
R e s to re
L P F /A M P
(X 3 )
P L T (X 3 )
W H IT E (X 3 )
R E D /W H IT E
P R O C E S S O R
c a rd
P L A T E L E T
P R O C E S S O R
c a rd
R E D /W H IT E
P R O C E S S O R
c a rd
Z A P R E D
1 5 V d c
Z A P W H IT E
A P S 1 c a rd
1 5 V d c
+ 4 8 V d c
B a c k p la n e
7 2 1 9 0 3 0 B
Voltage Regulation - The dc-to-dc power supply converts +48 Vdc to +250 Vdc which is
regulated to +235 Vdc. When the AMC sends a command to turn on aperture current, the
R/W/P SC/A card generates the RED CUR ON signal. The RED CUR ON signal enables the
output of the +250 Vdc power supply and turns on the red high voltage. The WHT CUR ON
signal turns on the white high voltage.
The individual attenuators are adjustable using the Analyzer software options on the
SERVICE MENU, CBC LATEX CALIBRATION screen. The acceptable adjustment ranges for
the red and white aperture voltages are listed in Table A.1-3.
PN 4277219B
2.7-3
Calibration Pulses - The R/W/P SC/A card generates the test pulses and routes the pulses to
the input of the DC Restoration circuitry.
r
Ramp test. Generates the same number of each of the different size pulses to check the
CBC count and sizing circuitry.
Precision test. Generates two sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to verify
the accuracy and precision of parameters derived from sizing circuitry data.
ATTENTION: The ramp and precision pulses are not multiplied by the calibration factors. For
this reason the values are not changed by calibration and it is not necessary to re-establish
reference values after calibration.
Inputs
Outputs
+48 Vdc from the analog backplane
+235 Vdc to the Six-Channel Preamp

card
+150 Vdc from the APS1 card for white

aperture zap voltage

card for white aperture zap voltage
+82 Vdc from the APS1 card for red


card for red aperture zap voltage
15 Vdc from the APS1 card
15 Vdc (passed through)
Three red aperture signals for use at the

Three white aperture signals for use at

the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
Three platelet aperture signals for use at

the PLATELET PROCESSOR card
Monitors
The R/W/P SC/A card develops reference voltage for the +235 Vdc.
Connectors
The R/W/P SC/A card connectors are shown in Figure A.2-10 and described in Table A.2-13.
APS1 Card
Function
The APS1 card contains the dc-to-dc power supplies that develop voltages for the circuit cards
on the analog backplane and for the Zap circuit on the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards (GENS
System) or the R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750 System). See Figure 2.7-3.
Zap or Burn Circuit - The Zap circuit is activated every cycle to minimize protein buildup on
the apertures. The functions of the three Zap circuit signals are:
2.7-4
ZAP ON. Low signal from the AMC enables the +150 V power supply output. The
150 Vdc is used as zap voltage for the WBC apertures and is limited by a zener diode to
obtain the +82 Vdc zap voltage for the RBC apertures.
TIMER ON. A 1-second timing signal to enable ZAP ON.

PN 4277219B
TIMER EXPIRED. Disables the ZAP ON signal.
Figure 2.7-3 APS1 Card Block Diagram

+48 V RETURN
+48 VDC
DC-TO-DC
POWER
SUPPLIES
+150 V
+15 V
+5 V
-15 V
+5 V
MONITOR
CIRCUITS
-15 V
+15 V
WHITE ZAP
RED ZAP
+82 V
+150 V
+82 V
ANALOG
SECTION
ANALOG
BACKPLANE
ZAP ON
+82 V MON
+5 V MON
-15 V MON
+15 V MON
+150 V MON
SYSTEM BUS
A/D
CONVERTER
BUS
INTERFACE
DIGITAL SECTION
ANALOG BACKPLANE
TIMER ON
TIMER EXPIRED
PLD
POWER STATUS
Input
+48 Vdc from the backplane voltage bus
PN 4277219B
POWER STATUS LED
7253113A
Outputs
r
+15 Vdc for analog circuits
-15 Vdc for analog circuits
+5 Vdc for the digital circuits and power

status LEDs
+150 Vdc to the WHITE PRE-AMP card

(GENS System) or the R/W/P SC/A
card (LH 750 System) for white
+82 Vdc to the RED PRE-AMP card

(GENS System) or the R/W/P SC/A
card (LH 750 System) for red aperture
zap voltage
2.7-5
Monitors
All voltages developed by the APS1 card are routed to the monitor circuits where a
multiplexer selects a voltage and routes it to the:
r
A/D converter to be read by the AMC via the system bus (SBUS). The voltage levels are
displayed on the Analyzer ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES screen (select
SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC
SUPPLIES). The zap voltages are displayed only when the zap voltage is turned on.
Programmable logic device (PLD) to determine the voltage status. The APS1 card t
Makes the individual voltage statuses available to the AMC for generating a system
message if any of the voltages are out of tolerance.
Displays the voltage status on its power status LED on the front edge of the card. See
Table 2.7-1 for details.
LED
Table 2.7-1 defines the APS1 card power status LED indications. Refer to Table A.1-25 for the
voltage specifications.
Table 2.7-1 APS1 Card Power Status LED Indications
Color
Indication
Green
All power supplies are within specifications.

Note: The +150 Vdc and +82 Vdc are only available and monitored during ZAP ON.
Red
One or more of the following voltage supplies is out of specifications: +15 Vdc, +82 Vdc,
-15 Vdc or +150 Vdc.
Note: The +82 Vdc and +150 Vdc is only monitored during ZAP ON.
Yellow
+5.2 Vdc control voltage is present and ready for power on. After power on, indicates the
+48 V1 dc is not present, or the +5 Vdc is out of specifications.
Off
+5.2 Vdc control voltage is not present or the LED is defective.
Test Points
To measure the APS1 voltage outputs, use the test points on the analog backplane. Refer to
the Analog Backplane schematic in Chapter 6.
APS2 Card
Function
The APS2 card contains the dc-to-dc power supplies that develop voltages for the circuit cards
on the digital backplane. See Figure 2.7-4.
2.7-6
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.7-4 APS2 Card Block Diagram

+48 VDC
48 RETURN
DC-TO-DC
POWER +15 V
SUPPLIES
+12 V
FAN
-15 V
+5 V
+12 V CRT
+5 V
-15 V
+15 V
RIGHT FAN RET
+12 V FAN RIGHT
LFT FAN RET
+12 V FAN LEFT
MONITOR
CIRCUITS
RT FAN MON
LFT FAN MON
+12 V CRT MON
+5 V MON
-15 V MON
+15 V MON
PLD
SYSTEM BUS
A/D
CONVERTER
BUS
INTERFACE
LFT/RT FAN POWER STATUS

DILUTER LEFT STATUS
DILUTER 1 STATUS
SPC STATUS
POWER STATUS
Input
PN 4277219B
+12 V
CRT
ANALOG
SECTION,
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
DIGITAL SECTION
DIGITAL BACKPLANE
POWER STATUS LED
7253114A
Outputs
r
+15 Vdc for the analog circuits
-15 Vdc for the analog circuits
+5 Vdc for the digital circuits and power

status LED
+12 Vdc CRT for the Scope Module

monitor
+12 Vdc fan and return for the two

cooling fans mounted on the rear door
of the Analyzer
2.7-7
Monitors
All voltages developed by the APS2 card are routed to the monitor circuits where a
multiplexer selects a voltage and routes it to the:
r
A/D converter to be read by the AMC via the SBUS. The voltage levels are displayed on
the Analyzer ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES screen (select SERVICE MENU tt
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES).
PLD to determine the voltage status. The APS2 card t
Makes the individual voltage statuses available to the AMC for generating a system
message if any of the voltages are out of tolerance.
Displays the voltage status on its power status LED on the front edge of the card. See
Table 2.7-2 for details.
The following statuses are routed on the SBUS to the APS2 card PLD. Refer to Figure 2.7-4.
r
The DILUTER 1 status - includes the Diluter 1 card voltages and the 15 Vdc from the
Diff Power Supply card.
The DILUTER LEFT status - includes the voltages from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply card and the Diluter 4 card.
The SPC status - includes the +12 Vdc, +48 V1 dc, +48 V2 dc and the Power Supply
temperature statuses.
The PLD makes the DILUTER 1, DILUTER LEFT and SPC statuses available to the AMC for
generating a system message if any status is out of tolerance. DILUTER 1, DILUTER LEFT
and the pneumatic statuses are also displayed on the DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS screens.
LED
Table 2.7-2 defines the APS2 card power status LED indications. Refer to Table A.1-25 for
voltage specifications.
Table 2.7-2 APS2 Card Power Status LED Indications
Color
Indication
Green
All power supplies are within specifications and the Analyzer fans are
operational.
Red
One or more of the following voltage supplies is out of specifications: +15 Vdc,
-15 Vdc or +12 Vdc CRT or the Analyzer fans are not operational.
Yellow
+5.2 Vdc control voltage is present and ready for power on. After power on,
indicates the +48 V1 dc is not present, or the +5 V is out of specifications.
Off
+5.2 Vdc control voltage is not present or the LED is defective.
Test Points
To measure the APS2 voltage outputs, use the test points on the digital backplane. Refer to the
Digital Backplane schematic in Chapter 6.
2.7-8
PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE DILUTER
2.8

Summary
The electronic power system uses power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter to develop
voltages locally. This section describes the functions, inputs, outputs and monitors of the
Diluter power supplies: the Diff Power Supply card, the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card and the Laser Power Supply. This section also describes the laser interlock
switch.
power development in the Power Supply, Heading 2.6, for a description of the control voltage
development and the power-up sequence, and Heading 2.7 for a description of the local
power supplies in the Analyzer.
Diff Power Supply Card

Function
The Diff Power Supply card is located inside the right door of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-4 for location. The Diff Power Supply card contains individual dc-to-dc power
supplies that develop voltages for the TTM. See Figure 2.8-1.
Figure 2.8-1 Diff Power Supply Card Block Diagram
+15 V STATUS
-15 V STATUS
Diff Power Supply
Diluter 1
card
J9
J6
RF ON
RF ON RET
+300 V
+6.3V REF
J4
+48 V
+48 V RET
SYSTEM
GND
Diluter 1
card
J1
+300 V
+15 V
REG
REG
J3
+300 V
+300 V RET
+6.3 V
+6.3 V RET
-15 V
RF
Detector
Preamp
card
+5 V
+15 V
+15 V
LS
Preamp
J5
J78
-15 V
+12 V
+12 V
J1
J2
7253115E
PN 4277219B
Laser on LED
J69
+300 V REF
+6.3 V REF
RS/Opto
Intfc
card
LASER REF
Laser
Reference
card
Laser
Power
module
J4
Laser
Laser Power Supply

Laser interlock switch
2.8-1
The Diff Power supply card receives the RF ON signal from the Diluter 1 card for
RF oscillator on/off control.
r
Low RF ON signal enables the output of the +300 Vdc power supply.
High RF ON signal disables the output of the +300 Vdc power supply.
Input
Outputs
r
+15 Vdc for analog circuits on RF

Detector Preamp and LS Preamp circuits
-15 Vdc for RF Detector Preamp and LS

Preamp circuits
+6.3 Vdc and return for power to RF

vacuum tube filament (if used)
+300 Vdc and return for flow cell

aperture current and RF oscillation
+12 Vdc for Laser Power Supply to

generate laser powe
+5 Vdc for local monitor circuits
Monitors
The Diff Power Supply card:
r
Routes the 15 Vdc status signals to the Diluter 1 card for monitoring by the AMC. The
Analyzer VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen displays the voltages. (Select SERVICE
MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
Develops the +300 Vdc reference voltage and routes it to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for
monitoring.
Routes the +6.3 Vdc to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for monitoring.
Connectors
The Diff Power Supply card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-2 and described in
Table A.3-2.
Laser Interlock Switch

The laser interlock switch is located under the laser module cover. Refer to Figure 1.2-2 for
location. The laser interlock switch is a safety mechanism that removes power from the laser
whenever the laser cover is removed. When the cover is removed:
2.8-2
1.
The laser interlock switch disengages, opening the circuit.
2.
The open circuit disables the output of the +12 Vdc power supply.
3.
The laser and the Laser On LED turn off.
PN 4277219B
Laser Power Supply

Function
The Laser Power Supply is located in the right side compartment of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-4 for location. The Laser Power Supply consists of two assemblies, the Laser Power
module and the Laser Reference 4 card. See Figure 2.8-2.
Laser Power module. Converts 12 Vdc from the Diff Power Supply card to about +1250 Vdc
for power for the laser.
Laser Reference 4 card. Develops a reference voltage for the laser power and routes the
reference voltage to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for monitoring.
Figure 2.8-2 Laser Power Supply Block Diagram
LASER
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
LASER POWER SUPPLY

J1 LASER REFERENCE 4 CARD
+12 V
+12 RET
+ 1250 VDC
POWER SUPPLY
LASER POWER MODULE
TO LASER
7253117A
Input
Output
+12 Vdc from the Diff Power Supply card
+1250 Vdc to the laser
Monitors
The Laser Power Supply routes the laser reference voltage status to the DIFF PROCESSOR
card for monitoring.
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card

Function
The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card is located on the left door of the Diluter.
Refer to Figure 2.4-5 for location. The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card contains
four dc-to-dc power supplies that generate local power for the Diluter 2 and Diluter 3 cards.
Figure 2.8-3 shows the electronic flow through the card.
Input
PN 4277219B
Outputs
r
+5 Vdc for digital circuitry
-15 Vdc for analog circuits
+15 Vdc for analog circuits
+24 Vdc and return for solenoid power
+ 24 Vdc and return for the solid state

RF Detector Preamp card
2.8-3
Monitors
The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card voltages are routed to:
r
A circuit on the card that uses on-board LEDs to indicate the voltage status. See
Table A.3-14 for the LED indications.
The Diluter 2 card for monitoring and to develop the DILUTER LEFT status. The
Diluter 2 card routes the monitor voltages to the AMC. The Analyzer
VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen displays the values for the 15 Vdc, +24 Vdc and
+5 Vdc. (Select SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
Connectors, LEDs and Test Points

The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card connectors, LEDs, and test points are shown
in Figure A.3-14. For more information about these components, see Table A.3-13 for the
connectors, Table A.3-14 for the LEDs and Table A.3-15 for the test points.
Figure 2.8-3 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Block Diagram
Solid state RF Detector
Preamp
card
P69
J1
+48 V
SYSTEM
GROUND
+48 V
RETURN
J2
dc-to-dc
power supplies
+24 V
24 V RETURN
+ 24 V
J5 Diluter 2 card
+24 V
24 V RET
+5 V
+15 V
+5 V
-15 V
J3
J7 Diluter 3 card
+5 V
+24 V
24 V RET
+15 V
-15V
1
2
3
4
+5 V
Not used
+15 V
STATUS LEDS
-15 V
5 +24 V
6498145B
2.8-4
J4 TO Diluter 2
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
PN 4277219B
PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM
2.9

Summary
The pneumatic power system supplies and monitors the vacuum and pressure needed by the
Diluter. This section describes the development, regulation, monitoring and distribution of
the pneumatic power.
Pneumatic Power Supply Overview

The Pneumatic Power Supply is located in the Power Supply. See Figure 2.9-1 for the old style
Power Supply, Figure 2.9-2 for the new style.
The Pneumatic Power Supply is started as part of the power up sequence. For details, see
SYSTEM RESET Signal, PNEU ON Signal, under Heading 2.6, ELECTRONIC POWER
SYSTEM - POWER UP. In the Pneumatic Power Supply, the Motor Controller card provides
the drivers and power for the compressor/vacuum pump (PM1). PM1, a dc powered,
diaphragm pump, develops unregulated high vacuum and high pressure. The Pneumatic
Power Supply regulates the pressure and distributes 30 psi, 5 psi and unregulated vacuum to
the Diluter.
Figure 2.9-1 Pneumatic Supply Components, Old Style Power Supply
Power Supply
intake fan
Cooling
coils (CL1)
RV1
RG1
RG2
Motor
Controller
card
Mufflers
Dump
valve (VL1)
PN 4277219B
Air water
separator
(FL1)
Compressor/
vacuum pump (PM1)
6498070A
2.9-1
Figure 2.9-2 Pneumatic Supply Components, New Style Power Supply

Cooling
coils (CL1)
Power Supply
intake fan
RV1
RG1
Motor
Controller
card
RG2
Mufflers
Air water
separator
(FL1)
Dump
valve (VL1)
Compressor/
vacuum pump (PM1)
6498075A
Pneumatic Power Development

Refer to the instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
Pressure Development
The unregulated pressure from the pump is connected to a relief valve (RV1), which regulates
the pressure to 60 psi. The exhaust from RV1 is connected to a muffler (MUF3). From the
relief valve, the 60 psi passes through cooling coils (CL1) mounted over the Power Supply
intake fan, and then through the air water separator (FL1), which collects any condensation.
During Diluter cycles, the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH 750 System) routes a DRAIN command through the IBUS to the System Power
Controller card to open the dump valve (VL1), a solenoid valve. VL1 drains FL1 to prevent
water overflow into the pressure system.
The 60-psi output is connected to the:
r
System Power Controller card for monitoring.
30-psi regulator (RG1) for regulation to 30 psi.
2.9-2
5-psi regulator (RG2) for regulation to 5 psi.
Rear of the Power Supply for distribution to the Diluter.
PN 4277219B

r
Vacuum Development
The unregulated vacuum from the pump is connected to the:
r
Monitors
Pneumatic Levels and Status
The 60-psi, 30-psi, 5-psi, and high-vacuum lines are connected to transducers on the System
Power Controller card. The System Power Controller card determines the values and develops
the pneumatic status. The System Controller Display provides:
r
Digital displays of the unregulated vacuum, 60 psi, 30 psi and 5 psi.
Dual-color status indicators for the combined Power Supply temperatures and for
combined pneumatic levels.
A green status LED indicates all pneumatic output values are within specifications, red
indicates at least one of the values is outside the specifications. Specifications for the
pneumatic levels are in Table A.1-13.
Routes the pneumatic status on the IBUS for the AMC which generates a message if any
status is out of tolerance. Refer to Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
See Heading 2.10 for details about the System Power Controller and System Controller
Display cards.
Temperature Monitoring
See Figure 2.9-3. A thermistor in the compressor senses the internal temperature. At the
System Power Controller card, the TEMP PNEU signal is high when the pneumatic
temperature is within operating limits. If the compressor thermistor senses a temperature
80C, the Temp Detect circuit on the System Power Controller card changes the TEMP PNEU
signal to a low. The low TEMP PNEU signal from the optocoupler causes the V2 RETURN
signal to go high, which shuts off the +48 V2 dc and the compressor.
PN 4277219B
2.9-3
Figure 2.9-3 Pneumatic On Signals on the System Power Controller Card

/ P W R F A IL
F r o m B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly
P L D
(2 0 m s
d e la y )
U 3 9
P W R F A IL
A M C
P O W E R D O W N
5 V c o n tro l
/ V 1 O F F
T P 2 0
5 V
K e y p a d
/ V 1 R E T U R N
P O W E R O N
F F
T P 1 9
U 8
P O W E R O F F
+ 5 V c o n tro l
T o B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly
T P 1 8
/ V 2 R E T U R N
/ P N E U O N
T P 1 7
/ T E M P P N E U
7 2 1 9 0 2 0 B
Troubleshooting Tip: You can enable V2 for troubleshooting by placing a jumper across J18/J17.
Pressure Distribution
Refer to the instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for details.
30 Psi
30 psi is routed from the rear panel of the Power Supply to the rear panel of the Diluter. From
the rear of the Diluter, the 30 psi is routed to:
r
Solenoids.
Pressure manifolds.
Pinch valves.
Regulators to develop sheath, diff sample and retic sample pressures.
5 Psi
5 psi is routed from the rear panel of the Power Supply, through the rear panel of the Diluter,
to the 5-psi manifold (MF7). The 5 psi:
r
Produces mixing bubbles.
Drains the WBC bath into the Hgb cuvette.
Clears the apertures.
Drains the Hgb cuvette.
Drains the bath overflow chamber (VC10).
Vacuum Distribution
Refer to the instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for distribution details.
2.9-4
PN 4277219B
High Vacuum
Unregulated vacuum is routed from the rear of the Power Supply, through the rear panel of
the Diluter, to a vacuum chamber (VC21).
VC21 is a safety device to prevent liquid from entering the vacuum side of the
compressor/vacuum pump. VC21 contains a floating shutoff. If liquid is pulled into VC21,
the floating shutoff rises with the liquid. When the floating shutoff reaches the top of the
vacuum chamber, it blocks the vacuum input line. Blocking the vacuum input line prevents
liquid from being pulled into the line and back to the vacuum pump.
VC21 is connected to the vacuum overflow tank (VC22). VC22 distributes vacuum in the
Diluter to the:
r
Waste chambers to drain liquid.
Reagent reservoirs to refill the reservoirs.
Cleaning agent pump to refill the pump.
Sheath and backwash tanks to refill the tanks.
VC22 also traps any liquid that overflows into the vacuum line and contains a float sensor to
sense the level of the liquid. The float sensor is connected to the Sensor Distribution card and
is monitored by the Diluter 2 card. If the float sensor is activated, indicating there is liquid in
the overflow tank:
1.
SL39 and SL40 are energized for 5 seconds to drain VC22.
2.
If the sensor is still activated after 5 seconds of draining, the cycle is stopped and SL39
and SL40 are energized for another 7 seconds.
3.
If the sensor is still activated after the additional 7 seconds of draining, the instrument
generates a message. Refer to Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
Low Vacuum
High vacuum is connected to the low vacuum regulator (RG2) for regulation to 6 in. Hg. The
low vacuum is connected to the vacuum isolator (VC1), which distributes vacuum in the
Diluter for functions such as aperture count.
The PVT card monitors the low vacuum.
PVT Card
Function
The PVT card is located in the right compartment of the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-4 for
location. The PVT card:
r
Converts the diff ambient temperature thermistor signal for monitoring.

Note: This function only happens on older GENS Systems with a diff ambient
temperature thermistor. Newer GENS Systems and the LH 750 System do not have a
diff ambient temperature thermistor.
PN 4277219B
2.9-5
Uses transducers to convert the following pneumatic signals to an analog voltage for
monitoring t
Low vacuum for counting
Sheath pressure
Diff sample pressure
Retic sample pressure.
Input
r Sheath pressure from RG4
r
Diff sample pressure from RG3
Retic pressure from RG6
Count vacuum from RG2
Diff ambient temperature from the thermistor
Monitors
The PVT card routes:
r
Diff ambient temperature, sheath pressure, diff sample pressure and retic pressure signals
to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for monitoring
Count vacuum to the Diluter 1 card via the Sensor Distribution card for monitoring.
If the count vacuum exceeds the tolerance, the cycle stops. The Analyzer
VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen displays the count vacuum level. (Select SERVICE
MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.) Selecting F92 on
the Diluter keypad also displays the vacuum.
Connectors
The electrical and pneumatic connections for the PVT card are shown in Figure A.3-16 and
described in Table A.3-17.
2.9-6
PN 4277219B
POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL
2.10

Summary
Management of power development in the Analytical Station is accomplished through two
components in the Power Supply:
r
The System Power Controller card processes the Power Supply signals and voltages for
the AMC.
The System Power Controller Display provides a visual display of the Power Supply
pneumatic and voltage levels and status.
This section describes the System Power Controller card and the System Power Controller
Display. See Figure 2.10-1 for an overview. Refer to Figure 2.2-1 for the location of the
components. This section also describes the conditions that shut down the Power Supply.
Figure 2.10-1 System Power Controller Card and System Power Controller Display Block Diagram
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER DISPLAY
SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD

CR8 A/D CONVERTER
TRANSDUCERS
VACUUM
60 PSI
5 PSI
30 PSI
ZERO ADJ
ANALOG
SCALER
GAIN ADJ
MONITOR CIRCUIT
J3
J1
SELECT DISPLAY
MSD
NSD
LSD
DECODER
AC LINE
SEGMENT SELECT
CR1 PNEU
J5
J1
TO REAR OF
POWER
SUPPLY
IBUS
+5.2 V
CONTROL
J2
RS485
CR2 DC
PLD
CR3 TEMP
J7
TEMP PNEU
J4
FROM BULK
POWER
FILTER
CARD
POWER ON/OFF
CIR CUIT
+48 V2
CR 1
+48 V1
+5.2 V CONTROL
+12 V DC
CR 2
CR 3
CR 4
CR4 AC
BULK POWER
SUPPLY
MONITORING
J6
TO BULK
POWER SUPPLY
+5.2 V CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER
SUPPLY
+15 VDC
-15 VDC FOR SPC CARD
POWER SUPPLY
+5 VDC CIRCUITS
7219023B

Function
The System Power Controller card:
PN 4277219B
Manages the Analytical Station power off and power on routines.
Manages the Power Supply electronic and pneumatic supplies.
Monitors the Power Supply voltages and pneumatics for proper levels.
2.10-1
Reports levels and status.
Converts ac and pneumatic inputs to analog values.
Develops 15 Vdc and +5 Vdc for on-board use.
Inputs
r Bulk Power Supply dc voltages
r
ac input voltage
Pneumatic inputs for monitoring
Temperature inputs from Bulk Power Supply and compressor/vacuum pump
Monitors
Pneumatic Supply Levels. The System Power Controller card:
r
Routes the 60 psi, 30 psi, 5 psi and vacuum inputs through pressure transducers,
converts them to analog voltages, processes them into digital values, monitors the
individual values and routes them to the System Power Controller Display.
Develops a combined pneumatic status, determines if the combined status is good or

bad, and routes the status signal to the System Power Controller Display.
Temperature. A heat sensitive switch in the Bulk Power Supply and a thermistor in the
compressor/vacuum pump sense the temperature. The System Power Controller card:
r
Monitors the heat sensitive switch. If the Bulk Power Supply temperature exceeds 70C,
the heat sensitive switch shuts down the Electronic Power Supply and generates a high
OVERTEMP signal to the System Power controller card. For details, see Conditions that
Shut Down the Power Supply, Power Supply Overheating.
Monitors the thermistor. If the compressor/vacuum pump temperature exceeds 80C, the
thermistor shuts down the compressor/vacuum pump and generates a high TEMP PNEU
signal to the System Power controller card.
Determines a combined temperature status, determines if the combined status is good or

bad, and routes the status signal to the System Power Controller Display.
Note: Two other thermistors in the Power Supply, the intake and exhaust fan thermistors,
automatically regulate the speed of the fans, depending on the temperature inside the Power
Supply.
Input Line Voltage. The System Power Controller card:
2.10-2
Monitors the ac POWER FAIL signal from the Bulk Power Supply. For details, see
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply, Insufficient Ac Input.
Converts and processes the ac input line voltage into a digital value and routes the value
to the System Power Controller Display.
Uses digital thresholds to determine the ac status and routes the status signal to the
System Power Controller Display.
PN 4277219B
Bulk Power Supply Voltages. The System Power Controller card:

r
Monitors the +48 V1 dc, +48 V2 dc and +12 Vdc voltages from the Bulk Power Supply
individually and displays the results via on-board status LEDs.
The status LEDs are dual-color (red and green) LEDs. The green is powered by the
monitored voltage, the red by the 5.2 control voltage. Lighting both LEDs together
produces a third color option, amber. Refer to Table A.4-4 for a description of what each
LED color indicates.
Develops a combined dc voltage status, determines if the combined status is good or bad,
and routes the status signal to the System Power Controller Display.
A/D Converter. The System Power Controller card displays the status of its A/D converter via
an on-board status LED. Refer to Table A.4-4 for a description of what each LED color
indicates.
The System Power Controller card routes the SPC status to the APS2 card for access by the
AMC. The Analyzer ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES screen displays the values for the
pneumatic and line voltages. (Select SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES.) If any level is out of tolerance, a system message is
generated.
Connectors and LEDs
The System Power Controller card connectors and LEDs are shown in Figure A.4-4. For more
information about these components, see Table A.4-3 for the connectors and Table A.4-4 for
the LEDs.
System Power Controller Display

Function
The System Power Controller Display is an extension of the System Power Controller card
that displays the current electronic and pneumatic levels and status in the Power Supply. See
Figure 2.10-2.
Figure 2.10-2 System Power Controller Display
ELECTRONIC AND PNEUMATIC LEVEL DISPLAYS
PNEU 60 PSI
TEMP
STATUS
INDICATORS
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
AC LINE
AC
DC
STATUS
INDICATORS
7253122A
PN 4277219B
2.10-3
The System Power Controller Display contains:

r
Decoders to interpret signals from the System Power Controller card.
12 red, 7-segment LED displays, in 5 banks to display electronic and pneumatic values.
4 dual-color red and green LEDs to display status.
Electronic and Pneumatic Level Displays. The System Power Controller card sends
information to the System Power Controller Display as a bank address and values for the
most, next, and least significant digits (MSD, NSD and LSD, respectively). The System Power
Controller Display decodes and outputs the information as select display and segment display
addresses. The addresses turn on the corresponding LED segments for visual display on the
front of the Power Supply. The addresses are clocked to provide a continually updated display.
Power Supply Status Displays. The four status indicator LEDs on the front of the Power
Supply are green when a status is within specifications, red when a status is outside of
specifications. Table 2.10-1 describes the values monitored by each status indicator LED. See
Table A.1-13 for Pneumatic Power Supply specifications, Table A.1-24 for ac line voltage
specifications.
Table 2.10-1 System Power Controller Display Status LEDs
LED
Monitors
PNEU
Combined vacuum and pressure levels
TEMP
Electronic and Pneumatic Power Supplies temperatures
AC
Ac input voltage
DC
Combined +48 Vdc Analyzer, +48 Vdc compressor and +12 Vdc supplies
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply

Insufficient Ac Input
When the ac input goes too low, the Bulk Power Supply shuts down. However, both +48 Vdc
supplies have a 40-millisecond (minimum) output holdup time allowing the AMC to save
data to RAM and perform an orderly shutdown before dc power is lost.
The Bulk Power Supply routes the AC POWER FAIL signal to the System Power Controller
card. This signal is high when the ac input is within specifications.
When the Bulk Power Supply detects a low ac input, an internal 20-millisecond timer starts.
After the 20 milliseconds elapse, the ac input is sampled again. If the signal is now high, the
ac is within specifications. Waiting 20 milliseconds and sampling the ac input a second time
when the first signal is low allows the instrument to filter out power glitches caused by
momentary ac losses, such as brownouts.
If the ac input remains low, the Bulk Power Supply outputs a low AC POWER FAIL signal to
the System Power Controller card. When the System Power Controller card receives a low AC
POWER FAIL signal, it sends the PWR FAIL (DISABLE CMOS MEM) signal to the AMC. The
AMC generates the DISABLE RAM signal, returning battery protection to the RAM before the
Bulk Power Supply shuts off.
2.10-4
PN 4277219B
Power Supply Overheating

When the temperature reaches 70 C, the heat sensitive switch within the Bulk Power Supply
sends a high OVERTEMP signal to the System Power Controller card. The switch
automatically shuts down the bulk power supply to prevent damage to the components.
Pressing POWER OFF
Refer to Power-Off Signals under Heading 2.6, ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER
UP, for an explanation of the power off sequence.
PN 4277219B
2.10-5
2.10-6
PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL
2.11
SYSTEM CONTROL
Summary
Master control of the instrument is accomplished through three components in the Analyzer:
r
The AMC (Analyzer Microcontroller card) runs the Analytical Station software which
controls all system timing.
The COMM (Communication) INTERFACE card provides a serial interface between the
Analyzer and all other subsystems.
The Scope Module provides the user interface for the instrument.
This section describes the functions, inputs and outputs of the AMC, COMM INTERFACE
card, and the Scope Module. This section also describes the RS/Opto Intfc card, the main
electrical bridge between the Analyzer and the Diluter.
For information on power development control, see Heading 2.10, for information on Diluter
control, see Heading 2.12.
System Control Overview

Figure 2.11-1 provides an overview of system control, showing the components with the
communications paths linking the instrument components.
Figure 2.11-1 System Control Overview Block Diagram
ANALYZER
AMC
SBUS
RS232
RS232 (AUX)
6498030B
SCOPE
MODULE
IBUS
RS232
IBUS
DILUTER 1
CARD
BCD
BCS
PVT
CARD
DILUTER
CBL
ADAPTER
IBUS
IBUS
IBUS
RS232 (SM)
DILUTER 3
CARD
WORKSTATION
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (SM)
DILUTER
RS232
DILUTER
PROCESSOR/
DILUTER CPU
CARD *
8-BIT
PARALLEL
OPTO
ISOLATED
DIFF POWER
SUPPLY CARD
HS-RS232 (RAW)
HGB
PREAMP
OPTOISO RS232 (SM)

RS232 ANALYZER
RS/OPTO
INTFC
CARD
OPTOISOL
RS232 COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
CARD
IBUS
LS
PREAMP
DIFF
PROCESSOR
CARD
RS232 (SM)
ANALOG
CARD
RF
PREAMP
CARD
API /
SC/A CARD *
PLT
PROCESSOR
RS232 (RAW)
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR/
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR 2
SLIDEMAKER
DILUTER 2
CARD
DILUTER/SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER SUPPLY
CARD
POWER SUPPLY
SPC
CARD
RS232
( CHANNELS FOR
ANALYTICAL STATION #2 ON GEN S SYSTEM)
* Two circuit cards are listed. The first card is used in the GENS System, the second in the
LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
2.11-1
SYSTEM CONTROL
AMC
Function
The AMC is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for location.
The AMC contains:
r
80186 microprocessor, 8087 math coprocessor and 82188 bus controller
384K of EPROM for the program and 128K of RAM for calculations
Fully functional real-time system clock
Power-fail write protect circuitry for the system clock and RAM
Lithium battery to backup the system clock and the RAM containing system
configuration, API card voltage settings, and calibration factors
16-bit system bus structure in the Analyzer for address, control and data lines
8-position DIP switch for system configuration
Jumpers for battery configuration.
The AMC:
r
Provides the main program which controls the system timing.
Communicates serially with the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the
DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System), the DIFF PROCESSOR card, the Workstation,
and the SlideMaker through the COMM INTERFACE card to synchronize the Analytical
Station, Workstation, and SlideMaker.
Monitors the system status of the Diluter and Power Supply and generates status and
alert messages for display on the Scope Module.
Controls the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card
(LH 750 System) which controls all Diluter timing functions and accumulates CBC data.
Analyzes the CBC data in the GENS System; routes the raw CBC data to the
Workstation for analysis in the LH 750 System.
Controls the DIFF PROCESSOR card which accumulate VCS raw data.
Initiates the system reset signals during power up, manual reset using the RESET button,
and power fail recovery.
RESET Switch
The RESET switch is a normally closed switch in the AMC Power Fail circuit that allows the
operator to reset the Analytical Station. See Figure 2.11-2 for the RESET signal flow. Pressing
the RESET button on the Analyzer (see Figure 2.11-3) opens the RESET switch, generating a
high PWR FAIL signal, and causing the AMC to generate the RESET signal.
If the reset switch opens during a cycle, the cycle is stopped, any data is discarded, and the
instrument performs the drain, rinse and backwash functions; checks the Analyzer memory;
and checks the levels of the reagents and waste container in preparation for the next cycle.
2.11-2
PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL
Figure 2.11-2 RESET Signal Block Diagram

A M C
J 5
A A A B
R E S E T
S Y S T E M R E S E T
N C
J 19
S P C
P W R F A IL
J 26
B A B B
31
31
P in 1 1
A P S 1 c a rd
A S P 2 c a rd
C O M M IN T E R F A C E c a rd
D IL U T E R P R O C E S S O R c a rd /
D IL U T E R C P U c a rd *
D IF F P R O C E S S O R c a rd
A P I S IG N A L G E N E R A T O R c a rd /
R /W /P S C /A c a rd *
R E D /W H IT E P R O C E S S O R c a rd /
R E D /W H IT E P R O C E S S O R 2 c a rd
P L A T E L E T P R O C E S S O R c a rd
C R T
D ig ita l b a c k p la n e
7219022B
Figure 2.11-3 Analyzer RESET Button

Reset
button
Reset
button
J27
GEN S System
LH 750 System
J26
J24
J19
J26
RESET
6498125B
DIP Switches and Jumpers

Refer to Figure A.2-1 for the location of the DIP switch and the jumpers on the AMC. Refer to
Table A.2-1 and Table A.2-2 for the DIP switch settings and to AMC, Jumpers, under
Heading A.2, for the jumper settings.
PN 4277219B
2.11-3
SYSTEM CONTROL
COMM INTERFACE Card

Function
The COMM INTERFACE card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for location.
The COMM INTERFACE card contains:
r
r
r
Communication circuits consisting of DUARTS, opto-isolators and PAL circuits.

A/D converter for Hgb signal conversion.
Two 8-position DIP switches for port configuration.
The COMM INTERFACE card:

r
r
r
Provides the main communications between the AMC and the rest of the system.
Converts the analog Hgb-blank and Hgb-read signals to digital signals.
Converts between 16-bit parallel data (from the SBUS) and serial data, for routing on
communication paths. See Figure 2.11-4.
Figure 2.11-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Communication Links

ANALYZER
AMC
RS232 (AUX)
RS232
IBUS
DILUTER 1
CARD
BCD
BCS
PVT
CARD
DILUTER
CBL
ADAPTER
IBUS
RS232 (SM)
DILUTER 3
CARD
RS232 (SM)
WORKSTATION
RS232 (SM)
DILUTER
SCOPE
MODULE
IBUS
RS232 (SM)
RS232 ANALYZER
DIFF POWER
SUPPLY CARD
HS-RS232 (RAW)
HGB
PREAMP
OPTOISO RS232 (SM)
RS/OPTO
INTFC
CARD
DILUTER
PROCESSOR/
DILUTER CPU
CARD *
RS232
8-BIT
PARALLEL
OPTO
ISOLATED
LS
PREAMP
RS232 COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
CARD
RS232
OPTOISOL
RF
PREAMP
CARD
DIFF
PROCESSOR
CARD
RS232
ANALOG
CARD
SBUS
API /
SC/A CARD *
RS232 (SM)
PLT
PROCESSOR
RS232 (RAW)
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR/
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR 2
SLIDEMAKER
DILUTER 2
CARD
DILUTER/SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER SUPPLY
CARD
POWER SUPPLY
SPC
CARD
RS232
(CHANNELS FOR
6498032B
LH 750 System.
2.11-4
PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL
The communications links are:

r
A system bus (SBUS)
A 16-bit data bus structure for communication within the Analyzer
The following serial interfaces for RS232 communications to t
DIFF PROCESSOR card
DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System)
RS/Opto Intfc card for the Workstation
RS/Opto Intfc card for the SlideMaker.
Switches
See Figure A.2-4 for the location of the DIP switches. See Table A.2-7 and Table A.2-8 for the
DIP switch settings.
RS/Opto Intfc Card

Function
The RS/Opto Intfc card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-4 for location. The
RS/Opto Intfc card is the main electrical bridge between the Analyzer and Diluter, routing
IBUS and control signals. See Figure 2.11-5.
The RS/Opto Intfc card:
r
Provides SCSI connectors for IBUS (RS485) communication links to the Diluter Cbl
Adapter card, the Diluter 1 card, and the DILUTER PROCESSOR card on the GENS
System or the DILUTER CPU card on the LH 750 System (via the Analyzer backplane).
Gathers optocoupled, TTL, and analog signals from the following components and
converts them to RS232 signals for routing to the Analyzer-
LS Preamp module - routes VCS mode, gain and LS offset signals from the DIFF
PROCESSOR card and LS signals to the ANALOG card.
Hgb Preamp module - routes Hgb voltages to the COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

card.
PVT card - routes monitoring signals for ambient temperature and TTM pressures to
the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
Diff Power Supply card - routes monitoring voltages to the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
Provides connectors and pathways for the t
Workstation - three channels of RS232 communication signals. One is for Diff and
Retic raw data (high speed), the second is for the SlideMaker, and the third is for the
AMC card via the COMM INTERFACE card.
SlideMaker (via the Diluter 3 card) - two channels of RS232 communication signals.
One is for the Workstation and the other is for the AMC card via the COMM
INTERFACE card.
Connectors
The RS/Opto Intfc card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-18 and described in Table A.3-19.
PN 4277219B
2.11-5
SYSTEM CONTROL
Figure 2.11-5 RS/Opto Intfc Card Communication Links

ANALYZER
AMC
API /
SC/A CARD *
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
CARD
RS232
BCD
BCS
PVT
CARD
DILUTER
CBL
ADAPTER
IBUS
RS232 (SM)
WORKSTATION
DILUTER 2
CARD
RS232 (SM)
DILUTER 3
CARD
RS232 (SM)
DILUTER
RS232 (AUX)
SCOPE
MODULE
DILUTER 1
CARD
RS232 (SM)
RS232 ANALYZER
HS-RS232 (RAW)
DIFF POWER
SUPPLY CARD
OPTOISO RS232 (SM)
RS/OPTO
INTFC
CARD
HGB
PREAMP
DILUTER
PROCESSOR/
DILUTER CPU
CARD *
RS232
IBUS
LS
PREAMP
RS232
8-BIT
PARALLEL
OPTO
ISOLATED
RF
PREAMP
CARD
DIFF
PROCESSOR
CARD
RS232 (RAW)
ANALOG
CARD
RS232
OPTOISOL
RS232
PLT
PROCESSOR
RS232 (SM)
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR/
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR 2
DILUTER/SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER SUPPLY
CARD
SLIDEMAKER
POWER SUPPLY
SPC
CARD
RS232
(CHANNELS FOR
6498031B
LH 750 System.
Scope Module
Function
The Scope Module plugs into the CRT backplane in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1
(GENS System) or Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System) for location of the Scope Module.
The Scope module consists of the Scope 1, Scope 2 and CRT4 Display cards; the Analyzer
buttons (keypad); and the Analyzer CRT. While the Analyzer buttons and display look
different on the GENS System and the LH 750 System, the Scope module behind them is the
same.
The Scope Module is a user interface that displays:
2.11-6
Messages and information about the Analytical Station status
Data
Electronic test signals for troubleshooting and aligning the TTM.
PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL
The Scope Module routes operator requests for Analyzer menu options and system
configuration selections, via the Analyzer buttons (keypad), to the AMC. For a summary of
the Analyzer menu options, refer to Figure A.10-1 (GENS System) or Figure A.10-2 (LH 750
System). For accessing the service options, refer to Heading 4.2 for the SERVICE MENU,
Heading 4.3 for the SCOPE MENU.
The Scope 1 and 2 cards provide displays of:
r
Analog signals
Blood sample signals.
The CRT4 Display card provides:

r
SBUS interface
Video display, memory and drivers for the CRT
Keyboard interface
Scope 1 and 2 card interface.
A brightness potentiometer.
Note: On the LH 750 System, the brightness potentiometer has been moved to make
access to it much easier. Refer to CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System under
Heading 4.34 for the procedure.
The CRT4 Display card has one DIP switch, SW1. Refer to Figure A.2-5 for the location of the
DIP switch and to Table A.2-9 for the settings.
Inputs
r +12 Vdc from APS2 card to CRT4 Display card for power for the Analyzer CRT
PN 4277219B
RED 1, 2, 3 and WHT 1, 2, 3 buffered signals from the RED/WHITE PROCESSSOR card
(GENS System) or the RED/WHITE PROCESSSOR 2 card (LH 750 System) for pulse
display during counting or electronic pulse tests
DC, RF and LS buffered signals from the ANALOG card for pulse display during
counting or special functions
2.11-7
SYSTEM CONTROL
2.11-8
PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL
2.12
DILUTER CONTROL
Summary
Control of the Diluter is accomplished through the following components:
The AMC instructs the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH 750 System) to initiate the Diluter tasks.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR or the DILUTER CPU card sends program instructions to
the Diluter 1, Diluter 2, Diluter 3 and Diluter 4 cards, and monitors the status of Diluter
operations.
The Diluter 1, 2, 3 and 4 cards develop local power and contain drivers for the hardware
components of the Diluter.
The Diluter/numeric keypad displays error messages and allows the user to manually
control certain functions.
r
r
r
r
This section includes an overview block diagram of the Diluter control system, see
Figure 2.12-1, and a description of the DILUTER PROCESSOR card, the DILUTER CPU card,
the IBUS cable and the RS485 Interface modules, the Diluter Cbl Adapter, Diluter 1, Diluter 2,
Diluter 3 and Diluter 4 cards, and the Diluter/numeric keypad. For more information about
the AMC, see AMC under Heading 2.11, System Control.
Figure 2.12-1 Diluter Control Overview
D IL U T E R
P R O C E S S O R /
D IL U T E R C P U
C A R D *
R S 4 8 5
A N A L Y Z E R
N E W
R S /O P T O
IN T F C C A R D
O L D D IL U T E R
K E Y P A D A N D
D IS P L A Y
IN T E R C O N N E C T S
S B U S
D IL U T E R
D IF F A M B IE N T T H E R M IS T O R
P R E S S U R E A N D V A C U U M R E G U L A T O R S
P V T
C A R D
IB U S
D IL U T E R
IN T E R C O N N E C T S
IB U S
B A R -C O D E
D E C O D E R
C A R D
D IL U T E R 1
C A R D
S E N S O R
C A R D
R S 4 8 5
B A R -C O D E S C A N N E R
D IL U T E R S E N S O R S /S W IT C H E S
H G B L A M P
IB U S
F O R S O L ID
S T A T E
D IL U T E R C B L
A D A P T E R
C A R D
IB U S
IB U S
R S
S
P
C O N
4 8
Y S
O W
T R
C A
P O W E R
5
T E M
E R
O L L E R
R D
S U P P L Y
R F D E T E C T O R
P R E A M P C A R D
F L O W
IB U S
R S 4 8 5
D IL U T
S O L E N O ID
P O W E R S
C A R
E R /
/O P T IC S
U P P L Y
D
R S 4 8 5
D IL U T E R 3
C A R D
D IL U T E R 2
C A R D
M IX M O T O R S
S O L E N O ID S
P V T
C A R D
D IF F P O W E R
S U P P L Y C A R D
C E L L
S W E E P -F L O W
C O U N T V A C
L IG H T S C A T T E R
P R E A M P M O D U L E
R E S E R V O IR A N D S O L E N O ID S
R E S E R V O IR IN T F C C A R D
P R O B E W IP E IN T E R C O N N E C T
B L O O D D E T E C T O R S , F R O N T
D IF F H E A
H E A T E R S
D IL U T E R 4
D IL U T E R
C A R D
P E L T IE R
S T A IN C H
S L ID E M A K E R S E R IA L P O R T
S L ID E M A K E R P A R A L L E L P O R T
A N D R E A R
T E R T H E R M IS T O R
A M B IE N T T H E R M IS T O R
M O D U L E
A M B E R T H E R M IS T O R
6 4 9 8 0 3 3 B
This function is only on GENS Systems with software 4A and higher and on LH 750 Systems.
PN 4277219B
2.12-1
DILUTER CONTROL
DILUTER PROCESSOR vs DILUTER CPU Cards - the Old and New Diluter Interconnects
Two Diluter interconnects are in use, the original (old) Diluter interconnects used in the
GENS System and the current (new) Diluter interconnects used in the LH 750 System.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card is part of the old design. This design includes the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card and a compatible Diluter 1 card and Diluter keypad. In this design the
Diluter keypad interfaces with the Diluter 1 card.
In the new design, the DILUTER CPU card replaces the DILUTER PROCESSOR card. This
design includes the DILUTER CPU card and its compatible Diluter 1 card, numeric keypad
(which performs the same functions as the Diluter keypad), analog backplane, and digital
backplane. In this design the numeric keypad interfaces with the DILUTER CPU card.
ATTENTION: The cards for the new Diluter interconnects are a set and cannot be mixed with the
cards from the old.
DILUTER PROCESSOR CARD

Function
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer of the GENS System. Refer to
Figure 2.3-1 for location. The DILUTER PROCESSOR card contains:
r
8085 microprocessor, 128K PROM and 8K static RAM for program instructions and
Diluter control
1K dual-port RAM and DUART for serial communication with the AMC via the COMM
INTERFACE card
On-board RS485 interface module for parallel communications on the IBUS.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card uses these components to:

r
Receive requests from the AMC and provide operating instructions to the Diluter
modules to perform the tasks.
Monitor status information to maintain Diluter operations.
Report status information to the AMC.
Switch
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card has one DIP switch, SW1. See Figure A.2-8 for location,
Table A.2-12 for settings.
DILUTER CPU CARD

Function
The DILUTER CPU card is located in the Analyzer of the LH 750 System. Refer to
Figure 2.3-4 for location. The DILUTER CPU card contains:
r
2.12-2
8085 microprocessor, 128K PROM and 8K static RAM for program instructions and
Diluter control
PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL
1K dual-port RAM and DUART for serial communication with the AMC via the COMM
INTERFACE card
On-board RS485 interface module for parallel communications on the IBUS.
On-board PIC microcontrollers for communication with the PIC microcontrollers on the
Keypad and Display Interface card.
The DILUTER CPU card uses these components to:

r
Receive requests from the AMC and provide operating instructions to the Diluter
modules to perform the tasks.
Monitor status information to maintain Diluter operations.
Report status information to the AMC.
Interfaces with the Diluter/numeric keypad.
Switch
The DILUTER CPU card has one DIP switch, SW1. See Figure A.2-7 for location,
Table A.2-11 for settings.
Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules

The IBUS is a parallel communication link for transferring control signals and data between
the System Power Controller, DILUTER PROCESSOR or DILUTER CPU, Diluter 1, Diluter 2
and Diluter 3 cards. Each card contains an RS485 Interface module. This module is a SIMM
style assembly that provides bidirectional communication. The 50-pin, SCSI connectors
provide the physical connections between the cards.
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card

Function
The Diluter Cbl Adapter card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-5 (GENS System)
or Figure 2.4-13 (LH 750 System) for location. The Diluter Cbl Adapter card is a bridge
connection for the IBUS 50-pin, SCSI connectors, linking the System Power Controller,
Diluter 2, Diluter 3 and RS/Opto Intfc cards.
Connectors
The Diluter Cbl Adapter card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-13 and described in
Table A.3-12.
Diluter 1 Card
Styles in Use
Two styles of Diluter 1 cards are currently in use, depending on the Diluter interconnects.
r
PN 4277219B
The original Diluter 1 card, which is used with the old Diluter interconnects, interfaces
directly with the Diluter keypad and routes the +5 V control voltage and the control
return to the keypad.
2.12-3
DILUTER CONTROL
The new Diluter 1 card, which is used with the new Diluter interconnects, does not
interface with the numeric keypad or route 5 V control voltage and the control return to
the keypad. It does, however, provide a pull-down resistor for the +5.2 V control voltage.
For more information on the role of the Diluter 1 card in the old and new Diluter
interconnects, refer to Heading 2.6, ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP.
Function
The Diluter 1 card is located in the Diluter. See Figure 2.4-4 (GENS System) or
Figure 2.4-12 (LH 750 System) for location. The Diluter 1 card contains:
r
Individual switching power supplies
Monitor circuitry
Adjustment and driver circuitry for the Hgb lamp
RS485 Interface module for IBUS communication link
Circuitry for RS232 communications with the Bar-Code Decoder card
LED status indicators
Interface connections with the Diluter keypad (original style only)
Pull-down resistor for the +5.2 V CONTROL voltage (new style only).
Using these components, the Diluter 1 card:

r
Develops voltages for use locally and by Diluter components. See Figure 2.12-2 for
power distribution.
Figure 2.12-2 Diluter 1 Card Power Supply Distribution

+ 4 8 V D
S Y S T E
G N
-4 8 V D C R E
J 7
C
D
T
J 5
H G B V O L T A G E
P O W E R
S U P P L Y
J 4
H G B L A M P S U P P L Y
T O
L A M P R E T
+ 1 5 V D C
S E N S O R
C A R D
-1 5 V D C
+ 5 V D C
H G B
L A M P
+ 5 V D C
D C -T O -D C
P O W E R
S U P P L Y
+ 1 5 V D C
-1 5 V D C
P O W E R
S U P P L Y
6 4 9 8 1 4 8 B
2.12-4
P O W E R
S U P P L Y
+ 9 V D C
P O W E R
S U P P L Y
-5 V D C
-9 V D C
T O B A R -C O D E
D E C O D E R
C A R D
+ 5 V D C
J 6
PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL
Adjusts the Hgb lamp voltage. The user initiates the adjustment from the ANALYZER
FUNCTIONS menu, HGB LAMP ADJUST screen. The AMC initiates a change in the
lamp driver, which alters the lamp voltage to produce an acceptable analog voltage at the
Hgb Preamp module.
Receives bar-code data from the Bar-Code Decoder card using the RS232 communication
path. During scanning, the bar-code information is converted to TTL signals and routed
to the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System).
Monitors the RF DETECT signal from the RF Detector Preamp card and routes the RF
ON signal to the Diff Power Supply card to control the output of the +300 Vdc power
supply on the Diff Power Supply card.
Receives cassette transport assembly sensor and switch TTL level signals from the Sensor
Distribution card. The Sensor signals are routed to the DILUTER PROCESSOR card
(GENS System) or DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System), which uses the sensor status
to perform Diluter operations and sends the status to the AMC.
For more information, see:

r
Heading 2.14 for details about the Sensor Distribution card, Bar-Code Decoder card and
Cassette Transport Assembly
Heading 2.21 for details about the RF Detector Preamp card.
Input
+48 Vdc and return from the backplane
voltage bus
Outputs
r
+5 Vdc and return for local digital

circuits
15 Vdc for local analog circuits and

electronic manometer power
Voltage for Hgb lamp power

t
+6 Vdc and return from original

Diluter 1 card
+7.2 Vdc and return from new

Diluter 1 card
9 Vdc for the Bar-Code Decoder and

Bar-Code Scanner cards
-5 Vdc for the Bar-Code Decoder and

Bar-Code Scanner cards
Monitoring
The Diluter 1 card:
r
Develops voltage values and statuses for the +5 V, Hgb lamp voltage and the 15 V power
supplies. The AMC generates a system message if any voltage is outside its specifications.
Refer to Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
Note: The voltage supplied by the Hgb voltage power supply differs, depending on the
style of Diluter 1 card. On the original card it supplies 6.0 Vdc, on the new card 7.2 Vdc.
While this difference affects the test point readings it does not affect the voltage reading
PN 4277219B
2.12-5
DILUTER CONTROL
on the Analyzer screen. The software adjusts the voltage reading from the new Diluter 1
card to mimic the reading from the old Diluter 1 card for the Analyzer display and for
determining if the voltage reading is within specifications.
r
Receives 15 V from the Diff Power Supply and develops the voltage value and status
that are routed on the IBUS for display.
Routes all the voltage values and statuses as DILUTER 1 status to the APS2 card for
display on the Analyzer VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen. (Select SERVICE MENU tt
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
Connectors and LEDs

The Diluter 1 card connectors and LEDs are shown in Figure A.3-3. The connectors are
described in Table A.3-3. The LEDs, which indicate the status of voltages and signals, are
Diluter 2 Card
Styles in Use
Four styles of Diluter 2 cards are currently in use.
r
The original Diluter 2 card is used on GENS Systems (software 3A or lower) without
the SlideMaker option.
The Diluter 2 card is used on GENS Systems (software 3A or lower) with a SlideMaker
option. This Diluter 2 card added a connector for BD3. This card is also compatible with
GENS Systems (software 3A or lower) without the SlideMaker option.
The Diluter 2 REL (reliability) card is used on GENS Systems with software 4A and
higher. This Diluter 2 card added drivers for four solenoids and monitoring for the
sweep-flow reservoir. On this Diluter 2 card the bubble/blood detector test points and
adjustments are relocated to the upper left edge of the card for easier access.
The Diluter 2 RBD (remote blood detector) card is used on the LH 750 System. Because
of the lack of space between the left side of the Analytical Station and the LH SlideMaker,
the bubble/blood detector test points and adjustments are removed from this Diluter 2
card and relocated on the BD ADJ card in the Analyzer.
Function
r
Monitor circuitry
LED status indicators.
The Diluter 2 card:
2.12-6
Uses +15 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card to generate 10 Vdc
and +5 Vdc reference voltages for the monitoring circuits.
Monitors the probe-position sensors and controls the Probe-Wipe module.
PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL
Monitors the reagent reservoir sensors and provides the power drivers for the solenoids
responsible for refilling the reagent reservoirs.
Provides the power drivers for the solenoids responsible for refilling the sweep-flow
reservoir and for controlling the cylinder on the Probe-Wipe module (Diluter 2 REL and
Diluter 2 RBD cards only).
Monitors the float sensors for the backwash tank, sheath tank and waste container.
Provides comparator and logic circuitry for the operation and adjustment of the
bubble/blood detectors and provides on-board LEDs to indicate timing and status during
adjustment.
Note: On the Diluter 2 RBD (remote blood detectors) card, these adjustments have been
moved to the BD ADJ card in the Analyzer for easier access.
Monitors the Diluter ambient, diff heater, Peltier module and stain chamber heater
temperatures for the Diluter 4 card.
Provides logic control circuitry for the Diluter 4 card for the diff heater, stain chamber
heater and the Peltier module for Retic clearing solution.
For more information, see:

r
Diluter 4 Card for details about the heating of the retic and diff lytic reagents
Heading 2.17 for details about the Probe-Wipe module and bubble/blood detectors
Heading 2.13 for details about the reagent tanks and reservoirs.
Inputs
r +5 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
r
+15 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
-15 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
+24 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
Monitoring
The Diluter 2 card:
PN 4277219B
Routes the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card outputs, 15 V, +5 V, and +24 V,

through a circuit to develop a reference voltage level and voltage status for each voltage.
The AMC generates a message if any voltage is outside of specifications. Refer to
Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
Routes the +12 V from the Diluter 4 card to develop a reference voltage level and status.
Routes the Diluter ambient and heater temperatures from the Diluter 4 card.
Routes the following DILUTER LEFT voltage values and temperatures for display on the
Analyzer VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen. (Select SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
t
15 Vdc and +24 Vdc from the Diluter/Optics/Solenoid Power Supply card
+12 Vdc from the Diluter 4 card
Diluter ambient, diff heater, Peltier and stain heater temperatures.
2.12-7
DILUTER CONTROL
Connectors and LEDs

described in Table A.3-5. The Diluter 2 card has two banks of LEDs, one for the timing signals
and the status of the bubble/blood detectors, the other for the status of the reagent levels.
Both banks are described in Table A.3-6.
BD ADJ Card
Function
The BD ADJ card is located in the Analyzer of the LH 750 System. See Figure 2.3-4 for
location. The BD ADJ card provides bubble/blood detector test points and potentiometers and
a lyse timing connector on the front of the Analyzer where they are easily accessed.
Inputs
Outputs
TP1
Front blood detector drive
TP4
Rear blood detector drive
TP5
Threshold
TP8
TP11
TP12
Lyse timing
Connectors, Test Points, and Adjustments
The BD ADJ card connectors, test points, and adjustments are shown in Figure A.2-3. The
connectors are described in Table A.2-5, the test points and adjustments in Table A.2-6.
Diluter 3 Card
Styles in Use
Three styles of Diluter 3 cards are currently in use.
r
The original Diluter 3 card is used on GENS Systems without the SlideMaker option.
The Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card is used on GENS Systems with a SlideMaker
option. This Diluter 3 card added two connectors for SlideMaker components installed
in the Analytical Station. This card is also compatible with GENS Systems without the
SlideMaker option.
The Diluter 3 LH card is required for the LH 750 System. This Diluter 3 card added four
solenoid drivers for the shear valve solenoids in the Random Access module. This card is
also compatible with all GENS Systems.
Function
Figure 2.4-13 (LH 750 System) for location.
2.12-8
PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL
The Diluter 3 card contains:

r
Logic circuitry and drivers t
For the dc motors for the diff and retic mixing chambers
For all the Diluter solenoids except the reagent reservoir solenoids
LED status indicator
Interface for the SlideMaker.
The Diluter 3 card uses four logic devices (PALs) and a programmable switch matrix for
outputs to provide power and driver circuitry for the dc motors for the diff and retic mixing
chambers and for all the Diluter solenoids except the reagent reservoir solenoids
The solenoids are grouped together into manifolds that provide a common pneumatic input
and a centralized distribution point. To minimize wiring harnesses, the Diluter 3 card is
connected to solenoid manifold interface cards, which are located on or near the solenoids.
The interface card connects the driver outputs to one side of the solenoid and provides
+24 Vdc to the other side. When instructed by the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS
System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System), the Diluter 3 card enables a solenoid
address and a control signal to a solenoid driver. The driver provides a path to ground to
energize the solenoid.
Refer to Table A.6-1 for a list of the solenoids and their functions. For solenoid wiring details,
see the instruments cable interconnection and signal interconnection diagrams in Chapter 6.
Inputs
r +24 Vdc and return from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
r
+5 Vdc and ground from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
Connectors and LED

The Diluter 3 card connectors and LED are shown in Figure A.3-9 The connectors are
described in Table A.3-8. The Diluter 3 card has one LED that blinks during switch scan
ready state.
Diluter 4 Card
Function
PN 4277219B
Circuitry to sense and convert thermistor signals to temperature.
Driver circuitry to activate the heaters and the Peltier module.
Reference and driver voltages for the heating and cooling elements.
dc-to-dc power supply for developing +12 Vdc.
LEDs that indicate the status of the heaters and Peltier module.
2.12-9
DILUTER CONTROL
The Diluter 4 card receives the thermistor signals, converts the thermistor signals to
temperature signals and routes the temperature signals to the Diluter 2 card for monitoring.
The Diluter 4 card uses a dc to dc power supply to develop +12 Vdc from +48 Vdc (received
via the backplane voltage bus) to power the Peltier module.
For specifications on reagent heating, see:
r
Table A.1-14 for diff analysis reagents
Table A.1-15 for retic analysis reagents.
Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit. A Peltier module is used to heat or cool the retic
clearing solution to maintain an optimum reaction temperature when the clearing solution is
added to the stain and blood mixture in the retic chamber.
The Peltier module contains a thermistor and Peltier cells. The DILUTER AMBIENT
THERMISTOR and the PELTIER THERMISTOR signals are used in a comparator circuit on
the Diluter 4 card to activate the driver to heat or cool the Peltier cells. See Figure 2.12-3.
Figure 2.12-3 Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit
CR9
DILUTER AMBIENT THERMISTOR
PELTIER THERMISTOR
COOL
COOL PELTIER
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
THERMISTOR
COMPARATOR
CR8
HEAT
HEAT PELTIER
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
PELTIER TEMP
AMBIENT TEMP
7253128A
The DILUTER AMBIENT TEMP and PELTIER TEMP signals are routed to the Diluter 2 card
for monitoring.
Stain Chamber Heater Circuit. The ceramic retic chamber has a heater around it which is
heated to maintain an optimum reaction temperature for the blood and stain mixture, and a
thermistor to sense the temperature.
The Stain Thermistor circuit on the Diluter 4 card (Figure 2.12-4) activates the driver for the
stain chamber heater. The STAIN TEMP signal is routed to the Diluter 2 card for monitoring.
Figure 2.12-4 Stain Chamber Heater Circuit
STAIN TEMP
CR7
STAIN THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
CIRCUIT
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
STAIN HEAT
7253126A
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit. The diff heater is an aluminum block with a heating
element and a thermistor around it. The diff lytic reagent is heated to provide the optimum
reaction temperature when mixed with the blood in the mixing chamber.
2.12-10
PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL
The DILUTER AMBIENT THERMISTOR and DIFF HEATER THERMISTOR signals are used
in a comparator circuit on the Diluter 4 card to determine if the diff heater driver is activated.
See Figure 2.12-5.
The DIFF LYTIC REAGENT TEMP signal is routed to the Diluter 2 card for monitoring.
Figure 2.12-5 Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit
DIFF REAGENT TEMP
DIFF HEATER THERMISTOR
DILUTER AMBIENT THERMISTOR
CR5
THERMISTOR
CIRCUIT
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
DIFF HEAT
7253127A
Inputs
Connectors and LEDs
described in Table A.3-9, the LEDs in Table A.3-10.
Diluter/Numeric Keypad
Function
The Diluter keypad located on the lower front cover of the GENS System Diluter
(Figure 2.12-6) and the numeric keypad mounted on the front door of the LH 750 System
Analyzer (Figure 2.12-7) comprise the following three components:
r
LCD Display module. The LCD Display module contains an LCD panel with two lines of
16 characters to display messages and is backlighted for easy viewing of messages and
entries.
Membrane keypad. The membrane keypad comprises numeric keys, control keys and a
function (F) key.
The numeric keys allow the operator to enter digital information.
The control keys allow the operator to request certain functions, such as turning the
power on (POWER ON). These functions are described in the Operators Guide.
The F-key allows the operator to perform additional functions. The F-key functions
are described in Table A.5-1.
Keyboard and Display Interface card. The Keyboard and Display Interface card provides
an interface with the Analytical Station, allowing the operator to request functions.
Figure 2.12-6 includes an exploded view of the Diluter keypad on the GENS System,
identifying the three components for your understanding. Both the Diluter keypad and the
numeric keypad are replaced as an assembly, however.
Contrast Adjustment
A potentiometer on the The Keyboard and Display Interface card varies the contrast on the
LCD panel.
PN 4277219B
2.12-11
DILUTER CONTROL
On the GENS System, the contrast potentiometer, R3, is accessed through an opening
in the splash shield mounted on the rear of the Diluter keypad. R3 and the connectors on
the Keyboard and Display Interface card are shown in Figure A.3-15. The connectors are
On the LH 750 System, the contrast potentiometer, R4, is accessed through an opening
in the Keyboard and Display Interface card shield as shown in Figure 2.12-7.
Note: Adjusting the contrast too low turns off the display completely, making the LCD
Display module appear defective.
Figure 2.12-6 Diluter Keypad on the GENS System
LCD DISPLAY
MODULE
MEMBRANE
KEYPAD
KEYBOARD
AND DISPLAY
INTERFACE
CARD
7253129A
Figure 2.12-7 Numeric Keypad on the LH 750 System
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
S H U T D O W N
R IN S E
T E S T M O D E
M A IN
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
3
5
C E
P R E M IX
VIII
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
M E N U
VI
VII
Numeric
keypad
6498202B
R 4
2.12-12
PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING
2.13
REAGENT HANDLING
Summary
Two reagent handling configurations are currently in use in the Analytical Station. In one (the
original configuration) all of the reagents are drawn from the reagent containers into
reservoirs in the Diluter and then distributed by reagent pumps and tanks. In the other
configuration, all of the reagents except diluent are drawn into reagent reservoirs - the
diluent reservoir is bypassed.
This section describes reagent handling from input and distribution to output as waste,
including how the reagent and waste levels are monitored. This section also describes the
System-Flush cycle.
Reagent Input
One end of the reagent input lines is attached to pickup tubes inserted into the reagent
containers. (See Figure 8.2-28 for an illustration and the part numbers of the pickup tubes.)
On Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir, the other end of the reagent input lines
is connected to the reagent reservoirs by quick-disconnect fittings at the rear of the Diluter.
See Figure 2.13-1. The quick-disconnect fittings are self-closing to prevent reagent from
running out when the reagent lines are disconnected. Check valves in the reagent input lines
prevent the reagents from siphoning back into the reagent containers.
Figure 2.13-1 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
DISINFECT
WASTE
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
CLEAR
RETIC
STAIN
PAK
PRESERVE
PAK
LYSE
CLEANER
Quick-disconnect
fitting
7253140E
PN 4277219B
DILUENT
Back of
Diluter
2.13-1
REAGENT HANDLING
On Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir, the other end of the reagent input
lines is connected to the rear of the Diluter by stainless steel fittings. See Figure 2.13-2. For all
the reagents except diluent, the fittings are attached to a reagent reservoir. For the diluent,
tubing on the fitting connects the diluent input directly to the diluent/cleaning agent
manifold (VC32) which is located on the rear panel of the Diluter. (For the location of VC32,
refer to Figure A.7-4 for the GENS System, Figure A.8-4 for the LH 750 System.) A check
valves in the reagent input line to the reagent reservoir prevent the cleaning reagent from
siphoning back into the reagent container.
Figure 2.13-2 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
D IL U E N T
W A S T E
C B C
L Y S E
R E T IC
C L E A R
R E T IC
S T A IN
P A K
P R E S E R V E
P A K
L Y S E
C L E A N E R
6 4 9 8 0 9 1 B
B a c k o f
D ilu te r
Reagent Reservoir Module

Function
The Reagent Reservoir module is located on the lower left rear door of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-7 for location.
The Reagent Reservoir module (see Figures 2.13-3 and 2.13-4) consists of:
r
Individual reservoirs for each of the seven reagents. The diluent reservoir holds 105 mL,
the other reservoirs hold 43 mL.
Note: On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, the diluent reservoir
is still present, it is simply not used.
2.13-2
PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING
A reagent-float sensor for each reservoir. The float sensors house a magnetic switch for
sensing the reagent level.
Note: On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, a pickup tube with a
float sensor is installed in the diluent container to monitor the level of diluent.
A solenoid for each reservoir.

t
In the old style Reagent Reservoir modules on the GENS System (Figure 2.13-3),
the solenoids provide vacuum for refilling the reservoirs.
In the new style Reagent Reservoir modules on the GENS System (Figure 2.13-4)
the solenoids actuate pinch valves which provide the vacuum for refilling the
reservoirs.
Note: The latest GENS Systems and the LH 750 Systems have the Reagent
Reservoir module shown in Figure 2.13-5.
A valve, VL113, for venting the diluent reservoir.

Note: On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, VL113 is removed
as shown in Figure 2.13-5.
The Reservoir Interface card which connects the sensors and solenoids to the
Diluter 2 card.
The reagent reservoirs hold sufficient reagents to complete a Diluter blood cycle. Initially, and
whenever a sensor indicates a low level, the reagent reservoirs are filled by energizing the
reservoir solenoids which apply vacuum to the reservoirs. During a cycle, the action of the
reagent pumps automatically pulls reagent up from the reagent containers, through the
reservoirs.
Figure 2.13-3 Reagent Reservoir Module, Old Style (GENS System)
Reservoir
Interface
card
Solenoids
Vacuum input
Vacuum
manifold
Reservoir
cap
Vacuum
output
to reservoir
Float sensor
VL113
Reagent
reservoir
Reagent input
7253429E
PN 4277219B
Reagent output
2.13-3
REAGENT HANDLING
Figure 2.13-4 Reagent Reservoir Module, New Style (GENS System)
Reagent
input
Reservoir
Interface
card
Vacuum input
Reservoir
cap
Pinch
valves
VL113
VC31
Reagent
reservoir
Float sensor
Reagent
output
Solenoids
7253431E
Figure 2.13-5 Reagent Reservoir Module, Modified New Style (GENS System and LH 750 System)
Reservoir
Interface
card
Vacuum input
Reagent
input
Reservoir
cap
Pinch
valves
VC31
Reagent
reservoir
Float sensor
Reagent
output
Solenoids
6498131B
Monitoring the Reagent Level

The float sensors in the reagent reservoirs activate when the reagent level drops too low. The
Diluter 2 card checks these sensors during reset, power on, and at the beginning of any
Diluter sample cycle or function test. During the startup and shutdown cycles, which consist
of a Diluter subcycle repeated six times, the Diluter 2 card rechecks the sensor status at the
beginning of each subcycle.
The Diluter 2 card checks the reagent reservoir sensors sequentially. If a sensor indicates a
low level, the Diluter 2 card energizes the solenoid for that reservoir for up to 1 second to
refill it. The Diluter 2 card continues checking the status of the reagent reservoir sensors and
refilling the reservoirs (one at a time) until all the reservoirs are full or until 6 seconds have
elapsed.
2.13-4
PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING
Note: The reservoirs are filled, one at a time, to minimize its effect on the Systems vacuum
capacity.
After 6 seconds, if the reagent level in one or more reservoirs is still low:
r
r
r
The instrument cycle stops.

A message appears on the Diluter/numeric keypad display indicating a reagent reservoir
is filling.
The Diluter 2 card energizes the solenoids for the empty reservoirs, one at a time, for up
to 7 seconds (18 seconds for diluent and cleaning agent).
After the additional refill time, if a reagent level is still low, the instrument:
r
r
r
Generates a low reagent alarm.

Displays a LEVEL message on the Analyzer and on the Diluter/numeric keypad display.
See Heading 7.2 for LEVEL messages.
Inhibits further cycles until the reagent container is replaced.
On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, the float sensor in the diluent
container activates when the diluent level drops too low. When the diluent level is too low,
the instrument:
r
r
r
Generates a low reagent alarm.

Displays a LEVEL message on the Analyzer and on the Diluter/numeric keypad display.
See Heading 7.2 for LEVEL messages.
Inhibits further cycles until the diluent container is replaced.
Reservoir Interface Card

Function
The Reservoir Interface card (Figures 2.13-3 and 2.13-4) provides an interconnection
between the Diluter 2 card and the following:
r
Reagent-float sensors
Sheath-tank sensor
Backwash-tank sensor
Waste-level sensor
Reservoir solenoids.
Inputs
r +5 Vdc for the sensors
r
+24 Vdc for the solenoids
Connectors
The Reservoir Interface card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-17 and described in
Table A.3-18.
PN 4277219B
2.13-5
REAGENT HANDLING
Reagent Distribution
As you read this section, refer to the reagent distribution block diagrams, Figure 2.13-6 and
Figure 2.13-7. For details about the component interconnections, refer to the
pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
The CBC lytic reagent, diff lytic reagent, diff preservative, retic stain and retic clearing
solution reservoirs route their reagent directly to their respective reagent pumps.
In Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir (Figure 2.13-6):
r
The diluent reservoir routes diluent to the BSV cleaning channels, the sheath tank
(VC15), the sweep-flow reservoir (VC29), and the diluent/cleaning agent
chamber (VC28).
The cleaning agent reservoir routes cleaning agent to the cleaning agent pump (PM10)
and to the system flush/cleaning agent output manifold (MF5) for routing to VC28.
Figure 2.13-6 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
2.13-6
PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING
In Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir (Figure 2.13-7):

r
The diluent/cleaning agent manifold (VC32) routes diluent to the BSV cleaning
channels, the sheath tank (VC15), the sweep-flow reservoir (VC29), and the
diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28).
The cleaning agent reservoir routes cleaning agent to the diluent/cleaning agent manifold
(VC32) which in turn routes cleaning agent to the cleaning agent pump (PM10) and to
the diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28).
Figure 2.13-7 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
Backwash tank,
VC23
Sweep-flow
tank
Diluent/cleaning agent chamber VC28

Sweep-flow
reservoir VC29
WBC diluent
dispenser PM2
Reservoirs
RBC diluent
dispenser PM3
Sheath tank VC15

BSV cleaning
channels
CLEANING
AGENT
Cleaning
agent
pump PM10
RETIC
CLEANING
SOLUTION
Retic cleaning
solution
pump PM6
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
Diff lytic
reagent
pump PM4
STAIN
Stain
pump PM5
CBC lLYTIC
REAGENT
CBC lytic
reagent
pump PM7
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
Diluent/cleaning agent
manifold VC 32
DILUENT
Diff preservative
pump PM1
6498092A
Diluent/Cleaning Agent Chamber

Function
The diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28) and its associated pinch valve (VL14B) are
located on the rear panel of the Diluter. For the location of VC28 and VL14B, refer to
Figure A.7-4 for the GENS System or Figure A.8-4 for the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
2.13-7
REAGENT HANDLING
VC28 is the distribution chamber for diluent and cleaning agent in the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.13-6 or Figure 2.13-7. VL14B determines which reagent, diluent or cleaning agent,
VC28 distributes. During the startup cycle and routine Diluter functions, VL14B routes
diluent to VC28. During the shutdown cycle, when VL14B is activated, VL14B routes
cleaning agent to VC28.
Backwash Tank
Function
The backwash tank is located on the left front panel of the Diluter. Refer to Figure A.7-1
(GENS System) or Figure A.8-1 (LH 750 System) for location.
The backwash tank (VC23) is used to deliver diluent or cleaning agent to the backwash
manifold (MF4) and diluent to the Hgb cuvette for the Hgb-blank reading.
While the instrument is cycling, VC23 empties and refills. Vacuum is applied to the top of the
VC23 for up to 7 seconds to fill the tank; 30 psi is applied to deliver the reagent. See
Figure 2.13-8. During a startup or shutdown cycle, the previous reagent drains to waste and
the tank refills with the reagent for the selected cycle.
Figure 2.13-8 Backwash Tank Reagent Flow
Vacuum
Diluent/cleaning
agent
chamber
VC28
30 psi
Float
sensor
Backwash
tank
Backwash
tank
Backwash
manifold
Diluent
Cleaning
agent
Hgb cuvette
Waste
6498130B
A. Filling tank
B. Dispensing reagent

VC23 contains a float sensor with a magnetic switch to monitor the reagent level in the tank.
The float sensor is connected to the Reservoir Interface card, which routes the float sensor
signal to the Diluter 2 card. LEDs on the Diluter 2 card indicate the status of these signals.
Refer to Table A.3-6.
The float sensor is active when the tank is not full. During the cycle, the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card monitors the sensor status. The tank is refilled or emptied accordingly. If
the sensor does not show the expected status, and the status cannot be changed, an error
occurs. See Heading 7.2 for possible errors.
Testing
The Diluter function, F30, tests the function of the backwash tank sensor.
2.13-8
PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING
Backwash Manifold
Function
The backwash manifold is located under the Diluter front cover. Refer to Figure A.7-7
(GENS System) or Figure A.8-7 (LH 750 System) for location.
The backwash manifold (MF4) is a bank of solenoids that distribute pressurized diluent (or
cleaning agent during the shutdown cycle) to rinse the following areas:
r
During the Automatic mode t
Needle vent
The aspiration path through the Diff and Retic blood segment components
BSV aspiration path through needle
During the Manual mode t
The aspiration path through the Diff and Retic blood segment components
BSV aspiration path through aspirator tip
Outside of the aspirator tip via the Probe-Wipe module
Diff mixing chamber (VC19)
Stain chamber (VC24)
Retic chamber (VC17)
Sheath fluid pathways in flow cell.
Sheath Tank
Function
The sheath tank (VC15) is located on the right front panel of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure A.7-5 (GENS System) or Figure A.8-5 (LH 750 System) for location.
The sheath tank (VC15) provides the pressurized sheath diluent needed to direct the sample
stream through the flow cell during VCS analysis. For details about the flow-cell hydraulics,
see Flow-Cell Hydraulics under Heading 2.20.
While the instrument is cycling, VC15 empties and refills as the sheath fluid is used. Vacuum
is applied to the top of VC15 to fill the tank. Pressure, regulated by the sheath pressure
regulator (RG4) to between 6.3 psi and 6.5 psi, is applied to deliver the reagent. See
Figure 2.13-9.
VC15 contains a float sensor with a magnetic switch to monitor the reagent level in the tank.
The float sensor is connected to the Reservoir Interface card, which routes the float sensor
signal to the Diluter 2 card. LEDs on the Diluter 2 card indicate the status of these signals.
The float sensor is active when the tank is not full. During the cycle, the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card monitors the sensor status. The tank is refilled or emptied accordingly. If
the sensor does not show the expected status, and the status cannot be changed, an error
occurs. See Heading 7.2 for possible errors.
PN 4277219B
2.13-9
REAGENT HANDLING
Figure 2.13-9 Sheath-Tank Reagent Flow

Vacuum
Sheath
pressure
Float
sensor
Sheath
tank
Sheath
pressure
regulator (RG4)
Sheath
tank
Flow
cell
Diluent
input
6498093A
A. Filling tank
B. Dispensing reagent
Testing
The sheath tank test, F20, is available to test the function of the sensor.
Sweep-Flow Reservoir
Function
The sweep-flow reservoir (VC29) is located on the center rear panel of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure A.7-4 (GENS System) or Figure A.8-4 (LH 750 System) for location.
The sweep-flow reservoir (VC29) traps bubbles in the diluent supply for the sweep-flow tank.
While the instrument is cycling, VC29 empties and refills as the sweep-flow diluent is used.
Vacuum is applied to the top of VC29 to fill the reservoir. During the RBC and platelet count
cycles, vacuum from the vacuum isolator pulls diluent from the bottom of the sweep-flow
reservoir, through the sweep-flow tubing in the sweep-flow tank, and behind the RBC
apertures.
On the original GENS Systems the level of diluent in the sweep-flow reservoir is not
monitored. On GENS Systems that have been modified to use a sweep-flow reservoir with a
level sensor and on all LH 750 Systems, the sweep-flow reservoir contains a float sensor with
a magnetic switch to monitor the reagent level in the reservoir. The float sensor is connected
to the Diluter 2 card. Refer to Table A.3-6.
The float sensor is active when the reservoir is not full. During the cycle, the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System) monitors
the sensor status. The reservoir is refilled or emptied accordingly. If the sensor does not show
the expected status, and the status cannot be changed, an error occurs. See Heading 7.2 for
possible errors.
Testing
The sweep-flow reservoir test, F50, is available to test the function of the sensor.
2.13-10
PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING
System-Flush Cycle
The System-Flush cycle is only available on Analytical Stations that use the diluent
reservoir and that have software version 3A or lower.
The System-Flush cycle allows decontamination of the instrument lines that contact blood by
distributing a flush solution such as sodium hypochlorite through most of the cleaning agent
pathways in the Diluter.
The input line connection for the flush solution is the DISINFECT port on the rear of the
Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.13-1 for location.The Diluter function F40 initiates the flush cycle.
The flush cycle uses the shutdown timing cycle to pull up and cycle flush solution.
From the rear of the Diluter the flush solution is routed to the system flush/cleaning agent
input manifold (MF2). Refer to Figure A.7-12 for location.
VL112 selects the input source, the system flush port or the cleaning agent reservoir, from
MF2 for the system flush/cleaning agent output manifold (MF5).
MF5 routes the selected reagent on the cleaning agent lines to VL14B. VL14B is activated,
routing flush solution to the diluent/cleaning agent chamber for distribution in the Diluter.
At the completion of the flush cycle, only a shutdown cycle can be performed. See
Decontaminating with Bleach under Heading 5.3 for the system-flush procedure.
Waste Collection and Monitoring

Waste Collection
During a cycle, waste is collected in chambers in the Diluter and drained through the waste
line on the rear of the Diluter (Figure 2.13-1 or Figure 2.13-2) to the waste container or
drain. Refer to Table A.6-3 to determine which chambers collect waste.
Waste Level Monitoring
When a waste container is used, the Diluter 2 card monitors the waste full float sensor located
inside the pickup tube in the waste container, to prevent backup of waste into the instrument.
When the waste container is full the cycle is completed, but subsequent cycles are inhibited
until the waste container is replaced. The instrument displays a LEVEL message on the
Analyzer and on the Diluter/numeric keypad display. See Heading 7.2 for LEVEL messages.
When waste is routed directly to a drain, the waste level sensor is bypassed with a jumper.
PN 4277219B
2.13-11
REAGENT HANDLING
2.13-12
PN 4277219B
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
2.14

Summary
To process samples in the Automatic mode, the operator inserts the specimen tubes into
cassettes and places the cassettes in the loading bay. The specimen transport system uses the
following components to move and identify the specimen tubes for sample acquisition:
r
The cassette transport assembly contains t
Mechanical components that move the cassettes of specimen tubes.
Sensors and switches that monitor the movement of the cassettes.
A bar-code reader that reads and decodes bar-code labels to identify specimens.
The Sensor Distribution card connects the electromechanical switches and optical
sensors in the cassette transport assembly with the Diluter 1 card.
This section includes an overview of the specimen transport system and describes the
specimen transport system components. See Heading 2.15 for a detailed description of the
movement of the cassettes through the Diluter.
Specimen Transport System Overview

Refer to Figure 2.14-1. As the cassette transport assembly moves the cassettes,
electromechanical switches and optical sensors in the assembly monitor the movement and
send their signals to the Sensor Distribution card.
Figure 2.14-1 Specimen Transport Block Diagram
BAR-CODE
DECODER CARD
AND BAR-CODE
SCANNER CARD
SENSOR DISTRIBUTION
CARD
DILUTER 1
CARD
IBUS
RS/OPTO
INTFC
CARD
IBUS
DILUTER
PROCESSOR/
DILUTER CPU
CARD*
SYSTEM
BUS
AMC
CARD
IBUS
CASSETTE TRANSPORT
ASSEMBLY
SOLENOIDS/SENSORS
DILUTER CBL
ADAPTER CARD
IBUS
DILUTER 3
CARD
6498190B
PN 4277219B
2.14-1
The Sensor Distribution card routes the signals to the Diluter 1 card.
The Diluter 1 card converts the switch and sensor signals and routes the status information to
the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System).
The DILUTER PROCESSOR or DILUTER CPU card:
r
Relays the status to the AMC.
Provides instructions to the Diluter cards, based on the status information, to activate
the appropriate components to move the cassettes.
For more information about the interaction between the DILUTER PROCESSOR card or the
DILUTER CPU card and the other Diluter cards, see Heading 2.12, Diluter Control.
Cassette Transport Assembly (CTA)

The components of the cassette transport assembly are located in four main areas: the right
stack or loading bay, the rocker bed, the piercing station and the left stack or unloading bay.
See Figure 2.14-2.
The function of the mechanical components and the switches and sensors within the cassette
transport assembly are explained under Heading 2.15. To verify the function of the sensors
and switches, see Heading 4.81.
Figure 2.14-2 Cassette Transport Assembly
GEN S
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
LEFT STACK/
UNLOADING BAY
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
RIGHT STACK/
LOADING BAY
ROCKER BED
PIERCING
STATION
NEEDLE
ASSEMBLY
2.14-2
7253147A
PN 4277219B
Bar-Code Reader
Function
In the Automatic mode, each time a specimen tube is pierced the bar-code reader in the
Analytical Station reads the cassette and tube bar-code labels to identify the specimen. The
bar-code reader consists of two main components:
r
The bar-code scanner assembly which is located above the rocker bed in the center of the
Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-2 (GENS System) or Figure 2.4-9 (LH 750 System) for
location.
The Bar-Code Decoder card which is located on the rear right door of the Diluter. Refer
to Figure 2.4-6 (GENS System) or Figure 2.4-14 (LH 750 System) for location.
Two styles of bar-code readers are currently in use. The style installed on the original GENS
Systems uses visible light from two LEDs to read the bar-code labels. The style installed on
the current GENS Systems and on the LH 750 Systems uses a laser.
LED Bar-Code Reader
Refer to Figure 2.14-3. The bar-code scanner assembly for the LED bar-code reader houses
the Bar-code Scanner card which contains:
r
Two red visible-light, 633 nm, LEDs.
An aperture focusing lens.
A photodiode circuit.
Figure 2.14-3 LED Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram

FROM DILUTER 1
CARD -J6
BC GND
-9 V
+9 V
+5 V
-5 V
BAR-CODE DECODER CARD
PAL
J37
BAR-CODE
LABEL
BAR-CODE SCANNER CARD
AGC
DIGITIZER
J1
J2
EPROM
AND
RAM
PHOTODIODE
APERTURE
LEDS
LENS
7253148A
The construction of the bar-code scanner allows the energy of its two LEDs to be summed
and focused onto the label, providing better scans. Reflected light from the label is directed
through the aperture to the photodiode. The photodiode converts the light to analog signals
and routes the analog signals to the Bar-Code Decoder card.
The Bar-Code Decoder card (manufactured by Welch-Allyn, Inc.) contains:
PN 4277219B
An Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Digitizer circuit for signal conversion.
Memory for bar-code formats.
A beeper to indicate good label scans. The beeper is disabled for normal operations. To
enable the beeper, install a jumper on P3. Refer to Figure A.3-1 for the location of P3.
2.14-3
Note: The beep only indicates the Bar-Code Decoder card was able to produce a digital
output from the scanners input; it does not ensure the input is in an acceptable format.
Therefore, it is possible to hear a beep but not see bar-code label information displayed
on the Analyzer or Workstation screen because the software rejected the input.
The AGC Digitizer circuit on the Bar-Code Decoder card converts the analog signals from the
Bar-Code Scanner card to a digital format. The Bar-Code Decoder card checks the digital
format against information stored in the EPROMs to identify the type of tube label.
The Bar-Code Decoder card sends the decoded information to the Diluter 1 card using an
RS232 interface. The Diluter 1 card converts the RS232 signals and sends the information to
the DILUTER PROCESSOR card.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card performs checksum calculations and sends the label
information to the AMC where it is held for transmission with the parameter information.
Laser Bar-Code Reader
Refer to Figure 2.14-4. The bar-code scanner assembly for the laser bar-code reader houses:
r
A passive laser bar-code scanner at 670 nm.
A laser control board - the Newbar card.
Figure 2.14-4 Laser Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram

Five-wire cable
From Diluter 1
card -J6

/ RESET OUT
BC GND
-9 V
+9 V
+5 V
-5 V
PAL
Micro
J2
EPROM
and
RAM
10
seconds
POWER/
TTL signal
LASER
ON
J1
SW1
LED
TEST
LASER LASER
ON
ON
6498113B
Laser
output
Bar-code
lens
label
Newbar card
J1
J2
Latching
plug
Laser scanner
Reflected
light input
aperture
The passive laser bar-code scanner has a focused elliptical beam which is oriented for
optimum reading of the cassette and tube bar-code labels within the depth of field. Reflected
laser light from the label is converted to a TTL signal by the AGC and Level Switching circuit
within the scanner. The TTL signal is routed from the scanner to the Bar-Code Decoder card.
The Bar-Code Decoder card (manufactured by Welch-Allyn, Inc.) contains:
r
Memory for bar-code formats.
A beeper to indicate good label scans. The beeper is disabled for normal operations. To
enable the beeper, install a jumper on P3. Refer to Figure A.3-1 for the location of P3.
Note: The beep only indicates the Bar-Code Decoder card was able to produce a digital
output from the scanners input; it does not ensure the input is in an acceptable format.
Therefore, it is possible to hear a beep but not see bar-code label information displayed
on the Analyzer or Workstation screen because the software rejected the input.
2.14-4
PN 4277219B
The Bar-Code Decoder card checks the received digital format against information stored in
the EPROMs to identify the type of tube label. The Bar-Code Decoder card sends the decoded
information to the Diluter 1 card using an RS232 interface.
The Diluter 1 card converts the RS232 signals and sends the information to the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System).
The DILUTER PROCESSOR or DILUTER CPU card performs checksum calculations and
sends the label information to the AMC where it is held for transmission with the parameter
information.
Types of Bar Codes Used
The Bar-Code Decoder card is currently programmed to use the following types of labels:
r
Interleaved 2-of-5 has 5 bits/character and is numeric. The Coulter cassette labels are
Interleaved 2-of-5.
Code 39 bar code has 9 bits/character, is fully alphanumeric and is widely used by the
health industry.
Codabar has 7 bits/character, is extended numeric and is frequently used by blood banks.
NW7 (Japan Red Cross) has 7 bits/character and is extended numeric.
Code 128 USS 128 has 11 bits/character and is fully alphanumeric.
Bar-Code Label Specifications

For the bar-code label specifications, refer to Chapter 4 of the Reference manual.
Sensor Distribution Card

Function
The Sensor Distribution card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-4 (GENS System)
or Figure 2.4-12 (LH 750 System) for location.
The Sensor Distribution card:
PN 4277219B
Routes the control voltage and control return from the Diluter 1 card (IBUS) to the
Diluter keypad (old Diluter interconnects only).
Routes the POWER ON and POWER OFF signals from the Diluter keypad to the
Diluter 1 card (old Diluter interconnects only)
Routes display information from the Diluter 1 card (IBUS) to the Diluter keypad for
display (old Diluter interconnects only)
Routes 15 Vdc from the Diluter 1 card to power the PVT card.
Routes Hgb lamp supply voltage from the Diluter 1 card to power the Hgb lamp.
Routes power (+5 V from the Diluter 1 card) for the Diluter sensors and switches.
Receives signals from the cassette transport assembly sensors and switches, converts the
signals to TTL levels, and sends the converted signals to the Diluter 1 card.
Contains LED status indicators for bed position sensors.
2.14-5
Input
+5 Vdc from Diluter 1 card for LEDs, optoswitches, and sensors
Connectors and LEDs
The Sensor Distribution card connectors and LEDs are shown in Figure A.3-19. The
connectors are described in Table A.3-20. The LEDs, which monitor the bed position status,
are described in Table A.3-21.
2.14-6
PN 4277219B
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT
2.15

Summary
To process samples in the Automatic mode, the operator inserts the specimen tubes into
cassettes and places the cassettes in the loading bay, and then the specimen transport system
moves and identifies the specimen tubes for sample acquisition. This section gives a detailed
description of the movement of the cassettes through the Diluter.
See Heading 2.14 for an overview of the specimen transport system and a description of its
components: the cassette transport assembly and the Sensor Distribution card.
Moving a Cassette from the Loading Bay to the Unloading Bay

Figures 2.15-1 through 2.15-12 follow the progress of a cassette from the loading bay to the
unloading bay.
Figure 2.15-1 Initiating the Automatic Cycle

TOP
RIGHT
SAFETY
SWITCH
LOADING
BAY
UNDER
RIGHT
STACK
SWITCH
7253187A
Initiating the Automatic-Mode Cycle

The instrument has an automatic start feature,
COULTER SmartStart recognition, that is enabled
by a DIP switch on the DILUTER PROCESSOR card
(GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card
(LH 750 System). Refer to Table A.2-12.
r
If SmartStart recognition is enabled, the

Automatic-mode cycle begins when a cassette
is placed in the loading bay or right stack.
If SmartStart recognition is disabled, the

Automatic-mode cycle begins when the
operator presses START/CONT.
RIGHT
STACK
LOADED
SWITCH
Placing the cassette in the loading bay activates the

right stack loaded switch. See Figure 2.15-1.
BED
POSITION
SENSORS
The right stack loaded switch is monitored during

the INSTRUMENT READY state and its activation
indicates a cassette is available for cycling.
Retrieving the Cassette from the Loading Bay
Before raising the right lift to retrieve a cassette, the
instrument checks the status of the under right
stack, bed horizontal, and the top right safety
switches.
PN 4277219B
2.15-1
Figure 2.15-2 Bed Position Sensors

BED
HORIZONTAL
SENSOR
BED
FORWARD
SENSOR
BED
BACKWARD
SENSOR
The under right stack switch activates when there is

a cassette on the rocker bed, under the loading bay.
The lift will not extend to retrieve another cassette
until the cassette on the bed moves, deactivating the
under right stack switch.
The bed horizontal sensor activates when the rocker
bed is in the horizontal position. See Figure 2.15-2
for the location of the bed position sensors.
When the bed horizontal sensor is activated, the
bed stops rocking and the bed locks are engaged.
RIGHT
LIFT
BED LOCK
7253188A
Figure 2.15-3 Bed Locks

NOTCH
RIGHT
LIFT
CAM
Two bed locks, one mounted on the base of the

rocker bed next to the right lift and the other next
to the left lift, are used to hold the rocker bed in
position.
A bed lock consists of a solenoid-activated piston
and a cam with three notches, corresponding to the
three positions of the rocker bed: forward,
horizontal and backward. See Figure 2.15-3.
BED LOCK
PISTON
To engage a bed lock, the solenoid for the piston is

energized, pushing the piston into one of the
notches on the cam.
BED LOCK
ACTUATOR
Once the rocker bed is locked in the horizontal

position, the lift cylinder begins to extend. But if the
lift movement activates the top right safety switch,
indicating the loading bay is full (12 cassettes in the
loading bay), the lift cylinder does not extend fully.
7253303A
2.15-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.15-4 From Loading Bay to Rocker Bed

LOADING
BAY
Placing the Cassette on the Rocker Bed

If there is room on the rocker bed and in the loading
bay, and if the rocker bed is in the horizontal
position, the right lift cylinder extends fully, raising
the right lift. See Figure 2.15-4.
FLIPPERS
The right lift pushes the cassette up past the

spring-loaded flippers and activates the right lift up
switch, indicating the lift is in motion.
RIGHT
LIFT
RIGHT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
ACTIVATOR
The flipper retract solenoid is energized which

retracts the flippers.
Then the right lift cylinder retracts, lowering the lift
with the cassette and deactivating the right lift up
switch.
RIGHT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER
7219007B
Figure 2.15-5 Moving across the Rocker Bed
The flipper retract solenoid is de-energized,

returning the flippers to their original position, so
that only one cassette is lowered onto the rocker
bed.
Moving the Cassette Across the Rocker Bed
When the cassette reaches the rocker bed, the
cassette activates the under right stack switch,
preventing another cassette from being placed on
the rocker bed.
ADVANCE WHEEL
The bed locks are disengaged and the bed rock

cylinder rocks the rocker bed to mix the specimens.
The belt advance cylinder is activated, moving the
rocker bed belt horizontally on the rocker bed. See
Figure 2.15-5. Sprockets on the cassette advance
wheel grab the cassette and move the cassette onto
the belt.
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
7253190A
BELT
ADVANCE
CYLINDER
ROCKER
BED BELT
CASSETTE
ADVANCE
WHEEL
Note: The belt advance cylinder is located inside the

rocker bed.
When the cassette moves past the under right stack
switch, the switch deactivates and another cassette
can be lowered down onto the bed.
PN 4277219B
2.15-3
Figure 2.15-6 Detecting Specimen Tubes

S P R IN G
L E D
IN T E R R U P T E R
A R M
T U B E IN
P O S IT IO N
S E N S O R
T U B E
D E T E C T O R
A S S E M B L Y
7 2 1 9 0 0 8 B
Detecting a Tube at the Piercing Station

As the cassettes enter the piercing station, they pass
under the tube detector assembly.
The tube detector assembly uses a photosensor and
a ball and rod interrupter to detect the specimen
tubes. See Figure 2.15-6.
The interrupter is positioned over the rocker bed
and is lifted by the tubes in the cassettes. Lifting the
ball of the interrupter pivots the interrupter rod
away from the photosensor, activating the tube in
position sensor.
Activating the tube in position sensor sends a signal
to the Diluter 1 card to stop the belt drive. The belt
advance cylinder is deactivated, stopping the belt,
and the LED on the tube detector is lit.
The tube detector assembly is adjusted so that when
the rocker bed belt stops, the specimen tube is
aligned with the tube ram, the stripper plate and the
needle assembly.
Positioning the Tube for Sample Acquisition
When the instrument detects a tube, it activates the
stripper plate cylinder which retracts, pulling in the
stripper plate. See Figure 2.15-7.
Figure 2.15-7 Positioning Tube for Sampling
The movement of the stripper plate activates the

stripper plate position switch.
Note: The stripper plate position switch is located
inside the rocker bed.
The stripper plate locks onto the tube, holding it in
place. The rocker bed rocks until the instrument is
ready to pierce the specimen tube. Then, when the
bed forward sensor activates, the rocker bed stops.
The bed locks are engaged to hold the bed in place
at a 45-degree forward angle.
STRIPPER
PLATE
POSITION
SWITCH
2.15-4
STRIPPER
PLATE
CYLINDER
STRIPPER
PLATE
TUBE
DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
Refer to Figure 2.15-2 for the location of the bed

forward sensor.
7253192A
PN 4277219B
Piercing the Cap of the Specimen Tube

To pierce the cap, the stripper plate cylinder is
deactivated, allowing the stripper plate to move
with the specimen tube, and the tube ram cylinder
extends, pushing the tube out of the cassette and
onto the needle. See Figure 2.15-8.
Figure 2.15-8 Piercing the Tube

TUBE RAM
CYLINDER
At the same time the bellows interlock is

disengaged, allowing the bellows cylinder to
contract the bellows as the tube is pushed onto the
needle.
For details on aspirating sample in the Automatic
mode, and cleaning the needle after aspiration, see:
TUBE
RAM
NEEDLE
ASSEMBLY
7253193A
NEEDLE
ASSEMBLY
BELLOWS
INTERLOCK
Automatic-Mode under Heading 2.16,

SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM OVERVIEW.
BSV Ports under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE

ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE
DESCRIPTION.
BELLOWS
CYLINDER
SIDE VIEW
Identifying the Specimen

The cassettes are labeled with a bar-code label to
identify the cassette number and the tube position.
The specimen tubes may also have bar-code labels.
Figure 2.15-9 Scanning Bar-Code Labels

SCANNER
POSITION
SWITCH
r
BELLOWS
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
CYLINDER
While the needle is in the tube, the bar-code

scanner cylinder extends, moving the bar-code
scanner over the tube and cassette bar-code labels.
See Figure 2.15-9.
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
The scanner position switch, which activates when

the scanner is over the cassette label, monitors the
speed of the bar-code scanner.
7253194A
PN 4277219B
2.15-5
Pushing the Tube Back into the Cassette

After the sample is aspirated:
Figure 2.15-10 Pushing Tube into Cassette
STRIPPER
PLATE
1.
The tube ram cylinder retracts, the bellows

cylinder extends and the bellows interlock is
engaged.
2.
The stripper plate cylinder retracts and the

stripper plate pulls the tube off the needle and
pushes it back into the cassette. See
Figure 2.15-10.
3.
The bed locks are disengaged and the rocker

bed begins to rock.
4.
The stripper plate releases the tube, and the

belt advances until the tube detector assembly
senses the next tube.
7253195A
Figure 2.15-11 Moving to Unloading Bay

TOP
LEFT
SAFETY
SWITCH
UNLOADING
BAY
Moving a Cassette to the Unloading Bay

After all the tubes in a cassette are pierced, the
rocker bed moves the cassette to the left toward the
unloading bay. When the cassette reaches the left
side of the rocker bed, it activates the under left
stack switch. See Figure 2.15-11.
If the piercing station is empty, the bed stops
rocking and is locked in the horizontal position.
Before moving the cassette off the rocker bed into
the unloading bay, the instrument checks the status
of the top left safety switch. The top left safety
switch activates when the unloading bay is full (12
cassettes in the unloading bay).
UNDER LEFT
STACK SWITCH
2.15-6
ROCKER
BED 7253196A
PN 4277219B
Removing a Cassette from the Rocker Bed

If there is room in the unloading bay, the left lift
cylinder extends, raising the left lift. The left lift
pushes the cassette up into the unloading bay and
activates the left lift up switch.
Figure 2.15-12 Rocker Bed to Unloading Bay

UNLOADING
BAY
FLIPPERS
Activating the left lift up switch ensures the rocker

bed does not rock at this time. See Figure 2.15-12.
Then the left lift cylinder retracts, returning the left
lift to the down position. The flippers in the
unloading bay are spring-loaded and hold the
cassette in the unloading bay as the lift retracts.
LEFT
LIFT
LEFT LIFT
CYLINDER
LEFT LIFT
UP SWITCH
LEFT LIFT UP
SWITCH
ACTIVATOR
LEFT
BED
LOCK
When the left lift is down, the left lift switch

deactivates, the bed locks are released, and the
rocker bed begins rocking. The rocker bed rocks
until it detects another specimen tube or until it
completes 14 rocks.
7253197A
PN 4277219B
2.15-7
2.15-8
PN 4277219B
SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW
2.16

Summary
The sample acquisition system aspirates blood samples from the specimen tubes, monitors
the quality and integrity of the samples (Automatic mode only), isolates segments of the
samples for analysis, and cleans the blood pathways between samples. This section gives an
overview of the sample acquisition system in the Automatic and Manual modes. For a more
detailed description of these modes, refer to Chapter 3 of the Reference manual.
Heading 2.17 describes the sample acquisition system components and assemblies.
Automatic-Mode
Aspirating a Sample
In the Automatic mode, the cassette transport assembly moves the specimen tubes to the
piercing station and positions the tubes for piercing. For details, see Heading 2.15,
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT. The front section of the BSV
rotates counterclockwise to prepare for the Automatic-mode aspiration; the center section
remains in the counterclockwise position.
When the specimen tube is in position for cap piercing, the tube ram pushes the specimen
tube onto the needle as the bellows cylinder contracts the bellows. As the needle enters the
specimen tube, the tube is vented to release residual vacuum or pressure. The needle vent is
connected to the needle vent chamber (VC19) to collect any aerosols when the tube is vented.
After the tube vents, the aspiration pump (PM9) is activated to aspirate the Automatic-mode
volume. Activating the aspiration pump creates a vacuum in the aspiration pathway, pulling a
blood sample through the needle, the front blood detector, the BSV, the diff sample segment,
the retic sample segment, and then the rear blood detector. Figure 2.16-1 shows the
aspiration pathway, Figure 2.16-2 shows the aspiration route through the BSV.
The bubble/blood detectors check the sample for quality and integrity.
Figure 2.16-1 Aspiration Path in the Automatic Mode
NEEDLE VENT
CHAMBER
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
NEEDLE
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
REAR
BLOOD
DETECTOR
FRONT
BLOOD
DETECTOR
BLOOD
SAMPLING
VALVE
ASPIRATION
PUMP
6498029A
PN 4277219B
2.16-1
Figure 2.16-2 Aspiration through the BSV in the Automatic Mode

To diff and retic sample segments
rear bubble/blood detector
From needle through

front bubble/blood detector
ASPIRATION (Front Section Rotated)
6498135B
Segmenting the Sample

The center section of the BSV rotates clockwise, isolating blood sample segments for RBC/Plt
and WBC/Hgb analysis and aligning those segments with their respective diluent dispenser
input port and aperture bath output port. See Figure 2.16-3.
Note: Clockwise and counterclockwise positions of the BSV are described facing the BSV
knob.
Figure 2.16-3 Delivering CBC Samples in the Automatic Mode
FROM WBC DILUENT DISPENSER
TO RBC
BATH
FROM RBC
DILUENT
DISPENSER
TO WBC
BATH
SAMPLE DELIVERY (CENTER SECTION ROTATED)
7253150A
Sample segments for diff and retic analysis are isolated in special tubings (GENS System) or
in shear valves (LH 750 System). The diff segment is in line between the diff lytic reagent
pump and the mixing chamber. The retic segment is in line between the stain pump and the
stain chamber. See Figure 2.16-4.
Note: The diff lytic reagent pump and/or the stain pump are only activated if the test mode
selected includes analyzing the diff parameters and/or the retic parameters, respectively.
For details on sample delivery and processing, see Heading 2.18 for CBC analysis,
Heading 2.22 for diff analysis and Heading 2.23 for retic analysis.
2.16-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.16-4 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Automatic Mode
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
REAR
BLOOD
DETECTOR
TO
ASPIRATION
PUMP
HEATER
BSV
MIXING
CHAMBER
STAIN
CHAMBER
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
PUMP
STAIN
PUMP
7253274A
Cleaning the Blood Pathways

After aspiration, the instrument rinses the needle vent line and dries it with vacuum. For
details, see Needle Assembly, under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM HARDWARE DESCRIPTION.
After sample delivery, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the diff and
retic sample segments and the rear bubble/blood detector to waste. See Figure 2.16-5.
Figure 2.16-5 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments
FROM
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
BACKWASH (CENTER SECTION ROTATED)
TO WASTE
7253358A
After CBC analysis is completed, the center section of the BSV rotates to the counterclockwise
position and the instrument backwashes residual blood out of the aspiration pathway. To
backwash the aspiration pathway, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the
aspiration pathway in the BSV, and out the needle, where it is collected in the bellows and
then drained to waste. See Figure 2.16-6.
PN 4277219B
2.16-3
Figure 2.16-6 Backwashing the BSV in the Automatic Mode
FROM
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
TO
NEEDLE
BACKWASH (CENTER SECTION RETURNED)
7253151A
After CBC analysis is completed, the instrument drains the RBC and WBC baths and fills the
baths with a cross-rinse of diluent from the diluent dispensers. See Figure 2.16-7.
Figure 2.16-7 Cross-Rinse in the Automatic Mode
TO RBC
BATH
TO WBC
BATH
CROSS-RINSE
FROM RBC
DILUENT
DISPENSE
7253152A
Before the next sample is aspirated, the instrument primes the diff sample segment and the
15 in. delivery line with diff lytic reagent and/or the retic sample segment and delivery line
with stain. See Figure 2.16-8.
When the Automatic mode cycles are completed and the rocker bed stops, the front section of
the BSV rotates to the clockwise position.
2.16-4
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.16-8 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent
D IF F
S A M P L E
S E G M E N T
R E T IC
S A M P L E
S E G M E N T
T O
R E A R
B L O O D
D E T E C T O R
1 5 " d e liv e r y
lin e
A S P IR A T IO N
P U M P
HEATER
B S V
M IX IN G
C H A M B E R
S T A IN
C H A M B E R
D IF F L Y T IC
R E A G E N T
P U M P
6 4 9 8 2 2 5 B
S T A IN
P U M P
Manual Mode
Aspirating a Sample
In the Manual mode, the operator presents an open specimen tube to the aspirator tip. The
hand detector initiates the Manual-mode when it detects the operators hand in the aspiration
station. The operator can also start the Manual mode cycle by pressing the activator, which
activates the manual start switch located behind the assembly.
The aspiration pump (PM9) is activated to pull the Manual-mode volume. Activating the
aspiration pump creates a vacuum in the aspiration pathway, pulling a blood sample through
the aspirator tip, the BSV, the diff sample segment, the retic sample segment and the rear
blood detector. Figure 2.16-9 shows the aspiration pathway, Figure 2.16-10 shows the
aspiration route through the BSV.
Note: The bubble/blood detectors are not active during the Manual-mode cycle.
Figure 2.16-9 Aspiration Path in the Manual Mode
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
REAR
BLOOD
DETECTOR
BLOOD
SAMPLING
VALVE
ASPIRATION
PUMP
7253275A
PN 4277219B
2.16-5
Figure 2.16-10 Aspiration through the BSV in the Manual Mode

To diff and retic sample segments
rear bubble/blood detector
ASPIRATION
6498134B
Segmenting the Sample

The center section of the BSV rotates clockwise, isolating blood sample segments for RBC/Plt
and WBC/Hgb analysis and aligning those segments with their respective diluent dispenser
input port and aperture bath output port. See Figure 2.16-11.
Figure 2.16-11 Delivering CBC Samples in the Manual Mode
TO RBC
BATH
FROM RBC
DILUENT
DISPENSER
TO WBC
BATH
SAMPLE DELIVERY (CENTER SECTION ROTATED)
7253304A
Sample segments for diff and retic analysis are isolated in special tubings (GENS System) or
in shear valves (LH 750 System). The diff segment is in line between the diff lytic reagent
pump and the mixing chamber. The retic segment is in line between the stain pump and the
stain chamber. See Figure 2.16-12.
Note: The diff lytic reagent pump and/or the stain pump are only activated if the test mode
selected includes analyzing the diff parameters and/or the retic parameters, respectively.
After delivery of the CBC sample, the front section of the BSV rotates counterclockwise. See
Figure 2.16-12.
For details on sample delivery and processing, see Heading 2.18 for CBC analysis,
Heading 2.22 for diff analysis and Heading 2.23 for retic analysis.
2.16-6
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.16-12 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Manual Mode
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
REAR
BLOOD
DETECTOR
TO
ASPIRATION
PUMP
HEATER
BSV
MIXING
CHAMBER
STAIN
CHAMBER
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
PUMP
STAIN
PUMP
7253274A
Cleaning the Blood Pathways

After aspiration, the Probe-Wipe module automatically cleans the outside of the aspirator tip.
At the same time, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the BSV, out the
aspirator tip and into the backwash cup, where it drains to waste.
After sample delivery, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the diff and
retic sample segments and the rear bubble/blood detector to waste. See Figure 2.16-13.
Figure 2.16-13 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments
FROM
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
BACKWASH (CENTER SECTION ROTATED)
TO WASTE
7253358A
After CBC analysis is completed, the center section of the BSV rotates back to the
counterclockwise position and the instrument backwashes residual blood out of the
aspiration pathway. To clear residual blood out of the aspiration pathway, diluent from the
backwash manifold is pushed through the BSV, out the needle, and into the bellows, where it
is collected and drained to waste. See Figure 2.16-14.
PN 4277219B
2.16-7
Figure 2.16-14 Backwashing the BSV in the Manual Mode

DIFF
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
FROM
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
TO
NEEDLE
RETIC
SAMPLE
SEGMENT
TO WASTE
FROM
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
7253155B
BACKWASH (FRONT AND CENTER SECTION RETURNED)
After the CBC sample is analyzed, the instrument drains the RBC and WBC baths and fills the
baths with a cross-rinse of diluent from the diluent dispensers (see Figure 2.16-15).
Figure 2.16-15 Cross-Rinse in the Manual Mode
TO RBC
BATH
TO WBC
BATH
FROM RBC
DILUENT DISPENSER
CROSS-RINSE
7253156A
Before the next sample is aspirated, the instrument primes the diff sample segment and the
15 in. delivery line with diff lytic reagent and/or the retic sample segment and delivery line
with stain. See Figure 2.16-16.
Figure 2.16-16 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent
D IF F
S A M P L E
S E G M E N T
R E T IC
S A M P L E
S E G M E N T
T O
R E A R
B L O O D
D E T E C T O R
1 5 " d e liv e r y
lin e
A S P IR A T IO N
P U M P
HEATER
B S V
6 4 9 8 2 2 5 B
2.16-8
M IX IN G
C H A M B E R
S T A IN
C H A M B E R
D IF F L Y T IC
R E A G E N T
P U M P
S T A IN
P U M P
PN 4277219B
SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
2.17

Summary
The sample acquisition system aspirates blood samples from the specimen tubes, monitors
the quality and integrity of the samples (Automatic mode only), isolates segments of the
samples for analysis, and cleans the blood pathways between samples. The sample acquisition
system comprises the following components and assemblies:
r
Aspiration Pump - Aspirates blood sample.
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV) - Segments blood sample for CBC analysis.
Diff and Retic Sample Tubings (GENS System) or Shear Valves (LH 750 System) Segment blood samples for diff and retic analysis.
Needle Assembly - Pierces specimen tube in Automatic mode.
Bubble/Blood Detectors - Checks quality and integrity of blood sample in Automatic

mode.
Hand Detector - Detects operators hand and initiates cycle in Manual mode.
Probe-Wipe Module - Cleans outside of aspirator tip in Manual mode.
This section describes the sample acquisition system components and assemblies. See
Heading 2.16 for an overview of the sample acquisition system in both aspiration modes.
Aspiration Pump
Function
The aspiration pump (PM9) is located under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure A.7-8 (GENS System) or Figure A.8-8 (LH 750 System) for location. The aspiration
pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump used to aspirate samples in both
the Automatic and the Manual modes. It consists of a liquid port (1), three pneumatic ports
(2, 3, and 4) and two pistons. See Figure 2.17-1.
r
The inner piston aspirates the sample. Pneumatic signals from SL9 to the top (4) and
bottom (2) ports of the pump control the movement of this piston.
The outer piston provides stops for the inner piston, determining the volume aspirated,
low or high. Pneumatic signals from SL24 to the side port (3) of the pump control the
movement of this piston.
The aspiration pump has three states: at rest, Manual-mode aspiration and Automatic-mode
aspiration. Table 2.17-1 summarizes the piston positions and pneumatic signals for the three
states of the pump. Figures 2.17-2, 2.17-3 and 2.17-4 show the three states.
.
Table 2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions

Pump State
Side Port (3)
Outer Piston
Top Port (4)
Bottom Port (2)
Inner Piston
At rest
Pressure
Up
Vent
Pressure
Up
Automatic mode - aspiration
Vent
Down
Pressure
Vent
Down
Manual mode - aspiration
Pressure
Up
Pressure
Vent
Down
PN 4277219B
2.17-1
Figure 2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Components

LIQUID
PORT (1)
TOP
PNEUMATIC
PORT(4)
INNER
PISTON
SIDE
PNEUMATIC
PORT(3)
OUTER
PISTON
BOTTOM
PNEUMATIC
PORT(2)
7253272A
Aspiration Pump at Rest

When the aspiration pump is at rest, both pistons
are held at top of stroke as shown in
Figure 2.17-2. To achieve this condition, both
SL9 and SL24 are de-energized.
Figure 2.17-2 Aspiration Pump at Rest

VENT
TOP PORT (4)
In the de-energized state, SL9 vents the top port

(4) of the pump and routes 30 psi to the bottom
port (2), pushing up the inner piston and holding
it at top of stroke.
In the de-energized state, SL24 routes 30 psi to
the side port (3), pushing up the outer piston.
PRESSURE
SIDE PORT (3)
PRESSURE
BOTTOM PORT (2)
2.17-2
7253305A
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.17-3 Aspiration in Manual Mode
PRESSURE
TOP PORT (4)
In the energized state, SL9 vents the bottom port

(2) of the aspiration pump and routes 30 psi to
the top port (4). The inner piston moves down,
creating a vacuum at the liquid port (1) that
aspirates a sample.
In the de-energized state, SL24 routes pressure to
the side port of the pump, holding the outer
piston at the top of stroke. When the inner piston
reaches the outer piston, the outer piston stops
the movement of the inner piston, limiting
aspiration to the smaller, Manual-mode volume.
See Figure 2.17-3.
PRESSURE
SIDE PORT (3)
VENT
BOTTOM PORT (2)
Aspiration Pump - Manual-Mode Aspiration

To aspirate a sample in the Manual mode, SL9 is
energized and SL24 remains de-energized.
7253306A
Figure 2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode
PRESSURE
TOP PORT (4)
Aspiration Pump - Automatic-Mode Aspiration

To aspirate a sample in the Automatic mode, both
SL9 and SL24 are energized.
Note: During the Automatic mode, SL24 remains
energized until the last Automatic-mode sample
cycle is completed.
In the energized state, SL9 vents the bottom port
(2) of the aspiration pump and routes 30 psi to
the top port (4). The inner piston moves down,
creating a vacuum at the liquid port (1) that
aspirates the sample.
VENT
SIDE PORT (3)
VENT
BOTTOM PORT (2)
PN 4277219B
In the energized state, SL24 vents the side port

(3) of the pump. Now, when the inner piston
reaches the outer piston, the inner piston
continues to move, pushing down the outer
piston to make a full stroke. See Figure 2.17-4.
Making a full stroke aspirates the larger,
Automatic-mode volume.
7253307A
2.17-3
Adjustable Stops
The dual-volume pumps have two adjustable stops, one for adjusting the low volume and the
other for adjusting the high volume. The low (Manual mode) volume is adjusted as shown in
Figure 2.17-5. Since this adjustment changes the length of the inner piston stroke and
therefore would also affect the high volume, this stop is always adjusted first. The high
(Automatic mode) volume is adjusted as shown in Figure 2.17-6.
Figure 2.17-5 Adjusting the Low, Manual-Mode Volume
Hold
MANUAL MODE
(LOW VOLUME)
STOP ADJUSTMENT
Adjust
7253324B
Figure 2.17-6 Adjusting the High, Automatic-Mode Volume
AUTOMATIC MODE
(HIGH VOLUME)
STOP ADJUSTMENT
7253323B
2.17-4
PN 4277219B
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV)

Function
The BSV is located under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to Figure A.7-8 (GENS
System) or Figure A.8-8 (LH 750 System) for location. The BSV is composed of three ceramic
disks with pathways for:
r
r
r
r
Aspirating blood samples.

Delivering segments of the samples to the RBC and WBC baths for analysis.
Backwashing the blood pathways.
Cleaning the surfaces of the BSV.
For details on the aspiration, delivery and backwash pathways in the BSV, see the sample
acquisition system overview for both modes under Heading 2.16.
The cleaning pathways or channels of the BSV are located on the inner surfaces of the front
and rear sections of the BSV. During the Diluter cycle, while the vacuum isolator and baths are
draining, diluent is pulled through these pathways to clean the surfaces of the BSV.
The rear section of the BSV remains stationary, the front and the center sections rotate.
r
Cylinder CL1 rotates the front section of the BSV to align the pathways or ports within
the ceramic disks for the selected aspiration mode, Automatic or Manual. SL34 normally
(de-energized state) routes pressure to CL1 to keep the front section rotated clockwise,
with the aspirator tip extended. SL34 and SL24 are both are energized to rotate the front
section counterclockwise. During the Automatic mode, SL34 and SL24 remain energized
until the last Automatic-mode sample cycle is completed.
Cylinder CL2 rotates the shaft of the BSV, which rotates the center section of the BSV.
The center section isolates segments of the blood sample for CBC analysis and aligns
those segments with their respective diluent dispenser and aperture bath ports. SL15
routes pressure to CL2 to rotate the center section counterclockwise. SL17 routes
pressure to CL2 to rotate the center section clockwise.
Table 2.17-2 summarizes the positions of the BSV sections during a sample cycle.
Table 2.17-2 Summary of the BSV Positions
Automatic-Mode BSV Positions*
Manual-Mode BSV Positions*
Time in Cycle
Front Section
Center Section
Front Section
Center Section
Aspiration
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
Delivery
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Backwash Aspirator Tip
N/A
N/A
CCW
CCW
Backwash CBC Sample Lines and Needle
CCW
CCW
CCW
CCW
Cross-Rinse
CCW
CCW
CCW
CCW
* CW (clockwise) and CCW (counterclockwise) when facing the BSV knob.
PN 4277219B
2.17-5
BSV Ports
The ports for the BSV are shown in Figure 2.17-7 and described in Table 2.17-3.
Figure 2.17-7 BSV Ports
CENTER
SECTION
FRONT
SECTION
9
5
10
6
11
RBC SAMPLE
12
REAR
SECTION
13
WBC SAMPLE LOOP
4
2
3
7253090A
Table 2.17-3 BSV Ports

Port Number
Tubing Number
Description
201
To waste from rear section cleaning channel
202
To RBC bath
203
Diluent in for rear section cleaning channel
204
From RBC diluent dispenser for cross-rinse
205
To diff and retic sample lines
206
From WBC diluent dispenser
207
To WBC bath
208
From backwash manifold to clean aspirator tip
209
To waste from front section cleaning channel
10
210
From RBC diluent dispenser during Automatic mode
11
211
From piercing needle
12
212
From RBC diluent dispenser during Manual mode
13
213
Diluent in for front section cleaning channel
2.17-6
PN 4277219B
Shear Valves
Hardware Description
Shear valves are used on the LH 750 System to segment diff and retic blood samples and
stained retic samples and to align those samples with the appropriate reagent pumps and
chambers. The three shear valves, two 31 L diff/retic blood segment valves (CVL85/126 and
CVL87/127) and one 2.5 L stained retic segment valve (CVL93/128), are located on the
Random Access module in the Diluter. Refer to Figure A.8-9 for locations.
The shear valve assemblies consist of:
r
Two flat ceramic plates, one stationary and one sliding, housed within a valve box and
cover.
A side spring to press the plates against each other.
A top spring to keep the sliding plate aligned with the stationary plate during movement.
Two rods with pneumatic actuators, one at each end of the shear valve assembly, that
move the sliding plate.
Note: The primary advantage of using shear valves on the LH 750 System versus the system
of special tubings, tees, and crosses used on the GENS System, is that when a shear valve is
stationary the liquid in the aspiration path is never mixed with the liquid in the delivery path,
eliminating the possibility of contamination in the delivery path.
The following sections on the shear valves discuss how the shear valves work, describe what
is routed through them in each valve position, and identify the valves ports. Be aware
however, that the explanations may not follow the exact timing cycles of these valves.
Diff and Retic Segment Valves
The diff and retic segment valves contain pathways for:
r
Aspirating the diff or retic blood samples. The sample segmenting section includes an
external stainless steel loop on the stationary plate.
Delivering segments of the diff or the retic sample for processing.
Cleaning the surfaces of the plates. The cleaning pathway is a groove ground into the
surface of the stationary plate.
Figure 2.17-8 Aspirate Sample

Home position
Sample loop
6498178B
PN 4277219B
During aspiration of the blood sample, blood enters the

blood input port on the segment valve, travels through the
segmenting section in the stationary plate, and exits
through the blood output port. See Figure 2.17-8
Sample path
2.17-7
Figure 2.17-9 Deliver Sample
After aspiration, the rod on the front of the shear valve

assembly is activated to move the sliding plate, aligning
the reagent input port and the reagent output port with
the blood segment. See Figure 2.17-9.
Segment position
Sample loop
Then the reagent pump is activated, delivering reagent to

the shear valve to push the blood segment to the
appropriate chamber. For details about the sample
processing, refer to Processing the Diff Sample on the
LH 750 System under Heading 2.22, or Processing the
Retic Sample on the LH 750 System under Heading 2.23.
Reagent path
6498179B
Figure 2.17-10 Backwash Sample Groove

Segment position
While in the segment position, the sample groove in the

sliding plate is backwashed. See Figure 2.17-10.
Backwash path
Sample groove
6498180B
Figure 2.17-11 Wash Cleaning Groove

Home position
Cleaning
groove
After the blood segment is delivered and the sample

groove is backwashed, the rod on the rear of the shear
valve assembly is activated to return the sliding plate to
the aspiration (home) position. See Figure 2.17-12.
While in the home position, vacuum pulls diluent through
the cleaning groove to wash out any liquid that may have
migrated between the plates of the shear valve.
6498182B
Figure 2.17-12 Backwash Sample Loop
In addition, the sample (aspiration) path is backwashed to

flush out the residual reagent. See Figure 2.17-11.
The segment valve remains primed with diluent in the
aspiration path and with reagent in the delivery path.
2.17-8
PN 4277219B
Stained Retic Segment Valve

The stained retic segment valve contains pathways for:
r
Aspirating the stained retic blood sample. The sample segmenting section is a precisely
machined surface cavity in the stationery plate.
Delivering the segment of the stained retic sample.
Cleaning the surfaces of the plates. The cleaning pathway is a groove ground into the
surface of the stationary plate.
Figure 2.17-13 Aspirate Sample

H o m e p o s itio n
6 4 9 8 2 3 9 B
S a m p le s e g m e n t
S a m p le p a th
Figure 2.17-14 Deliver Sample

S e g m e n t p o s itio n
6 4 9 8 2 4 0 B
During aspiration of the stained blood sample, stained

blood enters the blood input port on the stationery plate,
travels through the segmenting section in the sliding plate,
and exits through the blood output port on the stationary
plate. See Figure 2.17-13.
After aspiration, the rod on the front of the shear valve

assembly is activated to move the sliding plate, aligning
the reagent input port and the reagent output port with
the blood segment. See Figure 2.17-14.
Then the reagent pump is activated, delivering retic
clearing solution to the shear valve to push the stained
blood segment to the retic chamber. For details on the
retic stained sample processing, refer to Processing the
Retic Sample on the LH 750 System under Heading 2.23.
R e a g e n t
p a th
Figure 2.17-15 Wash Cleaning Groove

After the stained blood segment is delivered, the rod on

the rear of the shear valve assembly is activated to return
the sliding plate to the aspiration (home) position. See
Figure 2.17-16.
While in the home position, vacuum pulls diluent through
the cleaning groove to wash out any liquid that may have
migrated between the plates of the shear valve.
C le a n in g
g ro o v e
PN 4277219B
6 4 9 8 2 4 1 B
2.17-9
Figure 2.17-16 Rinse Aspiration Pathway

S a m p le
s e g m e n t
In addition, the aspiration (sample) path is rinsed with

stain to flush out the residual retic clearing solution. See
Figure 2.17-15.
The segment valve remains primed with stain in the
aspiration path and with retic clearing solution in the
delivery (reagent) path.
S ta in r in s e
p a th
6 4 9 8 2 4 2 B
Shear Valve Ports

The ports for the diff and retic segment valves are shown in Figure 2.17-17 and described in
Figure 2.17-4. The ports for the stained retic segment valve are shown in Figure 2.17-18 and
described in Figure 2.17-5.
Figure 2.17-17 Diff and Retic Segment Valve Ports
F ro n t
1 1
1 2
9
7
1 0
3
4
1
2
6498201B
R ig h t s id e
L e ft s id e
M e ta l lo o p
Table 2.17-4 Diff and Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions

Port # Diff Segment Valve (CVL85/126)
Retic Segment Valve (CVL87/127)
To retic segment valve (CVL87/127), port 10
To VL62BD2
31 L metal loopport 5
FX1-1
3.5" 0.023 i.d. tubing loop port 7
1.25 mL 0.023 i.d. tubing loopport 6
FX1-3
3.5" 0.023 i.d. tubing loop port 3
To VL65mixing chamber
To VL89stain chamber
From diff heater
From VL99PM5 (stain pump)
10
From FT13-3 (BSV)
From diff segment valve (CVL85/126), port 1
11
FT33FT32QD73 (diluent input)
FT33FT32QD73 (diluent input)
12
FT31FT30QD98 (waste output)
FT31FT30QD98 (waste output)
2.17-10
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.17-18 Stained Retic Segment Valve Ports

F ro n t
6
1
4
L e ft s id e
6498200B
B la n k
3
R ig h t s id e
Table 2.17-5 Stained Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions

Port # Stained Retic Segment Valve (CVL93/128)
1
From retic clearing solution pump (PM6)
To VL95retic chamber
From VL94stain chamber
To PM11
FT30QD98 (waste output)
FT32QD73 (diluent input)
Needle Assembly
The needle assembly is located under the lower cover of the Diluter. See Figure A.7-8 (GENS
System) or Figure A.8-8 (LH 750 System) for location. The needle assembly comprises:
r
Stationary needle enclosed within a bellows
Bellows up and bellows down sensors
Bellows interlock
Bellows cylinder (CL3)
Needle vent vacuum chamber (VC19).
See Figure 2.17-19.

At all times except during piercing of the specimen tube:
PN 4277219B
The bellows cylinder is extended, so that the bellows are expanded, covering the needle.
The bellows up sensor is activated, indicating the bellows are expanded.
The bellows interlock is engaged. The bellows interlock ensures the bellows remains
expanded, preventing accidental exposure of the needle. To contract the bellows, this
solenoid activated interlock must be disengaged.
2.17-11
Figure 2.17-19 Needle Assembly Components

NEEDLE
(Inside BELLOWS)
BELLOWS INTERLOCK
ASPIRATION
LINE
WASTE LINE
VENT/VACUUM
INPUT
NEEDLE
VENT LINE
BELLOW
UP SENSOR
NEEDLE VENT
CHAMBER
BELLOW
DOWN SENSOR
BELLOW
CYLINDER
6498019B
From
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD MF4
To pierce the specimen tube, the bellows interlock is disengaged and the bellows cylinder
(CL3) is retracted at the same time as the tube ram cylinder (CL6) is extended, so that the
bellows is contracted at the same time as the specimen tube is pushed onto the needle. When
the bellows is contracted, the bellows up sensor is deactivated and the bellows down sensor is
activated.
After aspiration, CL3 is extended and CL6 is retracted simultaneously, so that the bellows
expands, covering the needle, at the same time as the tube is pushed off the needle.
Before rinsing the needle vent line or backwashing the needle, the instrument checks the
bellows up sensor to verify the bellows is covering the needle, preventing the spraying of
biohazardous material.
Diluent from the backwash manifold (MF4) is pushed through the vent line, into the needle
vent chamber, through the needle vent into the bellows. The vent rinse is drained and then
vacuum is applied to the needle vent chamber to dry the vent lines.
The needle is backwashed with diluent and the backwash waste is collected in the bellows
and then drained to waste.
2.17-12
PN 4277219B
Bubble/Blood Detectors
Function
Two bubble/blood detectors are located in the Automatic-mode aspiration pathway, one
before the BSV, and the other at the other at the end of the pathway. See Figure 2.17-20.
Figure 2.17-20 Bubble/Blood Detectors
BSV
Rear blood
detector
Front blood
detector
Front
blood
detector
6498025B
Rear
blood
detector

LH 750 System
Retic module
GEN S System
The bubble/blood detectors are optical sensors that monitor aspiration in the Automatic
mode to ensure the sample is of good quality and sufficient volume. The Diluter 2 card
contains the logic circuitry and provides the power for the bubble/blood detectors, and
contains LEDs indicating the status of the bubble/blood detectors for troubleshooting
The bubble/blood detectors are calibrated as a set to ensure proper operation.
PN 4277219B
2.17-13
Operation
Refer to the numbers on Figure 2.17-21 to follow the operation of the bubble/blood detectors.
Note: Figure 2.17-21 and the illustrations in Table 2.17-6 are provided to explain how the
bubble/blood detectors work and make no attempt to show the actual timing of the readings.
Figure 2.17-21 Bubble/Blood Detector Operation
Front Detector
Rear Detector
% TRANSMITTANCE
100
Diluent
Air
Blood
Threshold
(3)
0
TIME
Carryover Aspiration Blood
Check
Occurs Check
(1)
(2)
Blood Flow
Bubble
Check
(4)
BSV
Partial
Rotates Aspiration
Check
(5)
Bubble/Blood
Detectors
Reset
7253359A
Immediately after a specimen tube is pushed onto the needle, the Blood Detector circuit looks
for diluent levels at both the front and rear detectors. This is the carryover check, verifying
the previous sample was backwashed and the sample path is clean (1).
After aspiration starts, an initial reading is taken at the front sensor (2) to verify the level is
below a preset blood threshold (3). This blood check is to verify that aspiration occurred.
During aspiration (until the BSV center section rotates), the front detector is monitored (4)
for any voltage increases that would indicate bubbles or dilution of the sample. This is the
bubble check, verifying the quality of the sample.
After the center section of the BSV rotates and the diluent dispensers are activated, the front
and rear detector voltages are compared to verify the consistency of the blood is the same at
the beginning and the end of the aspiration path. This is the partial aspiration check (5) to
ensure the aspirated sample volume is sufficient.
If an aspiration problem occurs and aspiration is set at one aspiration/tube, the instrument
aborts the current cycle, repierces the specimen tube and repeats aspiration. If an aspiration
problem occurs on a repeat cycle or if aspiration is set to more than one aspiration/tube, the
instrument completes the cycle and generates an aspiration message.
2.17-14
PN 4277219B
Aspiration Messages
If an aspiration error occurs, the instrument displays a message on the Analyzer and the
Diluter, writes a message in the event log at the Workstation, displays results at the
Workstation with a P (aspiration error) flag, and lights the appropriate LED on the Diluter 2
card. See Table 2.17-6 for a description of each message. Refer to Heading 7.2 for
troubleshooting action.
When the bubble/blood detectors are disabled, the Workstation displays the results of
samples ran in the Automatic mode with a P-flag. This alerts the operator to review the results
so that no erroneous results are reported if an aspiration error occurs while the bubble/blood
detectors are disabled.
Table 2.17-6 Aspiration Messages
Message
LED
Condition
ASPIRATION C
CARRY
Before the tube is pierced, the

100
difference between the front and rear
detectors is greater than a specified
limit. The most common cause is a
dirty pathway.
0
TIME
ASPIRATION N
NOBL
After the aspiration pump is

activated, the voltage at the front
detector fails to reach the blood
threshold within a given time,
indicating no blood was aspirated.
Carryover Check Failed

Difference Between Front
and Rear Detectors Failed
Aspiration C
100
0
TIME
PN 4277219B
7253360A
Front Detector Did Not Drop

Below Blood Threshold
Aspiration N
7253361A
2.17-15
Table 2.17-6 Aspiration Messages (Continued)

Message
LED
Condition
ASPIRATION B
BUBB
During aspiration, the front sensor

voltage level went above a specified
level, indicating the presence of
bubbles 0.1 L or larger.
100
During aspiration, the difference

between the front sensor voltage and
the blood threshold increased,
indicating the blood may be diluted.
0
TIME
ASPIRATION P
PART
Front Detector Changes

Detected During Blood Flow
Bubble Check Failed
Aspiration B
7253362A
Before the BSV rotates, the

100
difference between the front and rear
detectors is greater than a specified
limit. The most common cause is a
short sample.
TIME
7253363B
Difference Between Front

and Rear Detectors Failed
Partial Aspiration Check Failed
Aspiration P
Hand Detector
The hand detector is located in the Manual-mode aspiration station. See Figure 2.17-22.
The hand detector, an infrared optical sensor, performs two functions:
r
It is a safety mechanism for the rotation of the front section of the BSV. Before the
instrument energizes the solenoid to rotate the front section of the BSV, it monitors the
hand-detector sensor to determine if anything is in the pathway of the aspirator tip.
It initiates the Manual-mode cycle. The instrument monitors the hand-detector sensor
and automatically initiates aspiration when the light path is interrupted. The hand
detector is part of SmartStart recognition.
Note: If an operator presents a specimen tube to the aspirator tip before entering the
sample ID, the instrument prompts the operator to enter the sample ID before it aspirates
a sample. The operator must block the hand-detectors beam throughout aspiration.
2.17-16
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.17-22 Manual-Mode Aspiration Station Components

Motor
Aspirator
tip
Backwash
cup
cylinder
Activator
Optical
sensors
Cleaning
truck
Hand
detector
sensor
Manual
start switch
Backwash
cup
6498140B
Probe-Wipe module
Probe-Wipe Module
Function
The Probe-Wipe module is located behind the Manual-mode aspiration station. Refer to
Figure 2.17-22. The Probe-Wipe module consists of:
r
A backwash cup that receives the diluent and blood backwashed through the aspirator
tip and drains it to waste.
Note: Two styles of Probe-Wipe modules are currently in use on the GENS System.
t
In the original Probe-Wipe module, the backwash cup is stationary. This

Probe-Wipe module works with any of the released software versions.
In the current (or field modified) Probe-wipe module, the backwash cup is
moveable. The cup is moved up to the aspirator tip during the backwash to
eliminate the possibility of liquid spraying on the module and causing Probe-Wipe
errors. This Probe-Wipe module requires software version 4A or higher.
The LH 750 System uses the Probe-wipe module with a moveable backwash cup.
r
A spring-return cylinder, CL11, that moves the backwash cup under the aspirator tip
during backwash.
Note: CL11 is only present in Probe-wipe modules with a moveable backwash cup.
PN 4277219B
A cleaning truck that travels up and down the aspirator tip.
A motor that drives the cleaning truck.
Two optical sensors, one at the top and one at the bottom of the travel route of the truck,
that monitor the position of the cleaning truck.
2.17-17
After aspiration in the Manual mode, the cleaning truck moves up and down the aspirator tip,
dispensing clean diluent around the tip and applying vacuum from the waste chamber to
collect the diluent and any blood. This is the sequence of events:
1.
The solenoids that provide diluent (SL110) and vacuum (SL111) to the cleaning truck
are energized.
2.
The direction of the motor is set to up and the motor driver is enabled.
3.
The motor timer is set and the probe-wipe up sensor is monitored.
4.
When the probe-wipe up sensor detects the cleaning truck -
5.
a.
The motor stops and reverses direction.
b.
The motor driver is enabled.
c.
The timer is reset and the down sensor is monitored.
d.
The solenoid that provides diluent (SL110) is disabled, so that only vacuum is
applied during the descent of the cleaning truck.
When the probe-wipe down sensor detects the cleaning truck a.
The motor stops.
b.
The vacuum solenoid (SL111) is de-energized.
At the end of the cycle, the cleaning truck:

1.
Moves up slightly, applying only vacuum to remove the last drop on the aspirator tip.
2.
Returns to the down position.
Monitoring
The optoswitch sensors in the Probe-Wipe module are monitored by the Diluter 2 card. The
Diluter 2 card also contains and controls the status LEDs for the sensors and the Motor-Driver
and Current Limit circuits for the motor.
If the time expires before the appropriate sensor detects the cleaning truck, the instrument
stops the motor and generates a fault message. If it is the probe-wipe up sensor that did not
detect the cleaning truck in time, the motor changes directions, sending the cleaning truck
back down.
The instrument also monitors the probe-wipe up and probe-wipe down sensors before
rotating the rear section of the BSV to ensure the cleaning truck is in the down position.
2.17-18
PN 4277219B
CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA
2.18

Summary
The Analytical Station uses the Coulter Principle to count and measure the RBCs and Plts in
the RBC bath and WBCs in the WBC bath, and measures hemoglobin photometrically in the
Hgb cuvette. Electronic cards in the Analyzer measure and count the pulses produced by the
cells, and develop histograms for a graphical representation of size versus number. The
remaining CBC parameters (Hct, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Pct and PDW) are calculated from the
directly measured data. This section describes the components used to sense the RBC, WBC
and Plt data and to measure the Hgb.
Heading 2.19 describes the electronic cards used to analyze RBC, WBC and Plt data. See
Chapter 3 in the Reference manual for a description of the methods used to obtain all the
CBC parameters.
For an overview of CBC analysis on the GENS System, see Figure 2.18-1. For an overview of
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System, see Figure 2.18-2.
Figure 2.18-1 CBC Analysis in the GENS System Block Diagram
DILUTER
ANALYZER
WHITE
PRE-AMP
CARD
WIA1
WIA2
WIA3
API
CARD
RED
PRE-AMP
CARD
WBC
BATH
RBC
BATH
HGB
CUVETTE
HGB PREAMP
MODULE
SBUS
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR
CARD
RIA1
RIA2
RIA3
PLATELET
PROCESSOR
CARD
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
CARD
AMC
7253169B
PN 4277219B
2.18-1
Figure 2.18-2 CBC Analysis in the LH 750 System Block Diagram

D IL U T E R
A N A L Y Z E R
R B C
R /W /P
S C /A
c a rd
P L T
W B C
S ix - C h a n n e l
P re a m p
c a rd
W B C
B A T H
P L A T E L E T
P R O C E S S O R
c a rd
S B U S
R E D /W H IT E
P R O C E S S O R 2
c a rd
R B C
B A T H
H g b P re a m p
m o d u le
C O M M
IN T E R F A C E
c a rd
A M C
H g b
c u v e tte
W o r k s ta tio n
7 2 1 9 0 2 5 B
Making the Sample Dilutions

Refer to Figures 2.18-3 and 2.18-4 for component locations on the GENS System, to
Figure 2.18-5 for component locations on the LH 750 System.
After aspiration of the blood sample, the center section of the BSV rotates to segment two
separate volumes of the sample and to align the blood segments with the diluent dispensers.
For details about the function of the BSV, see Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION
SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, and see Blood Sampling Valve (BSV) under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE
ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION.
The RBC diluent dispenser (PM2) and the WBC diluent dispenser (PM3) dispense diluent
through the BSV, washing the blood segments into their respective baths.
At the same time, the CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7) dispenses reagent into the delivery path
to the WBC bath, delivering the CBC lytic reagent with the blood/diluent dilution. The CBC
lytic reagent lyses the RBCs, leaving the WBCs for analysis. Mixing bubbles enter the baths to
mix the dilutions.
See Table A.1-31 for dispenser and pump volume specifications.
2.18-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.18-3 CBC Sample Processing Components on GENS System Analytical Stations that Use the
Diluent Reservoir
RBC DILUENT
DISPENSER
WBC DILUENT
DISPENSER
RBC
BATH
VACUUM
ISOLATOR CHAMBER
SWEEP-FLOW
TANK
CBC LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
HGB CUVETTE
ASSEMBLY
WBC
BATH
VACUUM
REGULATOR
7253171A
Figure 2.18-4 CBC Sample Processing Components on GENS System Analytical Stations that Bypass
the Diluent Reservoir
RBC diluent
dispenser
WBC diluent
dispenser
RBC vacuum
isolator chamber
RBC
bath
PN 4277219B
Sweep-flow
tank
CBC lytic
WBC vacuum
isolator chamber reagent pump
Hgb cuvette
assemblt
WBC
bath
Vacuum
regulator
6498089A
2.18-3
Figure 2.18-5 CBC Sample Processing Components on LH 750 System Analytical Stations
RBC diluent
dispenser
WBC diluent
dispenser
RBC vacuum
isolator chamber
RBC
bath
Sweep-flow
tank
CBC lytic
WBC vacuum
isolator chamber reagent pump
Hgb cuvette
assembly
WBC
bath
Vacuum
regulator
6498191B
Applying the Coulter Principle

Sensing Area
Both aperture bath/aperture module assemblies house an external electrode, three apertures
and three internal electrodes for applying aperture current across the aperture. (The
instrument analyzes the dilutions three times simultaneously.) See Figure 2.18-6.
Aperture Vacuum
Regulated low vacuum from the vacuum isolator chamber (VC1) or from two vacuum
isolator chambers (VC1-R and VC1-W) pulls the dilutions through the apertures.
In the RBC aperture bath/aperture module assembly, the vacuum also pulls diluent from the
sweep-flow tank, up behind the RBC apertures, to prevent RBCs from swirling back into the
sensing area and being recounted as platelets.
Aperture Current
On the GENS System, coaxial cables connect the internal electrodes to the RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards, which supply the aperture current to the apertures. For details, see
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GENS System) under Heading 2.19, CBC ANALYSIS ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA.
On the LH 750 System, coaxial cables connect the internal electrodes to the Six-Channel
Preamp card which is mounted behind the apertures in the Diluter. For details see
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System) under Heading 2.19, CBC ANALYSIS ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA.
2.18-4
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.18-6 Applying the Coulter Principle

APERTURE
VACUUM LINES
INTERNAL
ELECTRODES
(1 OF 3)
APERTURE
VACUUM
LINES
COAXIAL
CABLES
WBC APERTURE
AREA (1 OF 3)
INTERNAL
ELECTRODES
(1 OF 3)
EXTERNAL
ELECTRODES
SWEEP-FLOW
INPUT LINES
(1 OF 3)
SAMPLE
INPUT
7253170A
RBC
APERTURE
AREA (1 OF 3)
SAMPLE
INPUT
Timing the Data Collection in the GENS System

WBC and RBC Data
Data for the WBC and RBC counts is collected at the same time and for the same amount of
time, the first 4 seconds of the count cycle. See Figure 2.18-7.
Figure 2.18-7 Data Collection Timing on the GENS System
TIME - SECONDS
1
WBC
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
COUNT
HISTOGRAM
RBC
COUNT
HISTOGRAM
PLT
HISTOGRAM
DATA COLLECTION FOR WBC AND RBC COUNTS

MINIMAL DATA COLLECTION FOR HISTOGRAMS
ADDITIONAL DATA COLLECTION INCREMENTS FOR HISTOGRAMS
7253412C
Data for the development of the WBC and RBC histograms is collected sequentially and for
varying lengths of time as described below.
PN 4277219B
2.18-5
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good pulses can vary the
histogram data collection time.
WBC Histogram
Data for the WBC histogram is collected for the first 2 seconds of the count cycle. If
additional information is required, the system extends data accumulation in 2-second
increments to a maximum of 10 seconds. Data accumulation stops when one of the following
criteria is met:
r
The peak channel is full (254 particles in any one channel).
2,000 particles are accumulated in all WBC histograms.
10 seconds maximum is reached.
RBC Histogram
Data for the RBC histogram is collected after the instrument finishes collecting data for the
WBC histogram. The data is collected for 2 seconds. If additional information is required, the
system extends data accumulation in 2-second increments to a maximum of 8 seconds. Data
accumulation stops when one of the following criteria is met:
r
5,000 particles are accumulated in all RBC histograms.
Plt Histogram
Data for the PLT histogram is collected for the first 4 seconds of the count cycle. If additional
information is required, the system extends data accumulation in 2-second increments to a
maximum of 18 seconds. Data accumulation stops when one of the following criteria is met:
r
1,500 particles are accumulated in any platelet histogram.
Timing the Data Collection in the LH 750 System

WBC and RBC Count Data
Data for the WBC and RBC counts is collected at the same time and for the same amount of
time. See Figure 2.18-7. At a minimum the WBC and RBC count data is collected for the first
four 1 second count periods. Then the counts are extended in 1 second increments until the
data accumulation for the histograms is completed or until 10 seconds have elapsed,
whichever comes first.
WBC, RBC, and Plt Histograms
Data for the development of the WBC and RBC histograms is collected sequentially and for
varying lengths of time as described below.
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good pulses can vary the
histogram data collection time.
2.18-6
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.18-8 Data Collection Timing LH 750 System

T IM E - S E C O N D S
1
W B C
R B C
P L T
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
C O U N T
H IS T O G R A M
C O U N T
H IS T O G R A M
H IS T O G R A M
M in im a l d a ta c o lle c tio n fo r W B C a n d R B C c o u n ts
A d d itio n a l d a ta c o lle c tio n in c r e m e n ts fo r W B C a n d R B C c o u n ts
M in im a l d a ta c o lle c tio n fo r h is to g r a m s
A d d itio n a l d a ta c o lle c tio n in c r e m e n ts fo r h is to g r a m s
6 4 9 8 2 4 4 B
WBC Histogram
Data for the WBC histogram is collected for the first 1 second of the count cycle. If additional
r
2,000 particles are accumulated in all WBC histograms.
RBC Histogram
Data for the RBC histogram is collected after the instrument finishes collecting data for the
WBC histogram. The data is collected for 1 second. If additional information is required, the
system extends data accumulation in 1-second increments to a maximum of 10 seconds. Data
accumulation stops when one of the following criteria is met:
r
5,000 particles are accumulated in all RBC histograms.
Plt Histogram
Data for the PLT histogram is collected for the first 2 seconds of the count cycle. If additional
PN 4277219B
1,500 particles are accumulated in any platelet histogram.
2.18-7
Determining the Hgb

When the CBC lytic reagent lyses the RBCs, it releases the hemoglobin. The hemoglobin
reacts with the CBC lytic reagent to form cyanmethemoglobin, a stable pigment.
To perform the Hgb analysis, the instrument takes two sets of voltage readings of diluent (for
a blank) and of the sample dilution. While the WBC count is performed, diluent from the
backwash tank (VC23) is dispensed into the Hgb cuvette for the Hgb-blank reading and then
drained. After the WBC count is completed, the dilution in the WBC bath drains into the
cuvette for the Hgb-sample reading.
Incandescent light from the Hgb lamp passes through the Hgb cuvette and then through a
filter with a transmission wavelength of 525 nm. See Figure 2.18-9.
Figure 2.18-9 Hgb Sensing Area
HGB LAMP
HGB PREAMP
MODULE WITH
525 NM FILTER
HGB
CUVETTE
7253173A
A light sensitive diode generates current from the transmitted light, which is converted to a
voltage at the op-amp in the Hgb preamp. The higher the Hgb concentration, the darker the
dilution, the less light that can pass through the dilution, and the lower the Hgb voltage.
The Hgb preamp routes the voltage to the COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, which
converts the voltage to a digital value for use by the AMC. See Figure 2.18-10.
Figure 2.18-10 Hgb Signal Flow
W B C B A T H
D IL U T E R 1
C A R D
5 2 5 N M F IL T E R
J 5
L A M P V D C
L A M P R E T
H G B S IG N A L
H G B
L A M P
H G B
C U V E T T E
7 2 1 9 0 2 4 B
2.18-8
R S /O P T O
IN T F C C A R D
J 2
J 5
C O M M IN T F C
C A R D
J 2 7
J 4 B A ,
B B 1 8
A D C
H G B P R E A M P
S Y S T E M B U S
PN 4277219B
On the GENS System, the AMC determines the Hgb results for the sample and then sends
the results to the Workstation. For details, see CBC Analysis on the GENS System, Hgb,
under Heading 2.24, SAMPLE REPORTING.
On the LH 750 System, the AMC stores the two sets of Hgb voltage readings and sends the
raw data to the Workstation for analysis. For details, see CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System,
Hgb, under Heading 2.24, SAMPLE REPORTING.
The sample dilution is drained from the Hgb cuvette either at the beginning of the next cycle
or according to the Hgb Timer Drain setting in the Analyzer Service Menu.
PN 4277219B
2.18-9
2.18-10
PN 4277219B
CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA
2.19

Summary
The Analytical Station uses the Coulter Principle to count and measure the RBCs and Plts in
the RBC bath and WBCs in the WBC bath, and measures hemoglobin photometrically in the
Hgb cuvette. Electronic cards in the Analyzer measure and count the pulses produced by the
cells, and collect data for histograms for a graphical representation of size versus number.
Heading 2.18 gives an overview of CBC analysis and describes the components used to sense
the RBC, Plt, WBC, MCV, MPV and Hgb parameters, and to determine the Hgb results. This
section describes all the electronic cards used to determine the RBC, WBC and Plt results,
except the R/W/P SC/A card used on the LH 750 System. It describes:
r
The two RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, and the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card used on the GENS System.
The Six-Channel Preamp card, the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, and the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card used on the LH 750 System.
For information on the R/W/P SC/A card, refer to R/W/P SC/A Card under Heading 2.7,
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE ANALYZER.
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GENS System)

Function
Two RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 cards are located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for
locations. The RED PRE-AMP card (the one on the left) is used for RBC and Plt pulses, the
WBC PRE-AMP card (the one on the right) for WBC pulses.
Figure 2.19-1 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP Card Block Diagram
I IA A 1 1
TT OO BB AA TT HH
ZZ AA PP
CC AA LL CC OO MM MM AA NN DD
CC AA LL PP UU LLSS EE
I IA A 2 2
TT OO BB AA TT HH
VV OO LLTT AA GG EE
C C I IR R C C U U I IT T
DD CC RR EE SS TT OO RR EE
XX 11
G G A A I IN N
A A M M P P L L I IF F I IE E R R
X X 8 8 . .0 0 9 9
AA NN AA LLOO GG
S S W W I IT T C C H H
VV OO LLTT AA GG EE
XX 11
G G A A I IN N
X X 8 8 . .0 0 9 9
AA NN AA LLOO GG
I IA A 3 3
TT OO BB AA TT HH
VV OO LLTT AA GG EE
AA NN AA LLOO GG
PN 4277219B
XX 11
G G A A I IN N
X X 8 8 . .0 0 9 9
7 72 25 53 31 17 74 4A A
2.19-1
Each RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 card contains three independent circuits for analog signal
processing. Each circuit is connected to an aperture module by a coaxial cable. Identical
circuits allow simultaneous processing of analog signals from each aperture. See
Figure 2.19-1.
The RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards:
r
Apply constant current to the electrodes through the coaxial cables.
Amplify the pulses generated when cells pass through the apertures.
Restore the voltage to a usable dc level.
Route the voltages to the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR or PLATELET PROCESSOR card.
CAL Pulses
CAL COMMAND and CAL PULSE signals from the API card are routed to the RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards analog switch and differential high gain amplifiers to generate RAMP pulses
and self-tests. These pulses are applied to the CBC circuits to test the signal paths that pulses
from the apertures follow through the System.
Inputs
Outputs
Aperture current supplies from the API

card
Three X1 gain signals from the RED

PRE-AMP to the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card
Zap voltage from the APS1 card
Three X8.09 gain signals from the REDPREAMP to the PLATELET

PROCESSOR card
Three X8.09 gain signals from the

WHITE PRE-AMP to the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card
+150 Vdc to the WHITE PRE-AMP
+82 Vdc to the RED PRE-AMP
CAL COMMAND and CAL PULSE

signals from the API card
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System)

Function
The Six-Channel Preamp card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-11 for location.
The Six-Channel Preamp card is designed to be used with the R/W/P SC/A card. It replaces
the RED/WHITE PREAMP cards used on the GENS System, without the dc restoration and
gain scaling functions.
The Six-Channel Preamp card:
r
Applies constant current to the electrodes through the coaxial cables.
Amplifies the pulses generated when cells pass through the apertures. See Figure 2.19-2.
Routes the voltages to the R/W/R SC/A card
Locating the Six-Channel Preamp card in the Diluter, close to the apertures, allows the use of
shorter coaxial cables. The combination of shorter coaxial cables and the high-level
differential amplifier outputs generated by the Six-Channel Preamp card minimizes sensitivity
to interference.
2.19-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.19-2 Six-Channel Preamp Card Block Diagram

R E D /P L A T E L E T In p u t c o u p lin g
c a p a c ito r
T r a n s im p e d a n c e
a m p lifie r
G a in
s ta g e
X 3
2
3 0 0 A
R E D /P L A T E L E T +
D iffe r e n tia l
a m p lifie r
R e d
a p e rtu re
W H IT E In p u t c o u p lin g
c a p a c ito r
+
3 0 0 A
T r a n s im p e d a n c e
a m p lifie r
G a in
s ta g e
X 3
2
W H IT E +
W h ite
a p e rtu re
7 2 1 9 0 2 7 B
CAL Pulses
Not available yet.
Inputs
Outputs
+235 Vdc from R/W/P SC/A card
Zap voltage from APS1 card

t
+150 Vdc for white aperture zap

voltage
+82 Vdc for red aperture zap

voltage
15 Vdc via the R/W/P SC/A card
Test pulse (not available yet)
Six differential amplified signals
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card (GENS System)

Function
The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for
location. The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card routes the six gain signals from the
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards through comparator circuits, peak-detection and edit circuits
and buffer circuits to:
r
r
r
PN 4277219B
Determine the RBC and WBC count.

Find the ideal pulses for sizing to develop RBC and WBC histograms.
Display pulses on the Analyzer CRT.
2.19-3
Cell Counting. Each of the six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards connect to
a comparator circuit. See Figure 2.19-3. All pulses sensed during the 4-second count time are
processed for count. But only pulses determined by the comparator circuits to be above a
predetermined threshold and within the desired pulse width are counted as a cell.
Pulses that pass the threshold are converted to digital signals and routed to a tri-counter. The
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card has two tri-counters, one for RBC counts and one for WBC
counts. The tri-counters validate and count the digital information, and hold it until it is
needed by the AMC.
Figure 2.19-3 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram
SIZING
WHT 1
RED 2
WHT 2
RED 3
WHT 3
AP1
PEAK
DETECTION
EDIT
PEAK
DETECTION
EDIT
PEAK
DETECTION
EDIT
AP2
A-D CONVERTER
RED 1
MEMORY
AP3
RED/WHITE
CONTROLLER
SYSTEM
RESET
WHITE
TRI-COUNTER
COUNTING
COMPARATORS
SYSTEM BUS
RED
TRI-COUNTER
BUFFERS
BUFFERED
SIGNALS TO
SCOPE MODULE
7253175A
Cell Sizing. The six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards connect to three
identical Peak-Detection and Edit circuits for cell sizing, one each for data from aperture 1,
aperture 2 and aperture 3. WBCs are sized first, then RBCs. See Timing the Data Collection in
the GENS System under Heading 2.18, CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT
AND HGB DATA, for details.
The size of a cell determines the height (peak) of its pulse. The path of a cell as it passes
through the aperture determines the shape of its pulse. All pulses enter a Peak-Detection
circuit for size determination, but only pulses determined by the Edit circuit to have an ideal
shape - to have passed through the center of the aperture - are acceptable. The A/D converter
converts each acceptable pulse signal to a digital address for storage in the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card memory until retrieved by the AMC.
2.19-4
PN 4277219B
Cell Pulse Display. The six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards also connect
to a buffer circuit. The buffered signals are sent to the Scope Module to display the pulses.
Input
r Three X1 gain outputs from the RED PRE-AMP card
r
Three X8.09 gain outputs from the WHITE PRE-AMP card
System RESET signal during power up to clear and reset the counters
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card (LH 750 System)

Function
The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-4 for
location. The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card routes the six signals from the Six-Channel
Preamp card through Comparator circuits, Peak-Detection and Edit circuits, and Buffer
circuits to:
r
r
r
Determine the RBC and WBC event count and the wait count.
Find the ideal pulses for sizing to develop RBC and WBC histograms.
Display pulses on the Analyzer CRT.
Cell Counting. Each of the six inputs from the R/W/P SC/A card connect to a comparator
circuit. See Figure 2.19-3. All pulses sensed during the count time are processed for count.
But only pulses determined by the comparator circuits to be above a predetermined threshold
and within the desired pulse width are counted as a cell.
In addition, the wait time (the time during which no pulses are above the threshold) is
measured. This measurement is used by the Workstation.
Pulses that pass the threshold are converted to digital signals and routed to a counter. The
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card has 12 counters: three for RBC event counts, three for RBC
wait counts, three for WBC event counts, and three for WBC wait counts. The counters
validate and count the digital information, and hold it until it is needed by the AMC.
Cell Sizing. The six inputs from the R/W/P SC/A card connect to three identical
Peak-Detection and Edit circuits for cell sizing, one each for data from aperture 1, aperture 2
and aperture 3. WBCs are sized first, then RBCs. See Timing the Data Collection in the
LH 750 System under Heading 2.18, CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND
HGB DATA, for details.
The size of a cell determines the height (peak) of its pulse. The path of a cell as it passes
through the aperture determines the shape of its pulse. All pulses enter a Peak-Detection
circuit for size determination, but only pulses determined by the Edit circuit to have an ideal
shape - to have passed through the center of the aperture - are acceptable. The A/D converter
converts each acceptable pulse signal to a digital address for storage in the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card memory until retrieved by the AMC.
Cell Pulse Display. The six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards also connect
to a buffer circuit. The buffered signals are sent to the Scope Module to display the pulses.
PN 4277219B
2.19-5
Figure 2.19-4 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card Block Diagram

3
R B C
P e a k
D e te c tio n
W B C
F IF O
d a ta
m e m o ry
A /D
c o n v e rte r
3
R /W
E d ito r
S y s te m b u s
in te r fa c e
D a ta
R e d a n d
w h ite
c o u n te r
6
C o u n t
C o m p a ra to rs
R e d a n d
w h ite
c o n tr o lle r
A d d re s s
C o n tro l
B u ffe rs
S c o p e
s ig n a ls
7 2 1 9 0 2 1 B
Input
r Three red output signals from the R/W/P SC/A card
r
Three white output signals from the R/W/P SC/A card
System RESET signal during power up to clear and reset the counters
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card

Function
The PLATELET PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 (GENS
System) or Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System). The PLATELET PROCESSOR card routes the gain
inputs from the RED PRE-AMP card (GENS System) or the R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750
System) through three independent, identical Comparator circuits and Peak-Detection
circuits to determine pulse sizes for development of the Plt histograms. See Figure 2.19-5.
Figure 2.19-5 PLATELET PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram
R/P1
R/P2
R/P3
PEAK
DETECTION
CIRCUIT
COMPARATOR
CIRCUIT
A/D
CONVERTER
CONTROLLER
FIFO
MEMORY
SYSTEM
BUS
7253176A
2.19-6
PN 4277219B
The Comparator circuits on the PLATELET PROCESSOR card establish a window through
which only pulses between 2 and 20 fL are allowed to pass. Using these size thresholds
eliminates pulses from noise and normal RBCs.
The Peak-Detection circuits determine the height (peak) of a pulse for the determination of
cell size. The A/D converter converts the pulse peak to a digital address and sends it to
memory. Then the next pulse is processed.
Only the digital addresses of valid pulses (pulses that also passed through the comparator
circuit to memory) are stored in the memory of the PLATELET PROCESSOR card until
retrieved by the AMC.
Input
r Three X8.09 gain outputs from the RED PRE-AMP card (GENS System) or three
platelet outputs signals from the R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750 System)
r
System RESET signal from the SBUS to reset storage
Determining the CBC Parameters

Determining the CBC Results on the GENS System
The AMC:
1.
Determines the final results for the WBC, RBC, MCV, Plt, MPV and Hgb parameters.
2.
Calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Pct and PDW.
3.
Sends the CBC results to the Workstation for reporting and display. For details, see
Heading 2.24, Sample Reporting.
Determining the CBC Results on the LH 750 System
PN 4277219B
1.
The AMC stores the raw RBC, WBC, Plt, and Hgb data and sends it to the Workstation.
2.
The Workstation:
a.
Determines the final results for the WBC, RBC, MCV, Plt, MPV and Hgb parameters.
b.
Calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Pct and PDW.
c.
Reports and displays results. For details, see Heading 2.24, Sample Reporting.
2.19-7
2.19-8
PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA
2.20

Summary
The Analytical Station uses the VCS technology to sense and analyze the WBC differential
and reticulocyte populations. This section gives an overview of the VCS technology
methodology and describes the sensing area.
Heading 2.21 describes the electronic components responsible for making the VCS
measurements. Headings 2.22 and 2.23 describe sample processing for the WBC differential
and the reticulocytes, respectively.
VCS Measurements
To obtain the WBC differential or reticulocyte data, the instrument simultaneously measures
three parameters on each cell: volume (DC), conductivity (RF) and light scatter (LS); and
derives three additional parameters, opacity (OP), rotated light scatter (RLS) and linear light
scatter (LLS).
V - Volume (DC)
Volume is measured using the Coulter Principle. Low-frequency direct current (DC) is
applied to two electrodes to measure the impedance across the aperture of the flow cell. As a
cell passes through the aperture, the impedance increases, generating a pulse that is directly
proportional to the cell volume.
C - Conductivity (RF)
Conductivity is measured by applying a radio-frequency current (RF) to the electrodes.
Unlike the DC (low-frequency) current which flows around the cells, this high frequency
current short-circuits the cell membrane and flows through the cells. This measurement is a
function of the cell volume and of the internal conductivity, which is related to the physical
and chemical contents of the cell.
S - Light Scatter (LS)
Light scatter is measured by passing the cells through a point focused laser beam. As a cell
passes through the laser beam in the flow cell, the cell scatters or reflects the light. The
scattered light is collected at angles between 10 and 70, the range known as median angle
light scatter (MALS). The light is converted into a voltage pulse proportional to the total
amount scattered. These pulses define the shape and surface characteristics of each cell.
Opacity (OP)
Opacity is a transformation of the data derived from the ratio of the RF and DC components
obtained during data acquisition. It is calculated for every individual cell measurement or
event. Opacity has the effect of removing the size component, yielding a measurement that is
more closely related to the internal contents of the cell.
RF
OP -------DC
PN 4277219B
2.20-1
Rotated Light Scatter (RLS)

Rotated light scatter is a transformation of the data derived from the ratio of the log of LS to
the DC pulse peak information. It has the effect of removing the size component, yielding a
measurement that is more closely related to the internal structure of the cell. RLS is used in
the analysis of the diff parameters.
Log ( LS )
10
RLS ---------------------------DC
Linear Light Scatter (LLS)
Linear light scatter is a transformation of the data derived from a ratio of the LS and DC
components obtained during data acquisition. It has the effect of removing the size
component, yielding a measurement that is more closely related to the internal structure of
the cell. LLS is used in the analysis of the retic parameters.
LS
LLS -------DC
Applying the VCS Technology

Sensing Area
The flow cell, the sensing area for the VCS technology, is located in the Triple Transducer
module (TTM). Refer to Figure 2.4-3 for the location of the TTM. The flow cell contains two
electrodes and the aperture where the DC, RF, and LS parameters are sensed for each cell. See
Figure 2.20-1.
DC and RF Currents
The electrodes are connected to the RF Detector Preamp card which supplies the DC and the
RF currents. For details, see RF Detector Preamp Card under Heading 2.21, VCS TechnologyMeasuring and Analyzing the Data.
Laser Light Source
In addition to the flow cell, the TTM module houses the laser, a lens block and a light scatter
sensor. See Figure 2.20-1.
Light from the laser shines through the lens block which focuses the light onto the aperture
in the flow cell. See Figure 2.20-2.
The light scatter (LS) sensor collects the scattered light from the flow cell. For details, see
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor under Heading 2.21, VCS Technology - Measuring
and Analyzing the Data.
2.20-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.20-1 Applying the VCS Technology

R F D E T E C T O R
P R E A M P C A R D
L A S E R
L E N S B L O C K
(-) E L E C T R O D E
L S S E N S O R
A P E R T U R E
(+ ) E L E C T R O D E
6 4 9 8 2 4 3 B
L IG H T S C A T T E R
P R E A M P M O D U L E
Figure 2.20-2 Light Scatter Path

LENS BLOCK
LS SENSOR
LASER BEAM
LENS
FLOW CELL
5915281H
Flow-Cell Hydraulics
Sheath fluid from the sheath tank (VC15) flows through the flow cell at a fixed pressure,
hydrodynamically focusing the sample stream through the center of the aperture, one cell at a
time. See Figure 2.20-3. The sheath fluid pressure is regulated by the sheath pressure
regulator (RG4).
PN 4277219B
2.20-3
Figure 2.20-3 Hydrodynamically Focused Cells
FLOW CELL
SHEATH-FLUID IN
SAMPLE DILUTION
SENSING
AREA
SHEATH FLUID
SHEATH-FLUID IN
SAMPLE IN
7253191A
The sample stream is also pressurized, but the sample pressure is regulated higher than the
sheath pressure to overcome the higher resistance of the sample path. Refer to Table A.1-13
and Table A.1-18 for the pressure specifications for the sheath pressure, the diff sample
pressure, and the retic sample pressure.
Between samples, the flow cell is rinsed with diluent. See Figure 2.20-4 and Table 2.20-1 for
ports used and their function during sample flow and rinsing.
Figure 2.20-4 Flow Cell Hydraulics
RINSE MODE
SAMPLE MODE
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT CLOSED
PORT 3
PORT 3
PORT CLOSED
APERTURE
PORT 5
7253269A
2.20-4
APERTURE
PORT 4
PORT 5
PORT 6
PN 4277219B
Table 2.20-1 Flow Cell Ports

Port No. Connector Color
Sample Flow
Rinse
Yellow
Waste out
Closed
Black
Closed
Diluent out to VC26
Blue
Sheath fluid in from VC15
Diluent in from backwash manifold (MF4)
Green
Closed
Diluent out to VC26
Red
Sheath fluid in from VC15
Diluent in from backwash manifold (MF4)
Sample in from:
Closed
r Mixing chamber - diff

r Retic chamber- retic.
Data Collection
As a sample passes through the aperture of the flow cell, each cell simultaneously:
PN 4277219B
Impedes the DC current flow, yielding DC data.
Impedes the RF current flow, yielding RF data.
Scatters the laser light, yielding LS data.
2.20-5
2.20-6
PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA
2.21

Summary
and reticulocyte populations. This section describes the electronic components that measure
and analyze the data: the RF Detector Preamp card, the Light Scatter Preamp module and LS
sensor, the ANALOG 5 card, and the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
Heading 2.20 explains the VCS methodology and describes the sensing area. Headings 2.22
and 2.23 describe sample processing for the WBC differential and reticulocytes, respectively.
Electronic Overview
Figure 2.21-1 is a block diagram of the electronic components used to analyze cell
populations with VCS technology. The Diff Power Supply Card and the Laser Power Supply
are discussed under Heading 2.8, Electronic Power System - Local Power Supplies in the
Diluter. The COMM INTERFACE Card is discussed under Heading 2.11, SYSTEM
CONTROL.
Figure 2.21-1 VCS Technology Block Diagram
Diluter/
Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply
card
+24 V
For solid state RF Detector
Preamp card only
RF DETECT
To Diluter 1 card
+6.3 V
RF
Detector
Preamp
card
+300 V, +15 V, -15 V

Diff
Power
Supply
card
+12 V
Laser
Power
Supply
module
Status
DC
RF
ANALOG
card
RFSP
LSSP
DIFF
PROCESSOR
card
COMM
INTFC
card
AMC
GAIN SWITCH
LS SELECT SELECT
HSRS232
raw data
RS/Opto Intfc card
Laser
+
Flow cell
PN 4277219B
LS sensor
LS OFFSET
1
2
3
Light
Scatter
Preamp
module
Workstation
6498146B
2.21-1
RF Detector Preamp Card

Function
The RF Detector Preamp card is located under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-3 (GENS System) or Figure 2.4-10 (LH 750 System) for location.
The RF Detector Preamp card generates the constant DC and RF currents to the flow cell.
On the RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube:
The +6.3 Vdc powers the RF vacuum tube filament.
The +300 Vdc is used to develop RF and DC currents. See Figure 2.21-2.
The +24 V is not present.
On the solid state RF Detector Preamp card:
The +6.3 Vdc is not used.
The +300 Vdc is used to develop DC current. See Figure 2.21-3.
The +24 V is used to develop RF currents. See Figure 2.21-3.
As cells pass through the flow cell aperture, the RF Detector Preamp card detects changes in
resistance, converts these raw DC and RF pulses to voltages, amplifies the voltages and sends
the voltages to the ANALOG 5 card. While the system is collecting data from the flow cell
aperture, the Clog Detector circuit on the RF Detector Preamp card monitors the aperture
for clogs.
Both styles of RF Detector Preamp cards have potentiometers for DC and RF gain
adjustments. See Heading 4.75 for the procedures for making these adjustments.
The RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube also has an adjustment for the Clog
Detector circuit. A procedure is provided under Heading 4.75 to check the Clog Detector
circuit and to adjust it if necessary. However, this circuit is factory adjusted and should not
require field adjustment.
Inputs
2.21-2
Outputs
+300 Vdc for RF current (vacuum tube)

and for DC current from Diff Power
Supply card
RF and DC pulses to ANALOG 5 card,

via the digital backplane
+6.3 Vdc for RF vacuum tube filament

voltage from Diff Power Supply card
RF DETECT signal to Diluter 1 card
15 Vdc from Diff Power Supply card
CLOGDET signal to Diluter 1 card
+24 Vdc for RF generator (solid state)

from Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card
Raw DC and RF pulses from the flow

cell
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.21-2 RF Detector Preamp Card (with Vacuum Tube) Block Diagram
TO
FLOW
CELL
J67
DC
TO
ANALOG
CARD
BNC
J69
+300 VDC
FROM
DIFF
POWER
SUPPLY
CARD
J73
DC
PREAMP
R17 GAIN
R18 OFFSET
RF
GENERATOR
CIRCUIT
C1
RF
PREAMP
R26 GAIN
R27 OFFSET
RF
+6.3 VDC
TP1
(WHT)
+15 VDC
DILUENT
CONDUCTIVITY
VOLTAGE
-15 VDC
RF
DETECT
RF
DETECT
TO
DILUTER 1
CARD
CLOGDET
TP3
TP2
(WHT)
R44 CLOG
DETECT
THRESHOLD
CIRCUIT
J104
COMPARATOR
TP4
(BLK)
7253178E
Figure 2.21-3 RF Detector Preamp Card (Solid State) Block Diagram
T O
F L O W
C E L L
J 6 7
F R O M
D IL U T E R /
S O L E N O ID /O P T IC S
C A R D
F R O
D IF
P O W E
S U P P L
C A R
+ 2 4 V D C
+ 3 0 0 V D C
M
R
F
D
D C
P R E A M P
R 5 4 G A IN
S M A
J 6 9
R F
G E N E R A T O R
C IR C U IT
C 2 0
+ 6 .3 V D C
+ 1 5 V D C
-1 5 V D C
D C
T O
A N A L O G
C A R D
R F
P R E A M P
R 4 3 G A IN
T P 1
(R E D )
D IL U E N T
C O N D U C T IV IT Y
V O L T A G E
J 6
R F
J 1
R F
D E T E C T
C L O G
D E T E C T
C O M P A R A T O R
R F
D E T E C
T O
D IL U
C A R
C L O G
D E T E C
D
T
T E R 1
T P 2
(B L K )
6 4 9 8 1 4 7 B
PN 4277219B
2.21-3
Monitoring
The RF Detector Preamp card routes the RF DETECT and CLOGDET signals to the
Diluter 1 card for monitoring.
The RF DETECT signal indicates the status of the RF oscillator.
r
A low signal indicates oscillation is taking place
A high signal indicates oscillation is not present. If the RF DETECT signal goes high
during the count cycle (when the 300 Vdc is on), the Diluter 1 card initiates an
RF Voltage Low error.
The CLOGDET signal indicates the status of the flow cell aperture.
r
A low signal indicates the aperture is open.
A high signal indicates the aperture is clogged. If the clog lasts for more than
0.5 seconds, the Diluter 1 card:
t
Routes a high RF ON signal to the Diff Power Supply card to disable the output of
the +300 Vdc power supply.
Turns off the RFON LED and lights the CLGERR LED.
Initiates a clog error.
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor

Function
The Light Scatter Preamp module is under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-3 (GENS System) or Figure 2.4-10 (LH 750 System) for location. The light
scatter (LS) sensor is part of the TTM module which is also located under the front cover of
the Diluter. For the location of the LS sensor within the TTM module, refer to Figure 2.20-1.
As cells pass through the flow cell, scattering the light from the laser beam, the LS sensor
collects the median angle light scatter information.
Photodiodes on the LS sensor collect the reflected light on two elements or regions of the
sensor and convert the light to current proportional to the intensity of the light. See
Figure 2.21-4.
Figure 2.21-4 LS Sensor Regions
D iff m o d e = R e g io n 1 a n d 2
R e tic m o d e = R e g io n 1
1
2
7 2 1 9 0 4 0 B
Note: A third region exists, but it is covered by the circular portion of the mask.
2.21-4
PN 4277219B
The LS sensor routes the light scatter information to the Light Scatter Preamp module. See
Figure 2.21-5. The V/R DVR signal from the ANALOG 5 card determines the input (region)
used by the Light Scatter Preamp module.
The Light Scatter Preamp module converts the current signals to voltage, amplifies the
voltage to a usable level and routes the amplified voltage to the ANALOG 5 card. The V/R SW
signal from the ANALOG 5 card determines the output amplifier used.
Inputs
Outputs
+ 15 Vdc from the Diff Power Supply

card
LS pulses to ANALOG 5 card via the

RS/Opto Intfc card
-15 Vdc, from the Diff Power Supply

card
LS offset voltage to the DIFF

PROCESSOR card for monitoring the
background light scatter via the
RS/Opto Intfc card
V/R DRVR signal from the ANALOG

card via the RS/Opto Intfc card
V/R SW signal from ANALOG card via

the RS/Opto Intfc card
Figure 2.21-5 Light Scatter Preamp Module Block Diagram

J66
FROM +15 VDC
DIFF
POWER -15 VDC
SUPPLY
GND
CARD
TP1
TP3
LS OFFSET
R8 GAIN
(LOWER)
GND
J62
REGION 1
FROM
LS SENSOR
REGION 2
LS
SENSOR
SELECT
CURRENT
TO
VOLTAGE
CONVERTER
DIFF AMP
CIRCUIT
J78
TO DIFF
PROCESSOR LS OFFSET
CARD
V/R DRVR
TO/FROM
ANALOG V/R SW
CARD LS OUT
RETIC AMP
CIRCUIT
R16 GAIN
(UPPER)
DIFF/RETIC
GAIN
SELECT
GND
SHIELD
7253180E
PN 4277219B
2.21-5
ANALOG 5 Card
Function
The ANALOG 5 card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 (GENS System) or
Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System) for location. The ANALOG 5 card amplifies and detects the
peaks of the DC, RF and LS pulses. See Figure 2.21-6. BNC connectors on the front edge
panel of the ANALOG 5 card allow the display of the pulses on an oscilloscope as an aid for
aligning the TTM.
Figure 2.21-6 ANALOG 5 Card Block Diagram
FROM DIFF PROCESSOR CARD

CAL PULSES
V/R DRVR TO LS
PREAMP
V/R SW MODULE
SUBSET/5 DIFF
RETICS/5 DIFF
GAIN
SELECT
FROM
LIGHT SCATTER
PREAMP MODULE
LS
DC
FROM
RF DETECTOR
PREAMP CARD
RF
THRESHOLD
SELECT
QUAD
AMP
AMP
LSSP
PULSE
STRETCH
CIRCUITS
THRESHOLD
CIRCUITS
DCSP
TO DIFF
PROCESSOR
CARD
RFSP
AMP
RFPO
LSPO
DCPO
TO SCOPE
MODULE
7253356A
The ANALOG 5 card receives VCS/RETICS and SUBSET/VCS signals from the DIFF
PROCESSOR card, indicating the type of analysis or test mode to perform. These signals
select the proper amplifier and threshold settings on the ANALOG 5 card and determine the
signals routed to the Light Scatter Preamp module. Refer to Figure 2.21-6.
The ANALOG 5 card routes V/R DRVR and V/R SW signals to the Light Scatter Preamp
module to select the correct sensor regions and amplifier gain settings to use.
The DC pulse triggers the ANALOG 5 card to process the next cell or event. The ANALOG 5
card:
2.21-6
1.
Amplifies the DC, RF and LS pulses simultaneously.
2.
Verifies the pulses pass a preset threshold.
PN 4277219B
3.
Stretches pulses that pass the threshold to determine the peak or height of the pulse.
4.
Routes the stretched pulses DCSP, RFSP and LSSP to the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
5.
Routes the amplified pulses DCPO, RFPO and LSPO to the Scope Module for display.
Inputs
Outputs
RETICS/5DIFF and SUBSET/5DIFF

signal from DIFF PROCESSOR card
V/R DRVR and V/R SW signals to Light

Scatter Preamp module
DC and RF pulses from RF Detector

Preamp card
DCSP, RFSP and LSSP stretched pulses

to DIFF PROCESSOR card
LS pulses from Light Scatter Preamp

module
DCPO, RFPO and LSPO pulses to Scope

Module for display
DIFF PROCESSOR Card

Function
The DIFF PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 (GENS System)
or Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System) for location.
The DIFF PROCESSOR card:
r
Converts stretched pulses to digital values. See Figure 2.21-7.
Figure 2.21-7 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram

RAW DATA
MICROPROCESSOR
WORKSTATION
COMM INTFC
CARD
RETICS/5 DIFF
FROM
ANALOG
CARD
FROM PVT CARD
FROM DIFF
POWER SUPPLY
CARD
FROM LASER
POWER SUPPLY
FROM LIGHT
SCATTER
PREAMP MODULE
PN 4277219B
DCSP
A/D
RFSP
A/D
LSSP
A/D
SUBSET/5 DIFF
DAC
MUX
CAL PULSES
ANALOG
CARD
A/D
SHEATH PRESSURE
DIFF SAMPLE PRESSURE
RETIC PRESSURE
+300 VDC
+6.3 VDC
LASER REF VOLT
LS OFFSET
MUX
Holds the data until data accumulation is complete.
Generates diff test pulse signals.
7219009B
2.21-7
Routes the raw data to the Workstation via a high speed RS232 communication link.
Monitors the following signals for routing to the AMCt

t
t
t
Sheath, retic and diff sample pressure voltage signals from the PVT card
Laser reference voltage from the Laser Power Supply
LS offset voltage from the Light Scatter Preamp module
+300 Vdc reference and +6.3 Vdc reference voltages from the Diff Power
Supply card.
Inputs
r DCSP, RFSP and LSSP stretched pulses from ANALOG 5 card for each cell or event
r
Diff ambient temperature and sheath, retic and diff pressure from the PVT card
Laser reference voltage from the Laser Power Supply
LS offset voltage from the Light Scatter Preamp module
+300 Vdc reference and +6.3 Vdc reference voltages from the Diff Power Supply card
Switch
The DIFF PROCESSOR card has one DIP switch, SW1, but it is not currently used. See
Figure A.2-6 for its location, Table A.2-10 for settings.
2.21-8
PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS
2.22

Summary
and reticulocytes populations. This section describes sample processing for analysis of the
WBC differential parameters.
Sample processing for reticulocyte analysis is covered under Heading 2.23. For information
about sensing particles using the VCS methodology, see Headings 2.20 and 2.21.
Processing the Diff Sample on the GENS System

Refer to Figure 2.22-1 for component locations.
Figure 2.22-1 Diff Sample Processing Components on the GENS System
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
PUMP
(PM 4)
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP (PM1)
ON DILUTER FRONT AND REAR PANELS
SHEATH TANK
(VC 15)
DIFF
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG3)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG4)
UNDER DILUTER FRONT COVER
DIFF HEATER
MIXING
CHAMBER
(VC25)
FLOW CELL
7253198B
After aspiration of the blood sample in the GENS System, a segment of the sample is isolated
in the diff segment tubing for the diff dilution. For details about sample acquisition for diff
analysis, see Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
The diff lytic reagent pump (PM4) dispenses diff lytic reagent, displacing the reagent in the
diff heater. See Figure 2.22-2A. The reagent from the diff heater flows through the diff
segment tubing, washing the blood segment into the mixing chamber (VC25).
In the mixing chamber, the blood and diff lytic reagent mixture is incubated and mixed.
PN 4277219B
2.22-1
Then the diff preservative pump (PM1) dispenses diff preservative into the mixing chamber.
See Figure 2.22-2B. The final dilution of blood, diff lytic reagent and diff preservative is
mixed and incubated.
Figure 2.22-2 Diff Blood Sample and Reagent Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the GENS System
DIFF SEGMENT TUBING
BSV
MIXING
CHAMBER
(VC25)
MIXING
CHAMBER
(VC25)
DIFF
HEATER
BLOOD AND
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
(PM4)
DIFF PRESERVATIVE
PUMP (PM1)
B. Adding Diff Preservative
A. Delivering Sample to Mixing Chamber
7253200A
Processing the Diff Sample on the LH 750 System

Figure 2.22-3 Diff Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System
Diff lytic
reagent
pump
(PM4)
Diff
preservative
pump (PM1)
On Diluter front and rear panels
Sheath tank
(VC15)
Diff
sample
pressure
regulator
(RG3)
Sheath
pressure
regulator
(RG4)
Under Diluter front cover
Mixing
chamber
(VC25)
Diff heater
2.22-2
Diff segment valve (CVL85/126)
Flow cell
6498144B
PN 4277219B
During aspiration of the blood sample in the LH 750 System, blood is pulled through two
shear valves before it reaches the rear blood detector, the diff segment valve (CVL85/126) and
the retic segment valve (CVL87/127). These shear valves isolate the diff and retic sample
segments for processing and replace the special segment tubing used on the GENS System.
With the exception of how the diff and retic sample segments are isolated however, sample
acquisition is the same for both the GENS System and LH 750 System. For details about
sample acquisition, refer to Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
For an explanation of how the shear valves works, refer to Shear Valves under Heading 2.17,
After aspiration of the blood sample (Figure 2.22-4, A), the sliding plate of the diff segment
valve (CVL85/126) moves, aligning the reagent input and output ports with the diff segment
isolated in the stationary plate of the valve (Figure 2.22-4, B).
The diff lytic reagent pump (PM4) dispenses diff lytic reagent, displacing the reagent in the
diff heater. See Figure 2.22-4, B. The reagent from the diff heater flows through the diff
segment valve, washing the diff blood segment into the mixing chamber (VC25).
In the mixing chamber, the blood and diff lytic reagent mixture is incubated and mixed.
Then the diff preservative pump (PM1) dispenses diff preservative into the mixing chamber.
See Figure 2.22-4, C. The final dilution of blood, diff lytic reagent and diff preservative is
mixed and incubated.
Figure 2.22-4 Diff Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the LH 750 System
D iff s e g m e n t
v a lv e ( C V L 8 5 /1 2 6 )
B lo o d o u t
B lo o d in
Mixing
chamber
(VC25)
Diff
heater
Diff lytic
reagent pump
(PM4)
A. Aspirating sample
B. Delivering sample
Mixing
chamber
(VC25)
Blood and
diff lytic
reagent
Diff preservative
pump (PM1)
C. Adding diff preservative

6498196B
PN 4277219B
2.22-3
Sensing the Diff Sample

After the final dilution is incubated, diff sample pressure, regulated by the diff sample
pressure regulator (RG3) is applied to the mixing chamber to push the sample from the
mixing chamber into the sheath fluid stream in the flow cell for sensing. See Figure 2.22-5.
Figure 2.22-5 Diff Sample Analysis Flow
WASTE OUT
DIFF
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG3)
MIXING
CHAMBER
(VC25)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG4)
APERTURE
FLOW CELL
SHEATH
TANK
(VC15)
BLOOD, DIFF
LYTIC REAGENT
AND DIFF PRESERVATIVE
SAMPLE IN
DILUENT
SHEATH FLUID IN
7253201A
Before the next sample is analyzed, the diff sample segment, the mixing chamber, and the
flow cell are rinsed with diluent, and the diff sample segment and diff sample delivery line are
primed with diff lytic reagent. For details, see Automatic Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways,
and Manual Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways, under Heading 2.16.
The diff lytic reagent pathways to and from the diff sample valve remain primed with diff lytic
reagent.
Diff Analysis Reagent System

The diff analysis reagent system is designed to lyse the RBCs and reduce the cellular debris to
an insignificant level while leaving the WBC populations intact for analysis.
The diff lytic reagent lyses the cells and reduces the cellular debris by placing hypotonic stress
on the cells, causing all the cells to swell; lowering the pH of the dilution; and dissolving the
cell membranes with a surfactant. The RBCs lyse first and the diff preservative is added before
any WBCs lyse.
The diff preservative neutralizes the pH of the dilution and restores the isotonicity, inhibiting
the lysing reaction. In this environment the swollen WBCs lose water, shrinking until they
reach ionic equilibrium. When the cells reach equilibrium, shrinking ceases, and the WBCs
are in a near-native state (as close as possible to the size and internal composition of the
WBCs in the body), ready for analysis.
2.22-4
PN 4277219B
COULTER IntelliKinetics Application

The COULTER IntelliKinetics application is the process that controls the reaction kinetics to
ensure the best performance of the WBC differential analysis. Variations in ambient
temperature are managed through automatic adjustments to reagent reaction temperature,
incubation time, and delivery volumes. Refer to the AccuFlex Detailed Principles of
Operation, for additional information.
Ambient Temperature Thermistors
The original Analytical Stations have two thermistors to sense the ambient temperature, the
diff ambient thermistor and the Diluter ambient thermistor, but only the Diluter ambient
temperature is used. Current Analytical Stations have only one thermistor, the Diluter
ambient thermistor. The Diluter ambient thermistor is mounted behind the RF Detector
Preamp card (RF box). See Figure 2.22-6. On Analytical Stations that have two thermistors
installed, the thermistors are mounted together.
Figure 2.22-6 Ambient Temperature Sensor Location
Diluter ambient
thermistor
6498142B
The Diluter 4 card uses the Diluter ambient temperature to determine the optimum reagent
reaction temperature of the diff lytic reagent heater and the optimum incubation times and
reagent delivery volumes of the diff lytic reagent and the diff preservative. Refer to
Table A.1-14 for the diff analysis conditions for each of three temperature zones: low, normal,
and high. Refer to Table A.2-1 for the switch positions to select the temperature settings.
When the temperature selection is "automatic," the System uses the transition ranges to
automatically change from one temperature zone to the next. As the ambient temperature
increases, the System uses the upper limit of the temperature transition range to initiate the
higher temperature zone conditions. As the ambient temperature decreases, the System uses
the lower limit of the temperature transition range to initiate the lower temperature zone
conditions.
Changing the temperature transition ranges (see Table A.2-1) may correct lysing problems. If,
while the System is in the high temperature zone, cells are under lysed (normal bloods with
low counts and debris), select the higher temperature transition ranges. If the cells are over
lysed (double lymphocyte populations), select the lower temperature transition ranges.
PN 4277219B
2.22-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps

The Analytical Station uses dual-volume pumps to dispense diff lytic reagent and diff
preservative. These pumps are field-adjustable, spring-return, piston-style pumps designed to
dispense two different volumes of reagent. The volumes selected are based on the ambient
temperature.
Each pump has a liquid port (3), two pneumatic ports (1 and 2), an internal spring, and two
pistons. See Figure 2.22-7.
r
The inner piston dispenses the reagent. Pneumatic signals from SL43 (diff lytic reagent
pump) or SL45 (diff preservative pump) to the bottom port (1) of the pump and the
condition of the spring (compressed or released) control the movement of this piston.
The outer piston provides the stops for the inner piston, determining the volume
dispensed, high or low. Pneumatic signals from SL82 to the side port (2) of the pumps
control the movement of the outer piston in both the diff lytic reagent pump and the diff
preservative pump.
Figure 2.22-7 Diff Lytic Reagent Pump and Diff Preservative Pump Components
LIQUID
PORT (3)
SPRING
SIDE
PNEUMATIC
PORT (2)
BOTTOM
PNEUMATIC
PORT (1)
INNER
PISTON
OUTER
PISTON
7253308A
The diff lytic reagent and the diff preservative pumps have three states: at rest, high-volume
dispense and low-volume dispense. Figures 2.22-8, 2.22-9 and 2.22-10 show the three states.
2.22-6
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.22-8 Dispenser Pump at Rest

REAGENT
Reagent Dispenser Pump at Rest

When the reagent dispenser pump is at rest, SL43
(or SL45) and SL82 are de-energized.
In the de-energized state, SL43 (or SL45) vents the
bottom port (1) and SL82 vents the side port (2).
The compressed spring releases, pushing both the
inner and outer pistons down. See Figure 2.22-8.
The movement of the inner piston creates a vacuum
at the liquid port (3), pulling in reagent. Since the
outer piston also moves down, allowing the inner
piston to make a longer stroke, the pump pulls in
the high volume of reagent.
VENT
SIDE PORT (2)
VENT
BOTTOM PORT (1)
7253255A
Figure 2.22-9 Dispensing High Volume

HIGH VOLUME
DELIVERY
Dispensing the High Volume

To dispense the high volume of reagent, SL43 (or
SL45) is energized and SL82 remains de-energized.
In the energized state, SL43 (or SL45) routes 30 psi
to the bottom port (1) of the pump. The inner
piston moves up, making a full stroke. See
Figure 2.22-9.
The movement of the inner piston dispenses the
high volume of reagent into the mixing chamber
and compresses the spring in the pump.
VENT
SIDE PORT (2)
PRESSURE
BOTTOM PORT (1)
PN 4277219B
7253256A
2.22-7
Dispensing the Low Volume

Dispensing the low volume is a two-step process. Initially SL82 is energized. Energizing SL82
routes 30 psi to the side port (2) of the pump. See Figure 2.22-10A. Applying 30 psi to the
side port pushes the outer piston up, moving the inner piston to the low volume position.
The excess reagent in the pump is dispensed back toward the reagent reservoir.
Once the inner piston is positioned for dispensing the low volume of reagent, SL43 (or SL45)
is energized. In the energized state, this solenoid routes 30 psi to the bottom port (1) of the
piston, pushing the inner piston up to dispense the low volume of reagent to the mixing
chamber and compressing the spring in the pump. See Figure 2.22-10B.
Figure 2.22-10 Dispensing Low Volume
LOW VOLUME
DELIVERY
EXCESS TO
REAGENT
RESERVOIR
PRESSURE
SIDE PORT (2)
PRESSURE
SIDE PORT (2)
7253312A
VENT
BOTTOM PORT (1)
A. MOVING PISTON TO LOW VOLUME POSITION
PRESSURE
BOTTOM PORT (1)
B. DISPENSING TO MIXING CHAMBER
Table 2.22-1 summarizes the piston and spring positions and the pneumatic signals for the
three states of the pump.
Table 2.22-1 Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions
2.22-8
Pump State
Side Port
(2)
Outer Piston
Bottom
Port (1)
Spring
Inner Piston
At rest
Vent
Down
Vent
Released
Down
High volume - dispense
Vent
Down
Pressure
Compressed
Up
Low volume - dispense
Pressure
Up
Pressure
Compressed
Up
PN 4277219B
Adjustable Stops
The dual-volume pumps have two adjustable stops, one for adjusting the low volume and the
other for adjusting the high volume. The low volume is adjusted as shown in Figure 2.22-11.
Since this adjustment changes the length of the inner piston stroke and therefore would also
affect the high volume, this stop is always adjusted first. The high volume is adjusted as
shown in Figure 2.22-12.
Figure 2.22-11 Adjusting the Low Volume
LOW
VOLUME
STOP
Hold
Adjust
7253321A
Figure 2.22-12 Adjusting the High Volume
HIGH
VOLUME
STOP
7253320A
PN 4277219B
2.22-9
Determining the Diff Parameters

The Analytical Station counts for 19 seconds, or 8,192 events that passed the threshold,
whichever comes first. The DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data to the Workstation.
At the Workstation, the software:
2.22-10
1.
Stores the data.
2.
Analyzes the position of each cell within a three-dimensional plot.
3.
Determines the displayed and reported results for the sample. For details see
Heading 2.24, Sample Reporting.
PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS
2.23

Summary
and reticulocytes populations. This section describes sample processing for analysis of the
reticulocyte parameters.
Sample processing for WBC differential analysis is covered under Heading 2.22. For
information about sensing particles using the VCS methodology, see Headings 2.20 and 2.21.
Processing the Retic Sample on the GENS System

Figure 2.23-1 Retic Sample Processing Components on the GENS System
ON DILUTER FRONT AND REAR PANELS
SHEATH TANK
(VC 15)
RETIC SAMPLE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG6)
RETIC
CLEARING
SOLUTION
PUMP
(PM6)
PELTIER
MODULE
SHEATH
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG4)
UNDER DILUTER FRONT COVER
RETIC
CHAMBER
(VC17)
STAIN
CHAMBER
(VC24)
STAIN
PUMP (PM5)
BLOOD/STAIN
ASPIRATION
PUMP (PM11)
FLOW CELL
7253199B
After aspiration of the blood sample, a segment of the sample is isolated in the retic segment
tubing for the retic dilution. For details about sample acquisition for retic analysis, see
Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
The stain pump (PM5) dispenses retic stain through the retic segment tubing, washing the
blood segment into the stain chamber (VC24). See Figure 2.23-2. Depending on the stain
chamber temperature, the stain chamber heater may be activated to enhance the staining
reaction.
PN 4277219B
2.23-1
Figure 2.23-2 Retic Blood Sample and Stain Delivery to Stain Chamber on the GENS System
RETIC SEGMENT TUBING
BSV
STAIN
CHAMBER
(VC24)
STAIN PUMP
(PM5)
7253202A
After incubation, the 50 L blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11) is activated twice to pull the
stained sample from the stain chamber and through a cross fitting. See Figure 2.23-3A.
The retic clearing solution pump (PM6) dispenses 2 mL of retic clearing solution, displacing
the reagent in the Peltier module. See Figure 2.23-3B. The reagent from the Peltier module
flows through the cross fitting, washing approximately 2 L of the stained blood sample into
the retic chamber (VC17). In the retic chamber, the stained blood and retic clearing solution
mixture is mixed and incubated
Figure 2.23-3 Stained Sample and Clearing Solution Delivery to Retic Chamber on the GENS System
STAINED BLOOD
SAMPLE
CROSS
FITTING
CROSS
FITTING
RETIC
CHAMBER
(VC17)
BLOOD
AND
STAIN
STAIN
CHAMBER
(VC24)
STAINED
BLOOD
SAMPLE
BLOOD/STAIN
ASPIRATION
PUMP
(PM11)
PELTIER MODULE
RETIC CLEARING
SOLUTION
PUMP (PM6)
A. Stained Sample Aspiration
B. Stained Sample Delivery

7253203A
2.23-2
PN 4277219B
Processing the Retic Sample on the LH 750 System

Figure 2.23-4 Retic Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System
On Diluter front and rear panels
Sheath tank
(VC15)
Retic sample
pressure
regulator
(RG6)
Retic
cleaning
solution
pump
(PM6)
Sheath
pressure
regulator
(RG4)
Peltier
module
Under Diluter front cover

Stained
retic
segment valve
(CVL93/128)
Retic
segment valve
(CVL87/127)
Retic
chamber
(VC17)
Stain
chamber
(VC24)
Blood/stain
aspiration
pump (PM11)
Stain
pump (PM5)
Flow cell
6498143B
During aspiration of the blood sample in the LH 750 System, blood is pulled through two
shear valves before it reaches the rear blood detector, the diff segment valve (CVL85/126) and
the retic segment valve (CVL87/127). These shear valves isolate the diff and retic sample
segments for processing and replace the special segment tubing used on the GENS System.
With the exception of how the diff and retic sample segments are isolated however, sample
acquisition is the same for both the GENS System and LH 750 System. For details about
sample acquisition, refer to Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
For an explanation of how the shear valves works, refer to Shear Valves under Heading 2.17,
After aspiration of the blood sample (Figure 2.23-5, A), the sliding plate of the retic segment
valve (CVL87/127) moves, aligning the reagent input and output ports with the retic segment
isolated in the stationary plate of the valve (Figure 2.23-5, B).
The stain pump (PM5) dispenses retic stain through the retic segment valve, washing the retic
segment into the stain chamber (VC24). See Figure 2.23-5, B. Depending on the stain
chamber temperature, the stain chamber heater may be activated to enhance the staining
reaction.
PN 4277219B
2.23-3
Figure 2.23-5 Retic Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Stain Chamber in the LH 750 System
R e tic s e g m e n t
v a lv e ( C V L 8 7 /1 2 7 )
B lo o d o u t
B lo o d in
Stain
chamber
(VC24)
A. Aspirating sample
Stain
pump
(PM5)
B. Delivering sample
6498197B
After incubation, the 50 L blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11) is activated twice to pull a
stained sample from the stain chamber and through the stained retic segment valve
(CVL93/128). See Figure 2.23-6, A.
After the stained sample is aspirated, the sliding plate of the stained retic segment valve
moves, aligning the reagent input and output ports with the stained retic segment isolated in
the stationary plate of the valve (Figure 2.23-6, B).
The retic clearing solution pump (PM6) dispenses 2 mL of retic clearing solution, displacing
the reagent in the Peltier module. See Figure 2.23-6, B. The reagent from the Peltier module
flows through the sample segment in the stained retic segment valve, washing approximately
2 L of the stained blood sample into the retic chamber (VC17). In the retic chamber, the
stained blood and retic clearing solution mixture is mixed and incubated.
Figure 2.23-6 Stained Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Retic Chamber in the LH 750 System
Stained blood
segment
Stained retic
segment valve
(CVL93/128)
Blood/stain
aspiration
pump
(PM11)
A. Aspirating stained sample
Stained blood
segment
Peltier module
Stain
chamber
(VC24)
Blood
and
stain
Retic clearing
solution
pump (PM6)
Retic
chamber
(VC17)
B. Delivering stained sample

6498198B
2.23-4
PN 4277219B
Sensing the Retic Sample

After the dilution is incubated, retic sample pressure, regulated by the retic sample pressure
regulator (RG6) is applied to the retic chamber to push the mixture from the retic chamber
into the sheath fluid stream in the flow cell for sensing. See Figure 2.23-7.
Figure 2.23-7 Retic Sample Analysis Flow
WASTE OUT
RETIC SAMPLE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG6)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG4)
APERTURE
FLOW CELL
RETIC
CHAMBER
(VC17)
STAINED
BLOOD
SAMPLE AND
RETIC
CLEARING
SOLUTION
SHEATH
TANK
(VC15)
SAMPLE IN
DILUENT
SHEATH FLUID IN
7253204A
Before the next sample is analyzed the retic segment tubing, retic chamber and flow cell are
rinsed with diluent, and the retic segment tubing and the retic sample delivery line are
primed with stain. For details, see Automatic Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways, and
Manual Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways, under Heading 2.16. In addition, the
instrument activates the blood/stain pump to remove residual stained blood from the lines
and activates the retic clearing solution pump to rinse the retic chamber and associated
tubing.
Retic Analysis Reagent System

The retic analysis reagent system is designed to selectively stain the reticulocytes,
distinguishing them from mature RBCs for analysis.
The retic stain is a specially formulated new methylene blue dye that precipitates the
basophilic RNA networks that are present in reticulocytes but not present in mature RBCs.
Note: For more information about reticulocytes, including an illustration of stained
reticulocytes, see reticulocytes in the glossary.
The retic clearing solution clears the hemoglobin from the RBCs without removing the
precipitated dye-RNA complex.
COULTER IntelliKinetics Application

The COULTER IntelliKinetics application is the process that controls the reaction kinetics to
ensure the best performance of the reticulocyte analysis. Variations in ambient temperature
are managed through automatic adjustments to reagent reaction temperatures. Refer to the
AccuFlex Detailed Principles of Operation, for additional information.
PN 4277219B
2.23-5
To achieve the optimum reaction temperatures, the instrument uses the stain chamber heater
to maintain a constant optimal temperature of the blood/stain mixture and uses the Peltier
module to heat or cool the retic clearing solution.
Regulating the Temperature in the Stain Chamber
The stain chamber (VC24) is a ceramic chamber encircled by a foil heater. The Diluter 4 card
activates the stain heater to maintain a constant optimal temperature for the reaction of the
stain and blood mixture. See Figure 2.23-8. Refer to Table A.1-15 for the optimum retic
analysis conditions.
Figure 2.23-8 Stain Heater Block Diagram
STAIN
HEAT
DILUTER 2
CARD
ENABLE HEATER
STAIN
CHAMBER
(VC24)
DILUTER 4
CARD
7253205A
Regulating the Temperature in the Peltier Module

The Peltier module consists of Peltier cells mounted on a ceramic manifold. See
Figure 2.23-9. Depending on the ambient temperature, the Diluter 4 card activates the
Peltier cells to heat or cool the ceramic manifold which in turn heats or cools the retic
clearing solution, adjusting the reagent to the correct temperature for optimum clearing
reaction. Refer to Table A.1-15 for the optimum retic analysis conditions.
Figure 2.23-9 Peltier Module, Cross Section
PELTIER
CELLS
HEAT SINK
THERMISTOR
CERAMIC
MANIFOLD
RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION
7253206A
Determining the Retic Parameters

The Analytical Station counts for 90 seconds, or 32,768 events, whichever comes first. The
DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data to the Workstation. At the Workstation, the
software:
2.23-6
1.
Stores the data.
2.
Analyzes the position of each cell on a two-dimensional plot.
3.
Determines the displayed and reported results for the sample. For details see
Heading 2.24, SAMPLE REPORTING.
PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING
2.24
SAMPLE REPORTING
Summary
This section describes how data from the following areas is processed by the AMC or the
Workstation to provide the reported sample results, graphics, and when indicated, codes,
messages and/or flags:
r
Sample data from the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH 750 System)
RBC and WBC raw data from the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or
the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card (LH 750 System)
Plt raw data from the PLATELET PROCESSOR card
Hgb information retained at the AMC
Diff raw data from the DIFF PROCESSOR card
Retic raw data from the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
The flow of results from final processing to reporting is illustrated in Figure 2.24-1 (GENS
System) and Figure 2.24-2 (LH 750 System).
For details about the analysis of the data, refer to Headings 2.18 and 2.19 for the CBC
parameters, Headings 2.21 and 2.22 for the diff parameters, and Headings 2.21 and 2.23 for
the retic parameters.
Figure 2.24-1 Sample Data Flow on the GENS System from Final Processing to Reporting
DILUTER
PROCESSOR CARD
SAMPLE DATA SET
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR CARD
WBC AND RBC
COUNTS AND
HISTOGRAMS
AMC CARD
CBC ANALYSIS
COMM
INTFC CARD
HGB
PLATELET
PROCESSOR CARD
PLT HISTOGRAM
DIFF
PROCESSOR CARD
DIFF DATA
RETIC DATA
WORKSTATION
DIFF AND RETIC
ANALYSIS
RESULTS
HISTOGRAMS
DATAPLOTS
7253325A
PN 4277219B
2.24-1
SAMPLE REPORTING
Figure 2.24-2 Sample Data Flow on the LH 750 System from Final Processing to Reporting
D IL U T E R
C P U c a rd
S a m p le d a ta s e t
A M C
R E D /W H IT E
P R O C E S S O R 2
c a rd
W B C
R B C
W B C w
R B C w
W B C
R B C
P L T P R O
c a
P L T
P L T
ra w
ra w
a it c
a it c
ra w
ra w
c o u
c o u
o u n
o u n
h is
h is
D a ta
a n d
c a l fa c to rs
C O M M
IN T F C
c a rd
H g b ra w d a ta
n t
n t
t*
t*
to
to
C E S S O R
rd
ra w c o u n t
r a w h is to
D IF F
P R O C E S S O R
c a r d D iff
R e tic
W o r k s ta tio n
Results,
C B C , d i f f , r e t i c histograms,
DataPlots
a n a ly s is
7 2 1 9 0 1 9 B
* Note: The wait count is a new feature introduced on the LH 750 System.
Sample Data Set

The AMC obtains the sample identification or bar-code data from the DILUTER PROCESSOR
card (GENS System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System). The sample identification
and the following data from the AMC comprises the sample data set:
r
Date
Time
Aspiration mode
Test mode.
CBC Analysis on the GENS System

The AMC routes the sample data set, the CBC parameter results and the size distribution data
to the Workstation for display and reporting. The process for generating each of the reported
CBC results is described under the following headings: RBC and WBC Counts and
Histograms; MCV; RDW; Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct; Hgb; and RBC Indices.
RBC and WBC Counts and Histograms
The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card stores raw data for the RBC and WBC counts and size
distribution data for the RBC and WBC histograms. To generate the RBC and WBC counts,
the AMC retrieves the raw count data for each aperture. Then the AMC:
1.
2.24-2
Applies a scaling factor, corrects for coincidence passage and applies the aperture
calibration factor.
PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING
2.
Votes on the data from each aperture.

r
If at least two apertures are in agreement, the AMC generates an average result.
If there is no agreement between the apertures, the AMC generates a voteout code
(-----) for that parameter. In addition, it generates an incomplete computation code
() for any parameter calculated using the voted out parameter. Single aperture
data is available on the Workstation In-Lab Data screen.
3.
Applies the average calibration factors to the RBC and WBC counts.
4.
Routes the RBC and WBC counts and raw histogram data to the Workstation for display
and reporting.
r
The WBC histogram data is collected from 30 to 450 fL but is displayed from 0 to
80 fL in the operator modes and from 0 to 450 fL in the service mode.
The RBC histogram is collected and displayed from 24 to 360 fL.
From the raw data histogram data, the Workstation calculates the peak-to-valley ratio at the
WBC threshold, 35 fL, to determine if any interference is present. If the threshold check is not
within the instrument limits, the Workstation generates the WBC backlighting flag (*).
MCV
The AMC applies coincidence correction, voting criteria and calibration factors to the red cell
size data to derive the MCV and routes the results to the Workstation. The Workstation
checks the MCV result. If the MCV is less than 50 fL, the Workstation generates an MCV (*)
flag.
RDW
The AMC calculates the RDW, which is a coefficient of variation of the RBC histogram,
applies voting criteria to the RDW, checks the symmetry of the RBC histogram, and routes the
RDW to the Workstation. If the RBC histogram is excessively asymmetrical, the Workstation
generates the RDW R flag.
Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct
The PLATELET PROCESSOR card stores the size distribution data for the platelet histograms.
To generate the Plt histograms, the AMC retrieves the raw data for each aperture from the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card. Then the AMC:
PN 4277219B
1.
Corrects the data for coincidence passage.
2.
Smooths the data to generate a smoothed curve between 0 and 20 fL.
3.
If the Plt count per aperture would be at least 20,000, develops a fitted curve from the Plt
data.
4.
Determines if the fitted curve meets the following criteria r
The curve is positive.
The mode is between 3 and 15 fL.
The PDW is less than 20.
2.24-3
SAMPLE REPORTING
5.
Derives the Plt count, MPV and PDW from the platelet curve r
If the curve passes the fitting criteria, the Plt results are derived from the area under
the fitted curve from 0 to 70 fL. The Workstation displays both the smoothed and
the fitted curve.
If the curve fails the fitting criteria, or if the count was too low for the accurate
development of a fitted curve, the AMC generates no-fit Plt results from the raw
data count between two minimum points. The Workstation displays the smoothed
curve only.
6.
Applies aperture calibration factors to the Plt counts.
7.
Calculates the Pct as follows Plt MPV

Pct = --------------------------10
8.
Applies the voting criteria to the Plt count and the MPV, and a calibration factor to the
average results.
9.
Routes the Plt results and histograms to the Workstation for display and reporting. The
smoothed Plt histogram is displayed from 2 to 20 fL, the fitted from 0 to 70 fL.
Hgb
The Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages are converted by the COMM INTFC card and stored on
the AMC.
1.
The AMC uses two sets of Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages to verify the integrity of the
voltage readings in the cuvette.The two values are compared to determine if they agree
with each other. In addition, the Hgb-blank is compared to the last three Hgb-blanks
readings retained by the AMC.
2.
If both checks are within limits, the AMC:
3.
a.
Uses the highest Hgb blank and read voltages to determine the Hgb results for the
sample by comparing the blank and read voltages, determining the difference, and
converting the difference to a Hgb result.
b.
Applies the calibration factor and routes the Hgb result to the Workstation.
If either check fails, the AMC generates an incomplete computation code () for the
Hgb parameter.
RBC Indices
The AMC calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC from the RBC, MCV and Hgb parameters, using
the following formulas:
RBC MCV
Hct = --------------------------------10
Hgb
MCH = ------------ 10
RBC
Hgb
MCHC = ----------- 100
Hct
2.24-4
PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING
CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System

The AMC routes the sample data set, the CBC raw data and the size distribution data to the
Workstation for analysis, display, and reporting. The process for generating each of the
reported CBC results is described under the following headings: RBC and WBC Counts and
Histograms; MCV; RDW; Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct; Hgb; and RBC Indices.
RBC and WBC Counts and Histograms
The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card stores raw data for the RBC and WBC counts and size
distribution data for the RBC and WBC histograms. To generate the RBC and WBC counts,
the AMC retrieves the raw count data for each aperture and sends it to the Workstation. The
Workstation:
1.
Applies a scaling factor, corrects for coincidence passage and applies the aperture
calibration factor.
2.
Votes on the data from each aperture.

r
If at least two apertures are in agreement, the Workstation generates an average

result.
If there is no agreement between the apertures, the Workstation generates a

voteout code (-----) for that parameter. In addition, it generates an incomplete
computation code () for any parameter calculated using the voted out
parameter. Single aperture data is available on the Workstation In-Lab Data screen.
3.
Applies the average calibration factors to the RBC and WBC counts.
4.
Displays and reports WBC and RBC counts and histograms.
5.
The WBC histogram data is collected from 30 to 450 fL but is displayed from 0 to
80 fL in the operator modes and from 0 to 450 fL in the service mode.
The RBC histogram is collected and displayed from 24 to 360 fL.
Checks the WBC histogram for interference:

a.
From the raw data histogram data, the Workstation establishes the presence of the
lymphocyte population and then checks the area to the left of the lymphocyte
population to determine if any interference is present. Interfering particles include,
but are not limited to, NRBCs, unlysed RBCs, RBC fragments, giant platelets, and
platelet clumps.
b.
If interference is present, the Workstation analyzes the interference population and

eliminates it from the WBC count. If it cannot eliminate the interference, it flags the
WBC with an asterisk (*) and generates a WBC interference suspect message.
MCV
The Workstation:
PN 4277219B
1.
Applies coincidence correction, voting criteria and calibration factors to the red cell size
data to derive the MCV.
2.
Checks the MCV result. If the MCV is less than 50 fL, the Workstation generates an
MCV (*) flag.
2.24-5
SAMPLE REPORTING
RDW
The Workstation:
1.
Calculates the RDW, which is a coefficient of variation of the RBC histogram.
2.
Applies voting criteria to the RDW.
3.
Checks the symmetry of the RBC histogram. If the RBC histogram is excessively
asymmetrical, the Workstation generates the RDW R flag.
Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct

The PLATELET PROCESSOR card stores the size distribution data for the platelet histograms.
To generate the Plt histograms, the AMC retrieves the raw data for each aperture from the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card and sends it to the Workstation. The Workstation:
1.
Smooths the raw data histograms to generate a smoothed curve between 0 and 20 fL.
2.
Finds the mode channel.
3.
If the Plt count per aperture would be at least 20,000, develops a fitted curve from the Plt
data.
4.
Determines if the fitted curve meets the following criteria r

r
r
r
r
The curve is positive.

The mode is between 3 and 15 fL.
The PDW is less than 20.
The ratio between the mode amplitudes of the raw and fitted histograms is less
than1.5.
The amplitude on channels 0 and 1 of the platelet histogram is less than 1.5 times
the mode amplitude.
Note: The platelet R-flag is only triggered for the above conditions if interference is
present in channels 0 or 1.
5.
Derives the Plt count, MPV and PDW from the platelet curve r
If the curve passes the fitting criteria, the Plt results are derived from the area under
the fitted curve from 0 to 70 fL. The Workstation displays both the smoothed and
the fitted curve.
If the curve fails the fitting criteria, or if the count was too low for the accurate
development of a fitted curve, the Workstation generates no-fit Plt results from the
raw data count between two minimum points and displays the smoothed curve only.
6.
Corrects the data for coincidence passage.
7.
Applies aperture calibration factors to the Plt counts.
8.
Applies the voting criteria to the Plt counts and the MPV and applies a calibration factor
to the average results.
9.
Calculates the Pct as follows Plt MPV

Pct = --------------------------10
10. Reports and displays the Plt results and histograms.
2.24-6
The smoothed Plt histogram is displayed from 2 to 20 fL
The fitted Plt histogram is displayed from 0 to 70 fL.

PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING
Hgb
The Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages are converted by the COMM INTFC card and stored on
the AMC. The AMC stores two sets of Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages and sends them to
the Workstation. The Workstation:
1.
Uses the two sets of Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages to verify the integrity of the
voltage readings in the cuvette.The two values are compared to determine if they agree
with each other. In addition, the Hgb-blank is compared to the last three Hgb-blanks
readings retained by the AMC.
2.
If both checks are within limits, the Workstation:
3.
a.
Uses the highest Hgb blank and read voltages to determine the Hgb results for the
sample by comparing the blank and read voltages, determining the difference, and
converting the difference to a Hgb result.
b.
Applies the calibration factor to the Hgb results.
If either check fails, the Workstation generates an incomplete computation code ()

for the Hgb parameter.
RBC Indices
The Workstation calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC from the RBC, MCV and Hgb parameters,
using the following formulas:
RBC MCV
Hct = --------------------------------10
Hgb
MCH = ------------ 10
RBC
Hgb
MCHC = ----------- 100
Hct
Diff Analysis
The DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data directly to the Workstation where it is stored
and analyzed. The program (algorithms) used to analyze the raw diff data, which is called
COULTER AccuGate analysis, resides in the Workstation.
AccuGate analysis is a statistical analysis tool. It uses adaptive contouring methods and
multiresolution analysis of the cell populations to find the optimal separation of cell
populations for determining the WBC diff percentages. See the AccuFlex Detailed
Principles of Operation for details about the analysis.
If an abnormal cell distribution or population is present, a suspect message is generated
during the AccuGate analysis. See the instrument Online Help System for more information
about the suspect messages.
The Workstation multiplies the cell population percentages by the WBC to determine the
absolute number for each population.
PN 4277219B
2.24-7
SAMPLE REPORTING
The Workstation displays the diff results and two types of DataPlots: the two-dimensional
(2D) DataPlot and the three-dimensional (3D) DataPlot. On both DataPlots different colors
represent different cell populations. On the 2D DataPlot, shades of color represent event
density (concentration), dark colors for low event density, bright colors for high event
density.
.
Figure 2.24-3 Diff Analysis Two-Dimensional DataPlot
See Figure 2.24-3 for an example of a 2D DataPlot.

In a 2D DataPlot, DC is plotted on the Y-axis, RLS
on the X-axis.
Refer to the Online Help System for details about
the 2D DataPlot display for the diff.
Figure 2.24-4 Diff Analysis Three-Dimensional DataPlot
See Figure 2.24-4 for an example of a 3D DataPlot.

The 3D DataPlot, also referred to as a cube, is a
graphical projection of real-time data events that
can be rotated to enhance the 3D projection. The
three axes on the 3D DataPlot, DC (Y-axis), RLS
(X-axis) and OP (Z-axis), are color-coded.
Refer to the Online Help System for details about
the 3D DataPlot display for the diff.
2.24-8
PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING
Nucleated RBC Counts (NRBC)

The LH 750 System determines if nucleated RBCs are present by checking for particles in two
locations:
Figure 2.24-5 NRBC Signature Position
The NRBC signature position on

the differential Dataplot. See
Figure 2.24-5.
Figure 2.24-6 NRBC Location on WBC Histogram
The far left region of the WBC

histogram. See Figure 2.24-6.
If cells are present in both locations, the Workstation:

1.
Applies an advanced algorithm to the WBC histogram to determine the number of

NRBCs per 100 WBC. This is reported as NRBC%.
2.
Multiplies the percent of nucleated RBCs by the WBC count to determine the absolute
number of NRBCs.
Retic Analysis
The DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data directly to the Workstation where it is stored
and analyzed. The program (algorithms) used to analyze the raw retic data, which is called
COULTER AccuGate analysis, resides in the Workstation.
AccuGate analysis is a statistical analysis tool. It uses adaptive contouring methods and
multiresolution analysis of the cell populations to find the optimal separation between the
retic population and the normal RBC population to determine the percentage of retics. See the
AccuFlex Detailed Principles of Operation for details about the analysis.
PN 4277219B
2.24-9
SAMPLE REPORTING
The Workstation multiplies the RBC count by the percentage of retics to determine the
absolute number of retics.
The Workstation displays the retic results and DataPlots representing the cell populations and
density (concentration). The two-dimensional (2D) DataPlot uses different colors to
distinguish reticulocytes from other cell groups and shades of color to represent event density,
dark colors for low density, bright colors for high density. In the 2D DataPlot, DC is plotted
on the Y-axis, LS on the X-axis. See Figure 2.24-7 for an example of this DataPlot display.
Refer to the Online Help System for details about the 2D DataPlot display for retics.
Figure 2.24-7 Retic Analysis DataPlot
Sample Flags, Codes and Messages

The instrument generates various flags, codes and messages concerning the sample data to
aid in interpreting the results. The suspect and parameters flags are determined by preset
instrument limits or conditions. All other flags and messages are based on limits defined and
set by the laboratory. For more information about any sample flag, code or message, refer to
the Online Help System or the Operators Guide.
2.24-10
PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW
2.25

Why Calibrate?
A cell passing through an aperture generates a pulse equal to its size (volume). The size of
that pulse determines if a cell is counted as an RBC, WBC or platelet and where that cell is
placed in the RBC, WBC or platelet histogram. Calibration ensures that the cells are sized
accurately.
Calibration also ensures that all three apertures within a bath see a cell as the same size and
count the same number of cells for a sample, eliminating voteouts due to minor differences in
the physical dimensions of the aperture and in the electronic circuitry.
Finally, calibration ensures that the final results are accurate.
Calibration Tests
At the Workstation, three calibration tests are available from the Service Function area, CBC
Calibration window: Latex Calibration, Voltage Matching and Flow Rate. These tests collect
the data needed for calibration, do any necessary calculations, analyze the data, and display
the results.
Steps to Calibration
IMPORTANT Calibration consists of several procedures. Always perform the procedures in the order they
are presented, as each procedure is written assuming that the settings established in the previous
procedures are correct.
ATTENTION: The procedures in this section are brief overviews only, provided to help you
understand the calibration process. To calibrate an instrument, be sure to use the detailed
calibration procedures in Headings 4.8, 4.9 and 4.10.
Preliminary
Doing the following preliminary procedures ensures the instrument is clean and operating
correctly:
r
Aperture Bleaching and RBC Internal Electrode Bleaching.

Bleaching the apertures and internal electrodes removes protein buildup and debris.
Protein buildup in the apertures affects the sizing of cells and increases voteouts. Protein
buildup on the internal electrodes can generate electronic noise, causing erroneous
results.
Precision Verification.
The Precision Verification procedure checks the ability of the instrument to produce the
same test results for repeated determinations from the same specimen. The results of the
Precision Verification procedure may also reveal any trends or shifts.
PN 4277219B
2.25-1
Since the accuracy of the results will be compromised by poor reproducibility, trends or
shifts, these problems must be corrected before calibrating the instrument.
t
Trends in the data can be caused by a plug in the needle vent line.
Shifts in the data can be caused by problems with the pumps or the BSV.
Latex Voltage Calibration

The aperture current affects the size of a particle or cell pulse, and consequently its placement
in one of the 256 channels used by size for histogram development. Using a known size of
latex particles to set aperture current ensures the cells are sorted into the correct channels.
The Latex Voltage Calibration procedure uses two of the Calibration Tests.
r
It uses the Latex Voltage Test to adjust the aperture current settings.
It uses the Voltage Matching Test to fine-tune the preamp voltages to compensate for
minor variations in the physical dimensions of the apertures and in the electronic
circuitry that affects the size data of the RBCs and WBCs.
In general, the steps to determine the correct aperture current settings are:
1.
Using the Latex Voltage Test, analyze latex particles of a known size.
2.
Compare the latex mean volume derived by the instrument to the actual latex particle
size.
3.
Calculate the voltage needed to make the mean volume equal to the latex reference
value.
4.
Adjust the preamp voltage to the new calculated voltage.
The Latex Voltage Test automatically analyzes and verifies the data, and calculates new
voltage settings. See Figure 2.25-1.
The Latex Voltage Test uses the following formula to calculate the voltage settings.
Latex Reference
Voltage APX New = ----------------------------------------- Voltage APX Old
Latex MV APX
Where
:
Latex Reference is the known size of the latex particles.

Latex MV APX is the mean volume or size of the latex particles determined by the
instrument
Voltage APX Old is the current voltage setting for the aperture.
Voltage APX New is the new voltage setting calculated for the aperture.
APX indicates aperture 1, 2 or 3.
2.25-2
PN 4277219B
The Latex Voltage Test compares the data to preset limits and flags any values that are outside
the limits. The software verifies the following are within acceptable limits:
r
The RBC and WBC results (to ensure a sufficient number of latex particles)
The RMV and WMV (red and white mean volume) as compared to the assay value for the
latex particles
The volume difference (RMV and WMV) between any two RBC or WBC apertures*
The voltage difference between any two RBC or WBC apertures*
The new calculated voltages.
*In the window:
AP1 = AP2 - AP1

AP2 = AP3 - AP2
AP3 = AP1 - AP3.
Figure 2.25-1 Latex Voltage Test Window
7253440E
In general, the steps to fine-tune the preamp voltage settings are:
PN 4277219B
1.
Using the Voltage Matching Test, cycle latex particles, whole blood, control material, or
calibrator material and compare the mean volume from apertures 2 and 3 to the data
from aperture 1.
2.
Calculate the preamp voltages needed at apertures 2 and 3 to make the mean volume
match aperture 1.
3.
Adjust the preamp voltage settings to the new calculated voltages for apertures 2 and 3.
2.25-3
The Voltage Matching Test (Figure 2.25-2) automatically calculates the voltage settings,
verifies the data and displays the results. The Voltage Matching Test uses the following
formula to calculate the voltage settings
Mean MV AP1
I AX New = --------------------------------------- I AX Old
Mean MV APX
Where:
Mean MV AP1 is the mean volume for aperture 1.
Mean MV APX is the mean volume from aperture 2 or 3.
IAX Old is the current or old preamp voltage setting for aperture 2 or 3.
IAX New is the new calculated preamp voltage setting for aperture 2 or 3.
Figure 2.25-2 Voltage Matching Test Window
7253441E
The Voltage Matching Test compares the data to preset limits and flags any values that are
outside the limits. The software verifies the following are within acceptable limits:
2.25-4
%CV for RMV (red mean volumes)
%CV for WMV (white mean volume)
PN 4277219B
The volume difference (RMV or WMV) between any two apertures.*
The voltage difference between any two RBC or WBC apertures*
The new calculated voltages.
* In the window:
AP1 = AP2 - AP1

AP2 = AP3 - AP2
AP3 = AP1 - AP3.
Flow Rate Calibration

The Flow Rate Calibration procedure uses the Flow Rate Test to establish aperture calibration
factors and average calibration factors.
r
Aperture calibration factors are established for apertures 2 and 3, using aperture 1 as a
reference, to compensate for minor variations in the physical dimensions of the apertures
and in the electronic circuitry that affect the count data. The aperture calibration factors
ensure the count data from all three apertures is the same. The counts are multiplied by
the aperture calibration factors before data from the three apertures are compared and
voted on.
Average calibration factors for WBC, RBC, Hgb, MCV, Plt, and MPV are established to
ensure the final results are accurate.
The aperture calibration factors can be established using whole blood, a control material or a
calibrator material. Average calibration factors, however, must be established with an assayed
material, such as 5C cell control, S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood referenced to another
instrument.
The laboratory establishes the final average calibration factors using a calibrator material,
such as S-CAL calibrator, or a whole blood calibration procedure.
In general, the steps to establish the calibration factors are:
PN 4277219B
1.
Using the Flow Rate Test, cycle blood and compare the count data from apertures 2
and 3 to the data from aperture 1.
2.
Calculate the calibration factors needed to make the count data from apertures 2 and 3
match the count data from aperture 1.
3.
Cycle the assayed material to calculate the average calibration factors needed to make the
average results match the assayed material
4.
Determine which parameters need adjustment and transfer the new calibration factors to
the Analyzer.
2.25-5
The Flow Rate Test (Figure 2.25-3) automatically compares the results and calculates the
calibration factors. The Flow Rate Test uses the following formula to calculate WBC, RBC and
Plt calibration factors for apertures 2 and 3.
Mean AP1
Cal Factor APX New = ----------------------------- Cal Factor APX Old
Mean APX
Where:
Mean AP1 is the mean of the WBC, RBC or Plt counts for aperture 1.
Mean APX is the mean of the WBC, RBC or Plt counts for aperture 2 or 3.
Cal Factor APX Old is the current or old calibration factor for aperture 2 or 3.
Cal Factor APX New is the new calculated factor for aperture 2 or 3.
The Flow Rate Test uses the following formula to calculate the average calibration factors for
WBC, RBC, Hgb, MCV, Plt and MPV
Reference Value
Cal Factor New = ------------------------------------------- Cal Factor Old
Mean Average
Where
:
Reference Value is the assay value of the material used for calibration.
Mean Average is the mean of the average (versus single aperture) results obtained.
Cal Factor Old is the current calibration factor for the parameter.
Cal Factor New is the new calculated factor for the parameter.
The Flow Rate Test compares the data to preset limits and flags any values that are outside the
limits. The software verifies the following data for the individual aperture calibration factors
is within acceptable limits:
r
WBC %CV
RBC %CV
Plt %CV
WBC, RBC and Plt single-aperture calibration factors.
The software verifies that the following data for the average factors is within acceptable limits:
2.25-6
%CV
% Diff [(Mean - Assay)/Assay x 100%]
Delta Diff
Average calibration factors for WBC, RBC, MCV, Plt, MPV and Hgb.
PN 4277219B
Figure 2.25-3 Flow Rate Test Window
7253439E
Manual Mode-to-Automatic Mode Calibration

The aspiration pathway is different for the two aspiration modes, Automatic and Manual.
Calibration factors are established for the Manual mode to compensate for these differences
and ensure that the results for a specimen are the same, regardless of the aspiration mode
used. Manual-mode calibration factors are applied to the average results of the WBC, RBC, Plt
and Hgb parameters only.
In general, the steps to establish the Manual-mode calibration factors are:
1.
Run the same specimens in the Automatic mode and the Manual mode.
2.
Calculate the Manual-mode calibration factors, using the Automatic-mode results as a

reference The formula for calculating the Manual-mode calibration factors is:
Mean Automatic
Cal Factor New = ----------------------------------------- Cal Factor Old
Mean Manual
Where:
Mean Automatic is the average of the results determined in the Automatic mode.
Mean Manual is the average of the results determined in the Manual mode.
Cal Factor Old is the current Manual-mode calibration factor
Cal Factor New is the new calculated Manual-mode calibration factor.
PN 4277219B
2.25-7
When to Calibrate
CBC calibration should be performed or verified any time a component associated with the
determination of CBC results is replaced. Also, if any changes are made during any calibration
procedure, all subsequent calibration procedures must be performed. Use Table 2.25-1 as a
guide to determine when to do the calibration procedures.
ATTENTION: Although the instrument is relatively insensitive to minor room temperature
changes, calibration should be performed when the room temperature is stable and within the
average temperature range, and should be verified whenever the room temperature changes
by more than 5C (10F).
Table 2.25-1 When to Calibrate
Calibration Procedures to Do
Component Replaced and/or Adjusted
Flow Rate
Mode to Mode
Any component that affects aspiration pathway
X*
Any component that affects CBC parameter dilutions
X*
Any component that affects WBC or RBC aperture voltage
Latex Voltage
Any component that affects WBC, RBC or Plt flow rate
X*
X
Aperture block
Aperture module
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card (GENS System)
Aspiration pump
X*
Aspiration tubing
X*
Bubble/Blood detectors
X*
BSV
X*
Needle
X*
RBC diluent dispenser
X*
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP card (GENS System)
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card (GENS System)
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card (LH 750 System)
R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750 System)
Six-Channel Preamp card (LH 750 System)
Sweep-flow tank
WBC diluent dispenser
X*
* Only the average calibration factors need to be checked.
2.25-8
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1

PN 4277219B
3.1
GENS SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.1-1

Ventilation, 3.1-3
Drainage, 3.1-4
Altitude, 3.1-5
3.2
INSTALLING THE GENS SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.2-1
3.3
UNPACKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.3-1

Unpacking, 3.3-1
3.4
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GENS SYSTEM, 3.4-1

Connecting the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GENS System, 3.4-2
3.5
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GENS SYSTEM, 3.5-1

3.6
SETTING UP THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.6-1

Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.6-1
Setting Up the GENS System Diluter, 3.6-3
3.7
CHECKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.7-1

3.8
TESTING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

WORKSTATION, 3.8-1
3-i
CONTENTS

3.9
GENS SYSTEM AND GENS CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.9-1

3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.10-1

Ventilation, 3.10-3
Drainage, 3.10-4
Altitude, 3.10-5
3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.11-1
Opening the Cartons, 3.11-1
Unpacking and Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.11-2
Unpacking the Diluter, 3.11-5
Unpacking the Analyzer, 3.11-5
3.12 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.12-1
Accessing the Connections, 3.12-1
Connecting the Analyzer to Preamp Cable, 3.12-4
3.13 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.13-1
3-ii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
3.14 SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER, 3.14-1

Setting Up the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.14-1
3.15 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.15-1
Unpacking and Checking the Workstation, 3.15-1
3.16 CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.16-1
Closing Up the Instrument for Testing, 3.16-4
3.17 TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND
WORKSTATION, 3.17-1
3.18 LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.18-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
3.1-1
3.1-3
3.1-4
3.1-5
3.1-6
Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS System without

SlideMaker, 3.1-1
Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS System with
SlideMaker, 3.1-2
Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS Cell, 3.1-2
Location of Fans on the GENS System, 3.1-3
Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the GENS System, 3.1-4
Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the GENS System, 3.1-5
3.3-1
3.3-2
3.3-3
3.3-4

Main Components Layout on the GENS System, 3.3-2
Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the GENS System, 3.3-3
Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the GENS System, 3.3-3
3.4-1
3.4-2
3.4-3
Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GENS System, 3.4-1

Connecting the IBUS Cable on the GENS System, 3.4-2
3.1-2
PN 4277219B
3-iii
CONTENTS
3.4-4
3.4-5
3.4-6
3.4-7
3.4-8
3.5-1
3.5-2
3.5-3
Routing the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GENS System, 3.4-3

Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the GENS System, 3.4-4
Backplane, 3.4-5
Connecting the Workstation to the Diluter on the GENS System, 3.4-7
Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the GENS System, 3.5-1
Reagent on the GENS System, 3.5-2
Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the GENS
System, 3.5-3
3.6-1
3.6-2
3.6-3
3.6-4
3.6-5
3.6-6
3.6-7
3.6-8

Removing GENS System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.6-3
Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the GENS System, 3.6-4
Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the GENS System, 3.6-5
Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the GENS System, 3.6-6
GENS System, 3.6-7
3.6-9 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the GENS
System, 3.6-8
3.6-10 AMC, COMM INTERFACE Card, and DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Locations,
GENS System, 3.6-9
3.7-1
3.7-2
3.7-3
Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the GENS System, 3.7-1

Power On Checks on the GENS System, 3.7-2
Accessing the Revision Levels on the GENS System, 3.7-3
3.8-1
3.8-2
GENS System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.8-1

GENS System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.8-2
3.10-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System without
SlideMaker, 3.10-1
3.10-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System with
SlideMaker, 3.10-2
3.10-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System, 3.10-2
3.10-4 Location of Fans on the LH 750 System, 3.10-3
3.10-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the LH 750 System, 3.10-4
3.10-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the LH 750 System, 3.10-5
3.11-1
3.11-2
3.11-3
3.11-4
3.11-5
3-iv

Main Components Layout for the LH 750 System, 3.11-4
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
3.11-6 Removing the Left and Right Analytical Station Columns, 3.11-5
3.11-7 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
3.11-8 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
3.12-1
3.12-2
3.12-3
3.12-4
3.12-5
3.12-6

Connecting the Main Power Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-2
Connecting the IBUS Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-3
Routing the Analyzer to Preamp Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-4
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5
Routing the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane on
3.12-7 Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on
3.13-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the LH 750 System, 3.13-1
3.13-2 Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK Lytic
Reagent on the LH 750 System, 3.13-2
3.13-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the LH 750
System, 3.13-3
3.14-1
3.14-2
3.14-3
3.14-4
3.14-5
Removing LH 750 System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.14-1

Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the LH 750 System, 3.14-1
Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the LH 750 System, 3.14-2
Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the LH 750 System, 3.14-3
LH 750 System, 3.14-3
3.14-6 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the LH 750
System, 3.14-4
3.14-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System Analyzer, 3.14-4
3.15-1 Connecting the Workstation to the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.15-1
3.16-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the LH 750 System, 3.16-1
3.16-2 Power On Checks on the LH 750 System, 3.16-2
3.16-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the LH 750 System, 3.16-3
3.17-1 LH 750 System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.17-1
3.17-2 LH 750 System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.17-2
TABLES
3.6-1
Pinch Valves with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips on the GENS System, 3.6-6
3.14-1 Pinch Valves on the LH 750 System with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips, 3.14-2
PN 4277219B
3-v
CONTENTS
3-vi
PN 4277219B
3INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 3
3.1
GENS SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Before you install the instrument, verify the following conditions are met. Report any
discrepancies on the Installation Report.
Operator Training
c An operator is trained or is scheduled to be trained within the next two weeks.
Carton Arrival and Condition

c All the cartons on the shipping list have arrived.
c All the cartons are intact and undamaged. If any cartons are damaged, confirm that a
claim was filed with the carrier.
Instrument Site
Space and Accessibility
c The designated instrument area is easily accessible for maintaining and servicing the
instrument, such as an island or a movable table.
c The space is sufficient for the individual units. The dimensions and requirements for
accessibility and ventilation are shown in Figures 3.1-1, 3.1-2, and 3.1-3.
Figure 3.1-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS System without SlideMaker
38 cm (15 in.)
15 cm (6 in.)
38.1 cm(15 in.)

GE N S
MT
* S YS TE M RU N *
05/03/95
0000
C
O
P
Y
G
R
1
95
IH
1
-9
T
8
9
C
O
U
L
TER CORPORA
TION
ST ATUS : READY
86.4 cm
(34 in.)
ALERT :
M
N
A
I
BP CBC
DIFF
RETIC
CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE
30 cm (12 in.)
30 cm (12 in.)
50.8 cm
(20 in.)
99.1 cm (39 in.)
MT
G EN
CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
61 cm(24 in.)
43 cm (17 in.)
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
CLEARANCE
25 cm (10 in.)
25 cm (10 in.)
38.1 cm
(15 in.)
PN 4277219B
66 cm
(26 in.)
6498155B
3.1-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Figure 3.1-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS System with SlideMaker
38 cm (15 in.)
15 cm (6 in.)
38 cm (15 in.)
38.1 cm
(15 in.)
61 cm
(24 in.)
GE N S
* S YS TE M RU N *
0 5 / 0 3 / 9 5
86.4 cm
(34 in.)
0 0 0 0
C O P Y R I G H T 1 9 8 9
C O UTER
L CORPORA TION
1 9 9 5
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETIC S
30 cm (12 in.)
GE N S S M
45.7 cm
(18 in.)
CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
CLEARANCE
30 cm
(12 in.)
99.1 cm (39 in.)
68.9 cm (27 in.)
43 cm (17 in.)
60.69 cm
(24 in.)
GEN
61 cm
(24 in.)
25 cm (10 in.)
25 cm (10 in.)
CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
66 cm
(26 in.)
38.1 cm
(15 in.)
6498156B
Figure 3.1-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GENS Cell
38 cm (15 in.)
38 cm (15 in.)
61 cm
(24 in.)
71.2 cm
(28 in.)
38.1 cm
(15 in.)
GE N S
* S YS TE M RU N *
0 5 / 0 3 / 9 5
0 0 0 0
C O P Y R I G H T 1 9 8 9
C O UTER
L CORPORA TION
1 9 9 5
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETIC S
30 cm (12 in.)
GE N S S M
45.7 cm
(18 in.)
48.26 cm
(19 in.)
CLEARANCE
23 cm
(9 in.)
86.4 cm
(34 in.)
CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
G e nS S t
58.42 cm (23 in.)
99.1 cm (39 in.)
68.9 cm (27 in.)
43 cm (17 in.)
60.69 cm
(24 in.)
GEN
61 cm
(24 in.)
25 cm (10 in.)
25 cm (10 in.)
CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
CLEARANCE
38.1 cm
(15 in.)
3.1-2
15 cm (6 in.)
38 cm (15 in.)
66 cm
(26 in.)
6498154B
PN 4277219B
Ventilation
c The fans are not obstructed. See Figure 3.1-4 for the location of the fans.
Figure 3.1-4 Location of Fans on the GENS System
Exhaust fans
Workstation
ANALYZER
Exhaust
fan
Vent
Power
Supply
Vent
Vent
Exhaust fan
Intake vent
(On botton of Power Supply)
6498051A
Remote Communication System (RCS) Requirement

c A single-line, nonmultiplexed analog phone line is installed for RCS connection.
Electrical Requirements
CAUTION Heat damage. Using an extension cord on the Power Supply could cause heat damage to the
main ac power cable. Designate an area for the Power Supply close enough to an electrical outlet that an
extension cord is not needed.
c The female ac outlet for the main Power Supply is within 3 m (10 ft) of the area
designated for the instrument. See Figure 3.1-5.
PN 4277219B
3.1-3
Figure 3.1-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the GENS System
WASTE
LINE
WASTE
LINE
Max
76 cm (30 in.)
Max
3.7 m
(12 ft)
DRAIN
Max
3m
(10 ft)
7253037A
c The main ac outlet is a three-wire outlet supplying a 90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, 860 W,
single-phase input power.
c The ground is a confirmed third-wire earth ground that can carry the full current of the
circuit.
c The circuit is independent and protected.
Drainage
c If the waste from the instrument will drain into an open drain instead of a waste
container, the drain is chemically resistant and is appropriate for biohazardous waste.
c The drain or waste container is less than 76 cm (30 in.) above the floor and is within
3.7 m (12 ft) of the area designated for the Diluter. Refer to Figure 3.1-5.
c The drain or waste container is located so that the waste drain tubing is always below the
waste fitting at the base of the Diluter.
Ambient Temperature and Humidity
c The typical ambient room temperature is 16 to 32C (60 to 90F) and stable.
Note: If the area is air conditioned, an additional 5,000 Btu will compensate for the heat
generated by the system.
c The humidity is consistently less than 95% with no condensation.
3.1-4
PN 4277219B
Altitude
c If the altitude is greater than 2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level, locate the custom tubing
between FF5 and FF20 (see Figure 3.1-6), and replace it with 18 in. of the clear
polyurethane tubing designated in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2, for use on
instruments installed at high altitudes.
Figure 3.1-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the GENS System
F F 5
C u s to m
tu b in g
F F 2 0
7 2 1 9 0 3 6 B
Earthquake-Prone Regions
c If the instrument is located in an area prone to earthquakes, order the Earthquake
Tie-Down Kit to secure the Analytical Station to the workbench. For the part number of
the Earthquake Tie-Down Kit, see Hardware in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2.
Installation Supplies
c The instrument reagents, calibrators and controls are available and within expiration
limits.
c The paper supplies and blood collection tubes are available. Refer to the Appendix in the
Operators Guide for a list of blood collection tubes that can be used on the instrument.
PN 4277219B
3.1-5
3.1-6
PN 4277219B
INSTALLING THE GENS SYSTEM WORKSTATION
3.2

ATTENTION: Installing the Workstation now allows you to access and use the online service
manual.
PN 4277219B
1.
If installing both an Analytical Station and a Workstation, unpack, install and check the
Workstation according to the instructions in Section 25 of the GENS Workstation
Configuration.
2.
If adding a second Analytical Station to a system that is already installed, go to

Heading 3.3, UNPACKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION.
3.2-1
3.2-2
PN 4277219B
UNPACKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3.3

Tools/Supplies Needed for Installing the Analytical Station
B Phillips-head screwdriver
B Side cutters
B Flathead screwdriver
B Two wrenches for removing strapping
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench for Power Supply
B 5C cell control - 3 levels
B Retic-C cell control - 3 levels
B LATRON primer and control
Unpacking
ATTENTION: As you install the instrument, log any problems or discrepancies on the
Installation Report form.

WARNING Personal injury. The cut edges of the metal strapping are sharp and will cut. Be careful when
removing the strapping.
1.
Carefully remove the strapping from the cartons.

Note: If you use two crescent wrenches to hold the strapping as shown in Figure 3.3-1
and rotate the wrenches toward each other simultaneously, the strapping snaps easily
and the loose ends are held securely by the wrenches.
Figure 3.3-1 Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons
7253007A
PN 4277219B
3.3-1
2.
Unpack each unit, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
Note: Do not remove any shipping inserts at this time.
ATTENTION: Position the Workstation on the right side of the Diluter.
3.
Position the components as shown in Figure 3.3-2.

Note: Cables to be routed from the Diluter to the Analyzer are located on top of the
Diluter. Open the Analyzer side doors as shown in Figure 3.3-3 to facilitate routing the
cables to the Analyzer.
Figure 3.3-2 Main Components Layout on the GENS System

ANALYTICAL STATION
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
ANALYZER
WORKSTATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
DILUTER
R
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN S
PNEU
60 PSI
AC LINE
AC
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
6498044B
4.
Secure the Analyzer to the Diluter:

a.
Locate the five Analyzer captive screws; see Figure 3.3-4.
b.
Fasten the captive screws, securing the Analyzer to the Diluter.

Note: To access the captive screws in the front, open the Analyzer side doors.
3.3-2
PN 4277219B
Figure 3.3-3 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the GENS System

1
1
J27
Unfasten
captive screw
J26
J24
Unfasten
captive screw
J19
2
7253357A
Figure 3.3-4 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the GENS System
6 4 9 8 1 6 2 B
PN 4277219B
3.3-3
3.3-4
PN 4277219B
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GENS SYSTEM
3.4

CAUTION Electronic damage. Attaching electronic cables with the power on could damage the electronic
components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to do so.
WARNING Electric shock. Routing and attaching electronic cables with the power on could result in injury
from an electric shock. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
Connecting the dc Power Cable

1.
Cut the tie wrap securing the dc power cable and route the connector end of the cable
from the Analyzer through the opening from the Analyzer to the Diluter. See
Figure 3.4-1.
2.
Unscrew the cover plate at the rear of the Diluter and feed the connector through the
opening.
3.
Secure the cable in the cable clamps in the Diluter and Analyzer.
4.
Attach the dc power cable connector, P4, to J4 on the Power Supply.
Figure 3.4-1 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GENS System
P4
J4
6498073B
PN 4277219B
Power Supply
3.4-1
Connecting the IBUS Cable

1.
Locate the IBUS cable at the rear of the Diluter.
2.
Attach the cable connector, P5, to J5 on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.4-2.
Figure 3.4-2 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the GENS System
C o v e r p la te
s c re w
S h ie ld
g ro u n d
IB U S
M a in
p o w e r
J 5
P 5
6 4 9 8 0 7 6 B
P o w e r S u p p ly
Connecting the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GENS System

1.
3.4-2
Open the left Diluter door to facilitate routing the coaxial cables. The side Diluter doors
are secured by a captive screw on the top of the door as shown in Figure 3.4-3.
PN 4277219B
Figure 3.4-3 Opening the Diluter Side Doors
6 4 9 8 1 9 5 B
2.
U n fa s te n
Remove the bubble wrap and route the coaxial cables from inside the Diluter through the
opening from the Diluter to the Analyzer and connect the cables to their respective
Pre-Amp cards. See Figure 3.4-4.
Figure 3.4-4 Routing the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GENS System
PN 4277219B
3.4-3
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus

1.
In the left and right Diluter compartments, remove the plastic shields to access the
openings for the voltage bus connectors.
Note: The left compartment shield is attached to a standoff on the Diluter 3 card. The
right compartment shield is attached by a plastic screw to the Laser Power Supply.
2.
Route the power cables from the backplane voltage bus through the opening to the
Diluter.
3.
Using Figure 3.4-5 as a guide, connect the cables to their respective cards as follows:
4.
Connector on Voltage Bus
Connects to
P1
J1 on Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
P3
J3 on Diluter 4 card (remove the card cover to

connect cable)
P4
J4 on Diff Power Supply card
P4 ground
Mounting screw on Diff Power Supply card
P7
J7 Diluter 1 card
Secure the cables in the cable clamps in the Diluter. Secure the cable to the Diluter 4 card
to the top of the Diluter compartment as shown in Figure 3.4-5.
Figure 3.4-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the GENS System
1
1 0
G R O U N D
S Y S T E M
G R O U N D
+ 4 8 V D C
P 4
P 3
- 4 8 V D C
E 9
E 1 0
P 7
S H IE L D G R O U N D
P 4 /J 4
D iff P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d
P 7 /J 7
D ilu te r 1
c a rd
P 1
E 1 0
P 1 /J 1
D ilu te r /S o le n o id
O p tic s P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d
P 3 /J 3
D ilu te r 4
c a rd
3.4-4
6 4 9 8 1 7 3 B
PN 4277219B
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RF Detector Preamp Card

1.
Locate the cable from the RF Detector Preamp card in the side compartment of the
Diluter and route the cable through the opening at the base of the Analyzer. See
Figure 3.4-6.
? Reword this section

ATTENTION: The following steps are critical to obtaining the lowest possible noise level on the
RF channel: coiling the RF Detector Preamp card cable into three turns (the preferable
number when using ferrites), starting the turns with the RF Detector Preamp end of the cable
on the inside, and attaching ferrites.
2.
Remove the ferrites (but leave the wire ties in place) and route the cable from the RF
Detector Preamp card as shown in Figure 3.4-6.
3.
Attach the cable to J24 on the digital backplane.
Figure 3.4-6 Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane
W ir e tie
W ir e tie
F e r r ite s
Cable must be coiled with three turns and

placed horizontally as shown.
From RF Detector
Preamp card, J73
RF Detector
Preamp card
PN 4277219B
6498157B
3.4-5
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RS/Opto Intfc Card

1.
Locate the two cables in the Analyzer attached to the digital backplane, undo the wire
ties, and route the cables through the opening at the base of the Analyzer to the RS/Opto
Intfc card. See Figure 3.4-7.
Figure 3.4-7 Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on the GENS
System
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
J27
SYSTEM
INTFC
J27
J24
J27
J19
P19 RS/OPTO
INTERFACE
CARD J6
P24
RF DETECTOR
PREAMP CARD
J73
J26
J24
DC/RF
SIGNAL
J24
J19
J19
IBUS
P27 RS/OPTO
INTERFACE
CARD J2
2.
3.
3.4-6
7253009A
Attach the cables from the digital backplane to the following connectors on the RS/Opto
Intfc card.
Cable
Connects to
IBUS cable from the digital backplane, J19
RS/Opto Intfc card, J6
SBUS cable from the digital backplane, J27
In the left and right Diluter compartments, reinstall the plastic shields.
PN 4277219B
Connecting the Workstation to the Analytical Station

1.
At the rear of the Diluter, locate the Analytical Station cable. See Figure 3.4-8.
2.
Attach the cable to the appropriate instrument connector on the Workstation interface
cable. See Figure 3.4-8.
Figure 3.4-8 Connecting the Workstation to the Diluter on the GENS System
RS/Opto
Interface
card
J3
Workstation
interface cable
Instrument
connector
Analytical Station to
Workstation cable
PN 4277219B
6498041B
3.4-7
3.4-8
PN 4277219B
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GENS SYSTEM
3.5

Connecting the Pneumatic Lines
Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and connect the other ends to the Diluter as
Figure 3.5-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the GENS System
VAC
30 PSI 5 PSI
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
LYSE
RETIC
PAK
PAK
STAIN PRESERVE LYSE CLEANER
DILUENT
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
6498074B
Power Supply
Installing the Pickup Tubes and the Reagent Lines

CAUTION Placing reagent containers above the reagent input lines on the Diluter can cause siphoning of
the reagents and priming problems. Never place a reagent container above the reagent input lines on the
back of the Diluter.
IMPORTANT Placing the Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK lytic reagent containers below the reagent input lines
on the Diluter can affect reagent flow, causing erroneous results. Always place the Retic Pak and SCATTER
PAK lytic reagent containers on the same tabletop level as the Diluter.
PN 4277219B
3.5-1
ATTENTION: For the pickup tube part numbers, see Table 8.2-28.
1.
Install the CBC lytic reagent, diff lytic reagent, diff preservative, retic stain and retic
clearing solution lines and pickup tubes as shown in Figure 3.5-2.
Figure 3.5-2 Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK Lytic Reagent on
the GENS System
CBC
LYSE RETIC
CLEAR RETIC
STAIN
PAK
PRESERVE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
PRESERVE
BACK OF
DILUTER
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
PAK
SCATTER
PAK
6498158B
ATTENTION: If this customer does a high volume of testing and wants to reduce the frequency
of diluent container replacements, you can connect two diluent containers in parallel to the
Analytical Station. The part number for the GENS Dual Diluent Pickup Tube kit is in
Table 8.1-7. The kit contains the instructions for making the connections.
3.5-2
PN 4277219B
2.
Install the diluent and cleaning agent lines and pickup tubes as shown in Figure 3.5-3.
3.
Connect the level sensor cable on the diluent pickup tube to the diluent level sensor
cable at the back of the instrument. See Figure 3.5-3.
Figure 3.5-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the GENS System
Waste
level
sensor
WASTE
DILUENT
CLEANER
To waste container
Waste
level
sensor
bypass
Diluent level
sensor cable
To drain line
Diluent
Waste
Back of
Diluter
Cleaning
agent
4.
6498095B
Install the waste line as shown in Figure 3.5-3. Drain lines 2.4 m (8 ft) and 3.7 m (12 ft)
are provided.
Note: If connecting the waste line to an open drain instead of a waste container:
PN 4277219B
Install a bypass jumper (P35) on the waste level sense connector.
Mechanically secure the waste tube in the drain so the tube cannot accidentally
come out of the drain. This prevents spillage.
3.5-3
3.5-4
PN 4277219B
SETTING UP THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3.6

Setting Up the Power Supply
1.
Remove the Power Supply cover as directed under Heading 4.13.
2.
Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. See Figure 3.6-1.
Figure 3.6-1 Removing Power Supply Shipping Brackets
Remove
shipping
brackets
3.
PN 4277219B
6498077A
Reinstall the Power Supply cover.
3.6-1
4.
Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. See Figure 3.6-2.
Figure 3.6-2 Location of Power Supply Air Filter
6498078B
5.
Ensure the plug installed on the main ac power cable is the correct one needed for the ac
wall outlet.
CAUTION Electronic damage. Checking electronic components with the power on could damage the
electronic components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
6.
3.6-2
Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but DO NOT plug the cable into
the ac wall outlet now. See Figure 3.6-3.
PN 4277219B
Figure 3.6-3 Connecting Main ac Power Cable to Power Supply
Main ac
power
cable
6 4 9 8 0 7 9 B
Setting Up the GENS System Diluter

1.
Remove the cardboard and foam shipping inserts from the Diluter front panels. See
Figure 3.6-4.
Figure 3.6-4 Removing GENS System Diluter Shipping Inserts
7253016A
PN 4277219B
Remove
shipping
insert
3.6-3
2.
Using Figure 3.6-5 as a guide, remove the BSV spacers.
Figure 3.6-5 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the GENS System
2
1
Loosen
knob.
Do not
remove.
7253038A
3.
3.6-4
Tighten the BSV knob.
PN 4277219B
4.
Remove the plastic film and the shipping screws from the TTM and then pull out the
shipping inserts as shown in Figure 3.6-6.
Figure 3.6-6 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the GENS System
T O P V IE W
1
R e m o v e s h ip p in g s c r e w s
S m a ll
o n e h e re
L a rg e o n e h e re
R e m o v e s h ip p in g in s e r ts
6 4 9 8 2 2 0 B
PN 4277219B
3.6-5
5.
Check the pinch valves:

a.
Remove the red pinch valve deactivator clips..

Note: The pinch valve deactivator clips listed in Table 3.6-1 are not conspicuous.
Ensure that they are removed.
b.
Inspect the I-beam tubing to ensure it is threaded properly.

Table 3.6-1 Pinch Valves with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips on the GENS System
Diluter Location
Pinch Valves
Left front panel
VL98
Center front panel
VL4 (under Hgb module)
Rear of center panel
VL14B
Diff module
VL48B (under mixing chamber)
Retic module
VL80, VL97B (under mixing chambers)
6.
Check the needle assembly:

a.
Remove the red safety clip from the needle.
b.
Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly. See Figure 3.6-7.
Figure 3.6-7 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the GENS System
6498159B
3.6-6
PN 4277219B
7.
Check the cassette transport mechanism.

a.
Manually rock the rocker bed, ensuring it moves back and forth freely without
contacting cables or wires. See Figure 3.6-8.
b.
Ensure the bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached as shown in
Figure 3.6-8.
Figure 3.6-8 Checking Rocker Bed Movement and Bed Position Sensor Condition on the GENS System
BED POSITION
SENSOR FLAG
SPRING
7253035A
PN 4277219B
3.6-7
c.
Ensure the rocker bed does not move from side to side. See Figure 3.6-9.
d.
Ensure the left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads as shown in
Figure 3.6-9.
e.
Push the stripper plate in and out, ensuring it moves freely. See Figure 3.6-9.
Figure 3.6-9 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the GENS System
ALIGN
7253024A
3.6-8
PN 4277219B
Setting Up the Analyzer

ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the circuit cards to check the seating.
1.
Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly fastened, the white tabs are flush and the
thumbscrews are secure.
ATTENTION: When configuring the instrument during installation, always set the switches for
an instrument without a SlideMaker. Even if you plan on installing a SlideMaker as part of the
instrument, you must install and test the instrument without a SlideMaker first.
2.
Change the System Configuration as necessary by setting the DIP switches on the AMC,
the COMM INTERFACE card, and the DILUTER PROCESSOR card. See Figure 3.6-10
for the card locations.
r
See Figure A.2-1 and Tables A.2-1 and A.2-2 for the AMC DIP switchs location and
settings.
See Figure A.2-4 and Tables A.2-7 and A.2-8 for the COMM INTERFACE card DIP
switches locations and settings.
See Figure A.2-8 and Table A.2-12 for the DILUTER PROCESSOR card DIP switchs
location and settings.
Figure 3.6-10 AMC, COMM INTERFACE Card, and DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Locations, GENS System
THUMBSCREWS
WHITE TABS
AMC COMM INTERFACE

CARD
J27
J26
J24
J19
7253049B
DILUTER
PROCESSOR CARD
PN 4277219B
3.6-9
3.6-10
PN 4277219B
CHECKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3.7

Power Up Checks
main ac power cable. Do not use an extension cord. Plug the main ac power cable from the Power Supply
directly into a dedicated wall outlet.
1.
Plug the main ac power cable for the Power Supply into the dedicated wall outlet.
2.
Turn on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker. See Figure 3.7-1.
Figure 3.7-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the GENS System
60 PSI
ADJUST
MAIN
POWER
F3
1/16A
250 V
+
IN
CREASE
L
PU
IN
CREASE
US
T
LT
O ADJ
SE
30 PSI
ADJUST
FU
5 PSI
ADJUST
0
0
F
N ON
F
O N
6 4 9 8 0 8 0 B
3.
PN 4277219B
Press POWER ON, then check the indicators on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.7-2.
a.
Ensure the AC status indicator LED is green, indicating the AC LINE value on the
display is within acceptable limits.
b.
Ensure the status indicator LEDs on the Power Supply display are green.
c.
Ensure the 60 PSI, 30 PSI, 5 PSI and VACUUM readings are within the specifications
listed in Table A.1-13. Adjust the pressure regulators, if necessary.
3.7-1
Figure 3.7-2 Power On Checks on the GENS System

1
Turn on the Analytical Station
6
2
1
CE
Press
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T A R T /
C O N T
P O W E R
O F F
S T A R T
U P
S H U T
D O W N
A L A R M
S E T
P R E M IX
S T O P
PNEU
60 PSI
30 PSI
60
30.0
5 PSI
VACUUM
5.0
28
AC LINE
115
Status
indicators
green ?
IN
CREASE
.
ID
E N T E R
AC
DC
Status
indicators
green ?
5 PSI
ADJUST
Within specifications ?
Check Power Supply
TEMP
P O W E R
O N
30 PSI
ADJUST
60 PSI
ADJUST
IN
CREASE
IN
CREASE
MAIN
POWER
0
0
F
N ON
F
6498040A
Regulators
Analyzer Checks
Adjusting the Analyzer Display and Accessing the Revision Levels
3.7-2
1.
Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message on the Analyzer screen is READY.
2.
Press the Analyzer reset button and record the software revision level displayed on the
Analyzer (CRT) screen for the installation report. See Figure 3.7-3.
3.
Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message returns to READY.
4.
Press the Analyzer reset button again and note the software revision level displayed on
the Diluter (LCD) display.
5.
At the Workstation, from any customer application except Run Configuration select
Help tt About and note the software revision level displayed.
PN 4277219B
6.
Verify the GENS System Analytical Station and Workstation software revisions are a
released combination. Refer to Table A.9-1.
7.
If the software combination is not released, install a currently released combination.
Figure 3.7-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the GENS System
RESET
BUTTON
SYSTEM RUN
10/10/95
12:30:18
COPYRIGHT 1995-96
COULTER CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
STATUS: VERSION ???
TEST MODE
ALERT:
MODE: C/D/R
ASPIRATIONS / TUBE O1
BLOOD DETECT: ON
MAIN MENU
7253015A
Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings

Note: For a complete summary of the Analyzer menu selections on the GENS System, see
Figure A.10-1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PN 4277219B
Select the desired date format option:

a.
From the Analyzer MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt DATE AND
TIME tt FORMAT.
b.
Switch to the desired date format option.
Enter the current date and time:

a.
From the DATE & TIME menu, select SET DATE & TIME.
b.
Using the Diluter keypad, enter the correct information, then select MAIN MENU.
If the customer uses Interleaved 2-of-5 bar-code tube labels, enter the correct number of
digits for the labels:
a.
From the MAIN MENU, select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt NUMBER OF BAR

CODE DIGITS (2 OF 5) to XX.
b.
Using the Diluter keypad, enter the number of digits on the label.
Ensure the Diluter alarms are enabled:

a.
From the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION menu, select ALARM SET UP.
b.
Enable all the alarms, then select MAIN MENU.

3.7-3
5.
Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU. See Heading 4.2 for directions.
6.
Set the MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN option to 15:
7.
a.

b.
Using the Diluter keypad, set the number to 15.
Select SERVICE MENU tt SYSTEM RUN to return to the SYSTEM RUN menu.
Entering System Serial Numbers and Revisions at the Workstation
3.7-4
1.
At the Workstation Command Center, select

Setup - Communications screen.
2.
Type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer, Diluter, and Power
Supply.
3.
Select GENS Workstation and type in the system serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
4.
When finished, log off.
tt
to access the System
PN 4277219B
TESTING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
3.8

Reagent Cycles
Priming Cycles
1.
At the Diluter, use the F31 function to prime the reagent reservoirs.
2.
Use the F67 function to prime the reagent lines.
3.
On the Diluter keypad, press SHUTDOWN to prime the cleaning agent.
4.
After the Shutdown cycle is finished, verify the instrument condition is as shown in
Figure 3.8-1.
Figure 3.8-1 GENS System Condition after Shutdown Cycle

G
TM
E N
No Display
S
COMPRESSOR OFF
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN S
PNEU
60 PSI
TEMP
00 0.00 0.0 00 000
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
AC LINE
AC
DC
30 PSI, 5 PSI
and VACUUM
readouts 0
7 2 1 9 0 3 7 B
C le a n in g a g e n t
5.
Use the F17 function to prime the cleaning agent pump.
6.
Press STARTUP to prime the system with diluent.
Startup Cycle
PN 4277219B
1.
On the Diluter keypad, press STARTUP.
2.
On the Workstation screen, select
tt
3.8-1
3.
After the Startup cycle is finished, verify:

a.
The instrument condition is as shown in Figure 3.8-2.
b.
The results displayed on the Quality Assurance [Daily Checks] screen passed and
the Startup Test Details screen are within the specifications listed in Table A.1-10.
Figure 3.8-2 GENS System Condition after Startup Cycle

G
TM
E N
R E A D Y
S
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN S
W ith in lim its

PNEU
TEMP
60 PSI
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
AC LINE
60 30.1 4.9 28 115
TM
AC
DC
GEN S
N o c le a n in g a g e n t
W ith in s p e c ific a tio n s ?
7 2 1 9 0 3 8 B
3.8-2
PN 4277219B
System Verification
Do the System Verification Procedure (SVP) and record the results as directed under
Heading 5.1.
Whole Blood Verification

Do the Whole Blood Verification procedure as directed under Heading 5.4.
SlideMaker Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideMaker, install the SlideMaker
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
SlideStainer Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideStainer, install the SlideStainer
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
Report Completion
System Installation Report
Complete the System Installation Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Instrument Reference Report Form
Complete the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Service Call Report
Complete any Service Call forms required by your countrys procedure.
PN 4277219B
3.8-3
3.8-4
PN 4277219B
GENS SYSTEM AND GENS CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
3.9

You can use this checklist after you are familiar with the installation procedure.
1.
Unpack, set up, and check the Workstation.
2.
Unpack and position the Analytical Station.
3.
Secure the Analyzer to the Diluter.
4.
Install the instrument cables:

a.
Connect the dc power cable from the Analyzer to J4 on the Power Supply.
(Figure 3.4-1)
b.
Attach the IBUS cable connector P5 to J5 on the Power Supply. (Figure 3.4-2)
c.
Connect the coaxial cables to their respective Pre-Amp cards. (Figure 3.4-4)
d.
Connect the backplane voltage bus cables P1 to J1 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics

Power Supply card, P3 to J3 on the Diluter 4 card, P4 to J4 on the Diff Power Supply
card and P7 to J7 on the Diluter 1 card. (Figure 3.4-5)
e.
Connect the Diluter cables P24, P27, P19 to J24, J27, and J19 respectively, on the
digital backplane. (Figures 3.4-6 and 3.4-7)
Note: Always connect P24/J24 first, as you need maximum space to route the coiled
cable through the opening into the Analyzer.
f.
5.
Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and to the Diluter. (Figure 3.5-1)
6.
Install the reagent lines, waste line, and pickup tubes. (Figures 3.5-2 and 3.5-3)
7.
Set up the Power Supply:
8.
PN 4277219B
Connect the Analytical Station-to-Workstation cable from the Diluter to the

appropriate instrument connector on the Workstation interface cable.(Figure 3.4-8)
a.
Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. (Figure 3.6-1)
b.
Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. (Figure 3.6-2)
c.
Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but do not plug it into the
outlet. (Figure 3.6-3)
Set up the Diluter:

a.
Remove the shipping inserts from the Diluter. (Figure 3.6-4)
b.
Remove the BSV spacers. (Figure 3.6-5)
c.
Remove the shipping screws and shipping insert from the TTM. (Figure 3.6-6)
d.
Remove the red pinch valve deactivator clips.
e.
Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly and the safety clip is removed.
(Figure 3.6-7)
f.
Check the cassette transport mechanism manually to ensure the following r
The rocker bed rocks freely without contacting cables or wires. (Figure 3.6-8)
The bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached. (Figure 3.6-8)
The rocker bed does not move from side to side. (Figure 3.6-9)
The left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads. (Figure 3.6-9)
The stripper plate moves in and out freely. (Figure 3.6-7)
3.9-1
9.
Set up the Analyzer:

a.
Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly seated and fastened.
b.
Change the System Configuration as necessary. (Tables A.2-1, A.2-2, A.2-7, A.2-8,
and A.2-12)
10. Check the Analytical Station:

a.
Plug the main ac power cable into the ac wall outlet.
b.
Power up the System. At the Power Supply, verify the ac input reading is acceptable
and the pneumatic gauge readings (Table A.1-13) are within tolerance. Adjust the
pressures as necessary.
c.
Reset the Analyzer and record the revision levels on the Installation Report.
d.
At the Analyzer -
e.
Set the date and time format and enter the date and time.
Set the number of bar-code digits for the Interleaved 2-of-5 labels in use.
Set the manual Hgb timer drain to 15.
At the Workstation, type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer,
Diluter, and Power Supply and the serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
11. Test the Analytical Station and the Workstation:

a.
Prime the reagents using the following functions in this order: F31, F67,
SHUTDOWN, F17 and STARTUP.
b.
Do a startup cycle and ensure the displayed results are within specifications.
c.
Do the following verification procedures 1)
System Verification (Heading 5.1)
2)
Whole Blood Verification. (Heading 5.4)
12. If a SlideMaker was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideMaker. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
13. If a SlideStainer was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideStainer. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
14. Fill out the Installation Report Form, GENS Reference Report, SVP Report and any
Service Call Report forms. (Heading 4.61)
3.9-2
PN 4277219B
LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST

3.10

Before you install the instrument, verify the following conditions are met. Report any
discrepancies on the Installation Report.
Operator Training
c An operator is trained or is scheduled to be trained within the next two weeks.
Carton Arrival and Condition

c All the cartons on the shipping list have arrived.
c All the cartons are intact and undamaged. If any cartons are damaged, confirm that a
claim was filed with the carrier.
Instrument Site
Space and Accessibility
c The designated instrument area is easily accessible for maintaining and servicing the
instrument, such as an island or a movable table.
c The space is sufficient for the individual units. The dimensions and requirements for
accessibility and ventilation are shown in Figures 3.10-1, 3.10-2, and 3.10-3.
C L E A R A N C E
Figure 3.10-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System without SlideMaker
2 5 .4 c m ( 1 0 in .)
4 4 .5 c m
( 1 7 .5 in .)
*S Y S T E M
3 8 c m ( 1 5 in .)
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
8 8 .9 c m
( 3 5 in .)
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
T E S T M O D E
M A IN M E N U
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
C E
S H U T D O W N
VI
VII
VIII
A L A R M
R E S E T
S T A R T
C O N T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
P R E M IX
T
R
3 0 c m ( 1 2 in .)
4 7 c m
( 1 8 .5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
M u ltiS y n c L C D 1 7 0 0 m +
1 0 1 .6 c m ( 4 0 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
6 3 .5 c m
( 2 5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
3 8 .1 c m
( 1 5 in .)
6 6 c m
( 2 6 in .)
6 1 c m
( 2 4 in .)
4 5 .7 c m ( 1 8 in .)
4 5 .7 c m
( 1 8 in .)
4 3 .1 c m
( 1 7 in .)
1 5 c m
( 6 in .)
5 5 .9 c m
( 2 2 in .)
0 0 0 7 1 6 1 A
PN 4277219B
3.10-1
4 5 .7 c m
( 1 8 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
3 3 c m ( 1 3 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
Figure 3.10-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System with SlideMaker
2 5 .4 c m ( 1 0 in .)
4 4 .5 c m
( 1 7 .5 in .)
6 8 .6 c m
( 2 7 in .)
*S Y S T E M
3 8 c m ( 1 5 in .)
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
8 8 .9 c m
( 3 5 in .)
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
R IN S E
T E S T M O D E
M A IN M E N U
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
S T A R T U P
C E
S H U T D O W N
P R E M IX
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
N
VI
VII
VIII
T
E
R
3 0 c m ( 1 2 in .)
4 7 c m
( 1 8 .5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
5 0 .2 c m
( 1 9 .7 5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
1 2 .7 c m
( 5 in .)
1 0 1 .6 c m ( 4 0 in .)
7 4 .9 c m ( 2 9 .5 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
6 1 c m
( 2 4 in .)
4 5 .7 c m ( 1 8 in .)
4 5 .7 c m
( 1 8 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
C L E A R A N C E
6 3 .5 c m
( 2 5 in .)
4 3 .1 c m
( 1 7 in .)
1 5 c m
( 6 in .)
6 6 c m
( 2 6 in .)
3 8 .1 c m
( 1 5 in .)
5 5 .9 c m
( 2 2 in .)
2 7 .9 c m ( 1 1 in .)
3 3 c m ( 1 3 in .)
2 5 .4 c m ( 1 0 in .)
4 4 .5 c m
( 1 7 .5 in .)
C
C
L
E
3 0 c m ( 1 3 in .)
7 6 .2 c m
( 3 0 in .)
R
A
N
C
E
A
R
A
N
E
5 0 .2 c m
( 1 9 .7 5 in .)
4 5 .7 c m
( 1 8 in .)
*S Y S T E M
8 8 .9 c m
( 3 5 in .)
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
T E S T M O D E
M A IN M E N U
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
S H U T D O W N
R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
C E
P R E M IX
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
VI
VII
VIII
T
R
3 0 c m ( 1 2 in .)
6 0 .3 c m ( 2 3 .7 5 in .)
7 4 .9 c m ( 2 9 .5 in .)
4 7 c m
( 1 8 .5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
1 0 1 .6 c m ( 4 0 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
6 3 .5 c m
( 2 5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
3 8 .1 c m
( 1 5 in .)
3.10-2
3 8 c m ( 1 5 in .)
5 0 .2 c m
( 1 9 .7 5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
2 5 .4 c m
( 1 0 in .)
6 8 .6 c m
( 2 7 in .)
C
C L E A R A N C E
Figure 3.10-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System
6 6 c m
( 2 6 in .)
6 1 c m
( 2 4 in .)
4 5 .7 c m ( 1 8 in .)
4 5 .7 c m
( 1 8 in .)
4 3 .1 c m
( 1 7 in .)
1 5 c m
( 6 in .)
5 5 .9 c m
( 2 2 in .)
PN 4277219B
Ventilation
c The fans are not obstructed. See Figure 3.10-4 for the location of the fans.
Figure 3.10-4 Location of Fans on the LH 750 System
Exhaust fans
ANALYZER
Exhaust
fan
Vent
Exhaust fan
F U L L R A N G E
W A R N IN G
Workstation
Power
Supply
Vent
6 4 9 8 1 6 0 B
Intake vent
(On botton of Power Supply)
Remote Communication System (RCS) Requirement

c A single-line, nonmultiplexed analog phone line is installed for RCS connection.
Electrical Requirements
main ac power cable. Designate an area for the Power Supply close enough to an electrical outlet that an
extension cord is not needed.
c The female ac outlet for the main Power Supply is within 3 m (10 ft) of the area
designated for the instrument. See Figure 3.10-5.
PN 4277219B
3.10-3
Figure 3.10-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the LH 750 System
WASTE
LINE
WASTE
LINE
Max
76 cm (30 in.)
Max
3.7 m
(12 ft)
DRAIN
Max
3m
(10 ft)
7253037A
c The main ac outlet is a three-wire outlet supplying a 90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, 860 W,
single-phase input power.
c The ground is a confirmed third-wire earth ground that can carry the full current of the
circuit.
c The circuit is independent and protected.
Drainage
c If the waste from the instrument will drain into an open drain instead of a waste
container, the drain is chemically resistant and is appropriate for biohazardous waste.
c The drain or waste container is less than 76 cm (30 in.) above the floor and is within
3.7 m (12 ft) of the area designated for the Diluter. Refer to Figure 3.10-5.
c The drain or waste container is located so that the waste drain tubing is always below the
waste fitting at the base of the Diluter.
Ambient Temperature and Humidity
c The typical ambient room temperature is 16 to 32C (60 to 90F) and stable.
Note: If the area is air conditioned, an additional 5,000 Btu will compensate for the heat
generated by the system.
c The humidity is consistently less than 95% with no condensation.
3.10-4
PN 4277219B
Altitude
c If the altitude is greater than 2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level, locate the custom tubing
between FF5 and FF20 (see Figure 3.10-6), and replace it with 18 in. of the clear
polyurethane tubing designated in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2, for use on
instruments installed at high altitudes.
Figure 3.10-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the LH 750 System
F F 5
C u s to m
tu b in g
F F 2 0
6 4 9 8 1 7 2 B
Earthquake-Prone Regions
c If the instrument is located in an area prone to earthquakes, order the Earthquake
Tie-Down Kit to secure the Analytical Station to the workbench. For the part number of
the Earthquake Tie-Down Kit, see Hardware in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2.
Installation Supplies
c The instrument reagents, calibrators and controls are available and within expiration
limits.
c The paper supplies and blood collection tubes are available. Refer to the Appendix in the
Operators Guide for a list of blood collection tubes that can be used on the instrument.
PN 4277219B
3.10-5
3.10-6
PN 4277219B
UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3.11

Tools/Supplies Needed for Installing the Analytical Station
B Side cutters
B Two wrenches for removing strapping
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench for Power Supply
B 5C cell control - 3 levels
B Retic-C cell control - 3 levels
B LATRON primer and control
Opening the Cartons

ATTENTION: As you install the instrument, log any problems or discrepancies on the
Installation Report form.

WARNING Personal injury. The cut edges of the metal strapping are sharp and will cut. Be careful when
removing the strapping.
Carefully remove the strapping from the cartons.

Note: If you use two crescent wrenches to hold the strapping as shown in Figure 3.11-1 and
rotate the wrenches toward each other simultaneously, the strapping snaps easily and the
loose ends are held securely by the wrenches.
Figure 3.11-1 Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons
7253007A
PN 4277219B
3.11-1
Unpacking and Setting Up the Power Supply

1.
Unpack the Power Supply, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
2.
Remove the Power Supply cover as directed under Heading 4.13.
3.
Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. See Figure 3.11-2.
Figure 3.11-2 Removing Power Supply Shipping Brackets
Remove
shipping
brackets
4.
3.11-2
6498077A
PN 4277219B
5.
Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. See Figure 3.11-3.
Figure 3.11-3 Location of Power Supply Air Filter
6498078B
6.
Ensure the plug installed on the main ac power cable is the correct one needed for the ac
wall outlet.
CAUTION Electronic damage. Checking electronic components with the power on could damage the
electronic components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
7.
PN 4277219B
Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but DO NOT plug the cable into
the ac wall outlet now. See Figure 3.11-4.
3.11-3
Figure 3.11-4 Connecting Main ac Power Cable to Power Supply
Main ac
power
cable
6 4 9 8 0 7 9 B
8.
Position the Power Supply in its designated location as shown in Figure 3.11-5.
Note: Figure 3.11-5 shows an ideal layout of components. If you need to change this
layout to accomodate the laboratory, be sure to maintain the clearances for ventilation
and access shown in Figures 3.10-1, 3.10-2, and 3.10-3.
Figure 3.11-5 Main Components Layout for the LH 750 System

A n a ly tic a l S ta tio n
* S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
A n a ly z e r
I
I I
I I I
I V
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
R IN S E
S T A R T U P
T E S T M O D E
M A IN
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
S H U T D O W N
C E
ID
P R E M IX
W o r k s ta tio n
V I I I
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
E
N
M E N U
V I
V I I
T
R
D ilu te r
N E C
1 7 0 0 m
GEN S
PPNEU
N E U
TTEMP
E M P
660
0 PSI
P S I
330
0 PSI
P S I
55 PSI
P S I
VACUUM
AAC
C LLINE
IN E
6600 330.0
0 . 0 44.9
. 9 2288 1115
1 5
AAC
C
DDC
C
P o w e r
S u p p ly
6 4 9 8 1 1 7 B
3.11-4
PN 4277219B
Unpacking the Diluter

1.
Unpack the Diluter, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
Note: Do not remove any shipping inserts at this time.
2.
Position the Diluter in its designated area. See Figure 3.11-5 for the relative position of
the main components.
3.
Loosen the screws securing the left and right Analytical Station columns to the Diluter
and pull the columns off as shown in Figure 3.11-6.
Note: Removing the columns makes it easier to position the Analyzer.
Figure 3.11-6 Removing the Left and Right Analytical Station Columns
L o o s e n
s c re w s
6 4 9 8 2 3 3 B
Unpacking the Analyzer

ATTENTION: The Analyzer is shipped with its front door strapped closed. The strapping is there
to prevent the front door from swinging open while you move the Analyzer. Do not remove
the strapping until the Analyzer is in position on top of the Diluter.
1.
Unpack the Analyzer, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
2.
Position the Analyzer on top of the Diluter.
3.
Remove the strapping from the Analyzer and open the front door.
4.
Remove the right cover plate and set it aside.

Note: Removing the cover plate makes it easier to access the captive screw securing the
right side door of the Analyzer.
PN 4277219B
5.
Open the side doors of the Analyzer (see Figure 3.11-7) and the rear door to access the
Analyzer to Diluter securing screws.
6.
Fasten the five Analyzer captive screws shown in Figure 3.11-8, securing the Analyzer to
the Diluter.
7.
Leave the Analyzer doors open.
3.11-5
Figure 3.11-7 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the LH 750 System

1
Unfasten
captive screw
Unfasten
captive screw
6498161B
Figure 3.11-8 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the LH 750 System
6 4 9 8 1 6 2 B
3.11-6
PN 4277219B
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
3.12

CAUTION Electronic damage. Attaching electronic cables with the power on could damage the electronic
components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to do so.
WARNING Electric shock. Routing and attaching electronic cables with the power on could result in injury
from an electric shock. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
Accessing the Connections

1.
Open the Diluter doors. The side Diluter doors are secured by a captive screw on the top
of the door as shown in Figure 3.12-1.
Figure 3.12-1 Opening the Diluter Side Doors
6498194B
2.
U n fa s te n
In the left and right Diluter compartments, remove the plastic shields.
Note: The left compartment shield is attached to a standoff on the Diluter 3 card. The
right compartment shield is attached by a plastic screw to the Laser Power Supply.
PN 4277219B
3.12-1
Connecting the dc Power Cable

1.
Cut the tie wrap securing the dc power cable and route the connector end of the cable
from the Analyzer through the opening to the Diluter. See Figure 3.12-2.
Figure 3.12-2 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the LH 750 System
P 4
J 4
6 4 9 8 2 2 1 B
3.12-2
2.
Unscrew the cover plate at the rear of the Diluter and feed the connector through the
opening.
3.
Secure the cable in the cable clamps in the Diluter and Analyzer.
4.
Attach the dc power cable connector, P4, to J4 on the Power Supply.
PN 4277219B
Connecting the IBUS Cable

1.
Locate the IBUS cable at the rear of the Diluter and remove the bubble wrap and all the
tie wraps except the tie wrap holding the ground wire to the IBUS cable.
2.
Attach the cable connector, P5, to J5 on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.12-3.
3.
Reinstall the cover plate on the rght rear corner of the Diluter and attach the shield
grounds for the dc power cable and the IBUS cable to the screw on the cover plate as
Figure 3.12-3 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the LH 750 System
C o v e r p la te
s c re w
S h ie ld
g ro u n d
IB U S
M a in
p o w e r
J 5
P 5
6 4 9 8 2 2 2 B
PN 4277219B
3.12-3
Connecting the Analyzer to Preamp Cable

1.
Remove the bubble wrap from the Analyzer to preamp cable and route the cable from the
R/W/P SC/A card through the opening in the left side of the Analyzer to the Diluter as
2.
Connect the cable to the Six-Channel Preamp card. See Figure 3.12-4.
Figure 3.12-4 Routing the Analyzer to Preamp Cable on the LH 750 System
S C /A
C A R D
6 4 9 8 1 8 8 B
3.12-4
PN 4277219B
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus

1.
Locate the power cables on the backplane voltage bus, remove the tie wraps, and route
the power cables from the backplane voltage bus through the openings to the Diluter.
Note: Route the cables to the cards on the right Diluter door through the top wire tie
securing the ribbon cable.
2.
3.
Using Figure 3.12-5 as a guide, connect the cables to their respective cards as follows:
Connector on Voltage Bus
Connects to
P1
J1 on Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
P3
J3 on Diluter 4 card (remove the card cover to

connect cable)
P4
J4 on Diff Power Supply card
P4 ground
Mounting screw on Diff Power Supply card
P7
J7 Diluter 1 card
Secure the cable to the Diluter 4 card in the cable clamps on the top of the Diluter
compartment and on the left rear door.
Figure 3.12-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the LH 750 System
1
1 0
G R O U N D
S Y S T E M
G R O U N D
+ 4 8 V D C
P 4
P 3
- 4 8 V D C
E 9
E 1 0
P 7
S H IE L D G R O U N D
P 4 /J 4
D iff P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d
G ro u n d
P 7 /J 7
D ilu te r 1
c a rd
P 1
E 1 0
P 1 /J 1
D ilu te r /S o le n o id
O p tic s P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d
P 3 /J 3
D ilu te r 4
c a rd
PN 4277219B
6 4 9 8 2 2 3 B
3.12-5
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RF Detector Preamp Card

1.
Locate the cable from the RF Detector Preamp card in the right side compartment of the
Diluter.
2.
Remove the bubble wrap and the ferrites, noting their postions, but DO NOT remove the
wire ties.
3.
Route the cable through the opening at the base of the Analyzer. See Figure 3.12-7.
on the inside, and attaching ferrites.
4.
Verify the cable is coiled three times, then reinstall the ferrites.
5.
Do not attach the cable to the digital backplane at this time.
Figure 3.12-6 Routing the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane on the
LH 750 System
W ir e tie
W ir e tie
F e r r ite s
Cable must be coiled with three turns and

placed horizontally as shown.
From RF Detector
Preamp card, J73
RF Detector
Preamp card
3.12-6
6498157B
PN 4277219B
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RS/Opto Intfc Card

1.
Locate the two cables in the Analyzer attached to the digital backplane, undo the wire
ties, and route the cables through the opening at the base of the Analyzer to the RS/Opto
Intfc card. See Figure 3.12-7.
Figure 3.12-7 Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on the LH 750
System
D IG IT A L
B A C K P L A N E
J27
J 2 7
S Y S T E M
IN T F C
J24
J27
J19
P 1 9 R S /O P T O
IN T E R F A C E
C A R D J 6
P 2 4
R F D E T E C T O R
P R E A M P C A R D
J 7 3
J26
J 2 4
D C /R F
S IG N A L
J24
J19
J 1 9
IB U S
6 4 9 8 1 6 3 B
2.
3.
PN 4277219B
P 2 7 R S /O P T O
IN T E R F A C E
C A R D J 2
Attach the cables from the digital backplane to the following connectors on the RS/Opto
Intfc card.
Cable
Connects to
IBUS cable from the digital backplane, J19
SBUS cable from the digital backplane, J27
Attach the RF Detector Preamp card cable to J24 on the digital backplane. Refer to
Figure 3.12-7.
3.12-7
3.12-8
PN 4277219B
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
3.13

Connecting the Pneumatic Lines
Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and connect the other ends to the Diluter as
Figure 3.13-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the LH 750 System
VAC
30 PSI 5 PSI
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
LYSE
RETIC
PAK
PAK
STAIN PRESERVE LYSE CLEANER
DILUENT
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
6498074B
Power Supply
Installing the Pickup Tubes and the Reagent Lines

CAUTION Placing reagent containers above the reagent input lines on the Diluter can cause siphoning of
the reagents and priming problems. Never place a reagent container above the reagent input lines on the
back of the Diluter.
IMPORTANT Placing the Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK lytic reagent containers below the reagent input lines
on the Diluter can affect reagent flow, causing erroneous results. Always place the Retic Pak and SCATTER
PAK lytic reagent containers on the same tabletop level as the Diluter.
PN 4277219B
3.13-1
ATTENTION: For the pickup tube part numbers, see Table 8.2-28.
1.
Label both ends of the CBC lytic reagent, diff lytic reagent, diff preservative, retic stain
and retic clearing solution lines and install the lines and the pickup tubes as shown in
Figure 3.13-2.
Figure 3.13-2 Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK Lytic Reagent
on the LH 750 System
CBC
LYSE RETIC
CLEAR RETIC
STAIN
PAK
PRESERVE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
PRESERVE
BACK OF
DILUTER
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
PAK
SCATTER
PAK
6498158B
ATTENTION: If this customer does a high volume of testing and wants to reduce the frequency
of diluent container replacements, you can connect two diluent containers in parallel to the
Analytical Station. The part number for the LH 750 Dual Diluent Pickup Tube kit?? is in
Table 8.1-7. The kit contains the instructions for making the connections.
3.13-2
PN 4277219B
2.
If the diluent line was shipped with a check valve, remove the check valve.
3.
Label both ends of the diluent and cleaning agent lines and install the lines and the
pickup tubes as shown in Figure 3.13-3.
4.
Connect the level sensor cable on the diluent pickup tube to the diluent level sensor
cable at the back of the instrument. See Figure 3.13-3.
Figure 3.13-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the LH 750 System
Waste
level
sensor
WASTE
DILUENT
CLEANER
To waste container
Waste
level
sensor
bypass
Diluent level
sensor cable
To drain line
Diluent
Waste
Back of
Diluter
Cleaning
agent
5.
6498095B
Install the waste line as shown in Figure 3.13-3. Drain lines 2.4 m (8 ft) and 3.7 m (12 ft)
are provided.
Note: If connecting the waste line to an open drain instead of a waste container:
PN 4277219B
Install a bypass jumper (P35) on the waste level sense connector.
Mechanically secure the waste tube in the drain so the tube cannot accidentally
come out of the drain. This prevents spillage.
3.13-3
3.13-4
PN 4277219B
SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER
3.14

Setting Up the LH 750 System Diluter
1.
Remove the cardboard shipping inserts from the Diluter front panels. See Figure 3.14-1.
Figure 3.14-1 Removing LH 750 System Diluter Shipping Inserts
6 4 9 8 2 0 3 B
2.
Using Figure 3.14-2 as a guide, remove the BSV spacers.
3.
Tighten the BSV knob.
Figure 3.14-2 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the LH 750 System
2
1
L o o
k n o
D o
re m
s e n
b .
n o t
o v e .
6 4 9 8 1 6 4 B
PN 4277219B
3.14-1
4.
Remove the plastic film and the shipping screws from the TTM and then pull out the
shipping inserts as shown in Figure 3.14-3.
Figure 3.14-3 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the LH 750 System
T O P V IE W
2
R e m o v e s h ip p in g s c r e w s
S m a ll
o n e h e re
L a rg e o n e h e re
R e m o v e s h ip p in g in s e r ts
6 4 9 8 1 6 5 B
5.
Check the pinch valves:

a.

Note: The pinch valve deactivator clips listed in Table 3.14-1 are not conspicuous.
Ensure that they are removed.
b.
Inspect the I-beam tubing to ensure it is threaded properly.
Table 3.14-1 Pinch Valves on the LH 750 System with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips
3.14-2
Diluter Location
Pinch Valves
Left front panel
VL95/98
Center front panel
VL4 (under Hgb module)
Right front panel
VL53B, VL108
Rear of left panel
VL61
Rear of center panel
VL14B, VL16B
Diff module
VL48B (under mixing chamber)
VL80, VL97B (under mixing chambers)
PN 4277219B
6.
Check the needle assembly:

a.
Remove the red safety clip from the needle.
b.
Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly. See Figure 3.14-4.
Figure 3.14-4 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the LH 750 System
6 4 9 8 1 9 2 B
7.
Check the cassette transport mechanism.

a.
Manually rock the rocker bed, ensuring it moves back and forth freely without
contacting cables or wires. See Figure 3.14-5.
b.
Ensure the bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached as shown in
Figure 3.14-5.
Figure 3.14-5 Checking Rocker Bed Movement and Bed Position Sensor Condition on the LH 750 System
BED POSITION
SENSOR FLAG
SPRING
6 4 9 8 1 6 6 B
PN 4277219B
3.14-3
c.
Ensure the rocker bed does not move from side to side. See Figure 3.14-6.
d.
Ensure the left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads as shown in
Figure 3.14-6.
e.
Push the stripper plate in and out, ensuring it moves freely. See Figure 3.14-6.
Figure 3.14-6 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the LH 750 System
A lig n
6 4 9 8 1 9 3 B
Setting Up the Analyzer

1.
Install the BD ADJ card.

a.
Position the card in the Analyzer as shown in Figure 3.14-7 and fasten the
thumbscrews.
b.
Install the Analyzer to preamp cable in the cable clamp.
Figure 3.14-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System Analyzer
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 : 3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
T E S T M O D E
D E T E C T : O N
M A IN
M E N U
VI
VII
VIII
B D A D J
c a rd
T h u m b s c re w s
W h ite ta b s
A M C
C O M M IN T E R F A C E
c a rd
J 1
6498186B
D IL U T E R C P U
c a rd
3.14-4
PN 4277219B
c.
Connect the Diluter 2 card to BD ADJ card cable to J1 on the BD ADJ card. See
Figure 3.14-7.
d.
Route the other end of the cable down to the Diluter 2 card and connect it to J12.
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the circuit cards to check the seating.
2.
Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly fastened, the white tabs are flush and the
thumbscrews are secure. See Figure 3.14-7.
ATTENTION: When configuring the instrument during installation, always set the switches for
an instrument without a SlideMaker. Even if you plan on installing a SlideMaker as part of the
instrument, you must install and test the instrument without a SlideMaker first.
3.
Change the System Configuration as necessary by setting the DIP switches on the AMC,
the COMM INTERFACE card, and the DILUTER CPU card. Refer to Figure 3.14-7 for
the card locations.
r
See Figure A.2-1 and Tables A.2-1 and A.2-2 for the AMC DIP switchs location and
settings.
See Figure A.2-4 and Tables A.2-7 and A.2-8 for the COMM INTERFACE card DIP
switches locations and settings.
See Figure A.2-7 and Table A.2-11 for the DILUTER CPU card DIP switchs location
and settings.
ATTENTION: If the shear valves are seized and you allow the Analytical Station to reset before
you have exercised them, tubing may pop off of the shear valves.
PN 4277219B
4.
On the DILUTER CPU card, set SW1, position 8, to ON, to inhibit resetting the
Analytical Station when you first turn the power on.
5.
6.
Close all the Analyzer and Diluter doors and install the Analytical Station covers and
columns.
3.14-5
3.14-6
PN 4277219B
UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION
3.15

Unpacking and Checking the Workstation
1.
Unpack the Workstation, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
ATTENTION: Position the Workstation monitor on the right side of the Diluter. The Workstaion
computer can be installed on the floor or on the counter, depending on the space available.
2.
Install and check the Workstation according to the instructions in Chapter 18 of the
COULTER LH 700 Series Workstation Configuration.
Connecting the Workstation to the Analytical Station

1.
At the rear of the Diluter, locate the Analytical Station cable. See Figure 3.15-1.
2.
Attach the cable to the appropriate instrument connector on the Workstation interface
cable. See Figure 3.15-1.
Figure 3.15-1 Connecting the Workstation to the LH 750 System Diluter

R S /O p to
In te rfa c e
c a rd
J3
A n a ly tic a l S ta tio n to
W o r k s ta tio n c a b le
W o r k s ta tio n
in te r fa c e c a b le
In s tru m e n t
c o n n e c to r
PN 4277219B
6498185B
3.15-1
3.15-2
PN 4277219B
CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3.16

Power Up Checks
main ac power cable. Do not use an extension cord. Plug the main ac power cable from the Power Supply
directly into a dedicated wall outlet.
1.
Plug the main ac power cable for the Power Supply into the dedicated wall outlet.
2.
Turn on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker. See Figure 3.16-1.
Figure 3.16-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the LH 750 System
60 PSI
ADJUST
MAIN
POWER
F3
1/16A
250 V
+
IN
CREASE
L
PU
IN
CREASE
US
T
LT
O ADJ
SE
30 PSI
ADJUST
FU
5 PSI
ADJUST
0
0
F
N ON
F
O N
6 4 9 8 0 8 0 B
3.
PN 4277219B
Press POWER ON, then check the indicators on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.16-2.
a.
Ensure the AC status indicator LED is green, indicating the AC LINE value on the
display is within acceptable limits.
b.
Ensure the status indicator LEDs on the Power Supply display are green.
c.
Ensure the 60 PSI, 30 PSI, 5 PSI and VACUUM readings are within the specifications
listed in Table A.1-13. Adjust the pressure regulators, if necessary.
3.16-1
Figure 3.16-2 Power On Checks on the LH 750 System

1
Turn on the Analytical Station

*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
T E S T M O D E
M A IN M E N U
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
S T A R T U P
C E
S H U T D O W N
P R E M IX
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
N
VI
VII
VIII
T
E
R
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T A R T U P
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
C E
.
R
Press
Within specifications ?
Check Power Supply

PNEU
60 PSI
30 PSI
60
TEMP
P R E M IX
S H U T D O W N
S T O P
R E A D Y
30.0
5 PSI
VACUUM
5.0
28
AC LINE
115
Status
indicators
green ?
AC
DC
Status
indicators
green ?
5 PSI
ADJUST
30 PSI
ADJUST
60 PSI
ADJUST
MAIN
POWER
MAIN
POWER
IN
CREASE
NC
REASE
IN
CREASE
F3
1/16A
250 V
0
0
F
N ON
F
6 4 9 8 1 6 9 B
Regulators
Analyzer Checks
Adjusting the Analyzer Display and Accessing the Revision Levels
3.16-2
1.
Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message on the Analyzer screen is READY.
2.
Press the Analyzer reset button and record the software revision level displayed on the
Analyzer (CRT) screen for the installation report. See Figure 3.16-3.
3.
Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message returns to READY.
4.
Press the Analyzer reset button again and note the software revision level displayed on
the numeric keypad display (LCD).
5.
At the Workstation, from any customer application except Run Configuration select
Help tt About and note the software revision level displayed.
PN 4277219B
6.
Verify the LH 750 System Analytical Station and Workstation software revisions are a
released combination. Refer to Table A.9-2.
7.
If the software combination is not released, install a currently released combination.
Figure 3.16-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the LH 750 System
Reset
button
*SYSTEM RUN*
04/30/01
12:30:18
II
COPYRIGHT 1995-2001
BECKMAN COULTER CORP.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
III
IV
V
STATUS : VERSION ???

ALERT:
VI
ASPIRATIONS/TUBE 01
VII
MAIN MENU
VIII
MODE: C/D/R
BLOOD DETECT: ON
6498176B
Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings

Note: For a complete summary of the LH 750 System Analyzer menu selections, see
Figure A.10-2.
1.
2.
PN 4277219B
Select the desired date format option:

a.
From the Analyzer MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt DATE AND
TIME tt FORMAT.
b.
Switch to the desired date format option.
Enter the current date and time:

a.
From the DATE & TIME menu, select SET DATE & TIME.
b.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the correct information, then select MAIN MENU.
3.16-3
3.
4.
If the customer uses Interleaved 2-of-5 bar-code tube labels, enter the correct number of
digits for the labels:
a.
From the MAIN MENU, select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt NUMBER OF BAR

CODE DIGITS (2 OF 5) to XX.
b.
Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of digits on the label.
Ensure the Diluter alarms are enabled:

a.
From the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION menu, select ALARM SET UP.
b.
Enable all the alarms, then select MAIN MENU.
5.
Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU. See Heading 4.2 for directions.
6.
Set the MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN option to 15:
7.
a.

b.
Using the Diluter keypad, set the number to 15.
Select SERVICE MENU tt SYSTEM RUN to return to the SYSTEM RUN menu.
Entering System Serial Numbers and Revisions at the Workstation
1.
At the Workstation Command Center, select

Setup - Communications screen.
2.
Select Instrument and type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer,
Diluter, and Power Supply.
3.
Select LH 750 Workstation and type in the system serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
4.
When finished, log off.
tt
to access the System
Closing Up the Instrument for Testing
3.16-4
1.
2.
Close all the instrument doors and install the Analytical Station covers and columns.
PN 4277219B
TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
3.17

Reagent Cycles
Priming Cycles
1.
At the Analyzer, use the F31 function to prime the reagent reservoirs.
2.
Exercise the shear valves and ensure they are working correctly.
r
Use the F85 function to exercise CVL85/126.
Use the F87 function to exercise CVL87/127
Use the F93 function to exercise CVL93/128.
3.
Power down the Analytical Station and set the DILUTER CPU card, SW1, position 8, to
OFF, to enble the reset function.
4.
Power up the Analytical Station.
5.
Use the F67 function to prime the reagent lines.
6.
Use the F17 function to prime the cleaning agent pump.
7.
On the numeric keypad, press SHUTDOWN to prime the cleaning agent.
8.
After the Shutdown cycle is finished, verify the instrument condition is as shown in
Figure 3.17-1.
9.
On the numeric keypad, press STARTUP to prime the System with diluent.
Figure 3.17-1 LH 750 System Condition after Shutdown Cycle

No Display
*S Y S T E M
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
S H U T D O W N
R IN S E
T E S T M O D E
M A IN
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
3
5
C E
P R E M IX
COMPRESSOR OFF
VII
VIII
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
M E N U
VI
N
EC
GEN S
30 PSI, 5 PSI
and VACUUM
readouts 0
6 4 9 8 1 7 0 B
PN 4277219B
Cleaning agent
3.17-1
Startup Cycle
1.
On the numeric keypad, press STARTUP.
2.
On the Workstation screen, select
3.
After the Startup cycle is finished, verify:
tt
a.
The instrument condition is as shown in Figure 3.17-2.
b.
The results displayed on the Quality Assurance [Daily Checks] screen passed and
the Startup Test Details screen are within the specifications listed in Table A.1-10.
Figure 3.17-2 LH 750 System Condition after Startup Cycle
*S Y S T E M
READY
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /0 1
I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
III
IV
V
T E S T M O D E
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN
S T A R T U P
R IN S E
V I
V II
M A IN M E N U
D E T E C T : O N
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T O P
R E A D Y
4
7
C E
S H U T D O W N
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
ID
P O W E R O N
P O W E R O F F
P R E M IX
N E C
1 7 0 0 m +
Within limits
P N E U
TEM P
60 P S I
60
30 P S I
3 0 .0
5 P S I
4 .9
V A C U U M
28
A C L IN E
115
A C
DC
No cleaning agent
6 4 9 8 1 7 7 B
3.17-2
PN 4277219B
System Verification
Do the System Verification Procedure (SVP) and record the results as directed under
Heading 5.1.
Whole Blood Verification

Do the Whole Blood Verification procedure as directed under Heading 5.4.
SlideMaker Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideMaker, install the SlideMaker
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
SlideStainer Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideStainer, install the SlideStainer
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
Report Completion
System Installation Report
Complete the System Installation Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Instrument Reference Report Form
Complete the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Service Call Report
Complete any Service Call forms required by your countrys procedure.
PN 4277219B
3.17-3
3.17-4
PN 4277219B
LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
3.18

You can use this checklist after you are familiar with the installation procedure.
1.
Unpack and set up the Power Supply:

a.
Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. (Figure 3.11-2)
b.
Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. (Figure 3.11-3)
c.
Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but do not plug it into the
outlet. (Figure 3.11-4)
2.
Unpack and position the Diluter.
3.
Unpack and position the Analyzer.
4.
Secure the Analyzer to the Diluter.
5.
Install the instrument cables:

a.
Connect the dc power cable from the Analyzer to J4 on the Power Supply.
(Figure 3.12-2)
b.
Attach the IBUS cable connector P5 to J5 on the Power Supply. (Figure 3.12-3)
c.
Connect the Analyzer to preamp cable to the Six-Channel Preamp card.

(Figure 3.12-4)
d.
Connect the backplane voltage bus cables P1 to J1 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics

Power Supply card, P3 to J3 on the Diluter 4 card, P4 to J4 on the Diff Power Supply
card and P7 to J7 on the Diluter 1 card. (Figure 3.12-5)
e.
Route and connect the digital backplane cables.

1)
Route the RF Detector Preamp cable from the Diluter to the Analyzer.
(Figure 3.12-6).
Note: Always route the RF Detector Preamp cable first, as you need maximum
space to route the coiled cable through the opening into the Analyzer.
2)
Route the Diluter cables P27and P19 from the digital backplane to the RS/Opto
Intfc card and connect them to J27 and J19 respectively. (Figure 3.12-7 )
3)
Connect the RF Detector Preamp cable to J24 on the digital backplane.
6.
Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and to the Diluter. (Figure 3.13-1)
7.
Install the reagent lines, waste line, and pickup tubes. (Figure 3.13-2 and Figure 3.13-3)
8.
Set up the Diluter:

a.
Remove the shipping inserts from the Diluter. (Figure 3.14-1)
b.
Remove the BSV spacers. (Figure 3.14-2)
c.
Remove the shipping screws and shipping insert from the TTM. (Figure 3.14-3)
d.
e.
Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly and the safety clip is removed.
(Figure 3.14-4)
f.
Check the cassette transport mechanism manually to ensure the following r

r
r
r
PN 4277219B
The rocker bed rocks freely without contacting cables or wires. (Figure 3.14-5)
The bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached. (Figure 3.14-5)
The rocker bed does not move from side to side. (Figure 3.14-6)
The left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads. (Figure 3.14-6)
3.18-1
r
9.
The stripper plate moves in and out freely. (Figure 3.14-6)
Set up the Analyzer:

a.
Install and connect the BD ADJ card (Figure 3.14-7).
a.
Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly seated and fastened.
b.
Change the System Configuration as necessary. (Tables A.2-1, A.2-2, A.2-7, A.2-8,
and A.2-12)
c.
Set the DILUTER CPU CARD to inhibit reset.
10. Unpack, set up, and check the Workstation.

11. Connect the Analytical Station-to-Workstation cable from the Diluter to the appropriate
instrument connector on the Workstation interface cable.(Figure 3.15-1)
12. Check the Analytical Station:
a.
b.
Power up the System. At the Power Supply, verify the ac input reading is acceptable
and the pneumatic gauge readings (Table A.1-13) are within tolerance. Adjust the
pressures as necessary.
c.
Reset the Analyzer and record the revision levels on the Installation Report.
d.
At the Analyzer r
r
r
e.
Set the date and time format and enter the date and time.
Set the number of bar-code digits for the Interleaved 2-of-5 labels in use.
Set the manual Hgb timer drain to 15.
At the Workstation, type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer,
Diluter, and Power Supply and the serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
13. Install all the instrument panels and close all the doors in preparation for testing.
14. Test the Analytical Station and the Workstation:
a.
Use F31 to prime the reagent reservoirs.
b.
Exercise the shear valves using F85 (CVL85/126), F87 (CVL87/127), and F93
(CVL93/128).
c.
Power down the Analytical Station, enable the reset function on the DILUTER CPU
card, and power up the Analytical Station.
d.
Prime the reagents using the following functions in this order: F67, F17,
SHUTDOWN, and STARTUP.
e.
Do a startup cycle and ensure the displayed results are within specifications.
f.
Do the following verification procedures 1)
System Verification (Heading 5.1)
2)
Whole Blood Verification. (Heading 5.4)
15. If a SlideMaker was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideMaker. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
16. If a SlideStainer was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideStainer. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
17. Fill out the Installation Report Form, Reference Report, SVP Report and any Service Call
Report forms. (Heading 4.61)
3.18-2
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
PN 4277219B
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1

4.1
POWER DOWN/POWER UP, 4.1-1

Analytical Station Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-1
Power Up, 4.1-1
Workstation Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-2
Power Up, 4.1-2
4.2
ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS, 4.2-1

Purpose, 4.2-1
Procedure, 4.2-1
Verification, 4.2-1
4.3
ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS, 4.3-1

Purpose, 4.3-1
Procedure, 4.3-1
Verification, 4.3-2
4.4
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, 4.4-1

Procedure, 4.4-1
Verification, 4.4-2
4.5
AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS, 4.5-1

Purpose, 4.5-1
Procedure, 4.5-1
Verification, 4.5-1
4.6
ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.6-1

Purpose, 4.6-1
Procedure, 4.6-1
4.7
DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.7-1

Purpose, 4.7-1
Bar-Code Decoder Card Replacement, 4.7-1
Removal, 4.7-1
Installation, 4.7-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card Relocation or Replacement (LH 750 System), 4.7-2
Relocation or Removal, 4.7-2
Installation, 4.7-3
4-i
CONTENTS
Diluter Card Replacements (except Bar-Code Decoder, Six-Channel Preamp, and

Reservoir Interface Cards), 4.7-3
Removal, 4.7-3
Installation, 4.7-4
4.8
CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES, 4.8-1

Purpose, 4.8-1
Procedures, 4.8-1
4.9
CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE, 4.9-1

Purpose, 4.9-1
Procedure, 4.9-1
4.10 CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, 4.10-1

Purpose, 4.10-1
Procedure, 4.10-1
4.11 MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION, 4.11-1
Purpose, 4.11-1
Collecting the Data, 4.11-1
4.12 FAN REPLACEMENT, 4.12-1
Purpose, 4.12-1
Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-1
Procedure, 4.12-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-2
Procedure, 4.12-2
Analyzer Fans, 4.12-3
Procedure, 4.12-3
4.13 REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL, 4.13-1
Purpose, 4.13-1
Removal, 4.13-1
4.14 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT, 4.14-1
Purpose, 4.14-1
Removal, 4.14-1
4-ii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.15 DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT, 4.15-1
Purpose, 4.15-1
Procedure, 4.15-1
4.16 AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT, 4.16-1
Purpose, 4.16-1
Cleaning, 4.16-1
Replacement, 4.16-2
Removal, 4.16-2
4.17 MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.17-1
Purpose, 4.17-1
Replacement, 4.17-1
4.18 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.18-1
Purpose, 4.18-1
Removal, 4.18-1
4.19 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT, 4.19-1
Purpose, 4.19-1
SPC Display Test, 4.19-1
Replacement, 4.19-1
4.20 BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT, 4.20-1
Purpose, 4.20-1
Removal, 4.20-1
4.21 BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.21-1
Purpose, 4.21-1
Replacement, 4.21-1
PN 4277219B
4-iii
CONTENTS
4.22 CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.22-1
Purpose, 4.22-1
Replacement, 4.22-5
4.23 DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.23-1
Purpose, 4.23-1
Dispenser Troubleshooting, 4.23-5
Replacement, 4.23-6
4.24 STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.24-1
Purpose, 4.24-1
Replacement, 4.24-7
4.25 RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT, 4.25-1
Purpose, 4.25-1
Pump Replacement, 4.25-6
4.26 CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 4.26-1
Purpose, 4.26-1
Replacement, 4.26-3
4.27 ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.27-1
Purpose, 4.27-1
Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-1
High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-3
Replacement, 4.27-6
4-iv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.28 DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.28-1
Purpose, 4.28-1
Replacement, 4.28-8
4.29 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT, 4.29-1
Purpose, 4.29-1
Replacement, 4.29-8
4.30 REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.30-1
Purpose, 4.30-1
Float Sensor/Reservoir Cap Replacement, 4.30-1
Removal, 4.30-1
Reagent Reservoir Solenoid Replacement, 4.30-3
Procedure, 4.30-3
Reservoir Interface Card Replacement, 4.30-4
Procedure, 4.30-4
4.31 CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK, 4.31-1
Purpose, 4.31-1
Timing Check, 4.31-1
4.32 HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.32-1
Purpose, 4.32-1
Replacement, 4.32-1
Hgb Lamp Voltage Adjustment, 4.32-2
4.33 WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA
COLLECTION, 4.33-1
Purpose, 4.33-1
PN 4277219B
4-v
CONTENTS

Screen Capture, 4.33-1
List-Mode Data Collection, 4.33-1
4.34 CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT, 4.34-1
Purpose, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the GENS System, 4.34-1
Adjustment, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
Adjustment, 4.34-2
4.35 BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT, 4.35-1
Purpose, 4.35-1
Removal, 4.35-1
4.36 ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT, 4.36-1
Purpose, 4.36-1
Adjustment, 4.36-1
4.37 UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.37-1
Purpose, 4.37-1
Procedure, 4.37-1
4.38 UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.38-1
Purpose, 4.38-1
Procedure, 4.38-1
4.39 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.39-1
Purpose, 4.39-1
Removal, 4.39-1
4.40 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.40-1
Purpose, 4.40-1
Removal, 4.40-1
4-vi
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
Lift Function Test, 4.40-3

Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment, 4.40-3
4.41 TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.41-1
Purpose, 4.41-1
Replacement, 4.41-1
Top Left Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
Top Right Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
4.42 FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.42-1
Purpose, 4.42-1
Flipper Check and Adjustment, 4.42-1
4.43 ROCKER BED REMOVAL, 4.43-1
Purpose, 4.43-1
Removal, 4.43-1
4.44 ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.44-1
Purpose, 4.44-1
Bed Sensor Flag Check and Adjustment, 4.44-1
Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-2
Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-3
Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-4
4.45 BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.45-1
Purpose, 4.45-1
Removal, 4.45-1
Bed Rock Rate Adjustment, 4.45-2
4.46 TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.46-1
Purpose, 4.46-1
Replacement, 4.46-1
4.47 TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.47-1
Purpose, 4.47-1
PN 4277219B
4-vii
CONTENTS
Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.48 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS, 4.48-1
Purpose, 4.48-1
Procedure, 4.48-1
4.49 BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.49-1
Purpose, 4.49-1
Procedure, 4.49-1
4.50 BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.50-1
Purpose, 4.50-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-1
Removal, 4.50-1
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-2
Removal, 4.50-2
4.51 BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS, 4.51-1
Purpose, 4.51-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-1
Set Up, 4.51-1
Park Tab Verification, 4.51-2
Center Adjustment, 4.51-3
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment, 4.51-4
Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-8
Adjustments, 4.51-8
4.52 LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS, 4.52-1
Purpose, 4.52-1
Tool/Supplies Needed, 4.52-1
Speed Check, 4.52-1
Electrical Checks, 4.52-2
4.53 BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.53-1
Purpose, 4.53-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-1
Adjustment, 4.53-1
4-viii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-2

Adjustment, 4.53-2
4.54 BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE, 4.54-1
Purpose, 4.54-1
Alignment, 4.54-1
4.55 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.55-1
Purpose, 4.55-1
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-2
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-3
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module, 4.55-5
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-6
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-7
4.56 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.56-1
Purpose, 4.56-1
Performance Test, 4.56-1
4.57 NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.57-1
Purpose, 4.57-1
Replacement, 4.57-1
Bellow Up and Bellows Down Sensor Adjustment, 4.57-2
4.58 PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT
REPLACEMENTS, 4.58-1
Purpose, 4.58-1
Tools/Materials Needed, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement, 4.58-2
Cleaning Truck Alignment, 4.58-5
Initial Adjustment, 4.58-5
Final Adjustment, 4.58-6
PN 4277219B
4-ix
CONTENTS
Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment, 4.58-6

4.59 HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT, 4.59-1
Purpose, 4.59-1
Procedure, 4.59-1
4.60 BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.60-1
Purpose, 4.60-1
BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator Replacement, 4.60-1
Procedure, 4.60-1
BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement, 4.60-3
Procedure, 4.60-3
Probe Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.60-4
4.61 USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS, 4.61-1
Purpose, 4.61-1
Using the System Verification Report, 4.61-1
Using the Instrument Reference Report, 4.61-2
Using the System Installation Report, 4.61-2
4.62 RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT, 4.62-1
Purpose, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-2
4.63 STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.63-1
Purpose, 4.63-1
Procedure, 4.63-1
4.64 PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.64-1
Purpose, 4.64-1
Procedure, 4.64-1
4-x
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.65 HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.65-1

Purpose, 4.65-1
Procedure, 4.65-1
4.66 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION, 4.66-1
Purpose, 4.66-1
Procedure, 4.66-1
4.67 DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT, 4.67-1
Purpose, 4.67-1
Removal, 4.67-1
4.68 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.68-1
Purpose, 4.68-1
Procedure, 4.68-1
4.69 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.69-1
Purpose, 4.69-1
Procedure, 4.69-1
4.70 CBC APERTURE CHECKS, 4.70-1
Purpose, 4.70-1
Procedure, 4.70-1
4.71 VCS OPTIMIZATION, 4.71-1
Purpose, 4.71-1
A. Preliminary Checks, 4.71-5
B. Pump Volume Checks, 4.71-5
C. VCS Flow Rate Adjustment, 4.71-5
D. RF Detector Preamp Card Adjustments, 4.71-6
E. DC and RF Verification, 4.71-6
F. Flow Cell Cleaning, 4.71-6
G. Laser and Flow-Cell Alignment, 4.71-6
H. LS Gain Adjustment, 4.71-6
I. LS Verification, 4.71-6
J. RMS Noise Check, 4.71-7
K. LATRON Verification, 4.71-7
L. VCS Verification, 4.71-7
PN 4277219B
4-xi
CONTENTS
4.72 INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS, 4.72-1

Purpose, 4.72-1
Procedure, 4.72-1
4.73 FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, 4.73-1
Purpose, 4.73-1
Procedure, 4.73-1
4.74 RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS, 4.74-1
Purpose, 4.74-1
RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment, 4.74-2
Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum
Tube, 4.74-3
C1/C20 Adjustment, 4.74-4
RF and DC Gain Adjustment, 4.74-5
4.75 VCS NOISE CHECKS, 4.75-1
Purpose, 4.75-1
DC Verification, 4.75-1
RF Verification, 4.75-2
LS Verification, 4.75-9
RMS Noise Check, 4.75-10
4.76 LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT, 4.76-1
Purpose, 4.76-1
Flow-Cell Z-Axis (Focus) Alignment, 4.76-2
Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Alignment, 4.76-5
Flow-Cell Y-Axis Final Alignment, 4.76-7
4.77 LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT, 4.77-1
Purpose, 4.77-1
Procedure, 4.77-1
4.78 LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 4.78-1
Purpose, 4.78-1
Procedure, 4.78-1
4-xii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.79 FLOW CELL CLEANING, 4.79-1

Purpose, 4.79-1
Procedure, 4.79-1
4.80 LENS BLOCK CLEANING, 4.80-1
Purpose, 4.80-1
Procedure, 4.80-1
4.81 SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS, 4.81-1
Purpose, 4.81-1
4.82 LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT, 4.82-1
Purpose, 4.82-1
Removal, 4.82-1
4.83 RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL, 4.83-1
Purpose, 4.83-1
Removal, 4.83-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
PN 4277219B
4.2-1
4.3-1
4.3-2
4.3-3
4.3-4
4.3-5
4.3-6
4.3-7
4.3-8
4.3-9
4.3-10
4.3-11
4.3-12
4.3-13
4.3-14
Accessing the Analyzer SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1

Accessing the Analyzer SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1
Electronic Test Displays, 4.3-3
Count Test Displays, 4.3-4
Diff Analog Pulses Test Display, 4.3-4
VCS LATRON Control Display, 4.3-4
Volume Display, 4.3-5
Conductivity Display, 4.3-5
Light Scatter Display, 4.3-5
Phase Adjust Display, 4.3-6
Light Scatter Drift Displays, 4.3-6
F55 Displays, 4.3-6
CBC + Diff Displays, 4.3-7
CBC Only Displays, 4.3-7
Diff Only Displays, 4.3-7
4.4-1
Diff Analog Pulses Test Display on the GENS System VCS Calibration
Screen, 4.4-1
4.6-1
4.6-2
Removing an Analyzer Circuit Card, 4.6-1

Removing the BD ADJ Card, 4.6-2
4-xiii
CONTENTS
4.6-3
Removing the Scope Module, 4.6-2
4.7-1
4.7-2
Removing the Bar-Code Decoder Card, 4.7-1

Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card
Cover, 4.7-3
4.9-1
4.9-2
Latex Voltage Window, 4.9-2

Voltage Matching Window, 4.9-3
4.12-1 Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-2

4.12-2 Removing the Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-3
4.12-3 Removing an Analyzer Fan, 4.12-4
4.13-1 Removing the Power Supply Cover, 4.13-1
4.13-2 Removing the Power Supply Left Panel, 4.13-2
4.14-1 Replacing the Compressor, 4.14-1
4.15-1 Removing the Dump Valve, Old Style Power Supply, 4.15-1
4.15-2 Removing the Dump Valve, New Style Power Supply, 4.15-2
4.16-1 Accessing the Air Water Separator, 4.16-2
4.16-2 Disconnecting the Air Water Separator, 4.16-3
4.17-1 Removing the Compressor Motor Controller Card, 4.17-1
4.18-1 Removing the System Power Controller Card, 4.18-2
4.19-1 Removing the System Power Controller Display, 4.19-2
4.20-1 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, New Style Power Supply, 4.20-1
4.20-2 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, Old Style Power Supply, 4.20-2
4.21-1 Removing the Bulk Power Filter Card, 4.21-1
4.22-1
4.22-2
4.22-3
4.22-4
Setting Up the Instrument for the CBC Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.22-2
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the CBC Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.22-4
4.22-5 Replacing the CBC Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.22-6
4.23-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diluent Dispenser Volume Check, 4.23-2
4.23-2 Reading a Meniscus, 4.23-3
4.23-3 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-3
4.23-4 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-4
4.23-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diluent Delivery, 4.23-5
4-xiv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.23-6 Replacing the Diluent Dispenser, 4.23-7

4.24-1
4.24-2
4.24-3
4.24-4
4.24-5
4.24-6
4.24-7
Setting Up the GENS System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
Reading the Meniscus, 4.24-3
Stain Pump Adjustments on the Retic Module, 4.24-4
Stain Pump Adjustments on the Random Access Module, 4.24-4
Setting Up the GENS System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-5
Setting Up the LH 750 System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-6
4.25-1 Setting Up the GENS System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
4.25-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
4.25-4 Pump Adjustments, 4.25-4
4.25-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Retic Clearing Solution
Delivery, 4.25-5
4.25-6 Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump, 4.25-6
4.26-1 Setting Up the Instrument, 4.26-2
4.26-3 Replacing the Cleaning Agent Pump, 4.26-3
4.27-1
4.27-2
4.27-3
4.27-4
Manual-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-2

Automatic-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-4
Setting Up for Troubleshooting Aspiration Pump, 4.27-5
Replacing the Aspiration Pump, 4.27-7
4.28-1
4.28-2
4.28-3
4.28-4
4.28-5
Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.28-2
Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Lytic Reagent (ELYSE), 4.28-3
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.28-7
4.28-6 Replacing the Diff Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.28-9
4.29-1
4.29-2
4.29-3
4.29-4
4.29-5
Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Preservative Volume Check, 4.29-2
Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Preservative (SLYSE), 4.29-3
Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Preservative
Delivery, 4.29-7
4.29-6 Replacing the Diff Preservative Pump, 4.29-9
4.30-1 Reagent Reservoir Components, Old Style, 4.30-1
4.30-2 Reagent Reservoir Components, New Style, 4.30-2
4.31-1 WBC Bath Tubing Disconnected for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing
Hookup, 4.31-2
PN 4277219B
4-xv
CONTENTS
4.31-2 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the GENS
System, 4.31-2
4.31-3 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the LH 750
System, 4.31-3
4.32-1 Replacing the Hgb Lamp, 4.32-1
4.34-1 Brightness Potentiometer Location on the GENS System Scope Module, 4.34-1
4.34-2 Contrast Potentiometer Location on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
4.35-1 Disconnecting Pneumatic Tubing from the Belt Advance Cylinder, 4.35-1
4.35-2 Tube Detector Assembly Allen Screw, 4.35-2
4.36-1 Belt Drive Assembly, Front View, Upside Down, 4.36-1
4.37-1 Removing the Under Left Stack Switch, 4.37-1
4.38-1 Removing the Under Right Stack Switch, 4.38-1
4.39-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch, 4.39-1
4.40-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch, 4.40-1
4.40-2 Removing the Lift Cylinder from the Cassette Transport Assembly
Channel, 4.40-2
4.40-3 Lift Up Switch Activator Setscrew, 4.40-4
4.41-1 Removing the Top Left or Top Right Safety Switch, 4.41-1
4.42-1 Adjusting the Flippers, 4.42-1
4.43-1 Left Pivot Pin and Retaining Setscrew, 4.43-1
4.44-1 Bed Position Sensor Locations, 4.44-1
4.44-2 Bed Position Flag/Sensor Adjustment Screws, 4.44-2
4.44-3 Bed Rock Cylinder Location, 4.44-3
4.45-1 Bed Rock Cylinder Location, 4.45-1
4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate, 4.45-2
4.47-1 Tube Detector Height Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.49-1 Bar-Code Test Screen with Typical Data, 4.49-1
4.51-1 Bar-Code Scanner Home Position Alignment, 4.51-2
4.51-2 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment with Stripper Plate, 4.51-3
4-xvi
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.51-3 Bar-Code Scanner Housing and Mounting Block, 4.51-4

4.51-5 BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block Installed, 4.51-6
4.51-6 Bar-Code Scanner Adjustment Point Locations, 4.51-6
4.51-7 Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
4.51-9 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment Components, 4.51-10
4.51-10Bar-Code Scanner and Mounting Block, 4.51-10
4.52-1 Bar-Code Scanner Card Pins and Test Points, 4.52-2
4.53-1 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Guide Rod Magnet, 4.53-1
4.53-2 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Mounting Bracket, 4.53-2
4.54-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Jumper and Pin Locations, 4.54-2
4.54-2 Comparing Cassette and Tube Label Waveforms, 4.54-5
4.55-1 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
4.55-3 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the
4.57-1 Removing the Needle Cap-Piercer Module, 4.57-1
4.58-2 Captive Screws Securing Probe-Wipe Module to BSV Module, 4.58-2
4.58-3 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Stationary Backwash
Cup, 4.58-3
4.58-4 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-4
4.58-5 Alignment of the Cleaning Truck Bracket in a Module with Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-5
4.59-1
1
4.60-1
4.60-2
4.60-3
Replacing the Hand-Detector Assembly, 4.59Accessing the BSV Insulator, Housing and Spring, 4.60-2
Installing the BSV Components, 4.60-2
Probe Position Sensor Orientation, 4.60-4
4.62-1 Removing the Retic Motor from the Retic Module, 4.62-1
4.62-2 Removing the Retic Motor from the Random Access Module, 4.62-3
4.63-1 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Retic Module, 4.63-1
4.63-2 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Random Access
Module, 4.63-2
4.64-1 Peltier Module, Rear and Front View, 4.64-1
4.65-1 Stain Heater Connector, 4.65-1
PN 4277219B
4-xvii
CONTENTS
4.66-1 Diff Preservative Pump Low Volume Adjustments, 4.66-2

4.66-2 Diff Preservative Pump High Volume Adjustments, 4.66-3
4.67-2 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Retic Module, 4.67-2
4.67-3 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Random Access Module, 4.67-2
4.68-1 Replacing the Diff Mixing Chamber, 4.68-1
4.69-1 Releasing the Ground Wire for the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-1
4.69-2 Removing the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-2
4.71-1 VCS Optimization Procedure Flow, 4.71-2
4.74-1 Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital
Backplane, 4.74-2
4.74-2 RF Detector Preamp Card Test Points and Adjustments, 4.74-3
4.75-1 Acceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-2 Unacceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-3 Acceptable Dynamic DC Noise, 4.75-2
4.75-4 Acceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-5 Unacceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-6 Acceptable Dynamic RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-7 RF 60 Hz, 4.75-5
4.75-8 RF 60 Hz with Noise Spikes, 4.75-5
4.75-9 Normal RF Random Baseline, 4.75-5
4.75-10RF Output with Bubble Trapped in Sheath 2, 4.75-6
4.75-11Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-12Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-13Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise 22 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-14Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise >100 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-15LATRON Control Sample with a Good RF Tube and Box, 4.75-7
4.75-16LATRON Control Sample with Bad RF Tube and Box, 4.75-8
4.75-17RF Output Running LATRON Control (LEAK at Flow Cell Fitting), 4.75-8
4.75-18LATRON Control Run with DC Gain Drop, 4.75-8
4.75-19Acceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-20Unacceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-21Acceptable Dynamic LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.76-1
4.76-2
4.76-3
4.76-4
4.76-5
4.76-6
Laser and Flow Cell Alignment Workflow, 4.76-2

Flow-Cell Z-Axis Alignment, 4.76-3
Scatter Sensor Laser Diffraction, 4.76-4
Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Adjustment, 4.76-5
Laser Reflected Light Beam with Special Shield Installed, 4.76-6
Laser Diffraction Pattern on Paper, 4.76-7
4.79-1 Wetting Applicator with Alcohol, 4.79-2

4.79-2 Wiping Front of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4-xviii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4.79-3 Wiping Rear of Flow Cell, 4.79-2

4.80-1 Removing the Lens Block, 4.80-1
4.82-1 Removing an Analyzer Door Gas Spring, 4.82-1
4.83-2 Captive Screws Securing Random Access Module, 4.83-2
TABLES
4.2-1
4.2-2
4.2-3
4.2-4
4.2-5
4.2-6
4.2-7
4.2-8
Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options, 4.2-2

Analyzer ELECTRONIC TESTS MENU Options, 4.2-4
Analyzer DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU Options, 4.2-4
Analyzer SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Options, 4.2-5
Analyzer DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
Analyzer MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
Analyzer DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-6
Analyzer DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU Options, 4.2-6
4.3-1
Analyzer Scope Modes, 4.3-3
4.6-1
Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions, 4.6-4
4.7-1
Diluter Cards Replacement Instructions, 4.7-4
4.30-1 Reagent Priming Functions and LEVEL Messages, 4.30-3

4.31-1 Conditions Affecting Lytic Reagent/Diluent Delivery Timing, 4.31-4
4.54-1 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label, 4.54-3
4.54-2 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label, 4.54-4
4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.71-3
4.75-1 RF Troubleshooting Table, 4.75-4
4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches, 4.81-1
PN 4277219B
4-xix
CONTENTS
4-xx
PN 4277219B
4SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES 4

4.1
POWER DOWN/POWER UP
Analytical Station Power Down/Power Up
Tools/Supplies Needed
B None
Purpose
Use this procedure before attempting any repairs or replacements in the Analytical Station.
electronic component while the power is ON, damage to the component may occur. To prevent damage to
circuit cards and other electronic components, always power down the Analytical Station completely before
removing or replacing the component.
completely before removing covers to access electronic components.
Following this Power Down procedure ensures all power is removed from the Analytical
Station, preventing damage to the components and personal injury from electric shock.
Power Down
1.
On the Diluter/numeric keypad, press POWER OFF.
2.
At the Power Supply:

a.
Turn off the MAIN POWER circuit breaker.
b.
Unplug the main ac power cable from the ac wall outlet.
Power Up
1.
2.

a.
b.
Turn on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker. Verify the AC LINE indicator on the
Power supply reads greater than 90 Vac.
On the Diluter/numeric keypad, press POWER ON.
Workstation Power Down/Power Up

Purpose
Use this procedure to turn off the Workstation when necessary and to remove power before
connecting or disconnecting any components to the Workstation.
electronic component while the power is ON, damage to the component may occur. To prevent damage to
circuit cards and other electronic components, always power down completely before removing or
replacing the component.
PN 4277219B
4.1-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the instrument is
attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down completely before removing
covers to access electronic components.
Following this Power Down procedure ensures all power is removed from Workstation.
B None
Power Down
1.
. The following appears:
2.
Select Shutdown. This closes the instrument application and the Windows NT
(GENS System) or Windows 2000 (LH 750 System) operating system to power off
the Workstation.
3.
Wait until the message on the screen indicates the Workstation is ready to be shut down.
4.
Press the POWER button on the Workstation.
5.
Unplug the Workstation from the ac wall outlet.
Power Up
4.1-2
1.
Plug the Workstation into the ac wall outlet.
2.
Press the POWER button on the Workstation.
PN 4277219B

ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS
4.2

Purpose
Use this procedure to perform any of the service routines available from the Analyzer SERVICE
MENU. These routines are described in the tables in this section. Refer to Figure A.10-1
(GENS System) or Figure A.10-2 (LH 750 System) for the menu tree of all the Analyzer
options, both customer and service.
B None
Procedure
1.
At the Analyzer, access the MAIN MENU.
2.
Press and hold the seventh button from the top of the CRT buttons (VII on the LH 750
System). This button is not identified by a screen prompt. See Figure 4.2-1.
3.
Press the top button (I) and release the seventh button (VII). The SERVICE MENU
appears. See Table 4.2-1 for an explanation of the options on the SERVICE MENU.
Figure 4.2-1 Accessing the Analyzer SERVICE MENU

2
M A IN M E N U
S E R V IC E M E N U
E L E C T R O N IC T E S T S
A N A L Y Z E R F U N C T IO N S
S Y S T E M
H IS T O G R A M
C O N F IG U R A T IO N
G E N
S T A T IS T IC S
L A T E X C A L IB R A T IO N
T E S T M O D E
D IA G N O S T IC R O U T IN E S
S S y s te m
T U R N
P N E U M A T IC S O F F
C Y C L E C O U N T E R : X X X X X X
S P E C IA L F U N C T IO N S
HOLD
D IL U T E R
D IA G N O S T IC S
S Y S T E M
M O D E : X X X
S Y S T E M
M A IN M E N U
S E R V IC E M E N U
E L E C T R O N IC T E S T S
A N A L Y Z E R F U N C T IO N S
S Y S T E M
II
C B C L A T E X C A L IB R A T IO N
III
H IS T O G R A M
III
IV
M O D E : X X X
S Y S T E M
R U N
V
V I
S T A T IS T IC S
II
L H 7 5 0 S y s te m
T U R N
R U N
R E T U R N
R U N
D IA G N O S T IC R O U T IN E S
HOLD
D IL U T E R
D IA G N O S T IC S
IV
V
V I
V II
D IF F C A L IB R A T IO N
V II
V III
R E T U R N
V III
6 4 9 8 2 0 4 B
4.
Press the buttons next to the relevant prompts until the required service routine appears.
5.
To exit the SERVICE MENU program, select SYSTEM RUN.

Note: Select RETURN to go back to the previous screen.
Verification
None.
PN 4277219B
4.2-1

Table 4.2-1 Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options

Options
Purposes
ELECTRONIC TESTS
Allows access to RAMP TEST 0, PRECISION TEST 1, PRECISION TEST 2,

PRECISION TEST 3, PRECISION TEST 4, and COUNT options. See Table 4.2-2.
HISTOGRAM STATISTICS
Provides count, mean, sigma (SD) and mode data for the WBC, RBC, and Plt
histograms of the last sample run.
LATEX CALIBRATION (GENS System

only)
GENS System in CBC only mode
On the GENS System, displays LATEX CALIBRATION screen, allowing access

to the following options needed to compute the correct aperture current
settings during latex calibration:
CHANGE VALUES
Allows entry of the red and white aperture current settings and the volume of
the latex particles.
AP CUR ON/OFF
Switches between AP CUR ON and AP CUR OFF. AP CUR ON turns on the

aperture current and displays the current value for the selected aperture. AP
CUR OFF turns off the aperture current.
APERTURE 1/2/3
Switches between APERTURE 1, APERTURE 2 and APERTURE 3, determining

which apertures data appears in the RED AP VOLTAGE, WHT AP VOLTAGE and
LATEX VOLUME fields.
ASPIRATE SAMPLE
Initiates the latex calibration cycle, aspirating latex particles through the
aspirator tip. When the cycle is finished, press COMPUTE to view the new
aperture current settings and latex volume.
LATEX CALIBRATION (GENS System

only)
GENS System in Diff and/or Retic
mode
On the GENS System, displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen, allowing access to

the following options needed to collect data for TTM alignment and latex
verification.
ASPIRATE
aspirator tip, and initiates a continuous flow of dilution from the mixing
chamber through the flow cell.
RECOUNT
Initiates a recount of latex particles. Can recount a maximum of three times.
VCS
Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a composite of V, C and S pulses.
V/C/S
Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a single set of pulses and switches
between the pulses displayed in this order: V, C, and S.
PHASE ADJ
Displays the phase adjustment between V and S.
LS
Displays the LS drift.
D/R/S
Switches the gain setting from diff to retic to gain setting. Letter flashing is
gain setting selected.
QUIT
If you pressed ASPIRATE, QUIT stops the flow of liquid through the flow cell,
rinses the mixing chamber to remove residual particles and stays at the DIFF
CALIBRATION screen.
If you did not press ASPIRATE, QUIT exits the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and
returns to the SERVICE MENU.
4.2-2
PN 4277219B

Table 4.2-1 Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options (Continued)

Options
Purposes
CBC CALIBRATION (LH 750 System

only)
On the LH 750 System, displays LATEX CALIBRATION screen, allowing access

to the following options needed to compute the correct aperture current
settings during latex calibration:
CHANGE VALUES
Allows entry of the red and white aperture current settings and the volume of
the latex particles.
AP CUR ON/OFF
Switches between AP CUR ON and AP CUR OFF. AP CUR ON turns on the

aperture current and displays the current value for the selected aperture. AP
CUR OFF turns off the aperture current.
APERTURE 1/2/3
Switches between APERTURE 1, APERTURE 2 and APERTURE 3, determining

which apertures data appears in the RED AP VOLTAGE, WHT AP VOLTAGE and
LATEX VOLUME fields.
DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES
Allows access to CRT DISPLAY TEST, RAM TEST, ROM TEST, ECHO TEST, and
SENSOR TEST options. See Table 4.2-3.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Allows access to RAM/ROM TEST, PLT ANALYSIS, PLT NOFIT ANALYSIS

(MODE), INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS, HGB VOLTAGE, and
CHANGE/DISPLAY CYCLE COUNT options. See Table 4.2-4.
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS
Allows access to DILUTER VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES and ELECTRICAL/

PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES options. See Table 4.2-5.
DIFF CALIBRATION (LH 750 System

only)
On the LH 750 System, displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen, allowing access to

the following options needed to collect data for TTM alignment and latex
verification.
ASPIRATE
aspirator tip, and initiates a continuous flow of dilution from the mixing
chamber through the flow cell.
RECOUNT
Initiates a recount of latex particles. Can recount a maximum of three times.
VCS
Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a composite of V, C and S pulses.
V/C/S
Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a single set of pulses and switches
between the pulses displayed in this order: V, C, and S.
PHASE ADJ
Displays the phase adjustment between V and S.
LS
Displays the LS drift.
D/R
Switches the aspiration and gain mode between diff and retic. Letter flashing is
mode selected.
QUIT
If you pressed ASPIRATE, QUIT stops the flow of liquid through the flow cell,
rinses the mixing chamber to remove residual particles and stays at the DIFF
CALIBRATION screen.
If you did not press ASPIRATE, QUIT exits the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and
returns to the SERVICE MENU.
PN 4277219B
4.2-3

Table 4.2-2 Analyzer ELECTRONIC TESTS MENU Options

Options
Purposes
RAMP TEST (LH 750 System only)
Routine startup test. Generates the same number of each different size pulse to
check the channelizing circuitrys ability to build a proper histogram.
RAMP TEST 0 (GENS System only)
Routine startup test. Generates the same number of each different size pulse to
check the channelizing circuitrys ability to build a proper histogram.
PRECISION TEST (LH 750 System only) Generates two sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to produce
two peaks of the same height. This multichannel check for different sized
pulses generated at the same time is used primarily for RDW.
PRECISION TEST 1 (GENS System
only)
Generates a set of precision pulses of identical height to check the RBC and
WBC counters.
In addition, uses a predetermined set of histograms (the WBC histogram has
two subpopulations of cells) to check the softwares ability to derive and
compute parameter results.

only)
Generates two sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to produce

two peaks of the same height. This multichannel check for different sized
pulses generated at the same time is used primarily for RDW.

only)
Routine startup test. Generates a set of precision pulses of identical height to

check the RBC and WBC counters.
In addition, uses a predetermined set of histograms (the WBC histogram has
three subpopulations of cells) to check the softwares ability to derive and
compute parameter results.

only)
Generates six sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to produce six
peaks of the same height.
COUNT
Performs a count on the contents of the RBC and WBC baths.

Table 4.2-3 Analyzer DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU Options
Options
Purposes
CRT DISPLAY TEST
Checks display ability of Analyzer CRT screen. The screen fills with a series of
numbers and letters.
RAM TEST
Tests RAM memory addresses for pass-fail condition. Press RESET to exit.
ROM TEST
Checks ROM addresses for faults.
ECHO TEST
Initiates echo test. Requires installation of cable adapter.
SENSOR TEST
Displays the current state of the Diluter sensors and switches and can be used
to determine if they are working correctly. See Heading 4.81 for Diluter sensor
and switch functions, and System messages.
MORE DIAGNOSTICS
Allows access to RED AND WHITE COUNTERS, DIFF PROCESSOR

DIAGNOSTICS, PLATELET NO FIT (MEAN), DIAGNOSTICS DUMP, CRT KEY
TEST and CRT ALIGNMENT TEST. See Table 4.2-6.
4.2-4
PN 4277219B

Table 4.2-4 Analyzer SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Options

Options
Purposes
RAM/ROM TEST
Initiates Analyzer memory test. Turns off pneumatics at completion of test.
PLT FIT ANALYSIS
Initiates a platelet fit analysis on the last sample run.
PLT NOFIT ANALYSIS (MODE)
Initiates a platelet no fit analysis on the last sample run.
INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS
ATTENTION: No warning screen is displayed. DO NOT select this option unless

you are sure you want to reset the calibration factors.
Resets the following:
r Calibration factors (Avg, AP2 and AP3 and Manual mode) to 1.000
r Hgb timer drain to 15
r RBC voltages to 149.9 and WBC voltages to 119.9.
HGB VOLTAGE
Displays real-time Hgb lamp voltage.
CHANGE/DISPLAY CYCLE COUNT
Allows changing of the cycle counter value.
Table 4.2-5 Analyzer DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options

Options
Purposes
DILUTER VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES
Displays real-time values for Diluter and Diluter left voltages, diff and Diluter
ambient temperatures. Displays real-time temperatures and their ranges for diff
heater, Peltier module and stain heater.
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES
Displays real-time values for 60 psi, 30 psi, 5 psi, high and low vacuum,
voltages for ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 and 2 cards, and ac line voltage.
Turns on zap voltage to check zap voltage.
Table 4.2-6 Analyzer MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options

Options
Purposes
RED AND WHITE COUNTERS
Displays red and white raw counts for each aperture from last sample run. On
the LH 750 System, it also displays the wait count.
DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS
Allows access to DIFF PROCESSOR RAM TEST, DIFF TIMER TEST, DIFF
PROCESSOR DUART TEST, and DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST. See Table 4.2-7.
PLATELET NO FIT (MEAN)
Performs a platelet no fit (mean) on last sample run.
DIAGNOSTICS DUMP
Allows access to DUMP APERTURES, I/O BUFFER, MANUAL HGB TIMER

DRAIN, PC COMMUNICATION TEST and CLENZ REMOVAL TIME (LH 750
System only) options. See Table 4.2-8.
CRT KEY TEST
Allows a check of the CRT buttons. Screen displays PRESSED next to button
pressed. To exit this test, press bottom button twice.
CRT ALIGNMENT TEST
Allows a check of the CRT alignment. Shows dimensional data and button
positions.
Note: To align the CRT, you must remove the Scope module from the Analyzer.
See Heading 4.6.
PN 4277219B
4.2-5

Table 4.2-7 Analyzer DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options

Options
Purposes
DIFF PROCESSOR RAM TEST
Initiates self-test of DIFF PROCESSOR card on-board RAM.
DIFF TIMER TEST
Initiates self-test of DIFF PROCESSOR card timing circuit.
DIFF PROCESSOR DUART TEST
Initiates self-test of DIFF PROCESSOR card output ports.
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST
Generates a series of pulses to test the DIFF PROCESSOR and ANALOG cards
for proper histogram development. The data is displayed on the Workstations
Service Diff Latex Calibration screen.
Table 4.2-8 Analyzer DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU Options

Options
Purposes
DUMP APERTURES
Displays aperture 1, aperture 2, aperture 3 and average values for the WBC,
RBC, Hgb, Hct, MCV, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Plt, Pct, MPV, and PDW parameters
from the last sample run.
I/O BUFFER
Displays the latest messages exchanged between the AMC and the Diluter,
DIFF PROCESSOR card, dual port RAM and the Workstation.
MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX
Displays the timer value for draining the Hgb cuvette from 2 to 55 minutes.
Default is 15. New value can be entered at keypad.
PC COMMUNICATION TEST
Does a continuous transmission to the Workstation until the RESET button is

pressed.
CLENZ REMOVAL TIME (hrs) XX
Allows service to set the time (in hours) the Analytical Station will sit after a
Shutdown cycle before it automatically cycles diluent to flush out the cleaning
agent. The limits are 30 minutes to 24 hours. The default setting is 00 which
represents 30 minutes. Any setting over 24 is interpreted as 24 hours.
4.2-6
PN 4277219B

ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS
4.3

Purpose
Use this procedure to access the Analyzer SCOPE MENU and change the display speed of a
sample for troubleshooting purposes. Table 4.3-1 lists the Analyzer scope modes and the
display speeds available for each mode. The figures referenced in Table 4.3-1 are an artists
rendition of how the displays should appear. Refer to Figure A.10-1 (GENS System) or
Figure A.10-2 (LH 750 System) for the menu tree of all Analyzer options.
ATTENTION: At the time of this publication, not all of these modes have been tested on the
LH 750 System.
B None
Procedure
ATTENTION: If the power is interrupted or if the system is reset, all displays return to their
normal or slow speeds.

1.
At the Analyzer, access the MAIN MENU.
2.
Press and hold the sixth button from the top of the CRT buttons (VI on the LH 750
System). This button is not identified by a prompt. See Figure 4.3-1.
3.
Press the top button (I) and release the sixth button (VI). The SCOPE MENU appears.
Figure 4.3-1 Accessing the Analyzer SCOPE MENU
M A IN
M E N U
A N A L Y Z E R
S Y S T E M
SSCOPE
C O P E MENU
M E N U
E L E C T R O N I C CT E B S C T / D S I F F
F U N C T IO N S
H IS T O G R A M
G E N
S S y s te m
T U R N
S T A T C I B S C T I CO S N L Y
L A T E X C A L I B D R IA F T F I O O N N L Y
T E S T M O D E
D I A GF 5 N 5 O T S E T S I C T R( F O A U S T T I / N S E L SO W )
HOLD
E L E C ./P N E U . S U P P IE S
S Y S S T Y E S M T E R M U RN U N
M O D E : X X X
S Y S T E M
M A IN
M E N U
A N A L Y Z E R
S Y S T E M
R E TR U E R T UN R N
R U N
F U N C T IO N S
II
S C O P E M E N U
E L E C T R O N I C CT E B S C T / D S I F F
H IS T O G R A M
III
T U R N
M O D E : X X X
S Y S T E M
R U N
IV
L A T E X C A L I B D R IA F T F I O O N N L Y
D I A GF 5 N 5 O T S E T S I C T R( F O A U S T T I / N S E L SO W )
HOLD
S T A T C I B S C T I CO S N L Y
II
III
IV
V I
E L E C ./P N E U . S U P P IE S
V I
V II
S Y S S T Y E S M T E R M U RN U N
V II
V III
R E TR U E R T U N R N
V III
6 4 9 8 2 0 5 B
PN 4277219B
4.3-1

4.
To change the speed for a blood sample:

a.
Press the button next to the prompt for the desired mode (CBC/DIFF, CBC ONLY or
DIFF ONLY). N (normal) and F (fast) appear in the upper right-hand corner of the
screen; the selected speed is flashing.
b.
Press the button next to the prompt for the desired speed.
Note: These are real-time displays and can be used as troubleshooting aids.
5.
c.
Select RETURN on the Analyzer repeatedly until SYSTEM RUN appears.
d.
Cycle a sample in the Automatic or Manual mode and watch the display screen.
During COUNT the sample is displayed in the selected speed.
To change the speed for a LATRON sample cycled in the F55 mode:
a.
On the SCOPE MENU, the selected speed for F55 (fast or slow) is flashing. Press
the button next to the F55 (FAST/SLOW) prompt to change the speed.
Note: The button next to the prompt switches between fast and slow.
6.
b.
Select RETURN on the Analyzer repeatedly until SYSTEM RUN appears.
c.
Select F55 at the Diluter/numeric keypad.
d.
Cycle a sample of LATRON control when prompted and watch the display screen.
During COUNT the sample is displayed in the selected speed.
To change the speed for an electronic test:

a.
On the SCOPE MENU, the selected speed for the electronic tests (fast or slow) is
flashing. Press the button next to the F55 (FAST/SLOW) prompt to change the
speed.
Note: The button next to the prompt switches between fast and slow.
7.
b.
Select RETURN on the Analyzer repeatedly until the MAIN MENU appears.
c.
Access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2) and select ELECTRONIC TESTS.
d.
Initiate the desired electronic test; it is displayed in the selected speed.
When you are finished using this option, set the speed back to slow/normal, then cycle a
sample to verify the instrument works correctly.
Verification
None.
4.3-2
PN 4277219B

Table 4.3-1 Analyzer Scope Modes

Display Speed
(- means it is not displayed in this speed)
Sample Type
Scope Mode
Fast
Slow or Normal
Electronic Pulses
Ramp Test 0
Precision Test 1
Precision Test 2
Precision Test 3
Count Test
Figure 4.3-3
Diff Analog Pulses Test
Figure 4.3-4
V,C, S
Figure 4.3-5
Figure 4.3-6
Figure 4.3-7
Figure 4.3-8
Phase Adj.
Figure 4.3-9
LS Drift
Figure 4.3-10
F55
Figure 4.3-11
CBC + Diff
Figure 4.3-12
CBC Only
Figure 4.3-13
Diff Only
Figure 4.3-14
LATRON
Blood
Example
Figure 4.3-2
Figure 4.3-2 Electronic Test Displays
PN 4277219B
4.3-3

Figure 4.3-3 Count Test Displays
Figure 4.3-4 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display
Figure 4.3-5 VCS LATRON Control Display
4.3-4
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.3-6 Volume Display
Figure 4.3-7 Conductivity Display
Figure 4.3-8 Light Scatter Display
PN 4277219B
4.3-5

Figure 4.3-9 Phase Adjust Display
Figure 4.3-10 Light Scatter Drift Displays
Figure 4.3-11 F55 Displays
4.3-6
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.3-12 CBC + Diff Displays
Figure 4.3-13 CBC Only Displays
Figure 4.3-14 Diff Only Displays
PN 4277219B
4.3-7

4.3-8
PN 4277219B

4.4

Use this procedure to test the ANALOG and DIFF PROCESSOR cards.
B RF Preamp Dummy Load, PN 6858098
Procedure
1.
Disconnect the RF coaxial cable from the RF Detector Preamp and install the RF Preamp
Dummy Load.
2.
Reset the Analytical Station.
3.
4.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2) and select DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES tt MORE DIAGNOSTICS tt DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS tt DIFF
ANALOG PULSES TEST.
5.
Check the results and verify the mean and mode channels are within the specifications in
Table A.1-9.
tt
See Figure 4.4-1 for an example of the display on the GENS System Workstation. With
the exception of the icons displayed, the Diff Analog Pulses Test display on the LH 750
System Workstation is the same.
Note: If the results for V, C, and S fail to meet the specifications, the fault is either the
DIFF PROCESSOR or the ANALOG card.
Figure 4.4-1 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display on the GENS System VCS Calibration Screen
PN 4277219B
6.
Disconnect the RF Preamp Dummy Load cable and reinstall the RF coaxial cable.
7.
4.4-1

Verification
None.
4.4-2
PN 4277219B

AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS
4.5

Purpose
The instrument uses two audible alarms, one for the CRT buttons (Analyzer keypad) and one
for the Diluter/numeric keypad, to alert the operator as follows:
r
The CRT buttons alarm produces a short alarm for each valid button (key) entry
The Diluter/numeric keypad alarm produces three sounds t
A short alarm for each valid key entry and for the completion of a command
A long alarm for each invalid key entry
A continuous pulsating alarm for conditions that require the operators attention,
such as level sense errors.
Use these procedures to check the functioning of these alarms.

Note: The alarms are menu controlled and can be disabled.
B None
Procedure
1.
From the MAIN MENU select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt ALARM SET UP and
ensure the alarms are enabled.
2.
Select SYSTEM RUN.
3.
Press DRAIN on the Diluter/numeric keypad and listen for a short tone when the button is
pressed and another short tone when the bath has finished draining.
4.
Press RINSE to refill the baths.
5.
Press F 0 0 on the Diluter/numeric keypad, then press F again and listen for a long tone
alarm.
6.
Press CE, then press STOP until system returns to READY.
Verification
None.
PN 4277219B
4.5-1

4.5-2
PN 4277219B

ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.6

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace any circuit card or the Scope Module in the Analyzer. Special
instructions and the verification procedures are listed in Table 4.6-1.
Procedure
WARNING Contacting exposed electronic components while the Analytical Station is attached to power can
cause personal injury from electric shock. Before removing a circuit card or the Scope Module from the
Analyzer, turn off the Analytical Station and disconnect the ac power cable.
1.
Power down the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
2.
Open the front door of the Analyzer.
3.
To remove any circuit card except the BD ADJ card on the LH 750 System:
a.
Unfasten the thumbscrews on the top and bottom edge of the card. See Figure 4.6-1.
b.
Extend the white tabs to push the card out of the connector.
c.
Pull the card out.
Figure 4.6-1 Removing an Analyzer Circuit Card
J27
J26
J24
A. Unfasten thumbscrews
PN 4277219B
B. Extend tabs
J19
C. Remove card
7253314A
4.6-1

4.
To remove the BD ADJ card:

a.
Remove the left Analytical Station cover and open the left Analyzer door.
b.
Disconnect the Diluter 2 card to BD ADJ card cable from J1 on the BD ADJ card. See
Figure 4.6-2.
c.
Remove the Analyzer to preamp cable from its cable clamp.
d.
Unfasten the thumbscrews on the top and bottom edge of the BD ADJ card and
remove the card.
Figure 4.6-2 Removing the BD ADJ Card

*S Y S T E M
B D A D J
c a rd
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 : 3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
B L O O D
T E S T M O D E
D E T E C T : O N
M A IN
M E N U
VI
VII
VIII
D is c o n n e c t
c a b le
7 2 1 9 0 3 9 B
5.
R e m o v e
c a b le
3
U n fa s te n
th u m b s c re w s
To remove the Scope Module:

a.
Unfasten the three thumbscrews securing the Scope Module to the Analyzer. See
Figure 4.6-3.
b.
Pull the Scope Module out.
Figure 4.6-3 Removing the Scope Module

Loosen
screws
SCOPE
MODULE
7253141A
4.6-2
PN 4277219B

6.
Ensure the revision level of the replacement component is correct and, where applicable,
the software level is correct.
ATTENTION: The AMC is sent with the battery disabled. Ensure the jumpers are configured to
enable the battery before installing the card.

7.
Ensure any jumpers or switches on the replacement component are set correctly. See the
appropriate circuit card under Heading A.2, ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY
COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.
8.
To install any replacement card except the BD ADJ card:

a.
Extend the white tabs.
CAUTION Installing the card into the wrong slot or misaligning the card with the connectors can damage
the card or the instrument. Ensure the card is installed in the correct slot and is aligned with the connectors.
9.
b.
Align the card edges with the tracks and push the card into the Analyzer. Refer to
Figure 2.3-1 for the correct location of the card.
c.
Press the white tabs down to fully seat the card in the connector.
d.
Fasten the thumbscrews.
To install the BD ADJ card.

a.
Position the card in the Analyzer as shown in Figure 4.6-2 and fasten the
thumbscrews.
b.
Install the Analyzer to preamp cable in the cable clamp.
c.
Connect the Diluter 2 card to BD ADJ card cable to J1 on the BD ADJ card. See
Figure 4.6-2.
d.
Close the left Analyzer door and reinstall the left Analytical Station cover.
10. To install the replacement Scope Module:

a.
Align the Scope Module with its tracks and push the Scope Module into the
Analyzer, using the white tabs.
b.
Fasten the thumbscrews.
11. Close the front Analyzer door.

12. Power up the Analytical Station.
13. Ensure no error messages are displayed and that the system goes to READY.
14. Go to Table 4.6-1 and follow the special instructions for the component replaced.
PN 4277219B
4.6-3

Table 4.6-1 Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions
Component Replaced
Special Instructions*
AMC
1. From the SERVICE MENU, select SPECIAL FUNCTIONS tt INITIALIZE

CALIBRATION FACTORS to initialize the calibration factors.
2. Transfer all Automatic mode calibration factors from the Workstation.
3. Manually enter the manual mode calibration factors and Preamp voltages.
4. Select the correct Analyzer menu settings.
r On a GENS System, do the Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings procedure
under Heading 3.7, CHECKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION.
r On an LH 750 System, do the Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings
procedure under Heading 3.16, CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM
ANALYTICAL STATION.
(VCS) ANALOG card
Do the Diff and Retic Verification, Heading 5.6.
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY1 card
1. Ensure the LED on the front of the card is green.

2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES and ensure the voltages are within the
limits specified in Table A.1-25.
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card
1. Ensure the LED on the front of the card is green.

2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES and ensure the voltages are within the
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card

(GENS System
Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:

1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
2. Heading 4.9, CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE.
3. Heading 4.10, CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE.
BD ADJ card
(LH 750 System)
Adjust the bubble/blood detectors. See Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors

on the Random Access Module under Heading 4.55, BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.
DIFF PROCESSOR card
Do the Diff and Retic Verification, Heading 5.6.
DILUTER CPU card

(LH 750 System)
Cycle several samples to ensure no errors are generated.

(GENS System)

1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP card

(GENS System)

*Ensure any jumpers and/or switches are set as indicated for the card under Heading A.2 before installing the
card and performing these actions.
4.6-4
PN 4277219B

Table 4.6-1 Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions (Continued)
Component Replaced
Special Instructions*

(GENS System)


(LH 750 System)

R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer

card
(LH 750 System

Scope Module
Verify displays are clear and legible.
*Ensure any jumpers and/or switches are set as indicated for the card under Heading A.2 before installing the
card and performing these actions.
PN 4277219B
4.6-5

4.6-6
PN 4277219B

DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT
4.7

Purpose
Use these procedures to replace any circuit card in the Diluter except the Reservoir Interface
card and the Keyboard and Display Interface card. Special instructions and the verification
procedures are listed in Table 4.7-1.
Replacement of the Reservoir Interface card is covered under Heading 4.30. The Keyboard
and Display Interface card is only replaced as part of the Diluter LCD Display assembly.
Bar-Code Decoder Card Replacement

B Phillips-head screwdriver, medium
B 5/16-in. hex nut driver
Removal
cause personal injury from electric shock. Before removing a circuit card from the Diluter, turn off the
Analytical Station and disconnect the ac power cable.
1.
2.
Open the right rear door of the Diluter. See Figure 4.7-1.
Figure 4.7-1 Removing the Bar-Code Decoder Card

P1
CABLE
P2
GROUND
STRAP
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD COVER
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD COVER
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD
P1
Inside view
7253251A
PN 4277219B
4.7-1

ATTENTION: Retain all hardware for use when installing the replacement card.
3.
Remove the hardware securing the cards ground strap.
4.
Disconnect cable P2.
5.
Loosen the two screws securing the cards protective cover and remove the cover.
6.
Turn the cover over and disconnect cable P1.
7.
Remove the hardware securing the Bar-Code Decoder card to the cover and retain the
hardware.
Installation
1.
Secure the Bar-Code Decoder card to its cover.
2.
Connect the disconnected cables to the replacement card. Refer to Figure A.3-1 for the
correct connector locations.
3.
Attach the cover to the right rear door of the Diluter.
4.
Reinstall the ground strap.
5.
Power up the instrument.
6.
Ensure no error messages are displayed and that the system goes to READY.
7.
Go to Table 4.7-1 and follow the special instructions for the Bar-Code Decoder card.
Six-Channel Preamp Card Relocation or Replacement (LH 750 System)

B Screwdriver (for lowering the Six-Channel Preamp card)
B Phillips-head screwdriver, medium
Relocation or Removal
1.
Open both rear doors of the Diluter. See Figure 4.7-2.
2.
Disconnect the Analyzer to Preamp cable and the six coaxial cables.
3.
To lower the Six-Channel Preamp card to access the apertures, unfasten the top two
captive screws and swing the card assembly down. See Figure 4.7-2 A.
4.
To remove the Six-Channel Preamp card a.
Remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the Six-Channel Preamp card cover
and remove the cover. See Figure 4.7-2 B.
Note: The top left screw also secures the test connector cover plate.
b.
4.7-2
Remove the six standoffs securing the Six-Channel Preamp card and remove the
card.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.7-2 Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card Cover
1 Unfasten
1 Remove
7219015B
A. Lowering the Assembly
B. Removing the Card Cover
Installation
1.
Position the Six-Channel Preamp card in its assembly frame and secure it with the six
standoffs.
2.
Reinstall the Six-Channel Preamp card cover and the test connector cover plate.
3.
Connect the Analyzer to Preamp cable and the six coaxial cables to the card. Refer to
Figure A.3-20 for the correct connector locations.
4.
Go to Table 4.7-1 and follow the special instructions for the Six-Channel Preamp card.
Diluter Card Replacements (except Bar-Code Decoder, Six-Channel Preamp, and Reservoir
Interface Cards)
Removal
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
Open the appropriate Diluter door to access the card. The Diluter card location
illustrations are referenced in Table 4.7-1.
4.7-3

3.
Remove the cards protective cover.
4.
Disconnect all cables connected to the card.
5.
Remove the hardware securing the card.
6.
Ensure the revision level of the replacement card is correct and, where applicable, the
software level.
7.
Ensure any jumpers or switches on the replacement card are set correctly. See the
appropriate circuit card under Heading A.3, DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY
COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.
Installation
1.
Secure the card to the appropriate door/panel with the retained hardware.
2.
Connect the disconnected cables to the replacement card. See the appropriate circuit
card under Heading A.3, DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT
DESCRIPTIONS, for the correct connector locations.
3.
4.
Ensure no error messages are displayed and that the system goes to READY.
5.
Go to Table 4.7-1 and follow the special instructions for the card replaced.
6.
Reinstall the cover.

R
Table 4.7-1 Diluter Cards Replacement Instructions

Figure Reference
Card Replaced
GENS LH 750
System System Special Instructions
Bar-Code Decoder
2.4-6
2.4-14
Do Heading 4.49, BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST.
Diff Power Supply
2.4-4
2.4-12
From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/

TEMPERATURES and ensure the voltages are within the limits specified in
Table A.1-29.
Diluter 1
2.4-4
2.4-12
1. Verify all LEDs on the card are working correctly. See Table A.3-4.
2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/
TEMPERATURES and ensure the Diluter 1 voltages are within the limits
specified in Table A.1-29.
Diluter 2
2.4-5
2.4-13
1. Ensure all LEDs on the card are working correctly. See Table A.3-6.
TEMPERATURES and ensure the Diluter Left voltages are within the
3. Do the Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module
procedure under Heading 4.55, BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.
Diluter 3
4.7-4
2.4-5
2.4-13
Ensure the SW SCAN LED is flashing.
PN 4277219B

Table 4.7-1 Diluter Cards Replacement Instructions

Figure Reference
Card Replaced
GENS LH 750
System System Special Instructions
Diluter 4
2.4-7
2.4-15
1. Ensure the SW SCAN LED is flashing.

TEMPERATURES and verify the heater values are within the limits
displayed and the voltages are within the limits specified in Table A.1-29.
3. Do Heading 4.65, HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
Diluter Cable Adapter
2.4-5
2.4-13
Diluter/Solenoid/
2.4-5
Optics Power Supply
2.4-13
1. Ensure all LEDs on the card are working correctly.
Light Scatter Preamp

Module
2.4-10
2.4-3

TEMPERATURES and ensure the Diluter Left voltages are within the
1. Do Heading 4.77, LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT.
2. Do the LS Verification and RMS Noise Check under Heading 4.75, VCS
NOISE CHECKS.
3. Do Heading 4.78, LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE.
PVT
2.4-4
2.4-12
From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt ELECTRICAL/

PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES and VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES and verify the
pressures are within the limits specified in Table A.1-13 and the temperature
is within the limits displayed.
RF Detector Preamp
2.4-3
2.4-10
1. Do Heading 4.74, RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS.

2. Do the DC Verification, RF Verification, and RMS Noise Check under
Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS
3. Do Heading 4.78, LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE.
RS/Opto Intfc
2.4-4
2.4-12
Sensor Distribution
2.4-4
2.4-12
Cycle several samples in the Automatic and Manual modes and verify no
errors are generated.
Six-Channel Preamp
(LH 750 System)
N/A
2.4-11

PN 4277219B
4.7-5

4.7-6
PN 4277219B

CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
4.8

Purpose
ATTENTION: Although the Analytical Station is relatively insensitive to minor room
temperature changes, calibration should be performed when the room temperature is stable
and within the average temperature range, and should be verified whenever the room
temperature changes by more than 5C (10F)
The CBC Calibration procedure comprises three procedures:
r
Preliminary Procedures
Latex Voltage Calibration
Flow-Rate Calibration.
Do these preliminary procedures before doing any of the other calibration procedures to
ensure the instrument is clean and operating correctly.
See Heading 2.25 for an overview of the complete CBC calibration procedure.
IMPORTANT An adjustment in the data flow affects the data from the adjustment point to the final output.
To ensure accurate results:
r Always do the calibration procedures in the order presented. Each procedure is written assuming that
the settings established in the previous procedures are correct.
r If you make an adjustment, do all subsequent calibration procedures.
B See each procedure listed below to determine what is needed.
Procedures
PN 4277219B
1.
Bleach the apertures and internal electrodes. For instructions see the Special Procedures
and Troubleshooting Guide or the Online Help System.
2.
Ensure the 5 psi, 30 psi, and 60 psi pressures and the 6 in. Hg vacuum are set to the
nominal values specified in Table A.1-13, Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances.
3.
Do a Startup cycle and verify the results are acceptable.
4.
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure in the Automatic, CBC ONLY test mode,
as directed under Heading 5.5, and verify the results are acceptable.
4.8-1

4.8-2
PN 4277219B

CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE
4.9

Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the aperture voltages for each aperture to compensate for any
differences in the dimensions of the apertures affecting volume measurements. Do this
procedure after doing any procedure that affects the RBC or WBC aperture voltages, including
replacement of the following:
GENS System
LH 750 System
Aperture block
Aperture block
Aperture module
Aperture module
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP card
Six-Channel Preamp card
API/SIGNAL GENERATOR card
R/W/P SC/A card
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card.
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card.
See Heading 2.25 for an overview of the CBC calibration procedures.
CAUTION Deteriorated latex particles can clog the apertures. Latex particles deteriorate when exposed to
direct sunlight or to temperatures above 45C (113F). DO NOT use latex particles that have been exposed
to these conditions.
IMPORTANT Making adjustments with insufficient data could produce erroneous results. The particle
concentration of LATRON control is low. DO NOT use LATRON control for this procedure.
B Latex particles, PN 6857371

B 5-mL tube of normal whole blood, preferably 24-48 hours old, 5C or 5C-ES cell control
or S-CAL calibrator
Procedure
1.
Do the CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES as directed under

Heading 4.8.
2.
Select the CBC only test mode.
3.
On the GENS System, select CBC ONLY at the Analyzer.
On the LH 750 System, select C at the Workstation.
If you replaced the AMC or if the RAM memory is lost, initialize the calibration factors:
Note: INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS resets the average, individual aperture, and
Manual-mode calibration factors to 1.000; the preamp voltages to 149.9 and 119.9; and
the Hgb Drain Timer to 15.
4.
PN 4277219B
a.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (see Heading 4.2) and select SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS tt INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS.
b.
Cycle a sample to transfer the initialized values to the Workstation.
tt
.
4.9-1

5.
From the Select Calibration Test box, select Latex Voltage. See Figure 4.9-1.
6.
Delete any data in the table.
Figure 4.9-1 Latex Voltage Window
7253440E
7.
Verify the latex assay value is correct for the latex particles to be cycled.
8.
From the Processing Control box at the Command Center, select CBC Calibration.
9.
Gently mix the latex particles until completely mixed, about 3 minutes.
10. Clean the outside of the aspirator tip with distilled water and a lint-free tissue to prevent
contamination of the latex particles and dry the aspirator tip.
11. Cycle the latex particles in the Manual mode three times:
a.
Enter a 3-digit ID number at the Diluter/numeric keypad.
b.
Hold the latex particles under the aspirator tip to initiate the cycle.
c.
Repeat this step for a total of three cycles.
12. Review the data on the screen for any results outside of the limits.
Note: The limits are listed in Tables A.1-3 and A.1-4 and on the CBC Calibration Setup
window. (Select
r
r
r
4.9-2
tt
to access the CBC Calibration Setup window.)
If the values are within limits, go to step 15.

If the new voltages or the RBC or WBC counts are outside the limits, locate and
correct the problem. Go to step 13.
If only the voltage differences between apertures or the RMV or WMV results are
outside of the limits, adjust the voltage. Go to step 14.
PN 4277219B

13. If the new voltages or the RBC or WBC counts are outside the limits:
a.
Locate and correct the problem. Some problem sources to consider are r
r
r
r
The apertures need bleaching and/or rinsing.

The latex particles are contaminated.
An aperture partially blocked, dirty or defective.
A preamp channel is noisy.
b.
Cycle a whole blood sample and verify there is no instrument problem.
c.
Go back to step 6.
14. If the voltage difference between apertures or the RMV or WMV results are outside the
limits:
a.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (see Heading 4.2) and select LATEX
CALIBRATION (GENS System) or CBC LATEX CALIBRATION (LH 750 System).
b.
Enter the new voltages for each aperture.
c.
Repeat from step 6.
15. Set up the instrument to verify the voltage settings:

a.
Select
to delete the data in the table.
b.
From the Select Calibration Test box, select Voltage Matching. See Figure 4.9-2.
c.
At the Analyzer, set the number of aspirations/tube to 5.
Figure 4.9-2 Voltage Matching Window
7253441E
PN 4277219B
4.9-3

16. Cycle a tube of well-mixed latex particles, blood, control, or calibrator five times.
17. After the cycles are completed, check the results for any values outside of the limits.
Note: The limits are listed in Tables A.1-3 and A.1-4 and on the CBC Calibration Setup
window. (Select
to access the CBC Calibration window.)
tt
If the values are within limits, no changes are needed. Go to step 21.
If the %CV values or the voltage values are not within limits, recheck the values. Go
to step 18.
If only the differences between apertures are outside the limits, adjust the voltages.
Go to step 19.
18. If the %CV values or the voltage values are not within limits, recheck the results:
a.
Select
b.
Verify there is not a problem with:
c.
to clear data from the table.
A partially blocked, dirty or defective aperture
A noisy preamp channel
An abnormal blood specimen.
After correcting the problem, repeat from step 16.
19. If only the differences between apertures are outside the limits, fine-tune the adjustment
to the new preamp voltages:
a.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (see Heading 4.2) and select LATEX
CALIBRATION (GENS System) or CBC LATEX CALIBRATION (LH 750 System).
b.
Enter the new voltages for each aperture.
20. Cycle another specimen and verify the values are within specifications.
21. If you made changes while performing the Latex Voltage test, or performed a service
procedure that can affect flow rate, you need to do the CBC Calibration - Flow Rate
procedure:
4.9-4
a.
From the Select Calibration Test box, select Flow-Rate test.
b.
If you used a whole-blood specimen without reference values or latex particles to

verify the voltage settings, go directly to Heading 4.10, CBC CALIBRATION FLOW RATE.
c.
If you used an assayed blood material, such as 5C or 5C-ES cell control, S-CAL
calibrator, or whole blood that is referenced to another instrument, to verify the
voltage settings:
1)
Select
2)
Select the Flow Rate Test Assays tab.
3)
On the Flow Rate Test Assays window, enter the assay or reference values for the
material used.
4)
Go to Heading 4.10, CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, and begin at step 6.
tt
PN 4277219B

CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE
4.10

Purpose
Use this procedure to establish calibration factors to compensate for any differences in the
dimensions that would affect the count measurements, and to make the initial adjustment of
the average calibration factors to ensure the accuracy of the final results. Depending on the
current status of the instruments calibration, this procedure may need to be repeated several
times.
The laboratory is responsible for the final adjustments of the average calibration factors using
S-CAL calibrator or a whole blood calibration procedure.
Do this procedure if you made any changes while doing the CBC Calibration - Latex Voltage
procedure and whenever you do any procedures that affects the WBC, RBC or Plt flow rates,
or the CBC parameter dilutions. This includes replacement of the following:
r
Sweep-flow tank
Aspiration pump
BSV
See Heading 2.25 for an overview of the complete calibration procedure.
B Normal whole blood, enough to run two separate sets of 10
IMPORTANT The Flow Rate test cannot calculate average calibration factors without assay values. To make
the initial adjustment of the average calibration factors use an assayed material, such as 5C cell control or
S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood that is referenced to another instrument, and enter the assay values at the
Workstation.
B 5C or 5C-ES cell control, S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood referenced to another

instrument for Flow Rate Calibration of average calibration factors (required for
checking and adjusting the average calibration factors)
Procedure
1.
Do the CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES as directed under

Heading 4.8.
2.
At the Analyzer, set the number of aspirations/tube to 5.
3.
Select the CBC only test mode.
4.
PN 4277219B
At the Workstation:
a.
Select
b.
From the Processing Control box at the Command Center, select CBC Calibration.
tt
4.10-1

c.
From the Select Calibration Test box, select Flow Rate.
d.
If using assayed material, such as 5C cell control or S-CAL calibrator, or whole

blood referenced to another instrument 1)
Select
2)
Select the Flow Rate Test Assays tab.
3)
On the Flow Rate Test Assays window, enter the assay or reference values for the
material to be cycled.
tt
5.
Cycle the blood or control material.
6.
Check the individual aperture results for any values outside of the limits.
Note: The limits are listed in Table A.1-5 and on the CBC Calibration Setup window.
(Select
7.
8.
4.10-2
to access the CBC Calibration Setup window.)
If the values are within limits, no changes are needed. Go to step 8.
If the %CVs and the new calibration factors are within limits and the differences
between apertures are outside the limits, record the apertures needing adjustment
and then go to step 8.
If the %CVs or the new calibration factors are not within limits, locate and correct
the problem. Go to step 7.
If any %CV or if any of the differences between apertures is outside the limits:
a.
Locate and correct the problem
b.
Repeat this procedure.
Check the average results for any values outside of the limits:
r
9.
tt
If the %CVs are within limits, but there are no results for the average calibration
factors:
t
If you ran material with assay or reference values, enter the assay or reference
values as directed in step 3, d.
If you ran material without assay or reference values, run 5C cell control,
S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood referenced to another instrument now, and
enter the assay or reference values as directed in step 3, d.
If the %CVs are within limits, and the diff and %diff results are < to the calibration
limits, no changes are needed, go to step Verification.
If the %CVs are within limits, and the diff and %diff results are within the
calibration limits, adjust one or more of the average calibration factors. Go to step
10.
If any %CV is outside the limits or if the diff or %diff results are > the calibration
limits, locate and correct the problem. Go to step 9.
If any %CV is outside the limits or if the diff or %diff results are > the calibration limits:
a.
Locate and correct the problem
b.
PN 4277219B

10. If the %CVs are within limits, and the diff and %diff results are within the calibration
limits, adjust the average calibration factors, and adjust any individual calibration factors
recorded in step 5.
a.
From the Analyzer MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt

CALIBRATION tt AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FACTORS, and enter the factors
needing adjustment.
b.
c.
Cycle another five samples and repeat from step 6 to verify the data is acceptable.
to delete the data from the table.
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
Do the System Verification Procedure, Heading 5.1.
2.
Select
tt
Report form.
and record new calibration data on the Instrument Reference
4.10-3

4.10-4
PN 4277219B

MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION
4.11

Purpose
Use this procedure to establish calibration factors for the Manual mode to compensate for
minor differences between the Manual and Automatic aspiration modes, ensuring the WBC,
RBC, Plt, and Hgb results for a specimen are the same regardless of the mode selected.
B Fresh normal blood specimens. For the quantity, select the option below that is most
convenient for the laboratory. Option 1 is usually more convenient because it requires
less blood/tube.
r
Option 1 - Obtain 50 fresh, normal, different blood specimens of sufficient quantity

for a single analysis in both the Automatic and Manual modes.
Option 2 - Obtain 10 fresh, normal, different blood specimens of sufficient quantity

for consecutive, triplicate analyses in both the Automatic and Manual modes.
Collecting the Data

ATTENTION: Instruct the operator to collect the necessary data in patient control files; one for
Manual-mode and another for Automatic-mode samples. Help the laboratoroy set up the
control files and ensure they understand the rest of the procedure outlined below.
1.
Set up two patient control files to collect the data, one for each aspiration mode.
2.
Cycle the samples.

r
Option 1 - Cycle each sample once in each aspiration mode.
Option 2 - Cycle each sample three times in each aspiration mode.
3.
After analyzing all the samples, obtain the mean values for WBC, RBC, Hgb and Plt in
both aspiration modes.
4.
Calculate the %diff for the WBC, RBC, Hgb and Plt using the formula:
[ Automatic Mode Mean ] [ Manual Mode Mean ]
%Diff = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
Automatic-Mode Mean
5.
Compare the %diff results to the specifications in Table A.1-12.

r
If the %diff results are within tolerance, you have verified the current mode-to-mode
calibration is correct. The calibration factors do not require adjustment.
If the %diff results are out of tolerance, ensure the instrument does not have a
problem and then go to step 6.
6.
Obtain the Manual-mode calibration factors from the Analyzer.
7.
Determine the new Manual-mode calibration factors for WBC, RBC, Hgb, and Plt using
the following formula:
Automatic Mode Mean
New Cal Factor = ------------------------------------------------------------- Old Cal Factor
Manual Mode Mean
PN 4277219B
8.
Verify the new calibration factors are within the limits specified in Table A.1-6.
9.
Manually enter the new factors at the Analyzer. (From the MAIN MENU, select
CALIBRATION tt MANUAL CALIBRATION FACTORS.)
4.11-1

10. Verify the adjustment. Go to the Verification procedure.
Verification
1.
Delete the data in the control files.
2.
Select 10 specimens and run each specimen once in each aspiration mode.
3.
Calculate the %diff for the WBC, RBC, Hgb and Plt using the formula:
[ Automatic-Mode Mean ] [ Manual-Mode Mean ]
%Diff = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100
Automatic-Mode Mean
4.
4.11-2
Verify the %diff values are within limits specified in Table A.1-12.
PN 4277219B

FAN REPLACEMENT
4.12
FAN REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The same model dc powered, variable speed fan is used as the intake and exhaust fans in the
Power Supply and as exhaust fans in the Analyzer. Each fan contains a thermistor for
monitoring the heat to automatically control the speed of the fan. If a fan stops working, the
area overheats. Use these procedures to replace a defective fan.
Power Supply Exhaust Fan

B 5/32-in. Allen wrench to open the Power Supply
Procedure
completely as directed under Heading 4.1 before removing the cover or the left side panel of the Power
Supply.
1.
Power down the Analytical Station. See Heading 4.1.
2.
Remove the Power Supply cover and left side panel as directed under Heading 4.13,
beginning at step 2.
3.
Using Figure 4.12-1 as a guide, remove the fan as follows:
4.
PN 4277219B
a.
Remove the two screws securing the fan.
b.
Disconnect connector J22 (located behind the Bulk Power Supply) and the ground
wire at E1.
c.
Feed the fan cable up through the opening in the fan bracket.
d.
Remove the fan and finger guards.
Install the replacement fan:

a.
Feed the cable for the replacement fan down through the opening in the fan bracket.
b.
Connect the fan cable connector P22 to J22 and the fan ground wire.
c.
Position the fan between the finger guards, and secure the assembly in the Power
Supply with the screws.
d.
Verify the direction of the air flow is out through the Power Supply side vents.
5.
Reinstall the left side panel only.
6.
Go to the Verification procedure.
4.12-1

FAN REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.12-1 Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan
Finger
guard
Fan
Finger
guard
J22
Ground wire
connection E1
Ground wire
Bulk Power
Supply
7253293E
Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan

B 5/3-in. Allen wrench
Procedure
attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down the Analytical Station
Supply.
4.12-2
1.
2.
3.

a.
Unfasten the two captive screws securing the cooling coil bracket above the fan.
b.
Carefully lift up the cooling coil bracket to access the fan and finger guards.
c.
Disconnect connector J21 (located behind the Bulk Power Supply) and the ground
wire E1.
d.
Remove the fan and finger guard.
PN 4277219B

FAN REPLACEMENT
4.

a.
Route the cable for the replacement fan to connector J21.
b.
Connect the fan cable connector P21 to J21 and the fan ground wire.
c.
Position the fan under the cooling coil bracket and secure the assembly in the Power
Supply with the captive screws.
d.
Verify the direction of the air flow is up into the Power Supply.
5.
Reinstall the left side panel only.
6.
Figure 4.12-2 Removing the Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan

Loosen
and lift
bracket
Ground wire
connection E1
Bulk Power
Supply
Cooling
coil
bracket
Finger
guard
Fan
J21
Ground
wire
7253301E
Analyzer Fans
B 5/16-in. spanner wrench
Procedure
completely as directed under Heading 4.1 before opening the rear door of the Analyzer and removing a fan.
1.
PN 4277219B
4.12-3

FAN REPLACEMENT
2.
Open the rear door of the Analyzer.
3.

a.
Disconnect the plug on the backbone for the fan to be replaced.

r
J22 is for the digital backplane fan.
J25 is for the analog backplane fan.
b.
Unfasten the locknuts holding the fan in place.
c.
Remove the finger guards and fan.
Figure 4.12-3 Removing an Analyzer Fan
ANALOG
BACKPLANE
FAN
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
FAN
FINGER
GUARD
FAN
FINGER
GUARD
J25
J22
7253302A
4.

a.
Position the replacement fan between the finger guards and secure the assembly to
the Analyzer door by installing the locknuts.
b.
Plug in the fan connector.
5.
Power up the Analytical Station and confirm the fan is working.
6.
Close and secure the rear door of the Analyzer.
7.
Verification
4.12-4
1.
Power Supply fans only - Do the POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION procedure,

Heading 5.7, beginning at step 3.
2.
Analyzer fans - None.
PN 4277219B

REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL
4.13

Purpose
Two styles of the Power Supply are currently in use. Use this procedure to access the
components inside either style.
Removal
completely before removing the cover or the left side panel of the Power Supply.
1.
2.
Unfasten the captive screw on the top of the Power Supply, tilt the cover to the right and
then lift the cover out as shown in Figure 4.13-1.
Figure 4.13-1 Removing the Power Supply Cover
Lined up when closed
Open
6498081A
PN 4277219B
4.13-1

3.
To remove the left side panel of the Power Supply:

a.
Unfasten the two screws inside the upper edge of the frame. See Figure 4.13-2.
b.
Tilt the left panel down and then lift the panel out of its securing clips.
Figure 4.13-2 Removing the Power Supply Left Panel

Remove
screws
6498082A
Verification
None.
4.13-2
PN 4277219B

COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
4.14
Purpose
The compressor generates the pneumatic power for the GENS System and the LH 750
System. Use this procedure to replace a compressor that cannot generate 60 psi and/or high
vacuum.
B 7/16-in. open-ended spanner wrench
Removal
completely as directed under Heading 4.1 before removing the Power Supply cover.
1.
2.
Remove the Power Supply cover. See Heading 4.13.
3.
Unfasten the four captive screws on the compressor mounting plate. See Figure 4.14-1.
Figure 4.14-1 Replacing the Compressor
Muffler
Elbow
connectors
T-fitting
System
Power
Controller
card
Captive
screws (4)
P8/J8
P9/J9
PN 4277219B
6498024A
4.14-1

4.
Disconnect the following tubing and cables from the compressor. Refer to Figure 4.14-1
for component locations.
a.
At the two elbow connectors, disconnect the tubing from the quick-disconnect
fittings by pushing in the quick-disconnect ring, then pulling the tubing out.
b.
At the T-fitting, unscrew the fitting and pull off the tubing.
c.
Disconnect connectors P8 and P9.
5.
At the System Power Controller card, disconnect P7. Refer to Figure 4.14-1 for location
of the System Power Controller card.
6.
Remove the compressor from the Power Supply.
Installation
1.
Position the replacement compressor in the Power Supply and secure it by fastening the
captive screws in the mounting plate.
2.
Connect P7 to the System Power Controller card and connect P8 to J8 and P9 to J9.
3.
Install the tubings:
4.
a.
At the quick-disconnect fittings on the elbow connectors, push the tubing past the
initial resistance, then pull on the tubing to ensure it is secure.
b.
At the T-fitting, connect the tubing and screw down the fitting.
Verification
Do the POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.7, beginning at step 3.
4.14-2
PN 4277219B

DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT
4.15

Purpose
The dump valve (VL1) is a solenoid valve in the Power Supply used to drain the air water
separator. When this valve is not working, water builds up in the air water separator, blocking
the flow of pressure from the air water separator. Consequently, the compressor is running
and the vacuum output is within tolerance, but there is no 30 or 5 psi. Use this procedure to
replace a defective dump valve.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Locate the dump valve. See Figure 4.15-1 for the old style Power Supply, Figure 4.15-2
for the new style.
Figure 4.15-1 Removing the Dump Valve, Old Style Power Supply
Wires
Dump
valve
Bracket
7253290E
PN 4277219B
4.15-1

Figure 4.15-2 Removing the Dump Valve, New Style Power Supply
Wires
Dump
valve
Bracket
6498083A
4.
Remove the solenoid. Refer to Figure 4.15-1 or Figure 4.15-2 for component locations.
a.
Disconnect the solenoid wires at the solenoid, P26.
b.
Remove the two screws securing the solenoid valve to the bracket and remove the
solenoid valve. Set the screws aside.
c.
Disconnect the tubing from the solenoid. To disconnect the tubing from the
quick-disconnect fitting, push in the quick-disconnect ring, then pull out the
tubing.
5.
Install the tubing on the replacement solenoid. To install the tubing on the
quick-disconnect fitting, push the tubing past the initial resistance, then pull on the
tubing to ensure it is secure.
6.
Install the replacement valve on the bracket using the retained hardware. Ensure the wire
connections are accessible.
7.
Connect the wires to the replacement valve.
8.
9.
Clean the air water separator, as needed. Do the Cleaning procedure under Heading 4.16,
Air Water Separator Cleaning and Replacement, beginning at step 2.
Verification
Do Heading 5.7, POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION.
4.15-2
PN 4277219B

AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT
4.16

Purpose
The air water separator traps moisture condensed from compressed air as it flows through
cooling coils and drains the water through the dump valve each cycle. Use the cleaning
procedure any time you replace the dump valve.
Use the replacement procedure when the compressor is running, the vacuum is within
tolerance but there is no 30 or 5 psi, and replacing the dump valve and cleaning the air water
separator does not resolve the problem.
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench (for the Removal procedure)
B Phillips-head screwdriver (for the Removal procedure)
Cleaning
1.
2.
Lay the Power Supply down on its right side to expose the bottom.
3.
Open the filter bracket to access the air water separator. See Figure 4.16-1.
4.
Remove the filter from the bracket, clean the filter as needed as needed, and set it aside.
ATTENTION: If there is liquid in the bowl of the air water separator, hold paper towels under the
drain tubing while removing the tubing to catch the liquid.

5.
Remove the drain tubing from the bottom of the air water separator. See Figure 4.16-1.
6.
Unscrew and remove the bowl of the air water separator.
7.
Empty and clean the bowl with hot water.
8.
Reposition the bowl in the Power Supply, ensuring the O-ring is in place, and screw in
the bowl until it is hand-tight.
9.
Reconnect the drain tubing.
10. Reinstall the filter and close the filter bracket.

11. Set the Power Supply upright.
12. Go to the Verification procedure.
PN 4277219B
4.16-1

Figure 4.16-1 Accessing the Air Water Separator

Quick
disconnect
to 30 psi
regulator
Air water
separator
Quick
disconnect
from
cooling coils
Drain
tubing
Bracket
Filter
6498084A
Replacement
Removal
Supply.
4.16-2
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the 30-psi regulator tubing from the top of the air water separator at the
quick-disconnect fitting. See Figure 4.16-2 for location.
4.
Unscrew the two screws holding the air water separator in place. See Figure 4.16-2.
5.
Lay the Power Supply on its right side to expose the bottom.
6.
Open the filter bracket to access the air water separator. Refer to Figure 4.16-1.
7.
Remove the filter from the bracket, clean the filter as needed as needed, and set it aside.
8.
Disconnect the cooling coil tubing from the top of the air water separator and the drain
tubing from the bottom, and remove the air water separator from the Power Supply.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.16-2 Disconnecting the Air Water Separator

Disconnect
when upright
Remove
screws
6498085A
Installation
1.
Position the replacement air water separator in the Power Supply and secure it with the
screws.
2.
Attach the three tubings.
3.
Reinstall the filter and close the filter bracket.
4.
Set the Power Supply upright.
5.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.16-3

4.16-4
PN 4277219B

MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT
4.17

Purpose
The Motor Controller card provides the drivers that turn on the compressor/vacuum pump.
Use this procedure to replace a defective Motor Controller card.
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
Referring to Figure 4.17-1 for location, disconnect:

r
J15 from the Bulk Power Filter card.
P8 and P9 at the compressor.
Figure 4.17-1 Removing the Compressor Motor Controller Card
BULK POWER
FILTER CARD
Remove
screws
MOTOR
CONTROLLER
CARD
Loosen
screws
P8/J8
P9/J9
7253295A
PN 4277219B
4.
Remove the two screws at the upper edge of the Motor Controller Card and loosen, but
do not remove, the lower two screws.
5.
Lift out the Motor Controller card.
4.17-1

6.
Position the replacement Motor Controller card assembly in the Power Supply, sliding
the slots in the lower back edge of the card over the loosened screws.
7.
Install screws in the top edge of the Motor Controller card assembly and tighten the
screws on the lower edge to secure the replacement card.
8.
Connect the following Motor Controller card cables:
9.
P15 to J15 on Bulk Power Filter card
P8 to J8 on the compressor
P9 to J9 on the compressor.
Verification
4.17-2
PN 4277219B

SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT
4.18

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective System Power Controller card.
Removal
Supply.
1.
Power down the Analytical Station, see Heading 4.1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the following cables and tubings from the System Power Controller card:
a.
Remove the ribbon cables, J3 and J1, by squeezing the metal clips on the ends of the
connector.
b.
Disconnect the wire connectors.
4.
Remove the screws securing the System Power Controller card to the Power Supply,
retaining the hardware. See Figure 4.18-1.
5.
Gently pull on the corners of the System Power Controller card to pull the card off the
standoff pins.
6.
Disconnect the pneumatic tubing from the transducers, noting the locations.
Installation
PN 4277219B
1.
Connect the tubing to the replacement System Power Controller card.
2.
Position the System Power Controller card in the Power Supply and press on the corners
of the card until the card engages with the standoff pins.
3.
Secure the System Power Controller card with the retained hardware.
4.
Connect the cables to the System Power Controller card. Refer to Figure A.4-4 for the
correct locations.
5.
6.
Verify the LEDS on the replacement System Power Controller card indicate an acceptable
status. Refer to Table A.4-3 for LED indications.
7.
Ensure the problem leading to the replacement of the System Power Controller card is
resolved.
8.
Power down the Analytical Station, then reinstall the left panel only of the Power Supply.
9.
Go to Verification.
4.18-1

Figure 4.18-1 Removing the System Power Controller Card
STANDOFF
PINS (4)
60 PS1
30 PS1
5 PS1
VACUUM
253297A
Remove
screws
Verification
4.18-2
PN 4277219B

SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT
4.19

Purpose
Use the SPC Display Test to check the display function of all the LED segments, ensuring the
System Power Controller Display is working correctly. Use the replacement procedure to
replace a defective System Power Controller Display in the Power Supply.
SPC Display Test

Supply.
1.
2.
On the System Power Controller Display, connect TP2 (ground) and TP3, shorting the
circuit.
3.
Monitor the System Power Controller Display and verify each section displays the
following sequence of characters correctly:
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, L, h, E
r
If each section displays the characters correctly and you are testing a replacement
System Controller Display, power down the instrument and go to the Verification
procedure.
If each section does not display the characters correctly, the System Power
Controller Display is defective. Go to the Replacement procedure.
Replacement
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the iAnalytical Station
Supply.
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect P1 on the System Power Controller Display by squeezing the metal clips on
the ends of the connector. See Figure 4.19-1 for the location of the System Power
Controller Display.
4.19-1

Figure 4.19-1 Removing the System Power Controller Display

COVER
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER
DISPLAY
Remove
screws
and
spacers
SYSTEM
POWER
CONTROLLER
CARD
7253298B
4.
Loosen the System Power Controller card for easier access to the System Power
Controller Display:
a.
Remove the screws securing the System Power Controller card to the Power Supply.
Refer to Figure 4.18-1.
b.
Gently pull on the corners of the System Power Controller card to pull the card off
the standoff pins.
5.
Remove the screws from the System Power Controller Display, being careful not to drop
the screws or the spacers into the Power Supply, and remove the display and its cover
from the Power Supply. See Figure 4.19-1.
6.
Position the cover and the replacement System Power Controller Display in the Power
Supply and secure the assembly with screws.
7.
Reinstall the System Power Controller card.
8.
Connect cable P1 to the System Power Controller Display.
9.
Reinstall the left side panel only of the Power Supply.
10. Power up the Analytical Station and test the operation of the replacement System Power
Controller Display. Go to the SPC Display Test procedure.
Verification
4.19-2
PN 4277219B

BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
4.20

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective Bulk Power Supply.
Removal
completely as instructed under Heading 4.1 before removing the cover or the left side panel of the Power
Supply.
1.
2.
3.
If this is a new style Power Supply (Figure 4.20-1), remove the two screws securing the
air baffle bracket to the Bulk Power Supply. Retain the screws.
Note: It is not necessary to remove this bracket or the dump valve bracket attached to it.
4.
Unfasten the four captive screws securing the Bulk Power Supply mounting plate to the
base of the Power Supply. See Figure 4.20-1 for the new style Power Supply,
Figure 4.20-2 for the old style.
Figure 4.20-1 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, New Style Power Supply
System Power
Controller
card
Bulk Power
Filter card
Bulk
Power
Supply
Air baffle
bracket
Dump
valve
6498086A
PN 4277219B
Captive
screws (4)
4.20-1

Figure 4.20-2 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, Old Style Power Supply
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER
CARD
BULK POWER
FILTER CARD
BULK
POWER
SUPPLY
DUMP
VALVE
CAPTIVE
SCREWS (4)
7253299A
5.
Disconnect the Bulk Power Supply harness. See Figure A.4-2 for locations.
r
From the rear of the Bulk Power Supply, disconnect the wires at wire markers (WM)
9, 8, 14, 15 and 16.
From the Bulk Power Filter card, disconnect P10, P11, P12, P14 and P16.
From the Power Supply fans, disconnect P21 and P22.
From the System Power Controller card, disconnect P4 and P6.
From the dump valve, disconnect the wire leads.
6.
Remove the Bulk Power Supply from the Power Supply.
7.
Turn the Bulk Power Supply over and remove the screws securing the Bulk Power Supply
to its mounting plate.
Installation
1.
Secure the replacement Bulk Power Supply to the mounting plate.
2.
Position the replacement Bulk Power Supply in the Power Supply.
3.
Connect the Bulk Power Supply harness. Refer to step 5.
4.
Fasten the captive screws in the Bulk Power Supply mounting plate to secure the bulk
power supply in the Power Supply.
5.
If this is a new style Power Supply, reinstall the air baffle bracket.
6.
Reinstall the left side panel only of the Power Supply.
7.
Verification
4.20-2
PN 4277219B

BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT
4.21

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective Bulk Power Filter card.
Replacement
Supply.
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect all cables attached to the Bulk Power Filter card. See Figure 4.21-1 for the
location of the Bulk Power Filter card.
4.
Remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the Bulk Power Filter card to the Power
Supply, retaining the hardware.
Figure 4.21-1 Removing the Bulk Power Filter Card

BULK POWER
FILTER CARD
STANDOFF
PINS (2)
7253300A
PN 4277219B
4.21-1

5.
Gently pull the Bulk Power Filter card off the two standoff pins.
6.
Position the replacement Bulk Power Filter card in the Power Supply and press on the
center edges of the card until the card engages with the standoff pins.
7.
Secure the Bulk Power Filter card with the retained hardware.
8.
Connect the cables to the Bulk Power Filter card. Refer to Figure A.4-1 for the correct
locations.
9.
Reinstall the left panel only of the Power Supply.
Verification
4.21-2
PN 4277219B

CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.22

Purpose
The CBC lytic reagent pump is a single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump. This
section contains procedures for checking and adjusting the volume of the CBC lytic reagent
pump, troubleshooting the pump, and replacing the pump.
r
Use the Volume Check procedure to determine the volume of reagent dispensed and to
adjust the pump volume as needed. Two methods for checking the volume are provided;
the weight method is recommended as it is the most accurate, but you can use the
alternate volume method if a scale is not available.
Use the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to isolate a pump or reagent pathway problem
when the volume check is not within limits.
Use the Replacement procedure to replace a defective pump.
For pump volume adjustment and verification ranges, see Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances.
B One small Y-fitting, PN 6232259 (for Volume Check procedure)
B One extension tubing: consists of one 30-cm (12-in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane
tubing, PN 3202036, attached to barbed end of feed-thru fitting, PN 1016929 (for
Volume Check and Pump Troubleshooting procedures)
B Two vials, such as ACCUVETTE II vials, one for waste and one for testing
B Mettler scale model P2100, or equivalent scale with an accuracy of 0.001 g (for Volume
Check procedure - weight method)
B 25-mL, certified graduated cylinder (for Volume Check procedure - volume method)
B Small flathead screwdriver
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Pump Troubleshooting procedure)
Volume Check
1.
Press DRAIN to drain the WBC bath.
2.
Disconnect the input tubings from the WBC bath and connect the tubings to the
Y-fitting. See Figure 4.22-1.
3.
Connect the extension tubing to the third leg of the Y-fitting as shown in Figure 4.22-1.
ATTENTION: When dispensing reagent into a vial, always touch the fitting to the side of the vial
to remove the drop on the end.
PN 4277219B
4.
Place the other end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and select F27 to dispense
CBC lytic reagent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with reagent.
Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
5.
Measure the volume dispensed:

r
If a scale is available, use the weight method. Go to step 6.
If a scale is not available, use the volume method. Go to step 7.
4.22-1

Figure 4.22-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the CBC Lytic Reagent Volume Check
Connect
bath tubing
2
Y-FITTING
1
Disconnect
bath tubing
Connect
extension tubing
Dispense CBC
lytic reagent (F27)
6.
7.
7253211A
Use the weight method to determine the volume dispensed:

a.
Weigh a clean vial. If the scale does not have a tare function, record the weight.
b.
Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense CBC lytic
reagent for the test.
c.
Weigh the test vial and record the weight. If the scale does not have a tare function,
subtract the previously recorded weight of the vial to determine the weight of the
dispensed volume.
d.
Repeat steps a through c two more times to obtain three measurements.
e.
Go to step 8.
Use the volume method to determine the volume dispensed:

ATTENTION: For an accurate volume measurement, always use a dry graduated cylinder.
4.22-2
a.
Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER 10 times to
dispense 10 aliquots of CBC lytic reagent into the graduated cylinder.
b.
Determine the volume of reagent in the cylinder from the position of the meniscus
(Figure 4.22-2), and divide the value by 10.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.22-2 Reading a Meniscus

EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
8.
9.
Compare the measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31. If the
volume measurements are:
r
Within the verification range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 11.
Above the verification range, adjust the pump volume down. Go to step 9.
Below the verification range, go to the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to

determine if the failure is in the pump or in the reagent pathway.
Adjust the pump to decrease the volume dispensed:

a.
Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.22-3.
Figure 4.22-3 Pump Adjustments
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
7253213A
PN 4277219B
b.
Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump, then recheck the
pump volume.
c.
Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the pump until the
volume falls within the adjustment range.
4.22-3

d.
To ensure the adjustment holds, repeat steps 4 through 7 and compare the
measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances.
If the measurements are:
r
Within the adjustment range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 11.
Outside the adjustment range, the pump is defective. Go to step 10.
10. The CBC lytic reagent pump is defective:

a.
Press STOP to return to READY.
b.
Reconnect the tubings to the bath.
c.
Replace the CBC lytic reagent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
11. The CBC lytic reagent pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Press RINSE refill the baths and drain the waste chamber.
d.
Select F02 to prime the CBC lytic reagent lines.
e.
Go to Verification.
Pump Troubleshooting
1.
2.
Disconnect the tubing from fitting 127 above VL3 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
fitting. See Figure 4.22-4.
3.
Connect the extension tubing to the other side of the feed-thru fitting as shown in
Figure 4.22-4.
4.
Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial. Select F27, pressing ENTER
as often as necessary to prime the tubing with CBC lytic reagent.
Figure 4.22-4 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the CBC Lytic Reagent Delivery
2
Connect
tubing
Disconnect
tubing here
FEED-THRU
FITTING
127
3
Connect
extension tubing
VL3
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

CBC
LYTIC
REAGENT
PUMP
4.22-4
Dispense
CBC lytic
reagent (F27)
7253212A
PN 4277219B

5.
Determine the volume dispensed. Do steps 5 through 7 of the Volume Check procedure.
6.
Compare the measurements to the pump volume tolerances in Table A.1-31:
7.
8.
9.
If the measurements are within the verification range, the pump is functioning
correctly. Troubleshoot the reagent pathway, correct the problem and then recheck
the pump volume.
If the measurements are below the verification range, the problem could be the
pump or the pump adjustment. Try to adjust the pump. Go to step 7.
Adjust the pump to increase the volume dispensed:

a.
Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise as shown in Figure 4.22-3.
b.
Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump, and then
recheck the volume.
c.
d.
To ensure the adjustment holds, do steps 4 through 7 of the Volume Check procedure
and compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump
Volume Tolerances. If the measurements are:
r
The CBC lytic reagent pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the tubing to fitting 127.
c.
Replace the CBC lytic reagent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
The CBC lytic reagent pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Press RINSE to refill the baths and drain the waste chamber.
d.
Select F02 to prime the CBC lytic reagent lines.
e.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
1.
Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.22-5.
2.
Disconnect the tubing from the CBC lytic reagent pump.
3.
Install the replacement pump in the mounting bracket.
4.
Connect the tubing to the replacement pump.
5.
Select F02 to prime the replacement CBC lytic reagent pump.
6.
Do the Volume Check procedure to ensure the pump volume is correct.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the CBC parameters.
PN 4277219B
4.22-5

Figure 4.22-5 Replacing the CBC Lytic Reagent Pump

REAGENT
LINE
PRESSURE
LINE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
7253214A
4.22-6
CBC LYTIC
REAGENT
PUMP
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
PN 4277219B

DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.23

Purpose
The diluent dispensers are single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pumps. Two styles are
currently in use. This section contains procedures for checking and adjusting the volumes of
either style of the RBC and WBC diluent dispensers, troubleshooting the dispensers, and
replacing the dispensers. Except where noted, the procedures are identical for the RBC and
WBC diluent dispensers.
IMPORTANT The volumes dispensed by the diluent dispensers affect the data. Diluent dispensers are
factory calibrated, but you must verify the volumes to ensure accurate dilutions.
adjust the dispenser volume as needed. Two methods for checking the volume are
provided; the weight method is recommended as it is the most accurate, but you can use
the alternate volume method if a scale is not available.
Use the Dispenser Troubleshooting procedure to isolate a dispenser or reagent pathway

problem, when the volume check is not within limits.
Use the Replacement procedure to replace a defective dispenser.
Tolerances.
B One small Y-fitting, PN 6232259 (for Volume Check procedure)
Volume Check and Dispenser Troubleshooting procedures)
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Dispenser Troubleshooting procedure)
B Clamping device such a hemostat (for Replacement procedure)
Volume Check
PN 4277219B
1.
Press DRAIN to drain the baths.
2.
Disconnect the input tubings from the appropriate bath and connect the tubings to the
Y-fitting. See Figure 4.23-1.
3.
Connect the extension tubing to the third leg of the Y-fitting as shown in Figure 4.23-1.
4.23-1


4.
5.
Place the other end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and do one of the following
to dispense diluent, priming the tubing. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove
the drop at the end.
r
For the RBC diluent dispenser, select F32
For the WBC diluent dispenser, select F33.

r
Figure 4.23-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diluent Dispenser Volume Check
2
Connect
bath tubing
Y-FITTING
1
Disconnect
bath tubing
3
Connect
extension tubing
4
Dispense diluent
(RBC F32, WBC F33)
7253215A
6.
4.23-2

a.
b.
Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diluent for the
test.
c.
dispensed volume.
d.
e.
Go to step 8.
PN 4277219B

7.

a.
Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER three times to
dispense three aliquots of diluent into the graduated cylinder.
b.

EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
8.
9.
Compare the measurements to the dispenser volume specifications in Table A.1-31. If

the measurements are:
r
Within the verification range, the dispenser volume is acceptable. Go to step 11.
Above the verification range, adjust the dispenser volume down. Go to step 9.
Below the verification range, go to the Dispenser Troubleshooting procedure to

determine if the failure is in the dispenser or in the reagent pathway.

a.
Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.23-3 or Figure 4.23-4.
Note: Figure 4.23-3 shows the style of diluent dispensers used on Analytical
Stations that use the diluent reservoir. Figure 4.23-4 shows the style of diluent
dispensers used on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir.
Figure 4.23-3 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
Decrease
Increase
1/4 turn
PN 4277219B
0.1 mL
LEFT FRONT PANEL

7253230A
4.23-3

Figure 4.23-4 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
Decrease
Increase
1/4 turn
LEFT FRONT PANEL
0.1 mL
6498099A
b.
pump volume.
c.
d.
If two of the three weight measurements or if the volume measurement is:
r
10. The diluent dispenser is defective:

a.
b.
c.
Replace the diluent dispenser; go to the Replacement procedure.
11. The diluent dispenser volume is acceptable:
4.23-4
a.
b.
c.
d.
Select F16 to prime the diluent lines.
e.
Go to Verification.
PN 4277219B

Dispenser Troubleshooting
1.
2.
Disconnect the output tubing of the diluent dispenser being tested and connect the
tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.23-5.
r
For the RBC diluent dispenser, disconnect the I-beam tubing above VL8.
For the WBC diluent dispenser, disconnect the I-beam tubing above VL7.
3.
Figure 4.23-5.
4.
Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial and dispense diluent twice
to prime the tubing:
5.
For the RBC diluent dispenser, select F32 to prime the tubing
For the WBC diluent dispenser, select F33 to prime the tubing.
Figure 4.23-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diluent Delivery
1
D is c o n n e c t fo r
R B C d ilu e n t
d is p e n s e r
D is c o n n e c t fo r
W B C d ilu e n t
d is p e n s e r
2
C o n n e c t
I- b e a m tu b in g
F e e d -th ru
fittin g
VL8
VL7
3
C o n n e c t
e x te n s io n tu b in g
L E F T F R O N T P A N E L
6 4 9 8 2 0 6 B
6.
PN 4277219B
4
D is p e n s e
d ilu e n t
(R B C F 3 2 , W B C F 3 3 )
Compare the results to the dispenser volume specifications in Table A.1-31:

r
If the results are within the verification range, the dispenser is functioning correctly.
Troubleshoot the reagent pathway, correct the problem and then recheck the
dispenser volume.
If the results are below the verification range, the problem could be the dispenser or
the dispenser adjustment. Try to adjust the dispenser. Go to step 7.
4.23-5

7.
8.
Adjust the dispenser to increase the volume dispensed:

a.
b.
Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the dispenser, and then
recheck the volume.
c.
Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the dispenser until the
d.
To ensure the adjustment holds, do steps 4 through 7 of the Volume Check

procedure and compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31,
Pump Volume Tolerances. If the measurements are:
Within the adjustment range, the dispenser volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.
Outside the adjustment range, the dispenser is defective. Go to step 8.
The diluent dispenser is defective:

a.
Press STOP.
b.
Reconnect the tubing:
c.
9.
For the RBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL8.
For the WBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL7.
Replace the diluent dispenser; go to the Replacement procedure.
The diluent dispenser volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
Reconnect the tubing:

r
For the RBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL8.
For the WBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL7.
c.
d.
Select F16 to prime the diluent lines.
e.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
4.23-6
1.
Press DRAIN.
2.
Using a hemostat, clamp both tubings attached to the top of the defective dispenser, then
remove the tubings from the dispenser. See Figure 4.23-6.
3.
Remove the dispenser from the base clamp and gently pull the dispenser down and out
of the holding collar.
4.
Remove the pressure tubing from the bottom rear of the dispenser.
5.
Empty the diluent from the dispenser.
6.
Connect the pressure tubing to the fitting on the replacement dispenser.
7.
Carefully feed the dispenser up through the holding collar and set it into the base clamp.
8.
Connect the diluent tubing to the appropriate fittings on the diluent dispenser, then
remove the hemostats.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.23-6 Replacing the Diluent Dispenser

Clamp these tubings on
Clamp these tubings on

HOLDING
COLLAR
PRESSURE
TUBING
7253217A
9.
BASE
CLAMPS
LEFT FRONT PANEL
Select F16 to prime the diluent.
10. Do the Volume Check procedure to ensure the replacement dispenser volume is correct.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.23-7

4.23-8
PN 4277219B

STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.24

Purpose
The stain pump is a single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump. This section contains
procedures for adjusting and checking the volume of the stain pump, troubleshooting the
pump and replacing the pump.
r
For pump volumes adjustment and verification ranges, see Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances.
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Volume Check procedures)
B 1-mL or 2-mL serological pipettes with 0.01-mL divisions (for Volume Check
procedure - volume method)
Volume Check
ATTENTION: The retic stain contains new methylene blue which is a permanent dye. Use care in
handling the stain and any associated tubing. Place gauze under any areas where tubing will
be disconnected.
1.
At the stain chamber, disconnect the tubing from VL89 and connect the tubing to a feedthru fitting. See Figure 4.24-1 (Retic module) or Figure 4.24-2 (Random Access
module).
2.
Figure 4.24-1(Retic module) or Figure 4.24-2 (Random Access module).

3.
PN 4277219B
stain. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with stain. Touch the fitting
to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
4.24-1

4.

r
Figure 4.24-1 Setting Up the GENS System for the Retic Stain Volume Check
2
Connect
tubing
1
Disconnect
tubing here
FEED-THRU
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
VL89
6498058A
4
Dispense
stain
(F25)
RETIC
MODULE
STAIN
CHAMBER
Figure 4.24-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Stain Volume Check
R a n d o m
A c c e s s
m o d u le
S ta in
c h a m b e r
1
D is c o n n e c t
tu b in g h e r e
2
C o n n e c t
tu b in g
F e e d -th ru
fittin g
3
V L 8 9
C o n n e c t
7 2 1 9 0 3 4 B
4.24-2
D is p e n s e
s ta in
(F 2 5 )
PN 4277219B

5.
6.

a. Weigh a clean vial. If the scale does not have a tare function, record the weight.
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense stain for the
test.
c. Weigh the test vial and record the weight. If the scale does not have a tare function,
dispensed volume.
d. Repeat steps a through c two more times to obtain three measurements.
e. Go to step 7.
ATTENTION: For accurate measurements, when a pipette is full of stain, exchange it for a
clean, dry pipette. Do not reuse the wet pipette.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Remove the fitting from the end of the extension tubing and connect the tubing to a
1- or 2-mL serological pipette.
Hold the pipette vertically and press ENTER until the meniscus of the stain falls
within the graduated marks on the pipette.
Read and record the meniscus. See Figure 4.24-3.
Press ENTER three times to dispense three aliquots of stain, then reread the
meniscus.
Divide the difference between the two meniscus readings by 3 to determine the
volume dispensed.
Figure 4.24-3 Reading the Meniscus

EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
7.
8.
PN 4277219B
measurements are:
r


a.
For easy access to the adjustment screw, slide the pump out of the mounting
bracket. See Figure 4.24-4 (Retic module) or Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access
module).
b.
Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.24-4 (Retic module) or
Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access module).
c.
Reinstall the pump in the mounting bracket.
4.24-3

d.
Repeat step 3, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump and then recheck
the pump volume.
e.
Figure 4.24-4 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Retic Module
S ta in
p u m p
A d ju s tm e n t
D e c re a s e
In c re a s e
1 /2 tu rn
Retic
module
5 L
M o u n tin g
b ra c k e t
6 4 9 8 0 6 0 A
Figure 4.24-5 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Random Access Module

R a n d o m
A c c e s s
m o d u le
S ta in
p u m p
A d ju s tm e n t
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn
7 2 1 9 0 3 3 B
4.24-4
5 L
M o u n tin g
b ra c k e t
PN 4277219B

f.
9.
r
The stain pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the stain input tubing to the stain chamber.
c.
Replace the stain pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
10. The stain pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Select F18 to prime the stain lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
1.
2.
On the Retic module, unfasten the three captive screws securing the right side bracket of
the Retic module to the Retic module and carefully lift up the right side bracket. See
Figure 4.24-6.
Figure 4.24-6 Setting Up the GENS System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery
2
Connect
extension
tubing
Disconnect
output
tubing here
RETIC
MODULE
VL99
RIGHT SIDE
BRACKET
STAIN
PUMP
3
Dispense
stain
(F25)
6498059A
PN 4277219B
4.24-5

3.
Disconnect the output tubing from VL99. See Figure 4.24-6 (Retic module) or
Figure 4.24-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery
2
1
R a n d o m
A c c e s s
m o d u le
C o n n e c t
e x te n s io n
tu b in g
D is c o n n e c t
o u tp u t
tu b in g h e r e
V L 9 9
S ta in
p u m p
V L 9 9
D is p e n s e
s ta in
(F 2 5 )
7 2 1 9 0 3 1 B
4.
Connect the extension tubing to the output fitting on VL99 as shown in Figure 4.24-6
(Retic module) or Figure 4.24-7 (Random Access module).
5.
as often as necessary to prime the tubing with stain.
6.
7.
If using the weight method, compare the measurements to the verification range in
Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances. If the measurements are:
8.
4.24-6
Within the verification range, the pump is functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the
reagent pathway, correct the problem and then recheck the pump volume.
Below the verification range, the problem could be the pump or the pump
adjustment. Try to adjust the pump. Go to step 8.

a.
For easy access to the adjustment screw, pull the pump out of the mounting clip.
Refer to Figure 4.24-4 (Retic module) or Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access module).
b.
Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise as shown in Figure 4.24-4 (Retic

module) or Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access module).
c.
Reinstall the pump in the mounting clip.
d.
recheck the volume.
PN 4277219B

9.
e.
f.

procedure. Compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31,
r
Within the range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 10.
Outside the range, the pump is defective. Go to step 9.
The stain pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the tubing to VL99.
c.
Replace the stain pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
10. The stain pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
Reconnect the tubing to VL99.
c.
Reinstall the right side bracket on the Retic module.
d.
Select F18 to prime the stain lines.
e.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
1.
Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 4.24-4
2.
Disconnect the tubing from the stain pump and carefully dispose of the stain in the
pump.
3.
4.
5.
Reinstall the right side bracket on the Retic module.
6.
Select F18 to prime the replacement stain pump.
7.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameters.
PN 4277219B
4.24-7

4.24-8
PN 4277219B

RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.25
RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The retic clearing solution pump is a single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump. This
section contains procedures for adjusting and checking the volume of the retic clearing
solution pump, troubleshooting the pump and replacing the pump.
r
Tolerances.
B One feed thru-fitting, PN 1005697 (for Volume Check procedures)
B One extension tubing: consists of one 30 cm (12 in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane
Volume Check
1.
At the retic chamber, disconnect the tubing from VL95A (Retic module) or VL129
(Random Access module) and connect the tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.25-1
2.
Figure 4.25-1 (Retic module) or Figure 4.25-2 (Random Access module).
PN 4277219B
3.
retic clearing solution. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with retic
clearing solution. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
4.

r
4.25-1

Figure 4.25-1 Setting Up the GENS System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume Check
2
Connect
tubing
1
Disconnect
tubing here
RETIC
MODULE
FEED-THRU
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
VL95A
6498061A
Dispense
retic
clearing solution
(F26)
RETIC
CHAMBER
Figure 4.25-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume Check
2
C o n n e c t
tu b in g
1
R a n d o m
A c c e s s
m o d u le
D is c o n n e c t
tu b in g h e r e
3
V L 1 2 9
R e tic
c h a m b e r
7 2 1 9 0 3 2 B
4.25-2
F e e d -th ru
fittin g
C o n n e c t
4
D is p e n s e
r e tic
c le a r in g s o lu tio n
(F 2 6 )
PN 4277219B

5.
6.

a.
b.
Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense retic clearing
solution for the test.
c.
dispensed volume.
d.
e.
Go to step 7.

a.
Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER five times to
dispense five aliquots of retic clearing solution into the graduated cylinder.
b.

EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
7.
8.
PN 4277219B
measurements are:
r


a.
Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.25-4.
b.
pump volume.
c.
d.
r
4.25-3

Figure 4.25-4 Pump Adjustments
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
7253213A
9.
The retic clearing solution pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the retic clearing solution input tubing to the retic chamber.
c.
Replace the retic clearing solution pump; go to the Pump Replacement procedure.
10. The retic clearing solution pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
Reconnect the retic clearing solution input tubing to the retic chamber.
c.
Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
4.25-4
1.
Reconnect the retic clearing solution tubing to the retic chamber.
2.
Disconnect the output tubing of VL98 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See
Figure 4.25-5.
3.
Figure 4.25-5.
4.
as often as necessary to prime the tubing with retic clearing solution.
5.
6.
r
Within range, the pump is functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the reagent pathway,
correct the problem and then recheck the pump volume.
Below the range, the problem could be the pump or the pump adjustment. Try to
adjust the pump. Go to step 7.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.25-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Retic Clearing Solution Delivery
2
C o n n e c t
tu b in g
Feed-thru
fitting
3
C o n n e c t
1 D is c o n n e c t
tu b in g h e r e
L E F T F R O N T P A N E L
6 4 9 8 2 1 0 B
7.
8.
9.
PN 4277219B
R e tic c le a r in g
s o lu tio n p u m p
D is p e n s e
r e tic
c le a r in g s o lu tio n
(F 2 6 )

a.
b.
recheck the volume.
c.
d.

procedure. If using the weight method, compare the measurements to the
adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances. If the
measurements are:
r
Within the range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.
The retic clearing solution pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the output tubing to VL98.
c.
Replace the retic clearing solution pump; go to the Pump Replacement procedure.
The retic clearing solution pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
Reconnect the output tubing to VL98.
c.
Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
4.25-5

Pump Replacement
1.
Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.25-6.
2.
Disconnect the tubing from the retic clearing solution pump.
3.
4.
5.
Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution pump.
6.
Verification
Do the Heading PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the retic
parameters.
Figure 4.25-6 Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump
Reagent
line
Mounting
bracket
Pressure
line
Retic
clearing
solution
pump
4.25-6
6 4 9 8 2 0 7 B
PN 4277219B

CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
4.26

Purpose
The cleaning agent pump is a nonadjustable diaphragm pump. This section contains
procedures for a checking the volume of the cleaning agent pump and replacing the pump.
r
Use the Volume Check procedure to determine the volume of reagent dispensed. Two
methods for checking the volume are provided; the weight method is recommended as it
is the most accurate, but you can use the alternate volume method if a scale is not
available.
Tolerances.
Volume Check procedure)
B Phillips-head screwdriver (for Replacement procedure)
Volume Check
1.
Disconnect the tubing from fitting 129 above VL47 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
2.
Figure 4.26-1.

3.
cleaning agent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with cleaning
agent. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
Note: F13 activates the cleaning agent pump twice each time you press ENTER,
dispensing two 2-mL aliquots.
4.
PN 4277219B

r
4.26-1

Figure 4.26-1 Setting Up the Instrument

1
2
Disconnect
tubing here
Connect
tubing
FEED-THRU
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
129
VL47
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

CLEANING
AGENT PUMP
7253224A
5.
6.
Dispense
cleaning
agent (F13)

a.
b.
Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense cleaning agent
for the test.
c.
dispensed volume and divide the weight by 2.
d.
e.
Go to step 7.

7.
4.26-2
a.
Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER five times to
dispense 10 aliquots of cleaning agent into the graduated cylinder.
b.
measurements are:
r
Outside the verification range, the pump may be defective. Go to step 8.
PN 4277219B


EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
8.
9.
The cleaning agent pump is defective:

a.
b.
c.
Replace the cleaning agent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
The cleaning agent pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Select F13 to prime the cleaning agent lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
1.
Unscrew the tubing retainers on the pump and remove the tubing. See Figure 4.26-3.
2.
Remove the screws securing the pump bracket to the Diluter panel and remove the
pump.
3.
Install the replacement pump.
Figure 4.26-3 Replacing the Cleaning Agent Pump

REAGENT
LINE
BRACKET
RETAINERS
CLEANING
AGENT
PUMP
PRESSURE
LINE
PN 4277219B
7253225A
4.26-3

4.
Unscrew the tubing retainers on the replacement pump.
5.
Feed the tubing through the retainers and connect the tubing to the pump.
6.
Screw the tubing retainers onto the pump, ensuring the tubing is not twisted or loose.
7.
Select F13, pressing ENTER several times, to prime the cleaning agent pump.
8.
Do the Volume Check procedure to ensure the replacement pump volume is correct.
Verification
Select F13 and ensure the lines from the pump are free of bubbles and that cleaning agent is
dispensed into the flow cell lines.
4.26-4
PN 4277219B

ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.27

Purpose
The aspiration pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump used to aspirate
sample in the Manual and the Automatic modes. This section contains procedures for
adjusting and checking the volume aspirated by the aspiration pump in both modes,
troubleshooting the pump and replacing the pump.
IMPORTANT Changes to the low volume will affect the high volume. Always check the low, Manual-mode
volume of the pump before checking the high, Automatic-mode volume. For details, see Aspiration Pump,
Adjustable Stops, under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION.
Use the Volume Check procedure to determine the volume of sample aspirated and to
adjust the pump volume as needed.
Use the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to isolate a pump or sample pathway problem
For the pump volume adjustment and verification ranges, see Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances.
B 1 vial, such as an ACCUVETTE II vial or a stoppered test tube, containing diluent (for
Manual-mode Volume Check)
B 3 stoppered test tubes containing diluent in a cassette (for Automatic-mode volume
check)
B Mettler scale model P2100 or equivalent scale with an accuracy of 0.001 g (for both
modes volume check)
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Pump Troubleshooting procedure)
tubing, PN 3202036, attached to barbed end of feed-thru fitting, PN 1016929 (for Pump
Troubleshooting procedure)
B Two pairs of hemostats (for Pump Troubleshooting procedure)
B Two adjustable wrenches (for pump adjustment)
Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check
PN 4277219B
1.
At the Analyzer, select CBC ONLY test mode, and at the Workstation Command Center,
Process control box, select PRIME.
2.
Enter an ID# and cycle once in the Manual mode to prime the diluent lines.
4.27-1

3.
4.
5.
Measure the volume aspirated:

a.
Weigh the vial of diluent. This is the initial weight.
b.
Using the Manual mode, cycle a sample from the weighed vial.
c.
Reweigh the vial and subtract this weight from the initial weight to determine the
volume aspirated.
d.
Repeat steps b through c two more times to obtain three measurements.
e.
Go to step 4.
measurements are:
r
Within the verification range, the pump volume is acceptable. If the Wait function
is enabled, press RESET to disable the Wait function, then go to the High
(Automatic-Mode) Volume Check.

determine if the failure is in the pump or in the sample pathway.

a.
For easy access to the adjustment hex nuts at the base of the pump, slide the pump
from the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.27-1.
b.
While holding the middle of the three hex nuts in position, turn the smallest hex
nut clockwise as shown in Figure 4.27-1.
c.
Figure 4.27-1 Manual-Mode Pump Adjustments
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP
MODULE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Hold
Increase
1/2 turn 5 L
7253226B
Adjust
4.27-2
PN 4277219B

d.
Cycle the instrument two times in the Manual mode to reprime the pump, then
recheck the pump volume using step 3.
e.
f.
r
Within the adjustment range, the pump volume is acceptable. Verify the
volume for the Automatic mode is still acceptable. Go to the High
(Automatic-Mode) Volume Check.
Note: Whenever you adjust the low (Manual-mode) volume, you must check
the high (Automatic-mode) volume
Outside the adjustment range, the pump is defective. Go to the Replacement

procedure.
High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check

ATTENTION: Always verify the low (Manual-mode) volume is correct before checking the high
(Automatic-mode) volume.
1.
Disable the blood detectors.
2.
Cycle the cassette of tubes containing diluent one time to vent the stoppered tubes,
eliminating residual pressure, and to prime the diluent lines.
3.
Measure the volume aspirated:
4.
5.
PN 4277219B
a.
Weigh each of the tubes to determine the initial weight.
b.
Cycle the tubes again and reweigh each tube.
c.
Subtract the weight of each tube from its initial weight to determine the volume
aspirated.
d.
Go to step 4.
measurements are:
r
Within the verification range, the pump volume is acceptable. If the front door
switch is bypassed, remove the bypass, then go to the Verification procedure.

determine if the failure is in the pump or in the sample pathway.

a.
b.
Turn the largest of the three hex nuts clockwise as shown in Figure 4.27-2
c.
4.27-3

Figure 4.27-2 Automatic-Mode Pump Adjustments
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP
MODULE
Decrease
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
7253228B
d.
Cycle the instrument two times in the Automatic mode to reprime the pump, then
recheck the pump volume using step 3.
e.
f.
r
Within the adjustment range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to

Verification.
Outside the adjustment range, the pump is defective. Go to the Replacement

procedure.
1.
4.27-4
Set up the instrument and aspirate a sample as follows:

a.
Using hemostats, clamp off the tubing at the Y-fitting above the aspiration pump as
b.
Disconnect the tubing at the top of the aspiration pump from the Y-fitting, and
connect the tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.27-3.
c.
Figure 4.27-3
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.27-3 Setting Up for Troubleshooting Aspiration Pump

3
Connect
tubing
1
Clamp
tubing
FEED-THRU
FITTING
2
Disconnect
tubing
here
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP
MODULE
4
Connect
extension tubing
WEIGHED
VIAL OF
DILUENT
7253338B
d.
Reweigh the vial and subtract this weight from the initial weight to determine the
volume aspirated. Place the other end of the extension tubing into a weighed vial of
diluent.
e.
Aspirate a sample:
f.
If checking the Automatic-mode volume, enter an ID#, then place a cassette

with empty tubes on the rocker bed and then press START/CONT.
If checking the Manual-mode volume, press and release the activator.
When the instrument is aspirating, press the blank area on the Diluter keypad to
select the Wait mode.
Note: The instrument is aspirating when the bar-code scanner is down (Automatic
mode only) and the Analyzer STATUS is INTRO SAMPLE.
2.
PN 4277219B
g.
Reconnect the pump tubing to the Y-fitting.
h.
Release the Wait mode and let the instrument complete the current cycle.
Compare the measurement to the verification range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances. If the measurement is:
r
Within range, the pump is functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the sample pathway,
4.27-5

3.
Adjust the pump to increase the volume aspirated:

a.
b.
4.
5.
If adjusting the Manual-mode volume 1)
For easy access to the adjustment hex nuts at the base of the pump, slide the
pump from the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 4.27-1.
2)
While holding the middle of the three hex nuts in position, turn the smallest
hex nut counterclockwise as shown in Figure 4.27-1.
If adjusting the Automatic-mode volume 1)
2)
Turn the largest of the three hex nuts counterclockwise as shown in

Figure 4.27-2.
c.
Reinstall the pump in the mounting bracket and cycle two samples of diluent to
reprime the pump, then recheck the pump volume.
d.
e.
measurement to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances. If
the measurement is:
r
The aspiration pump is defective:

a.
b.
c.
Replace the aspiration pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
The aspiration pump volume is acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Cycle diluent in the Automatic mode to prime the aspiration lines.
d.
At the Workstation Command Center, turn off the Prime mode.
e.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
4.27-6
1.
Slide the aspiration pump out of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.27-4.
2.
Disconnect the tubing from the pump.
3.
4.
5.
Do the Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check and High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check
procedures to ensure the replacement pump volume is correct.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.27-4 Replacing the Aspiration Pump

SL24B
SL9B
SL9A
PRESSURE LINE
from SL9A
SAMPLE
LINE
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP
MODULE
PRESSURE LINE
from SL24B
PRESSURE LINE
from SL9B
7253229B
Verification
Do the WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 5.4, for the CBC
parameters.
PN 4277219B
4.27-7

4.27-8
PN 4277219B

DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.28

Purpose
The diff lytic reagent pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump that
dispenses the volume of diff lytic reagent (low or high) needed to obtain an optimum
chemical reaction, depending on the ambient temperature. This section contains procedures
for adjusting and checking both volumes of the diff lytic reagent pump, troubleshooting the
IMPORTANT Changes to the low volume can affect the high volume. Always check the low volume of the
pump before checking the high volume. For details, see Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps,
Adjustable Stops, under Heading 2.22, VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS.
Tolerances.
B Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse and StabiLyse, PN 5450245-1 (for Volume Check
procedure - volume method)
B Cotton swabs (to clean and dry the Volumetric Cylinder)
Low Volume Check
PN 4277219B
1.
At the mixing chamber, disconnect the tubing from VL65 and connect the tubing to a
feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.28-1.
2.
Figure 4.28-1.
4.28-1


3.
the low volume of diff lytic reagent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing
with diff lytic reagent. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
Figure 4.28-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Lytic Reagent Volume Check
1
Disconnect
tubing here
Connect
tubing
DIFF
MODULE
FEED-THRU
FITTING
VL65
MIXING
CHAMBER
3
Connect
extension tubing
4
Dispense
diff lytic reagent
(low volume F23,
high volume F24)
6498017A
4.
5.
4.28-2

r If a scale is available, use the weight method. Go to step 5.
r If a scale is not available, use the volume method. Go to step 6.
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff lytic
dispensed volume.
e. Compare the three measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31.
r Within the verification range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the
High Volume Check procedure.
r Above the verification range, adjust the pump volume down. Go to step 7.
r Below the verification range, go to the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to
PN 4277219B

6.

ATTENTION: For an accurate volume measurement, always use a dry Volumetric Cylinder.
a.
Place the tubing in the clean, dry Volumetric Cylinder and press ENTER three times
to dispense three aliquots of diff lytic reagent into the Volumetric Cylinder.
b.
Hold the Volumetric Cylinder in a vertical position and ensure the meniscus falls
between the minimum and maximum marks for the low volume of diff lytic reagent
(ELYSE). See Figure 4.28-2.
Figure 4.28-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Lytic Reagent (ELYSE)
HIGH ELYSE LOW
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
HIGH VOLUME
CALIBRATION
MARKS
SLYSE
LOW VOLUME
CALIBRATION
MARKS
EYE LEVEL
Read here
H
L
7253336A
c.
7.
PN 4277219B
If the meniscus is:

r
Between the minimum and maximum marks, the pump volume is acceptable.
Go to step the High Volume Check procedure.
Above the maximum mark, adjust the pump volume down. Go to step 7.
Below the minimum mark, go to the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to


a.
b.
c.
d.
the pump volume.
e.
Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the pump until:
r
For the weight method, the volume falls within the adjustment range.
For the volume method, the meniscus falls between the minimum and
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for low volume of diff lytic
reagent (ELYSE).
4.28-3

Figure 4.28-3 Low Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
LEFT FRONT PANEL
Hold
Increase
1/2 turn 5 L
7253232A
Adjust
f.
8.
To ensure the adjustment holds, repeat steps 3 through 6. If using the weight
method, compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31,
r
Within range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the High Volume
Check procedure.
The diff lytic reagent pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the sample/diff lytic reagent input tubing to the mixing chamber.
c.
Replace the diff lytic reagent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
High Volume Check

ATTENTION: Always check the low volume of the diff lytic reagent before checking the high
volume.
4.28-4
1.
Place the loose end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and select F24 to dispense
the high volume of diff lytic reagent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the
tubing with diff lytic reagent. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last
drop.
2.

r
PN 4277219B

3.
4.

a.
b.
Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff lytic
c.
dispensed volume.
d.
e.
Compare the three measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31.
r
Within the verification range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to

step 7.


ATTENTION: For an accurate volume measurement, always use a clean, dry Volumetric
Cylinder.
5.
PN 4277219B
a.
to dispense three aliquots of diff lytic reagent into the Volumetric Cylinder.
b.
between the minimum and maximum marks for the high volume of the diff lytic
reagent (ELYSE). Refer to Figure 4.28-2.
c.
If the meniscus is:

r
Between the minimum and maximum marks, the high pump volume is
acceptable. Go to step 7.


a.
b.
Turn the largest of the three hex nuts clockwise as shown in Figure 4.28-4.
c.
d.
the pump volume.
4.28-5

Figure 4.28-4 High Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
LEFT FRONT PANEL
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
7253233A
e.
f.
6.
7.
4.28-6
r
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for the high volume of diff lytic
reagent (ELYSE).
r
Within range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 7.

a.
b.
c.
The diff lytic reagent volumes are acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Select F14 to prime the diff lytic reagent lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
PN 4277219B

1.
Reconnect the sample/diff lytic reagent input tubing from VL65 to the mixing chamber.
2.
Disconnect the tubing from fitting 3 above SL63 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
Figure 4.28-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Lytic Reagent Delivery
2
1
Disconnect
tubing here
Connect
tubing
FF3
FF4
SL63
FEED-THRU
FITTING
VL8
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
VL7
3
Connect
extension tubing
LEFT FRONT PANEL
7253234A
3.
Figure 4.28-5.
4.
Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial and do one of the following
to dispense diff lytic reagent, pressing ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing.
5.
6.
PN 4277219B
Dispense
diff lytic reagent
(low volume F23,
high volume F24)
For low volume, select F23.
For high volume, select F24.
Determine the volume dispensed.

r
For low volume, do steps 4 through 6 of the Low Volume Check procedure.
For high volume, do steps 2 through 4 of the High Volume Check procedure.
r
4.28-7

7.

a.
b.
9.
1)
2)
If adjusting the high volume 1)
2)

Figure 4.28-4.
c.
d.
the pump volume.
e.
f.
8.
If adjusting the low volume -
For the volume method, the meniscus falls between the appropriate minimum
and maximum marks for diff lytic reagent (ELYSE) on the Volumetric Cylinder.
r
Within range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.

a.
Press STOP to return to READY
b.
c.
The diff lytic reagent volumes are acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Select F14 to prime the diff lytic reagent lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
4.28-8
1.
Disconnect the tubing from the pump. See Figure 4.28-6.
2.
Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket.
3.
4.
5.
Do the Low Volume Check and High Volume Check procedures to ensure the
replacement pump volumes are correct.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.28-6 Replacing the Diff Lytic Reagent Pump

REAGENT
LINE
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
PUMP
FF10
FF12
PRESSURE LINE
from FF10
LEFT FRONT PANEL
MOUNTING
BRACKET
PRESSURE LINE
from FF12
7253235A
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure, go back to the VCS
OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71.
2.
If you did this procedure for any other reason, do the DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP
VOLUME OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.66.
4.28-9

4.28-10
PN 4277219B

DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4.29

Purpose
The diff preservative pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump that
dispenses the volume of diff preservative (low or high) needed to obtain an optimum
chemical reaction, depending on the ambient temperature. This section contains procedures
for adjusting and checking both volumes of the diff preservative pump, troubleshooting the
IMPORTANT Changes to the low volume will affect the high volume. Always check the low volume of the
pump before checking the high volume. For details, see Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps,
Adjustable Stops, under Heading 2.22, VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS.
Tolerances.
B One extension tubing: consists of one 30-m (12-in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane
B Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse reagent and StabiLyse reagent, PN 5450245-1 (for
Volume Check procedure - volume method)
B Cotton swabs (to clean and dry the Volumetric Cylinder)
Low Volume Check
PN 4277219B
1.
Disconnect the polyurethane tubing from the I-beam tubing in VL45 and connect the
I-beam tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.29-1.
2.
Figure 4.29-1.
4.29-1


3.
the low volume of diff preservative. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing
with diff preservative. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
Figure 4.29-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Preservative Volume Check
2
1
Disconnect
tubing here
Connect
I-beam tubing
FEED-THRU
FITTING
DIFF
MODULE
VL45
3
Connect
extension tubing
MIXING
CHAMBER
6498039A
4.
5.
4.29-2
4
Dispense
diff preservative
(low volume F21,
high volume F22)

r If a scale is available, use the weight method. Go to step 5.
r If a scale is not available, use the volume method. Go to step 6.
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff
preservative for the test.
dispensed volume.
e. Compare the three measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31.
r Within the verification range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the
High Volume Check procedure.
r Above the verification range, adjust the pump volume down. Go to step 7.
PN 4277219B


r
6.
a.
to dispense three acquits of diff preservative into the Volumetric Cylinder.
b.
between the minimum and maximum marks for the low volume of diff preservative
(SLYSE). See Figure 4.29-2.
c.
If the meniscus is:

r
Between the minimum and maximum marks, the pump volume is acceptable.
Go to the High Volume Check procedure.

Figure 4.29-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Preservative (SLYSE)
HIGH ELYSE LOW
Read here
H
L
LOW VOLUME
CALIBRATION
MARKS
SLYSE
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
HIGH VOLUME
CALIBRATION
MARKS
EYE LEVEL
7253337A
7.
PN 4277219B

a.
b.
c.
d.
the pump volume.
e.
r
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for low volume of diff
preservative (SLYSE).
4.29-3

Figure 4.29-3 Low Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Hold
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
Adjust
7253237A
f.
8.
r
Within range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the High Volume
Check procedure.
The diff preservative pump is defective:

a.
b.
Reconnect the polyurethane tubing to the I-beam tubing in VL45.
c.
Replace the diff preservative pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
High Volume Check

ATTENTION: Always verify the low volume of the diff preservative before verifying the high
volume.
4.29-4
1.
Place the loose end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and select F22 to dispense
the high volume of diff preservative. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the
tubing with diff preservative. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last
drop.
2.

r
PN 4277219B

3.
4.

a.
b.
Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff
preservative for the test.
c.
dispensed volume.
d.
e.
Compare the three measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31.
r
Within the verification range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to

step 7.


5.
PN 4277219B
a.
to dispense three aliquots of diff preservative into the Volumetric Cylinder.
b.
between the minimum and maximum marks for the high volume of diff
preservative. Refer to Figure 4.29-2.
c.
If the meniscus is:

r
Between the minimum and maximum marks, the high pump volume is
acceptable. Go to step 7.


a.
from the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 4.29-4.
b.
Turn the largest of the three hex nuts clockwise as shown in Figure 4.29-4.
c.
d.
the pump volume.
e.
r
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for high volume of diff
preservative (SLYSE).
4.29-5

Figure 4.29-4 High Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
7253238A
f.
6.
7.
r
Within range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 7.

a.
b.
c.
The diff preservative volumes are acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Select F15 to prime the diff preservative lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
4.29-6
1.
2.
Disconnect the tubing from fitting 101 above SL60 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
3.
Figure 4.29-5.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.29-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Preservative Delivery
FF100
FF101
1
Disconnect
tubing here
2
Connect
tubing
SL60
FEED-THRU
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
Dispense
diff preservative
(low volume F21,
high volume F22)
7253239A
4.
5.
6.
7.
Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial and do one of the following
to dispense diff preservative, pressing ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing.
r
For low volume, select F21.
For high volume, select F22.
Determine the volume dispensed.

r
For low volume, do steps 4 through 6 of the Low Volume Check procedure.
For high volume, do steps 2 through 4 of the High Volume Check procedure.
r

a.
PN 4277219B
If adjusting the low volume 1)
2)
4.29-7

b.
9.
1)
2)

Figure 4.29-4.
c.
d.
the pump volume.
e.
f.
8.
If adjusting the high volume -
For the volume method, the meniscus falls between the appropriate minimum
and maximum marks for diff preservative (SLYSE) on the Volumetric Cylinder.
r
Within range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.

a.
b.
c.
The diff preservative pump volumes are acceptable:

a.
b.
c.
Select F15 to prime the diff preservative lines.
d.
Go to Verification.
Replacement
4.29-8
1.
Disconnect the tubing from the pump. See Figure 4.29-6.
2.
Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket.
3.
4.
5.
Do the Low Volume Check and High Volume Check procedures to ensure the
replacement pump volumes are correct.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.29-6 Replacing the Diff Preservative Pump

REAGENT
LINE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
FF125
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
FF131
PRESSURE LINE
from FF131
PRESSURE LINE
from FF125
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
7253240A
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization, go back to the VCS
OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71.
2.
If you did this procedure for any other reason, do the DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP
VOLUME OPTIMIZATION, Heading 4.66.
4.29-9

4.29-10
PN 4277219B

REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
4.30

Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to replace the following components in the reagent
reservoir:
r
Float sensor/reservoir caps
Solenoids
Reservoir Interface card.
Float Sensor/Reservoir Cap Replacement

B Medium Phillips-head screwdriver
B Medium flathead screwdriver
B Square of gauze or absorbent tissue (for stain reservoir components)
Removal
1.
2.
Open the upper and lower right rear Diluter doors to gain access to the reagent
reservoirs. See Figure 4.30-1 (old style) or Figure 4.30-2 (new style).
Figure 4.30-1 Reagent Reservoir Components, Old Style

Solenoid
cables
Solenoids
Vacuum
manifold
Reservoir
Interface
card
Sensor
cables
Vacuum
Securing
input
screws
Reservoir
cap
Float
sensor
Reagent
reservoir
7253258A
PN 4277219B
4.30-1

Figure 4.30-2 Reagent Reservoir Components, New Style
Reservoir
Interface
card
Securing
screws
Sensor
cables
Reservoir
cap
Solenoid
cables
VC31
Float
sensor
Vacuum
input
Reagent
reservoir
Solenoids
7253432E
3.
Disconnect the sensor cable for the float sensor being replaced from the Reservoir
Interface card.
4.
Disconnect the vacuum input tubing from the reservoir cap.
5.
Remove the screws securing the reservoir cap.

Note: The diluent reservoir cap has four screws, the other reservoirs caps have two.
6.
Carefully remove the reservoir cap and its attached float sensor.
Note: The retic stain contains new methylene blue that can leave a permanent stain. Use
gauze or absorbent tissue when removing components for this reagent.
7.
Slide the float sensor out of the reservoir.
8.
Inspect the O-ring for damage, cracks or flat areas, and replace if defective.
Installation
4.30-2
1.
Assemble the O-ring, float sensor and reservoir cap with the necessary replacement parts
and insert the assembly into the reagent reservoir.
2.
Secure the reservoir cap with the screws, replace the vacuum tubing, and connect the
sensor cable.
3.
4.
Select the F-function to prime the reagent. See Table 4.30-1.
5.
Verify that no LEVEL message is displayed and that the reagent pathway is full.
6.
Go to Verification.
PN 4277219B

Table 4.30-1 Reagent Priming Functions and LEVEL Messages

Reagent
LEVEL Message
Priming Function
CBC lytic reagent
LEVEL L
F02
Cleaning agent
LEVEL C
F17
Diff lytic reagent
LEVEL P
F14
Diff preservative
LEVEL P
F15
Diluent
LEVEL D
F16
Retic clearing solution
LEVEL R
F19
Stain
LEVEL R
F18
Reagent Reservoir Solenoid Replacement

B Adjustable wrench
Procedure
1.
2.
reservoirs. Refer to Figure 4.30-1 (old style) or Figure 4.30-2 (new style).
3.
Disconnect the solenoid cable from the Reservoir Interface card.
4.
To replace the solenoid on the old style Reagent Reservoir module:
5.
a.
Remove the hex nut on the top of the solenoid to remove the outer case of the
solenoid.
b.
Unscrew the center portion of the solenoid from the manifold.
c.
Install the replacement solenoid.
To replace the solenoid on the new style Reagent Reservoir module:

a.
Remove the two Phillips-head screws on the bottom of the solenoid and remove the
solenoid.
b.
Ensure the two O-rings for the solenoid are installed and seated correctly.
Tip: An easy way to remove the O-rings from the solenoid without damaging them
is to firmly press a piece of scotch tape across the O-rings and then lift off the scotch
tape to lift out the O-rings.
PN 4277219B
c.
Install the O-rings in the new solenoid, ensuring they are seated correctly.
d.
Install the replacement solenoid.
6.
Connect the solenoid cable.
7.
4.30-3

8.
Select the appropriate F-function to prime the reagent and verify the solenoid is
functioning correctly. Refer to Table 4.30-1.
9.
Verify that no LEVEL message is displayed and that the reagent pathway is full.
Reservoir Interface Card Replacement

Procedure
1.
2.
reservoirs. Refer to Figure 4.30-1 (old style) or Figure 4.30-2 (new style).
3.
Disconnect all the cables from the Reservoir Interface card.
4.
On the old style Reagent Reservoir module, remove the vacuum manifold
(Figure 4.30-1) by removing the two screws underneath the manifold.
5.
Remove the three screws securing the Reservoir Interface card and remove the card.
6.
Install the replacement Reservoir Interface card.
7.
On the old style Reagent Reservoir module, reinstall the vacuum manifold.
8.
Connect all the cables to the Reservoir Interface card. Refer to Figure A.3-17 for the
correct locations of the connectors.
9.
Power up the Analytical Station and ensure no system messages are displayed.
Verification
Cycle several samples to ensure there are no reagent errors.
4.30-4
PN 4277219B

CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK
4.31

Purpose
The delivery timing of the CBC lytic reagent and the diluent affects the positioning of the
WBC populations in the WBC histogram. Use this procedure to ensure that delivery timing is
correct.
B Storage scope with probes
B One coaxial cables with BNC connectors (for all Systems)
B A second coaxial cables with BNC connectors (for Systems with a BD ADJ card)
B Hemostat or equivalent clamping device
B Digital pressure meter, such as a Marsh Meter, PN 2906639 (for use alone or with
optional Pressure Transducer and Test Box, PN 2906535)
B T-fitting
B Tubing
B Minimum of five different normal whole-blood specimens. Ensure the blood specimens
used to verify the timing adjustment have a completely normal differential.
Preliminary Checks
1.
Verify the CBC lytic reagent pump volume is correct. See Volume Check under
Heading 4.22, CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT.
2.
Verify the WBC diluent dispenser volume is correct. See Volume Check under
Heading 4.23, DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT.
3.
Verify the 30 psi readout at the Power Supply is 30 psi 0.1 psi.
Note: If there is a failure of T2 or T4, recheck the pressure in the Diluter. If the times are
too long, 30 psi may be low.
Timing Check
PN 4277219B
1.
Do the Preliminary Checks procedure before starting this procedure.
2.
Press DRAIN to drain the baths.
3.
Disconnect the Y-fitting for CBC lytic reagent and diluent input as shown in
Figure 4.31-1.
4.31-1

Figure 4.31-1 WBC Bath Tubing Disconnected for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Hookup
WBC
BATH
METAL FEED-THRU
FITTING
Disconnect
tubing
from here
4.
7253398B
Connect the storage oscilloscope to a pressure transducer test box as shown in

Figure 4.31-2A (GENS System) and Figure 4.31-3A (LH 750 System), or to a digital
pressure indicator (Marsh meter) as shown in Figure 4.31-2B (GENS System) and
Figure 4.31-3B (LH 750 System).
Figure 4.31-2 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the GENS System
Diluter 3 Card
Oscilloscope
TP3
Diluter 3 Card
TP3
Oscilloscope
TP1
Test box
ON
OFF
+-
Output
TP1
WBC bath
Digital
pressure
meter
WBC bath
sensor
Ground
Transducer
A. Hookup with Test Box and Transducer
4.31-2
Ground
CBC lytic
reagent line
CBC lytic
reagent line
Diluent line
Diluent line
B. Hookup with Digital Pressure Meter
7253264E
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.31-3 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the LH 750 System
B D A D J c a rd
B D A D J c a rd
B N C
c o n n e c to r
B N C
c o n n e c to r
7 2 1 9 0 1 7 B
5.
6.
PN 4277219B
Connect the external trigger probe:

r
On the GENS System, connect the probe to TP1 on the Diluter 3 card for the SL7
(WBC dispense) signal and the probe ground to TP3, digital ground, as shown in
Figure 4.31-2.
On the LH 750 System, connect a BNC cable to the BNC connector on the BD ADJ
card as shown in Figure 4.31-3.
Configure the oscilloscope settings:

Switch
Position
Display Mode
Store
Time/Division
0.5 seconds
Sweep Mode
Single Trigger
Trigger Source
External
Trigger/Slope
Negative
Volts/Division
0.1 V for pressure transducer test boxes

20 mV for Marsh meter
Coupling
DC
4.31-3

7.
8.
9.
If using a test box and transducer, prime the transducer to eliminate bubbles in the
tubing:
a.
Press DRAIN to empty the baths.
b.
Unclamp the hemostats.
c.
Place gauze or a vial under the tubing to catch the diluent, then press RINSE.
d.
Clamp the hemostats during the diluent flow to prevent bubbles.
e.
Repeat as necessary until lines are bubble-free.
Cycle the instrument in the Manual mode to get a display of the waveform on the scope.
Verify the waveform timing is within the limits specified in Table A.1-16.
r
If the timing is within the limits, verify the Gran Mode is within limits. Go to
step 10.
If the timing is not within the limits, correct the problem; go to step 9.
If the timing is not within limits:

a.
Ensure all fittings are the correct size and tubing is the correct length and diameter.
b.
Check conditions listed in Table 4.31-1.
c.
Adjust CK1 until the timing is within the specifications given in Table A.1-16.
Table 4.31-1 Conditions Affecting Lytic Reagent/Diluent Delivery Timing

Failure
Conditions may be caused by:
T1
Problem with solenoids.
T2
r 30 psi out of specifications.

r CBC lytic reagent pump failure.
r CBC lytic reagent delivery tubing out of specifications.
T3
Check problems with T1, T2 or T4.
T4
r 30 psi out of specifications.

r WBC diluent dispenser failure.
r WBC diluent delivery tubing out of specifications.
10. Configure the Printer for printing the Gran Mode:
4.31-4
a.
Log in as service administrator.
b.
Select
c.
On the System Setup - Patient screen, select Reporting Options.
d.
Record the Report Format displayed in the Printout Options box.
e.
Set the Report Format to STKS.
tt
PN 4277219B

11. Cycle five different, normal whole-blood specimens and verify the Gran Modes are
within the specifications given in Table A.1-16.
Note: The Gran Mode is printed on the second page of the printout, under 3Diff.
r
If the Gran Mode is within limits, the delivery timing of the CBC lytic reagent and
diluent is acceptable. Go to step 13.
If the Gran Mode is not within limits, go to step 12.
12. If the Gran Mode is not acceptable:

a.
Ensure the blood specimens you used are normal and fresh. If not, obtain fresh,
normal whole-blood specimens and repeat from step 11.
b.
If the whole-blood specimens are acceptable and the Gran Mode is still out, repeat
this procedure, beginning with the Preliminary Checks.
13. Drain the baths.

14. Disconnect the trigger cables and transducer hookup. Reconnect tubing to the fitting
under the bath.
15. Reconfigure the Printer to the original Report Format you recorded in step 10.
16. Go to Verification.
Verification
Do the WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 5.4.
PN 4277219B
4.31-5

4.31-6
PN 4277219B

HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.32

Purpose
Use the Hgb lamp replacement procedure whenever the Hgb voltages:
r
Cannot be adjusted to within specifications.
Must be adjusted frequently because of drift.
Use the Hgb lamp adjustment procedure lamp whenever:

r
Any part of the Hgb assembly is cleaned or replaced.
The Hgb-blank or Hgb-sample voltages are outside the specifications.
A problem within the Hgb analysis system is corrected.
B None
Replacement
1.
Press POWER OFF on the Diluter.
2.
Disconnect the Hgb lamp connector from the Diluter panel. See Figure 4.32-1.
Figure 4.32-1 Replacing the Hgb Lamp
G E N
S S y s te m
6 4 9 8 2 0 8 B
3.
Heat
sink
Hgb lamp
connector
Unscrew the heat sink to remove the Hgb lamp.
ATTENTION: Ensure the lamp filament is installed vertically.
4.
PN 4277219B
Install the new Hgb lamp and plug in the lamp connector.
4.32-1

5.
Press POWER ON on the Diluter.
6.
Wait 15 minutes before adjusting the Hgb-lamp voltage; go to the Hgb Lamp Voltage
Adjustment procedure.
Hgb Lamp Voltage Adjustment

1.
Ensure the Analytical Station is powered on for 15 minutes before doing the lamp
adjustment.
2.
Ensure the instrument is primed with diluent.
3.
From the Analyzers MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt HGB LAMP
ADJUST. The Analyzer displays PERFORMING HGB LAMP ADJUST and the Diluter
displays ADJUSTING HGB.
4.
When the displays return to READY, access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2)
and select SPECIAL FUNCTIONS tt HGB VOLTAGE.
5.
Ensure the Hgb preamp output voltage is within the specifications listed in Table A.1-30,
Hgb Voltage Limits.
6.
Cycle diluent in the Manual mode.
7.
From the MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTION tt HGB READINGS.
8.
Ensure the Hgb-blank and Hgb-sample voltages and the difference between the
Hgb-blank and Hgb-sample voltages are within the specifications listed in Table A.1-30.
9.
Go to Verification.
Verification
4.32-2
PN 4277219B

WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA COLLECTION
4.33

Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to capture Workstation screens or to collect List-mode data
for off-site viewing and analysis. These procedures use customer menu options only, so you
can share them with your customers as needed.
B A formatted 3 1/2 in. floppy diskette
Screen Capture
1.
Display the desired screen on the Workstation.
2.
Press + to copy the screen to the clipboard.

Note: You will not see anything happening; the computer does not display a message or
give any other indication that it is copying the screen.
3.
Press + to access the program menu.
4.
Select Programs tt Accessories tt Paint.
5.
Select Edit tt Paste to paste the screen from the clipboard into the Paint program.
Note: At this point the file can be printed, saved, or imported into another application.
6.
Save the screen on a diskette for later viewing or analysis.

a.
Insert a formatted 3 1/2 in. floppy diskette into drive A.
b.
Save the screen as a 16-color bit map:

1)
Select File tt Save As.
2)
In the Save in: field, select 3 1/2 Floppy (A:).
3)
In the File name: field, enter the file name.
4)
In the Save as type: field, select 16 color bit map.
5)
Select Save.
7.
Remove the diskette from drive A.
8.
Select File tt Exit to exit the Paint program and return to the instrument program.
List-Mode Data Collection
PN 4277219B
1.
Insert a formatted 3 1/2 in. floppy diskette into drive A.
2.
Display the desired Patients Test (Results & Graphics) screen on the Workstation.
3.
Select
to access the Research screen and obtain the listname (for example,
01B6E1F5).
4.
Press + to access the program menu.
5.
Select Programs tt Windows NT Explorer.
6.
From the column on the left side of the screen, click once on the + sign in front of Adms
to expand the directory.
4.33-1

7.
Select (click once) RawData.
8.
On the right side of the screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the raw data file you want
to save (for example, 01B6E1F5).
9.
Select (click once) the raw data file. Highlight both the .dat and the .inf files.
Note: To highlight more than one file at a time, press and hold it while selecting
the files.
10. Select File tt Send To tt 31/2 Floppy (A). The raw data file is transmitted to the diskette.
11. Remove the diskette from drive A.
12. Select File tt Close to exit the Windows program and return to the instrument program.
4.33-2
PN 4277219B

CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT
4.34

Purpose
ATTENTION: It is recommended to replace the Scope Module instead of performing the CRT
adjustment.
Adjust the intensity of the CRT display when a lack of contrast makes it unreadable and you
cannot replace the Scope Module.
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the GENS System

B Insulated screwdriver or plastic TV alignment tools
B Small Phillips-head screwdriver
Adjustment
WARNING Injury from electric shock. High voltage is present in the area for making adjustments to the
Scope Module. To avoid injury:
1. Power down the Analytical Station.
2. Remove all jewelry.
3. Make adjustments with an insulated screwdriver or plastic TV alignment tools.
1.
2.
Remove the Scope Module from the Analyzer; refer to Heading 4.6 for directions.
3.
Remove the two screws on the top of the Scope Module securing the Scope card.
4.
Remove the four screws securing the rear plate of the Scope Module and remove the rear
plate.
5.
On the CRT4 Disp card, adjust the brightness potentiometer by turning it fully
clockwise. See Figure 4.34-1.
Figure 4.34-1 Brightness Potentiometer Location on the GENS System Scope Module
H. HOLD
TRANSFORMER
H. DELAY
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
VERT VERT VERT
P3
FOCUS
LIN
HOLD SIZE
7253317A
6.
Install the Scope card and place the Scope Module back into the Analyzer.
Note: It is not necessary to secure the rear plate at this time.
PN 4277219B
4.34-1

7.
8.
Check the CRT display for a bright raster with flyback lines.
9.
Power down the Analytical Station and remove the Scope Module again.
10. Turn the brightness potentiometer counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.

11. Place the Scope Module back into the Analyzer.
12. Power up the Analytical Station and check the display.
13. Repeat steps 9 through 12 until the raster and flyback lines disappear from the display.
14. Test the backlighting in all areas of the menus that use backlighting and make sure the
intensity is satisfactory.
16. Remove the Scope Module from the Analyzer and secure the rear plate and the Scope
card.
17. Reinstall the Scope Module into the Analyzer and secure with the retaining screws.
18. Power up and verify the Analytical Station is working correctly. Go to Verification.
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System

B Plastic trimpot tool
Adjustment
1.
Adjust the contrast potentiometer for the CRT (Figure 4.34-2) until the display is clear,
without any raster or flyback lines.
2.
Verify the Analytical Station is working correctly. Go to Verification
Figure 4.34-2 Contrast Potentiometer Location on the LH 750 System
C o n tra s t
p o te n tio m e te r
7 2 1 9 0 0 3 B
Verification
4.34-2
1.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2).
2.
Select DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES tt CRT DISPLAY TEST and verify the display of
characters and numbers is filled and legible.
3.
Return to SYSTEM RUN.

PN 4277219B

BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT
4.35

Purpose
Use this procedure to remove the belt drive assembly whenever it is necessary to:
r
Check the tension in the rocker bed belt.
Access a component mounted under the belt drive assembly.
Replace the tube detector or the belt drive assembly.
B Allen wrench
Removal
1.
2.
Open the Diluter front cover and disconnect the tubing to the belt advance cylinder. See
Figure 4.35-1.
Figure 4.35-1 Disconnecting Pneumatic Tubing from the Belt Advance Cylinder
BELT ADVANCE
CYLINDER
Disconnect
here
7253332B
Note: These components are in the same relative locations on the GENS System (shown) and
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
4.35-1

3.
Remove the top Allen screw from the tube detector assembly and carefully lift the tube
detector mount off the guide pins. See Figure 4.35-2.
Figure 4.35-2 Tube Detector Assembly Allen Screw

GUIDE
PINS
ALLEN
SCREW
5915305H
4.
Remove the screws that secure the metal guide strip to the top front of the rocker bed
and remove the guide strip.
5.
Remove the cover on one end of the rocker bed.
6.
Remove the screws that secure the belt drive assembly to the rear of the rocker bed.
7.
Lift up and remove the belt drive assembly.
Installation
1.
Reposition the belt drive assembly on the rocker bed.
2.
Secure the belt drive assembly to the rear of the rocker bed.
3.
Install the metal guide strip.
4.
Install the tube detector mount on the post.
5.
Reconnect the pneumatic tubing to the belt advance cylinder and close the Diluter front
cover.
6.
Verification
Do the CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, Heading 5.8.
4.35-2
PN 4277219B

ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
4.36

Purpose
If the rocker bed belt tension is too tight or too loose, the belt may not move correctly. Use
this procedure to check the belt tension, and to adjust the tension if necessary.
B Allen wrench set
B Ruler
Adjustment
1.
Power down theAnalytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
2.
Remove the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35, beginning at step 2.
3.
Turn the belt drive assembly upside down and ensure the slack caused by gravity is
within the specifications for Lengths, Rocker Bed Belt Check under Heading A.1,
Tolerances and Limits.
4.
If the belt tension is not within specifications, adjust the tension by relocating the
adjustment rollers in the access holes. See Figure 4.36-1.
Figure 4.36-1 Belt Drive Assembly, Front View, Upside Down

ROLLER
ADJUSTMENTS
ROLLER
ADJUSTMENTS
5915075H
AREA OF SLACK
SLACK
TOLERANCE
5.
Reinstall the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35.
6.
Verify the cassette transport assembly is working correctly. Go to the Verification

procedure.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.36-1

4.36-2
PN 4277219B

UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT
4.37

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective under left stack switch and to verify the replacement
switch works correctly.
B Small Phillips-head screwdriver (small right-angle Phillips-head screwdriver for easier
access)
B Soldering iron
Procedure
1.
2.
Remove the four screws securing the left section of the rocker bed and slide the left
section out. See Figure 4.37-1.
Figure 4.37-1 Removing the Under Left Stack Switch

Remove
screws
ROCKER BED
UNDER LEFT
STACK SWITCH
7253329A
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
3.
Remove the two screws securing the switch to the rocker bed.
4.
Unsolder the wires from the switch, noting the positions of the wires on the switch.
5.
Solder the wires to the replacement switch.
6.
Attach the replacement switch to the rocker bed assembly.
7.
Reinstall the left section of the cassette transport assembly.
4.37-1

8.
9.
Go to Verification.
Verification
4.37-2
1.
Verify the under left stack switch changes states correctly as directed in Table 4.81-1.
2.
PN 4277219B

UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT
4.38

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective under right stack switch and to verify the
replacement switch works correctly.
B Soldering iron
B Allen wrench
Procedure
Note: To facilitate soldering, remove rocker bed if necessary.
1.
2.
Remove the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35, beginning at step 2.
3.
Remove the two screws securing the switch to the rocker bed. See Figure 4.38-1.
Figure 4.38-1 Removing the Under Right Stack Switch
ROCKER BED
Remove
screws
(2)
UNDER RIGHT
STACK SWITCH
BELT
7253330B
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
4.
5.
Attach the replacement switch to the rocker bed assembly.
6.
7.
Reinstall the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35.
8.
Go to Verification.
4.38-1

Verification
4.38-2
1.
Verify the under right stack switch changes states correctly as directed in Table 4.81-1.
2.
PN 4277219B

LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT
4.39

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective left or right lift up switch and to verify the
replacement switch works correctly.
B Soldering iron
Removal
1.
2.
Move the rocker bed to the horizontal position.
3.
When all the pneumatic gauges read zero, manually raise the appropriate lift platform,
being careful not to damage the actuator guide rail or the rubber grommet.
4.
Remove the lift cover.
5.
Move the bed to the forward position and remove the screws securing the switch bracket
to the lift assembly. See Figure 4.39-1.
Figure 4.39-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch
LIFT UP
SWITCH
LEFT
RIGHT
LIFT
ASSEMBLY
COVER
LIFT
ASSEMBLY
COVER
LEFT LIFT
CYLINDER
LEFT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
RIGHT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER
7253243A
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
4.39-1

6.
Unsolder the wires from the switch, noting the positions of the wires.
7.
Remove the switch from the switch bracket.
Installation
1.
Attach the replacement switch to the switch bracket and solder on the wires.
2.
Reattach the switch bracket to the lift assembly.
3.
Push the lift platform down and replace the lift cover.
4.
Power on the Analytical Station.
5.
Go to Verification.
Verification
4.39-2
1.
Verify the replacement lift up switch changes states correctly as directed in Table 4.81-1.
2.
PN 4277219B

LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
4.40

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective left or right lift cylinder and to verify the
replacement cylinder works correctly.
B One 1-1/2 in. #4-40 screw
B Double-sided tape
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rocker bed as instructed under Heading 4.43, beginning at step 2.
3.
Remove the cover of the appropriate lift assembly.
4.
Remove the two screws securing the switch bracket to the cylinder. See Figure 4.40-1.
Figure 4.40-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch
LIFT UP
SWITCH
LEFT
RIGHT
LIFT
ASSEMBLY
COVER
LIFT
ASSEMBLY
COVER
LEFT LIFT
CYLINDER
LEFT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
RIGHT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER
7253243A
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B
4.40-1

5.
Remove the two screws, accessed under the Diluter, that secure the lift cylinder to the
black cassette transport assembly channel. See Figure 4.40-2.
6.
Noting the port location of the tubing, remove the tubing from the cylinder.
7.
Using the screwdriver, carefully pry the cover off the lift platform.
8.
Remove the screw securing the lift platform to the top of the cylinder and remove the
cylinder.
9.
Remove the tie wrap holder on cylinder.
Figure 4.40-2 Removing the Lift Cylinder from the Cassette Transport Assembly Channel
RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER
CASSETTE
TRANSPORT
ASSEMBLY
CHANNEL
LIFT
CYLINDER
LEFT LIFT
CYLINDER
TRANSPORT
ASSEMBLY
CHANNEL
(bottom view)
7253244A
Installation
4.40-2
1.
Attach the replacement cylinder to the black cassette transport assembly channel.
2.
Connect the tubing to the ports of the cylinder noted in step 6 of the Removal procedure.
Attach the tie wrap holder to cylinder.
3.
Attach the lift platform to the top of the cylinder.
4.
Apply new double-sided tape to the lift platform cover and reinstall the cover onto the
lift platform.
5.
Install the switch bracket on the cylinder.
6.
Install the lift assembly cover.
7.
Reinstall the rocker bed as directed under Heading 4.43.
8.
9.
Verify the new cylinder is working correctly. Go to the Lift Function Test.
PN 4277219B

Lift Function Test

1.
Ensure the rocker bed is horizontal.
2.
Select F05, Solenoid Test, then energize the solenoid for the appropriate lift and ensure
the lift moves up smoothly without interference:
r
For the right lift, energize SL21.
For the left lift, energize SL22.
3.
Press ENTER several times and ensure the lift moves up and down smoothly without
binding or jerking.
4.
With the lift in the down position, check the function of the lift.
a.
b.
If checking the right lift:

1)
Place two cassettes in the loading bay.
2)
Verify that the right lift rises, retrieves one cassette and places the cassette on
the rocker bed, and that the second cassette is retained by the flippers.
3)
Press STOP.
If checking the left lift:

1)
Place a cassette on the left side of the rocker bed below the unloading bay.
2)
Press START/CONT.
3)
Verify that the left lift rises and places the cassette in the unloading bay.
5.
If the lift functions correctly, go to Verification.
6.
If the lift does not function correctly, adjust the lift up switch activator. Go to the Lift Up
Switch Activator Adjustment procedure.
Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment

1.
Select F05, Solenoid Test, then energize the appropriate solenoid to raise the lift:
r
For the right lift, energize SL21.
For the left lift, energize SL22.
2.
Remove the lift assembly cover, if necessary, to access the setscrew securing the lift up
switch activator (black bumper). See Figure 4.40-3.
3.
Loosen the setscrew and raise the activator about 3 mm (1/8 in.), then tighten the
setscrew.
Note: If you have made this adjustment several times without success, try moving the
activator all the way down (or up) and starting again.
4.
Repeat the Lift Function Test.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.40-3

Figure 4.40-3 Lift Up Switch Activator Setscrew

UNLOADING
BAY
LOADING
BAY
LEFT
LIFT
RIGHT
LIFT
SETSCREW
LEFT LIFT UP
SWITCH
ACTIVATOR
7253331A
4.40-4
RIGHT
LIFT UP
SWITCH
ACTIVATOR
PN 4277219B

TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT
4.41

Purpose
Use the replacement procedure to replace either the top left or the top right safety switch. Use
the switch test procedure to ensure the replacement switch works correctly.
The top left and top right safety switches are hazard fail-safe devices that allow only 12
cassettes in the loading or the unloading bay at one time. This prevents injury to the operators
hands and fingers as they load and unload cassettes, and also prevents damage to the cassettes.
B Standard cassette
B Pliers
B Soldering iron
Replacement
1.
2.
Open the appropriate side door of the Diluter to access the defective safety switch.
3.
Remove the nuts securing the safety switch to the Diluter. See Figure 4.41-1.
Figure 4.41-1 Removing the Top Left or Top Right Safety Switch
TOP LEFT
SAFETY SWITCH
ACTIVATOR UNLOADING LOADING ACTIVATOR TOP RIGHT

BAR SAFETY SWITCH
BAY
BAY
BAR
RIGHT
COMPARTMENT
DOOR OPEN
SAFETY
SWITCH
LEFT PANEL
7253335A
PN 4277219B
RIGHT PANEL
4.
5.
6.
Using the hardware removed in step 3, attach the replacement switch to the Diluter panel.
7.
8.
Test the switch to verify it is working correctly. Go to the Top Left Safety Switch Test
procedure or the Top Right Safety Switch Test procedure.
4.41-1

Top Left Safety Switch Test

1.
Place a cassette on the rocker bed belt, in the far left position.
2.
Press and hold the top left safety switch activator bar. Refer to Figure 4.41-1 for location.
3.
Press START/CONT and ensure the left lift does not move up and the LEFT STACK FULL
message is generated.
4.
Release the left top safety switch activator bar and press START/CONT.
5.
As the left lift starts to rise, press the left top safety switch activator bar and ensure the
left lift retracts immediately and does not make a full stroke.
6.
Release the left top safety switch activator bar and ensure the cassette is placed in the
unloading bay.
7.
If the Analytical Station does not meet the criteria described in steps 4 through 6,
reposition the switch:
8.
a.
Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DIAGNOSTIC

ROUTINES tt SENSOR TESTS, and check the status of the TOP LEFT SAFETY
switch.
b.
Loosen the nuts for the switch and adjust the switch until the status changes.
c.
Tighten the nuts and repeat this test.
Go to Verification.
Top Right Safety Switch Test

1.
Press and hold the right top safety switch activator bar. Refer to Figure 4.41-1 for
location.
2.
Place a standard cassette in the loading bay or press START/CONT and ensure the right lift
does not move up and the RIGHT STACK FULL message is generated.
3.
Release the right top safety switch activator bar and ensure the right lift retrieves the
cassette and places it on the rocker bed.
4.
Press STOP.
5.
Place the cassette back in the loading bay or press START/CONT.
6.
As the right lift starts to rise, press the right top safety switch activator bar and ensure the
right lift retracts immediately and does not make a full stroke.
7.
Press STOP.
8.
If the Analytical Station does not meet the criteria described in steps 5 through 7,
reposition the switch:
9.
a.
Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DIAGNOSTIC

ROUTINES tt SENSOR TESTS, and check the status of the TOP RIGHT SAFETY
switch.
b.
Loosen the nuts for the switch and adjust the switch until the status changes.
c.
Tighten the nuts and repeat this test.
Go to Verification.
Verification
4.41-2
PN 4277219B

FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
4.42

Purpose
Use this procedure to check the operation of the old style flippers in the loading and
unloading bays and to adjust those flippers as necessary.
Note: The new style flippers are not adjustable. You can easily identify the style of flippers in
use by comparing the width of the projections on the flippers.
r
On the old style flippers the front and rear projections are the same width, about 1.6 cm
(5/8 in.). See Figure 4.42-1.
On the new style flippers the front projection is noticeably narrower than the rear
projection.
Figure 4.42-1 Adjusting the Flippers
R e a r
p r o je c tio n s
F lip p e r
R e a r
p r o je c tio n s
F lip p e r
F lip p e r
F lip p e r
F ro n t
p r o je c tio n s
L o o s e n
th e s e s c re w s
7 2 1 9 0 2 6 B
L o o s e n
th e s e s c re w s
B One empty cassette
B Ruler
Flipper Check and Adjustment
PN 4277219B
1.
Ensure the Analyzer display is SYSTEM RUN and that no cassettes are in the loading or
unloading bays, or on the rocker bed.
2.
Select F90 on the Diluter/numeric keypad to prevent SmartStart recognition from

occurring.
3.
Place an empty cassette in the loading bay.

4.42-1

4.
Slide the cassette to the left and verify that the right side of the cassette overlaps the
flipper on the right side by the distance specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications, Flipper Position Check, under Heading A.1, Tolerances and Limits.
5.
Slide the cassette to the right and verify that the left side of the cassette overlaps the
flipper on the left side by the distance specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications, Flipper Position Check, under Heading A.1, Tolerances and Limits.
6.
If the overlap is not correct, adjust the flippers:

a.
Loosen the two screws securing the flipper to the frame. Refer to Figure 4.42-1.
b.
Move the flipper until the cassette overlap is correct, then tighten the screws.
7.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 in the unloading bay.
8.
9.
Place two empty cassettes in the loading bay. If necessary, press START/CONT to initiate the
Automatic-mode.
10. Ensure the cassettes are lifted smoothly and only one cassette clears the retracted flippers
as it is lowered. The second cassette should remain on the flippers.
r
If the cassette is lifted correctly, go to Verification.
If the flippers misalign the descending cassette, adjust the right lift up switch
activator. See Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment under Heading 4.40, Left or
Right Lift Cylinder Replacement.
Verification
4.42-2
PN 4277219B

ROCKER BED REMOVAL
4.43
ROCKER BED REMOVAL

Purpose
Use this procedure to remove the rocker bed for performing other procedures and to replace a
defective rocker bed.
B Hemostats or equivalent clamping device
B One, #4-40 screw
B Allen wrench
Removal
1.
2.
Disconnect cable P36 from under the rocker bed, and remove the cable from its retaining
clip.
3.
Disconnect the pressure tubing to the stripper plate and belt advance cylinders at the
quick-disconnect fittings.
CAUTION Applying a side load to the rocker bed cylinder can damage the cylinder shaft and seal. Do not
apply a side load to the cylinder while disconnecting the ball and socket joint.
4.
Disconnect the bed rock cylinder ball and socket joint.
5.
Using the hemostats, disconnect and remove the rocker bed spring, setting the spring
aside for later replacement.
6.
Install the #4-40 screw in the end of the left pivot pin. See Figure 4.43-1 for location of
the pivot pin.
Figure 4.43-1 Left Pivot Pin and Retaining Setscrew
Pivot
pin
Pivot pin
retaining
set screw
Pivot pin
mounting
bracket
Rocker
bed
6498045A
PN 4277219B
4.43-1

ROCKER BED REMOVAL
7.
Loosen the retaining setscrew for the left pivot pin.
8.
While holding the rocker bed securely, pull out the left pivot pin and set it aside.
CAUTION The bed sensor flag could damage a bed position sensor when you lift the rocker bed. Move the
rocker bed carefully as you maneuver it past the bed position sensors to avoid damaging the sensors.
9.
Move the rocker bed to the left to slide the rocker bed off the right pivot pin.
10. If unable to clear the right pivot pin:

a.
Loosen the two retaining setscrews for the right pivot pin.
b.
Remove and set aside the right pivot pin.
11. Lift the rocker bed out of the Diluter.
Installation
1.
If the right pivot pin is out, reinstall the right pivot pin, pushing the pin in until it is
flush with the mounting bracket, then tighten the pins retaining setscrew.
CAUTION The bed sensor flag could damage a bed position sensor when you lift the rocker bed. Move the
rocker bed carefully as you maneuver it past the bed position sensors to avoid damaging the sensors.
2.
Install the rocker bed on the right pivot pin, being careful not to damage the bed position
sensors with the bed sensor flag.
3.
While holding the rocker bed securely, install the left pivot pin in the mounting bracket.
4.
Tighten the retaining setscrew for the left pivot pin and ensure there is no side-to-side
movement of the bed.
5.
Remove the #4-40 screw from the left pivot pin.
6.
Reinstall the rocker bed spring, and reconnect cable P36 and the quick disconnects for
the stripper plate and belt advance cylinders pressure tubing.
7.
Reconnect the ball and socket joint for the bed rock cylinder, being careful not to apply
side pressure. If it is necessary to extend the bed rock cylinder arm to connect the ball
and socket joint:
8.
a.
b.
Select F05 on the Diluter keypad to access the function for energizing solenoids.
c.
Energize SL27 to extend the bed rock cylinder arm and then reconnect the ball and
socket joint.
d.
Return to READY, and then go to Verification.
Power up the Analytical Station and go to Verification.
Verification
4.43-2
PN 4277219B

ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4.44

Purpose
Use this procedure to check the position of the rocker bed position flag and sensors and to
adjust the flag and/or sensors if necessary following alignment of the tube ram, adjustment of
the bar-code scanner and/or adjustment of the bed bumpers.
ATTENTION: Verify the tube ram/needle alignment, the bar-code scanner position adjustment
and the bed bumpers adjustments are correct before doing this procedure.
B Right-angle Allen wrench
Bed Sensor Flag Check and Adjustment

1.
Select F05, the function for energizing solenoids.
2.
Ensure the bed locks are released. If not, select SL28 to release the bed locks.
3.
Ensure the stripper plate is activated. If not, select SL29 to activate the stripper plate.
4.
Open the lower front cover of the Diluter.
5.
Move the rocker bed backward, positioning the bed sensor flag in the bed backward
sensor. See Figure 4.44-1 for sensor location. Ensure the flag:
r
Extends more than halfway into the sensor without touching the sensor or the
sensor retaining screw. See Figure 4.44-2.
Is not skewed to the left or right.
Figure 4.44-1 Bed Position Sensor Locations

BED
HORIZONTAL
SENSOR
BED
FORWARD
SENSOR
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

BED
BACKWARD
SENSOR
RIGHT
LIFT
7253250B
PN 4277219B
4.44-1

Figure 4.44-2 Bed Position Flag/Sensor Adjustment Screws
Rocker bed
Channel upright
Plate
Sensor retaining screw
Flag
Flag
retaining
screws
Sensor
6 4 9 8 2 0 9 B
6.
If the flag is not positioned correctly, loosen the retaining screws for the flag and move
the flag until it meets the criteria in step 5.
7.
If the flag is positioned correctly, go to the Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment
procedure.
Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment

1.
Move the bed to its 45-degree backward position and hold.
2.
Select SL27 to activate the bed rock cylinder. The bed should stay in place.
3.
Verify the bed rock cylinder has more travel so that the end stroke does not coincide with
its held position. See Figure 4.44-3 for location of the bed rock cylinder.
4.
Open the right side Diluter door and verify CR3 (the bed backward LED on the Sensor
Distribution card is ON.
5.
If CR3 is ON, go to step 8.
If CR3 is OFF, reposition the bed backward sensor; go to step 5.
Loosen the retaining screw on the bed backward sensor.

Note: Access the bed backward sensor through the right side door of the Diluter.
CAUTION The sensors bend easily when held tightly between the fingers. Hold the sensors carefully while
working on them.
6.
7.
4.44-2
Adjust the bed backward sensor:

a.
Slide the sensor to its rightmost position.
b.
Monitor the CR3 LED. It should be OFF.
c.
Move the sensor slowly toward the left until CR3 turns ON.
Tighten the sensor retaining screw to lock the bed backward sensor in position.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.44-3 Bed Rock Cylinder Location

CENTER PANEL
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
(FRONT VIEW)
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
(REAR VIEW)
7253245A
8.
Select SL27 to deactivate the bed rock cylinder.
9.
Ensure the bed locks are engaged. If not, select SL28 to engage the bed locks.
10. Manually move the rocker bed to its backward position.

11. Check the status of CR3:
r
If CR3 is ON, go to the Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment procedure.
If CR3 is OFF, repeat from step 5.
12. Go to the Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment procedure.
Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment

1.
Grip the bed with both hands and move it to the horizontal position.
2.
Monitor CR1 on the Sensor Distribution Card.
3.
Rock the bed with both hands without allowing the bed lock pistons to completely leave
the indent on the cam assembly.
4.
If CR1 is ON, go to the Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment.
If CR1 is OFF, reposition the bed horizontal sensor; go to step 4.
Loosen the retaining screw for the bed horizontal sensor.

Note: Access the bed horizontal sensor through the right side door of the Diluter.
PN 4277219B
5.
While monitoring CR1, slide the bed horizontal sensor to the left and right until the LED
turns ON, then OFF.
6.
Center the bed is horizontal sensor while CR1 is ON.
7.
Tighten the sensor retaining screw to lock the bed is horizontal sensor in position.
4.44-3

8.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to verify the adjustment.
9.
Go to the Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment procedure.
Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment

1.
Grip the rocker bed with both hands and move it to the 45-degree forward position.
2.
Monitor CR2 status on the Sensor Distribution Card.
3.
If CR2 is ON, go to Verification.
If CR2 is OFF, reposition the bed forward sensor: go to step 3.
Loosen the retaining screw for the bed forward sensor.

Note: Access the bed forward sensor through the right side door of the Diluter.
4.
Adjust the bed forward sensor:

a.
Slide the sensor until CR2 goes ON then OFF.
b.
Center the sensor while CR2 is ON.
5.
Tighten the sensor retaining screw to lock the bed forward sensor in position.
6.
Recheck the bed forward sensor.
7.
If CR2 is ON, go to step 7.
If CR2 is OFF, repeat steps 3 through 6.
Return the system to READY and then go to Verification.
Verification
4.44-4
PN 4277219B

BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.45

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective bed rock cylinder and to verify the replacement
cylinder works correctly.
B Three cassettes filled with specimen tubes containing at least 3-mL blood or 5-mL
diluent or cleaning agent
B Clamping device such as hemostats
Removal
1.
2.
Move the rocker bed to the backward position.
CAUTION Applying a side load to the bed rock cylinder can damage the cylinder shaft and seal. Do not
apply a side load to the cylinder while disconnecting the ball and socket joint.
3.
Disconnect the bed rock cylinder ball and socket joint. For location of the bed rock
cylinder, see Figure 4.45-1.
4.
Remove the green/black striped tubing connected to the front of the cylinder.
5.
Open the left rear door of the Diluter and remove the green/black striped tubing
connected to the rear of the bed rock cylinder.
Figure 4.45-1 Bed Rock Cylinder Location

CENTER PANEL
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
(FRONT VIEW)
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
(REAR VIEW)
7253245A
Note: These components are in the same relative locations on the GENS System (shown) and the LH 750
System.
PN 4277219B
4.45-1

6.
Remove the retaining ring that secures the cylinder to the mounting bracket to release
the cylinder.
Installation
1.
Position the replacement bed rock cylinder on the mounting bracket and reinstall the
retaining ring.
2.
Connect the green/black striped tubing to the rear of the replacement cylinder and close
the rear door of the Diluter.
3.
4.
Use F05 to energize SL27, activating the cylinder.
5.
At the front of the Diluter:
6.
a.
Connect the green/black striped tubing to the front of the bed rock cylinder.
b.
Connect the bed rock cylinder ball and socket joint, being careful not to apply side
pressure.
c.
Press STOP to exit F05.
Adjust the bed rock rate; go to the Bed Rock Rate Adjustment procedure.
Bed Rock Rate Adjustment

1.
Place the loaded cassettes on the rocker bed, positioning the cassettes so that the tube
detector LED remains off.
2.
Under the lower front cover of the Diluter, locate SL36 on MF13. See Figure 4.45-2.
Figure 4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate
Adjust
here
SL30
CHOKE
REAR VIEW
SL27
CLAMP SL36
6498026A
4.45-2
PN 4277219B

3.
Clamp the output line from SL36 to keep the belt from advancing.
4.
Select F07 to activate the bed rock, and verify the bed rocks freely. If the rocker bed is not
moving freely, check for obstructions inhibiting movement.
Note: One bed rock is defined as a complete swing of the bed in one direction - either
forward or backward.
5.
6.
Using the second hand of your watch or a timer for accuracy, verify the number of bed
rocks per minute is within the limits specified for Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications, Rocker Bed Belt Check, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
r
If the rock rate is within specifications, go to step 7.
If the rock rate is not within specifications, adjust the variable choke. Go to step 6.
To adjust the bed rock rate:

a.
Locate the variable choke, CK18, in the line connecting SL27 and SL30. Refer to
Figure 4.45-2.
b.
Turn the setscrew on the choke:
c.
Counterclockwise to open the choke and speed up the rock rate.
Clockwise to close the choke and slow down the rock rate.
Repeat step 5.
7.
Exit the bed rock function.
8.
Remove the cassettes from the rocker bed and remove the clamp from the tubing on
SL36.
9.
Go to Verification.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.45-3

4.45-4
PN 4277219B

TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
4.46

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective tube detector and adjust the tube position. If the
tube detector assembly height is not correct, go to Heading 4.47 for adjustment.
B Pin pusher
B Allen wrench set
B Cassette filled with tubes
Replacement
1.
2.
Remove the rocker bed belt assembly as directed under Heading 4.35, beginning at
step 2.
3.
Disconnect the tube detector assembly cable wires from the connector under the rocker
bed, noting the pin positions.
4.
Disconnect the original tube detector assembly from its mounting post.
5.
Insert the wires from the replacement tube detector assembly cable into the pin positions
of the connector as noted in step 3.
6.
Install the replacement tube detector assembly on the original mounting post.
7.
Reinstall the belt drive assembly and power up the Analytical Station (Heading 4.35).
8.
Position a cassette of tubes on the right side of the tube detector assembly and select F96,
Transport Test, to advance the cassette.
9.
For each of the 12 tubes:

a.
Watch the tube detector LED and the stripper plate until the LED lights and the
stripper plate engages with the tube.
b.
Ensure the tube is either centered with the stripper plate (see Figure 4.46-1) or is
positioned to the right of the center of the stripper plate within the limits specified
in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks, under
Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
10. If the stripper plate and tube are not aligned correctly, adjust the position of the sensor:
a.
Turn the adjustment screw on the right side of the tube detector bracket. See
Figure 4.46-1.
b.
Rerun the cassette.
c.
Check the tube and stripper plate alignment as described in step 9.
d.
Repeat steps a through c until the adjustment is correct.
e.
Press STOP twice to exit this routine, then verify the bar-code reader reads the tube
labels correctly. Go to the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49.
11. Press STOP twice to exit this routine, then go to Verification.
PN 4277219B
4.46-1

Figure 4.46-1 Tube Detector Stop Position Adjustment
ROCKER BED
ASSEMBLY
90
LED
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
TUBE in
CASSETTE
STRIPPER
PLATE
TUBE DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
(Top view)
DISTANCE TOLERANCE
7253248A
Verification
4.46-2
PN 4277219B

TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT
4.47

Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the tube detector height and tube stop position as necessary.
B Cassette filled with tubes
B Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, PN 5401259 (optional)
B Ruler
B Allen wrench set
Adjustment
1.
2.
Check the distance between front edge of the tube detector assembly and the rocker bed.
r
If using the Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, go to step 2.
If using a ruler, go to step 3.
Place the Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, in the GO position, between the
base of the tube detector and the rocker bed as shown in Figure 4.47-1, and ensure the
Gauge slides under the tube detector assembly and fits snugly.
r
If the Gauge does not slide under the tube detector assembly, or if there is a gap
between the Gauge and the tube detector, adjust the tube detector assembly. Go to
step 4.
If the Gauge fits correctly, go to step 5.
Figure 4.47-1 Tube Detector Height Adjustment
UNIVERSAL STRIPPER
PLATE GO/NO GO GAUGE
in GO POSITION
ROCKER BED
ASSEMBLY
MOUNT
CABLE
DISTANCE
TOLERANCE
POST
ALLEN
(ATTACHMENT)
SCREWS
7253413C
PN 4277219B
ROCKER
BED
TUBE DETECTOR
SUPPORT PLATE
TUBE DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
(Side view)
4.47-1

3.
4.
Using a ruler, measure the distance between the base of the tube detector assembly
mount and the rocker bed as shown in Figure 4.47-1. Verify the distance is within the
limits specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks,
under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
r
If the distance is not within limits, adjust the tube detector assembly post. Go to
step 4.
If the distance is within limits, go to step 5.
Reposition the tube detector assembly:

a.
Loosen the Allen screws that attach the tube detector assembly post to the rear of
the rocker bed. Refer to Figure 4.47-1.
b.
Move the tube detector assembly post until the distance between the tube detector
and the rocker bed is correct.
c.
Ensure the tube detector support plate is properly installed. Refer to Figure 4.47-1.
d.
Tighten the Allen screws.
e.
If using the Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, remove the Gauge.
CAUTION If the tubes touch the rod of the tube detector, the tube detector will detect the tubes incorrectly,
which could cause the needle to pierce the wrong area of the tube cap, damaging the needle. When
adjusting the tube detector, ensure the tubes do not touch the rod of the tube detector.
5.
Place the loaded cassette on the rocker bed and slowly slide the cassette from right to left
under the finger ball. As a tube approaches the ball, make sure the tube touches the ball
and not the rod and that the finger ball moves up and down freely.
6.
Slide the cassette until the tube detector LED lights.
7.
Determine the distance between the center of the tube and the center of the stripper
plate. See Figure 4.47-2. Ensure the distance is within the limits specified in the Cassette
Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks, under Heading A.1,
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
Note: This is about the distance that the cassette and belt drive coast before stopping.
8.
Slide the cassette until the tube passes the finger ball and ensure the ball falls freely to its
lowest position and the tube detector LED is out.
9.
Reposition the cassette on the right side of the tube detector assembly and select F96,
Transport Test, to advance the cassette.
10. For each of the 12 tubes:
4.47-2
a.
Watch the tube detector LED and the stripper plate until the LED lights and the
stripper plate engages with the tube.
b.
Ensure the tube is either centered with the center of the stripper plate or is
positioned to the right of the groove on the stripper plate within the limits specified
in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks, under
Heading A.1. See Figure 4.47-2.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.47-2 Tube Detector Stop Position Adjustment
ROCKER BED
ASSEMBLY
90
LED
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
TUBE in
CASSETTE
STRIPPER
PLATE
TUBE DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
(Top view)
DISTANCE TOLERANCE
7253248A
11. If the stripper plate and tube are not aligned correctly, adjust the position of the sensor:
a.
Turn the adjustment screw on the right side of the tube detector bracket. Refer to
Figure 4.47-2.
b.
Rerun the cassette.
c.
Check the tube and stripper plate alignment as described in step 10.
d.
Repeat steps a through c until the adjustment is correct.
12. Press STOP twice to exit this routine, then verify the instrument is working correctly. Go
to Verification.
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
Do the BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.56.
2.
Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49.
4.47-3

4.47-4
PN 4277219B

CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS
4.48

Purpose
Use this procedure to verify the alignment of the cassette transport assembly, after performing
any adjustments, or to determine if adjustments are needed.
B Cassette filled with empty tubes
Procedure
1.
Open the front cover of the Diluter and ensure there is sufficient clearance between the
base of the stripper plate cylinder and the ram tower cutout.
2.
Select F05 on the Diluter/numeric keypad to access the function for energizing
solenoids.
3.
Move the rocker bed to the forward position and ensure:

r
The stripper plate does not hit the bellows.
The bed locks are in place. If they are not, energize SL28 to engage the bed locks.
WARNING The needle is sharp and may contain biohazardous material. To avoid skin puncture, do not put
your hands in the piercing station unless instructed to do so.
4.
Select the following solenoids to verify the needle, tube ram and stripper plate are
aligned.
r
SL29 to retract the stripper plate and ensure it is held against the rocker bed
SL23 to disengage the needle interlock
SL25 to extend the tube ram and lower the bellows. The stripper plate holds the
tube ram in position.
5.
Verify the needle is straight and clean.
6.
Verify there is clearance between the tube ram and rocker bed.
7.
Select SL29 to release the stripper plate. Carefully push the stripper plate against the top
of the bellows. Ensure it is flush with the bellows and the needle is centered in the
stripper plate.
8.
Return the needle, tube ram and stripper plate, to their at rest state:
9.
a.
Select SL25 to retract the tube ram and extend the bellows.
b.
Select SL23 to engage the bellows interlock.
c.
Select SL29 to extend the stripper plate.
Move the bed to the backward position and verify the stripper plate does not hit the
bar-code scanner and is aligned with the bar-code scanner focal line.
10. Move the bed to the horizontal position.
PN 4277219B
4.48-1

11. Slide the cassette slowly under the tube detector and ensure:
r
The tube detector clears the tubes and cassette.
The tube detector LED lights only when a tube passes under the ball activator.
12. Go to the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49, to verify the scanner is
aligned properly.
4.48-2
PN 4277219B

BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST
4.49

Purpose
Use this procedure to ensure the bar-code reader is working correctly by verifying the read
rate is within specifications.
B 12 bar code-labeled test tubes filled with diluent.
Procedure
1.
2.
At the Analyzer, ensure the instrument is in SYSTEM RUN.
3.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F07, BAR-CODE READ.
4.
Load a cassette with the bar code-labeled tubes of diluent and place the cassette on the
rocker bed, to the right of the piercing station.
5.
Check the data on the Workstation Bar-Code Read Test screen and verify it is within the
bar-code read rate specifications listed in Table A.1-1. Figure 4.49-1 is an example of a
Bar-Code Test screen with typical scanning data.
tt
Figure 4.49-1 Bar-Code Test Screen with Typical Data
PN 4277219B
4.49-1

6.
4.49-2
If the bar-code read rate is outside the specifications listed in Table A.1-1, adjust the
bar-code scanner as directed under Heading 4.51, BAR-CODE SCANNER
ADJUSTMENTS.
PN 4277219B

BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
4.50

Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to replace the bar-code scanner cylinder for either the LED
style or the laser style bar-code reader.
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement

B Crescent wrench
B Nut driver set
Removal
1.
2.
Loosen the BSV module for access to the bar-code scanner components.
3.
Remove the bar-code scanner cover.
4.
Remove the bar-code scanner and place it out of the way:

a.
Remove the screws in front.
b.
Remove the ground from the guide assembly.
c.
Retain the pim-nut bracket.
5.
Remove the bar-code scanner guide rod, by unscrewing the rod.
6.
Remove the bar-code scanner guide assembly and retain the threaded plate.
7.
Ensure the cylinder rod is retracted into the bar-code scanner cylinder.
8.
On the cylinder, disconnect the tubing from the front fitting, then remove the fitting.
9.
At the rear of the Diluter:

a.
Unscrew the magnet at the end of the guide rod.
b.
Disconnect the tubing.
c.
Pull out the bar-code scanner cylinder.
Installation
PN 4277219B
1.
Insert the replacement cylinder from the rear of the Diluter. Reinstall the magnet on the
rod, and install the tubing on the rear fitting of the cylinder.
2.
Route the tubing for the front fitting of the cylinder through the opening, then install the
star washer and nut to secure the cylinder.
3.
Connect the tubing to the front fitting of the bar-code cylinder.
4.
Reinstall the guide rod assembly.
5.
Reinstall the threaded plate in the opening and install the locknut and washer.
6.
Reinstall the bar-code scanner and pim-nut bracket.
7.
Reposition and secure the BSV module in its original location.

4.50-1

8.
9.
Go to the BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS procedure, Heading 4.51.
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement

B Tamper proof screwdriver, PN 5450541
B Crescent wrench
B Nut driver set
Removal
1.
2.
Loosen the BSV module for access to the bar-code scanner components.
3.
Using the tamper proof screwdriver, remove the bar-code scanner cover.
4.
Remove the bar-code scanner and place it out of the way:

a.
Remove the screws in front.
b.
Retain the pim-nut bracket.
c.
Disconnect the scanner cable from J2.
5.
Remove the ground wire from the top of the Newbar card.
6.
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J1.
7.
Remove the locknut from the cylinder rod.
8.
Retract the cylinder rod into the bar-code scanner cylinder and retain the threaded plate.
9.
On the cylinder, disconnect the tubing from the front fitting, then remove the fitting.
10. At the rear of the Diluter, unscrew the magnet at the end of the guide rod.
11. At the front of the Diluter:
a.
Remove the bar-code scanner mounting block containing the Newbar card.
b.
Remove the nut and star washer securing the bar-code scanner cylinder.
12. At the rear of the Diluter:

a.
Disconnect the tubing from the rear fitting on the cylinder.
b.
Pull out the bar-code scanner cylinder.
Installation
4.50-2
1.
Insert the replacement cylinder from the rear of the Diluter and install the tubing on the
rear fitting of the cylinder.
2.
Route the tubing for the front fitting of the cylinder through the opening, then install the
star washer and nut to secure the cylinder.
3.
Install the front fitting on the bar-code cylinder and connect the tubing.
4.
Reinstall the bar-code scanner mounting block containing the Newbar card.
PN 4277219B

5.
Reinstall the threaded plate in the opening. Thread the cylinder rod into the threaded
plate until the rod is flush with the bar-code scanner mounting block.
6.
Install the locknut on the front of the cylinder rod.
7.
Reconnect the ribbon cable to J1 and reinstall the ground wire on the top of the Newbar
card.
8.
Using the two screws and the pim-nut bracket, reinstall the bar-code scanner. Adjust the
scanner horizontally until it is flush with the left edge of the mounting block.
9.
Reconnect the scanner cable to J2 on the Newbar card.
10. Reinstall the bar-code scanner cover.

11. At the rear of the Diluter, reinstall the magnet on the end of the guide rod.
12. Reposition and secure the BSV module in its original location.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.50-3

4.50-4
PN 4277219B

BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS
4.51

Purpose
Use the LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments or the Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner
Adjustments in this section if it is necessary to meet the bar-code read rate specifications.
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments

B Allen wrench
B Cassette
B DMM
B Ruler and/or the following optional tools
B BCS GO/NO GO Gauge (SK 3338), PN 7231105 (optional)
B BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block (SK 3156), PN 7231085 (optional)
B Parallel Adjustment Cylinder (SK 3157), PN 7231084 (optional)
B Stop watch
B Alcohol
B Lint-free wipes
B 12 bar code-labeled tubes
Set Up
CAUTION Doing the following steps out of sequence could damage the needle or the bar-code scanner. To
avoid damaging these components, do the following steps as stated and in the order given.
1.
Open the front cover of the Diluter.
2.
3.
Check the rocker bed and determine if the bed locks are engaged.
r
If the bed locks are engaged, grip the rocker bed with both hands and move the
rocker bed 45 degrees forward.
If the bed locks are not engaged, manually move and hold the rocker bed 45 degrees
forward and energize SL28 to engage the bed locks, locking the rocker bed in that
position.
4.
Load a cassette with the laboratorys tubes in positions 5 and 7 and the Parallel
Adjustment Cylinder (if available) or another laboratory tube in position 6.
5.
Position the cassette on the rocker bed so that the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or the
tube in position 6 is in the piercing position. The tube detector LED is lit.
WARNING The piercing needle is sharp and contains biohazardous material. Do not put your hands in the
piercing station unless you are directed to do so.
PN 4277219B
4.51-1

6.
7.
Position the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or tube on the piercing needle:

a.
Energize SL29 to engage the stripper plate with the front of the Parallel Adjustment
Cylinder or tube.
b.
Energize SL23 to release the bellows interlock.
c.
Energize SL25 to engage the tube ram with the rear of the Parallel Adjustment
Cylinder or the tube and to contract the bellows.
d.
Energize SL29 to push the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or the tube onto the needle.
See Figure 4.51-1.
Ensure the front of the cassette is flush with the front guide of the rocker bed.
Figure 4.51-1 Bar-Code Scanner Home Position Alignment
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
PARK TAB
STRIPPER
PLATE TAB
7253347A
Park Tab Verification

1.
Energize SL26 to move the bar-code scanner out.
2.
Remove the bar-code scanner assembly cover.
CAUTION Forcing the bar-code scanner home could damage the cylinder shaft. DO NOT push the bar-code
scanner home.
3.
4.51-2
Press ENTER to position the bar-code scanner home and make sure:
a.
The front of the bar-code scanner assembly is positioned over the bar-code scanner
park tab. Refer to Figure 4.51-1.
b.
The tab does not protrude from under the bar-code scanner assembly more than the
length specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code
Scanner Position Checks, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
PN 4277219B

4.
Press ENTER to move the bar-code scanner out and ensure the bar-code scanner housing
is positioned over the stripper plate tab at the end of the stroke. Refer to Figure 4.51-1
for the tab location.
Note: The bar-code scanner should not hit any part of the stripper plate assembly.
5.
Measure the stroke length and ensure it is within the limits specified in the Cassette
Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks, under
6.
If the bar-code scanners cylinder stroke is not within the specified limits, replace the
bar-code scanner cylinder. See Heading 4.50.
7.
Press ENTER to position the bar-code scanner home, then press STOP.
Center Adjustment
1.
Ensure the bar-code scanner is in the home position.
2.
Move the rocker bed to the backward position.
3.
Verify that the focal axis indicator or white line on the bar-code scanner is aligned with
the center of the stripper plate. See Figure 4.51-2.
r
If the focal axis indicator is aligned correctly with the stripper plate, go to the
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment procedure.
If the focal axis indicator is not aligned correctly with the stripper plate, go to
step 4.
Figure 4.51-2 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment with Stripper Plate

MOUNTING
SCREWS
FOCAL AXIS
INDICATOR
STRIPPER
PLATE
ASSEMBLY
PN 4277219B
7253348A
4.
Loosen the bar-code scanner mounting screws and adjust the bar-code scanner
horizontally until the focal axis indicator is aligned with the center of the stripper plate.
5.
Make sure the lower back edge of the bar-code scanner housing sits flush on the lower
front edge of the bar-code scanner mounting block as shown in Figure 4.51-3.
6.
Tighten the bar-code scanner mounting screws alternately to avoid skewing the bar-code
scanner in a vertical plane.
7.
Move the rocker bed to the forward position.
4.51-3

Figure 4.51-3 Bar-Code Scanner Housing and Mounting Block
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
MOUNTING
BLOCK
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
HOUSING
5915332H
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment

CAUTION If the hemostat touches an electronic component on the Bar-Code Scanner card, it could damage
the card. When clamping the pressure tubing for the bar-code scanner cylinder with the hemostat, be very
careful not to touch the Bar-Code Scanner card.
1.
Remove the pressure tubing in front, at the bottom of the bar-code scanner cylinder, and
clamp it with the hemostat; see Figure 4.51-4.
Figure 4.51-4 Tubing to Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder, Clamped
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
CARD
5915266H
4.51-4
PN 4277219B

2.
3.
Position the piercing needle on the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or tube as follows:
a.
Energize SL25 to engage the tube ram.
b.
Energize SL29 to disengage the stripper plate.
c.
Manually pull the bar-code scanner until it is just past the cassette.
Measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the Parallel Cylinder or
tube.
a.
b.
If using the BCS GO/NO GO Gauge, ensure the GO Gauge fits between the Parallel
Adjustment Cylinder or tube and the bar-code scanner housing, and the NO GO
Gauge does not.
r
If the gauge fits correctly, go to Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment

procedure.
If the gauge does not fit correctly and a BCS and Tube Detector Height
Adjustment Block is available, go to step 4 to reposition the bar-code scanner.
Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 5 to reposition the bar-code
scanner.
If using a ruler, measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the
Parallel Cylinder or tube, and verify the distance is within the verification limits of
the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks,
under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
r
If the distance is within the verification limits, go to Height Over Cassette

Label Adjustment procedure.
If the distance is not within the verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is available, go to step 4 to reposition the bar-code
scanner.
If the distance is not within the verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 5 to reposition the
bar-code scanner.
ATTENTION: The BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block has two positions. Use the
1.273 cm (0.501 in.) side for checking bar-code scanner heights.

4.
PN 4277219B
Use the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block to set the height over the tube
label:
a.
Center the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block (with block in the
1.273 cm [0.501 in.] position) on the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or the tube as
b.
Make sure the bar-code scanner mounting block contacts the BCS and Tube
Detector Height Adjustment Block and allows minimal drag on the BCS and Tube
Detector Height Adjustment Block when the block is moved from side to side.
c.
Using the tube height adjustment screw, adjust the position of the bar-code scanner
as necessary. See Figure 4.51-6 for location of the tube height adjustment screw.
d.
Remove the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block.
e.
Repeat step 3 to verify the tube height adjustment is correct.
4.51-5

Figure 4.51-5 BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block Installed
BCS AND
TUBE DETECTOR
HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
BLOCK
PARALLEL
ADJUSTMENT
CYLINDER
STRIPPER
PLATE TAB
7253350C
5.
Using the tube height adjustment screw, adjust the position of the bar-code scanner until
the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the tube label is within the
adjustment limits of the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner
Position Checks, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS. See Figure 4.51-6 for
location of the tube height adjustment screw.
Figure 4.51-6 Bar-Code Scanner Adjustment Point Locations

ACCESS HOLE FOR
CASSETTE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT LOCK
CASSETTE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
TUBE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
7253340A
4.51-6
PN 4277219B

Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment

1.
Position the bar-code scanner over the center of the cassette label.
2.
Measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the cassette label:
a.
b.
3.
If using the BCS GO/NO GO Gauge, ensure the GO Gauge fits between the bar-code
scanner and the cassette label, and the NO GO Gauge does not.
r
If the gauge fits correctly, go to step 6.
Adjustment Block is available, go to step 3 to install the gauge.
Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 4 to reposition the bar-code
scanner.
If using a ruler, measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the
cassette label and verify the distance is within the verification limits of the Cassette
Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, under
r
If the distance is within the Verification limits, go to step 6.
If the distance is not within the Verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is available, go to step 3 to install the gauge.
If the distance is not within the Verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 4 to reposition the scanner.
The BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block has two positions. Use
the 1.273 cm (0.501 in.) side for checking bar-code scanner heights.
Center the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block (with block in the 1.273 cm
[0.501 in.] position) between the bar-code scanner mounting block and the cassette label
Figure 4.51-7 Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment

BAR-CODE
SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
BCS AND
TUBE DETECTOR
HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
BLOCK
7253349A
PN 4277219B
4.51-7

4.
Adjust the distance between the bar-code scanner and the cassette label.
Note: Since this adjustment requires turning a screw in the back of the Diluter while
checking height at the front of the Diluter, it is easier if another person can help.
a.
Loosen the cassette height adjustment lock. Refer to Figure 4.51-6.
b.
Turn the cassette height adjustment screw until:

r
If using the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block, the bar-code
scanner mounting block contacts the BCS and Tube Detector Height
Adjustment Block, but allows minimal drag on the BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block when the block is moved from side to side.
If using a ruler, the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the
cassette label is within the adjustment limits of the Cassette Transport
Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, under
c.
Tighten the cassette height adjustment lock, being careful not to change the
adjustment.
d.
If using the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block to set the height,
remove the block and repeat step 2.
5.
Replace the bar-code scanner cover.
6.
Gently push the bar-code scanner home (in), then reconnect the pneumatic tubing to the
cylinder and remove the hemostat.
7.
Go to Verification.
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments

B Tamperproof screwdriver, PN 5450541
B Pot adjustment tool
B Hemostat
B Cassette
B 3 mL tube adapter, PN 5450562
B 12 bar code-labeled tubes
Adjustments
CAUTION Doing the following steps out of sequence could damage the needle or the bar-code scanner. To
avoid damaging these components, do the following steps as stated and in the order given.
4.51-8
1.
Open the front cover of the Diluter.
2.
PN 4277219B

3.
Check the rocker bed and determine if the bed locks are engaged.
r
If the bed locks are engaged, grip the rocker bed with both hands and move the
rocker bed 45 degrees forward.
If the bed locks are not engaged, manually move and hold the rocker bed 45 degrees
forward and energize SL28 to engage the bed locks, locking the rocker bed in that
position.
4.
Load position 6 of a cassette with a 3 mL tube adapter.
5.
Position the cassette on the rocker bed so that the tube adapter in position 6 is in the
piercing position. The tube detector LED is lit.
6.
Ensure the front of the cassette is flush with the front guide of the rocker bed.
7.
Using the tamperproof screwdriver, remove the bar-code scanner cover.
CAUTION If the hemostat touches an electronic component on the Newbar card, it could damage the card.
When clamping the pressure tubing for the bar-code scanner cylinder with the hemostat, be very careful not
to touch the Newbar card.
8.
Remove the pressure tubing in front, at the bottom of the bar-code scanner cylinder, and
clamp it with the hemostat; see Figure 4.51-8.
Figure 4.51-8 Tubing to Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder, Clamped
Newbar
card
PWB
NEWBAR
6707113
ASSY
SCHEM 6323677
1713688B
40
50
30
60
20
psi
70
L A S E R R A D IA T IO N
D O N O T S T A R E IN T O B E A M
T H IS L A S E R D O E S N O T C O M P L Y
W IT H 2 1 C F R 1 0 4 0
C L A S S II L A S E R P R O D U C T
6498126B
9.
PN 4277219B
Loosen the bar-code scanner mounting screws. See Figure 4.51-9.
4.51-9

Figure 4.51-9 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment Components

LED
SW1
NEWBAR
6707113
ASSY
SCHEM 6323677
1713688B
SW1
PWB
40
50
30
NEWBAR
6707113
ASSY
SCHEM 6323677
PWB 1713688B
60
20
psi
70
Mounting
screws
L A S E
D O N
T H IS
W IT H
R R A D IA T IO N
O T S T A R E IN T O B E A M
L A S E R D O E S N O T C O M P L Y
2 1 C F R 1 0 4 0
C L A S S II L A S E R P R O D U C T
6498127B
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metallic surface). Do not place any type of
reflective material between the laser and the bar-code label and always maintain a minimum of 10 in.
between your eyes and the reflected laser light.
10. With the pot adjustment tool, turn SW1 on the Newbar card clockwise until the
laser ON LED lights. Refer to Figure 4.51-9 for the location of SW1 and the LED.
11. Manually place the bar-code reader on top of the 3 mL tube adapter.
12. Adjust the bar-code scanner horizontally until the bar-code laser beam is positioned in
the center of the opening on top of the 3 mL tube adapter.
13. Make sure the lower back edge of the bar-code scanner is flush with the lower front edge
of the bar-code scanner mounting block. See Figure 4.51-10.
Figure 4.51-10 Bar-Code Scanner and Mounting Block
Front edge
of the
mountimg block
Bar-code
scanner
6498133B
4.51-10
Mounting
screws
PN 4277219B

14. Tighten the bar-code scanner mounting screws alternately to avoid skewing the bar-code
scanner in a vertical plane.
15. Turn SW1 on the Newbar card counterclockwise until the laser ON LED goes out.
16. Reinstall the pressure tubing on the front fitting of the bar-code scanner cylinder.
17. Reinstall the bar-code scanner cover.
18. Close the front cover of the Diluter.
19. On the Diluter.numeric keypad, press STOP three times to return all the piercing station
components to their idle state positions.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.51-11

4.51-12
PN 4277219B

LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS
4.52

Purpose
Use these checks to troubleshoot scanner problems with an LED style bar-code reader.
Tool/Supplies Needed
B Cassette
B Several laboratory tubes
B Parallel Adjustment Cylinder, PN 7231084 (optional)
B DVM
B Alcohol
B Lint-free wipes
B Stop watch or watch with second hand
Speed Check
PN 4277219B
1.
Ensure the bar-code scanner pressure gauge reads within the limits specified
in Table A.1-13. Adjust RG5 as needed. Refer to Figure A.7-3 for the location of the
regulator.
2.
To time the bar-code scanner forward and reverse strokes:

a.
b.
Press 2 6 on the Diluter keypad.
c.
Press ENTER and start the stop watch simultaneously.
d.
Stop the watch when the bar-code scanner is at the end of its stroke. The forward
stroke should be within the time specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, under Heading A.1,
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
e.
Reset the stop watch.
f.
Press ENTER and start the stop watch simultaneously.
g.
Stop the watch when the bar-code scanner is at home. The reverse stroke should be
within the time specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications,
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND
LIMITS.
3.
If both strokes are in tolerance, go to step 5. If either stroke is out of tolerance, check the
bar-code scanner pressure. If the pressure is within specifications, the bar-code cylinder
may need replacement.
4.
Be sure the bar-code scanner is in the home position, then repeat step 2. If either stroke
speed still exceeds the time limits, correct the problem, then repeat this procedure.
5.
Reposition the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or tube in the cassette:

a.
Energize SL29 to engage the stripper plate.
b.
Energize SL25 to disengage the tube ram. The stripper plate pushes the Parallel
Adjustment Cylinder or tube back into the cassette.
4.52-1

6.
c.
Energize SL23 to engage the bellows interlock.
d.
Manually return the rocker bed to its horizontal position.
e.
Energize SL29 to disengage the stripper plate from the Parallel Adjustment
Cylinder.
f.
Press STOP until the instrument returns to the READY state.
Remove the cassette from the rocker bed.
Electrical Checks
1.
Clean the bar-code scanner viewing screen and the tube and cassette labels with alcohol.
2.
Select F05 so you can energize individual solenoids.
3.
Select SL26 to extend the bar-code scanner.
4.
Remove the bar-code scanner cover.
5.
Using ground E28, measure the voltages at pin 4 and pin 7 on the Bar-Code Scanner
card; see Figure 4.52-1.
Figure 4.52-1 Bar-Code Scanner Card Pins and Test Points

PIN 4
TP3
PIN 7
E28
7253343A
6.
Ensure the voltages are within the limits specified for the bar-code scanner electrical
checks in Table A.1-2.
7.
Using ground E28, monitor TP3. Ensure the offset voltage is within the limits specified
for the bar-code electrical checks in Table A.1-2.
Note: The approximate voltages for TP3, when read over black and when read over
white, are included in Table A.1-2.
8.
Replace the bar-code scanner cover.
Verification
4.52-2
PN 4277219B

BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
4.53

Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the (bar-code) scanner position sensor as needed.
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment

B Cassette with 12 bar code-labeled tubes
B Small screwdriver
Adjustment
1.
Fill a cassette with bar code-labeled tubes, place the cassette in the loading bay and press
START/CONT.
2.
Open the top left rear door of the Diluter and monitor the bar-code scanner from the
rear.
3.
Ensure that when the bar-code scanner scans a tube, the magnet at the end of the guide
rod does not contact the bar-code scanner position sensor. See Figure 4.53-1 for location
of the magnet and sensor.
Figure 4.53-1 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Guide Rod Magnet
MAGNET
GUIDE
ROD
SCANNER
POSITION
SENSOR
REAR OF DILUTER PANELS
7253333A
4.
5.
PN 4277219B
If the magnet contacts the bar-code position sensor, adjust the sensor:
a.
Loosen the screws on the bar-code position sensor and slide the sensor as far
forward (toward the scanner) and down (parallel to the guide rod) as it goes.
b.
Tighten the screws.
c.
Repeat steps 1 through 3.
Close the rear door of the Diluter and go to Verification.
4.53-1

Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment

B Small screwdriver
Adjustment
1.
Open the top left rear door of the Diluter and locate the rear of the bar-code scanner and
the scanner position sensor. Refer to Figure 4.53-1.
2.
Verify that the scanner position sensor is flush with the rear of the sensor-mounting
bracket. See Figure 4.53-2 for the location of the sensor and its mounting bracket.
Figure 4.53-2 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Mounting Bracket

Flush down
across full
length of side
Scanner position sensor
4
10
Sensor mounting bracket
Flush with front
3.
4.
6498136B
If the scanner position sensor is not flush with the rear of the sensor-mounting bracket,
adjust the sensor:
a.
Loosen the screws on the scanner position sensor and slide the sensor backward
(toward the rear door) until the sensor is flush with the sensor-mounting bracket.
b.
Tighten the screws.
Close the rear door of the Diluter and go to Verification.
Verification
4.53-2
PN 4277219B

BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE
4.54

Purpose
Use this procedure to increase the read rates on labels other than CDD photographic quality
bar-code labels without compromising the read rate of the CDD photographic quality labels.
ATTENTION: Only perform this procedure when CDD bar-code labels pass the read-rate
specifications and alternate bar-code labels fail. Never use this procedure to bring CDD
bar-code labels into the read-rate specifications.
Verify the read rate for CDD labels using the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST,
Heading 4.49.
B Anti-static shield
B Alligator clip
B Storage oscilloscope
B 12 specimen tubes with the laboratory's bar-code labels
B 12 specimen tubes with the CDD bar-code labels
B 1/4-in., open-ended wrench
Alignment
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
Unfasten the two captive screws securing the card holder. Do not disconnect the ground
wire.
3.
Install the jumper at P3, BEEPER CONNECT, to enable the bar-code beeper. See
Figure 4.54-1.
4.
Connect a storage oscilloscope to the analog input on the Bar-Code Decoder card.
a.
Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 input cable to TP5. Refer to Figure A.3-1.
b.
Connect the oscilloscope coaxial cable ground (channel 1) to pin 9 of the bar-code
scanner ribbon cable. This is easily done by connecting the oscilloscope ground
cable to the rear of the small ribbon connector socket. See Figure 4.54-1.
c.
d.
Use the oscilloscope internal trigger.
e.
Set the oscilloscope to 50 mV per division and 0.1 second per division.
f.
Reset the oscilloscope display just before the backward stroke of the scanner. This
allows you to view the tube label waveform rather than the cassette label.
5.
Fill one cassette with tubes with customer generated bar-code labels.
6.
At the Workstation, access the Bar-Code Test screen and delete the data.
7.
Select F07 to advance the cassette of tubes and perform bar-code scanning.
4.54-1

Figure 4.54-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Jumper and Pin Locations
TC5516AP - 2
JAPAN 8614HBK
MC6803U4P - 1
7K
147 - 1125P - 12 - 4338
J2
TM68724
J1
BEEPER
TP5
PIN 10 PIN 9
CONNECT
TP 5
7253355A
8.
BEEPER
JUMPER
Watch the bar-code waveforms appearing on the oscilloscope and compare them to the
waveforms in Table 4.54-1 and Table 4.54-2.
Note: All waveforms in Tables 4.54-1 and 4.54-2 are 50 mV/division and GND coincide
with the center of the graticule unless otherwise indicated.
9.
Based on the waveforms observed, adjust the distance from the tube label. Using a
1/4-in., open-ended wrench, turn the tube height adjustment screw about 1/4 turn to
increase or decrease the distance from the tube label. (Refer to Figure 4.51-6 for location
of height adjustment screw.)
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 until optimal scanning is achieved.

11. Set the oscilloscope to 1 V/division and 0.1 second/division.
12. Reset the oscilloscope display just before scanner operation. You will see separate
waveforms, one for the cassette label and one for the tube label.
13. Verify the waveforms are of similar appearance. If the tube label waveform is significantly
different in amplitude (>1 V), the bar-code read rate may be decreased. Figure 4.54-1
illustrates the waveforms of a good and a bad label read. The waveforms shown are
1 V/division. Notice the downward pulse amplitudes for the tube label when focusing
the scanner head.
15. Remove all connections from the Bar-Code Decoder card and the jumper at P3.
16. Reinstall the card.
17. Power up the Analytical Station and go to Verification.
4.54-2
PN 4277219B

Table 4.54-1 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label
Description
SB-344-1
Normal tube signal in the

forward direction with
correct height over tube
label.
Remarks
Not an ideal trace, but
pragmatically normal.
Wide (WE) and narrow
(NE) element signals
should be the same
amplitude.
SB-344-2
The Analytical Station may

still read this. Amplitude
indicates a problem.
Height over tube too high

until no stepping is
observed.
SB-344-3
Cassette label signal with

height over cassette too
low. No stepping of
scanner observed.
GND set one division up

from bottom of graticule.
The wheel is not in contact
with the guide rod. Notice
uneven lows (uneven
bottoms of signal).
Compare WE:NE amplitude
differences with those in
first example.
SB-344-4
Height over cassette label

too high.
Note change in amplitude.

Speed may also be
affected by increase in
friction. The Analytical
Station may still read this.
SB-344-5
PN 4277219B
4.54-3

Table 4.54-2 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label
Description
SB-344-6
Normal tube signal in the

forward direction with the
correct height over tube
label.
Remarks
Not an ideal trace, but
pragmatically normal.
Wide (WE) and narrow
(NE) element signals
should be the same
amplitude.
SB-344-7
Normal may still read.

Notice the abbreviations
in the wide (WE) and
narrow element (NE)
pulses.
Tube signal with the

aperture in the scanner
turned back to front.
SB-344-8
Tube signal with aperture

rotated 90 degrees.
This aperture
configuration is correct
for the Auto-Reporter
Printer BCS. The
Analytical Station will not
read this signal.
Height over tube label too

low.
GND set one division up

from bottom of graticule.
Notice the dramatic
change in amplitude and
offset.
SB 344 A
4.54-4
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.54-2 Comparing Cassette and Tube Label Waveforms
5V
4V
EXAMPLE:
BAD LABEL READ
3V
2V
1V
0V
0
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 m sec
CASSETTE
LABEL
BAR CODE
ACTIVITY
INTERMEC
LABEL
BAR CODE
ACTIVITY
5V
4V
EXAMPLE:
GOOD LABEL READ
3V
2V
1V
0V
5915346H
0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 m sec
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49, using at least 12 different

customer generated bar-code labels.
2.
Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49, using at least 12 CDD quality
bar-code labels.
4.54-5

4.54-6
PN 4277219B

BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.55

Purpose
Use these procedures to replace a defective bubble/blood detector in either a Retic Module or
a Random Access Module and to adjust the bubble/blood detectors.
Note: The two bubble/blood detectors are replaced as a set.
Retic Module
B An external DVM
B Blood Detector Test Aid, PN 2906553, if available.
B Three tubes of diluent
B One tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control at room temperature
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module
1.
2.
Remove the rocker bed for easier access to the bubble/blood detector cables. See
Heading 4.43.
3.
Remove the defective bubble/blood detectors. See Figure 4.55-1.

a.
Unfasten the captive screw to remove the bracket.
Figure 4.55-1 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module
Disconnect
tubing
Unfasten
captive
screw
PN 4277219B
6498027A
4.55-1

b.
Disconnect the tubing from the bubble/blood detectors.
c.
Disconnect the bubble/blood detector cables from the Diluter 2 card. Refer to
Figure A.3-5 and Table A.3-5 for locations.
d.
Remove the bubble/blood detectors and associated cables from the instrument.
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module

1.
Install the replacement bubble/blood detectors.

a.
Install the new detector bracket.
a.
Connect the tubing to the bubble/blood detectors.
b.
Fasten the captive screw.
c.
Route the bubble/blood detector cables to the Diluter 2 card, securing them with
retaining clips.
d.
Connect the cables to the Diluter 2 card.
2.
Reinstall the rocker bed.
3.
4.
Go to the Preliminary Checks procedure.
Preliminary Checks
1.
2.
Check the bubble/blood detector sensors and cables:

a.
Access the Diluter 2 card. Refer to Figure 2.4-5 for location.
b.
Ensure the connections at J1 (front sensor) and J3 (rear sensor) are secure and not
stretched or binding.
c.
Ensure the sensors and the cables are not rubbed by moving parts.
Verify the needle vents correctly:

a.
4.55-2
At the Analyzer 1)
Select CBC-DIFF test mode.
2)
Set the aspirations/tube to 2.
b.
Load a cassette with a tube of diluent and place the cassette in the loading bay.
c.
Observe the tube when the needle pierces the cap and verify several bubbles appear.
If no bubbles appear, troubleshoot the needle vent system and repeat the check.
3.
Verify the aspiration tubing is the correct type, size and length as shown in the
instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
4.
Check the integrity of the aspiration pathway:

a.
b.
During aspiration, verify there are no bubbles or leaks in the aspiration pathway. If
there are bubbles or leaks, correct the problem in the aspiration pathway and repeat
the check.
c.
Load a cassette with a tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in
the loading bay.
PN 4277219B

d.
5.
During aspiration, verify the sample extends approximately 5 cm (2 in.) beyond the
rear sensor and the sample does not appear streamed or thinned excessively. If the
sample is short or is streamed, correct the problem in the aspiration pathway and
repeat the checks.
Verify the aspiration pathway is backwashed correctly after aspiration. If the backwash
does not clean adequately, resolve the problem and repeat the checks.
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module

1.
Do the Preliminary Checks before doing this procedure.
2.
Ensure the Analytical Station is on for at least 20 minutes before going to step 3.
3.
At the Analyzer:
b.
Select the CBC-ONLY test mode.
c.
Disable the bubble/blood detectors (MAIN MENU tt SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt

BLOOD DETECTOR).
4.
5.
When the cycle ends, adjust the sensor output settings on the Diluter 2 card. Refer to
Figure A.3-5 for test point and potentiometer locations.
6.
7.
PN 4277219B
a.
a.
Measure the front sensor output at TP4, using TP12 as ground.
b.
Adjust the front sensor input using R25 until the reading at TP4 is the value
indicated on the front sensor cable.
c.
Measure the rear sensor output at TP8, using TP12 as ground.
d.
Adjust the rear sensor input using R44 until the reading at TP8 is the value
indicated on the rear sensor cable.
Using TP12 as ground, read the front sensor input voltage at TP3 and the rear sensor
input voltage at TP7. Ensure the voltage at either test point is within the limits specified
in Table A.1-26.
r
If the voltage at either test point is greater than the limits, there may be a bubble in
the optical path. Try to clear the pathway and repeat from step 4.
If the readings are acceptable, go to step 7.
Cycle diluent two more times and monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as
ground. Verify the voltages are within the verification range specified in Table A.1-26 of
the values indicated on the respective sensor cables. If the output of either sensor is out
of tolerance, do the following before continuing with the test:
a.
Check for bubbles in the lines.
b.
Ensure the instrument is backwashing correctly.
c.
Repeat the procedure from step 5 to readjust R25 and R44.
8.
Load a cassette with a tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in the
loading bay.
9.
Monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as ground. Verify that within
10 seconds after the last backwash, the voltages are within the Verification Range limits
specified in Table A.1-26 of the values indicated on the respective sensor cables.
4.55-3

If the output of either sensor is out of tolerance, troubleshoot and correct the problems
before proceeding. The failure could be caused by:
r
Poor backwashing
Sensor drifts
Diluter 2 card problems
Bubbles
Incorrect initial adjustment.
10. Set the number of aspirations/tube to 3.

11. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in the
loading bay.
ATTENTION: Ensure the sample/hold output voltage has stabilized before recording the value.
12. Read the sample/hold circuit output voltages at TP1 (front) and TP5 (rear) for each of
the three samples, using TP12 as ground. Record the voltages between 1 and 10 seconds
after the rear detector voltage drops and stabilizes.
13. Use the recorded values to calculate T1 and T2 as follows:
T1 = X + 0.040
2
X
T2 = X + ---------------------------------Value of TP5
Where: X = value of TP5 - value of TP1

14. Determine the largest of the values calculated for T1 and T2. That is the threshold
adjustment.
15. Measure the threshold value at TP11, using TP12 as ground, and adjust R57 until it is set
to 1.1 times the value selected in step 14.
Note: Multiplying the threshold value by 1.1 gives a 10% margin on the threshold
setting, resulting in fewer false partial aspiration failures when running low samples and
5C Abnormal II control.
16. Reinstall the protective cover on the Diluter 2 card, ensuring that no cables are pinched.
17. Enable the bubble/blood detectors.
Random Access Module

B A pair of hemostats
B An external DVM
B Three tubes of diluent
B One tube of normal whole blood
B One tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control at room temperature
4.55-4
PN 4277219B

Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module

1.
2.
Remove the rocker bed for easier access to the bubble/blood detector cables. See
Heading 4.43.
3.
Open the lower front door of the Diluter.
4.
To access the bubble/blood detectors:

a.
Disconnect the hand detector mounting bracket from the Diluter as shown in
Figure 4.55-3 and let the hand detector and its mounting bracket hang down, out of
the way.
Figure 4.55-2 Moving the Hand-Detector Mounting Bracket

R e m o v e
Unfasten
R e m o v e
Loosen
7 2 1 9 0 0 6 B
b.
5.
PN 4277219B
Disconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the Random Access module 1)
At the BSV, disconnect tubing 205
2)
At the BSV, note the routing of tubing 211, then disconnect it.
3)
At the front blood detector, disconnect the needle input tubing.
4)
Remove the knob of the BSV.
5)
At the rear blood detector, disconnect tubing 77, the tubing to the aspiration
pump.
Remove the defective bubble/blood detectors. See Figure 4.55-3.

a.
Disconnect the red and white striped pinch tubing from the bubble/blood detectors.
b.
Remove the two screws securing the bubble/blood detector bracket and pull out the
bracket.
c.
Disconnect the bubble/blood detector cables from the Diluter 2 card. Refer to
Figure A.3-5 and Table A.3-5 for locations.
d.
Remove the bubble/blood detectors and associated cables from the instrument.
4.55-5

Figure 4.55-3 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random
Access Module
R e m o v e
s c re w s
7 2 1 9 0 1 4 B
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module

1.
Install the replacement bubble/blood detectors.

a.
Install the new bubble/blood detector bracket.
b.
Connect the tubing to the bubble/blood detectors.
c.
Route the bubble/blood detector cables to the Diluter 2 card, securing them with
retaining clips.
d.
Connect the cables to the Diluter 2 card, ensuring the connections at J1 (front
sensor) and J3 (rear sensor) are secure and not stretched or binding.
e.
Ensure the sensors and the cables are not in the path of moving parts.
2.
Reconnect the tubing on the left side of the Random Access module and reinstall the BSV
knob.
3.
Reattach the hand detector mounting bracket to the Diluter.
4.
5.
6.
Go to the Preliminary Checks procedure.
Preliminary Checks
4.55-6
1.
Verify the aspiration tubing is the correct type, size and length as shown in the
instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
2.
Check the integrity of the aspiration pathway:

a.
At the Workstation, select the CBC-DIFF (CD) test mode.
b.
Load a cassette with a tube of normal blood and place the cassette in the loading bay.
c.
At the Analyzer, set the aspirations/tube to 5.

PN 4277219B

d.
3.
During aspiration verify:

r
There are no bubbles or leaks in the aspiration pathway. If there are bubbles or
leaks, correct the problem in the aspiration pathway and repeat the check.
The sample extends past the rear sensor and the sample does not appear
streamed or thinned excessively. If the sample is short or is streamed, correct
the problem in the aspiration pathway and repeat the checks.
Verify the aspiration pathway is backwashed correctly after aspiration. If the backwash
does not clean adequately, resolve the problem and repeat the checks.
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module

1.
Do the Preliminary Checks before doing this procedure.
2.
Ensure the Analytical Station is on for at least 20 minutes before going to step 4.
3.
At the Workstation, select the CBC only (C) test mode.
4.
At the Analyzer:
a.
b.
Disable the bubble/blood detectors (MAIN MENU tt SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt

BLOOD DETECTOR).
5.
6.
When the cycle ends, adjust the sensor output settings on the BD ADJ card
(Figure A.2-3:
7.
a.
Measure the front sensor output at TP4, using TP12 as ground.
b.
Adjust the front sensor input using R25 until the reading at TP4 is 10 times the
value indicated on the front sensor cable.
c.
Measure the rear sensor output at TP8, using TP12 as ground.
d.
Adjust the rear sensor input using R44 until the reading at TP8 is 10.00 (1.00 x 10).
Cycle diluent two more times and monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as
ground. Verify the voltages are within the verification range specified in Table A.1-26 of
the values indicated on the respective sensor cables. If the output of either sensor is out
of tolerance, do the following before continuing with the test:
a.
Check for bubbles in the lines.
b.
Ensure the instrument is backwashing correctly.
c.
Repeat the procedure from step 5 to readjust R25 and R44.
8.
Load a cassette with a tube of 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in
the loading bay.
9.
Monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as ground. Verify that within
10 seconds after the last backwash, the voltages are within the Verification Range limits
specified in Table A.1-26 of the values indicated on the respective sensor cables.
If the output of either sensor is out of tolerance, troubleshoot and correct the problems
before proceeding. The failure could be caused by:
PN 4277219B
Poor backwashing
Sensor drifts
Diluter 2 card problems

4.55-7

Bubbles
Incorrect initial adjustment.
10. Set the number of aspirations/tube to 3.

11. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control and place the
cassette in the loading bay.
ATTENTION: Ensure the sample/hold output voltage has stabilized before recording the value.
12. Read the sample/hold circuit output voltages at TP1 (front) and TP5 (rear) for each of
the three samples, using TP12 as ground. Record the voltages between 1 and 10 seconds
after the rear detector voltage drops and stabilizes.
13. Use the recorded values to calculate T1 and T2 as follows:
T1 = X + 0.040
2
X
T2 = X + ---------------------------------Value of TP5
Where: X = value of TP5 - value of TP1

14. Determine the largest of the values calculated for T1 and T2. That is the threshold
adjustment.
15. Measure the threshold value at TP11, using TP12 as ground, and adjust R57 until it is set
to 1.1 times the value selected in step 13.
Note: Multiplying the threshold value by 1.1 gives a 10% margin on the threshold
setting, resulting in fewer false partial aspiration failures when running low samples and
5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II control.
16. Enable the bubble/blood detector.
Verification
Perform the BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.56.
4.55-8
PN 4277219B

BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST
4.56

Purpose
Use this test to ensure the bubble/blood detectors are working correctly and the appropriate
aspiration errors are generated.
B Two tubes of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control
B One tube of clean diluent
B Cassette
B Four empty tubes
B Hemostat or equivalent clamping device
B 12 tubes of different whole-blood specimens. If possible obtain specimens that span the
range of RBC and Hgb values typically run on the instrument.
Performance Test
1.
At the Analyzer, set the aspirations/tube to 3.
2.
Select CBC only test mode.
3.
4.
5.
PN 4277219B
Load a cassette with a tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control, place the cassette in
the loading bay, and monitor the instrument for alarms or error messages.
r
If there are no alarms or error messages, the blood check is good. Go to step 4.
If any alarms or error messages occur, correct the problem; go to step 10.
Load a cassette with an empty tube, place the cassette in the loading bay, and monitor the
instrument for error messages.
r
If an ASPIRATION N or N_P occurs for each air sample, the air check is good. Go to
step 5.
If the correct aspiration messages are not displayed, correct the problem; go to
step 10.
Load a cassette with a tube of clean diluent, place the cassette in the loading bay, and
monitor the instrument for error messages.
r
If an ASPIRATION N or N_P occurs for each diluent sample, the diluent check is
good. Go to step 6.
If the correct aspiration messages are not displayed, correct the problem; go to
step 10.
4.56-1

6.
7.
Load a cassette with a tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control and place the
cassette in the loading bay. Before the first sample backwashes, carefully clamp the
tubing between the front blood detector and the BSV, then monitor the next sample for
error messages.
r
If an ASPIRATION C occurs for the next sample, the carryover check is good.
Remove the hemostats and go to step 7.
If an APIRATION C does not occur, repeat this step.
Load a cassette with a nearly empty tube of control material and place the cassette in the
loading bay. Run the tube until the needle is exposed beyond the control material inside
the tube (4.8 mm [3/16 in.]) and bubbles are aspirated.
r
If an ASPIRATION B is displayed for the sample, the bubble check is good. Go to

step 8.
If the correct message is not displayed, repeat the check with another tube. If the
correct message is still not displayed, correct the problem; go to step 10.
8.
9.
Load a cassette with 12 different blood specimens, place the cassette in the loading bay,
and monitor the instrument for aspiration alarms and messages.
r
If there are no alarms or error messages, the blood check is good.
If any alarms or error messages occur, correct the problem; go to step 10.
10. Handle any problems encountered as follows:

a.
Troubleshoot the system for a failure.
b.
Troubleshoot the bubble/blood detector system for a failure.
c.
Readjust the blood detector. See Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the
Retic Module under Heading 4.55, BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
AND ADJUSTMENT.
d.
Verification
None
4.56-2
PN 4277219B

NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.57

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the Needle Cap-Piercer module and to align the module and its
sensors (bellows up and bellows down) properly.
B Cassette containing 12 empty tubes
B Ball-end Allen wrench set
Replacement
1.
Power off the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
2.
For easier access to the Needle Cap-Piercer module, loosen the BSV module.
WARNING The Needle Cap-Piercer module may contain biohazardous material. Handle accordingly.
3.
4.
At the Needle Cap-Piercer module (Figure 4.57-1), disconnect the tubing from:
r
The bellows interlock actuator
The bellows cylinder.
Disconnect the bellows up sensor from P15 and the bellows down sensor from P16.
Note: P15 and P16 are connected to P10 on the Sensor Distribution card.
5.
Remove the two Allen screws securing the Needle Cap-Piercer module to the Diluter
base. Refer to Figure 4.57-1
Figure 4.57-1 Removing the Needle Cap-Piercer Module
Remove bellows
cylinder tubing
Bellows
interlock
Disengage
interlock
Bellows up
sensor
Lockdown
screws
Remove bellows
interlock tubing
Bellows down
sensor
7253373B
PN 4277219B
Bellows
cylinder
Remove screws
4.57-1

6.
Remove the module.
7.
Install the replacement module and connect the tubing, but do not tighten the Allen
screws.
WARNING The needle is sharp and may contain biohazardous material. To avoid skin puncture, use care
when working in the piercing station.
8.
Disengage the bellows interlock by prying up the rod mechanism with the end of a
screwdriver as shown in Figure 4.57-1, and carefully push back the bellows cylinder arm
to expose the needle.
9.
Tilt and hold the rocker bed in the forward position and center the needle in the stripper
plate opening.
Note: Use the stripper plate as a guide to ensure the stripper plate is flush against the
upper end of the bellows.
10. When the needle is properly centered, tighten the three Allen screws.
11. Expand the bellows and ensure the stripper plate does not contact the bellows.
12. Repeat from step 8 as needed to adjust the position.
13. Connect the bellows up sensor to P15 and the bellows down sensor to P16.
14. Power up the Analytical Station and adjust the sensors. Go to Bellow Up and Bellows
Down Sensor Adjustment.
Note: Disregard any sensor errors that occur on power up until you have made the
sensor adjustments.
Bellow Up and Bellows Down Sensor Adjustment

1.
For better access to the sensors, disconnect the hand detector mounting bracket from the
Diluter as shown in Figure 4.57-2 and let the hand detector and its mounting bracket
hang down, out of the way.

R e m o v e
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
U n fa s te n
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
L o o s e n
L o o s e n
G E N
4.57-2
S S y s te m
7 2 1 9 0 1 2 B
PN 4277219B

2.
Loosen the locking screw on both sensors (Figure 4.57-1) enough to allow the sensors to
move in the slot.
WARNING The needle is sharp and may contain biohazardous material. To avoid skin puncture, use care
when working in the piercing station.
3.
Disengage the bellows interlock by prying up the rod mechanism with the end of a
screwdriver as shown in Figure 4.57-1, and carefully push down on the cylinder until it
is in the fully retracted position.
4.
Move up the bellows down sensor (Figure 4.57-1) until the LED goes off, then move the
sensor down until the LED goes back on. Mark this as position 1.
5.
Continue slowly moving the bellows down sensor down until the LED goes off again.
Mark this as position 2.
6.
Move the bellows down sensor to the center point between position 1 and position 2 and
tighten the sensors locking screw.
7.
Fully extend the bellows cylinder to the locked position.
8.
Move down the bellows up sensor (Figure 4.57-1) until the LED goes off, then move the
sensor up until the LED goes back on. Mark this as position 3.
9.
Continue slowly moving the bellows up sensor up until the LED goes out again. Mark
this as position 4.
10. Move the bellows up sensor to the center point between position 3 and position 4 and
tighten the sensors locking screw.
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
Using the cassette of empty tubes, select F07 to ensure the tubes are being pierced in the
center and no errors occur.
2.
Do the WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 5.4.
4.57-3

4.57-4
PN 4277219B
SERVICE/REPAIR PROCEDURES
PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENTS
4.58
PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT

REPLACEMENTS
Purpose
Use these procedures to test the Probe-Wipe module, to adjust the optoswitches, to align the
cleaning truck on the Probe-Wipe module with a moveable backwash cup, and to replace
defective components including the cleaning truck, backwash cup, motor, bearings, and
sensors.
Tools/Materials Needed
B Allen wrench
B Diluent for cycling in Manual mode.
Probe-Wipe Test
PN 4277219B
1.
Select F28, CHECKING PROBE WIPE, at the Diluter/numeric keypad.
2.
During the probe-wipe test verify the following occurs without any alarms or error
messages:
a.
The aspirator tip retracts.
b.
The cleaning truck moves smoothly up the full length of the aspirator tip, then
moves back down without binding.
c.
The cleaning truck moves about a quarter of the way up the aspirator tip, and then
moves back down.
d.
The aspirator tip returns to the extended position.
3.
If the probe-wipe test is successful and you replaced a component in the Probe-Wipe
module, go to Verification.
4.
If the probe-wipe test is not successful, determine the cause of the problem:
a.
Repeat F28 and verify there are no obstructions in the cleaning truck pathway. If any
obstructions are visible, remove the obstructions, then repeat F28.
b.
Verify there is no buildup on the aspirator tip. If there is a buildup on the aspirator
tip, clean the aspirator tip with distilled water and lint-free tissues, then repeat F28.
c.
If you are testing a Probe-Wipe module with a moveable backwash cup, ensure the
cleaning truck is aligned with the aspirator tip; go to the Cleaning Truck Alignment
procedure.
d.
If you replaced a component in the Probe-Wipe module, try adjusting the

probe-wipe sensors; go to the Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment procedure.
e.
Check the Probe-Wipe module for defective components and replace as necessary;
go to the Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement procedure.
4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement

1.
2.
For better access to the Probe-Wipe module, disconnect the hand detector mounting
bracket from the Diluter as shown in Figure 4.58-1 and let the hand detector and its
mounting bracket hang down, out of the way.

R e m o v e
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
U n fa s te n
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
L o o s e n
L o o s e n
G E N
3.
S S y s te m
7 2 1 9 0 1 2 B
Remove the Probe-Wipe module from the Diluter:

a.
Ensure the aspirator tip is extended.
b.
Unfasten the two captive screws securing the Probe-Wipe module to the BSV
module. See Figure 4.58-2.
Figure 4.58-2 Captive Screws Securing Probe-Wipe Module to BSV Module
Unfasten captive
screws (2)
7253344A
4.58-2
PN 4277219B
c.
Disconnect the cylinder attached to the front section of the BSV.
d.
Disconnect the probe-wipe sensor and motor cable, P1.
WARNING Possible contamination from biohazardous material. The cleaning truck, backwash cup, and
associated tubing may contain biohazardous material. Handle carefully.
e.
4.
Lift up the Probe-Wipe module, disconnect the tubing from the cleaning truck and
the backwash cup, and remove the Probe-Wipe module from the Diluter.
To replace the probe-wipe up or the probe-wipe down sensor:

a.
Unscrew the defective sensor from the from the Probe-Wipe module. See
Figure 4.58-3 or Figure 4.58-4.
b.
Unsolder the sensor wires.
c.
d.
Position the replacement switch in the Probe-Wipe module and secure it with the
screw.
Figure 4.58-3 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Stationary Backwash Cup
Motor
Sensor
Setscrew
Cleaning
truck
Cleaning
truck
bracket
Bearings
Backwash
cup
6498137B
5.
PN 4277219B
To clean or replace the cleaning truck or the backwash cup in a Probe-Wipe module
with a stationary backwash cup (Figure 4.58-3):
a.
Raise the cleaning truck by manually turning the shaft.
b.
Remove the screw on the front of the backwash cup. Refer to Figure 4.58-3.
c.
Pry open the bracket holding the cleaning truck and pull the cleaning truck and
backwash cup out of the Probe-Wipe module.
d.
Clean or replace the cleaning truck and the backwash cup as needed.
e.
Position the cleaning truck in the backwash cup and install the cleaning truck/
backwash cup assembly in the Probe-Wipe module, securing it with the screw.
4.58-3
6.
To clean or replace the cleaning truck in a Probe-Wipe module with a moveable

backwash cup:
a.
Pry open the bracket holding the cleaning truck (Figure 4.58-4) and pull the
cleaning truck out of the Probe-Wipe module.
b.
Clean or replace the cleaning truck.
c.
Ensure the fork on the cleaning truck bracket is aligned as shown in Figure 4.58-5.
If necessary, loosen the Allen screw, readjust the fork, and then tighten the screw.
d.
Install the cleaning truck in the cleaning truck bracket.
Figure 4.58-4 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Moveable Backwash Cup
Motor
Sensor
Setscrew
Cleaning
truck
bracket
Cleaning
truck
Backwash
cup
cylinder
Allen screw
Backwash
cup
6498141B
7.
8.
9.
To clean or replace the backwash cup in a Probe-Wipe module with a moveable

backwash cup:
a.
Unscrew the Allen screw on the bottom of the backwash cup (Figure 4.58-4) and
remove the cup.
b.
Clean or replace the backwash cup.
c.
Install the backwash cup on the backwash cup cylinder.
To replace the motor:

a.
Remove the setscrew from the coupling below the motor. Refer to Figure 4.58-3 or
Figure 4.58-4.
b.
Pull the motor up and out of the Probe-Wipe module.
c.
Position the replacement motor in the Probe-Wipe module and secure it with the
setscrew.
To replace the bearings in the base of the Probe-Wipe module in a Probe-Wipe module
with a stationary backwash cup (Figure 4.58-3):
a.
4.58-4
Remove the two screws at the base of the Probe-Wipe module. Refer to
Figure 4.58-3.
PN 4277219B
b.
Remove the bearings.
c.
Install the replacement bearings in the Probe-Wipe module and secure with the
screws.
10. Connect the diluent and waste lines to the ports on the cleaning truck and the backwash
cup (refer to Figure 4.58-3 or Figure 4.58-4), and reinstall the Probe-Wipe module in the
Diluter. Do not reinstall the hand-detector bracket at this time.
11. Connect the cylinder to the rear section of the BSV.
13. If you replaced the cleaning truck or its bracket on the Probe-Wipe module with a
moveable backwash cup, ensure the cleaning truck is aligned with the aspirator tip. Do
the Cleaning Truck Alignment procedure, beginning at step 2.
14. Do the Probe-Wipe Test procedure at the beginning of this section to verify the
Probe-Wipe module is working correctly.
Cleaning Truck Alignment

ATTENTION: Do not attempt to align the cleaning truck with a bent aspirator tip.
Check the condition of the aspirator tip. If the aspirator tip is bent, replace the BSV before
continuing with this procedure.
Initial Adjustment
1.
For better access to the Probe-Wipe module, remove the screws securing the hand
detector mounting bracket to the Diluter and let the hand detector and its mounting
bracket hang down, out of the way. Refer to Figure 4.58-1.
2.
Verify the fork of the cleaning truck bracket is aligned as shown in Figure 4.58-5.
3.
If necessary, loosen the Allen screw, readjust the fork, and then tighten the Allen screw.
Note: The cleaning truck mounting bracket is slotted to allow side-to-side and
front-to-back adjustment of the cleaning truck bracket.
Figure 4.58-5 Alignment of the Cleaning Truck Bracket in a Module with Moveable Backwash Cup
M o u n tin g
b ra c k e t
A d ju s t fo r k
le ft a n d r ig h t
A d ju s t fo r k
in a n d o u t
A lle n s c r e w
2 .5 4 m m
( 0 .1 0 in .)
9 0 .0 d e g re e s
0 .7 6 m m
( 0 .0 3 in .)
PN 4277219B
6 4 9 8 1 8 7 B
4.58-5
Final Adjustment
ATTENTION: This adjustment ensures that the cleaning truck can float freely within the fork
while the truck travels up and down the aspirator tip. The fork must be positioned so that the
cleaning truck has equal play from side to side and from front to back while the hole is
centered on the aspirator tip. If the fork restricts the movement of the cleaning truck in any
direction, the truck could bind on the aspirator tip during operation.
1.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F06 to release the pressure on the BSV and
manually rotate the aspirator tip all the way into the Diluter.
2.
Manually rotate the lead screw in the Probe-Wipe module to move the cleaning truck up
until you can see the tip of the aspirator tip in the cone at the bottom of the truck.
3.
Center the cleaning truck in the fork of the cleaning truck bracket.
a.
Loosen the Allen screw on the cleaning truck bracket. Refer to Figure 4.58-5
b.
Being careful to maintain the fork at the 90 degree angle shown in Figure 4.58-5,
position the fork so that the truck is centered in the fork.
c.
Tighten the Allen screw.
d.
Verify the cleaning truck is still centered within the fork and the fork is still at a
90 degree angle to the bracket. If not, repeat from step a.
4.
Press STOP twice to exit the F06 function.
5.
Do the Probe-Wipe Test procedure at the beginning of this section to verify the
6.
Reattach the hand-detector bracket to the BSV module.
Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment

1.
For better access to the Probe-Wipe module, remove the screws securing the hand
detector mounting bracket to the Diluter and let the hand detector and its mounting
bracket hang down, out of the way. Refer to Figure 4.58-1.
2.
Select F28, CHECKING PROBE WIPE, to determine which sensor needs adjustment.
3.
Open the left door of the Diluter to view the probe-wipe sensor LEDs, UPSEN and
DNSEN, on the Diluter 2 card. Manually move the probe wipe truck up to the sensor.
4.
Loosen the screw for the appropriate sensor, move the sensor until the LED for that
sensor lights, then tighten the screw.
5.
Do the Probe-Wipe Test procedure at the beginning of this section to verify the
Verification
1.
4.58-6
Cycle diluent five times in the Manual mode and verify:

r
The cleaning truck and backwash cup are not leaking.
No system errors are generated.
2.
3.
Do the Probe-Wipe Test, steps 1 and 2.
4.
Cycle blood in the Manual mode and ensure no messages are generated.
PN 4277219B

HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
4.59

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the hand-detector assembly when needed.
B Diluent or blood specimens for cycling in the Manual mode
Procedure
1.
Press POWER OFF on the Diluter to prevent cycling during replacement.
2.
Open the front cover and disconnect the connector P32.
3.
Undo the threaded shaft securing the hand detector assembly to the BSV module, using
care not to lose the spring. See Figure 4.59-1 for location.
Figure 4.59-1 Replacing the Hand-Detector Assembly

THREADED
SHAFT
SPRING
HAND DETECTOR
SPRING
4.
PN 4277219B
7253371A
To install the assembly:

a.
Align the replacement assembly with the hand-detector spring, and hook the lower
edge into place.
b.
Insert the shaft and ensure it aligns with the holes and the spring, then screw it into
place.
5.
Connect P32.
6.
Press POWER ON on the Diluter and go to Verification.
4.59-1

Verification
4.59-2
1.
Select F06, Release BSV, to ensure the aspirator tip does not contact the hand detector
assembly.
2.
Cycle several samples in the Manual mode and ensure there are no errors.
PN 4277219B

BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
4.60

Purpose
Use the procedures in this section for BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator
Replacement and for BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement.
BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator Replacement

B Gauze
B 7/64-in., right-angle Allen wrench
Procedure
WARNING Risk of personal contamination. The BSV and its associated tubing may contain biohazardous
material. Avoid skin contact. Clean up spills immediately in accordance with local regulations and
acceptable laboratory procedures.
1.
Press DRAIN on the Diluter/numeric keypad.
2.
Use F06 to release the BSV.
3.
Place gauze beneath and around the BSV to catch any spills.
4.
Remove the BSV and the O-ring from the mounting post as directed in the Online Help
System or Chapter 2 of the Special Procedures and Troubleshooting manual.
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the tubing from the BSV unless you are replacing the BSV.
5.
If replacing the BSV, remove the tubing from the BSV.
6.
If replacing the BSV shaft, spring, housing or insulator:

a.
Remove the three Allen screws securing the BSV housing to the BSV module
bracket. See Figure 4.60-1. Retain all hardware.
ATTENTION: When the shaft lever cap is loose, the BSV spring decompresses.
PN 4277219B
b.
Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the BSV shaft lever cap. Retain the
hardware.
c.
Remove the BSV housing, insulator, spring or shaft as necessary for replacement.
4.60-1

Figure 4.60-1 Accessing the BSV Insulator, Housing and Spring

2 Remove Allen
screws (3)
3 Remove Phillips-head
screws (2)
1 Remove BSV
7253405B
d.
Position the BSV spring, insulator and housing on the shaft and reinstall the shaft
lever cap with the retained hardware. Use Figure 4.60-2 as a guide.
Figure 4.60-2 Installing the BSV Components
7253411E
e.
Align the screw holes in the insulator and housing with the screw holes in the BSV
module bracket, compress the BSV spring, and secure the BSV housing to the BSV
module bracket with the retained hardware.
Note: When the BSV housing is installed correctly, the BSV guide post sits next to
the bottom of the Probe-Wipe module motor.
4.60-2
7.
If you replaced the BSV, install the BSV tubing on the replacement BSV. Refer to
Figure 2.17-7 for port identification, Table 2.17-3, for port functions and tubing
numbers. Refer to the instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for
tubing replacements.
8.
Install the O-ring and the BSV.
9.
Press ENTER on the Diluter/numeric keypad to reinitiate F06 and verify the BSV sections
rotate smoothly and completely.
PN 4277219B

10. Press STOP twice to exit F06.

11. Press RINSE to refill the baths. Verify the BSV is not leaking.
12. Cycle diluent in the Manual mode and in the Automatic mode and ensure the BSV does
not leak.
13. Remove the gauze and clean up any spills.
BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement

B Hemostats
Procedure
1.
2.
For better access to CL1 and its sensor, remove three of the screws and loosen the fourth
screw securing the hand detector mounting bracket to the Diluter, and let the hand
detector and its mounting bracket hang down, out of the way. Refer to Figure 4.58-1.
3.
Disconnect the tubing from the BSV Manual-mode cylinder, CL1 (Figure 4.60-2).
4.
Push back the sleeve on CL1 (Figure 4.60-2) and lift the cylinder arm off the ball joint to
disconnect the cylinder from the front section of the BSV.
5.
Remove the pin securing CL1 (Figure 4.60-2) and slide CL1 from its mount.
6.
Disconnect the probe position sensor from P33.

Note: P33 is connected to P7 on the Sensor Distribution card.
7.
On the new cylinder, verify the probe position sensor is oriented as shown in
Figure 4.60-3.
8.
Connect the tubing to the bottom port of CL1. Do not connect the tubing to the top port
at this time.
Note: Leaving the top pressure line disconnected allows you to manually move the
aspirator tip as needed in the Probe Position Sensor Adjustment procedure below.
9.
Install the new cylinder on its mount and connect it to the front section of the BSV.
10. Connect the probe position sensor to P33.

11. With the hemostats, pinch the tubing for the top port of CL1.
12. Power up the Analytical Station and adjust the probe position sensor. Go to Probe
Position Sensor Adjustment.
Note: Disregard any sensor errors that occur on power up until you have made the
sensor adjustments.
PN 4277219B
4.60-3

Figure 4.60-3 Probe Position Sensor Orientation
Probe
position
sensor
Locking
screw
7253438E
Probe Position Sensor Adjustment

1.
Loosen the locking screw (Figure 4.60-3) on the probe position sensor enough to allow
the sensor to move in the slot.
2.
Manually move the aspirator tip to the in position over the rinse trough.
3.
Move the probe position sensor down until the LED goes off, then move the sensor up
until the LED goes back on. Mark this as position 1.
4.
Continue slowly moving the probe position sensor up until the LED goes out again.
Mark this as position 2.
5.
Move the probe position sensor to the center point between position 1 and position 2
and tighten the sensors locking screw.
6.
Remove the hemostats from the tubing for the top port of CL1 and connect the tubing to
CL1.
7.
8.
Go to Verification.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5.
4.60-4
PN 4277219B

USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS
4.61

Purpose
Use these procedures to access and fill in the electronic forms resident in the Workstation: the
System Verification Report, Instrument Reference Report and System Installation Report.
Note: Saving an electronic form stores the form in the database where it is retained. You can
access the form again by using the scroll buttons next to that forms screen.
B None
Using the System Verification Report
1.
Select
screen.
2.
Fill in the required information on the screen:
3.
tt
tt
to access the SYSTEM VERIFICATION REPORT
a.
Select
to access the fields of a new form on the screen.
b.
Ensure the information displayed automatically is correct.
c.
Enter information in the remaining fields as necessary.
d.
Select
to save the information.
To record any problems:

a.
From the View/Enter box, select PROBLEMS to display the SYSTEM VERIFICATION
REPORT - PROBLEMS screen.
b.
Select
c.
Enter information as necessary.
to access the fields on the screen.
Note: Record only one problem per screen.
4.
PN 4277219B
d.
Select
e.
Repeat steps b through d for each problem.
If a printout is needed, select
to print the report.
4.61-1

Using the Instrument Reference Report
1.
Select
screen.
2.
tt
tt
to access the INSTRUMENT REFERENCE REPORT
a.
Select
to access the fields on the screen. The instrument data and the ranges
for the manually entered data are displayed automatically.
b.
Ensure the instrument data in the header is correct.
ATTENTION: The ranges are provided as references for the manually entered data. The
ranges are not used to flag entries that are outside the limits.
c.
Enter additional header information and reference values as necessary.
ATTENTION: The values cannot be edited after they are saved. Ensure all fields are filled in
correctly before saving.
d.
3.
Select
to save the report.
print the report.
Using the System Installation Report
1.
Select
2.
3.
tt
tt
to access the SYSTEM INSTALLATION REPORT screen.
a.
Select
b.
Ensure the information displayed automatically is correct.
c.
Enter information in the remaining fields as necessary.
d.
Select
To record any problems:

a.
From the View/Enter box, select PROBLEMS to display the SYSTEM INSTALLATION
REPORT - PROBLEMS screen.
b.
Select
c.
Note: Record only one problem per screen.
4.61-2
PN 4277219B

4.
d.
Select
e.
Repeat steps b through d for each problem.
f.
Select
to return to the SYSTEM INSTALLATION REPORT screen.
To record any missing parts:

a.
From the View/Enter box, select MISSING PARTS to display the SYSTEM
INSTALLATION REPORT - MISSING PARTS screen.
b.
Select
c.
Note: Record only one missing part per screen.
5.
d.
Select
e.
Repeat steps b through d for each missing part.
f.
Select
To record any replacement parts:

a.
From the View/Enter box, select REPLACEMENT PARTS to display the SYSTEM
INSTALLATION REPORT - REPLACEMENT PARTS screen.
b.
Select
c.
Note: Record only one replacement part per screen.
6.
PN 4277219B
d.
Select
e.
Repeat steps b through d for each replacement part.
f.
Select
to print the report.
4.61-3

4.61-4
PN 4277219B

RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
4.62

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective retic mixing motor or to access and replace its belt
on either the Retic Module or the Random Access Module.
Retic Module
Removal
1.
2.
Disconnect the blood/stain input tubing to the retic chamber. See Figure 4.62-1.
Figure 4.62-1 Removing the Retic Motor from the Retic Module
Unfasten captive screws
RETIC MIXING
MOTOR
Remove
blood/stain
input tubing here
Remove screws
Remove
mixing motor
ground strap
Unfasten captive
screws
6498062A
PN 4277219B
Remove screws
3.
Disconnect the motor cable J66, located behind the Retic module.
4.
Remove the motor ground strap from the bubble/blood detector bracket.
5.
For better access to the area, unfasten the captive screws on the mounting bracket for
MF16 and disconnect P11.
6.
Unfasten the three captive screws securing the Retic module to the floor of the Diluter
and pull the Retic module forward.
7.
Remove the two screws securing the retic and stain chambers bracket to the retic mixing
motor bracket and move the retic and stain chambers bracket out of the way.
8.
Remove the two screws holding the retic mixing motor bracket to the frame of the Retic
module.
4.62-1

9.
Remove the retic mixing motor from the Diluter.
10. If necessary, replace the belt.

Installation
1.
Install the repaired or replacement retic mixing motor:

a.
Position the retic mixing motor in the Diluter, connect J66, and fasten the captive
screws that secure the motor bracket to the Retic module frame.
b.
Slide the Retic module back into the Diluter and fasten the captive screws that
secure the Retic module to the floor of the Diluter.
c.
Connect the motor ground cable.
d.
Reinstall the retic and stain chambers bracket to the motor bracket.
e.
Fasten the captive screws that secure the mounting bracket for MF16 to the Retic
module and reconnect P11.
f.
Reconnect the blood/stain input tubing to the retic chamber.
2.
3.
At the Analyzer, select the Retic test mode and verify the retic mixing motor is working.
Note: You can manually activate the retic mixing motor to verify it is functioning by
using the F05 function and selecting SL66.
4.
Go to Verification.

B A pair of hemostats
Removal
1.
2.
3.
For easier access to the retic motor, remove the rocker bed as directed under
Heading 4.43.
4.
Remove the screw securing the dual four-valve splash shield on the left side of the
Random Access module and remove the shield.
5.
Unfasten the three captive screws on the mounting plate for solenoid manifold MF16
and move the plate out of the way.
Note: For easier access, disconnect the harness for the solenoids.
6.
Remove the splash shield on the right side of the Random Access module.
7.
Remove the two screws securing the retic and stain chambers bracket to the retic mixing
motor bracket and move the retic and stain chambers bracket out of the way.
Note: It is not necessary to disconnect any of the tubing from the chambers.
8.
4.62-2
Unfasten the captive screws holding the retic mixing motor bracket to the frame of the
Random Access module.
PN 4277219B

9.
Remove the nut holding the braided ground wire to the motor assembly and disconnect
the motor cable P1 from P66.
Figure 4.62-2 Removing the Retic Motor from the Random Access Module
1
R e m o v e
s h ie ld
2
U n fa s te n c a p tiv e s c r e w s
a n d m o v e p la te
R e m o v e
s h ie ld
M o v e
c h a m b e r
b ra c k e t
R e m o v e m o to r
a s s e m b ly
D is c o n n e c t
7 2 1 9 0 1 0 B
10. Remove the retic mixing motor from the Diluter.

11. If necessary, replace the belt.
Installation
1.
PN 4277219B
Install the repaired or replacement retic mixing motor:

a.
Position the retic mixing motor in the Diluter, connect the braided ground wire to
the assembly, connect P1 to P66, and fasten the captive screws that secure the motor
bracket to the Random Access module.
b.
Reinstall the retic and stain chambers bracket to the motor bracket.
c.
If you disconnected the harness for the MF16, reconnect it.
d.
Reposition the mounting plate for MF16 and fasten the screws that secure the
mounting plate to the Random Access module.
e.
Reinstall the splash shields.
2.
3.
4.62-3

4.
At the Analyzer, select the Retic test mode and verify the retic mixing motor is working.
Note: You can manually activate the retic mixing motor to verify it is functioning by
using the F05 function and selecting SL66.
5.
Go to Verification.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameters.
4.62-4
PN 4277219B

STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
4.63

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the stain chamber/heater or the retic chamber.
B Hemostat
B Allen wrench
B Gauze
Procedure
1.
Open the front cover of the Diluter to access the Retic or the Random Access module.
2.
If the stain chamber is being replaced, disconnect P1, the stain heater connector.
WARNING The stain chamber may be hot. The temperature is about 37 to 43C (100 to 110F). Be careful
when working around the stain chamber.
3.
Remove the stain and retic chambers bracket. See Figure 4.63-1 (Retic module) or
a.
Remove the two screws behind the retic chamber.
Figure 4.63-1 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Retic Module
Disconnect the
blood/stain
delivery tubing
Remove screws
RETIC
CHAMBER
BLOOD/STAIN
DELIVERY TUBING
STAIN
CHAMBER
Disconnect the
drain tubing
6498065A
PN 4277219B
Unfasten captive
screws
4.63-1

Figure 4.63-2 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Random Access Module
R e m o v e s c re w s
R e tic
c h a m b e r
D is c o n n e c t th e
d r a in tu b in g
B lo o d /s ta in
d e liv e r y tu b in g
S ta in
c h a m b e r
D is c o n n e c t th e
b lo o d /s ta in
d e liv e r y tu b in g
U n fa s te n
c a p tiv e s c r e w s
7 2 1 9 0 3 5 B
ATTENTION: The retic stain contains new methylene blue, which is a permanent dye. Use
care in handling the stain and any associated tubing. Place gauze under any areas where
tubing will be disconnected.
b.
Disconnect the blood/stain delivery tubing from the stain chamber, and the drain
tubing from the stain and the retic chambers.
4.
Loosen the Allen screw that secures the chamber to be replaced to the bracket and
remove the chamber.
5.
Disconnect the tubing from the chamber and install it on the replacement chamber.
6.
Install the new chamber in the bracket and tighten the Allen screw.
7.
Reinstall the chamber bracket in the Retic or Random Access module.
8.
Reconnect the drain tubing and blood/stain delivery lines.
9.
If the stain chamber was replaced, reconnect P1.
Verification
4.63-2
1.
If the stain chamber was replaced, do the HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
procedure to adjust the stain heater. See Heading 4.65.
2.
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameter.
PN 4277219B

PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.64

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the Peltier module.
B Hemostat
Procedure
1.
Open the rear door of the Diluter to access the Peltier module.
2.
Disconnect the cable at J1. See Figure 4.64-1.
Figure 4.64-1 Peltier Module, Rear and Front View

PELTIER REAR VIEW
Remove screws (4)

J1
PELTIER FRONT VIEW
Remove tubing
7253376B
3.
Remove the screws securing the Peltier module to the Diluter wall.
4.
Remove the Peltier module.
5.
At the front of the Diluter, disconnect the input and output tubing from the Peltier
module.
Note: For easier access, raise the left lift and remove the lift cover.
6.
Connect the tubing to the replacement Peltier module.
7.
Install the Peltier module and replace the screws.
8.
Connect the cable at J1.
9.
Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution.
PN 4277219B
4.64-1

Verification
4.64-2
1.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES and ensure the Peltier temperature on
the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen is within the displayed limits.
2.
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameters.
PN 4277219B

HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4.65

Purpose
Use this procedure when you replace the Diluter 4 card or when the heater temperatures are
in question.
Check the heaters to ensure the settings are correct for achieving expected system
performance. Because of the dynamic nature of the heating system, variations can be
expected. If the system is located in a room that has severe ambient temperature variations,
then the heater variation will be wider.
Adjust the stain heater to the correct operating threshold to ensure optimal reaction
temperature for staining the reticulocytes.
B DVM
B Thermal probe
Procedure
1.
Ensure the Analytical Station is on and idle for a minimum of 5 minutes prior to
performing this check.
2.
Open the rear door of the Diluter and remove the shield protecting the Diluter 4 card.
3.
Disconnect the stain heater connector, J1. See Figure 4.65-1.
Figure 4.65-1 Stain Heater Connector
6498028A
PN 4277219B
4.65-1

4.
5.
At the Diluter 4 card, connect the DVM to TP10 (heater set point) and TP13 (ground) to
read dc voltage.
r
If the reading is within the limits specified for TP10 in Table A.3-11, no adjustment
is required. Go to step 5.
If the voltage is incorrect, adjust R91 on the Diluter 4 card.
After completing the adjustment:

a.
Reconnect J1.
b.
6.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2) and select DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES.
7.
Monitor the stain heater temperature on the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen for

1 minute to ensure the temperature is within the displayed range.
r
If the stain heater temperature is within range, go to step 8.
If the temperature is >150F, inspect the thermistor or wiring harness for possible
shorts.
If the temperature is <25F, inspect the wiring harness for mechanical problems or
openings due to corrosion.
8.
Ensure the stain LED on the Diluter 4 card switches on and off after about a minute.
9.
Adjust the ambient temperature displayed on the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen.

a.
Place the thermal probe on the ambient thermister behind the RF Detector Preamp
card.
b.
At the Diluter 4 card, adjust R47 until the Diluter Ambient Temperature display
equals the thermal probe reading.
c.
Close all the doors to prevent drafts and monitor the ambient temperature displays
for 2 minutes.
d.
Ensure the voltage change is <2F.
10. Reinstall the shield for the Diluter 4 card.

11. Ensure the Peltier temperature and the diff heater temperature on the
VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen are within the displayed ranges.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the diff and retic parameters.
4.65-2
PN 4277219B

DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION
4.66

Purpose
ATTENTION: Always verify the diff lytic reagent pump volume and the initial diff preservative
pump volume are acceptable as directed under Headings 4.28 and 4.29, respectively, before
doing this procedure.
Use this procedure to adjust the diff preservative pump at different temperature settings to
ensure the cell counts and DC conductivity noise remain within limits.
B Three normal, whole-blood specimens mixed for at least 30 minutes before using. See
Chapter 4 of the Reference manual for anticoagulant and storage specifications.
B Oscilloscope
Procedure
PN 4277219B
1.
Ensure the diff lytic reagent pump volume (Heading 4.28) and the initial diff
preservative pump volume (Heading 4.29) are acceptable.
2.
3.
Access the AMC switch, SW1, and set positions 1 and 4 for high temperature. See
Table A.2-2 for the position settings.
4.
5.
Set up the oscilloscope to read the DC channel of the ANALOG card:

a.
Set volts/div to 20-mV scale.
b.
Set trigger source to channel 1.
c.
Connect channel 1 to the DC (upper) connector on the ANALOG card.
6.
At the Analyzer, select the CBC/DIFF test mode.
7.
Run four samples of fresh, well-mixed blood, two in the Automatic mode and two in the
Manual mode, and record:
a.
The peak value of the conductivity noise for the DC channel during count.
b.
The DC cell counts.
8.
Verify the DC conductivity noise and the cell counts are within the limits specified for
high temperature mode in Table A.1-19.
9.
If the DC cell counts are outside the limits:

a.
Obtain a different specimen and repeat from step 7.
b.
If the problem persists, determine the cause and fix the problem.
4.66-1

10. If the DC conductivity noise is outside the limits:

a.
Adjust the low volume of the diff preservative pump up or down as shown in
Figure 4.66-1 and rerun blood until the DC conductivity noise falls within limits.
b.
Do the Low Volume Check for the diff preservative pump as directed under
Heading 4.29 and ensure the volume is still within the verfication range.
c.
Repeat steps a and b as often as necessary to achieve the minimum DC conductivity

noise within the verification range.
Figure 4.66-1 Diff Preservative Pump Low Volume Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Hold
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
Adjust
7253237A
11. Power down the Analytical Station and reset the AMC switch for normal temperature.
13. Run four samples of fresh, well-mixed blood, two in the Automatic mode and two in the
Manual mode, and record:
a.
The peak value of the conductivity noise for the DC channel during count.
b.
The DC cell counts.
14. Verify the DC conductivity noise and the cell counts are within the limits specified for
normal temp mode in Table A.1-19.
15. If the DC cell counts are outside the limits:
4.66-2
a.
Obtain a different specimen and repeat from step 13.
b.
If the problem persists, determine the cause and fix the problem.
PN 4277219B

16. If the DC conductivity noise is outside the limits:

a.
Adjust the high volume of the diff preservative pump up or down as shown in
Figure 4.66-2 and rerun blood until the DC conductivity noise is within limits.
b.
Do the High Volume Check for the diff preservative pump as directed under
Heading 4.29 and ensure the volume is still within the verfication range.
c.
Repeat steps a and b as often as necessary to achieve the minimum DC conductivity

noise within the verification range.
17. Power down the Analytical Station and reset the AMC switch to the automatic
temperature mode. Refer to Table A.2-2
Figure 4.66-2 Diff Preservative Pump High Volume Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn
5 L
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
7253238A
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the diff parameters.
Note: If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procecdure, do the
PRECISION VERIFICATION and then go back to theVCS OPTIMIZATION procedure,
Heading 4.71
PN 4277219B
4.66-3

4.66-4
PN 4277219B

DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT
4.67

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective diff heater in either the Retic module or the Random
Access module.
B Two pairs of hemostats or equivalent clamping device
B Absorbent paper or tissue
Removal
1.
2.
To access the diff heater:

a.
Disconnect the hand detector mounting bracket from the Diluter as shown in
Figure 4.67-1 and let the hand detector and its mounting bracket hang down, out of
the way.

R e m o v e
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
U n fa s te n
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
L o o s e n
L o o s e n
G E N
S S y s te m
b.
3.
PN 4277219B
7 2 1 9 0 1 2 B
On the LH 750 System, disconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the
Random Access module:
1)
At the BSV, disconnect tubing 205.
2)
3)
At the front bubble/blood detector, disconnect the needle input tubing.
4)
5)
At the rear bubble/blood detector, disconnect tubing 77, the tubing to the
aspiration pump.
If removing a diff heater from a Retic module:

a.
Disconnect the diff heater cable P30. See Figure 4.67-2.
b.
Unfasten the captive screw securing the diff heater bracket to the Retic module.
4.67-1

Figure 4.67-2 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Retic Module
DIFF HEATER
BRACKET
DIFF HEATER
P30
CAPTIVE
SCREW
6498063A
4.
If removing a diff heater from a Random Access module:

a.
Disconnect the diff heater cable (red connector). See Figure 4.67-3.
b.
Unfasten the captive screw securing the diff heater bracket to the Random Access
module.
Figure 4.67-3 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Random Access Module
C a p tiv e
s c re w
D iff
h e a te r
D iff h e a te r
b ra c k e t
7 2 1 9 0 1 1 B
4.67-2
PN 4277219B

5.
Clamp both tubings at the rear of the diff heater with the hemostats to minimize leaking,
then disconnect the tubing.
6.
Slide the diff heater out of the diff heater bracket.
Installation
1.
Slide the replacement diff heater into the diff heater bracket.
2.
Install the tubing on the diff heater and remove the hemostats.
3.
Reinstall the heater bracket in the module and connect the diff heater cable.
4.
5.
Select F14 to prime the diff lytic reagent, then wait 5 minutes for the diff heater to heat
the diff lytic reagent in the heater.
6.
At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES, and verify the diff heater temperature
on the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen is within the displayed limits.
7.
On the LH 750 System, reconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the Random
Access module and reinstall the BSV knob.
8.
Reattach the hand detector mounting bracket to the Diluter.
9.
Go to Verification.
Verification
PN 4277219B
4.67-3

4.67-4
PN 4277219B

DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
4.68

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective diff mixing chamber.
B Hemostats
Procedure
1.
2.
Unfasten the two captive screws securing the Diff module to the Diluter. See
Figure 4.68-1.
Figure 4.68-1 Replacing the Diff Mixing Chamber

DIFF MIXING
CHAMBER
2
Loosen
white screw
1
Unfasten
captive screws
6498015A
PN 4277219B
3.
Loosen the nylon plastic screw securing the diff mixing chamber in its holder. See
Figure 4.68-1.
4.
Tilting the Diff module as necessary, disconnect the tubing from the diff mixing chamber.
5.
Remove the diff mixing chamber.
6.
Install the replacement diff mixing chamber into the holder and connect the tubing.
Refer to the instruments pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for the correct
tubing connections.
7.
Tighten the nylon plastic screw on the diff mixing chamber holder to secure the diff
mixing chamber.
4.68-1

8.
Fasten the two captive screws at the bottom of the Diff module to secure the Diff module
to the Diluter.
9.
10. Ensure the diff mixing chamber tubing connections are secure and the diff mixing
chamber did not leak.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5. for the diff parameters.
4.68-2
PN 4277219B

DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
4.69

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective diff mixing chamber motor.
Procedure
1.
2.
Remove the rocker bed as directed under Heading 4.43, beginning at step 2.
3.
Remove the screw securing the ambient temperature thermistors to the thermistor post,
then unscrew the thermistor post to release the ground wire for the diff mixing chamber
motor. See Figure 4.69-1.
Figure 4.69-1 Releasing the Ground Wire for the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor
THERMISTORS
Remove screw
2
Unscrew post
3
Remove
ground wire
6498067A
4.
Loosen the two captive screws securing the Diff module to the Diluter. See Figure 4.69-2.
5.
Tilting the Diff module as necessary, remove the two screws securing the motor assembly
to the Diff module. See Figure 4.69-2. Retain the hardware.
6.
Tilt the motor assembly forward and remove the two screws securing the diff mixing
chamber holder to the motor assembly. See Figure 4.69-2. Retain the hardware.
7.
At the rear of the Diluter, disconnect P73.

Note: J73 is located near J16 which is connected to the Diluter 3 card.
8.
Remove the wire harness from the wire clips.
9.
Remove the defective motor assembly.
10. Route the wire harness for the replacement diff mixing chamber motor through the
Diluter panel and connect P73 to J73. Secure the harness in wire clips as necessary.
11. Position the replacement diff mixing chamber motor in the Diff module and secure the
motor assembly to the diff mixing chamber holder with the hardware retained in step 6.
PN 4277219B
4.69-1

Figure 4.69-2 Removing the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor

3
2
Remove
screws(2)
Remove
screws(2)
1
Unfasten
captive screws
6498016A
12. Secure the diff mixing chamber motor to the Diff module with the hardware retained in
step 5.
13. Reinstall the thermistor post with the ground wire for the diff mixing chamber motor at
its base.
14. Secure the ambient thermistors to the thermistor post, ensuring the thermistors do not
touch the RF Detector Preamp card or any other components.
15. Fasten the two captive screws at the bottom of the Diff module to secure the Diff module
to the Diluter.
16. Reinstall the rocker bed.
18. Using F05, select SL73 to manually send the logic signal for activating the diff mixing
chamber motor, and to verify the motor is functioning.
Verification
4.69-2
PN 4277219B

CBC APERTURE CHECKS
4.70
CBC APERTURE CHECKS

Purpose
Use this procedure to ensure minimal noise on the RBC and WBC channels. This procedure
checks the integrity of the RBC and WBC apertures, coaxial cables, and aperture modules.
B DMM
B Hemostats
Procedure
1.
Check the instrument and ensure:

r
The instrument is ON but not performing any cycles.
The RBC and WBC baths are filled.
The apertures and the sweep-flow lines are primed.
2.
To prevent outside noise interference, close all the Diluter doors and panels except the
rear door for accessing the Six-Channel Preamp card on the LH 750 System.
3.
Remove all the coaxial cables from the RED and WHITE PRE-AMP cards (GENS
System) or the Six-Channel Preamp card (LH 750 System), ensuring the connectors do
not touch each other or chassis ground.
4.
Set up the DMM.
5.
a.
Connect the red probe to the positive terminal.
b.
Connect the black probe to the negative terminal.
c.
Set the reading to K ohms.
With the DMM, take readings across each coaxial cable to verify the integrity of the
circuit through the aperture.
a.
Attach the negative probe to the outside (case) of the coaxial cable being tested.
ATTENTION: The following measurement is difficult to take because the resistance changes
rapidly as the dc voltage from the DMM is applied to the diluent.
PN 4277219B
b.
While observing the DMM display, touch the positive probe to the center pin of the
the coaxial cable being tested and record the first resistance reading observed.
c.
If you need to repeat the measurement, reverse the probes to reverse the polarity.
d.
Ensure the reading falls within the range specified in Table A.1-7, Red and White
Aperture Impedance.
e.
Repeat steps a through d above for each coaxial cable.
6.
At the needle assembly, clamp the aspiration tubing with a pair of hemostats and
disconnect the tubing from the needle assembly. To locate the aspiration tubing, refer to
Figure 2.17-19.
7.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F05 and energize SL4 to reduce fluidic movement.
8.
Ensure the Diluter doors and panels are still closed and the coaxial cables are not
touching chassis ground.
4.70-1

CBC APERTURE CHECKS
9.
Set the DMM to read megohms.
10. With the DMM, verify the apertures are electrically isolated from each other.
a.
Attach the negative probe to chassis ground.
b.
While observing the DMM display, touch the positive probe to the outside (case) of
the RBC coaxial cable #1.
c.
Ensure the reading is equal to or exceeds the value specified in Table A.1-8, Red and
White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent).
d.
Repeat steps a through c for the WBC coaxial cable #1.
11. Disconnect the DMM and reconnect the coaxial cables.

12. Reconnect the aspiration tubing to the needle assembly.
13. Exit the F05 function. SL4 is automatically de-energized.
4.70-2
PN 4277219B

VCS OPTIMIZATION
4.71
VCS OPTIMIZATION
Purpose
Many factors can affect blood results obtained using VCS technology. Use this procedure to
optimize the instrument-related factors, to minimize the impact of factors such as specimen
handling and environmental problems.
Perform this procedure after replacing any VCS technology component. These include the
following: flow cell, laser, LS sensor, RF Detector Preamp card, and Light Scatter Preamp
module. Perform the noise level and LATRON control checks after replacing the Diff Power
Supply card or Laser Power Supply module.
The overall VCS optimization procedure is divided into several individual, interrelated
procedures. The purpose of each of these procedures and the tools and supplies needed are
listed in Table 4.71-1.
While the procedures within the VCS Optimization procedure are presented linearly, because
of the close interrelationship of many of the adjustments, you may need to do them in a
different order. For example:
r
You must correct any grossly misadjusted items before attempting the overall
optimization.
After completing certain adjustments, you may have to repeat previous adjustments.
Figure 4.71-1 shows the recommended procedure flow for VCS optimization. Use it as a
guide.
See Table 4.71-1.
PN 4277219B
4.71-1

VCS OPTIMIZATION
Figure 4.71-1 VCS Optimization Procedure Flow

VCS
optimization
procedures
Do
preliminary
checks
Verify diff lytic reagent

and diff preservative
pump volumes are
within specifications
Set sheath
and sample
pressures
Adjust DC
and RF
gains
Verify DC and RF
noise is
acceptable
Clean the
flow cell
Align the
flow cell
and the laser
Adjust the
LS
gains
Verify the
LS noise is
acceptable
Verify the
RMS noise is
acceptable
Verify the
RF, DC and LS gains
are adjusted correctly
Check
instrument
performance
Instrument
is performing
within
specifications
?
NO
Correct
problem
YES
VCS
technology
system is
optimized
7253380B
4.71-2
PN 4277219B

VCS OPTIMIZATION
Table 4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed

Procedures
Use this procedure to ensure:
A. Preliminary Checks
No obvious fluidic or electronic

sources of noise.
B None
B. Pump Volume Checks
Reagent volumes are within

specifications.
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697

B One extension tubing: consists of one 30 cm
(12 in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane tubing,
PN 3202036, attached to barbed end of feedthru fitting, PN 1016929
B Two vials, such as ACCUVETTE II vials, one for
waste and one for testing
B Mettler scale model P2100, or equivalent scale
with an accuracy of 0.001 g (for Volume Check
procedure - weight method)
B Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse reagent and
StabiLyse reagent, PN 5450245 (for Volume
Check procedure - volume method)
B Cotton swabs (to clean and dry the Volumetric
Cylinder)
B Two adjustable wrenches
B Three normal, whole-blood specimens mixed for
at least 30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4
of the Reference manual for anticoagulant and
storage specifications.
B Oscilloscope
C. VCS Flow Rate

Adjustment
D. RF Detector Preamp
Card Adjustments
Sheath and sample pressures are

set for accurate, precise flow
through the flow cell aperture and
the count ratio is acceptable.
B LATRON primer, PN 7546915
Minimum noise on the RF channel

using the C1 Adjustment. For DC
and RF gain adjustments, use large
latex particles to ensure accurate
gain adjustments and LATRON
control to verify the adjustment.
B DMM
B LATRON control, PN 7546914

B Fresh, normal whole-blood specimens
B Diluent
B Plastic Trim Pot Tool with metallic shaft,
PN 5402071
B Plastic Trim Pot Tool with nonmetallic shaft,
PN 5415364
B Probe with BNC connector
B Latex particles DC/RF, large, PN 6605419
E. DC and RF Verification
Minimum noise on the DC and RF

channels.
B Diluent for cycling

B Oscilloscope
B DMM
B Instrument Reference Report form
PN 4277219B
4.71-3

VCS OPTIMIZATION
Table 4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed (Continued)
Procedures
F. Flow Cell Cleaning
Flow cell is clean and free of debris.
B Isopropyl alcohol (ChromAR), analytical grade
99.5% purity or better, PN 1606138
B Applicator stick, PN 2527713
B Tape, Scotch type or masking
G. Laser and Flow-Cell

Alignment
TTM assembly is aligned

mechanically for high quality,
consistent light-scatter
characteristics.
B 20 MHz dual-trace oscilloscope

B DMM
B Z-Axis Gauge, PN 5401245
B Plastic Trim Pot Tool, PN 5402071
B Light Shield, PN 5401269
B White paper
B 5C Normal cell control
B Normal whole-blood specimen mixed for at least
30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4 of the
Reference manual for anticoagulant and storage
specifications.
The following torque tools are recommended if
available:
B T-handle torque wrench, 20 in./lb, Utica
PN BT-1B
B Torque-limiting screwdriver, 15 in./lb, Utica
PN TS-30
H. LS Gain Adjustment
I. LS Verification
LS gain is set for optimum

positioning of WBC subpopulations
on the DataPlot.
Minimum noise on the LS channel.

B Oscilloscope
B DMM
J. RMS Noise Check
Static and dynamic noise in both

the Diff and Retic modes are within
acceptable limits.

B Oscilloscope
B DMM
4.71-4
PN 4277219B

VCS OPTIMIZATION
Table 4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed (Continued)
Procedures
J. RMS Noise Check
Proper positioning of the WBC

populations within the DataPlot.
Instrument is performing to
specifications. (The DataPlots are
good, and the DC channel baseline
is clean.)
B Normal whole-blood specimen mixed for at least

30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4 of the
Reference manual for anticoagulant.
L. VCS Verification

B DMM
A. Preliminary Checks
1.
Run a startup cycle.
2.
Check TTM assembly area for leaks.
3.
Check the sheath lines, flow cell, and diff preservative and diff lytic reagent pumps and
tubing for trapped bubbles.
4.
Ensure the interconnecting electrical cables within the TTM are properly dressed and
connected.
5.
Ensure the LS amplifier output signal cable, the braided grounding strap and the green
grounding wire:
6.
Have smooth radius bends.
Do not prevent the laser base mount assembly from floating freely.
Ensure the base shock mounts are intact and the TTM assembly floats freely.
B. Pump Volume Checks

1.
Verify the diff preservative pump volumes are within specifications. See Heading 4.29.
2.
Verify the diff lytic reagent pump volumes are within specifications. See Heading 4.28.
3.
Optimize the diff preservative pump volume as instructed under Heading 4.66.
4.
At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under
Heading 4.61 and record the pump volumes.
C. VCS Flow Rate Adjustment
PN 4277219B
1.
If you replace the flow cell or a sheath, diff sample or retic sample pressure regulator, do
the INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS procedure. See
Heading 4.72.
2.
Verify and adjust the flow rate if necessary. Do the FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE procedure. See Heading 4.73.
3.
If the count ratio is not acceptable, resolve the problem before continuing. Any of the
following can adversely affect the count ratio:
r
Incorrect flow rate and/or flow noise from partial plugs or bubbles
Incorrect gain settings
Electronic noise from any of the VCS components
4.71-5

VCS OPTIMIZATION
Reagent conductivity noise due to sheath/sample imbalance (pump volumes)
Lysing noise from improper RBC lysing
Mechanical failures
High incidence of abnormal specimens
Specimen mishandling
Extreme temperatures.
Note: If the count ratio is still poor after you have performed this optimization
procedure, the most likely cause is sample handling/preparation problems.
D. RF Detector Preamp Card Adjustments

1.
Adjust the RF Detector Preamp card so the RMS noise is at the lowest setting. See
C1/C20 Adjustment under Heading 4.74.
2.
Adjust the DC and RF gain settings using the large latex particles. See RF and DC Gain
Adjustment under Heading 4.74. If you cannot achieve limits specified in the RF Preamp
Detector Card Adjustments procedure:
a.
Troubleshoot and resolve any problems.
b.
Continue with this optimization procedure.
c.
Repeat this procedure after you have aligned the laser and flow cell.
E. DC and RF Verification
1.
See Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS, and do the DC Verification and RF Verification
procedures to ensure there are no periodic waveforms and that the DC and RF noise is
acceptable.
2.
If any periodic waveforms are present, find and eliminate the cause of the RF noise (see
Table 4.75-1 for troubleshooting tips), then recheck the RF Detector Preamp card
Adjustments. See Heading 4.74.
F. Flow Cell Cleaning

Clean the flow cell. See Heading 4.79.
G. Laser and Flow-Cell Alignment

Align the laser and flow cell. See Heading 4.76.
H. LS Gain Adjustment
1.
Ensure the Analytical Station and the laser have been on for at least 15 minutes.
2.
Adjust the LS gain. See Heading 4.77.
I. LS Verification
4.71-6
1.
See Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS, and do the LS Verification procedure to ensure
no periodic waveforms are present and the noise is acceptable.
2.
If any periodic waveforms are present, find and eliminate the cause.
PN 4277219B

VCS OPTIMIZATION
J. RMS Noise Check

1.
See Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS, and do the RMS Noise Check procedure to
verify the static and dynamic noise in both the Diff and Retic modes are within the limits
2.
Record readings on the Instrument Reference Report form.
K. LATRON Verification
Verify gain adjustments using LATRON control. See Heading 4.78.
L. VCS Verification
1.
Set up the oscilloscope to read the DC channel of the ANALOG card:

a.
Set volts/div to 20-mV scale.
b.
Set trigger source to channel 1.
c.
Connect channel 1 to the DC (upper) connector on the ANALOG card.
2.
At the Analyzer, select the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode.
3.
4.
Cycle five well mixed whole-blood specimens and ensure:

a.
tt
During count the DC channel baseline conductivity r
Is not >200 mV.
Does not change from run to run.
Note: Causes of failure may be in the mixing chamber, diff lytic reagent pump or the
diff preservative pump.
PN 4277219B
b.
The counts for the specimens are above the cell counts and within the acceptable
expected count times specified in Table A.1-19.
c.
The DataPlots show good separation of the populations and the populations are
positioned correctly.
4.71-7

VCS OPTIMIZATION
4.71-8
PN 4277219B

INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS
4.72

Purpose
The sheath pressure and diff and retic sample pressures determine the rate of flow of the cells
through the flow cell during analysis. Diff and retic sample pressures are adjusted higher than
the sheath pressure to maintain a single-cell stream flowing through the center of the flow cell
aperture. The displayed values for CELL pressure are actually the differences between the
actual diff or retic sample pressure and the sheath pressure.
Use this initial adjustment procedure after replacing the flow cell or a sheath, diff sample or
retic sample regulator. Use the FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, Heading 4.73, to
verify and fine-tune the pressures.
Procedure
1.
At the Analyzer, display the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.

a.
On the GENS System, select the CBC/DIFF test mode.
b.
Access the SERVICE MENU (See Heading 4.2).
c.
Select LATEX CALIBRATION (GENS System) or DIFF CALIBRATION (LH 750

System).
2.
On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select D.
3.
Aspirate LATRON primer from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
ATTENTION: Regulator adjustments are more stable when going from a lower to higher pressure
setting. If the pressure is higher than the target pressure, set the pressure below the target
pressure and increase the settings to reach the target value.
4.
Monitor the sheath pressure at the DIFF CALIBRATION screen during count, and adjust
the sheath pressure regulator, RG4, until the pressure is within the adjustment range
5.
Cycle LATRON primer again and verify that during count the sheath pressure does not
vary more than specified for sheath pressure in Table A.1-18.
Note: Any fluctuations in the flow cell pressures cause the sample stream to drift.
6.
Cycle LATRON primer to monitor the diff CELL pressure during count and adjust the
diff sample pressure regulator, RG3, until the pressure is within limits specified in
Table A.1-13.
7.
Cycle LATRON primer again and verify that during count the diff CELL pressure does
not vary more than specified for diff sample pressure in Table A.1-18.
8.
On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select R.
9.
Cycle LATRON primer to monitor the retic CELL pressure during count and adjust the
Retic sample pressure to regulator, RG6, to the limits specified in Table A.1-13.
10. Cycle LATRON primer again and verify that during count the retic CELL pressure does
not vary more than specified for retic sample pressure in Table A.1-18.
PN 4277219B
4.72-1

11. Go to the FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE procedure, Heading 4.73.
4.72-2
PN 4277219B

FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
4.73

Purpose
Flow rate, which is the product of the total number of cells and the count time, is relatively
constant because samples with high cell concentrations count faster than samples with low
concentrations. (More cells, less time: less cells, more time.)
Use this procedure to adjust the flow rate to:
r
r
Ensure sufficient data is accumulated for samples with low cell counts.
Fine-tune the diff and retic sample pressures for optimum cell counts.
If you replaced a sheath, diff sample or retic sample pressure regulator, or a flow cell, do the
INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS procedure, Heading 4.72, first.
B Fresh, normal whole-blood specimens
Procedure
1.
2.
At the Workstation:
a.
Select
b.
From the Process Control box, select VCS Calibration.
tt

a.
b.
c.

System).
3.
4.
5.
Aspirate LATRON primer from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and verify the
background count is within the specifications listed in Table A.1-17.
6.
Aspirate LATRON control from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
7.
Note the CV for DC.
8.
Adjust the sheath pressure regulator, RG4, to obtain the minimum CVs for DC. Verify
the sheath pressure is still within the limits specified in Table A.1-18.
9.
At the Analyzer:
a.
Select SYSTEM RUN.
b.
Set the number of aspirations/tube to 3.
10. Select the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode.

r On the GENS System, select CBC/DIFF/RETIC at the Analyzer.
PN 4277219B
4.73-1

On the LH 750 System, select CDR at the Workstation.
11. At the Workstation:
a.
Select
b.
From the Process Control box, select Precision.
tt
12. Cycle the blood and verify:

r
The Diff analyzed counts are >7900.
The Retic analyzed counts are >31,100.
13. If the analyzed counts are not within range:

a.
Determine the cause and fix the problem. Any of the following can adversely affect
the count ratio:
r
Incorrect flow rate and/or flow noise from partial plugs or bubbles
Incorrect gain settings
Electronic noise from any of the VCS components
Reagent conductivity noise due to sheath/sample imbalance (pump volumes)
Lysing noise from improper RBC lysing
Mechanical failures
High incidence of abnormal specimens
Specimen mishandling.
Note: If the count ratio is still poor after you have finished the VCS Optimization
procedure, the most likely cause is sample handling/preparation problems.
b.
Repeat the test.
14. Calculate the average expected count-time using the mean WBC and RBC values from
the table and ensure the results are within the specified verification range in
Table A.1-19.
15. Calculate the difference between the actual and expected count times for each sample.
r
If the difference is within 0.5 seconds of the diff expected time and 1.0 seconds of
the retic expected time, no further adjustments are needed.
If the difference exceeds the tolerance, adjust the diff (RG3) or retic (RG6) sample
pressure regulators until the pressure is within 0.2 seconds of the diff expected time
or 0.7 seconds of the retic expected time.
16. If any adjustments are made, delete the data from the table and repeat from step 11 to
verify adjustments, and compare the results to the calibration range in Table A.1-19.
Verification
4.73-2
1.
Verify the sheath and sample pressures are within limits specified in Table A.1-18.
2.
If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure, no additional
verification is needed. Go back to the VCS OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71.
3.
Do the DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, Heading 5.6.
PN 4277219B

RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS
4.74

Purpose
Use the following procedures after replacing either an RF Detector Preamp Detector card with
a vacuum tube or a solid state RF Detector card. With the exception of the reference
designators for the potentiometers and test points on the cards, the procedures are the same.
Also use the C1/C20 Adjustment and the RF and DC Gain Adjustment procedures as part of
the VCS Optimization procedure.
r
Use the RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment procedure to minimize noise on the
RF channel.
Use the Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a
Vacuum Tube procedure to verify the Clog Detector circuit on the RF Detector Preamp
card with a vacuum tube is adjusted correctly.
Note: The Clog Detector circuit on the solid state RF Detector Preamp card is not
adjustable.
Use the C1/C20 Adjustment procedure to obtain the lowest RMS noise value in the entire
360-degree range of C1 (RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or C20 (solid
state RF Detector Preamp card).
Use the RF and DC Gain Adjustment procedure to make initial adjustments to the DC
and RF gains.
B DMM
B Diluent
B Plastic potentiometer adjustment tool with metallic shaft, 0.32 tip, PN 5402071 (for the
clog detector and gain adjustment procedure)
B Plastic potentiometer adjustment tool with nonmetallic shaft, PN 5415364 (for the
C1/C20 Adjustment procedure)
B RMS meter (for the C1/C20 Adjustment procedure)
B Probe with BNC connector
B Latex particles DC/RF, large, PN 6605419 (for the RF and DC Gain Adjustment
procedure)
Note: A large latex particle is used to adjust the RF and DC gain settings. LATRON
control is used to verify the gain adjustments.
PN 4277219B
4.74-1

RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment

on the inside, and attaching ferrites. In addition, on RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum
tube the height of the cable loop must be adjusted to 1.9 cm (0.75 in.) above the RF box.
1.
Ensure the cable for the RF Detector Preamp card is routed to the Analyzer and dressed
2.
On RF Detector Preamp cards with a vacuum tube, ensure the height of the cable loop is
1.9 cm (0.75 in.) above the RF box as shown in Figure 4.74-1.
Figure 4.74-1 Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane
T ie w r a p
1 .9 c m
( 0 .7 5 in .)
h ig h .
F e r r ite s
C a b le m u s t b e c o ile d w ith
th r e e tu r n s a n d p la c e d
h o r iz o n ta lly a s s h o w n .
A d ju s t c
o n R F
P re a m p
v a c
a b
D
c a
u u
le lo
e te c
rd w
m tu
o p
to r
ith
b e
F ro m R S /O p to In tfc c a rd , J 6
F ro m R S /O p to In tfc c a rd , J 2
F ro m R F D e te c to r
P re a m p c a rd , J 7 3
R F D e te c to r
P re a m p c a rd
7 2 1 9 0 1 6 B
4.74-2
PN 4277219B

Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum Tube
1.
Connect the DMM across TP2 and TP4 (ground) on the RF Detector Preamp card. See
Figure 4.74-2
2.
At the Analyzer, select the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode.
3.
4.
While cycling, obtain a reading at TP2 on the RF Detector Preamp card and verify it is
within the verification range specified in Table A.1-28.
ATTENTION: The Clog Detector circuit is factory adjusted and should not require adjustment.
5.
If the reading at TP2 is not within the verification range, adjust the circuit.
a.
b.
While cycling, adjust R44 on the RF Detector Preamp card to obtain a reading at
TP2 within the adjustment limits specified in Table A.1-28.
6.
Cycle diluent again to ensure AUTOCLEAR does not occur.
7.
Disconnect the flow-cell cable, J67, from the RF Detector Preamp card.
See Figure 4.74-2.
8.
Cycle diluent and ensure AUTOCLEAR occurs.
9.
Reconnect J67.
10. Go to the C1/C20 Adjustment.

Figure 4.74-2 RF Detector Preamp Card Test Points and Adjustments
TP3
TP4
J73
J67
R26
TP1
TP2
C1
RF
Detector
Preamp
card with
vacuum tube
TP1
R44
TP2
Ground
R17
P6
P1
TP1
TP2
P5
R43
Solid state
RF Dectector
Preamp card
R54
6498068B
C20
PN 4277219B
4.74-3

C1/C20 Adjustment
ATTENTION: Before observing the readings, allow the readings to stabilize.
1.
Connect the RMS meter to the RF channel on the ANALOG card.
2.
3.
tt
a.
b.
c.

System).
4.
5.
ATTENTION: While making adjustments, aspirate more samples of diluent as needed. If the
sample runs out, check the flow cell for bubbles and purge the flow cell, if necessary.
6.
Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
ATTENTION: Between count periods the RMS noise increases. Ensure readings are taken during
the count periods.

7.
While the system is in count, observe the RMS voltage.
ATTENTION: To eliminate the interference caused by a metal shaft, use a nonmetallic
potentiometer adjustment tool to adjust C1 or C20 on an RF Detector Preamp card.

8.
Using a nonmetallic potentiometer adjustment tool, make slight adjustments to C1 (RF

Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or C20 (solid state RF Detector Preamp
card), moving through the entire 360 degree range. Refer to Figure 4.74-2. After each
adjustment allow the voltage to settle. This takes time and patience. Note the lowest
reading.
9.
Adjust C1 or C20 to the lowest RMS value obtained in the step 8.
10. To optimize the routing of the RF Detector Preamp card cable, move the loops in the
cable [one is by the digital backplane, the other by an RF Detector Preamp card with a
vacuum tube (Figure 4.74-1)], until you obtain the lowest possible RMS voltage reading.
11. Go to the RF and DC Gain Adjustment procedure.
4.74-4
PN 4277219B

RF and DC Gain Adjustment

ATTENTION: Large latex particles will saturate the light scatter channel. Do not adjust the LS
gain using the new (large) latex particles DC/RF. Adjust LS gain using LATRON control only.
1.
At the Workstation:
a.
Select
b.
From the Process Control box in the Command Center, select VCS Calibration.
tt
2.
Prepare a dilution of the large latex particles DC/RF according to the assay sheet.
3.
Use F55 to cycle the LATRON primer and ensure the cell count is within the limits given
in Table A.1-17.
4.
Use F55 to cycle the diluted latex particles DC/RF. Ensure the cell count is within the
limits specified for latex particles DC/RF in Table A.1-22.
5.
Adjust the gains on the RF Detector Preamp card (Figure 4.74-2) until the DC and RF
mean channels match the values specified on the assay sheet for the latex particles
DC/RF.
r
Use R17 (RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or R54 (solid state RF
Detector Preamp card) for DC gain adjustment.
Use R26 (RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or R43 (solid state RF
Detector Preamp card) for RF gain adjustment.
6.
Use F55 to cycle the latex particles DC/RF dilution five times.
7.
Ensure the mean channel values recovered are within the adjustment limits of the assay
value specified in Table A.1-22.
8.
Use F55 to cycle LATRON primer to remove any traces of the latex particles DC/RF.
9.
If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure, go back to the VCS
OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71. If not, go to Verification.
Verification
Do the LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 4.78.
PN 4277219B
4.74-5

4.74-6
PN 4277219B

VCS NOISE CHECKS
4.75
VCS NOISE CHECKS

Purpose
Use the following procedures to ensure there is minimal noise on the DC, RF and LS
channels, and that the static and dynamic noise in the Diff and Retic modes is within
acceptable limits.
r
The DC, RF and LS Verification procedures ensure no periodic waveforms are present.
The RMS noise checks ensure the static and dynamic noise is within limits.
B Oscilloscope
B DMM
DC Verification
1.
Set up the Oscilloscope:

Volts/div = 20-mV scale.
Trigger source = Channel I.
2.
Connect Channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the DC connector (upper) on the ANALOG

card.
3.
While the system is idle, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division through
1.0 s/division.
a.
At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See Figures
4.75-1 and 4.75-2 for examples of acceptable and unacceptable static DC noise.
b.
If any periodic wave forms are seen, find and eliminate the cause.
c.
Repeat if necessary.
Figure 4.75-1 Acceptable Static DC Noise

Display
PN 4277219B
Figure 4.75-2 Unacceptable Static DC Noise

Display
4.
Set the oscilloscopes trigger source to LINE and repeat step 3.
5.
Set the trigger source back to Channel I.

4.75-1

VCS NOISE CHECKS
6.

a.
b.
c.

System).
7.
8.
9.
While the system is counting, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division
through 1.0 s/division.
a.
At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See
Figure 4.75-3 for an example of acceptable dynamic DC noise.
b.
If any periodic wave forms are seen, find and eliminate the cause.
c.
Figure 4.75-3 Acceptable Dynamic DC Noise
10. Set the trigger source to LINE and repeat step 8.

11. Go to the RF Verification.
RF Verification
1.
2.
4.75-2
Set up the Oscilloscope:

a.
Set Volts/div to the 50-mV scale.
b.
Set trigger source to Channel 1.
c.
Connect Channel 1 to the RF connector (middle) on the ANALOG 4 card.
While the system is idle, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division through
1.0 s/division.
r
Figures 4.75-4 and 4.75-5 for examples of acceptable and unacceptable static RF
noise.
If you see any periodic waveforms, find and eliminate the cause.
PN 4277219B

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-4 Acceptable Static RF Noise

Display
Figure 4.75-5 Unacceptable Static RF Noise

Display
3.
Set the trigger source to LINE and repeat step 3.
4.
Set the trigger source back to Channel 1.
5.
6.
While the system is cycling, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division
a.
Figure 4.75-6 for an example of acceptable dynamic RF noise.
b.
c.
If you see any periodic waveforms, ensure C1 was properly adjusted. Otherwise,
find and eliminate the cause. See Table 4.75-1 and Figures 4.75-7 through 4.75-18
for help.
Figure 4.75-6 Acceptable Dynamic RF Noise Display
7.
PN 4277219B
If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure before flow-cell
cleaning and alignment, go back to the VCS OPTIMIZATION procedure; see
Heading 4.71. Otherwise go to the LS Verification procedure.
4.75-3

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Table 4.75-1 RF Troubleshooting Table

Sample Type
Problem
Cause
Action
Examples
Diluent
60 Hz
Loose grounds
Check grounding.
See Figures 4.75-7

and 4.75-8
LATRON Control
Random baseline
bounce
Fluidics leaks or
bubbles
Fix leaks or perform purge.
See Figures 4.75-9

and 4.75-10
Diluent
RMS noise (mV)

38 <RF <100
RF Preamp noise 1. Check C1 adjustment. See

C1/C20 Adjustment under
Heading 4.74.
See Figures 4.75-11

and 4.75-12
2. Verify routing of RF Detector

Preamp card cable to digital
backplane is optimal. See RF
Detector Preamp Card Cable
Adjustment under Heading 4.74.
3. Replace:
a. Vacuum tube
b. RF Detector Preamp card.
Diluent
Diluent
RMS noise (mV)

RF <100 random
or continuous
RF Preamp noise Replace:
RMS noise (mV)

RF <100 random
Shunts or leaky
flow cell
1. Vacuum tube
See Figures 4.75-13

through 4.7-16.
2. RF Detector Preamp card.

1. Clean any liquid or salt residue off
of the flow cell.
See Figures 4.75-17

and 4.75-18
2. Perform Purge F44, F45.

3. Replace flow cell.
4.75-4
PN 4277219B

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-7 RF 60 Hz
Figure 4.75-7 is an example of a normal LATRON control run. The
RMS noise was 22.0 mV. Notice the RF base.
Figure 4.75-8 RF 60 Hz with Noise Spikes

Figure 4.75-8, notice with the 60 cycles the large spikes and how
the baseline is distorted. The RMS noise increased to 63 mV.
Figure 4.75-9 Normal RF Random Baseline

Figure 4.75-9 is an example of a normal LATRON control run. The
RMS noise was 22.0 mV. Notice the baseline after the RF pulse.
PN 4277219B
4.75-5

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-10 RF Output with Bubble Trapped in

Sheath 2
Figure 4.75-10 shows the RF output while running LATRON

control with a bubble trapped in sheath 2. The RMS noise
increased to 24.5 mV. Notice the bounce in the baseline after the
RF pulse.
Note: The single pulse with the doubled amplitude is caused by
two LATRON control particles passing through the flow cell at the
same time.
Figure 4.75-11 Normal RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent
Figure 4.75-12 Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent
4.75-6
Figure 4.75-11 is a normal RF baseline while cycling diluent. The

RMS noise was 22.0 mV.
Figure 4.75-12 shows a noisy RF baseline while cycling diluent;

the RMS noise is now 45 mV. Notice the amplitude increased in
the baseline. In this case the RMS noise is steady.
PN 4277219B

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-13 Normal RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent (RF Noise 22 mV)
Figure 4.75-14 Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent (RF Noise >100 mV)
Figure 4.75-15 LATRON Control Sample with a

Good RF Tube and Box
PN 4277219B
Figure 4.75-13 is a normal RF baseline while cycling diluent. The

RMS noise was 22.0 mV.
Figure 4.75-14 shows a noisy RF baseline while cycling diluent;

the RMS noise is now >100 mV and erratic. Notice the amplitude
increased in the baseline. In this case the RMS noise is unsteady
as is the baseline.
Figure 4.75-15 is a LATRON control sample from a system with a

good RF tube and box. Notice the mean to mode channel
difference, the low CV and the narrow histogram.
4.75-7

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-16 LATRON Control Sample with Bad

RF Tube and Box
In the LATRON control sample shown in Figure 4.75-16 the RF

tube was bad, but the box can cause the same problem.
The mean-to-mode difference has increased, as well as the CV.
Also the histogram now has a foot to the right. In addition, the OP
histogram is wider and not as smooth.
Figure 4.75-17 RF Output Running LATRON Control

(LEAK at Flow Cell Fitting)
Figure 4.75-18 LATRON Control Run with DC Gain

Drop
4.75-8
Figure 4.75-17 shows the RF output while running LATRON

control with a leak at the flow cell fitting. The RMS noise
increased to 23.5 mV. Notice the bounce in the baseline after the
RF pulse.
In the LATRON control run shown in Figure 4.75-18, observe the

DC gain drop. The CV for both DC and RF increased. And, on all
channels there is noise to the right of the LATRON control
populations. The OP histogram too is wider, shifted to the right
and not as smooth.
PN 4277219B

VCS NOISE CHECKS
LS Verification
1.
Ensure the laser cover is on.
2.
Set up the oscilloscope to read LS offset voltage.
3.
a.
Set the DMM to measure volts.
b.
Connect the DMM to TP1 and TP3 on the Light Scatter Preamp module.

a.
b.
c.

System).
4.
5.
6.
While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure the
voltages do not exceed limits specified in Table A.1-21. Record the Diff LS Offset on the
Instrument Reference Report form.
7.
On the DIFF CALIBATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
8.
On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select R.
9.
10. While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure the
voltages do not exceed limits specified in Table A.1-21.
11. On the DIFF CALIBATION screen, select QUIT.
12. At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report Form as instructed under
Heading 4.61 and record the Retic LS offset voltage.
13. Disconnect the DMM.
14. Set up the oscilloscope:
a.
Set Volts/div to 20-mV scale.
b.
Set Trigger source to Channel 1.
a.
Connect Channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the LS channel (lower) on the ANALOG

card.
15. While the system is idle, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division through
1.0 s/division.
a.
At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See Figures
4.75-19 and 4.75-20 for examples of acceptable and unacceptable static LS noise.
b.
c.
16. Set the trigger source to LINE. Repeat step 15.

17. Set the trigger source back to Ch 1.
18. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select D.
PN 4277219B
4.75-9

VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-19 Acceptable Static LS Noise Display Figure 4.75-20 Unacceptable Static LS Noise
Display
19. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.

20. While the system is counting, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division
a.
Figure 4.75-21 for an example of acceptable dynamic LS noise.
Figure 4.75-21 Acceptable Dynamic LS Noise Display
b.
Note: When the time base is set at 20 ms/division a 25 kHz waveform may be
observed on some instruments. This can be caused by the Laser Power Supply.
21. Set the oscilloscope's trigger source to LINE. Repeat steps 19 and 15.
22. Go to the RMS Noise Check.
RMS Noise Check

1.
4.75-10

a.
b.
c.

System).
PN 4277219B

VCS NOISE CHECKS
2.
3.
While the instrument is idle, use the DMM to measure the Diff static RMS noise for DC,
RF, and LS channels on the ANALOG card. Record the voltages on the Instrument
Reference Report form.
4.
Ensure the noise for each of the channels does not exceed the limits given for the static
conditions listed in Table A.1-20.
ATTENTION: Dirt, debris or bubbles will increase the noise readings. Ensure that the diluent is
clean and the system is free of bubbles.

5.
6.
While the instrument is counting, measure the diff dynamic RMS noise for DC, RF, and
LS channels on the ANALOG card.
7.
At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report form and record the
voltages.
8.
Ensure the noise for each of the channels does not exceed the limits given for the
dynamic conditions listed in Table A.1-20.
9.
On the DIFF CALIBATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
10. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select R.

11. While the instrument is idle, use an RMS meter to measure the Retic RMS noise for DC,
RF, and LS channels on the ANALOG card. Record the voltages on the Instrument
Reference Report form.
12. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
13. While the instrument is counting, measure the Retic dynamic RMS noise for DC, RF, and
LS channels on the ANALOG card. Record the voltages on the Instrument Reference
Report form.
14. Ensure the noise for each of the channels does not exceed the limits given for the static
conditions listed in Table A.1-20.
Note: If only the LS fails, check the following for a source of the noise:
r
An improperly targeted laser.
Debris on the lens block.
A warped light shield.
Dirt on the flow cell.
15. Save the Instrument Reference Report form.

Verification
PN 4277219B
4.75-11

VCS NOISE CHECKS
4.75-12
PN 4277219B

LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT
4.76

Purpose
The laser and flow-cell alignment procedure is divided into several individual procedures.
You may have to repeat these procedures after performing other steps, until all measurements
fall within specifications. See Figure 4.76-1 for an overview. The goal is to achieve:
r
Correct alignment of mechanical characteristics of TTM assembly.
Minimum LS offset voltage.
Minimum LATRON control CVs.
Minimum LATRON control mean to mode difference.
Correct DataPlot distribution and population positioning for 5-part diff and retics.
B DMM
B Z-Axis Gauge, PN 5401245
B Light Shield, PN 5401269
B White paper
B 5C Normal cell control
B Normal whole-blood specimen mixed for at least 30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4
of the Reference manual for anticoagulant and storage specifications.
The following torque tools are recommended if available:
B T-handle torque wrench, 20 in./lb, Utica PN BT-1B
B Torque-limiting screwdriver, 15 in./lb, Utica PN TS-30
ATTENTION: Torquing the lock-down screws without shifting the adjustment is very technique
dependent. The flow-cell alignment procedures require loosening and then torquing all
alignment lock-down screws, the lens-block screws, and the laser-mount screws.
To torque the screws correctly:
PN 4277219B
1.
Grip the wrench by the knurled portion of the handle. Failure to do so will cause
improper torque.
2.
Tighten each screw sequentially, 1/32 to 1/16 turn each time, until torqued.
4.76-1

Figure 4.76-1 Laser and Flow Cell Alignment Workflow

Laser and
Flow-Cell
Alignment
procedure
Align
Z-axis
(focus)
Align
X-axis and Y-axis
plate
Align
Y-axis (tilt) plate
Adjust LS
Gain
Check for
LS noise
Laser and
Flow-cell
are
aligned
7253379A
Flow-Cell Z-Axis (Focus) Alignment

1.
Set up the oscilloscope:

a.
2.
4.76-2
Select these settings:

Input
Ch. 1 and Ch. 2
Impedance
1 M DC
Vertical
500 mV/Div
Horizontal
5 microseconds/division
Synch
Normal - Ch. 1
b.
Connect Channel 1 to the DC output (upper) on the ANALOG card.
c.
Connect Channel 2 to the LS output (lower) on the ANALOG card.
Loosen each set of lock-down screws by an equal amount and just enough to allow
adjustments to the X-, Y- and Z-axes. See Figure 4.76-2 for location for locking screws D
and E for Z-axis, F and G for X-axis, and H and I for Y-axis.
PN 4277219B

Figure 4.76-2 Flow-Cell Z-Axis Alignment

Y-adjust
(vertical adjustment)
A
J
Y-adjust
LS
sensor
screws
Lens
block
Y-lock down
Y-lock down
Z- axis
gauge
X-axis plate
G
X-lock down
Horizontal
bolt plate
F
X-lock down
E
Z-adjust
X-adjust
Z-lock down
6498046A
3.
Place the 1.360 focus side of the Z-Axis Gauge between the center of the tilt plate
(between the sensor screws), and the center of the lens block as shown in Figure 4.76-2.
Turn the Z-axis adjust screw (Figure 4.76-2, B) until the Gauge just fits. This adjusts the
Z-axis to its preliminary setting,
4.
Set the DMM to read volts mV to measure the LS offset voltage.
5.
Connect the DMM leads to TP1 and TP3 (ground) on the Light Scatter Preamp module.
6.
Perform a visual alignment of the flow cell
7.
8.
PN 4277219B
Z-lock down
a.
Remove the flow cell cover and manually activate the laser interlock switch.
b.
Slide the light shield in place.
c.
Adjust the X- and Y-adjust screws until the laser light is visible on the light scatter
sensor.
d.
Adjust the Y-adjust screw until the beam is vertically centered on the flow cell.
e.
Adjust the X-adjust screw until the beam is split evenly in a line across the light
sensor mask.

a.
b.
c.

System).

4.76-3

9.
tt
10. From the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, aspirate LATRON control as needed to adjust the
X-adjust and Y-adjust screws to obtain a LS pulse on the oscilloscope. See Figure 4.76-2,
C and J.
11. Adjust R8 on the Light Scatter Preamp module to obtain an LS pulse with an amplitude
of 3.5 V.
12. Remove the flow cell cover. Shine a light on the LS sensor and ensure the scattered laser
beam is centered vertically on the sensor mask and that it is free of dust or other foreign
material. See Figure 4.76-3. If it is not centered, loosen the LS sensor screws
(Figure 4.76-2, A) and center the LS sensor.
Figure 4.76-3 Scatter Sensor Laser Diffraction
LASER
BEAM
LS
SENSOR
SENSOR
MASK
LASER DIFFRACTION
IN CENTER OF WHITE
MARK
6498047A
13. Reinstall the flow-cell cover.

14. Use the X-adjust screw to fine-tune the X-axis setting for maximum LS amplitude with
minimum variations.
15. Use the Y-adjust screw to achieve minimum LS offset voltage and record the LS offset
voltage reading.
16. Turn the Z-adjust screw clockwise 1/4 to 1/2 turn and repeat from step 14 until the
lowest offset voltage is achieved. See Table A.1-21.
r
If the offset voltage decreases, continue repeating from step 14 until the offset
voltage starts to increase.
If the offset voltage increases, turn the Z-adjust screw counterclockwise to set the
X-Y assembly past the preliminary setting, then repeat from step 15 to find the
lowest offset voltage.
ATTENTION: For correct torquing technique, refer to the Attention at the beginning of this
procedure.
17. Tighten each Z-lock down screw (Figure 4.76-2 D and E) sequentially, a little at a time,
until torqued.
4.76-4
PN 4277219B

Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Alignment

1.
Aspirate LATRON control from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen. During counting, use
the X- and Y-adjust screws (Figure 4.76-4, C and J) as follows:
r
Adjust the X-adjust screw to fine-tune the X-axis for maximum LS amplitude with
minimum variations.
Adjust the Y-adjust screw to achieve minimum LS offset voltage. See Table A.1-21.
Figure 4.76-4 Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Adjustment

Tilt plate
Y- lock down
J
X- lock down
Y- adjust
(vertical
adjustment)
Y- axis plate
(tilt plate)
X- axis plate
Y- adjust
I
Flow cell
Y- lock down
Y- lock down
X- lock down
Horizontal
bolt plate
F
X- adjust
X- lock down
6498048A
ATTENTION: For correct torquing techniques, refer to the Attention at the beginning of this
procedure.
2.
PN 4277219B
Torque the Y-lock down screws (Figure 4.76-4, H, I).
4.76-5

3.
If the LS offset voltage is still too high:

a.
Remove the flow cell cover, lens block and the light shield from the flow cell and
insert the special light shield.
b.
Pull the light shield out until the laser's main beam just touches the far side of the
hole and the reflected beam is at its brightest. Ensure the laser's reflected beam is
centered on the vertical white line directly below the main beam. See Figure 4.76-5.
r
If the reflected beam is not centered, loosen and then retorque the Z-lock down
screws (Figure 4.76-2, D and E).
If the reflected beam cannot be aligned, determine which parts are defective,
replace the parts and perform the laser alignment procedure from the
beginning.
Figure 4.76-5 Laser Reflected Light Beam with Special Shield Installed
LENS
BLOCK
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL
LIGHT
SHIELD
LASER
GOOD
4.76-6
BAD
6498049A
c.
Without shifting the reflected beam off the vertical white line, tighten each X-lock
down screw (refer to Figure 4.76-4, F, G) sequentially, a little at a time, until they are
torqued.
d.
Remove the special light shield from the flow cell and reinstall the regular light
shield and the lens block.
e.
Reinstall the flow-cell cover.
PN 4277219B

f.
If you were unable to bring the LS offset voltage within specifications:

1)
2)
Replace the lens block if a replacement is available.
3)
As a last measure, clean the lens block. See Heading 4.81.
Flow-Cell Y-Axis Final Alignment

ATTENTION: This is the final step in the physical alignment of the laser to the flow cell.
Alignment of Y-axis (tilt) plate affects the LS offset voltage, LATRON LS CVs, LS Mean to
Mode, and NERLSMN. You may need to readjust the X- or Z-axis plates to find the best
alignment of the Y-axis plate.
1.
Loosen the Y- (vertical) lock down screws (Figure 4.76-4, H, I) just enough to allow the
Y-axis (tilt) plate to be adjusted.
2.
Adjust the Y- (vertical) adjust screw (Figure 4.76-4, J) for minimum LS offset voltage.
3.
Without shifting the laser alignment, tighten each Y-lock down screw (Figure 4.76-4,
H, I) sequentially, a little at a time, until the screws are torqued.
4.
Verify the LS offset voltage is still within the range specified in Table A.1-21.
5.
Aspirate LATRON control and verify:

a.
b.
LATRON control LS CVs are within range. If not 1)
Realign the Y-axis.
2)
3)
Replace the lens block if a replacement is available.
4)
As a last measure, clean the lens block. See Heading 4.80.
LATRON control mean-to-mode differences are within range. If not 1)
Check for noise, leaks, bubbles or contamination.
2)
If problem persists, replace the flow cell.
6.
Remove the flow-cell cover, shine a light on the LS sensor and ensure the scattered laser
beam is centered vertically on the LS sensor mask. Refer to Figure 4.76-3.
7.
Slide a white piece of paper between the flow cell aperture and the LS sensor. Ensure the
diffracted laser beam is a fine line without any vertical lines and cones are minimized.
See Figure 4.76-6.
Figure 4.76-6 Laser Diffraction Pattern on Paper
PN 4277219B
8.
Remove the paper carefully and ensure no lint is left behind.
9.
Reinstall the flow-cell cover and secure it with its mounting screws.
4.76-7

10. If the laser alignment shifts after tightening the flow-cell cover, check the following for
proper fitting:
r
Screws holding the laser to the base plate
Coaxial cable
Flow-cell tubing bracket
Flow-cell cover.
11. Adjust the LS gain. See Heading 4.77.
4.76-8
PN 4277219B

LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT
4.77
LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the LS gain for optimum positioning of the WBC diff and retic
populations on the DataPlots.
Procedure
ATTENTION: Do not remove the flow-cell cover unless realignment is necessary.
1.
Ensure the system and the laser have been on for at least 15 minutes.
2.
3.
tt
a.
b.
c.

System).
4.
5.
Cycle the LATRON primer and the LATRON control five times.
6.
Ensure the mean channel, mean-to-mode difference and %CV values are within the
7.
Adjust the LS gain as needed and rerun the LATRON control to verify adjustment. Use
R8 (lower) on the Light Scatter Preamp module to adjust the diff LS gain.
8.
On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
9.
Select R on the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
10. Cycle the LATRON primer and the LATRON Control five times.
11. Ensure the LS mean channel, mean-to-mode difference and %CV values are within the
12. Adjust the LS gain as needed and rerun the LATRON control to verify adjustment. Use
R16 (upper) on the Light Scatter Preamp module to adjust the retic LS gain.
13. If you did this procedure as part of another procedure, such as VCS optimization, no
further verification is needed. Go back to that procedure. Otherwise, go to Verification.
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the diff and retic parameters.
4.77-1

LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT
4.77-2
PN 4277219B

LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
4.78

Purpose
Use this procedure to verify the DC, RF and LS gains after completing VCS Optimization,
replacing the RF Detector Preamp card, and after doing other procedures as necessary.
Procedure
1.
2.
Select F57, Diff and Retic LATRON function, to cycle LATRON primer. Ensure the
background count is within the limits specified in Table A.1-17.
3.
Cycle LATRON control five times.
4.
After the cycles are completed, review the data on the VCS Calibration window for any
results outside of the limits. When assay values are entered on the VCS Setup screen, the
instrument automatically verifies the following DC, RF and LS data and displays any data
that is outside the limits in red:
tt
a.
The mean channels are within the verification range.
b.
The mean-to-mode differences are within acceptable limits.
c.
The CVs are within the verification limits.
Note: The limits are listed on the VCS Calibration Setup screen and in Table A.1-22. To
access the VCS Calibration Setup screen, select
5.
If the results are within limits and you did this procedure as part of another procedure,
such as VCS Optimization, go back to that procedure. Otherwise, go to Verification.
6.
If the values are not within the limits

a.
b.
7.
PN 4277219B
tt
Determine the cause and fix the problem. Check for the following:
r
Noise in the system. See Heading 4.75.
Incorrect adjustments. See Heading 4.74 for RF Detector Preamp card

adjustments, Heading 4.77 for LS gain adjustments.
Incorrect TTM grounding.
Defective components.
Incorrect flow-cell alignment.
Go to Verification.
4.78-1

Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the diff and retic
parameters.
4.78-2
PN 4277219B

FLOW CELL CLEANING
4.79
FLOW CELL CLEANING

Purpose
Perform this procedure:
r
Before aligning the TTM, to ensure flow cell aperture is clean and free of debris.
When LS offset voltage is failing specifications in Diff or Retic mode.
When LS CV% is failing specifications in Diff or Retic mode.
Note: A dirty flow cell can also contribute to problems with NERLS mean, NERLSSD, and
LATRON control mean and mean to mode.
B Isopropyl alcohol (ChromAR), analytical grade 99.5% purity or better, PN 1606138
ATTENTION: Use lint-free paper or gauze to avoid contaminating the alcohol with dust.
B Lint-free paper or gauze

B Applicator stick, PN 2527713
B Tape, Scotch type or masking
B Lens paper, high/good grade
Procedure
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metallic surface). To avoid accidental exposure
to the laser beam while cleaning the flow cell, always turn off the instrument before doing this procedure.
1.
Press POWER OFF on the Diluter.
2.
Using the tamperproof screwdriver, carefully remove the screws that hold the TTM flow
cell cover.
3.
Check for leakage around the flow cell aperture area. If a leak exists replace the flow cell.
4.
Remove the flow cell shield and the LS sensor and place them in a clean area.
5.
Secure a piece of transparent tape on the front of the lens block assembly to avoid
splashing into the lens.
WARNING Personal injury from broken glass. Breaking off the tip of the ampule of alcohol without
protecting your fingers could lead to cuts from broken glass. Cover the ampule with lint-free paper or gauze
to protect your fingers when opening the ampule.
6.
PN 4277219B
Cover the ampule of alcohol with lint-free paper or gauze to protect your fingers and
break off the tip.
4.79-1

FLOW CELL CLEANING
67
S# u
CA Man
P/N
O
PR
ISO
160
Figure 4.79-1 Wetting Applicator with Alcohol

CAUTION Alcohol can soften the paint used on the
flow cell, permanently damaging the flow cell. To avoid
damaging the flow cell, ensure the applicator stick
does not contact the painted surfaces of the flow cell
and do not reuse the applicator stick.
7.
Carefully moisten the applicator tip with

isopropyl alcohol without over saturating it
(Figure 4.79-1).
8.
Place the applicator tip flat on the front of

the flow-cell aperture and pull it out
toward the outside of the instrument, using
a one-way motion only. See Figure 4.79-2.
9.
Obtain a new applicator stick and repeat

step 7.
5961123D
Figure 4.79-2 Wiping Front of Flow Cell
5961122C
Figure 4.79-3 Wiping Rear of Flow Cell
10. Place the applicator flat on the rear of the

flow-cell aperture and pull it out toward
the outside of the instrument, using a
one-way motion only. See Figure 4.79-3.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 if necessary.
5961124C
12. Polish the front and back of the flow cell with a dry lens paper.
13. Remove the tape from the lens block. Reinstall the LS sensor and flow cell shield. Ensure
the LS sensor is properly aligned with the laser beam.
14. Press POWER ON on the Diluter.
4.79-2
PN 4277219B

FLOW CELL CLEANING
15. Check for correct alignment of the scattered beam on the sensors mask.
16. If you are performing this procedure as part of another procedure, such as VCS
Optimization, go back to that procedure. If not, go to step 17.
17. Set up the DMM to read the LS offset voltage.
r
Set the DMM to measure voltage.
Connect the DMM to TP1 and TP3 on the Light Scatter Preamp module.
18. At the Analyzer, display the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.

a.
b.
c.

System).
19. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select D.

20. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and measure and record the LS
offset voltage.
a.
While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure
the voltages do not exceed the limits specified in Table A.1-21.
b.
Heading 4.61 and record the Diff LS Offset.
21. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
22. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select R.
23. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and measure and record the LS
offset voltage.
a.
While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure
the voltages do not exceed limits specified in Table A.1-21.
b.
Heading 4.61 and record the Retic LS Offset.
c.
Disconnect the DMM.
24. If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure, go back to the VCS
OPTIMIZATION procedure now; see Heading 4.71. Otherwise, go to Verification.
Verification
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
Do the DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, Heading 5.6.
4.79-3

FLOW CELL CLEANING
4.79-4
PN 4277219B

LENS BLOCK CLEANING
4.80
LENS BLOCK CLEANING

Purpose
ATTENTION: Replace any field-cleaned lens block assembly as soon as possible.
Use this procedure only as the last step if you are unable to achieve the LS specifications when
performing the TTM alignment procedure. Processes for assembling this lens block assembly
have been optimized to ensure contamination of the lens surface does not occur, but once
contaminated, cleaned lenses do not stay clean long. Replace a field-cleaned lens block
assembly as soon as possible.
B Lens paper, PN 3814123
B Analytical grade acetone (1 ppm), PN 1615361
Procedure
CAUTION Powder and skin oils will damage the lenses. Clean your hands with an alcohol prep pad or wash
them with soap and water before performing this procedure. Wear powder-free gloves to prevent skin oils
from coming into contact with lens surfaces.
1.
2.
Remove the laser cover.
3.
Remove the hardware securing the lens block to the TTM. See Figure 4.80-1.
Figure 4.80-1 Removing the Lens Block

COVERS
Remove screw
Remove
screws
LENS BLOCK
7253375A
PN 4277219B
4.80-1

LENS BLOCK CLEANING
4.
Place a new sheet of lens paper on a clean surface.
5.
Cut another piece of lens paper about the same width as the lens or slightly smaller.
6.
With the tamperproof screwdriver, carefully loosen the lens cover screws. Loosen the
screws 1/4-turn at a time to prevent breaking the lens.
7.
Remove the lenses from the block and place them on the new piece of lens paper.
8.
Holding one of the lenses in gloved hand, drape the cut piece of lens paper over the lens
and drop one drop of acetone near the edge of the lens onto the lens paper.
9.
Slide the lens paper off the lens slowly sideways, dragging the drop of acetone to the side
of the lens.
10. Drape the same lens paper over the opposite side of the lens and drag it across the lens as
in step 9 above.
11. Look at the acetone drop to verify complete evaporation. If the lens surface remains wet
with acetone, continue dragging lens paper until lens is dry.
ATTENTION: Do not use compressed air to remove dust particles because moisture and
propellant in the air may contaminate the lens surface, defeating the cleaning process.
12. Look at the cleaned lens surface from the side to determine if all contamination has been
removed. If it has not:
a.
Remove dust particles with an aperture brush.
b.
If any contamination remains, repeat the cleaning procedure for the surface once.
c.
If the second cleaning does not remove the contamination, replace the lens block
assembly.
13. Carefully place the lens in the lens block.

CAUTION Tightening the screws incorrectly damages the lens cover. Tighten the screws alternately to
prevent warping the lens cover. Do not overtighten.
14. Carefully install the lens cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws until the cover
just touches the lens. Continue tightening the screws alternately 1/4-turn at a time.
15. Repeat the procedure for the other lens. Once both lenses have been cleaned, install the
lens block in the TTM.
ATTENTION: If, at the completion of the Laser/Flow-Cell Alignment procedure, the instrument
fails the Verification procedures, replace the lens block and repeat the LASER AND
FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT procedure.
16. Perform the LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT procedure and verify instrument
performance as instructed under Heading 4.76.
4.80-2
PN 4277219B

SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS
4.81

Purpose
Table 4.81-1 lists the sensors and switches in the Analytical Station, their functions, and the
procedures to test them. Use the relevant procedures in the Action to Test column of
Table 4.81-1 to verify a sensor or switch is operating correctly.
For more details about the messages listed in the Functions/Messages column, refer to
Heading 7.2.
None
Table 4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches
Sensor Name/
Type
Function/
Messages
Action to Test
Backwash Tank
Indicates backwash tank is empty and

needs to be refilled.
Select F30, Backwash Tank Test, to check the

operation of the backwash tank switch.
Float Sensor
Backwash Tank Not Full

Backwash Tank Still Full
Bed Backward
Optosensor
One of three sensors that monitor the

Move the bed to the backward position and ensure
rocker bed position. Indicates the rocker CR3 on the Sensor Distribution card lights.
bed is rocked backward, to the rear of
the Diluter.
Bed Not Backward
Bed Forward
Optosensor

Move the bed to the forward position and ensure
bed is rocked forward, to the front of
the Diluter.
Not Forward Bed
Bed Horizontal
Optosensor

Move the bed to the horizontal position and ensure
bed is horizontal.
Bed Not Level
Bellows Up
Magnetic
One of two sensors that monitor the

position of the bellows. Indicates the
bellows is up (expanded). This is the
normal at-rest position.
Bellows Not Up
1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC

ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
2. Ensure the sensor status is 1.
3. Return to the SYSTEM RUN screen.
4. Move the rocker bed to the forward position,
select F90, and energize SL23 then SL25 to
contract the bellows.
5. Exit the F90 function.
ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST, and ensure the
sensor changed state.
7. Reset the Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B
4.81-1

Table 4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches (Continued)

Sensor Name/
Type
Function/
Messages
Bellows Down

position of the bellows. Indicates the
bellows is down (contracted).

Bellows Not down
3. Return to the SYSTEM RUN screen.
Magnetic
Action to Test
2. Ensure the sensor status is 0.

4. Move the rocker bed to the forward position,
select F90, and energize SL23 then SL25 to
contract the bellows.
5. Exit the F90 function.
ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST, and ensure the
sensor changed state.
Front Door
Magnetic
During the Automatic mode, indicates

the front door is closed.

Door Open Run Stopped
2. Open and close the Diluter lower front door

(cover) and ensure the sensor status is 1 when
the door is closed.
Note: Message is displayed in the

Automatic mode only.
Hand Detector
Optosensor
Initiates a Manual-mode cycle and

monitors the area around the aspirator
tip before rotating the front section of
the BSV.
Probe Obstructed
Sample Removed Too Soon
Left Lift Up
Mechanical
1. Access the Diluter 1 card and ensure the HAND

LED is lit.
ATTENTION: Do not press the activator to initiate the
Manual mode.
2. Cycle a sample in the Manual mode by blocking
the hand-detector sensor and ensure the HAND
LED goes out while the sensor is blocked.
During Automatic-mode cycle, indicates

the position of the left lift. Keeps the
rocker bed from rocking while the left
lift is up.

Left Lift Not Up
3. Manually raise the lift until the activator contacts

the switch.
2. Turn off the pneumatics and place the bed in the

horizontal position.
4. Ensure the sensor status is 1 when the switch is

activated.
Manual-Mode Start
Mechanical
Probe Position
Magnetic
Initiates a Manual-mode cycle when the

operator presses the activator in the
Manual-mode aspiration station.
Initiate a Manual-mode cycle by pressing the

activator without blocking the hand-detector sensor
and ensure the cycle begins.
Indicates position of aspirator tip.
1. Access the Diluter 1 card and monitor the

PROBEIN LED.
Manual Probe Not In
2. Select F06 and ensure the PROBEIN LED lights

when the aspirator tip is retracted and goes out
when the aspirator tip is extended.
4.81-2
PN 4277219B


Sensor Name/
Type
Function/
Messages
Probe-Wipe Down

position of the probe-wipe cleaning
truck. Indicates the cleaning truck is
down.
Optosensor
Note: The cleaning truck must be down

before the front section of the BSV is
rotated to retract the aspirator tip.
Action to Test
1. Access the Diluter 2 card and monitor the
DWSEN LED.
2. Select F28, Probe Wipe Test, to check the
operation of the probe-wipe sensors and verify
the DWSEN LED lights when the cleaning truck is
down and goes out when the cleaning truck
moves up.
Probe Wipe Down Fail

Probe Wipe Truck Not Home
Probe-Wipe Up
Optosensor

position of the probe-wipe cleaning
truck. Indicates the cleaning truck is up,
so motor can be reversed to send
cleaning truck back down.
Probe Wipe Up Fail
Right Lift Up
Mechanical
1. Access the Diluter 2 card and monitor the UPSEN

LED.
2. Select F28, Probe Wipe Test, to check the
operation of the probe-wipe sensors and verify
the UPSEN LED lights when the cleaning truck is
up, and goes out when the cleaning truck moves
down.
During the Automatic-mode cycle,

indicates the position of the right lift.

Right Lift Not Down
2. Turn off the Pneumatic Supply and place the bed

in the horizontal position.
Right Lift Not Up
3. Manually raise the lift until the activator contacts

the switch.
4. Ensure the sensor status is 1 when the switch is
activated.
Right Stack Loaded
Mechanical
Indicates a cassette is in the loading

bay, ready to be cycled.

2. Place a cassette in the loading bay, activating the
right stack switch, and ensure the sensor status
changes to 1.
Scanner Position
Magnetic
Activated when the bar-code scanner

moves to check the scanner speed and
label position.
1. Select F95 to release the solenoids.

3. Place a cassette on the rocker bed in the piercing
station and move the rocker bed to the forward
position.
4. Pull the bar-code scanner down over the cassette
label and ensure the sensor status is 1 when the
scanner is between the cassette label and the
tube label.
5. Press RESET to return to READY.
PN 4277219B
4.81-3


Sensor Name/
Type
Function/
Messages
Action to Test
Sheath Tank
Indicates the sheath tank is empty and

needs to be refilled.
Select F20, Sheath Tank Test, to check the operation

of the sheath tank switch.
Float Sensor
Sheath Tank Not Full

Sheath Tank Still Full
Stripper Plate Position
Mechanical
Indicates whether the stripper plate

cylinder is retracted or extended.

Stripper Plate Not In
2. Move the rocker bed to the backward position

and push the stripper plate in until it is flush with
the rocker bed.
Stripper Plate Not Out
3. Ensure the sensor status changes to 0.

Sweep-Flow Reservoir
Float Sensor
Indicates the sweep-flow reservoir is

empty and needs to be refilled.
Select F50, Sweep-Flow Reservoir Test, to check the

operation of the sweep-flow reservoir switch.
?To be supplied
Top Left Safety
Mechanical
Indicates the unloading bay is full,

ensuring no more than 12 cassettes are
placed in the unloading bay.
If raising the lift activates this switch,
the lift cylinder retracts immediately,
lowering the lift.

2. Press the plastic activator at the top of the
unloading bay to manually activate the sensor
and ensure the sensor status changes to 1.
Left Stack Full

Top Right Safety
Mechanical
Indicates the loading bay is full,

ensuring no more than twelve cassettes
are placed in the loading bay.
If raising the lift activates this switch,
the lift cylinder retracts immediately,
lowering the lift.
Right Stack Full
Check the sensor using one of two methods.

Method 1:
2. Press the plastic activator at the top of the
loading bay to manually activate the sensor.
Method 2:
1. Press and hold the plastic activator at the top of
the loading bay to manually activate the sensor.
2. Place a cassette in the loading bay.
3. Ensure an error is generated when the cycle
begins.
Tube in Position
Optosensor
Indicates a tube is in the piercing

station.
1. Slide a loaded cassette under the tube detector.

2. When a tube is in the correct position under the
tube detector, ensure the LED on the tube
detector lights.
3. Select F07 and verify that the tubes are in the
correct position when detected.
4.81-4
PN 4277219B


Sensor Name/
Type
Function/
Messages
Action to Test
Under Left Stack
Indicates a cassette is ready to be

unloaded from the rocker bed.

Mechanical
2. Place a cassette on the rocker bed under the

unloading bay.
Under Right Stack
Mechanical
Indicates a cassette is on the rocker bed

under the loading bay.

2. Place a cassette on the rocker bed under the
loading bay.
Vacuum Overflow Tank

Float Sensor
Indicates the vacuum overflow tank is

full.
1. Disconnect the vacuum overflow tank connector,

J17.
Level----V-
2. Press ID on the Diluter keypad and ensure

Level----V- is displayed.
3. Reconnect J17.
4. Press RESET and ensure the message is no
longer displayed.
Waste Level
Indicates the waste container is full.

Level -----W
Note: The waste sensor is usually
bypassed when the waste line drains
directly to an external drain.
1. Disconnect the waste level sensor connector,

J35.
2. Press ID on the Diluter keypad and ensure
Level-----W is displayed.
3. Reconnect J35.
4. Press RESET and ensure the message is no
longer displayed.
PN 4277219B
4.81-5

4.81-6
PN 4277219B

LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT
4.82

Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the gas springs that hold up LH 750 System Analyzer door
when it is open.
B Support, such as a tube rack, to hold the Analyzer door open
B Needle nose pliers
B Philips-head screwdriver
Removal
WARNING Risk of personal injury. The Analyzer cover requires two gas springs to hold it open. To avoid
having the Analyzer door fall on you while removing a gas spring, always prop the Analyzer door open
before removing the spring.
1.
Open the Analyzer front door and insert a support, such as a tube rack, between the
Scope module and the Analyzer door to support the door as shown in Figure 4.82-1.
Figure 4.82-1 Removing an Analyzer Door Gas Spring
T o p
B ra c k e t
G a s
s p r in g
P in
B a ll a n d
s o c k e t jo in t
G a s s p r in g
B o tto m
7 2 1 9 0 0 4 B
2.
3.
PN 4277219B
On the top ball and socket joint of the gas spring requiring replacement:
a.
Remove the safety ring pin, being careful not to lose the pin. Refer to Figure 4.82-1.
b.
Insert a pair of needle nose pliers between the bracket and the socket and pry the
socket off the ball.
Remove the appropriate Analytical Station side panel and open the Analyzer side door to
access the bottom ball and socket joint of the gas spring requiring replacement.
4.82-1

4.
On the bottom ball and socket joint of the gas spring:

a.
Remove the safety ring pin, being careful not to lose the pin. Refer to Figure 4.82-1.
b.
Insert a pair of needle nose pliers between the bracket and the socket and pry the
socket off the ball.
Installation
1.
Align a socket on the replacement gas spring with the ball on the top bracket and snap
the socket onto the ball.
2.
Reinstall the safety ring pin. Refer to Figure 4.82-1.
3.
Align the other socket on the replacement gas spring with the ball on the bottom bracket
and snap the socket onto the ball.
4.
Reinstall the safety ring pin.
5.
Verify the gas springs are working correctly. Go to Verification.
Verification
4.82-2
1.
Remove the support and close the Analyzer door.
2.
Open the Analyzer door completely and ensure the gas springs hold it open when you
release the door.
3.
Close the Analyzer front and side doors and reinstall the Analytical Station panel.
PN 4277219B

RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL
4.83

Purpose
Use all or parts of this procedure to move the Random Access module to access components
on the Random Access module or in its vicinity.
B Philips-head screwdriver
Removal
1.
2.
3.
For better access to the Random Access module disconnect the hand detector mounting
bracket from the Diluter as shown in Figure 4.83-1 and let the hand detector and its
mounting bracket hang down, out of the way.

R e m o v e
Unfasten
R e m o v e
Loosen
7 2 1 9 0 0 6 B
4.
Unfasten the captive screws securing the Random Access module. See Figure 4.83-2.
5.
Disconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the Random Access module:
a.
At the BSV, disconnect tubing 205
b.
c.
At the front blood detector, disconnect the needle input tubing.
d.
e.
At the rear blood detector, disconnect tubing 77, the tubing to the aspiration pump.
Note: Removing the tubing up to this point allows access to both the blood detectors and
the diff heater.
PN 4277219B
4.83-1

Figure 4.83-2 Captive Screws Securing Random Access Module
U n fa s te n
c a p tiv e s c r e w s
7 2 1 9 0 0 5 B
6.
7.
Disconnect the tubing connected to the right side of the Random Access module:
a.
At the stain chamber, disconnect the sample line to the flow cell.
b.
At the retic chamber, disconnect the retic delivery line and pull the line through
VL44.
c.
At the diff mixing chamber, disconnect the red striped latex sample line.
d.
At the diff mixing chamber, disconnect the 15 in. diff delivery line and pull the line
through VL65.
e.
At CVL93, carefully remove the retic clearing solution input line from port 1.
Remove the Random Access module and set it aside.
Installation
Follow the Removal procedure in reverse order to reinstall the Random Access module.
4.83-2
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Numerics
5C cell control
using for initial adjustment of average
calibration factors, 4.10-1
5C Control material used in Retic or SUBSET
modes, 7.2-1
5C Not Allowed In This Mode, 7.2-1
5-diff lyse pump. See diff lytic reagent pump
5 psi
acceptable limits, A.1-6
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on
development, 2.9-3
distribution, 2.9-3, 2.9-4
5 PSI Pressure High, 7.2-1
5 PSI Pressure Low, 7.2-1
5 PSI pressure too high, 7.2-1
5 PSI pressure too low, 7.2-1
5-psi regulator (RG2)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-25
5 Volts on Diluter 1 Card outside limit, 7.2-14
6-Channel Preamp card. See Six-Channel Preamp
card
+15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12
-15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12
-15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card outside limit, 7.2-14
+15 Volts on Diluter 1 card outside limit, 7.2-14
+15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13
30 psi
development, 2.9-2
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
PN 4277219B
part number, 8.1-25

48 Volt bulk or pneumatic Power Supply
defective, 7.2-9
48 Volt power outside 10% limit, 7.2-3
48 volts fault isolation, 7.4-5
60 psi
development, 2.9-2
distribution, 2.9-2
60 PSI pressure high., 7.2-19
60 PSI pressure low, 7.2-19
60 PSI pressure out of range (too high), 7.2-19
60 PSI pressure out of range (too low), 7.2-19
60-psi regulator (RV1)
part number, 8.1-25
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
286 Board Communication Error, 7.2-1
A
A Control Lot number archive file was created, 7.3-1
abbreviations
used in this manual, ABBREVIATIONS-1
ac input voltage specifications, table of, A.1-11
AC Line Voltage Bad, 7.2-2
AC line voltage below 90 Volt limit, 7.2-2
ACK Not Received By Diluter, 7.2-2
adjustment procedures
ambient temperature display, 4.65-2
aperture voltage, 4.9-1
aspiration pump, 4.27-1
bar-code scanner position sensor for laser style
bar-code reader, 4.53-2
bar-code scanner position sensor for LED style
bar-code scanner, laser style bar-code
reader, 4.51-8
bar-code scanner, LED style bar-code
reader, 4.51-1
bed backward sensor, 4.44-2
bed forward sensor, 4.44-4
bed horizontal sensor, 4.44-3
bellows down sensor, 4.57-2
bellows up sensor, 4.57-2
bubble/blood detectors, 4.55-3, 4.55-7
CBC calibration factors, 4.10-1
CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
cleaning truck, 4.58-5
Clog Detector circuit, 4.74-3
CRT intensity on the GENS System, 4.34-1
INDEX-1
INDEX
CRT intensity on the LH750 System, 4.34-2

diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1
diff preservative pump, 4.29-1
diff preservative pump volume
optimization, 4.66-1
diluent dispensers, 4.23-1
Diluter keypad display (contrast), A.3-13
flippers, loading bay, 4.42-1
flippers, unloading bay, 4.42-1
flow-rate (sheath, diff sample and retic sample
regulators), 4.73-1
Hgb lamp voltage, 4.32-2
initial sheath, diff sample and retic sample
pressures, 4.72-1
left lift up switch activator, 4.40-3
LS gain, 4.77-1
probe position sensor, 4.60-4
probe-wipe down sensor, 4.58-6
probe-wipe up sensor, 4.58-6
retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1
RF Detector Preamp card, 4.74-1
right lift up switch activator, 4.40-3
rocker bed belt tension, 4.36-1
rocker bed position flag, 4.44-1
rocker bed rock rate, 4.45-2
stain heater, 4.65-1
stain pump, 4.24-1
tube detector, 4.47-1
air water separator (FL1)
cleaning, 4.16-1
filter, part number, 8.1-11
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-3
replacement, 4.16-2
alarms, audible
descriptions, 4.5-1
how to turn off, 7.1-1
testing, 4.5-1
Ambient Temp Sensor Bad, 7.2-2
Ambient temperature sensor defective or
disconnected, 7.2-2
AMC
component locations, A.2-1
determining Hgb results on the GENS
System, 2.24-4
determining MCV results on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
2-INDEX
determining Plt and MPV results on the GENS

System, 2.24-3
determining RBC counts on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
determining RDW results on the GENS
System, 2.24-3
determining WBC counts on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
function, 2.3-1, 2.11-2
generating Plt histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-3
generating RBC histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
generating WBC histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
jumper locations, A.2-1
jumpers settings, A.2-1
location, GENS System, 2.3-3
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
part number, 8.1-22
power up signals simplified schematic, 2.6-5
replacement, 4.6-1
RESET signal block diagram, 2.11-3
switch location, A.2-1
switch settings, tables of, A.2-1
AMC Did Not Reply, 7.2-2
AMC Never Sent Start Command, 7.2-2
AMC reported error - ASCII Receive Error, 7.2-3
AMC Reported Error - Diff Transmit Failure., 7.2-13
AMC Reported Error - Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18
AMC Reported Error - PC not ready., 7.2-28
AMC Reported Error - Retic Transmit Failure, 7.2-32
AMC Reported Error - Run Aborted, PC Not
Ready, 7.2-34
AMC Reported Errors -- Operator Alert 09., 7.2-27
AMC Requested Stop, 7.2-2
AMC, Diluter or DIFF Processor hardware
malfunction (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-21
AMC-DIFF communication failure: 286 board, 7.2-1
AMC-DIFF communication failure:
unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40
AMC-DIFF communication failure: wrong
echo., 7.2-41
An archive file with patient samples was created, 7.3-1
ANA. See Analyzer
ANALOG 5 card
block diagram, 2.21-6
function, 2.21-6
inputs, 2.21-7
PN 4277219B
INDEX
outputs, 2.21-7
part number, 8.1-22
See also ANALOG card
analog backplane
for GENS System, part number, 8.1-22
for LH 750 System, part number, 8.1-22
function, 2.3-1
test points and voltage specifications, table
of, A.1-11
ANALOG card
function, 2.3-2
replacement, 4.6-1
See also ANALOG 5 card
Analytical Station
alarm, turning off, 7.1-1
audible alarms, description, 4.5-1
connecting to the Workstation on the GENS
System, 3.4-7
connecting to the Workstation on the LH 750
System, 3.15-1
decontaminating, 5.3-2
description, 2.1-2, 2.1-5
extended shutdown and startup
procedures, 5.2-1
main units, 2.1-2, 2.1-5
power down/power up procedure, 4.1-1
software versions, GENS System, A.9-1
software versions, LH 750 System, A.9-1
Analytical Station messages
"and" condition, 7.1-2
about the message tables, 7.1-2
Analyzer
accessing and using the SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1
accessing and using the SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1
backplane voltage test points, A.1-11
card layouts with component descriptions, A.2-1
circuit card replacement, 4.6-1
function, 2.3-1
illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated
installation, GENS System. See installation
procedure, GENS System
installation, LH 750 System. See installation
procedure, LH 750 System
main components, table of functions, 2.3-1
See also Analyzer, GENS System; Analyzer,
LH 750 System
PN 4277219B
Analyzer +48V Bad, 7.2-3

Analyzer Error, 7.2-3
Analyzer fans
function, 2.3-1
replacement, 4.12-3
Analyzer Fans Failed, 7.2-3
Analyzer Fans Power Supply Defective, 7.2-3
Analyzer fans power supply defective, 7.2-3
Analyzer keypad. See CRT buttons; Numeric
keypad
Analyzer memory read/write failure., 7.2-34
ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER card. See AMC
Analyzer non-communication error, 7.2-20
Analyzer power supplies
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 2.7-4
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1, 2.7-3
general description, 2.5-4
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-4
input, 2.7-5
monitors, 2.7-6
outputs, 2.7-5
part number, 8.1-22
power status LEDs, table of indications, 2.7-6
replacement, 4.6-1
test points, 2.7-6
Zap circuit, description of, 2.7-4
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-6
input, 2.7-7
monitors, 2.7-8
outputs, 2.7-7
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
test points, 2.7-8
Analyzer stopped, 7.2-2
Analyzer, GENS System
component locations, front view, 2.3-3
component locations, rear view, 2.3-3
CRT buttons. See CRT buttons
INDEX-3
INDEX
opening side doors, illustration, 3.3-3

software menu tree, A.10-1
See also Analyzer
Analyzer, LH 750 System
component locations, front view, cover
down, 2.3-4
See also Analyzer
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: two NAKs
sent from AMC, 7.2-39
sent from Diluter., 7.2-39
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure:
unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40
Analyzer-to-Diluter communication failure., 7.2-14
Angar valves
function, A.6-8
illustration of, 8.2-62
location references, table of, A.6-8
part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63
aperture blocks and module, part numbers, 8.1-3
aperture gain matching procedure. See latex voltage
calibration
aperture impedance
red and white isolation with diluent, table of
limits, A.1-3
red and white with diluent, table of limits, A.1-3
red and white without diluent, table of
limits, A.1-3
Aperture Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-3
Aperture voltage reading above limits, 7.2-3
Aperture voltage reading below limits, 7.2-3
Aperture Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-3
Aperture voltage(s) out of range (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-9
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-1, 2.7-3
input, 2.7-2
monitors, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
outputs, 2.7-2
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
4-INDEX
switch locations, A.2-2

switch settings, table of, A.2-2
APS1 card. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card
ASCII Rec. Error, 7.2-3
Aspiration -B--, 7.2-4
Aspiration ---C, 7.2-4
aspiration modes
options available, 2.1-6
Aspiration N---, 7.2-5
Aspiration --P-, 7.2-5
aspiration pump (PM9)
adjustable stops, 2.17-3
aspiration state, Automatic mode, 2.17-3
aspiration state, Manual mode, 2.17-3
at rest state, 2.17-2
components, illustration of, 2.17-2
function, 2.17-1
function and location reference, A.6-11
high (Automatic-mode) adjustments,
high (Automatic-mode) volume check, 4.27-3
low (Manual-mode) adjustments, illustration
of, 4.27-2
low (Manual-mode) volume check, 4.27-1
module, exploded view of, 8.2-48
part number, 8.1-24
pneumatic signals and piston positions, table
of, 2.17-1
replacement, 4.27-6
troubleshooting, 4.27-4
volume tolerances, A.1-14
Aspiration Pump module
components, GENS System, illustration, A.7-4
components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
exploded view of, 8.2-48
location, GENS System, A.7-4
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
aspiration station
component locations, 2.17-17
Aspiration Timeout, 7.2-6
Aspiration timeout, 7.2-6
aspirator tip
function, A.6-9
location, 2.17-17
attention
definition, 1.1-4
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from

Analyzer., 7.3-1
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from GEN
S Workstation., 7.3-1
Automatic Mode Disabled, 7.2-6
Automatic sampling mode disabled., 7.2-6
Auto-Numbering has been disabled., 7.3-1
Auto-Numbering has been enabled auto number is
<Auto-Numbering Start ID>., 7.3-1
Autostop - check Workstation, 7.2-6
AutoStop Check Workstation, 7.2-6
Autostop check Workstation, 7.2-6
Autostop has been triggered for Analytical Station
<Instrument#>, 7.3-1
AutoStop has been triggered for control folder
<lot#>., 7.3-1
AutoStop Requested, 7.2-6
B
BA#
diff parameter, 2.1-1
BA%
checking precision, 5.5-1
Background CBC test values within limits, 7.3-1
Background DIFF test values within limits, 7.3-1
Background: <Background test/parameter>
<Background> exceeded <flag> limit, 7.3-1
Background: <Background test/parameter> , 7.3-1
backplane interconnects
function, 2.3-1
backplane voltage bus
connecting on the GENS System, 3.4-4
connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5
function, 2.3-1, 2.5-3
backplane voltage bus distribution
block diagram for the GENS System, 2.5-3
block diagram for the LH 750 System, 2.5-4
backplanes
analog. See analog backplane
CRT. See CRT backplane
digital. See digital backplane
backwash cup
function, 2.17-17
marker, 2.16-7
PN 4277219B
stationary vs moveable, 2.17-17

backwash cylinder (CL11)
backwash manifold (MF4)
function, 2.13-9, 2.17-12
See also manifolds
backwash tank (VC23)
choke, CK15, location, 3.1-5, 3.10-5
function, 2.13-8
monitoring the reagent level of, 2.13-8
reagent flow, illustration of, 2.13-8
testing sensor, 2.13-8, 4.81-1
Backwash Tank Not Full, 7.2-7
backwash tank sensor
function, 4.81-1
testing, 4.81-1
Backwash Tank Still Full, 7.2-7
Bar code scanner pressure too low or scanner
obstructed (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-35
components locations, A.3-1
connector locations, A.3-1
connectors, table of connections, A.3-1
for LED style bar-code reader, part
number, 8.1-22
function, 2.4-1
jumper location, A.3-1
jumper setting, A.3-1
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.7-1
bar-code reader
bar-code label specifications, 2.14-5
function, 2.14-3
performance test, 4.49-1
read-rate specifications, A.1-1
types of bar codes used, 2.14-5
bar-code reader, laser style
description, 2.14-4
scanner adjustments, 4.51-8
scanner cylinder replacement, 4.50-2
See also bar-code reader
bar-code reader, LED style
description, 2.14-3
INDEX-5
INDEX

bar-code scanner
adjustment locations for LED style bar-code
reader, 4.51-6
adjustments, laser style bar-code reader, 4.51-8
adjustments, LED style bar-code reader, 4.51-1
alignment with oscilloscope, 4.54-1
allowable distance from bar-code housing, A.1-1
electrical check for LED style bar-code
reader, 4.52-2
electrical checks, table of test points and
acceptable ranges, A.1-1
function, 2.4-1
location, 2.15-5
park tab length tolerance, A.1-1
position sensor adjustment for laser style
position sensor adjustment for LED style
speed check for LED style bar-code
reader, 4.52-1
stoke timing specifications, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner card
location, 4.51-4
test point locations, 4.52-2
bar-code scanner cylinder (CL7)
acceptable pressure, A.1-6
function, 2.15-5
location, 2.15-5
replacement, 4.50-1
stroke specifications, A.1-1
bar-code scanner cylinder pressure regulator (RG5)
part number, 8.1-24
bar-code scanner position sensor
location, 4.53-1
Bar-Code Test screen, illustration, 4.49-1
basophil
definition, GLOSSARY-1
See also BA#; BA%; diff parameters
bath overflow chamber (VC10)
BCD card. See Bar-Code Decoder card
BCS. See bar-code scanner
6-INDEX
BD ADJ card
adjustment locations, A.2-3
replacement, 4.6-1
replacement, illustration, 4.6-2
BD1
function, A.6-9
location on the GENS System, A.7-4
location on the LH 750 System, A.8-4
See also bubble/blood detectors
BD2
function, A.6-9
bed backward sensor
adjustment, 4.44-2
function, 4.81-1
location, 2.15-2
testing, 4.81-1
bed forward sensor
adjustment, 4.44-4
function, 4.81-1
location, 2.15-2
testing, 4.81-1
bed horizontal sensor
adjustment, 4.44-3
function, 2.15-2, 4.81-1
location, 2.15-2
testing, 4.81-1
bed locks
description, 2.15-2
function, 2.15-2
location, 2.15-2, 2.15-7
Bed Not Advanced, 7.2-7
Bed Not Backward, 7.2-7
Bed Not Forward, 7.2-7
Bed Not Level, 7.2-8
bed position flag
adjustment, 4.44-1
bed position sensors
location, 2.15-2
See also bed backward sensor; bed forward
sensor; bed horizontal sensor
PN 4277219B
INDEX
bed rock cylinder (CL8)

function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
location, front and rear views, 4.45-1
replacement, 4.45-1
bed rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2
bellows cylinder (CL3)
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12
bellows down sensor
adjusting, 4.57-2
function, 2.17-12, 4.81-2
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1
testing, 4.81-2
bellows interlock
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12
Bellows Not Down, 7.2-8
Bellows not extended, 7.2-8
Bellows Not Up, 7.2-8
bellows up sensor
adjusting, 4.57-2
function, 2.17-11, 4.81-1
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1
testing, 4.81-1
belt advance cylinder (CL9)
function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
belt drive assembly
allowable slack, A.1-1
belt tension adjustment, 4.36-1
location, 2.15-3
part number, 8.1-20
removal, 4.35-1
replacement, 4.35-1
biological hazards
safety precautions, 1.2-1
BLD DET ADJ card
function, 2.3-1
location, 2.3-4
block diagrams
+5.2 control voltage and POWER ON signal
distribution, new Diluter
interconnects, 2.6-3
distribution, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-3
ANALOG 5 card, 2.21-6
PN 4277219B
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1

backplane voltage bus distribution on the
GENS System, 2.5-3
LH 750 System, 2.5-4
bar-code reader, laser style, 2.14-4
bar-code reader, LED style, 2.14-3
CBC analysis on the GENS System, 2.18-1
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.18-2
control voltage development and distribution,
new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
Diff Power Supply card, 2.8-1
DIFF PROCESSOR card, 2.21-7
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply
card, 2.8-4
Electronic Power Supply, 2.5-1
Hgb signal flow, 2.18-8
Light Scatter Preamp module, 2.21-5
PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 2.19-6
power up sequence, 7.4-3
R/W/P SC/A card], 2.7-3
reagent distribution in Analytical Stations that
bypass the diluent reservoir, 2.13-7
use the diluent reservoir, 2.13-6
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 2.19-1
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 2.19-6
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 2.19-4
RESET signal, 2.11-3
RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum
tube, 2.21-3
RF Detector Preamp card, solid state, 2.21-3
sample data flow on the GENS System from
final processing to reporting, 2.24-1
sample data flow on the LH 750 System from
Six-Channel Preamp card, 2.19-3
Specimen Transport system, 2.14-1
System Control overview, 2.11-1
System Power Controller card and System Power
Controller Display, 2.10-1
SYSTEM RESET signal, 2.6-6
VCS optimization procedure flow, 4.71-2
VCS Technology system overview, 2.21-1
blood detectors. See bubble/blood detectors
INDEX-7
INDEX
Blood front and rear sensors detected partial

aspiration (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-5
blood sampling valve. See BSV
blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11)
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
part number, 8.1-24
BSV
component part numbers, 8.1-3
function, 2.17-5, A.6-9
port descriptions, table of, 2.17-6
port locations, 2.17-6
positions, table of, 2.17-5
replacement, 4.60-1
See also BSV cylinders; BSV module
BSV cylinders (CL1 and CL2)
CL1 replacement, 4.60-3
function, 2.17-5
location, 4.60-2
BSV module
component replacement, 4.60-1
component replacement, illustration of, 4.60-1
exploded view, 8.2-44
part number, 8.1-19
bubble detectors. See bubble/blood detectors
bubble/blood detectors
aspiration messages, table of, 2.17-15
checks and adjustments, 4.55-3, 4.55-7
function, 2.17-13
location, 2.17-13
operation, 2.17-14
part number, 8.1-3
replacement, 4.55-1, 4.55-5
Bulk Power Filter card
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2
part number, 8.1-22
8-INDEX
replacement, 4.21-1
Bulk Power Supply
48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
input, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2
outputs, 2.5-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.20-1
BVB. See backplane voltage bus
C
C1 adjustment, 4.74-4
Cable Adpt card. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
cables, part numbers, 8.1-4
calibration
CBC. See CBC calibration
VCS. See VCS optimization
Calibration factors received from analyzer
unexpectedly - delete runs & restart., 7.3-2
calibration procedures
CBC. See CBC calibration procedures
VCS. See VCS optimization procedures
Carryover failed, 7.3-2
Carryover passed, 7.3-2
cassette advance wheel
function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
Cassette did not advance to next position., 7.2-35
Cassette Not Lowered Onto Bed, 7.2-9
cassette transport assembly
alignment checks, 4.48-1
component locations, GENS System, 2.4-4
component locations, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
function, 2.4-1, 2.14-2
moving a cassette, 2.15-1
specifications, A.1-1
verification procedure, 5.8-1
caution
definition, 1.1-3
CBC Analysis system
analyzing the RBC, WBC and Plt data, 2.19-1
applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
PN 4277219B
INDEX
CBC analysis on the GENS System block

diagram, 2.18-1
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System block
diagram, 2.18-2
delivering CBC samples in the Automatic mode,
delivering CBC samples in the Manual mode,
determining the CBC parameters, 2.19-7
determining the Hgb, 2.18-8
function, 2.18-1
making the sample dilutions, 2.18-2
sample processing components on a GENS
System that bypasses the diluent reservoir,
illustration, 2.18-3
system that uses the diluent reservoir,
sample processing components on the LH 750
System, illustration, 2.18-4
timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
CBC aperture checks
procedure, 4.70-1
CBC Bath Voltages Out Of Range, 7.2-9
CBC calibration
automatic-mode calibration factor limits, table
of, A.1-3
conditions that require calibration, table
of, 2.25-8
flow-rate test limits, table of, A.1-3
latex voltage test limits, table of, A.1-2
manual-mode calibration factor limits, table
of, A.1-3
mode-to-mode comparison limits, A.1-6
procedures, overview, 2.25-1
tests available from CBC Calibration
window, 2.25-1
voltage matching test limits, table of, A.1-2
when to calibrate, 2.25-8
why calibrate, 2.25-1
See also CBC calibration procedures
CBC calibration procedures
flow rate, 4.10-1
latex voltage, 4.9-1
PN 4277219B
matching Manual mode-to-Automatic

mode, 4.11-1
CBC lytic reagent
and diluent delivery timing check, 4.31-1
conditions affecting delivery timing, table
of, 4.31-4
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
F-key function to prime, A.5-1
function, 2.18-2, 2.18-8
CBC lytic reagent and diluent delivery timing check
conditions affecting timing, table of, 4.31-4
equipment hookup for,
illustration, 4.31-2, 4.31-3
scope settings for, 4.31-3
timing specifications, A.1-8
CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7)
adjustments, illustration of, 4.22-3
function, 2.18-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.22-5
volume check, 4.22-1
CBC noise checks
limits, A.1-3
CBC parameters
determining reported results on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
determining reported results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generated by instrument, 2.1-1
test limits, A.1-5
See also CBC Analysis system
CBC Xmit Failure, 7.2-9
check valves
part numbers, 8.2-59
chokes
part numbers, 8.1-7, 8.2-59
circuit cards
AMC. See AMC
ANALOG. See ANALOG card
ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER. See AMC
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1. See ANALYZER
POWER SUPPLY 1 card
INDEX-9
INDEX

POWER SUPPLY 2 card
Analyzer, replacement procedure, 4.6-1
Analyzer, table of special replacement
instructions, 4.6-4
API. See API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR. See API-SIGNAL
GENERATOR card
APS1. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card
Bar-Code Decoder. See Bar-Code Decoder card
Bar-Code Scanner. See Bar-Code Scanner card
BCD. See Bar-Code Decoder card
BLD DET ADJ. See BLD DET ADJ card.
Bulk Power Filter. See Bulk Power Filter card
Cable Adpt. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
COMM INTERFACE. See COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE card
Comm Intfc. See COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE card
CRT4 Display. See CRT4 Display card
Diff Power Supply. See Diff Power Supply card
Diff Proc. See DIFF PROCESSOR card
DIFF PROCESSOR. See DIFF PROCESSOR card
Diff PS. See Diff Power Supply card
Dil 1. See Diluter 1 card
Dil Proc. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card
Diluter 1. See Diluter 1 card
Diluter Cable Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter
card
Diluter Cbl Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter
card
DILUTER CPU. See DILUTER CPU card
DILUTER PROCESSOR. See DILUTER
PROCESSOR card
Diluter, replacement procedure, 4.7-1
Diluter, table of special replacement
instructions, 4.7-4
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply. See
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
Keyboard and Display Interface. See Keyboard
and Display Interface card
Laser Reference 4. See Laser Reference 4 card
10-INDEX
Motor Controller. See Motor Controller card

Newbar. See Newbar card
PLATELET PROCESSOR. See PLATELET
PROCESSOR card
Plt Proc. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card
PVT. See PVT card
R/W Proc 2 card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR
card
R/W Proc. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
R/W/P SC/A. See R/W/P SC/A card
R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer. See R/W/P
SC/A card
Red Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP. See RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2. See RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR 2 card
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR. See RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card
Reg Res Intfc. See Reservoir Interface card
Reservoir Interface. See Reservoir Interface card
RF Detector Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp
card
RF Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp card
RS/O Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
RS/Opto Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
SC/A. See R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer
card
Scope 1. See Scope 1 card
Sensor Dist. See Sensor Distribution card
Sensor Distribution. See Sensor Distribution
card
Six-Channel Aperture Preamp. See Six-Channel
Preamp card
Six-Channel Preamp. See Six-Channel Preamp
card
Sol/Opt PS. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card
SPC. See System Power Controller card
System Power Controller. See System Power
Controller card
VCS ANALOG. See VCS ANALOG card
White Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
cards
circuits
Clog Detector. See Clog Detector circuit
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater, 2.12-11
Peltier and Ambient Temperature, 2.12-10
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Stain Chamber Heater, 2.12-10

Zap, 2.7-4
CL1 (Diluter)
function, A.6-9
See also BSV cylinders
CL1 (Power Supply)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
CL2
function, A.6-9
CL3
function, A.6-9
See also bellows cylinder
CL4. See left lift cylinder
CL5. See right lift cylinder
CL6
function, A.6-9
See also tube-ram cylinder
CL7
function, A.6-9
See also bar-code scanner cylinder
CL8. See bed rock cylinder
CL9. See belt advance cylinder
CL10. See stripper plate cylinder
CL11
function, 2.17-17, A.6-9
See also backwash cylinder
cleaning agent
GENS System, 3.5-3
LH 750 System, 3.13-3
cleaning agent pump (PM10)
replacement, 4.26-3
PN 4277219B

cleaning procedures
air water separator, 4.16-1
flow cell, 4.79-1
lens block, 4.80-1
Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, 4.58-2
System flush, 5.3-2
cleaning truck
adjustment, 4.58-5
cleaning, 4.58-2
function, A.6-9
location, 2.17-17
replacement, 4.58-2
Clog Detector
error generated by, 7.5-1
Clog Detector circuit
adjustment, 4.74-3
function, 2.21-2
threshold voltage limits, A.1-12
coaxial cables, Analyzer
connecting, 3.4-2
coefficient of variation
COMM INTERFACE card. See
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card
Comm Intfc card. See COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE card
Comment for control folder <lot#>, <comment>,
<comment>, 7.3-2
COMMON ROM AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
Communication error with AMC or
interconnect, 7.2-2
Communication failure during transmission to
diluter, 7.2-16
communication links, illustration of, 2.11-4
function, 2.3-2, 2.11-4
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
role in analyzing Hgb data, 2.18-8
Communications error, 7.2-2, 7.2-3
Compressor +48V Bad, 7.2-9
Compressor Too Hot, 7.2-9
INDEX-11
INDEX
compressor. See compressor/vacuum pump

compressor/vacuum pump
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-8
replacement, 4.14-1
conductivity (RF)
VCS measurement, description, 2.20-1
consumables, part numbers, 8.1-8
Control Folder <Lot #> is expired (<Expiration
Date>), 7.3-2
Control folder <lot#> created, it must be edited in a
system setup for valid flagging., 7.3-2
Control folder for lot number <lot #> created, 7.3-2
Control folder for lot number <lot #> deleted, 7.3-2
Control folder for lot number <lot #>edited, 7.3-2
Control run for control folder <Lot #> out of
range, 7.3-2
Control run outside limits condition has cleared, 7.3-3
control voltage development and distribution
block diagram, new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
block diagram, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
Coulter Principle, instrument application
aperture current, 2.18-4
aperture vacuum, 2.18-5
sensing area, 2.18-4
sensing area, illustration, 2.18-5
covers, instrument
removal of. See removal procedures
CRC Error, 7.2-10
CRT backplane
+48 V check, test point and acceptable
range, A.1-10
function, 2.3-2
part number, 8.1-22
of, A.1-11
CRT buttons
function, 2.3-2
CRT, Analyzer
intensity adjustment on the GENS
System, 4.34-1
intensity adjustment on the LH 750
System, 4.34-2
CRT4 Display card
12-INDEX

function, 2.11-7
CTA. See cassette transport assembly
current, leakage specifications. See leakage current
specifications
CV
CVL43
location, A.8-5
See also diff sample valve
CVL85/126
function, A.6-9
CVL87/127
function, A.6-10
CVL93
function, A.8-5
See also stained retic sample valve
CVL93/128
function, A.6-10
CVL99
location, A.8-5
CVL993
See also retic sample valve
cylinders
bed rock. See bed rock cylinder
bellows. See bellows cylinder
belt advance. See belt advance cylinder
BSV. See BSV cylinders
left lift. See left lift cylinder
part numbers, 8.1-9
right lift. See right lift cylinder
stripper plate. See stripper plate cylinder
tube ram. See tube ram cylinder
D
Daily check precision test failed, 7.3-3
Daily check ramp test failed, 7.3-3
data collection, List mode, 4.33-1
data collection, timing
Plt histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
RBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
WBC and RBC count data, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
WBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
dc power cable
DC. See volume (DC)
PN 4277219B
INDEX
deactivator clips for pinch valves. See pinch valves

decontamination
of the Analytical Station, procedure, 5.3-2
Demographic information updated for <Sample
ID>, 7.3-3
Diagnostic Mode, 7.2-11
Did not detect rocker bed backward position., 7.2-7
Did not detect rocker bed forward position., 7.2-7
Did not detect rocker bed horizontal position., 7.2-8
diff ambient thermistor
function, 2.22-5
location, 2.22-5
acceptable ranges, table of, A.1-4
procedure, 4.4-1
diff chamber mixing motor
replacement, 4.69-1
Diff communication failure., 7.2-11
diff heater
function, A.6-9
part number, 8.1-18
replacement, 4.67-1
temperature check, 4.65-1
DIFF heater defective or disconnected., 7.2-11
Diff Heater Disabled, 7.2-11
Diff heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-11
Diff Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-11
Diff Laser Offset Lower Failed, 7.2-11
Diff Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-11
diff lytic reagent
conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.22-4
diff lytic reagent pump (PM4)
dispensing state, high volume, 2.22-7
dispensing state, low volume, 2.22-8
function, 2.22-6
high volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.28-6
high volume check, 4.28-4
low volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.28-4
PN 4277219B
low volume check, 4.28-1

part number, 8.1-24
of, 2.22-8
reading Volumetric Cylinder for volume
measurement, illustration of, 4.28-3
replacement, 4.28-8
diff mixing chamber (VC25)
function, 2.22-1, 2.22-3
location, 4.68-1
replacement, 4.68-1
Diff module
diff mixing chamber replacement, 4.68-1
function, 2.4-1
part number, 8.1-19
verifying correct operation, 5.6-1
diff parameters
determining reported results, 2.24-7
test limits, A.1-5
See also VCS Technology system
Diff PC Communication Failed, 7.2-11
Diff Power Supply card
range, A.1-10
connection to backplane voltage bus on the
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
function, 2.4-1, 2.8-1
input, 2.8-2
monitors, 2.8-2
outputs, 2.8-2
part number, 8.1-22
INDEX-13
INDEX
diff preservative
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.22-4
diff preservative pump (PM1)
function, 2.22-6
part number, 8.1-24
of, 2.22-8
replacement, 4.29-8
volume optimization, 4.66-1
volume optimization, peak-to-peak DC
conductivity noise limits, A.1-9
diff preserve. See diff preservative
Diff Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-11
Diff Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-12
Diff Proc card. See DIFF PROCESSOR card
DIFF PROCESSOR card
function, 2.3-2, 2.21-7
inputs, 2.21-8
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
DIFF processor communication failure, 7.2-12
Diff Processor Does Not Answer, 7.2-12
14-INDEX
DIFF Processor monitor command did not

finish., 7.2-26
Diff Processor Out Of Synch., 7.2-12
DIFF PS Card +15 V Error, 7.2-12
DIFF PS Card -15 V Error, 7.2-12
Diff PS card. See Diff Power Supply card
Diff RAM Test Failed, 7.2-12
diff sample pressure
acceptable variation, A.1-9
regulator. See diff sample pressure regulator
transducer (DIFF PRESSURE) location, A.3-14
DIFF sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-12
DIFF sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-11
diff sample pressure regulator (RG3)
function, 2.22-4
part number, 8.1-25
diff sample valve (CVL43)
diff segment valve
function, 2.17-7
ports, description, 2.17-10
ports, illustration, 2.17-10
See also shear valves
DIFF timer error., 7.2-13
Diff Timer Test Failed, 7.2-13
diff waste chamber (VC13)
DIFF Xmit Failure, 7.2-13
differential parameters. See diff parameters
Differential Power Supply card. See Diff Power
Supply card
digital backplane
connecting with the RF Detector Preamp card on
connecting with the RS/Opto Intfc card on the
GENS System, 3.4-6
LH 750 System, 3.12-7
function, 2.3-2
PN 4277219B
INDEX

of, A.1-11
Dil 1 card. See Diluter 1 card
Dil Proc card. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card
Dil SOL/OP PS +15V Error, 7.2-13
Dil SOL/OP PS -15V Error, 7.2-13
Dil SOL/OP PS 24V Error, 7.2-13
Dil1 Card 5V Error, 7.2-14
Dil1 Card +15V Error, 7.2-14
Dil1 Card -15V Error, 7.2-14
DIL4 Card 12V Error, 7.2-14
diluent
and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing
check, 4.31-1
conditions affecting delivery timing to WBC
bath, table of, 4.31-4
GENS System, 3.5-3
LH 750 System, 3.13-3
diluent and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing
check. See CBC lytic reagent and diluent
delivery timing check
diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser; WBC
diluent dispenser
Diluent front and rear sensors detected carryover
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4
Diluent level low or faulty backwash tank float
sensor., 7.2-7
Diluent level low or faulty sheath tank float
sensor., 7.2-36
Diluent level low or faulty tank sensor, 7.2-38
diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28)
function, 2.13-7
diluent/cleaning agent manifold (VC32)
function, 2.13-7
inputs, 2.13-2, 2.13-7
Diluter
accessing F-key functions, A.5-1
Angar valves. See Angar valves
F-key functions, table of, A.5-1
PN 4277219B
fluidic component locations, center front panel,

GENS System, A.7-2
LH 750 System, A.8-2
fluidic component locations, Diff module,
GENS System, A.7-5
fluidic component locations, left front panel,
GENS System, A.7-1
fluidic component locations, lower left rear
door, GENS System, A.7-6
door, LH 750 System, A.8-6
fluidic component locations, Random Access
module, A.8-5
fluidic component locations, rear of center front
panel, GENS System, A.7-2
panel, LH 750 System, A.8-2
fluidic component locations, rear of left front
fluidic component locations, rear of right front
fluidic component locations, Retic
module, A.7-5
fluidic component locations, right front panel,
GENS System, A.7-3
fluidic component locations, right rear
door, A.7-6
fluidic component locations, Sampling Station,
GENS System, A.7-4
fluidic component locations, under front cover,
GENS System, A.7-4
fluidic components, table of descriptions and
location references, A.6-9
function, 2.4-1
INDEX-15
INDEX
installation. See installation procedure, GENS

System; installation procedure, LH 750
System
main components, table of descriptions and
location references, 2.4-1
pinch valves. See pinch valves
solenoid valves. See solenoids valves
See also Diluter, GENS System; Diluter, LH 750
System
Diluter 1 card
range, A.1-10
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
function, 2.4-1, 2.12-4
input, 2.12-5, 2.12-8
LED indications, table of, A.3-4
LED locations, A.3-3
monitoring, 2.12-5
outputs, 2.12-5, 2.12-8
part number, 8.1-22, 8.2-25
power supply distribution, illustration of, 2.12-4
replacement, 4.7-3
styles in use, 2.12-3
Diluter 1 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-15
Diluter 2 card
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-6, 2.12-8
inputs, 2.12-7
jumper settings, A.3-5
monitoring, 2.12-7
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.7-3
16-INDEX

<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
Diluter 2 RBD card
Diluter 2 REL card
Diluter 3 card
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-8
inputs, 2.12-9
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.7-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card
part number, 8.1-23
See also Diluter 3 card
Diluter 4 card
range, A.1-10
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater circuit, illustration
of, 2.12-11
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-9
inputs, 2.12-11
location, GENSystem, 2.4-7
PN 4277219B
INDEX
part number, 8.1-23

Peltier and Ambient Temperature circuit,
replacement, 4.7-3
Stain Chamber Heater circuit, illustration
of, 2.12-10
Diluter ambient thermistor
function, 2.22-5
location, 2.22-5
Diluter Board Not Answering, 7.2-14
Diluter Cable Adapter card
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-3
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
Diluter Card 1 Failure, 7.2-15
Diluter Cbl Adapter card. See Diluter Cable Adapter
card
Diluter Comm. Error, 7.2-15
Diluter communication failure, 7.2-15
Diluter Control system
Diluter 1 card, 2.12-4
Diluter 2 card, 2.12-6, 2.12-8
Diluter Cable Adapter card, 2.12-3
DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-2
Diluter keypad, 2.12-11
DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-2
function, 2.12-1
numeric keypad, 2.12-11
overview, 2.12-1
DILUTER CPU card
function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2
replacement, 4.6-1
vs DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-6
Diluter CPU card
part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-79
Diluter Echo Error, 7.2-15
Diluter Error, 7.2-15
Diluter failure., 7.2-15
Diluter front door open during automatic sampling
mode operation., 7.2-16
PN 4277219B
Diluter keypad
component locations, exploded view, 2.12-12
contrast adjustment, 2.12-11, A.3-13
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-11
location, 2.4-4
Diluter keypad failure., 7.2-21
Diluter Left Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-15
Diluter left power supply defective, 7.2-15
Diluter memory failure, 7.2-15
Diluter not ready to receive data from AMC., 7.2-27
Diluter not receiving data from AMC, 7.2-2
Diluter power supplies
card, 2.8-3
component locations, A.2-7, A.2-9
function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2
part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-5
replacement, 4.6-1
switch location, A.2-7, A.2-9
vs DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-6
Diluter RAM Fault, 7.2-15
Diluter received an invalid command from the
AMC., 7.2-41
Diluter Right Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-16
Diluter right power supply defective, 7.2-16
Diluter TxRx Error, 7.2-16
Diluter, GENS System
keypad. See Diluter keypad
main component locations, front panels, 2.4-4
main component locations, front view, panels
closed, 2.4-4
main component locations, left door and
compartment, 2.4-6
main component locations, left rear doors, 2.4-7
main component locations, right door and
compartment, 2.4-5
main component locations, right rear door, 2.4-6
main component locations, under front
cover, 2.4-5
See also Diluter
INDEX-17
INDEX
Diluter, LH 750 System

main component locations, center rear
panel, 2.4-9
main component locations, front panel, 2.4-8
closed, 2.4-8
compartment, 2.4-10
main component locations, left rear
doors, 2.4-11
compartment, 2.4-10
main component locations, right rear
door, 2.4-11
cover, 2.4-9
See also Diluter
range, A.1-10
function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3
input, 2.8-3
LED locations, illustration, A.3-12
monitors, 2.8-4
outputs, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23
test point locations, illustration, A.3-12
test points, table of expected values, A.3-13
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply card
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
replacement, 4.7-3
disinfect
procedure, 5.3-2
dispensers, diluent. See RBC diluent dispenser,
Door Open Run Stopped, 7.2-16
door, front
testing sensor, 4.81-2
18-INDEX
doors, instrument, part numbers, 8.1-10

DPR Diluter Packet Error, 7.2-16
dump valve (VL1)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
replacement, 4.15-1
Dump Valve Stuck Closed, 7.2-16
Dump Valve Stuck Open, 7.2-16
Duplicate run date and/or run time received, 7.3-3
E
electronic forms
available in Workstation, 4.61-1
Instrument Reference Report, using, 4.61-2
System Installation Report, using, 4.61-2
System Verification Report, using, 4.61-1
electronic hazards
Electronic Power Supply
Electronic Power system
+5.2 V control voltage and POWER ON signal
distribution block diagram, new Diluter
distribution block diagram, old Diluter
+5.2 V control voltage distribution, table of
components and functions, 2.6-4
ac power timing sequence, table of, 7.4-1
Analyzer power supplies, 2.7-1
control voltage development, 2.6-1
block diagram, new Diluter
block diagram, old Diluter
control voltage distribution, 2.6-1
description, 2.5-1
Diluter power supplies, 2.8-1
function, 2.5-1
instrument power on timing sequence, table
of, 7.4-2
main cable connections on the GENS
System, 3.4-1
main cable connections on the LH 750
System, 3.12-1
PN 4277219B
INDEX
power development and distribution, 2.5-1

power off signals, 2.6-6
power up sequence block diagram, 7.4-3
power voltages and power voltage signal lines,
table of, 7.4-1
SYSTEM RESET signal block diagram, 2.6-6
electronic test limits
for DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, A.1-4
for PRECISION TEST 2, A.1-4
for RAMP TEST 0, A.1-4
EO#
EO%
eosinophil
See also EO#; EO%; diff parameters
erythrocyte
See also RBC
Erythrolyse. See diff lytic reagent
ETX not received from diluter, 7.2-17
ETX not received from Diluter., 7.2-26
ETX Rec. Error, 7.2-17
EXPECTED COMMAND FROM AMC, 7.2-17
Expected Command from AMC, 7.2-17
Expected command from AMC, command not
received., 7.2-17
extended shutdown
procedure, 5.2-1
procedure overview, 5.2-1
when to do, 5.2-1
F
F-key functions
accessing, A.5-1
descriptions, table of, A.5-1
Fan Power Bad, 7.2-17
fans
Analyzer. See Analyzer fans
Power Supply exhaust. See Power Supply
exhaust fan
Power Supply intake. See Power Supply intake
fan
PN 4277219B
Fatal DPR Error, 7.2-17

Faulty backwash tank float sensor, 7.2-7
Faulty diluter memory., 7.2-10
Faulty PS1 power supply., 7.2-21
Faulty PS2 power supply, 7.2-21
Faulty sheath tank float sensor, 7.2-36
Faulty SPC A/D, 7.2-37
Faulty SPC A/D., 7.2-36
FC, 7.5-1
filters, part numbers, 8.1-11
fittings
part numbers, 8.1-13, 8.2-61
FL1 (Power Supply). See air water separator
flippers
allowable cassette overlap, A.1-1
location, loading bay, 2.15-3
location, unloading bay, 2.15-7
flippers, loading bay
checks and adjustments, 4.42-1
flippers, unloading bay
float sensor, backwash tank. See backwash tank
sensor
float sensor, sheath tank. See sheath tank sensor
float sensor, sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow
reservoir sensor
float sensor, VC22
function, 2.9-5
float sensor/reservoir cap
replacement, 4.30-1
float sensors, backwash tank
function, 2.13-8
location, 2.13-8
float sensors, diluent (for Analytical Stations that
bypass the diluent reservoir)
function, 2.13-5
location, 2.13-3
float sensors, reagent reservoirs
function, 2.13-4
location, 2.13-3, 2.13-4
replacement. See float sensor/reservoir cap,
replacement
float sensors, sheath tank
function, 2.13-9
location, 2.13-10
float sensors, sweep-flow reservoir
function, 2.13-10
INDEX-19
INDEX
float sensors, waste

function, 2.13-11
location, 2.13-11
flow cell (VC18)
cleaning procedure, 4.79-1
errors, troubleshooting, 7.5-1
port functions, table of, 2.20-5
ports, illustration of, 2.20-4
Flow Cell Clog, 7.2-18
Flow cell voltages/pressures out of
specifications, 7.3-3
flow rate balancing procedure. See flow rate
calibration
flow rate calibration
procedure, 4.10-1
flow rate matching procedure. See flow rate
calibration
foam trap (VC14)
foam trap (VC30)
foam trap (VC31)
foam trap (VC37)
forms
Instrument Reference Report, using
electronic, 4.61-2
Notice of Information Update, when used, 1.1-1
System Installation Report, using
electronic, 4.61-2
System Verification Report, using
electronic, 4.61-1
System Verification Report, using electronic
form, 4.61-1
front door sensor
function, 4.81-2
testing, 4.81-2
Front sensor detected air bubbles (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4
Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18
fuses, Electronic Power Supply
function, 2.5-2
20-INDEX
G
gain matching procedure. See latex voltage
calibration
GENS Cell
defined, 2.1-1
installation checklist, 3.9-1
main units, description, 2.1-2
main units, illustration, 2.1-3
preventive maintenance inspection
procedure, 5.9-1
space and accessibility requirements,
illustration, 3.1-2
See also instrument
GENS System
procedure, 5.9-1
space and accessibility requirements with
SlideMaker, illustration, 3.1-2
illustration, 3.1-1
See also instrument
ghost pump. See retic clearing solution pump
ghost reagent. See retic clearing solution
H
hand-detector assembly
function, 2.17-16, 4.81-2
location, 2.17-17
replacement, 4.59-1
testing optosensor, 4.81-2
handheld scanner
laser warning label, 1.2-4
hazards
biological, 1.2-1
electronic, 1.2-1
laser beam, 1.2-2
laser radiation, 1.2-2
Hct
CBC parameter, 2.1-1
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
heater, diff. See diff heater
PN 4277219B
INDEX
heater, stain. See stain heater

hematocrit
See also Hct
hemoglobin
See also Hgb
Hgb
analyzing the data, 2.18-8
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
sensing area, illustration of, 2.18-8
signal flow block diagram, 2.18-8
voltage limits, A.1-13
function, 2.4-2
Hgb lamp
connector, location, 4.32-1
part number, 8.1-19
replacement, 4.32-1
voltage adjustment, 4.32-2
HGB lamp power supply defective, 7.2-19
Hgb module
part number, 8.1-19
Hgb preamp, part number, 8.1-24
HGB Status Error, 7.2-19
High pressure High, 7.2-19
High pressure Low, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too High, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too Low, 7.2-19
High Vacuum Low, 7.2-20
High vacuum too low., 7.2-20
Histogram Mem. Reset Error, 7.2-20
histograms
Plt. See Plt
RBC. See RBC
WBC. See WBC
HLR#
research parameter, 2.1-2
HLR%
Host: Bad Field Count, 7.3-4
Host: Bad Intro Field, 7.3-4
PN 4277219B
Host: Bad RCV Buffer End, 7.3-4

Host: Bad TestName in TestField, 7.3-4
Host: Cass/pos Not 6 Char In Testfield, 7.3-4
Host: Cass/Pos With Test Type Pending
Duplicate, 7.3-4
Host: Date Format Incorrect, 7.3-4
Host: Date format incorrect. Non Numeric, 7.3-4
Host: ID1 Too Long In Test Field, 7.3-4
Host: ID1 With Test Type Pending Duplicate, 7.3-4
Host: Illegal Comma In Testfield, 7.3-4
Host: Insertion error, Test exists, 7.3-4
Host: Invalid Gender Entry, 7.3-4
Host: Leading Spaces In Field, 7.3-4
Host: No Comma After Testname In TestField, 7.3-5
Host: No CRLF at End of Preamble, 7.3-5
Host: No CRLF At Field End, 7.3-5
Host: No data in transmitted field, 7.3-5
Host: No ID1 Or CassPos, 7.3-5
Host: No SOH in preamble, 7.3-5
Host: No Space after Tag, 7.3-5
Host: No String Between Commas In TestField, 7.3-5
Host: No Valid Field Tag AC found, 7.3-5
Host: Non Alpha Char In Alpha Field, 7.3-5
Host: Non Alphanumeric in Alphanumeric field, 7.3-5
Host: Non Numeric Char In Numeric Field, 7.3-5
Host: Nonnumeric Cass/pos Char In Testfield, 7.3-5
Host: Num Of Fields Mismatch in Preamble, 7.3-5
Host: Number Of Fields Count is 0, 7.3-6
Host: Test request UPDATED No Valid Patient
ID, 7.3-6
Host: Time Format Incorrect, 7.3-6
Host: Time Format Incorrect, Non Numeric, 7.3-6
Host: Trailing Spaces In Field, 7.3-6
I
IBUS
function, 2.12-3
IBUS cable
ID MISMATCH: Sample ID received does not match
pre-assigned ID, 7.3-7
ID not read by wand or ID was not available., 7.2-26
Illegal Interrupt, 7.2-21
important
definition, 1.1-3
Incomplete Retic Collection, 7.2-32
Incomplete Retic collection., 7.2-32
INDEX-21
INDEX
Incorrect calibration factor transmission, 7.2-38

Incorrect calibration factors or bath voltages., 7.2-41
Incorrect calibration factors received, 7.2-21
installation procedure, GENS System
Analyzer checks, 3.7-2
connecting the pneumatic lines, 3.5-1
electronic report form, using, 4.61-2
entering system serial numbers and revision
levels at the Workstation, 3.7-4
filling out the reports, 3.8-3
installing the electrical cables, 3.4-1
installing the pickup tubes, 3.5-1
installing the reagent lines, 3.5-1
installing the waste line, 3.5-1
installing the Workstation, 3.2-1
main component layout, illustration, 3.3-2
main power and drain line length requirements,
modification for earthquake-prone areas, 3.1-5
modification for high altitude, 3.1-5
power up checks, 3.7-1
preinstallation checklist, 3.1-1
setting up the Analyzer, 3.6-9
setting up the Diluter, 3.6-3
setting up the Power Supply, 3.6-1
space and accessibility requirements for the
GENS Cell, illustration, 3.1-2
GENS System with SlideMaker,
illustration, 3.1-2
GENS System, illustration, 3.1-1
testing the Analytical Station and
Workstation, 3.8-1
unpacking the Analytical Station, 3.3-1
installation procedure, LH 750 System
22-INDEX

LH 750 Cell, illustration, 3.10-2
LH 750 System with SlideMaker,
LH 750 System, illustration, 3.10-1
Workstation, 3.17-1
installation procedure, on the LH 750 System
instrument
ac input voltage specifications, A.1-11
Analytical Station. See Analytical Station
auto-start feature, SmartStart
recognition, 2.15-1
description, 2.1-2
electronic forms available, 4.61-1
fan locations, 3.10-3
fan locations, GENS System, 3.1-3
function, 2.1-1
functional systems, 2.1-2
initiating the Automatic-mode cycle, 2.15-1
installation procedure, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
installation, GENS System procedure, 3.2-1
leakage current specifications, 2.1-5
mode-to-mode comparison limits, table
of, A.1-6
operating modes, 2.1-6
parameters generated, 2.1-1
performance specifications, A.1-5
preinstallation checklist, GENS System, 3.1-1
tolerances and limits, A.1-1
whole blood verification procedure, 5.4-1
Workstation. See Workstation
See also GENS System; GENS Cell; LH 750
System; LH 750 Cell
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Instrument 1 NO READ Sample received without

proper identification [...,....], 7.2-6
Instrument detected clog in flow cell and attempted
three times to clear clog without
success., 7.2-18
Instrument dual port RAM memory test failed., 7.2-17
Instrument has not performed a shutdown in <24>
hours., 7.3-7
Instrument Reference Report, using electronic
form, 4.61-2
interface bus
function, 2.12-3
Intermittent PS1 Supply Error, 7.2-21
Internal Cal. Fac. Error, 7.2-21
Internal software failure, 7.2-37
Interpreter Collator ABORT., 7.3-7
Interpreter Collator Forced to Reset, 7.3-7
Interpreter Collator has timed-out indicating a
possible Analytical Station malfunction, 7.3-7
Invalid character received from Diluter, 7.2-26
Invalid Diluter command., 7.2-26
Invalid dual port RAM packet (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-16
Invalid tube label type read by scanner (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
IQAP data collected., 7.3-7
Ireg Hst., 7.2-21
IRF
retic parameter, 2.1-1
J
jumpers
locations and settings. See specific circuit card
K
Keyboard and Display Interface card
function, 2.3-2, 2.4-2
potentiometer R3, function, A.3-13
Keyboard Interrupt Error, 7.2-21
L
Label Not Read Run Stopped, 7.2-22
PN 4277219B
labels
laser warning, location, 1.2-3, 1.2-4
laser, part number, 8.1-19
lamp, Hgb. See Hgb lamp
laser
and flow cell alignment procedure, 4.76-1
function, 2.4-2
part number, 8.1-19
power supply. See Laser Power Supply
laser electromagnetic shield, location, 1.2-4
laser hazards
laser interlock switch
function, 2.8-2
location, 1.2-4
Laser offset too high., 7.2-11
Laser offset too low., 7.2-11
Laser Power module
function, 2.8-3
Laser Power Supply
function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3
input, 2.8-3
Laser Power module, 2.8-3
Laser Reference 4 card, 2.8-3
monitors, 2.8-3
outputs, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23
Laser PS. See Laser Power Supply
Laser Reference 4 card
function, 2.8-3
laser tamper-proof screws, location, 1.2-4
Laser voltage above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
Laser voltage below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Too High, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Too Low, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-22
Last Two XB batches are outside limits, 7.3-8
Last XB Batch is outside limits, 7.3-8
Last XB batch outside limit conditions has
cleared, 7.3-8
latex voltage calibration
procedure, 4.9-1
INDEX-23
INDEX

LATRON control
acceptable verification limits, A.1-10
used to verify VCS gain settings, 4.78-1
LATRON primer
background limits, A.1-8
leakage current specifications
computers, 2.1-5
GENS System and LH 750 System, 2.1-5
left lift cylinder
function test, 4.40-3
replacement, 4.40-1
left lift cylinder (CL4)
function, 2.15-7
location, 2.15-7
Left Lift Not Up, 7.2-23
left lift up switch
activator adjustment, 4.40-3
activator location, 2.15-7
function, 2.15-7, 4.81-2
location, 2.15-7
replacement, 4.39-1
testing, 4.81-2
Left Load Fail, 7.2-23
Left Stack Full, 7.2-23
leukocyte
See also WBC
Level C------, 7.2-23
Level Check Fail Caused Stop, 7.2-23
Level -D-----, 7.2-23
Level --L----, 7.2-23
Level ---P---, 7.2-24
Level ----R--, 7.2-24
Level -----V-, 7.2-24
Level ------W, 7.2-24
LH 750 Cell
See also instrument
24-INDEX
LH 755 System
defined, 2.1-1
See also instrument
light scatter (LS)
VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1
Light Scatter Preamp module
function, 2.4-2, 2.21-4
inputs, 2.21-5
outputs, 2.21-5
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.7-3
light scatter sensor. See LS sensor
linear light scatter (LLS)
LIS Upload: Invalid report Profile Requested, 7.3-8
List mode data collection procedure, 4.33-1
LLS. See linear light scatter (LLS)
loading bay
long term shutdown
procedure, 5.2-2
when to do, 5.2-1
Low Vacuum Drifted, 7.2-24
Low Vacuum High, 7.2-25
Low Vacuum Low, 7.2-25
Low vacuum too high., 7.2-25
Low vacuum too low., 7.2-25
LS Preamp module. See Light Scatter Preamp
module
LS sensor
function, 2.21-4
regions, illustration of, 2.21-4
LS. See light scatter (LS)
LY#
LY%
lymphocyte
See also LY#; LY%; diff parameters
PN 4277219B
INDEX
M
manifolds
functions, A.6-10
manual
abbreviations used in, ABBREVIATIONS-1
conventions, 1.1-4
intended audience, 1.1-1
numbering format, 1.1-3
organization, 1.1-2
reference designators used
in, ABBREVIATIONS-1
scope, 1.1-1
special headings, 1.1-3
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from
Analyzer., 7.3-8
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S
Workstation., 7.3-8
Manual mode-to-Automatic mode calibration
procedure, 4.11-1
Manual Probe Not In, 7.2-26
Manual sampling probe did not retract (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-26, 7.2-28
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-28
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not down)
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not home)
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not up)
Manual-mode activator
location, 2.17-17
Manual-mode aspiration station
Manual-mode start switch
function, 4.81-2
location, 2.17-17
testing, 4.81-2
manuals, customer
part numbers, 1.1-1
manuals, service
online version, part number, 1.1-1
Slide Making Modules, part number, 1.1-1
Slide Staining Modules, part number, 1.1-1
Workstation, part number, 1.1-1
PN 4277219B
Maximum # Of Repro runs Exceeded - Sample Not

Stored, 7.3-8
Maximum number of cassettes (12) already loaded,
obstruction or faulty switch., 7.2-23
MCH
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
MCHC
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
MCV
System, 2.24-3
System, 2.24-5
mean cell volume
See also MCV
mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin
See also MCH
mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin concentration
See also MCHC
mean platelet volume
See also MPV
meniscus
how to read correctly, illustration of, 4.22-3
menu trees
Analyzer, A.10-1
MF. See manifolds
MF4. See backwash manifold
mixing chamber, diff. See diff mixing chamber
mixing motors. See motors, mixing
MO#
MO%
INDEX-25
INDEX
mode to mode comparison. See Manual

mode-to-Automatic mode calibration
mode to mode matching procedure. See Manual
modules
Aspiration Pump. See Aspiration Pump module
BSV. See BSV module
Diff. See Diff module
Hgb. See Hgb module
Peltier. See Peltier module
Probe Wipe. See Probe-Wipe module
Random Access. See Random Access module
Retic. See Retic module
Solenoid Interconnect. See Solenoid
Interconnect module
Triple Transducer. See Triple Transducer
module
Monitor Task Did Not Finish, 7.2-26
monocyte
See also MO#; MO%; diff parameters
Motor Controller card
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.17-1
motor, Probe-Wipe module. See Probe-Wipe
module motor
motor, retic mixing. See retic mixing motor
motors, mixing
diff. See diff chamber mixing motor
retic. See retic mixing motor
MPV
System, 2.24-3
MRV
MSCV
N
NE#
26-INDEX
NE%
needle
location, 2.17-12
part number, 8.1-21
needle assembly
function, 2.17-11, A.6-9
list of components in, 2.17-11
location, 2.15-5
modules
Needle-Cap Piercer. See Needle-Cap Piercer
module
needle vent chamber
function, 2.16-1
needle vent chamber (VC19)
location, 2.17-12
Needle-Cap Piercer module
part number-Needle Cap Piercer, 8.1-19
replacement, 4.57-1
neutrophil
See also NE#; NE%; diff parameters
Newbar card
LED and switch locations, 4.51-10
location, 4.51-10
No ACK From Diluter, 7.2-26
No Calibrator lot number. No statistics will be
calculated, 7.3-9
No ETX, 7.2-26
No latex Setup Information available, latex sample
will not be stored., 7.3-9
NO MATCH: Sample run received does not match any
Todo list entry, 7.3-9
NO READ: Sample run received without proper
identification, 7.3-9
No Retics Control In This Mode, 7.2-26
No Valid ID, 7.2-26
No Wand ID, 7.2-26
noise checks
CBC aperture checks, procedure, 4.70-1
CBC, limits, A.1-3
VCS, limits, A.1-9
VCS, procedure, 4.75-1
Non-ASCII From Diluter, 7.2-26
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Not Ready For AMC Data, 7.2-27

note
definition, 1.1-4
Notice of Information Update form
when used, 1.1-1
NRBC#
LH 750 System parameter, 2.1-1
NRBC%
Numeric keypad
function, 2.3-2
location, 2.3-4
numeric keypad
contrast adjustment, 2.12-11
contrast adjustment location, 2.12-12
function, 2.12-11
O
OP. See opacity (OP)
opacity (OP)
Operator <Operator ID> added <Location Name> to
the location list, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physicians First
Name, Last Name> to from physician
list, 7.3-11
Name, Last Name> to the physician list, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed <Physicians First
Name, Last Name> to <Physicians First Name,
Last Name>, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Analytical Station
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Database
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Decision Rules
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Display Labels
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Institution
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed lis/his setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed location <Location
Name> to <Location Name>., 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Parameter
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Print setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed reagents
setup, 7.3-10
PN 4277219B
Operator <Operator ID> changed Reporting Units

setup, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> changed Shifts
definition, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> changed Workstation
setup, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> changed XB setup, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <# 0f runs> Run(s)
from Control Folder <Lot #>, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Location Name>
from the location list., 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> installed <Reagent
Type><Coulter/Non-Coulter> Reagent Lot to:
<New Lot#>, opened on <Open Date> with open
expiration <Open Exp>, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> requested Research Use Only
certification, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> shutdown the GEN S
Workstation, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> Started RAS, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> Stopped RAS, 7.3-11
Operator acknowledged stop condition, 7.3-12
Operator Alert 09, 7.2-27
Operator removed sample from probe before
aspiration was complete (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
Operator selected assay limits for control folder <Lot
#>, 7.3-12
O-rings, part numbers, 8.1-21
Overflow valve malfunction (remained closed)
detected while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
Overflow valve malfunction (remained open) detected
while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
OVERLARY AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
P
P/W Harness Not Connected, 7.2-31
parameters
CBC, 2.1-1
differential, 2.1-1
research only, 2.1-2
retic, 2.1-1
parameters, research only
part numbers
actuators, 8.1-3
Analytical Station, list
of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
INDEX-27
INDEX
9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.137

aperture blocks and modules, 8.1-3
BSV components, 8.1-3
bubble/blood detectors, 8.1-3
cables, 8.1-4
cassette transport assembly components, 8.1-6
chambers, 8.1-6
chokes, 8.1-7
circuit cards, 8.1-22
compressor/vacuum pump, 8.1-8
consumables, 8.1-8
covers, 8.1-10
custom components, 8.1-7
customer documents, 1.1-1
cylinders, 8.1-9
displays, 8.1-10
doors, 8.1-10
drives, 8.1-10
engineering schematics, 6.1-1
fans, 8.1-11
filters, 8.1-11
fittings, 8.1-7, 8.1-13
flippers, 8.1-14
fuses, 8.1-14
hardware, miscellaneous, 8.1-15
hardware, nuts, 8.1-21
hardware, screws, 8.1-26
hardware, washers and spacers, 8.1-37
heaters, 8.1-18
labels, 8.1-19
lamps, 8.1-19
laser, 8.1-19
manifolds, 8.1-19
modules, 8.1-19
motors, 8.1-20
muffler, 8.1-20
needle, 8.1-21
O-rings, 8.1-21
preamps, 8.1-24
Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck
components, 8.1-24
pumps, 8.1-24
regulators, 8.1-25
Service Resource Kit, 1.1-1
sheath flow coil, 8.1-28
Slide Making Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1
Slide Staining Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1
28-INDEX
software, 8.1-28
springs, 8.1-29
switches, 8.1-29
thermistors, 8.1-31
tie wraps, 8.1-31
tools, 8.1-31
Triple Transducer module components, 8.1-32
tubing, 8.1-33
valves, Angar, 8.1-36
valves, pinch, 8.1-36
valves, relief (pressure bleed off), 8.1-36
Workstation, 1.1-1
parts
common names and categories used in parts list,
table of, 8.1-1
replaceable, master list
of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.137
parts, illustrated
Analyzer and Diluter front and side covers and
doors, LH750 System, 8.2-74
Analyzer, card cage, rear door and hardware,
GENS System, 8.2-4
LH 750 System, 8.2-78
Analyzer, front door and hardware, GENS
System, 8.2-2
Analyzer, front door hardware, LH 750
System, 8.2-76
check valves, 8.2-58
chokes, 8.2-58
Diluter, Aspiration Pump module, MF4 and
MF13, 8.2-48
Diluter, bar-code scanner and tube ram
cylinder, 8.2-30
Diluter, BSV module, 8.2-44
Diluter, cassette guide panels, 8.2-8
Diluter, center front panel, 8.2-16
Diluter, Diff module, 8.2-40
Diluter, hydraulic inputs, 8.2-54, 8.2-56
Diluter, left door and compartment, 8.2-10
Diluter, left front panel, 8.2-12
Diluter, left rear door, 8.2-52
Diluter, lower front door hardware, LH 750
System, 8.2-77
Diluter, piercing station assembly, 8.2-28
Diluter, piercing station, rocker bed, and
components under front cover, 8.2-26
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Diluter, Probe-Wipe module, 8.2-46

Diluter, rear of center front panel, 8.2-18
Diluter, rear of left front panel, 8.2-14
Diluter, rear of right front panel, 8.2-22
Diluter, Retic module, 8.2-42
Diluter, right door and compartment, 8.2-24
Diluter, right front panel, 8.2-20
Diluter, right rear door, 8.2-50
Diluter, rocker bed, 8.2-32
Diluter, rocker bed mounting channel, 8.2-34
Diluter, Triple Transducer module, 8.2-36
Diluter, Triple Transducer module translation
plates and hardware, 8.2-38
fittings, 8.2-60
hardware, mounting, 8.2-64
Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor
Controller card and mufflers, 8.2-70
Power Supply, covers and panels, 8.2-72
Power Supply, overview and
compressor/vacuum pump, regulators and
filters, 8.2-66
Power Supply, SPC card, System Power
Controller Display and air water
separator, 8.2-68
Random Access module, 8.2-80
tie wraps, 8.2-64
valves, common, 8.2-62
Password changed, 7.3-13
PC Not Receiving, 7.2-28
PC1, 7.5-1
PC2, 7.5-2
Pct
determining results on the GENS
System, 2.24-4
determining results on the LH 750
system, 2.24-6
PDW
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-6
internal check on Plt parameters, 2.1-2
used as internal check, 2.1-2
Peltier Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-28
Peltier heater sensor defective or disconnected, 7.2-28
Peltier module
cross-section view, 2.23-6
PN 4277219B
front and rear views, 4.64-1

function, 2.23-6, A.6-10
part number, 8.1-20
replacement, 4.64-1
Peltier Temp. Outside Limits, 7.2-28
Peltier temperature outside limits., 7.2-28
P-flag
when bubble/blood detectors disabled, 2.17-15
piercing station
module part number, 8.1-20
pinch valves
function, A.6-8
part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63
platelet
See also Plt
Platelet fit algorithm failed (<Tube
ID>,<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-28
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-6
inputs, 2.19-7
location, LH7 50 System, 2.3-4
replacement, 4.6-1
PLB1
function, A.6-10
See also Peltier module
Plt
System, 2.24-3
System, 2.24-6
histogram, timing of data
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
PLT No Fit Aperture 2 Mode Out, 7.2-28
INDEX-29
INDEX
PLT No Fit Aperture X Mode Out, 7.2-28

Plt Proc card. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card
PLT PROCESSOR card
part number, 8.1-23
PM1 (Diluter)
function, A.6-10
See also diff preservative pump
PM1 (Power Supply)
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
See also compressor/vacuum pump
PM2
function, A.6-11
See also RBC diluent dispenser
PM3
function, A.6-11
See also WBC diluent dispenser
PM4
function, A.6-11
See also diff lytic reagent pump
PM5
function, A.6-11
See also stain pump
PM6
function, A.6-11
See also retic clearing solution pump
PM7
function, A.6-11
See also CBC lytic reagent pump
PM9
function, A.6-11
See also aspiration pump
PM10
function, A.6-11
30-INDEX

See also cleaning agent pump
PM11
function, A.6-11
See also blood/stain aspiration pump
PMI procedure, 5.9-1
Pneumatic Power Supply
component locations, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
overview, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power system
function, 2.9-1
Motor Controller card, 2.9-1
pneumatic levels and status monitors, 2.9-3
pneumatic on signals simplified schematic, 2.9-4
pressure development, 2.9-2
pressure distribution, 2.9-4
PVT card, 2.9-5
temperature monitoring, 2.9-3
vacuum development, 2.9-3
vacuum distribution, 2.9-4
Pneumatics/Power Supply overheated or
defective, 7.2-9
Power Development Control system
function, 2.10-1
power down/power up procedures
for Analytical Station, 4.1-1
for Workstation, 4.1-1
power supplies, local
function, 2.5-4
See also Analyzer power supplies; Diluter power
supplies
Power Supply
conditions that shut it down, 2.10-4
cover removal, 4.13-1
function, 2.2-1
System
left side panel removal, 4.13-1
PN 4277219B
INDEX

Power Supply 1 problem: +5 Volts above limit, 7.2-29
Power Supply 1 problem: +5 Volts below limit, 7.2-29
Power Supply 1 problem: +15 Volts above
limit, 7.2-29
Power Supply 1 problem: +15 Volts below
limit, 7.2-29
Power Supply 1 problem: -15 Volts above limit, 7.2-29
Power Supply 1 problem: -15 Volts below limit, 7.2-30
Power Supply 2 defective, 7.2-17
limit, 7.2-30
limit, 7.2-30
limit, 7.2-30
limit, 7.2-30
Power Supply exhaust fan
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2
replacement, 4.12-1
Power Supply intake fan
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
replacement, 4.12-2
preamps
Hgb, part number, 8.1-24
light scatter. See Light Scatter Preamp module
RF detector. See RF Detector Preamp card
precision
PRECISION TEST 2
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4
PRECISION TEST 3
Precision test 3
definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
Precision test values within limits, 7.3-13
preliminary procedures, CBC calibration
overview, 2.25-1
pressure
5 psi. See 5 psi
30 psi. See 30 psi
PN 4277219B
60 psi. See 60 psi

diff sample. See diff sample pressure
for bar-code scanner cylinder. See bar-code
scanner cylinder
retic sample. See retic sample pressure
sheath. See sheath pressure
VCS variation limits, table of, A.1-9
preventive maintenance procedure, 5.9-1
Probe Obstructed, 7.2-28
probe position sensor
adjustment, 4.60-4
function, 4.81-2
location, 4.60-2
orientation, illustration, 4.60-4
testing, 4.81-2
Probe Wipe Down Fail, 7.2-28
Probe Wipe Failed, 7.2-28
Probe Wipe Truck Not Home, 7.2-29
Probe Wipe Up Fail, 7.2-29
probe-wipe down sensor
adjustment, 4.58-6
function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3
replacement, 4.58-2
testing, 4.81-3
Probe-Wipe module
cleaning truck cleaning/replacement, 4.58-2
cleaning truck component part numbers, 8.1-24
differences between two styles, 2.17-17
function, 2.17-17, A.6-9
monitoring, 2.17-18
motor replacement, 4.58-2
part number, 8.1-20
sensor replacement, 4.58-2
Probe-Wipe module motor
location, 2.17-17
part number, 8.1-20
replacement, 4.58-2
probe-wipe optical sensors
locations, 2.17-17
See also probe-wipe down sensor; probe-wipe up
sensor
probe-wipe up sensor
adjustment, 4.58-6
INDEX-31
INDEX
function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3

replacement, 4.58-2
testing, 4.81-3
procedure summaries
GENS System installation, 3.9-1
LH 750 System installation, 3.18-1
pump volume checks, A.1-13
VCS optimization, 4.71-2
procedures
adjustment. See adjustment procedures
calibration. See CBC calibration procedures;
VCS optimization procedures
cleaning. See cleaning procedures
installation. See installation procedures
noise checks. See noise checks
power down/power up, See power down/power
up procedures
preventive maintenance, 5.9-1
removal. See removal procedures
replacement. See replacement procedures
timing. See timing procedures
troubleshooting. See troubleshooting
procedures
verification. See verification procedures
PS. See Power Supply
PS1 +5V Supply High, 7.2-29
PS1 +5V Supply Low, 7.2-29
PS1 -15V Supply High, 7.2-29
PS1 -15V Supply Low, 7.2-30
pumps
aspiration (PM9). See aspiration pump
blood/stain aspiration (PM11). See blood/stain
aspiration pump
CBC lytic reagent (PM7). See CBC lytic reagent
pump
cleaning agent. See Cleaning agent pump
diff lytic reagent (PM4). See diff lytic reagent
pump
diff preservative (PM1). See diff preservative
32-INDEX
pump
diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser;
retic clearing solution (PM6). See retic clearing
solution pump
stain (PM5). See stain pump
vacuum. See compressor/vacuum pump
volume check procedure summary, A.1-13
volume tolerances, table of, A.1-14
pumps, dual volume
pump
pump
PVT card
function, 2.4-2, 2.9-5
inputs, 2.9-6
monitors, 2.9-6
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
Q
QD. See quick disconnects
quench. See diff preservative
quick disconnects
R
R/W Data Mem. Interference, 7.2-34
RAMP TEST 0
Ramp Test values within limits., 7.3-13
Ramp test, definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
components, illustration, A.8-5
function, 2.4-2
location, 2.4-9
part number, 8.1-20
RBC
PN 4277219B
INDEX

count, timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
determining reported count on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
determining reported count on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
diluent dispenser. See RBC diluent dispenser
generating histograms on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generating histograms on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
histogram, timing the data
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
RBC bath (VC2)
RBC diluent dispenser (PM2)
adjustments, illustration of, 4.23-3, 4.23-4
function, 2.18-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.23-6
RBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-R)
function, 2.18-4
RDW
System, 2.24-3
Reagent <Reagent lot #> is expired, 7.3-13
Reagent Handling system
backwash manifold, 2.13-9
backwash tank, 2.13-8
diluent/cleaning agent chamber, 2.13-7
function, 2.13-1
pickup tube
connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3
reagent distribution, 2.13-6
reagent distribution block diagram (in
Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-7
Analytical Stations that use the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-6
PN 4277219B
reagent input
connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3
reagent input ports, 2.13-1
reagent input ports, illustration (on Analytical
Stations that bypass the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-2
Stations that use the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-1
reagent level monitoring, 2.13-4
Reagent Reservoir module, 2.13-2
Reservoir Interface card, 2.13-5
sheath tank, 2.13-9
sweep-flow reservoir, 2.13-10
System-Flush cycle, 2.13-11
waste collection, 2.13-11
waste level monitoring, 2.13-11
waste level sensor bypass
installation, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
waste output connection, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
Reagent level sense, pressure or voltage error
detected., 7.2-11
reagent reservoir component replacement. See float
sensor/reservoir cap, replacement; reagent
reservoir solenoids, replacement; Reservoir
Interface card, replacement
Reagent Reservoir module
component locations, new style, 2.13-4
component locations, old style, 2.13-3
function, 2.4-2, 2.13-2
monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-4
reagent reservoir solenoids
replacement, 4.30-3
Received Host Deletion Request
%1, %2 ToDo List entries were deleted, 7.3-13
red blood cell. See RBC
red distribution width
See also RDW
Red Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
cards
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
connecting coaxial cables, 3.4-2
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-1
inputs, 2.19-2
location, 2.3-3
outputs, 2.19-2
INDEX-33
INDEX
replacement, 4.6-1
RED/WHITE PREAMP cards
part number, 8.1-23
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-5
input, 2.19-6
location, 2.3-4
replacement, 4.6-1
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-3
input, 2.19-5
location, 2.3-3
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.6-1
Red/white processor counter(s) did not
reinitialize., 7.2-32
Red/White Reset Error, 7.2-32
reference designators
Reg Res Intfc card. See Reservoir Interface card
regulator
regulators
5 psi. See 5-psi regulator
diff sample pressure. See diff sample pressure
regulator
retic sample pressure. See retic sample pressure
regulator
sheath pressure. See sheath pressure regulator
vacuum (low). See vacuum regulator
relief valve (RV1)
part number, 8.1-36
See also 60-psi regulator
removal procedures
Power Supply cover, 4.13-1
Power Supply left side panel, 4.13-1
rocker bed, 4.43-1
rocker bed belt drive assembly, 4.35-1
Replace reagent container, 7.2-23
replacement procedures
AMC, 4.6-1
ANALOG card, 4.6-1
Analyzer fans, 4.12-3
Analyzer front door gas springs, LH 750
System, 4.82-1
34-INDEX

Bar-Code Decoder card, 4.7-1
bar-code scanner cylinder, 4.50-1
BD ADJ card, 4.6-1
bed rock cylinder, 4.45-1
BSV, 4.60-1
BSV module components (housing, insulator,
O-ring, shaft and spring), 4.60-1
Bulk Power Filter card, 4.21-1
cleaning agent pump, 4.26-1
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, 4.6-1
diff chamber mixing motor, 4.69-1
diff heater, 4.67-1
diff mixing chamber, 4.68-1
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply
card, 4.7-3
dump valve, 4.15-1
float sensor/reservoir cap, 4.30-1
hand detector assembly, 4.59-1
Hgb lamp, 4.32-1
left lift cylinder, 4.40-1
left lift up switch, 4.39-1
Needle-Cap Piercer module, 4.57-1
Peltier module, 4.64-1
Power Supply exhaust fan, 4.12-1
Power Supply intake fan, 4.12-2
Probe-Wipe module motor, 4.58-2
PN 4277219B
INDEX

PVT card, 4.7-3
reagent reservoir solenoids, 4.30-3
retic chamber, 4.63-1
retic mixing motor on the Random Access
module, 4.62-2
retic mixing motor on the Retic module, 4.62-1
right lift cylinder, 4.40-1
right lift up switch, 4.39-1
RS/Opto Intfc card, 4.7-3
R/W/P SC/A card, 4.6-1
Scope Module, 4.6-1
Sensor Distribution card, 4.7-3
stain chamber, 4.63-1
stain pump, 4.24-1
System Power Controller card, 4.18-1
top left safety switch, 4.41-1
top right safety switch, 4.41-1
tube detector assembly, 4.46-1
under left stack switch, 4.37-1
under right stack switch, 4.38-1
Repro Set Deleted, 7.3-13
reproducibility
function, 2.4-2, 2.13-5
inputs, 2.13-5
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.30-4
Reservoir low on CBC lyse., 7.2-23
Reservoir low on cleaner., 7.2-23
Reservoir low on DIFF PAK., 7.2-24
Reservoir low on diluent, 7.2-23
Reservoir low on Retic PAK., 7.2-24
Reservoir low or Stabilyse level sense detected, 7.2-24
PN 4277219B
Reservoir low or Stain or clearing agent level sense

detected., 7.2-24
reset signals, 2.6-5
RESET switch
function, 2.11-2
location, 2.11-3
RET#
RET%
Retic Accumulation Not Finished, 7.2-32
retic chamber (VC17)
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2
replacement, 4.63-1
retic clearing solution
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.23-5
retic clearing solution pump (PM6)
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.25-6
Retic control material used in CBC or CBC/DIFF test
mode., 7.2-26
Retic laser offset too low., 7.2-32
Retic Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-32
retic mixing motor
part number, 8.1-20
replacement on the Random Access
module, 4.62-2
replacement on the Retic module, 4.62-1
Retic module
function, 2.4-3
location, 2.4-5
part number, 8.1-20
stain chamber and retic chamber
replacement, 4.63-1
INDEX-35
INDEX

retic parameters
test limits, A.1-5
Retic Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-32
Retic Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-32
retic sample pressure
regulator. See retic sample pressure regulator
transducer (RETIC PRESSURE) location, A.3-14
Retic sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32
Retic sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32
retic sample pressure regulator (RG6)
function, 2.23-5
part number, 8.1-25
retic sample valve (CVL99)
retic segment valve
function, 2.17-7
retic stain pump. See stain pump
retic stain. See stain
Retic Xmit Failure, 7.2-32
reticulocyte
See also RET#; RET%; retic parameters
reticulocyte parameters. See retic parameters
RF (6.3V) voltage reading above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33
RF (6.3V) voltage reading below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33
RF box. See RF Detector Preamp card
adjustment, 4.74-1
adjustment locations, 4.74-3
Clog detector circuit. See Clog Detector circuit
connection to digital backplane, 4.74-2
connection to digital backplane on the GENS
System, 3.4-5
36-INDEX
connection to digital backplane on the LH 750

System, 3.12-6
function, 2.4-3, 2.21-2
inputs, 2.21-2
monitoring, 2.21-4
outputs, 2.21-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.7-3
solid state, block diagram, 2.21-3
with vacuum tube, block diagram, 2.21-3
RF Lower Limit Failed, 7.2-33
RF Preamp card. See RF Detector Preamp card
RF Upper Limit Failed, 7.2-33
RF Voltage Low, 7.2-33
RF voltage reading below limit., 7.2-33
RF. See conductivity (RF)
RF/DC Detector Preamp card
possible cause of an FC error, 7.5-1
RG1 (Power Supply)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
RG2 (Diluter)
function, A.6-11
See also vacuum regulator
RG2 (Power Supply)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
RG3
function, A.6-11
See also diff sample pressure
RG4
function, A.6-11
See also sheath pressure regulator
RG5
function, A.6-11
PN 4277219B
INDEX
See also bar-code scanner cylinder pressure

regulator
RG6
function, A.6-11
See also retic sample pressure regulator
Rgt Res module. See Reagent Reservoir module
right lift cylinder
replacement, 4.40-1
right lift cylinder (CL5)
function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
Right Lift Not Down, 7.2-33
Right Lift Not Up, 7.2-33
right lift up switch
function, 2.15-3, 4.81-3
location, 2.15-3
replacement, 4.39-1
testing, 4.81-3
Right Stack Full, 7.2-33
right stack loaded switch
function, 2.15-1, 4.81-3
location, 2.15-1
testing, 4.81-3
RLS. See rotated light scatter (RLS)
rocker bed
air cylinder. See bed rock cylinder
belt drive assembly. See belt drive assembly
belt. See belt drive assembly
position flag. See bed position flag
position sensors. See bed backward sensor; bed
forward sensor; bed horizontal sensor
removal, 4.43-1
rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2
rocks per minute, acceptable range, A.1-2
Rocker bed did not advance., 7.2-7
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not down) or faulty
sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-23
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not up) or faulty sensor
Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not down) or faulty
PN 4277219B
Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not up) or faulty

rotated light scatter (RLS)
RS485 Interface modules
function, 2.12-3
RS/O Intfc card. See RS/Opto Intfc card
RS/Opto Intfc card
connections to digital backplane on the GENS
System, 3.4-6
connections to digital backplane on the LH 750
System, 3.12-7
function, 2.4-3, 2.11-5
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
Run Aborted. PC Not Ready., 7.2-34
RV1
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
R/W Proc card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
R/W/P SC/A card
function, 2.3-2
inputs, 2.7-4
location, 2.3-4
outputs, 2.7-4
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.6-1
SC/A card
S
safety precautions
biological, 1.2-1
electronic, 1.2-1
laser, 1.2-2
Same Label Read Run Stopped, 7.2-35
Sample Access and Reservoir module
INDEX-37
INDEX

Sample Acquisition system
aspirating a sample in the Automatic
mode, 2.16-1
aspirating a sample in the Manual mode, 2.16-5
aspiration path in the Automatic mode,
aspiration path in the Manual mode, illustration
of, 2.16-5
aspiration path through the BSV in the
Automatic mode, illustration of, 2.16-2
aspiration path through the BSV in the Manual
mode, illustration of, 2.16-6
blood sampling valve (BSV), 2.17-5
cleaning the blood pathways in the Automatic
mode, 2.16-3
cleaning the blood pathways in the Manual
mode, 2.16-7
function, 2.16-1
hand-detector assembly, 2.17-16
needle assembly, 2.17-11
overview, 2.16-1
Probe-Wipe module, 2.17-17
segmenting the sample in the Automatic
mode, 2.16-2
segmenting the sample in the Manual
mode, 2.16-6
Sample ID portion of the Positive ID has
changed, 7.3-13
Sample Removed Too Soon, 7.2-35
Sample Reporting system
CBC analysis parameters on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
CBC analysis parameters on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
diff analysis parameters, 2.24-7
diff analysis three-dimensional DataPlot,
example, 2.24-8
diff analysis two-dimensional DataPlot,
example, 2.24-8
function, 2.24-1
retic analysis DataPlot, example, 2.24-10
retic analysis parameters, 2.24-9
final processing to reporting, block
diagram, 2.24-1
38-INDEX
sample data flow on the LH750 System from

diagram, 2.24-2
sample flags, codes and messages, 2.24-10
Sample Tube Not Detected, 7.2-35
Sampling Station
function, 2.4-3
SC display test
procedure, 4.19-1
S-CAL calibrator
Scanner Error, 7.2-35
scanner position switch
function, 2.15-5, 4.81-3
location, 2.15-5
testing, 4.81-3
scanner, handheld
Scanning Fault, 7.2-35
schematics, engineering
Analog Backplane, GENS System, DCN, 6.1-1
Analog Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
Backplane Interconnect, GENS System,
DCN, 6.1-1
CRT Backplane, GENS System, DCN, 6.1-1
Digital Backplane, GENS System, DCN, 6.1-1
Digital Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
GENS Cable Interconnection Diagram,
DCN, 6.1-1
GENS Pneumatic/Hydraulic Schematic
Diagram, DCN, 6.1-1
GENS System Signal Interconnection Diagram,
DCN, 6.1-1
included in Chapter 6, list of, 6.1-1
LH 750 Pneu/Hydr, DCN, 6.1-1
LH 750 System Signal Interconnect, DCN, 6.1-1
Pneu/Hydr layout, Power Supply, DCN, 6.1-1
when updated in manual, 6.1-1
schematics, simplified
pneumatic on signals, 2.9-4
POWER ON signal, 2.6-4
power up signals, 2.6-5
Scope 1 card
function, 2.11-7
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Scope 2 card
function, 2.11-7
SCOPE MENU, Analyzer
accessing, 4.3-1
modes and display speeds available, table
of, 4.3-3
See also SCOPE MENU, example displays
SCOPE MENU, example displays
CBC ONLY, 4.3-7
CBC/DIFF, 4.3-7
conductivity, 4.3-5
count test, 4.3-4
Diff Analog Pulses Test, 4.3-4
DIFF ONLY, 4.3-7
electronic test, 4.3-3
F55, 4.3-6
light scatter, 4.3-5
light scatter drift, 4.3-6
phase adjust, 4.3-6
VCS LATRON control, 4.3-4
volume, 4.3-5
Scope Module
function, 2.3-2
replacement, 4.6-1
Scope module
CRT intensity adjustment
on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
CRT intensity adjustment on the GENS
System, 4.34-1
Scope Module 2
function, 2.11-6
inputs, 2.11-7
See also Scope Module
screws, part numbers, 8.1-26
SD
Sensor detected diluted blood or non-blood sample
connected to VC22 float sensor, 2.9-5
function, 2.4-3, 2.14-5
input, 2.14-6
PN 4277219B

part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
sensors
backwash. See backwash tank sensor
bar-code scanner position, location, 4.53-1
bed backward. See bed backward sensor
bed forward. See bed forward sensor
bed horizontal. See bed horizontal sensor
bellows down. See bellows down sensor
bellows up. See bellows up sensor
diff ambient thermistor. See diff ambient
thermistor
Diluter ambient thermistor. See Diluter ambient
thermistor
float. See float sensor, VC22; float sensors,
reagent reservoirs
front door. See front door sensor
hand detector. See hand detector assembly
LS. See LS sensor
probe position. See probe position sensor
probe-wipe down. See probe-wipe down sensor
probe-wipe up. See probe-wipe up sensor
sheath. See sheath tank sensor
sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow reservoir
sensor
tube in position. See tube in position sensor
vacuum overflow tank. See vacuum overflow
tank sensor
waste. See waste level sensor
SERVICE MENU, Analyzer
accessing, 4.2-1
options available. See service options, Analyzer
service options, Analyzer
on DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-4
on DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-6
on DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU,
table of descriptions, 4.2-6
on ELECTONIC TESTS MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-4
on MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-5
on SERVICE MENU, table of descriptions, 4.2-2
on SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-5
shear valves
hardware description, 2.17-7
INDEX-39
INDEX
ports, 2.17-10
See also diff sample valve; retic sample valve;
stained retic sample valve
sheath flow restrictor (VC12)
sheath pressure
regulator. See sheath pressure regulator
transducer location, A.3-14
Sheath Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-35
sheath pressure regulator (RG4)
function, 2.13-9
part number, 8.1-25
Sheath Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-36
Sheath sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-36
Sheath sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
sheath tank (VC15)
function, 2.13-9
monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-9, 2.13-10
Sheath Tank Not Full, 7.2-36
sheath tank sensor
function, 4.81-4
testing, 4.81-4
Sheath Tank Still Full, 7.2-36
shift
shutdown procedures
extended, 5.2-1
long term, 5.2-2
function, 2.4-3, 2.19-2
location, 2.4-9
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-2
Six-Channel Preamp cards
inputs, 2.19-3
outputs, 2.19-3
40-INDEX
SlideMaker
AMC switch settings for, A.2-1
Diluter Processor card switch settings
for, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10
service manual name and part number, 1.1-1
SlideStainer
SmartStart recognition
enabling, 2.15-1
function, 2.15-1
hand detector part of, 2.17-16
software
procedure for displaying versions, A.9-1
released version configurations for the GENS
System, A.9-1
released version configurations for the LH 750
System, A.9-1
Solenoid Interconnect module
function, A.6-9
part number, 8.1-20
solenoid valves
functions and location references, table of, A.6-1
solenoids valves
reagent reservoir, replacement
Sol/Opt PS card. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card
spacers, part numbers, 8.1-37
SPC A/D Status Error, 7.2-36
SPC card. See System Power Controller card
SPC Display. See System Power Controller Display
SPC Power Supply Bad, 7.2-36
SPC power supply defective, 7.2-36
SPC Status Not Ready, 7.2-37
special headings
attention, 1.1-4
caution, 1.1-3
important, 1.1-3
note, 1.1-4
Specimen Transport system
cassette transport assembly, 2.14-2
detecting a tube at the piercing station, 2.15-4
function, 2.14-1
identifying the specimen, 2.15-5
PN 4277219B
INDEX

moving a cassette to the unloading bay, 2.15-6
moving the cassette across the rocker
bed, 2.15-3
overview, 2.14-1
piercing the cap of the specimen tube, 2.15-5
placing the cassette on the rocker bed, 2.15-3
positioning the tube for sample
acquisition, 2.15-4
pushing the tube back into the cassette, 2.15-6
retrieving the cassette from the loading
bay, 2.15-1
springs, part numbers, 8.1-29
StabiLyse. See diff preservative
Stack Overflow, 7.2-37
stain
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.23-5
stain chamber (VC24)
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3
location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2
replacement, 4.63-1
stain heater
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6
Stain Heater Disabled, 7.2-37
Stain heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-37
Stain Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-37
stain pump (PM5)
adjustments on the Random Access module,
adjustments on the Retic module, illustration
of, 4.24-4
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.24-7
Stain Temp Hi. Heater Disabled, 7.2-37
Stain Temp Low. Run Stopped, 7.2-37
PN 4277219B
Stain temperature high, heater disabled., 7.2-37

Stain temperature low, heater disabled., 7.2-37
Stain temperature sensor failed., 7.2-37
stained retic sample valve (CVL93)
stained retic segment valve
function, 2.17-9
standard deviation
start switch. See Manual-mode start switch
startup after extended shutdown
procedure, 5.2-2
startup after long term shutdown
procedure, 5.2-2
startup procedures
after extended shutdown, 5.2-2
after long term shutdown, 5.2-2
stripper plate
function, 2.15-4
location, 2.15-4
stripper plate cylinder (CL10)
function, 2.15-4
location, 2.15-4
Stripper Plate Not In, 7.2-38
Stripper Plate Not Out, 7.2-38
Stripper plate obstructed (not in) or faulty
sensor., 7.2-38
Stripper plate obstructed (not out) or faulty
sensor., 7.2-38
stripper plate position switch
function, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-4
testing, 4.81-4
STX Rec. Error, 7.2-38
SVP
procedure, 5.1-1
using electronic form for, 4.61-1
Sweep Flow Reservoir Not Full, 7.2-38
Sweep Flow Reservoir Still Full, 7.2-38
sweep-flow reservoir (VC29)
function, 2.13-10
sweep-flow reservoir sensor
testing, 4.81-4
INDEX-41
INDEX
sweep-flow tank
function, A.6-9
switches
laser interlock. See laser interlock switch
left lift up. See left lift up switch
Manual-mode start. See Manual-mode start
switch
on circuit cards. See specific circuit card
RESET. See RESET switch
right lift up. See right lift up switch
right stack loaded. See right stack loaded switch
scanner position. See scanner position switch
settings for System with
SlideMaker, A.2-1, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10
stripper plate position. See stripper plate
position switch
top left safety. See top left safety switch
top right safety. See top right safety switch
under left stack. See under left stack switch
under right stack. See under right stack switch
System Control overview
System Control system
AMC, 2.11-2
function, 2.11-1
overview, 2.11-1
System flush
procedure, 5.3-2
System Installation Report, using electronic
form, 4.61-2
System messages
tables of, 7.2-1
See also individual messages
A/D converter status monitor, 2.10-3
Bulk Power Supply voltage monitors, 2.10-3
function, 2.2-1, 2.10-1
input line voltage monitors, 2.10-2
inputs, 2.10-2
42-INDEX
jumper settings for 48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5

location, 2.2-2
part number, 8.1-23
pneumatic level monitors, 2.10-2
POWER ON signal simplified schematic, 2.6-4
replacement, 4.18-1
temperature monitors, 2.10-2
voltage status LEDs, table of indications, A.4-4
electronic and pneumatic level displays, 2.10-4
function, 2.2-1, 2.10-3
location, 2.2-2
replacement, 4.19-1
status displays, 2.10-4
testing, 4.19-1
system verification procedure. See SVP
System-Flush cycle
description, 2.13-11
function, 2.13-11
systems
CBC Analysis. See CBC Analysis system
Diluter Control. See Diluter Control system
Electronic Power. See Electronic Power system
functional, listing of, 2.1-2
GENS System. See GENS System
LH 750 System. See LH 750 System
Pneumatic Power. See Pneumatic Power system
Power Development Control. See Power
Development Control system
Reagent Handling. See Reagent Handling system
Sample Acquisition. See Sample Acquisition
system
Sample Reporting. See Sample Reporting system
Specimen Transport. See Specimen Transport
system
System Control. See System Control system
VCS Technology. See VCS Technology system
T
tanks
backwash. See backwash tank
sheath. See sheath tank
sweep-flow. See sweep-flow tank
temperature
ambient, adjusting display of, 4.65-2
changes that require verification of
calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1
PN 4277219B
INDEX
required for instrument operation, 3.1-4, 3.10-4

requirements for calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1
role of Diluter ambient in diff analysis, 2.22-5
role of Peltier module in retic analysis, 2.23-6
role of stain heater in retic
analysis, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6
test modes
The C: drive is full. Please clear Print and
Transmission buffers from Run
Configuration., 7.3-13
The probe wipe harness is not connected., 7.2-31
thermistors
diff ambient. See diff ambient thermistor
Diluter ambient. See Diluter ambient thermistor
part number, 8.1-31
Three Consecutive Voteouts, 7.2-39
Three consecutive voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or
MCV., 7.2-39
thrombocyte
See also Plt
tie wraps
part numbers, 8.1-31, 8.2-65
timing procedures
bar-code scanner cylinder stroke, A.1-1
CBC lytic reagent and diluent
delivery, 4.31-2, 4.31-3
tools, part numbers, 8.1-31
top left safety switch
function, 2.15-6, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-6
replacement, 4.41-1
test, 4.41-2
testing, 4.81-4
top right safety switch
function, 2.15-2, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-1
replacement, 4.41-1
test, 4.41-2
testing, 4.81-4
transient voltage suppressor
function, 2.5-1
trend
function, 2.4-3
PN 4277219B

part number, 8.1-32, 8.1-33
voltage noise tolerances, table of, A.1-9
troubleshooting procedures
+48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
flow-cell errors, 7.5-1
LED style bar-code scanner speed and electrical
checks, 4.52-1
power up problems, 7.4-1
stain pump, 4.24-1
TTM. See Triple Transducer module
tube detector
adjustment, 4.47-1
allowable distance to rocker bed, A.1-2
LED, when it should light, A.1-2
where cap is pierced when adjusted
correctly, A.1-2
tube detector assembly
function, 2.15-4
location, 2.15-4
replacement, 4.46-1
tube in position sensor
function, 2.15-4, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-4
testing, 4.81-4
tube ram cylinder (CL6)
function, 2.15-5
location, 2.15-5
tubing, part numbers, 8.1-33
TV3. See transient voltage suppressor
Two NAKs From Diluter, 7.2-39
Two NAKs Sent From AMC, 7.2-39
U
Unable to read cassette label., 7.2-22
under left stack switch
function, 2.15-6, 4.81-5
location, 2.15-6
replacement, 4.37-1
testing, 4.81-5
INDEX-43
INDEX
under right stack switch

function, 2.15-2, 4.81-5
location, 2.15-1
replacement, 4.38-1
testing, 4.81-5
Unknown Diff Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40
UNKNOWN Diluter Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40
unloading bay
V
vacuum
pump. See compressor/vacuum pump
See also vacuum, high; vacuum, low
vacuum chamber (VC16)
vacuum isolator chamber (VC1)
function, 2.18-4
vacuum overflow tank (VC22)
function, 2.9-5
sensor testing, 4.81-5
Vacuum overflow tank full., 7.2-24
vacuum overflow tank sensor
function, 4.81-5
testing, 4.81-5
vacuum regulator (RG2)
part number, 8.1-25
vacuum trap (VC21)
vacuum, high
development, 2.9-3
vacuum, low
distribution, 2.9-5
transducer (COUNT VACUUM)
location, A.3-14
44-INDEX
valves
Angar. See Angar valves
blood sampling. See BSV
check. See check valves
dump. See dump valve
pinch. See pinch valves
relief. See relief valve
shear. See shear valves
solenoid. See solenoids valves
VC1
function, A.6-12
See also vacuum isolator chamber;VC1-R;
VC1-W
VC1-R
function, A.6-12
See also RBC vacuum isolator chamber
VC1-W
function, A.6-12
See also WBC vacuum isolator chamber
VC2
function, A.6-12
See also RBC bath, A.6-12
VC3
function, A.6-13
See also WBC bath, A.6-13
VC10
function, A.6-12
VC11
function, A.6-12
VC12
function, A.6-12
VC13
function, A.6-12
PN 4277219B
INDEX

VC14
function, A.6-12
VC15
function, A.6-12
See also sheath tank
VC16
function, A.6-12
VC17
function, A.6-12
See also retic chamber
VC18
function, A.6-12
See also flow cell
VC19
function, A.6-12
See also needle vent chamber
VC21
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12
VC22
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12
VC23
function, A.6-12
See also backwash tank
VC24
function, A.6-13
VC25
function, A.6-13
PN 4277219B
VC26
function, A.6-13
VC27
function, A.6-13
VC28
function, A.6-13
See also diluent/cleaning agent chamber
VC29
function, A.6-13
See also sweep-flow reservoir
VC30
function, A.6-13
VC31
function, A.6-13
VC32
function, A.6-13
See also diluent/cleaning agent manifold
VC37
function, A.6-13
VCS calibration. See VCS optimization
VCS measurements
conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
light scatter (LS), 2.20-1
linear light scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
opacity (OP), 2.20-1
rotated light scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
volume (DC), 2.20-1
VCS noise checks
limits, A.1-9
procedure, 4.75-1
VCS optimization
diff and retic count time specifications, table
of, A.1-9
INDEX-45
INDEX
diff and retic sample pressure variation limits,

table of, A.1-9
diff preservative pump volume optimization,
peak-to-peak DC conductivity noise
limits, A.1-9
latex calibration adjustment and verification
limits, table of, A.1-10
LS offset voltages limits, table of, A.1-9
overview, 4.71-1
procedure flow, block diagram, 4.71-2
VCS static and dynamic noise, table of
See also VCS optimization procedures
diff lytic reagent pump volume checks, 4.28-1
diff preservative pump checks, 4.29-1
flow-cell cleaning, 4.79-1
flow-rate adjustment, 4.73-1
pressure adjustments, 4.72-1
laser and flow-cell alignment, 4.76-1
LATRON verification procedure, 4.78-1
lens block cleaning, 4.80-1
LS gain adjustment, 4.77-1
preliminary checks, 4.71-5
RF Detector Preamp card adjustments, 4.74-1
VCS noise checks, 4.75-1
VCS technology parameters. See diff parameters,
retic parameters
VCS Technology system
applying the VCS technology, 2.20-2
COULTER IntelliKinetics
application, 2.22-5, 2.23-5
delivering diff and retic samples in the
delivering diff and retic samples in the Manual
determining the diff parameters, 2.22-10
determining the retic parameters, 2.23-6
diff analysis conditions, table of
diff analysis reagent system, 2.22-4
diff blood sample and reagent delivery to mixing
chamber, GENS System, illustration, 2.22-2
chamber, LH 750 System, illustration, 2.22-3
46-INDEX
diff lytic reagent and diff preservative

pumps, 2.22-6
diff sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.22-4
diff sample processing components on the
electronic overview, 2.21-1
electronic overview block diagram, 2.21-1
flow cell port functions, table of, 2.20-5
flow cell ports, illustration of, 2.20-4
flow through flow cell, illustration of, 2.20-4
function, 2.20-1
light scatter (LS) sensor, 2.21-4
processing the sample for diff analysis on the
GENS System, 2.22-1
LH 750 System, 2.22-2
processing the sample for retic analysis on the
GENS System, 2.23-1
LH 750 System, 2.23-3
retic analysis conditions, table of
retic analysis reagent system, 2.23-5
retic blood sample and stain delivery to stain
retic sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.23-5
retic sample processing components on the
retic stained sample and clearing solution
delivery to retic chamber, GENS System,
delivery to retic chamber, LH 750 System,
stain heater block diagram, 2.23-6
VCS measurements, 2.20-1
VCS technology, instrument application
DC and RF currents, 2.20-2
flow-cell hydraulics, 2.20-3
PN 4277219B
INDEX
hydrodynamically focused cells, illustration

of, 2.20-4
laser light source, 2.20-2
light scatter path, illustration of, 2.20-3
verification procedures
bar-code performance, 4.49-1
diff and retic, 5.6-1
LATRON, 4.78-1
Power Supply, 5.7-1
precision, 5.5-1
System, 5.1-1
whole blood, 5.4-1
VIC. See vacuum isolator chamber
VL1 (Power Supply). See dump valve
Vls Air Error, 7.2-40
Vls Diluent Error, 7.2-40
volume (DC)
Volumetric Cylinder
reading correctly for diff lytic reagent pump
volumes, 4.28-3
reading correctly for diff preservative pump
volumes, 4.29-3
Voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or MCV, 7.2-6
W
warning
definition, 1.1-3
washers, part numbers, 8.1-37
waste
collection, description, 2.13-11
level monitoring, description, 2.13-11
See also waste level sensor
waste chamber (VC11)
waste container
GENS System, 3.5-3
LH 750 System, 3.13-3
Waste container full., 7.2-24
waste drain
connection to Diluter on the GENS
System, 3.5-3
PN 4277219B
connection to Diluter on the LH 750

System, 3.13-3
waste level sensor
function, 4.81-5
testing, 4.81-5
installation on the GENS System, 3.5-3
installation on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
location on the GENS System, 3.5-3
location on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
WBC
System, 2.24-2
System, 2.24-5
diluent dispenser. See WBC diluent dispenser
generating histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
generating histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
WBC bath (VC3)
WBC differential parameters
WBC diluent dispenser (PM3)
function, 2.18-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.23-6
WBC preserve. See diff preservative
WBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-W)
function, 2.18-4
white blood cell. See WBC
White Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
cards
whole blood verification
procedure, 5.4-1
Workload has been automatically reset in the
database., 7.3-14
INDEX-47
INDEX
Workload has been manually archived, 7.3-14

Workload has been manually printed, 7.3-14
Workload has been manually reset in the
database, 7.3-14
Workload was automatically printed., 7.3-14
Workstation
connecting to the Analytical Station on the
GENS System, 3.4-7
LH 750 System, 3.15-1
determining Hgb results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-7
determining MCV results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
determining MCV results reported on the
GENS System, 2.24-3
LH 750 System, 2.24-5
determining Plt and MPV results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-6
determining RBC counts on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
determining RDW results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-6
determining WBC counts on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
determining WBC results reported on the
GENS System, 2.24-3
LH 750 System, 2.24-5
entering system serial numbers and revisions on
thew LH 750 System, 3.16-4
error messages, 7.3-1
generating Plt histogram on the LH750
System, 2.24-6
generating RBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generating WBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
installation, GENS System, 3.2-1
installation, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
power down/power up procedures, 4.1-1
screens. See Workstation screens
Workstation comms timeout, 7.2-41
48-INDEX
Workstation messages
Workstation screens
Bar-Code Test, illustration of, 4.49-1
capture procedure, 4.33-1
Latex Voltage, illustration of, 4.9-2
Voltage Matching, illustration of, 4.9-3
Wrong Cal Factors, 7.2-41
Wrong Calibration Type, Latex Sample will not be
stored., 7.3-14
Wrong Calibration Type, Sample will be stored as a
Patient Sample., 7.3-14
Wrong Carryover Type, latex Sample will not be
stored., 7.3-14
Wrong Carryover Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Command Interpretation, 7.2-41
Wrong Command Sequence, 7.2-41
Wrong Control 5C Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Control Retics Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Echo Xmit, 7.2-41
Wrong Match and Balance Type, latex Sample will not
be stored., 7.3-14
Wrong Match and Balance Type, Sample will be stored
as a Patient Sample., 7.3-14
Wrong Repro Type, latex Sample will not be
stored., 7.3-15
X
XB all batches were deleted, 7.3-15
XB current batch was deleted, 7.3-15
PN 4277219B
TRADEMARKS
The BECKMAN COULTER logo, 4 C PLUS, 5C, AccuGate, ACCUVETTE, COULTER,
COULTER CLENZ, Erythrolyse, GENS, GENS SM, GENS ST, IntelliKinetics, ISOTON,
LATRON, RCS, S-CAL, SCATTER PAK, SmartStart, and Stabilyse are trademarks of
Beckman Couter, Inc.
All other trademarks, service marks, products, or services are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
PN 4277219B
COULTER Analytical Stations
Service Manual
Volume II
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC
DIFF
RETICS
I
II
III
IV
PNEU
60 PSI
AC LINE
AC
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
DC
V
VI
VII
VIII
POWER SUPPLY
PN 4277219B (July 2001)

COULTER CORPORATION
A Beckman Coulter Company
Miami, Florida 33196-2500 USA
LEGAL NOTICES
Beckman Coulter, Inc. makes no representation that, upon furnishing this service manual, the holder of the manual will have
the necessary technical capabilities and know-how to properly troubleshoot and repair any of the equipment specified in the
manual. Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability whatsoever, including consequential and incidental damages, resulting
from improper operation of Beckman Coulter instruments after maintenance of Beckman Coulter instruments has been
performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc. Furthermore, Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability
whatsoever for any personal injury or property damage resulting from maintenance and/or repair of Beckman Coulter
instruments performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc.
READ ALL PRODUCT MANUALS AND CONSULT WITH BECKMAN COULTER-TRAINED PERSONNEL
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OPERATE INSTRUMENT.
HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:
WARNING
CAUTION
IMPORTANT -
Might cause injury.

Might cause damage to the instrument.
Might cause misleading results.
Beckman Coulter, Inc. urges its customers to comply with all national health and safety standards such as the use of barrier
protection. This may include, but it is not limited to, protective eyewear, gloves, and suitable laboratory attire when
operating or maintaining this or any other automated laboratory analyzer.
"This Service Manual contains confidential information of Beckman Coulter, Inc. and its receipt or possession does not
convey any rights to reproduce, disclose its contents, or to manufacture, use, or sell anything it may describe.
Reproduction, disclosure, or use without specific written authorization of Beckman Coulter, Inc. is strictly forbidden."
Copyright Beckman Coulter, Inc. 2001
All rights reserved.
CONTENTS VOLUME II
5
PN 4277219B
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, 5.1-1

5.1
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.1-1

Purpose, 5.1-1
Startup Checks, 5.1-1
LATRON Control Checks, 5.1-1
5C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Retic-C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Recording Results, 5.1-1
5.2
EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES, 5.2-1

Purpose, 5.2-1
Extended Shutdown, 5.2-1
Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Extended Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
5.3
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES, 5.3-1

Purpose, 5.3-1
Decontaminating with Bleach, 5.3-1
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure, 5.3-2
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure, 5.3-3
Decontaminating the Diluter, 5.3-4
Rinsing the Diluter, 5.3-5
Installing New Reagents and Checking the Analytical Station, 5.3-5
5.4
WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.4-1

Purpose, 5.4-1
Procedure, 5.4-1
5.5
PRECISION VERIFICATION, 5.5-1

Purpose, 5.5-1
Procedure, 5.5-1
5.6
DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, 5.6-1

Purpose, 5.6-1
Procedure, 5.6-1
5.7
POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION, 5.7-1

Purpose, 5.7-1
Procedure, 5.7-1
iii
CONTENTS VOLUME II
5.8
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, 5.8-1

Purpose, 5.8-1
Procedure, 5.8-1
5.9
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, 5.9-1
SCHEMATICS, 6.1-1
6.1
TROUBLESHOOTING, 7.1-1
7.1
ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.1-1

System Alarms, 7.1-1
Analytical Station Messages, 7.1-1
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Analytical Station
Messages, 7.1-1
About the Tables of Analytical Station Messages Under Heading 7.2, 7.1-2
Workstation Messages, 7.1-3
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Workstation
Messages, 7.1-3
About the Tables of Workstation Messages Under Heading 7.3, 7.1-3
7.2
TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES, 7.2-1
7.3
TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.3-1
7.4
TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS, 7.4-1

Summary, 7.4-1
Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines, 7.4-1
Power-Up Sequence, 7.4-1
Dump Valve Check Routine, 7.4-4
48 Volts Failure Isolation, 7.4-5
Procedure, 7.4-5
7.5
FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2, 7.5-1
PARTS LISTS, 8.1-1

8.1
MASTER PARTS LIST, 8.1-1
8.2
ILLUSTRATED PARTS, 8.2-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, A.1-1

A.1
iv
SCHEMATICS INCLUDED, 6.1-1
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS, A.1-1

Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, A.1-1
Bar-Code Read Rate, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, A.1-1
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, A.1-1

Flipper Position Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Belt Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Timing Check, A.1-2
Tube Detector Checks, A.1-2
CBC Calibration Limits, A.1-2
CBC Noise Level Limits, A.1-3
Electronic Test Limits, A.1-4
Performance Specifications, A.1-5
Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances, A.1-6
Sample Conditions/Specifications, A.1-7
Diff and Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
Diluent/CBC Lytic Reagent Timing, A.1-8
VCS Optimization Limits, A.1-8
Voltage Limits, A.1-10
Volume Specifications, A.1-13
Pumps, A.1-13
PN 4277219B
A.2
ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.2-1

AMC, A.2-1
Jumpers, A.2-1
Switch, A.2-1
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR Card, A.2-2
Switches, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card, A.2-3
Connectors, A.2-3
Test Points and Adjustments, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, A.2-4
Switches, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card (In Scope Module), A.2-5
Switch, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, A.2-6
Switch, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card, A.2-7
Connector, A.2-7
LED, A.2-7
Switches, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card, A.2-9
Switches, A.2-9
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2, A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card, A.2-12
Connectors, A.2-12
A.3
DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.3-1

Bar-Code Decoder Card, A.3-1
Connectors, A.3-1
Jumper, A.3-1
Diff Power Supply Card, A.3-2
Connectors, A.3-2
Diluter 1 Card, A.3-3
CONTENTS VOLUME II
Connectors, A.3-4
LEDs, A.3-4
Connectors, A.3-7
LEDs, A.3-7
Connectors, A.3-9
Connectors, A.3-10
LEDs, A.3-10
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, A.3-11
Connectors, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, A.3-12
Connectors, A.3-12
LEDs, A.3-12
Test Points, A.3-13
Keyboard and Display Interface Card (GENS System), A.3-13
Connectors, A.3-13
Potentiometers, A.3-13
PVT Card, A.3-14
Connectors, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card, A.3-15
Connectors, A.3-15
RS/Opto Infc Card, A.3-16
Connectors, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card, A.3-17
Connectors, A.3-17
LEDs, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card, A.3-18
Connectors, A.3-18
vi
A.4
POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT

DESCRIPTIONS, A.4-1
Bulk Power Filter Card, A.4-1
Connectors, A.4-1
Bulk Power Supply, A.4-2
Connectors, A.4-2
Motor Controller Card, A.4-3
System Power Controller Card, A.4-4
Connectors, A.4-4
LEDs, A.4-4
A.5
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS, A.5-1
A.6
DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION

REFERENCES, A.6-1
Summary, A.6-1
Solenoids Valves, A.6-1
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
Pinch Valves and Asco Angar Valves, A.6-8

Main Diluter Fluidic Components, A.6-9
A.7
GENS SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.7-1
A.8
LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.8-1
A.9
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS, A.9-1
A.10 MENU TREES, A.10-1

ABBREVIATIONS, ABBREVIATIONS-1
GLOSSARY, GLOSSARY-1
INDEX, INDEX-1
TRADEMARKS
ILLUSTRATIONS
5.3-1
5.4-1
5.5-1
7.4-1
7.4-2
8.2-1
8.2-2
8.2-3
8.2-4
8.2-5
8.2-6
8.2-7
8.2-8
8.2-9
8.2-10
8.2-11
8.2-12
8.2-13
8.2-14
8.2-15
8.2-16
8.2-17
8.2-18
8.2-19
8.2-20
8.2-21
8.2-22
8.2-23
PN 4277219B
Flush Input Line, 5.3-1

Precision Screen, 5.4-1
Main Analytical Station Components Illustrated, 8.2-1
Analyzer, Front Door (See Table 8.2-2), 8.2-2
Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-3), 8.2-4
GENS System Diluter, Front Doors and Covers (See Table 8.2-4), 8.2-6
Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Table 8.2-5), 8.2-8
Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-6), 8.2-10
Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-7), 8.2-12
Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-8), 8.2-14
Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-9), 8.2-16
Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-10), 8.2-18
Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-11), 8.2-20
Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-12), 8.2-22
Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-13), 8.2-24
Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front Cover
(See Table 8.2-14), 8.2-26
Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Table 8.2-15), 8.2-28
Diluter, Tube Ram Cylinder and Bar-Code Scanners and Cylinder See
Table 8.2-16), 8.2-30
Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Table 8.2-17), 8.2-32
Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Table 8.2-18), 8.2-34
Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Table 8.2-19), 8.2-36
Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-20), 8.2-38
Diluter, Diff Module (See Table 8.2-21), 8.2-40
Diluter, Retic Module (See Table 8.2-22), 8.2-42
Diluter, BSV Module (See Table 8.2-23), 8.2-44
vii
CONTENTS VOLUME II
8.2-24
8.2-25
8.2-26
8.2-27
8.2-28
8.2-29
8.2-30
8.2-31
8.2-32
8.2-33
8.2-34
8.2-35
8.2-36
8.2-37
8.2-38
8.2-39
8.2-40
8.2-41
8.2-42
A.1-1
A.2-1
A.2-2
A.2-3
A.2-4
A.2-5
A.2-6
A.2-7
A.2-8
A.2-9
A.2-10
A.3-1
A.3-2
A.3-3
A.3-4
A.3-5
A.3-6
A.3-7
A.3-8
viii
Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Table 8.2-24), 8.2-46

Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Table 8.2-25), 8.2-48
Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Table 8.2-26), 8.2-50
Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Table 8.2-27), 8.2-52
Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
(See Table 8.2-28), 8.2-54
Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
(See Table 8.2-29), 8.2-56
Check Valves and Chokes (See Table 8.2-30.), 8.2-58
Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Table 8.2-31), 8.2-60
Common Valves (See Table 8.2-32), 8.2-62
Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-33), 8.2-64
Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators and Filter
(See Table 8.2-34), 8.2-66
Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See
Table 8.2-35), 8.2-68
Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See
Table 8.2-36), 8.2-70
Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Table 8.2-37), 8.2-72
LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See Table 8.2-38), 8.2-74
LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Table 8.2-39), 8.2-76
LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-40), 8.2-77
LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-41), 8.2-78
Random Access Module Components (See Table 8.2-42), 8.2-80
CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Timing, A.1-8
AMC Component Locations, A.2-1
API Card Component Locations, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card Component Locations, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card Component Locations, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card Component Locations, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card Component Locations, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-9
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Jumper Locations and Settings, A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card Component Locations, A.2-12
Bar-Code Decoder Card Component Locations, A.3-1
Diff Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-2
Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with Old Diluter
Interconnects), A.3-3
Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with New Diluter
Interconnects)t, A.3-3
Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GENS System SW3A or Lower, without
SlideMaker), A.3-5
Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GENS System SW3A or Lower, with or
without SlideMaker), A.3-5
Diluter 2 REL Card Component Locations), A.3-6
Diluter 2 RBD Card Component Locations, A.3-6
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
A.3-9
A.3-10
1.3-11
A.3-12
A.3-13
A.3-14
A.3-15
A.3-16
A.3-17
A.3-18
A.3-19
A.3-20
A.4-1
A.4-2
A.4-3
A.4-4
A.7-2
A.7-1
A.7-3
A.7-4
A.7-5
A.7-6
A.7-8
A.7-7
A.7-9
A.7-10
A.7-11
A.7-12
A.8-1
A.8-2
A.8-3
A.8-4
A.8-5
A.8-6
A.8-8
A.8-7
A.8-9
A.8-10
A.8-11
A.10-1
A.10-2
Diluter 3 Card Component Locations, A.3-8

Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-8
Diluter 3 LH Card Component Locations, A.3-8
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Component Location, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-12
Keyboard and Display Interface Card Component Locations on the GENS
System, A.3-13
PVT Card Component Locations, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-15
RS/Opto Intfc Card Component Locations, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card Component Locations, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card Component Locations, A.3-18
Bulk Power Filter Card Component Locations, A.4-1
Bulk Power Supply Connectors, A.4-2
Motor Controller Card Locations and Settings, A.4-3
System Power Controller Card Component Locations, A.4-4
GENS System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.7-1
GENS System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.7-1
GENS System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.7-2
GENS System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.7-2
GENS System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.7-3
GENS System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.7-3
GENS System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.7-4
GENS System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.7-4
GENS System Diluter - Retic Module, A.7-5
GENS System Diluter - Diff Module, A.7-5
GENS System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.7-6
GENS System Diluter- Right Rear Door, A.7-6
LH 750 System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.8-1
LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.8-1
LH 750 System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.8-2
LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.8-2
LH 750 System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.8-3
LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.8-3
LH 750 System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.8-4
LH 750 System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.8-4
LH 750 System Diluter - Random Access Module, A.8-5
LH 750 System Diluter - Diff Module, A.8-5
LH 750 System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.8-6
GENS System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-1
LH 750 System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-2
TABLES
7.2-1
7.2-2
7.2-3
7.2-4
7.2-5
PN 4277219B
System Messages - Symbols and Numbers, 7.2-1

System Messages - A, 7.2-2
System Messages - B, 7.2-7
System Messages - C, 7.2-9
System Messages - D, 7.2-11
ix
CONTENTS VOLUME II
7.2-6
7.2-7
7.2-8
7.2-9
7.2-10
7.2-11
7.2-12
7.2-13
7.2-14
7.2-15
7.2-16
7.3-1
7.3-2
7.3-3
7.3-4
7.3-5
7.3-7
7.3-8
7.3-9
7.3-13
7.4-1
7.4-2
7.4-3
7.5-1
8.1-1
8.1-2
8.1-3
8.1-4
8.1-5
8.1-6
8.1-7
8.1-8
8.1-9
8.1-10
8.1-11
8.1-12
8.1-13
8.2-1
8.2-2
8.2-3
8.2-4
8.2-5
8.2-6
8.2-7
8.2-8
8.2-9
8.2-10
8.2-11
8.2-12
System Messages - E through G, 7.2-17

System Messages - H, 7.2-19
System Messages - I through K, 7.2-21
System Messages - L, 7.2-22
System Messages - M through O, 7.2-26
System Messages - P through Q, 7.2-28
System Messages - R, 7.2-32
System Messages - S, 7.2-35
System Messages - T through V, 7.2-39
System Messages - U, 7.2-40
System Messages - W through Z, 7.2-41
Workstation Messages - A through B, 7.3-1
Workstation Messages - C through G, 7.3-2
Workstation Messages - H, 7.3-4
Workstation Messages - I through K, 7.3-7
Workstation Messages - L through N, 7.3-8
Workstation Messages - N, 7.3-9
Workstation Messages - O, 7.3-10
Workstation Messages - P through V, 7.3-13
Workstation Messages - W through Z, 7.3-14
AC Power Timing Sequence, 7.4-1
Instrument Power-On Timing Sequence, 7.4-2
Flow-Cell Errors, 7.5-1
Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List, 8.1-1
Master Parts List - A through B, 8.1-3
Master Parts List - C, 8.1-4
Master Parts List - D through E, 8.1-10
Master Parts List - F through G, 8.1-11
Master Parts List - H, 8.1-15
Master Parts List - I through M, 8.1-19
Master Parts List - N and O, 8.1-21
Master Parts List - P through R, 8.1-22
Master Parts List - S, 8.1-26
Master Parts List - T, 8.1-31
Master Parts List - U through V, 8.1-36
Master Parts List - W through Z, 8.1-37
Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1, 8.2-1
Analyzer, Front Cover (See Figure 8.2-2), 8.2-3
Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Panel and Cover (See Figure 8.2-3), 8.2-5
Diluter, Front Covers (See Figure 8.2-4), 8.2-7
Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Figure 8.2-5), 8.2-9
Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-6), 8.2-11
Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-7), 8.2-13
Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-8), 8.2-15
Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-9), 8.2-17
Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-10), 8.2-19
Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-11), 8.2-21
Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-12), 8.2-23
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-13), 8.2-25
8.2-14 Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front Cover
(See Figure 8.2-14), 8.2-27
8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Figure 8.2-15), 8.2-29
8.2-16 Diluter, Bar-Code Scanner and Tube Ram Cylinder (See Figure 8.2-16), 8.2-31
8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Figure 8.2-17), 8.2-33
8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Figure 8.2-18), 8.2-35
8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Figure 8.2-19), 8.2-37
8.2-20 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See
Figure 8.2-20), 8.2-39
8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Figure 8.2-21), 8.2-41
8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Figure 8.2-22), 8.2-43
8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Figure 8.2-23), 8.2-45
8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Figure 8.2-24), 8.2-47
8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Figure 8.2-25), 8.2-49
8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Figure 8.2-26), 8.2-51
8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Figure 8.2-27), 8.2-53
8.2-28 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
(See Figure 8.2-28), 8.2-55
8.2-29 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
(See Figure 8.2-29), 8.2-57
8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Figure 8.2-30), 8.2-59
8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Figure 8.2-31), 8.2-61
8.2-32 Common Valves (See Figure 8.2-32), 8.2-63
8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-33), 8.2-65
8.2-34 Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators and Filter
(See Figure 8.2-34), 8.2-67
8.2-35 Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See
Figure 8.2-35), 8.2-69
8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See
Figure 8.2-36), 8.2-71
8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Figure 8.2-37), 8.2-73
8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See
Figure 8.2-38), 8.2-75
8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Figure 8.2-39), 8.2-76
8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See
Figure 8.2-40), 8.2-77
8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Components (See Figure 8.2-41), 8.2-79
8.2-42 Random Access Components (See Figure 8.2-42), 8.2-81
A.1-1 Bar-Code Read-Rate Specifications, A.1-1
A.1-2 Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
A.1-3 Latex Voltage Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-4 Voltage Matching Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-5 Flow-Rate Test Limits, A.1-3
A.1-6 CBC Calibration Factor Limits, A.1-3
A.1-7 Red and White Aperture Impedance, A.1-3
A.1-8 Red and White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent), A.1-3
A.1-9 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Limits, A.1-4
A.1-10 RAMP and PRECISION TEST Limits , A.1-4
A.1-11 Parameter Test Limits, A.1-5
PN 4277219B
xi
CONTENTS VOLUME II
A.1-12
A.1-13
A.1-14
A.1-15
A.1-16
A.1-17
A.1-18
A.1-19
A.1-20
A.1-21
A.1-22
A.1-23
A.1-24
A.1-25
A.1-26
A.1-27
A.1-28
A.1-29
A.1-30
A.1-31
A.2-1
A.2-2
A.2-3
A.2-4
A.2-5
A.2-6
A.2-7
A.2-8
A.2-9
A.2-10
A.2-11
A.2-12
A.2-13
A.3-1
A.3-2
A.3-3
A.3-4
A.3-5
A.3-6
A.3-7
A.3-8
A.3-9
A.3-10
A.3-11
A.3-12
A.3-13
A.3-14
A.3-15
xii
Mode-to-Mode Comparison Limits*, A.1-6

Diff Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Limits, A.1-8
LATRON Primer Background Limits, A.1-8
VCS Pressure Variation Limits, A.1-9
Diff/Retic Cell Count Times and Values and Diff Conductivity Noise Limits, A.1-9
Diff/Retic TTM Voltage Noise Limits Verification, A.1-9
LS Offset Voltage, A.1-9
VCS Latex Calibration and Verification Limits, A.1-10
48 V Check, A.1-10
AC Line Input Voltage Specifications, A.1-11
Analyzer Backplane Voltage Test Points, A.1-11
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on GENS System, A.1-11
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on LH 750 System, A.1-11
Clog Detector Threshold Voltage - For RF Detector Preamp Card with Vacuum
Tube, A.1-12
Diluter Card Voltage Test Points, A.1-12
Hgb Voltage Limits, A.1-13
Pump Volume Tolerances, A.1-14
AMC Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-1
AMC Card Switch, SW1, Temperature Selection, A.2-2
API Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card Connectors, A.2-3
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-9
R/W/P SC/A Card Connectors, A.2-12
Bar-Code Decoder Card Connectors, A.3-1
Diff Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-2
Diluter 1 Card Connectors, A.3-4
Diluter 1 Card LEDs, A.3-4
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments on the Diluter 2 Card, A.3-7
Diluter 4 Card Test Points and Adjustments, A.3-11
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Connectors, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-12
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card LEDs, A.3-12
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Test Points, A.3-13
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
A.3-16
A.3-17
A.3-18
A.3-19
A.3-20
A.3-21
A.3-22
A.4-1
A.4-2
A.4-3
A.4-4
A.5-1
A.6-1
A.6-2
A.6-3
A.9-1
A.9-2
PN 4277219B
Keyboard and Display Interface Card Connectors on the GENS System, A.3-13
PVT Card Connectors, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card Connectors, A.3-15
RS/Opto Intfc Card Connectors, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card Connectors, A.3-17
Sensor Distribution Card LEDs, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card Connectors, A.3-18
Bulk Power Filter Card Connectors, A.4-1
System Power Controller Card Connectors, A.4-4
System Power Controller Card Voltage Status LEDs, A.4-4
Diluter F-Key Functions, A.5-1
Solenoid Valve Functions, A.6-1
Pinch and Angar Valve Location References, A.6-8
Diluter Components, A.6-9
Worldwide Released Configurations for the GENS System*, A.9-1
Worldwide Released Configurations for the LH 750 System*, A.9-1
xiii
CONTENTS VOLUME II
xiv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
5
PN 4277219B
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, 5.1-1

5.1
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.1-1

Purpose, 5.1-1
Startup Checks, 5.1-1
LATRON Control Checks, 5.1-1
5C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Retic-C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Recording Results, 5.1-1
5.2
EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES, 5.2-1

Purpose, 5.2-1
Extended Shutdown, 5.2-1
Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Extended Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
5.3
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES, 5.3-1

Purpose, 5.3-1
Decontaminating with Bleach, 5.3-1
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure, 5.3-2
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure, 5.3-3
Decontaminating the Diluter, 5.3-4
Rinsing the Diluter, 5.3-5
Installing New Reagents and Checking the Analytical Station, 5.3-5
5.4
WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.4-1

Purpose, 5.4-1
Procedure, 5.4-1
5.5
PRECISION VERIFICATION, 5.5-1

Purpose, 5.5-1
Procedure, 5.5-1
5.6
DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, 5.6-1

Purpose, 5.6-1
Procedure, 5.6-1
5.7
POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION, 5.7-1

Purpose, 5.7-1
Procedure, 5.7-1
5-i
CONTENTS
5.8
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, 5.8-1

Purpose, 5.8-1
Procedure, 5.8-1
5.9
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, 5.9-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
5-ii
5.3-1
Flush Input Line, 5.3-1
5.4-1
5.5-1

PN 4277219B
5MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 5
5.1
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE

Purpose
Use this procedure at the end of each service call to verify the instrument is operating
correctly.
B LATRON primer
B LATRON control
B COULTER 5C or 5C-ES cell controls
B Retic-C cell controls
B System Verification Report form
Startup Checks
1.
Press START UP.
2.
Verify all daily checks are acceptable.
LATRON Control Checks

1.
Do F57 to select the Diff and Retics LATRON mode.
2.
Run the LATRON primer and LATRON control.
3.
Verify all parameters are within acceptable limits.
5C Cell Control Checks

1.

Note: On the LH 750 System, this selection is made automatically.
2.
Run all levels of 5C or 5C-ES cell control in the Automatic mode.
3.
Retic-C Cell Control Checks

1.
On the GENS System, select the RETIC ONLY test mode.

Note: On the LH 750 System, this selection is made automatically.
2.
Run all levels of Retic-C control in the Automatic mode.
3.
Recording Results
Complete the System Verification Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
PN 4277219B Type of Review
5.1-1
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
5.1-2
PN 4277219B Type of Review
EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES
5.2

Purpose
ATTENTION: This procedure is valid as written for the GENS System. A revised procedure is
needed for the LH 750 System and was not yet available at the time of publication.
If the Analytical Station is not operated for four or more days, the reagents in the Diluter can
dry out and precipitate. Use the following shutdown procedures to prevent this problem:
r
If theAnalytical Station will not be operated for three to seven days, do the Extended
Shutdown procedure. This procedure removes the reagents from the system and replaces
the reagents with deionized or distilled water.
If the Analytical Station will not be operated for longer than a week, will be put into
storage, or will be shipped from its current location, do the Extended Shutdown
procedure and the Long-Term Shutdown procedure. The Long-Term Shutdown
procedure drains all liquid from the Diluter and releases the pinch valve tubing.
Before operating the Analytical Station after an extended shutdown, do the appropriate
startup procedure:
r
If the Analytical Station was shut down using the Extended Shutdown procedure, use the
Startup after Extended Shutdown procedure to remove the deionized water, prime the
Diluter with reagents and verify instrument operation.
If the Analytical Station was shut down using the Long-Term Shutdown procedure, use
the Startup after Long-Term Shutdown procedure to prime the Diluter with reagents and
verify instrument operation.
B 1.5 to 2 L deionized or distilled water in a container
B Red pinch valve deactivator clips (for the Long-Term Shutdown procedure only)
B Empty container (for the Long-Term Shutdown and the Start Up after Extended
Shutdown procedures only)
Extended Shutdown
1.
Press SHUT DOWN. Let cleaning agent remain in the instrument for at least 30 minutes.
2.
Remove the retic stain pickup tube from its container, rinse the outside of the pickup
tube with deionized water and place it in the container of deionized water.
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the waste pickup tube from the waste container or drain.
PN 4277219B
3.
Remove the rest of the reagent pickup tubes from their reagent containers and place the
tubes in the container of deionized water.
4.
Press SHUT DOWN to prime the cleaning agent lines with deionized water.
5.
Do F17 to prime the cleaning agent pump lines with deionized water.
6.
Do F67 three times to prime all of the reagent lines with deionized water. Refill the
deionized water container as needed.
5.2-1
7.
If the unit will not be operated for longer than a week, will be put into storage, or will be
shipped from its current location, do the Long-Term Shutdown procedure now,
8.
Optional: Power down the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
Long-Term Shutdown
1.
Perform the Extended Shutdown procedure.
ATTENTION: DO NOT disconnect the reagent lines or waste line from the back of the Diluter.
2.
Remove the pickup tubes from the deionized water container and place the tubes in an
empty container to prime the system with air.
3.
Press SHUT DOWN to prime the cleaning agent lines with air.
4.
Select F68 to remove all reagents. Leave this function activated for 30 minutes.
5.
Reset instrument to exit F68.
6.
Press POWER OFF, turn off the Power Supply breaker, and unplug the main ac power cable.
7.
Install red pinch valve deactivator clips on all pinch valves.
Startup after Extended Shutdown

1.
Place the pickup tubes in an empty container.
2.
Power up the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
3.
Do F67 four times to remove the deionized water from the Diluter.
4.
Press SHUT DOWN to remove the deionized water from the cleaning agent lines.
5.
Do F17 twice to remove water from the cleaning agent pump.
6.
Place the pickup tubes in the reagent containers.
7.
Select F31 to fill the reagent reservoirs with reagent.
8.
Select F67 to prime the reagents.
9.
Press SHUT DOWN to prime the cleaning agent.
10. Select F17 to prime the cleaning agent pump.

11. Press START UP.
12. Do the SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE as directed under Heading 5.1.
Startup after Long-Term Shutdown
5.2-2
1.
Remove all red pinch valve deactivator clips from the pinch valves.
2.
Place the pickup tubes in their respective reagent containers.
3.
Power up the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
4.
Select F31 to fill the reagent reservoirs with reagent.
5.
Select F67 three times to prime the reagents.
6.
Press SHUT DOWN.
7.
Select F17 to prime the cleaning agent pump.
8.
Press START UP.
9.
Do the SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE as directed under Heading 5.1.

PN 4277219B
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
5.3
Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to decontaminate the Diluter lines and components
exposed to blood before working on the instrument and when required by the laboratory.
r
The Decontaminating with Bleach procedure can only be used on an Analytical Station
configured with a DISINFECT port as shown in Figure 5.3-1 and with software version
3A or lower.
The Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure and the

Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure can be used on any GENS
System Analytical Station.
Note: This procedure is valid as written for the GENS System. A revised procedure is
Figure 5.3-1 Flush Input Line

D IS IN F E C T
B a c k o f
D ilu te r
7 2 1 9 0 1 8 B
Decontaminating with Bleach

B System-flush reagent tubing (may already be installed on Diluter)
CAUTION Risk of Diluter damage. Mixing ISOTON III diluent with bleach produces a precipitate that can
clog the tubing and components. Do not mix them together.
B 750 mL of freshly prepared bleach solution. Coulter recommends using a fresh solution
of one part bleach (a 5% solution of sodium hypochlorite or a high-quality unscented
household bleach) and one part deionized or distilled water.
B 750 mL of deionized or distilled water
PN 4277219B
5.3-1
Procedure
1.
Ensure the system-flush reagent tubing is installed on the DISINFECT port on the back
of the Diluter. Refer to Figure 5.3-1.
2.
Place the other end of the system-flush reagent tubing in the container of bleach
solution.
3.
Select F40 to initiate the system-flush cycle, pulling in the bleach solution.
4.
When the system-flush cycle is finished (it takes about 5 minutes), let the bleach
solution sit in the Diluter for no more than 15 minutes.
5.
Transfer the system-flush reagent tubing to the container of deionized water.
6.
Select F40 to rinse out the bleach solution with deionized water.
7.
Press START UP.
8.
Do the SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE as directed under Heading 5.1.
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure

B One empty diluent container (to be used for waste collection)
B One pair of hemostats
B About 1 L of distilled or deionized water
B 2 L of 5 % acetic acid (white distilled vinegar)
B Two large shielded input lines for diluent and cleaning agent, PN 6915052
B Two 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, one for the cleaning agent and the other for the diluent.
Depending on the configuration of the Analytical Station, you will need either:
r
Two universal 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, PN 6706295

or
One universal 10 - 20 L pickup tube, PN 6706295 (for the cleaning agent) and one
pickup tube with float sensor, PN 5120250
WARNING Failure to adhere to the following procedure could mix reagents with acetic acid, exposing you
and your customer to hazardous chemicals. Follow the procedure exactly as it is written.
Procedure
5.3-2
1.
Place the waste output line in the empty diluent container.
2.
Disconnect the pressure line from the side of the CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7) to
prevent the delivery of CBC lytic reagent to the WBC bath. Crimp the pressure line with
a pair of hemostats.
3.
Remove the diluent pickup tube from the reagent container and place the diluent pickup
tube in distilled water.
4.
Do a Startup cycle.
PN 4277219B
5.
Remove the cleaning agent pickup tube from the reagent container and place the
cleaning agent pickup tube in distilled water.
6.
Do a Shutdown cycle.
7.
Remove the diluent pickup tube from the distilled water and place the diluent pickup
tube in acetic acid.
8.
Manually drain the sweep-flow reservoir, VC29, by disconnecting tubing from the
reservoir. After draining the liquid, reconnect the tubing.
9.
Do a Startup cycle.
10. Remove the cleaning agent pickup tube from the distilled water and place the cleaning
agent pickup tube in acetic acid.
11. Do a Shutdown cycle.
12. Alternate between Startup and Shutdown cycles a minimum of two times each until the
acetic acid is pulled completely through the Diluter.
13. Leave the acetic acid in the Diluter for 1 hour.
14. After the 1-hour time limit has expired, run additional Startup and Shutdown cycles
until the remainder of the acetic acid is used up.
15. Remove the pickup tubes from the acetic acid and place them in fresh distilled water.
16. Do a Startup cycle and a Shutdown cycle, pulling in the distilled water.
17. Return the waste output line to its original location.
18. Reconnect the pressure tubing to the CBC lytic reagent pump.
19. Replace the cleaning agent input line and pickup tube with a new set and install the
pickup tube in a new container of cleaning agent.
20. Do two Shutdown cycles.
21. Replace the diluent input line and pickup tube with a new set and install the pickup tube
in a new container of diluent.
22. Do two Startup cycles.
23. Verify all background counts are acceptable.
24. Do the SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE as directed under Heading 5.1.
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure

B Two large shielded input lines for diluent and cleaning agent, PN 6915052
B Five small shielded input lines for CBC lytic reagent, retic clearing solution, retic stain,
PAK Preserve, and PAK Lyse, PN 6915053
PN 4277219B
5.3-3
B Two 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, one for the cleaning agent and the other for the diluent.
Depending on the configuration of the Analytical Station, you will need either:
r
Two universal 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, PN 6706295

or
One universal 10 - 20 L pickup tube, PN 6706295 (for the cleaning agent) and one
pickup tube with float sensor, PN 5120250
B Two universal 5 L pickup tubes for PAK Lyse and retic clearing solution, PN 6706296
B Two universal 0.5 - 1.9 L pickup tubes for retic stain and PAK Preserve, PN 6706297
B One universal 5 L pickup tube, PN 6706296, or one universal 0.5 - 1.9 L pickup tube,
PN 6706297, for CBC lytic reagent (depending on the size reagent container in use)
B One empty diluent container (to be used for waste collection)
B Paper towels
B One syringe
B One pair of hemostats
B Distilled or deionized water
B 7 L of 5 % acetic acid (white distilled vinegar)
B One sweep-flow reservoir (VC29), PN 6805861
WARNING Failure to adhere to the following procedure could mix reagents with acetic acid, exposing you
and your customer to hazardous chemicals. Follow the procedure exactly as it is written.
Decontaminating the Diluter

1.
Remove all the reagent pickup tubes from the reagent containers and select F68 to the
drain the reagents from the Diluter. Leave the function activated for 10 minutes, then
reset the Analyzer to stop the function.
2.
Replace all the reagent input lines and pickup tubes with new sets and place the new
pickup tubes in distilled water.
3.
Place the waste output line in the empty diluent container.
4.
At the reagent reservoir manifold:

a.
Remove all the reagent reservoir float assemblies, including the diluent riser tube,
and clean them with a paper towel and distilled water.
Note: If the Analytical Stations is configured to bypass the diluent reservoir you do
not need to clean the diluent reservoir or any of its components.
5.3-4
b.
Suction all the reagent out of each reservoir with a syringe and dry up any residual
liquid with paper towels.
c.
Reinstall the riser tube and all the float assemblies.
5.
Disconnect the pressure line from the side of the CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7) to
prevent the delivery of CBC lytic reagent to the WBC bath. Crimp the pressure line with
a pair of hemostats.
6.
Reset the Analyzer to initiate a mini-Prime cycle and fill the reagent reservoirs, or select
F31 to prime all the reagent reservoirs.
PN 4277219B
7.
If the backwash and sheath tanks are not completely full, select F16 as often as necessary
to fill them.
8.
Select F67 twice to prime the reagent lines in the Diluter.
9.
Do a Shutdown cycle and a Startup cycle, resetting the Analyzer after each cycle.
10. Remove the pickup tubes from the distilled water, dry them off with paper towels, and
place the pickup tubes in acetic acid.
11. At the reagent reservoir manifold:
a.
Remove all the reagent reservoir float assemblies and dry them with paper towels.
b.
Suction the water out of each reservoir with a syringe and dry up any residual water
with paper towels.
c.
Reinstall the float assemblies.
12. Reset the Analyzer to initiate a mini-Prime cycle and fill the reagent reservoirs, or select
13. If the backwash and sheath tanks are not completely full, select F16 as often as necessary
to fill them.
14. Select F67 twice to prime the reagent lines in the Diluter.
15. Do a Shutdown cycle and a Startup cycle three times. You may need to reset the Analyzer
after any flow cell clog errors.
16. Leave the acetic acid in the Diluter for a minimum of 5 hours.
Rinsing the Diluter
1.
Remove all the pickup tubes from the acetic acid and select F68 to drain the acetic acid
from the Diluter. Leave the function activated for 5 minutes, then reset the Analyzer to
stop the function.
2.
Dry off the pickup tubes with paper towels and place the pickup tubes in fresh distilled
water.
3.
Remove the sweep-flow reservoir, VC29, and install a new one.
4.
Select F20 several times to drain and flush the sheath tank.
5.
At the reagent reservoir manifold:

a.
Remove all the reagent reservoir float assemblies and dry them with paper towels.
b.
Suction all the acetic acid out of each reservoir with a syringe and dry up any
residual acetic acid with paper towels.
c.
Reinstall the float assemblies.
6.
Reset the Analyzer to initiate a mini-Prime cycle and fill the reagent reservoirs, or select
7.
to fill them.
8.
9.
Select each of the following functions twice to ensure each pump is rinsed with distilled
water: F02, F14, F15, F17, F18, and F19.
10. Do a Shutdown cycle and a Startup cycle four times. You may need to reset the Analyzer
after any flow cell clog errors.
PN 4277219B
5.3-5
11. Remove all the pickup tubes from the distilled water, dry them off with paper towels, and
position the pickup tubes so that they will not be contaminated.
12. Select F68 to drain the distilled water out of the Diluter. Leave the function activated for
15 minutes to dry the lines, then reset the Analyzer to stop the function.
13. Power down the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
14. Return the waste output line to its original location.
15. Reconnect the pressure tubing to the CBC lytic reagent pump.
Installing New Reagents and Checking the Analytical Station
1.
Open new containers of all the reagents and install the pickup tubes in the containers.
2.
Power up the Analytical Station and wait until it reaches the READY state.
3.
Select F31 to prime all the reagent reservoirs.
4.
to fill them.
5.
6.
Do three Shutdown cycles.
7.
Do three Startup cycles.
8.
Verify all background counts are acceptable.
9.
Do a CBC latex verification as directed under Heading 4.9
10. Do a LATRON control check for the diff parameters.

11. Run 5C cell controls and Retic-C controls.
12. Do a reproducibility check as directed under Heading 5.6. During the reproducibility
run:
5.3-6
a.
Remove the diluent pickup tube from its container to generate a diluent out error.
b.
Place the diluent pickup tube back in its container and reset the Analyzer.
c.
Ensure the Analytical Station resumes normal operation.
PN 4277219B
WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
5.4

Purpose
Use this procedure to verify that all the aspiration and test modes of the instrument report the
same results for the same whole-blood specimen.
Do not use this procedure to check reproducibility, or to adjust mode-to-mode matching. Use
the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, to check reproducibility. Use the MANUAL
MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION procedure, Heading 4.11, to adjust
mode-to-mode matching.
If the laboratory does not use all the test modes, select at least four test modes to run or
increase the number of samples for a minimum of 16 results.
B Three 5-mL tubes of fresh, normal, whole blood (same donor) drawn into EDTA - One
tube is needed to test three modes.
B Three 5-mL empty, red-stoppered tubes without anticoagulant
Procedure
1.
Pool the three tubes of whole blood, mix the pooled specimen well and pour equal
portions into the three empty red-top tubes.
2.
At the Analyzer, set the number of aspirations per tube to 4.
3.
At the Workstation, select the reproducibility option:
a.
Select
b.
Select PRECISION at the Command Center.
tt
to display the Precision screen. See Figure 5.4-1.
Figure 5.4-1 Precision Screen
PN 4277219B
5.4-1
4.
Cycle the pooled specimen four times in each mode being tested. Use the following as a
guide.
Tube No.
1
5.
Test Mode
Aspiration Mode
CBC/DIFF/RETIC
Automatic
CBC/RETIC
Automatic
CBC/RETIC
Manual
CBC/DIFF
Automatic
CBC ONLY
Automatic
CBC ONLY
Manual
CBC/DIFF/RETIC
Manual
CBC/DIFF
Manual
Verify the parameter %CV and Diff values are within the parameter test limits specified
in Table A.1-11, and the diff and retic cell counts are within the minimum good count
Note: Results that are outside the limits are displayed in red.
6.
5.4-2
If any parameter does not meet the criteria:

a.
Determine if the cause is due to a particular test and/or aspiration mode.
b.
Correct the problem.
c.
Repeat the test.
PN 4277219B
PRECISION VERIFICATION
5.5
Purpose
Use this procedure to verify the reproducibility (precision) of the results in either aspiration
mode and for any test mode.
B Fresh normal, whole blood. Determine the quantity needed based on the number of test
modes to be run. Use one 5-mL tube for each test mode.
Procedure
1.
At the Workstation, select the Precision screen:
a.
Select
b.
Select PRECISION at the Command Center.
tt
to display the Reproducibility screen. See Figure 5.5-1.
Figure 5.5-1 Precision Screen
2.
3.
PN 4277219B
Select the test mode.

r
On the GENS System, select the test mode at the Analyzer.
On the LH 750 System, select the test mode at the Workstation.
Cycle the blood:

r
If you are using the Automatic mode, set the number of aspirations per tube to 11.
If you are using the Manual mode, cycle 11 samples from the specimen tube,
keeping the tube well mixed.
5.5-1
4.
Delete the first sample, which is a prime, from the table.
5.
Check the data and verify:

a.
The parameter %CV and Diff values are within the parameter test limits specified in
Table A.1-11.
Note: Results that are out of limits are displayed in red.
b.
6.
5.5-2
No parameters are trending. A trend could indicate a plug in the needle vent line.
If any parameter does not meet the criteria:

a.
Correct the problem.
b.
Repeat the test.
PN 4277219B
DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION
5.6

Purpose
Use this procedure after performing any procedure that affects the Diff or Retic module to
verify proper operation of the instrument.
The Diff Analog Pulses Test verifies proper operation of the DIFF PROCESSOR and ANALOG
cards by checking the electronic circuitry used to place a pulse in the correct V, C and S
channels.
B LATRON primer
B LATRON control
B RF Preamp Dummy Load, PN 6858098
B Fresh, normal, whole-blood specimens
Procedure
PN 4277219B
1.
Press START UP and verify the results displayed on the Daily Checks screen passed, and
the Daily Check Details screen are within specifications.
2.
Run LATRON primer and control material.

a.
Verify the LATRON primer results are within the limits specified in Table A.1-17.
b.
Verify the control material results are within acceptable limits.
3.
Do a DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST as directed under Heading 4.4. Verify the results are
within the specifications given under Table A.1-9.
4.
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION in the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode as directed

under Heading 5.5 and verify the results are acceptable.
5.
If the results of each step are within limits, the diff and retic verification has passed.
5.6-1
5.6-2
PN 4277219B
POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION
5.7

Purpose
Use this procedure after servicing the Power Supply in the Analytical Station to verify the
Power Supply is operating correctly.
Procedure
WARNING Contacting exposed electronic components while the Analytical Station is connected to power
can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down the Analytical Station completely as directed
under Heading 4.1 before removing the cover of the Power Supply.
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
Remove the Power Supply cover.
3.
Check the Power Supply connections, fans and filters:

a.
Ensure that all the cables and pneumatic lines inside and at the rear of the Power
Supply are secure.
b.
Ensure the fans are free of debris and the intake filter is clean and properly installed.
4.
Reinstall the Power Supply cover, being careful not to crimp any tubing or cables.
5.
Power up the Analytical Station and ensure no system messages are displayed.
6.
Check the System Controller Display on the Power Supply and verify:
r
The AC LINE reading is >90.
The 60 PSI, 30 PSI, 5 PSI and VACUUM readings are within the ranges listed in
Table A.1-13. Adjust the pressure regulators as needed.
The four status indicators are green, indicating the ac input, the dc output, the
pneumatic outputs and the Power Supply temperatures are within tolerance.
7.
Verify the LEDs on the APS1 and APS2 cards are green, indicating the voltages are within
limits.
8.
At the Analyzer, check the voltages on the SERVICE MENU, DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS
SCREENs:
a.
From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt

ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES.
b.
Verify the displayed voltages are within limits.
c.
Select ZAP to turn on the zap voltages and verify they are within limits.
d.
Return to the DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS screen, and select

VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES.
e.
Verify the displayed voltages are within limits.
f.
If any of the displayed voltages are out of limits, correct the problem, then repeat
this procedure.
5.7-1
9.
At the Analyzer MAIN MENU, turn off the pneumatics and ensure:
a.
The compressor turns off.
b.
The Analyzer display clears.
c.
The pneumatic readings on the System Power Controller Display drop to zero.
Note: The display may be 00, 00.1 or LLL.
10. On the Diluter keypad, press PRIME APERT to turn on the pneumatics.
5.7-2
PN 4277219B
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION
5.8

Purpose
Use this procedure after adjusting or replacing any of the components in the cassette
transport assembly to verify the cassette transport assembly is operating correctly.
B 12 cassettes - Use the types commonly used on the instrument.
B Twelve 5-mL empty red top tubes with bar-code labels
Procedure
1.
Place all 12 empty cassettes in the loading bay.
2.
Observe the transporting process as the cassettes are moved from the loading bay to the
unloading bay and ensure:
Each cassette is lowered onto the rocker bed smoothly without causing the
remaining cassettes to become misaligned.
b.
Only one cassette is lowered at a time.
c.
Cassettes are transported to the unloading bay.
d.
No error codes are generated.
3.
If any cassette falls or generates an error, correct the problem and repeat steps 1 and 2.
4.
After the last cassette is placed in the unloading bay, press STOP.
5.
Remove all cassettes from the instrument.
6.
Fill one cassette with the bar-code labeled tubes, with the bar-code labels facing up.
7.
Using F86, do the Transport Test:
8.
PN 4277219B
a.
a.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F86, TRANSPORT TEST.
b.
Place the filled cassette in the loading bay and ensure the cassette is lowered onto
the rocker bed correctly.
c.
Ensure each tube is detected and the stripper plate grabs the tube correctly.
d.
Ensure the cassette is unloaded correctly.
e.
When finished, press STOP.
Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST as directed under Heading 4.49.
5.8-1
5.8-2
PN 4277219B
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.9
The recommended schedule for component replacement and inspection in the GENS System
and the GENS Cell is outlined in the PMI PROCEDURE COULTER GENS, PN 9023723.
A copy of that form is included at the end of this chapter for your convenience. Make copies
as needed.
A recommended schedule for component replacement and inspection in the LH 750 System
and the LH 750 Cell is not available.
PN 4277219B
5.9-1
5.9-2
PN 4277219B
BECKMAN COULTER Inc.
PMI PROCEDURE
COULTER GENS
Part number: 9023723

Revision: A
Preventative Maintenance on this product is an annual process. This document outlines the checks and actions
that are required to complete the annual process. The frequency of PM visits required to complete this process
will range from one to two depending on access to the product, customer preference, instrument workload and
Service Engineer technical recommendation.
CHECK TO CONFIRM COMPLETION
VISIT #
1.
Preliminary Checks
2.
Discuss with customer for any known instrument problems.

Run start up. Verify instrument cycle, and start up results.
Run Controls. Verify results against customers expected limits.
Preventative Maintenance
Review and implement any outstanding Service Memos.
Parts Replacement
Diluter
All silicone tubing, right and left panels.

All silicone tubing, centre.
All silicone tubing, lower front/rear.
All X & T fittings, retic & aspirate tubing on retic module.
Replace Diff mixing chamber and sample lines
Inspect for Damage. Replace as Necessary

Diluter
Check valves.
Polyurethane tubing.
All pinch valves and mounts.
Pumps and dispensers.
Aperture modules, aperture blocks, O rings and baths.
BSV mechanism.
Mixing motor belts.
Vacuum and waste chambers
Power Supply
White Polyflo tubing.
3.
Cleaning as required
Internal and external surfaces.

Waste chambers.
Rocker bed.
Manual rinse trough.
Hgb cuvette.
BSV.
Wash/wipe probe sensors.
Rocker bed sensor.
Needle and bellows.
Vacuum system/vacuum trap.
Analyzer

CRT display.
Filter.
Power Supply
4.

Filters.
Final Test and Verification
Run shut down and start up to check for correct cycling and leaks
Verify start up tests.
Run and verify Latron results
Perform precision verification in Primary and Secondary modes
Perform and verify mode to mode testing
Refer to GEN*S Service Manual 4237253

for calibration procedures, adjustments and tolerances.
The handling of electronics components must only be carried out while using the ESD Kit.
Cycle Count:
Visit 1: ...................................
PMI Completion Date:
Visit 2: ...................................
Visit 1: ............................................
Visit 2: ............................................
Instrument:
................................................
Serial No:
.....................................................................
Account :
............................................................................................................................................................
Signature and Employee # of CSS:..................................................................................................................................

COPY TO BE LEFT WITH INSTRUMENT
CONTENTS
6
SCHEMATICS, 6.1-1
6.1
PN 4277219B
SCHEMATICS INCLUDED, 6.1-1
6-i
CONTENTS
6-ii
PN 4277219B
6SCHEMATICS 6
6.1
SCHEMATICS INCLUDED
This chapter contains the engineering schematics you need for troubleshooting the Analytical
Station. The schematic revision levels were current on the date this revision of the manual
was released. They will be updated again to the latest revision level whenever this manual is
revised.
Because the engineering schematics are simply inserted into the document and are not
assigned page numbers or figure numbers, they are not included in the table of contents or
the index. In the text they are referenced by their name and document control number
(DCN).
The schematics are inserted into this chapter in the following order:
.
System
Name
DCN
GENS System Cable Interconnect
6322764
GENS Pneumatic/Hydraulic
6321104
GENS System Signal Interconnect
6323227
Digital Backplane
6321404
Analog Backplane
6321405
Backplane Interconnect
6321403
LH 750 Pneu/Hydr
6323685
LH 750 System Signal Interconnect (not

available at the time of publication)
6323775
Digital Backplane
6323711
Analog Backplane
6323710
Pneu/Hydr Layout, Power Supply
6321598
CRT Backplane
6321402
GENS System
LH 750 System
Common
PN 4277219B
6.1-1
SCHEMATICS
6.1-2
PN 4277219B
1
REVI S I ONS
REV
A
B
C
D
E
D
DES
CRIPTION
PCN
DWG. GENER
E ATED,SAR# 02801534
MISC. CLEA
AN-UP SAR# 02801876
RELEASED
NUMEROUS
S DOC. UPDATES
MISC. UPDATES
DRAWING & TEMPLATES UPDATED
DATE
BY
29AUG95
028020-0192
028030-0428
028040-0548
REFE
ER TO CPDM
RTD
T
CHKR APPVL
FS
RDV
O9AUG96
LM
MG LMG DB
APPROVED
S. VARGAS CPDM APPROVAL
D
System Reset
ANALYZER
5104036
6028509
J26
FAN1
Thermister
J25
ANALOG BACKPLANE
A 6859177
CRT BACKPLANE
A 6859178
DIGITAL BACKPLANE
A 68
859176
2603068
A 68
859178
A 6859175
FAN2
Thermister
Backplane
ct
interconnec
POWER
Backplane
rconnect
inter
J22
SYSTEM
INTERF
INSTUMENT
BUS
J27
POWERSUPPLY
48V
J19
2603068
SDL
J24
6028496
3
PNEUMATIC
P.S.
6028709
50
SHEET 5
6028481
50
6028080
6
SHEET 5
Sheet 2
602878
84
L
6028785
ELECTRONIC
P.S.
Sheet3
6028497
50
INTCON5.SCH
16
6028620
SYS
Y TEM INTERFACE
GEN*S
IB
BUS
0.5M
GEN*S-1
H
ROLL AROUND P.S. UNIT

IBUS
50
IBUS
6028498
1.0M
60
028660
DB15
15
WORKSTATION
6028609
MULTIPORT
SERIAL
CARD CABLE
SDL
D
F
GEN*S-2
SHEET 3
SHEET 2
HOST-1
SHEET 4
HOST-2
GEN*S SM
60
6028656
6805286
INTCON2.SCH
I TCON3.SCH
IN
6028498
50
SHEET 4
DILUTER
Sl
lide Maker
INTCON4.SCH
ORCAD VER. 386 Plu
us
ENG.FILE CONTROL
PROJECT N0. 028030
0
SHEET
FILE NAME
See 6321624
1
2
3
4
5
A
NOTES: UNLE
ESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
INTCON1.SCH
INTCON1.SCH
INTCON1.SCH
INTCON1.SCH
INTCON1.SCH
COULTER CORPORATION
ORIGIN
NATOR:
MIAMI, FLORIDA
1.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS DRAWING:

"A" INDICATES THE ASSEMBLY NUMBER,
2.
LETTERS IN CIRCLES ARE USED TO CONNEC

E T
HARNESS OR CABLES FROM SHEET TO SHEET.
E
3.
U. S. A.
RODRIGO ZAPATA
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECT
WIREMARKERS ARE INDICATED AS A BOX WITH "wm"

FOLLOW
WED BY THE WIREMARKER NUMBER
E . NOT ALL
WIREMARKERS ARE SHOWN.
Size
THIS DRAWING AND/OR SPECIFICATION

IS THE PROP
PERTY OF COULTER CORPORATION , IS ISSUED
IN STRICT CONFIDENCE,
AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR USED AS THE BASIS
FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OF APPARATUS,
WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMIS
SSION.
Doc
cument Number
D
Date:
REV
6322764
January 19, 1998
E
Sheet
of
TO/FROM DIGITAL BACKPLANE

SYSTEM INTERFACE
0.5M
50
6028709
0.5M
50
6028481
1.0M
50
6028498
15
6028660
16
6028620
TO/FROM DIGITAL BACKPLANE

IBUS
TO/FROM DILUTER CABLE

L ADAPTER
H
TO/FROM ADMS
DMS
TO/FROM DILUTER 3 I/O

IBUS
6706373
LASER REF
DC/DC
CONV
LASER
J1
2x8
J3
DB15
J8
IBUS
J6
IBUS
J2
SYSTEM INTERFACE
HGB,PRESS,TEMP
J5
P5
6859622
J4
P4
2X5
5
J1
P1
A 6706203
RS/OPTO INTF
J7
7
1
MOD4
IBUS
J9
P9
6701652
THESE CABLES ARE

BUNDLED TOG
T
ETHER
P5
J5
9D
HGB
PRE-AMP
0.5M
6028481
50
4 PIN
CIRCULAR
P V T CARD
3
6859474
A 6859703
6706013
P1
J1
6859777
(ASSY IN RF BOX)
6028510
CA0361
48V POWER FROM BUSBARS

7
P4
J4
P2
J2
3X1
DIFF P.S.
J5
A 6705994
J106
3
P5
5
P69
12
2X5
J6
P6
2X3
J3
P3
10
RF DET
PRE-AMP6
3x5
LASER INTERLOCK SW 5120035
CABLE 6858119
J69
3X3
3
J73
P73
SDL
LS
DETECTOR
6805509
J67
COAXIAL
6857192
P78
J78
BNC
C
CON4
J104
P104
Ambient
Temperature
Thermistor
P62
J62
E1
E2
E4
E3
P4
J4
LS PRE-AMP-4
6706302
1X3
1X4
J6
P6
4
TO/FROM DIGITAL BACKPL
LANE
K
SDL
6028080
6805052
FLOWCELL
6706458
6805286
4
TO/FROM SENSOR
DISTR
RIBUTION
2
6028691
10
P2
J2
P9
J9
J3
CON4
J4
1X4
A/T HGG
NOT USED
J1
IBUS
J6
DILUTE
ER 1
A 6706002
P6
P2
6028659
25
RS485
2X5
J2
WELCH
ALLEN
DECODER
A2016238
P1 P20
P37
6859437
10
J37
BAR CODE
SCANNER
6858081
A 6859783
P7
4
J7
6028785
CON26
DB25
MOD10
1
MOD10
NOT
O USED
CON3
MMNL
GND
9PIN
9
J8
AUX
GND
2x30
J5
P5
TO/FROM SENSOR DISTRIBUTION

6028656
60
COULT
TER CORPORATION
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM
M CABLE INTERCONNECT
Size
Document Number
D
Date:
REV
6322764
January 19, 1998
E
Sheet
of
680550
08
P3
J3
1x3
MMNL
J4
Ambient
Temperature
Thermistor
P4
E2
E
E1
E3
E
E4
1X3
DILUTER 4
TO/FROM RS OPTO INTF
H
6028498
1.0M
IBUS
TO/FROM ELEC. P.S.

J
J4
50
6028497
2.0M
50
IBUS
DILUTER J3
CABLE
ADAPTER
J2
6028481
0.5M
IBUS
50
J1
P1
A 6706368
6805198
IBUS
J1
A 6706036
PELTIER
MODULE
2X3
J7
J4
P5
J5
6805082
J1
P4
J2
P2
J5
P5
6028685
20
DILUTER 2
J1
4
2X10
3X3
3
MMNL
2X10
2X5
STAIN
HEATER
6805304
IBUS
J30
J8
P2
J2
3x5
48V POWER FROM BUSBARS
J1
1
J10
1x3
MMNL
A 6706003
RS485
FRONT
A 6859783
P4
P2
J3
REAR
2x5
2x5
3x3
J3
P3
TO/FROM RS OPTO INTF

6028620
TO/FROM CABSM
I
10
6805083
PROBE WIPE
INT-CONN
50
P1
6028498
1.0M
50
MF3
2x13
16
6028481
0.5M
BLOOD
DETECTOR
MATCHED
SET
6859506
J2
6028690
10
A 6705993
5 DIFF
HEATER
J1
2x5
SOL/Optics PS
J4
LIGHT BAR
ASSEMBLY
(OPTIONAL)
A 6859510
6028784
P1
J1
6859436
J2
J6
P6
P2
A 6706382
3505048
Probe Wipe Motor
6805072
26
J2
CABSMBUS
2X5
6028655
2X5
P1
J1
OTON
ISO
OPTO SWITCH
J9
6859348
J3
3
2x13
3
PROBE WIPE UP
4818006
OPTO SWITCH
CLENZ
3
J10
6859348
PROBE WIPE DOWN

4818006
IBUS
J1
6859521
J2
J13
J1
J7
2x8
MNML
SOL96
E ERVOIR
RES
IN
NTERFACE
MF3
A 6706198
J4
E
PAK LYSE
2
J2
J8
6859521
6028618
DILUTER 3
S0L75
J5
J3
RS485
PAK QUEN
NCH
6859521
SOL42
6859521
SOL110
6859521
SOL1
6859521
SOL2
J12
6859348
A6859371
A 6706157
A 6859783
J16
P16
SOL21
1X4
NOMF2
DISTRIBUTED
SOLENOID MAIN
NOMF1
MF13
2x8
J12
P12
MF11
2x7
J3
P3
6232744
16
6805079
MF6
2x7
J4
P4
6028658
14
MF9
2x7
J5
P5
6028616
14
MF16
2x7
J6
P6
6028615
14
MF17
2x5
J11
P11
6028617
14
MF18
2x5
J10
P10
6028619
10
J4
2
SOL RIGHT
FRONT
2
NO
OMF1
2
2x8
J
J15
P
P15
P11
J11
P11
J11
P11
J11
P11
J11
J13
J6
J7
GHOST
MIXING
MOTOR
DIFF
J10
P10
14 VALVE
ASSY
10 VALVE
10 VALVE
10
0 VALVE
10 VALVE
4 VALVE
6859521
SOL68
6859521
SOL69
J8
SOL 14
SOL 53
J/P18
SOL 18
J/P10
LYSE 3 DIFF
I
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
SOL35
SOL38
SOL36
SOL111
SOL29
SOL28
SOL26
SOL27
SOL34
SOL88
SOL64
SOL30
SOL23
SOL37
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
SOL46
SOL45
SOL47
SOL3
SOL31
SOL57
SOL49
SOL51
SOL54
SOL55
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
SOL16
SOL67
SOL6
SOL12
SOL4
SOL13
SOL15
SOL17
SOL108
SOL48
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
SOL5
SOL105
SOL7
SOL8
SOL82
SOL43
SOL39
SOL40
SOL10
SOL11
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
SOLENOID LISTS INDICATE THE ASSIGNMENT

OF CONNECTORS FOR EACH EACH MANIFOLD
SOL59
SOL89
SOL97
SOL80
SOL93
SOL99
SOL44
SOL76
SOL98
SOL56
J1
J2
J3
J4
SOL95
SOL58
6859348
6805075
SOL22
P16
6
SOL24
680
05636
6805011
2
J35
P35
J11
SOL41
SOL50
SOL52
LOL65
SOL62
J66
6
J12
J40
J39
P40
P39
6805077
SOL25
BACKWASH
RESE
ERVOIR
SHEATH
RESERVOIR
P92
SOL 60
WASTE
S
CONTAINER
J13
M
MIXING
MOTOR
RETIC
J92
P36
SOL9
13 VALVE
INTERFACE
MF4
P66
6859790
6805074
J16
J9
6805076
SOL 33
J15
J10
SOL 20
J8
P/O OF
RETICS
MODULE
SOL94
6859348
J7
2X3
6859514
J14
J/P14
SOL 63
P73
DB9
6
6859366
SOL 19
6859348
J73
6028
8657
9
P5
J5
2
STAIN
J5
J/P13
J6
A 6706190
13
SOL 61
6859348
J14
MF4
2x7
J11
COULT
TER CORPORATION
SOL92
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM
M CABLE INTERCONNECT
Size
Document Number
D
Date:
REV
6322764
January 19, 1998
E
Sheet
of
TO/FROM P V T CARD
4
TO/FROM DILUTER 1 I/O

60
6028656
6805286
DISPLAY MODULE 6805302

P5
J5
2x30
P9
J9
1X4
KEYBOARD AND DISPLA

I
Y INTERFACE
SENSOR DISTRIBUTIO
I N
J1
P1
P1
J1
A 6705957
40
A 6706196
2x20
6859432
2x20
J2
P2
J5
P5
J3
6859438
14
2x3
J2
1x4
J6
P6
2x8
J8
P8
2x7
J3
P3
2x7
J10
P10
CON2
J4
P4
6859781
6
SENSOR LEFT
CENTER
DILUTER RIGHT
SENSORS
2 COAX
12
P1
J1
2X7
6028533
16 RIBBON
6859393
BED POSITION
SENSORS
ROCKER
BED
HGB LAMP HARNESS

EXTENSION
6859467
15
2x5
J7
P7
6805221
6859435
MEMBRANE
KEYPAD
2016587
LCD DISPLAY
BOARD
6805232
P36
J36
6854610
COAX P11
J11
P/N 6805089
SCANNER
POSITION
J13
CENTER
FRONT
SENSOR
To VC22
P15
VAC
OVERFLOW
CHAMBER
wm
4
6859427
BELLOWS EXTENDED
NEEDLE UP
P32
J11
1X3
P11
wm
3
P/N 5116004
FRONT DOOR
INTERLOCK
P/N 6855620
P
RIG
GHT STACK LOADED
wm
2
P/N 5120106
TOP LEFT
SAFETY
P/N 5120106
P
T P RIGHT SAFETY
TO
P/N 6859260
TUBE IN POSITION
(TUBE SENSOR)
(U3)
)
P/N 4818006
BED IS
HORIZONTAL
COAX
BELLOWS RETRACTED
NEE
EDLE DOWN
COAX
P/N 5120106
STRIPPER PLATE
POSITION
(U2)
)
P/N 4818006
BED IS FORWARD
J32
P16
(U4)
)
P/N 4818006
BED IS
BACKWARD
FRONT COVER OPEN

INTERLO
OCK RQRS A
MAGNET
T ACTUATOR
P/N 5111192
6859611
3
P/N 5120105
UNDER RIGHT STACK
COAX
P/N 5120035
UNDER LEFT STACK
HAND DETECTOR
P/N 5120035
LEF
FT LIFT UP
P/N 5120035
RIG
GHT LIFT UP
HGB LAMP
SOURCE
P33
3
P/N 5104077
MANUAL MODE
START
6859621
J33
1X3
P/N 6805597
PROBE POSITION
(MANUAL PROBE
POSITION SENSOR)
(PROBE IN)
COULTER CORPORATION
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM CABLE INTER
T
CONNECT
Size
Document Number
D
Date:
REV
6322764
January 19, 1998
E
Sheet
h
of
SPC DISPLAY
COMP/VACUUM
ASSY
COMPRESSOR/VACUUM
CONTROLLER BOARD
A 6705962
A 6859181
A 3505052
J1
P1
10
10
6028523
30
J8
MNL
1X3
P8
J9
P9
5
6959381
2X3
MMNL
P3
J3
P7
Also P/O the chassis

ground connection
at the Bulk Supply
on this page.
2 POS
MMNL
4
POWER
P16
CONTR.
RS485
(SPC)
J
6028497
J16
2X2
A 6859783
J4
P4
P11
A 6706038
50
60284
496
J7
P1 J1
48V OUT
SYSTEM
J5
J4
3X3
IBUS
6011024
1X3
J15
J13
E1
DC
FILTER
3X5
J5
P5
P13
J11
2X3
MNL
P15
wm
5
J6
P6
P26
A 6706158
1
SOL
1X3
J10
6859421
POWER
SUPPLY
LOGIC
CONTROLLER
wm
18
1
TRANSIENT
VOLTAGE
SUPRESSOR
2X3
J1
14
2X3
J12
P10
P14
P12
wm
6
wm
7
FILTER
BOARD
IN
NPUT
6706495
wm
17
68
859383
14
4
LEFT PANEL
(CIRCUIT
BREAKER)
5101029
6859378
2
7
AC INPUT #1
AC
PWR
IN
"1"
wm
10
wm
12
J17
3X4
J18
2X3
J19
2X3
"W"
wm
11
wm
13
wm
1
wm
2
J20
2X3
BULK
SUPPLY
"G"
2
wm
14
E2
2
2
wm
25/26
wm
21/22
wm
w
23/2
24
Thermister
wm
19
6859377
FAN
J21
2
FAN1
P21
2
2603068
wm
20
A 6805774
E3
NOTE: BOTH THER

E MISTERS
ATTACH TO A ST
TUD AT E3
wm
15
Thermister
wm
9
J22
FAN2
P22
wm
16
2603068
wm
8
P/O
6959381
E1
COULTER CORPORATION
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECT
Size
Document Number
D
Date:
REV
632
22764
January 19, 1998
E
Sheet
of
BB
AD D E D N O TE O N S H EE T 4.
U P D A T E D P 9 P IN O U T OONN SSHHEHEEETT 22.
REFER TO
CPDM
EJ .D F DE ER LNGAAN DDOE Z A P P R O V E D
CPDM APPRO VAL
B
B
AD D E D N O TE O N SH EE T 4
REFER TO
CPD M
E D D E LG AD O AP PR O V ED
C P D M AP PR O V AL
REFER TO
CPD M
REFER TO
CPD M
N O T IN S T A L L E D I N A L L S Y S T E M S .
(W IL L N O T IM P A C T S Y S T E M P E R F O R M A N C E ).
REFER TO
CPD M
AD D E D N O TE TO SH E E T 4
REFER TO
CPD M
E D D E LG AD O A P PR O V ED
C P M APP R O V AL
AD D ED N O TE TO SH E E T 4
REFER TO
CPD M
AD D E D N O TE TO SH E E T 4
REFER TO
CPD M
REFER TO
CPD M
REFER TO
CPD M
AD D ED N O TE TO SH E E T 4
REFER TO
CPD M
CONTENTS
7
TROUBLESHOOTING, 7.1-1
7.1
ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.1-1

System Alarms, 7.1-1
Analytical Station Messages, 7.1-1
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Analytical Station
Messages, 7.1-1
About the Tables of Analytical Station Messages Under Heading 7.2, 7.1-2
Workstation Messages, 7.1-3
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Workstation
Messages, 7.1-3
About the Tables of Workstation Messages Under Heading 7.3, 7.1-3
7.2
TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES, 7.2-1
7.3
TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.3-1
7.4
TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS, 7.4-1

Summary, 7.4-1
48 Volts Failure Isolation, 7.4-5
Procedure, 7.4-5
7.5
FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2, 7.5-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
7.4-1
7.4-2

TABLES
PN 4277219B
7.2-1
7.2-2
7.2-3
7.2-4
7.2-5
7.2-6
7.2-7
7.2-8
7.2-9
7.2-10
7.2-11
7.2-12
7.2-13
7.2-14
7.2-15
7.2-16
System Messages - Symbols and Numbers, 7.2-1

System Messages - A, 7.2-2
System Messages - B, 7.2-7
System Messages - C, 7.2-9
System Messages - D, 7.2-11
System Messages - E through G, 7.2-17
System Messages - H, 7.2-19
System Messages - I through K, 7.2-21
System Messages - L, 7.2-22
System Messages - M through O, 7.2-26
System Messages - P through Q, 7.2-28
System Messages - R, 7.2-32
System Messages - S, 7.2-35
System Messages - T through V, 7.2-39
System Messages - U, 7.2-40
System Messages - W through Z, 7.2-41
7.3-1
Workstation Messages - A through B, 7.3-1

7-i
CONTENTS
7.3-2
7.3-3
7.3-4
7.3-5
7.3-7
7.3-8
7.3-9
7.3-13
7.4-1
7.4-2
7.4-3
7.5-1
7-ii
Workstation Messages - C through G, 7.3-2

Workstation Messages - H, 7.3-4
Workstation Messages - I through K, 7.3-7
Workstation Messages - L through N, 7.3-8
Workstation Messages - N, 7.3-9
Workstation Messages - O, 7.3-10
Workstation Messages - P through V, 7.3-13
Workstation Messages - W through Z, 7.3-14
AC Power Timing Sequence, 7.4-1
Instrument Power-On Timing Sequence, 7.4-2
Flow-Cell Errors, 7.5-1
PN 4277219B
7TROUBLESHOOTING 7
7.1
ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION MESSAGES

The instrument automatically monitors many of its activities and conditions and generates
messages to alert the operator when the instrument does not respond as expected.
r
Analytical Station messages are described in the tables under Heading 6.2 in this manual.
Workstation messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.3 in this manual.
SlideMaker messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.2-1 in the Slide Making
Modules Service Manual.
SlideStainer messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.2-1 in the Slide
Staining Modules Service Manual.
The information in these tables was copied from revision R of the GENS System Messages,
PN 0300120, and revision C of the LH 750 System Messages, PN 0304633.
Messages that are logged at the Workstation appear in the following format: date, time,
instrument name, operator name, message.
System Alarms
Many of the error messages are accompanied by an alarm. To reset the alarm:
r
If the alarm is a Diluter-generated alarm, press ALARM RESET.
If the alarm is generated in the SlideMaker, press any key on the SlideMaker screen.
If the alarm is generated by the SlideStainer, click on the traffic light and acknowledge
the error.
Analytical Station Messages

Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Analytical Station Messages
Icons are used to flag certain instrument conditions. In the error message tables, either the
relevant icon or a text description, such as "red light" for the red traffic light icon, is included.
The Instrument icon is displayed on the Command Center when the
Analytical Station is halted.
A red traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when immediate
action is required.
GENS LH 750
System System
Double-clicking on the red traffic light displays the error message and a
button for clearing the error. Double-clicking on the error message displays
the Help topic for that message.
A yellow traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when caution is

required. However, a red light supersedes a yellow light. (For example, if
another condition occurs that triggers a red light, the red light is displayed
LH 750 until that condition is resolved, then the yellow light appears.)
GENS
System System
PN 4277219B
Double-clicking on the yellow traffic light displays the warning message.

Double-clicking on the warning message displays the Help topic for that
message.
7.1-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
About the Tables of Analytical Station Messages Under Heading 7.2

The Analytical Station messages, with their probable causes and corrective actions, are
arranged alphabetically by Analyzer message.
Note: These error message tables contain the same information given to the instrument
operators, plus more. Leaving the statement call your Beckman Couter Representative in
the corrective action, lets you know how much a customer is expected to do before calling.
Several Analytical Station messages are listed with an and condition. For those messages:
r
If the error occurs while the instrument is idle or ready to pierce, the Analyzer only
displays the first message.
If the error occurs while the instrument is running, the Analyzer displays the first
message and then replaces it with the second message. The second message is always
Diluter Error or Non-Diluter Error.
To locate the appropriate corrective actions in the System Message tables for Diluter Error
and Non-Diluter Error messages, use the message on the Diluter screen; it usually
mirrors the original Analyzer message.
When a message column lists current status instead of a specific message, one of the
following Analyzer status messages is displayed:
:
ACTIVE
GENS INITIALIZING/RAW
READ HGB
ANALYZE
INTRO SAMPLE
READY
ASPIRATE SAMPLE
MANUAL MODE
RETICS BACKWASH
AUTOCLEARING
NOT READY
RETICS COUNT
BACKWASH
PERFORMING CLEANUP
RETICS PRIME
CBC/DIFF PRIME
PERFORMING RECOUNT
RINSE
CHECKING PRESSURES
PREPARING SAMPLE
SYSTEM FAULT
COUNT
PRIME
VERSION 1E/GENS
COUNT COMPLETED
RAW DATA DUMP
XMIT IN PROGRESS
DATA ACCEPT
The Analytical Station messages are referenced in the index.
7.1-2
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Workstation Messages
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Workstation Messages
Icons are used to flag certain instrument conditions. In the error message tables, either the
relevant icon or a text description, such as "red light" for the red traffic light icon, is included.
The Patient icon is displayed on the Command Center when patient sample
results are pending to be reviewed for validation in the review folder.
The Host Communication icon is displayed on the Command Center when
sample transmissions are pending to be transmitted and the LIS/HIS is not
responding.
The XB icon is displayed on the Command Center when the last XB batch is
outside limits.
The QC icon is displayed on the Command Center when the last control
run is outside limits.
The Printer icon is displayed on the Command Center when sample reports
are pending to be printed and the Printer is not ready.
The Instrument icon is displayed on the Command Center when the
Analytical Station is halted.
The Database icon is displayed on the Command Center when database
storage is not functional.
A red traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when immediate
action is required.
GENS LH 750
System System
Double-clicking on the red traffic light displays the error message and a
button for clearing the error. Double-clicking on the error message displays
the Help topic for that message.
A yellow traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when caution is

required. However, a red light supersedes a yellow light. (For example, if
another condition occurs that triggers a red light, the red light is displayed
LH 750 until that condition is resolved, then the yellow light appears.)
GENS
System System
Double-clicking on the yellow traffic light displays the warning message.

Double-clicking on the warning message displays the Help topic for that
message.
About the Tables of Workstation Messages Under Heading 7.3

The Workstation messages, with their probable causes and corrective actions, are arranged
alphabetically.
Note: These error message tables contain the same information given to the instrument
operators, plus more. Leaving the statement call your Beckman Couter Representative in
the corrective action, lets you know how much a customer is expected to do before calling.
PN 4277219B
7.1-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Not all Workstation messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.2. Some messages
appear from the Windows NT operating system and other software packages that are
included on the Workstation. Because these messages may not be logged or have online help
for them, you should write them down.
If the Workstation is connected to a network, some messages may be caused by the network
configuration. If a local network administrator or Windows NT administrator is available,
contact the administrator for help resolving the problem.
The Workstation messages are referenced in the index.
7.1-4
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES
7.2

Table 7.2-1 System Messages - Symbols and Numbers
Analytical Station
Analyzer
Analyzer Alert Message Status Message
Diluter/Numeric
Keypad Message
5 PSI Pressure High
5 PSI
PRESSURE HIGH
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

Icon on Command Center
Event Log (GENS System)
Instrument Log (LH750
System)
Analytical Station Status/Recovery

Sample Results
Analytical Station Status
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Yellow
light
Data displayed.
Beeps- operation continues.
5 psi regulator and/or transducer

defective (pressure >5.2 psi).
1. Adjust 5 psi regulator to 5 0.1 psi. If you cannot

adjust the 5 psi pressure reading, call your Beckman
Coulter Representative.
2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs, call
your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Red
light
Data not transmitted, or data

transmitted and System Alarm
message printed in footer of
sample report (depends upon
when error occurred).
Run stopped.

defective (pressure <4.8 psi)
and/or line leaking.

Red
light
Data not available.
Run stopped.
5C cell control material used in

RETIC ONLY test mode.
1. Change the Analytical Station test mode to CBC or

CBC/DIFF.
2. Process the control.
3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Red
light

Run stopped.

defective (pressure >31 psi).

Red
light

Run stopped.

defective (pressure <29 psi) and/or
line leaking.

Red
light
Data not transmitted.
Stopped - inoperable.
DIFF PROCESSOR card

communication problem.

Representative.
5 PSI pressure too high.

Adjust 5 PSI pressure. If
pressure reading cannot be
adjusted, call Coulter
Customer Operations.
5 PSI Pressure Low
READY
5 PSI
PRESSURE LOW
Yes

System)
5 PSI pressure too low.

5C Not Allowed In This
Mode (GENS System
only)
READY
30 PSI Pressure High
READY
READY
No
Event Log
5C Control material used in

Retic or SUBSET modes.
Reset Analytical Station.
30 PSI
PRESSURE HIGH
Yes

System)
30 PSI pressure too high.

30 PSI Pressure Low
READY
30 PSI
PRESSURE LOW
Yes

System)
30 PSI pressure too low.

286 Board Communication
Error
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
AMC-DIFF communication
failure: 286 board. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B
7.2-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-2 System Messages - A

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
AC Line Voltage Bad
AC LINE
VOLTAGE BAD
READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

Run stopped.
Ac line voltage <90 V limit.
1. Check the ac line voltage reading on the Power Supply.

2. If the voltage is <90 V, ensure the Power Supply is
properly connected to the dedicated wall outlet.
3. If the Power Supply is properly connected, have the
house maintenance person verify the wall outlet is
supplying 90 to 264 Vac.
4. If the wall outlet is supplying 90 to 264 Vac, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative and report your
Analytical Stations current ac reading.
Red
light
Data displayed if available

(depends upon when error
occurred).

interconnect.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed.
Idle - ready for request.
Faulty or disconnected sensor.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Diluter not receiving data from

AMC.

2. If message persists, reseat the AMC.
3. If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Red
light
N/A
Communication error.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Paused until error resolved.
Analyzer needs to stop after an

abnormal condition occurred (for
example, clearing flow cell clogs).

2. If message persists, perform the flow cell unclog
function (for example, F44, F45 or F46).
AC line voltage below 90 Volt

limit.
ACK Not Received By

Diluter
NOT READY
ACK NOT RECEIVED

BY DILUTER
Yes

System)
Communication error with

AMC or interconnect. Reset
Analytical Station.
Ambient Temp Sensor Bad
(current status)
AMBIENT TEMP
SENSOR BAD
Yes

System)
Ambient temperature sensor

defective or disconnected.
AMC Did Not Reply
NOT READY
AMC DID NOT

REPLY
Yes

System)
Diluter not receiving data

from AMC. Reset Analytical
Station.
AMC Never Sent Start
Command
NOT READY
AMC NEVER SENT

START COMMAND
Yes

System)
Communications error. Reset

Analytical Station.
AMC Requested Stop
(current status)
AMC REQUESTED
STOP
No

System)
Analyzer stopped. Reset

Analytical Station. If message
persists, perform flow cell
unclog procedure.
7.2-2
7.2-2
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-2 System Messages - A (Continued)

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Analyzer +48V Bad
ANALYZER +48V BAD
Yes
READY
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

+48 V power to Analyzer outside

5% limit.

2. If message persists:
a. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF for 5
minutes.
b. Verify air filter is clean.
c. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch ON.
Representative.
Red
light

occurred).

Representative.
Red
light

Analyzer fans power supply

defective.

Representative.
Red
light

If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch

is OFF, run continues.
Voltage reading <277 V (measured

at the aperture) or <4.332 V
(measured at the edge connector
of the DIFF PROCESSOR card).

Representative.


Voltage reading <322 V (measured

at the aperture) or <5.045 V
(measured at the edge connector
of the DIFF PROCESSOR card).

Representative.

occurred).

Representative.
48 Volt power outside 10%

limit.
Analyzer Error
and
Non-Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Analyzer Fans Failed
(current status)
ANALYZER ERROR
Yes
and
NOT READY

System)
Communications error. Reset

Analytical Station.
N/A
Yes

System)
Analyzer fans power supply

defective. Reset Analytical
Station.
Aperture Voltage Lower
Failed
(current status)
N/A
Yes
(GENS Instrument Log (LH750
System) System)
No
Aperture voltage reading
(LH750 below limits.
System)
Aperture Voltage Upper

Failed
ASCII Rec. Error
(current status)
NOT READY
N/A
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
(LH750
System
Aperture voltage reading

above Limits.
No

System)
Yellow
light
Red
light

is ON, run is stopped at end
of cycle.

of cycle.
AMC reported error - ASCII

Receive Error. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B
7.2-3
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Aspiration -B-and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
ASPIRATION -B--
Yes
Aspiration ---C
and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
7.2-4
(current status)
Log Message and

Sample Results

System)
r Data is displayed.
r P appears in all parameter
flag fields.
r System Alarm message is
printed in footer of sample
report.
Front sensor detected air

bubbles (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Check sample
volume and rerun.
(current status)
ASPIRATION ---C
Yes
Yellow traffic light is

displayed until AutoStop
condition is reached
Yellow
light
Red traffic light is displayed

when AutoStop condition is
reached.
Red
light

System)

condition is reached.
Yellow
light

reached.
Red
light
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Automatic mode disabled

after three consecutive
aspiration errors. Manual
mode is operable.
Front sensor detected air bubbles.
1. Check the specimen and ensure:

a. The volume was sufficient
b. It does not contain clots or fibrin.
c. It was collected and stored correctly.
2. If the message persists for three consecutive runs,
reset the Analytical Station to continue running
samples in the Automatic mode.
WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which

could contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use
extreme care when inspecting the needle area.
3. If the still message persists:
a. Check the needle for plugs.
b. Ensure the aspiration lines are clean.
c. Troubleshoot the sample flow path for leaks, kinks
or plugs.
4. If the message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative. You can run samples in the Manual
mode.
flag fields.
report.
Diluent front and rear sensors

detected carryover (<Tube
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). Re-run
sample.

mode is operable.
Diluent front and rear sensors

detected carryover.


or plugs.
mode.
7.2-4
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Aspiration N--and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
ASPIRATION N---
Yes
Aspiration --Pand
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
(current status)
Log Message and

System)
flag fields.
report.
ASPIRATION --P-
Yes

Yellow
light

reached.
Red
light
Blood front and rear sensors

detected partial aspiration
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>).
Check sample for sufficient
volume, check needle for
clogs and rerun sample.

reached.
Probable Cause
Corrective Action

mode is operable.
Sensor detected preset blood

threshold failure due to excessive
diluted blood or non-blood sample.

or plugs.
mode.
flag fields.
report.

System)

PN 4277219B
Sample Results
Sensor detected diluted blood

or non-blood sample (<Tube
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). Check
sample and rerun.
(current status)
Yellow
light
Red
light

mode is operable.
Blood front and rear sensors

detected partial aspiration or
diluted blood.

WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which could

contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use extreme
care when inspecting the needle area.
or plugs.
mode.
7.2-5
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Aspiration Timeout
ASPIRATION
TIMEOUT
NOT READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data not transmitted or data

transmitted to Workstation but
flagged (depends upon when
error occurred).
Diluter did not receive message

from Analyzer within 5 seconds of
being ready to pierce in Automatic
mode.
1. Reset the Analytical Station and try to rerun samples in

the Automatic mode.
2. If error recurs, run sample in Manual mode.
Yellow
light

occurred).
Automatic mode disabled;

Manual mode is operable.
Automatic mode error not

resolved.
1. Check the event history log for previous messages that

may affect the Automatic mode.
2. Correct the problems.
4. If unable to correct the problem, or if the message
recurs, call your Beckman Coulter Representative. You
can run samples in the Manual mode.
Data available for the three

consecutive samples.
Run stopped
The Workstation is not ready to

process a sample because:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Aspiration timeout. Reset

Analytical Station to run
samples in Automatic
sampling mode or run
samples in Manual Sampling
mode.
Automatic Mode Disabled
MANUAL MODE
AUTOMATIC MODE
DISABLED
Yes

System)
Automatic sampling mode

disabled. Check previous
messages (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
Autostop - check
Workstation (LH750
System only)
AutoStop Check
Workstation
7.2-6
NOT READY
N/A
Yes
Event Log
Instrument Log
r An AutoStop condition
stopped the System.
r Selected voteouts of WBC,
RBC, Plt or MCV.
r Communication between the
Analytical Station and the
Workstation is lost.
Voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT

or MCV. Verify proper
connection of coaxial cables
and verify baths contain
diluent.
READY
N/A
Yes

Yellow
light

reached.
Red
light
Instrument Log
Red
light
Instrument 1 NO READ
Sample received without
proper identification [...,....].
Run stopped
An AutoStop condition stopped the

System for one of the following
errors:
r
r
r
r
7.2-6
Verify proper connection of coaxial cables.

Verify baths contain diluent.
Verify apertures are not blocked.
Use F03 and ensure no microbubbles are present.
If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
7. Service Only: Ensure the BSV is aligned.
ToDo
Control
XB
Data/Time
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-3 System Messages - B

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Backwash Tank Not Full

and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
BACKWASH TANK
NOT FULL
Backwash Tank Still Full

and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Bed Not Advanced

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Bed Not Backward

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Bed Not Forward

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
PN 4277219B
and
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
NOT READY
and
BACKWASH TANK
STILL FULL
Yes
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

occurred).
Diluent level low or faulty float

and/or sensor.
1. Check diluent container for sufficient volume and

replace if necessary.
3. If volume of diluent is adequate or if message recurs:
a. Use F30 to check operation of the backwash tank.
b. Check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
backwash tank.
4. Continue operation. If message persists after resetting
Analytical Station a maximum of three times, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative.

System)
Red
light

occurred).
Faulty float and/or sensor.

a. Use F30 to check operation of the backwash tank.
backwash tank.
3. Continue normal operation. If message persists after
resetting Analytical Station a maximum of three times,
call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Yellow
light

occurred).

Obstruction in bed area or faulty

sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure the rocker bed and belt are unobstructed.

Reposition the cassette.
Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
samples in the Manual mode.
Yellow
light

occurred).


sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Yellow
light

occurred).


sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Faulty backwash tank float

sensor. Restart Analytical
Station.
BED NOT ADVANCED
Yes
and
MANUAL MODE

System)
Rocker bed did not advance.

check belt tension or cassette
position (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
BED NOT BACKWARD
Yes
and
MANUAL MODE
MANUAL MODE

System)
Sample Results
Diluent level low or faulty

backwash tank float sensor.
Check diluent container and
restart Analytical Station.
NOT READY
and
Log Message and


System)
Did not detect rocker bed

backward position. Check for
obstruction or defective
sensor (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
BED NOT FORWARD
Yes

System)

forward position. Check for
sensor (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
7.2-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-3 System Messages - B (Continued)

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Bed Not Level

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
BED NOT LEVEL
Yes
Bellows Not Down

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
and
MANUAL MODE
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Yellow
light

occurred).


sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Red
light

occurred).

Obstruction in bellows pathway

prevented bellows from moving
down.

horizontal position. Check for
sensor (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
BELLOWS NOT DOWN
Yes
and
MANUAL MODE

System)
Bellows not down. Reset

Analytical Station.


1. Ensure the bellows pathway is unobstructed.
3. Continue normal operation. If message persists, check
for leaks, kinks or plugs around the needle.
4. If message still persists, replace the needle.
mode.
Bellows Not Up
and
System only)
7.2-8
SYSTEM FAULT
and
MANUAL MODE
BELLOWS NOT UP
Yes

System)
Red
light

occurred).
Bellows not extended. Needle

not in safe position (<Tube
ID>, <Cass/Pos>).
Obstruction in bellows pathway

prevented bellows from moving
up.

1. Ensure the bellows pathway is unobstructed.
3. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
7.2-8
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-4 System Messages - C

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Cassette Not Lowered Onto

Bed
CASSETTE NOT
LOWERED ONTO BED
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data displayed.
Run stopped.
Right lift or sensor defective.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Red
light

Red and/or white aperture voltages

outside range (135 to 175 Vdc for
RBC aperture voltage and 100 to
150 Vdc for WBC aperture
voltage). This could indicate:
1. Open the Analyzer cover and ensure the six white

preamp cables are properly connected to the two
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards.
2. Close the Analyzer cover.
3. Reset the Analytical Station. While the Analytical
Station resets, ensure the WBC and RBC baths drain
and rinse correctly.
4. Continue operation. If the message persists, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative and indicate the RBC
and WBC aperture voltages need to be recalibrated.
Cassette not lowered onto

bed. Check right lift and
rerun.
CBC Bath Voltages Out Of

Range
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Aperture voltage(s) out of

range (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
CBC Xmit Failure
(current status)
N/A
No
r The baths are out of diluent.

r A preamp cable is loose.
r The aperture voltages need to
be recalibrated.
N/A (GENS System)

System)
N/A
Analytical Station-to-Workstation
transmission failure. This could
indicate:
r The Workstation is OFF.
r The cables connecting the
Analyzer and the Workstation
are loose or disconnected.
r A hardware or software
malfunction.
Compressor +48V Bad
READY
COMPRESSOR
+48V BAD
Yes

System)
READY
COMPRESSOR
TOO HOT
Yes

System)
Pneumatics/Power Supply
overheated or defective.
Verify air filter is clean.
PN 4277219B
1. Ensure the Workstation is on. If not, turn on the

Workstation, log onto the Workstation and go to step
4.
2. Ensure the cables between the Analyzer and the
Workstation are connected. If not, connect the cables
and go to step 4.
3. If the Workstation is turned on, shutdown and restart
it, then go to step 4.
5. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
Red
light

r Short on +48 V output

r Bulk Power Supply overheated
r Pneumatic Power Supply
defective.
1. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF for 5

minutes.
2. Verify air filter is clean.
3. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch ON.
Representative.
Red
light

Overheated pneumatics and/or

Pneumatic Power Supply defective
(compressor shuts OFF when
compressor temperature >80C).
1. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF for 5

minutes.
2. Verify air filter is clean.
3. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch ON.
Representative.
48 Volt bulk or pneumatic

Power Supply defective.
Compressor Too Hot
Ensure the right lift is unobstructed.

If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative. You can place the cassette on the
rocker bed and press START/CONT to continue
running in the Automatic mode, or you can use the
Manual mode.
7.2-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-4 System Messages - C (Continued)

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
CRC Error
COMMON ROM AREA

CRC ERROR
NOT READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
N/A
Incorrect or faulty Diluter PROM

chip.

Representative.
Red
light
N/A
Incorrect or faulty Diluter PROM

chip.

Representative.
Faulty diluter memory. Reset

Analytical Station.
CRC Error
NOT READY
OVERLAY AREA CRC

ERROR
Yes

System)
Faulty diluter memory. Reset

Analytical Station.
7.2-10
7.2-10
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-5 System Messages - D

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Diagnostic Mode
DIAGNOSTIC MODE TO RUN HIT RESET
READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
N/A
Analytical Station operation

disabled (except for
F-functions from Diluter
keypad) until error is
resolved.
Reagent level sense, pressure

(5psi, 30 psi, high vacuum or low
vacuum only), or voltage error
detected at power up.
1. Resolve reagent level sense, pressure or voltage error.

Representative.
Yellow
light
Data displayed.
Temperature control failure.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed
Analytical Station not adjusted

properly.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed

properly.

Representative.
Red
light
Stopped- inoperable
DIFF PROCESSOR card

communication failure or
Workstation did not respond.
1. Reset the Workstation and the Analytical Station.

2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs:
a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test and
process non-Diff samples.
b. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Red
light


Pressure reading <0.1 psi.
Continue normal operation.
Reagent level sense, pressure

or voltage error detected.
Diff Heater Disabled
(current status)
DIFF HEATER
DISABLED
Yes

System)
Diff heater disabled for

current cycle. Heater
temperature not within
expected limits. Reset
analyzer.
Diff Heater Sensor Bad
(current status)
DIFF HEATER
SENSOR BAD
Yes

System)
DIFF heater sensor defective

or disconnected. Reset
Analytical Station.
Diff Laser Offset Lower
Failed
READY
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
Laser offset too low.
(LH750
System)
Diff Laser Offset Upper

Failed
READY
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
Laser offset too high.
(LH750
System)
Diff PC Communication
Failed
(current status)
N/A
Yes

System)
Diff communication failure.

Diff Pressure Lower Failed
(current status)
N/A
Yes
one
beep
(GENS
System)
No
(LH750
System)
PN 4277219B

System)
DIFF sample pressure below

limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).

of cycle.
1. If additional messages appear, follow corrective

actions for those messages.
2. If this message recurs:
7.2-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-5 System Messages - D (Continued)

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Diff Pressure Upper Failed
N/A
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
one
beep
(GENS
System)
No
(LH750
System)
Diff Processor Does Not

Answer
(current status)
N/A
Log Message and

System)
Red
light
DIFF sample pressure above

limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
No
System) System)
Red
light

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action


Pressure reading >0.9 psi.
CBC only results displayed.

(GENS System)
Operates only in CBC test

mode.
DIFF PROCESSOR card failure or

communication failure.

a. Change the test mode to CBC Only and process
CBC only samples.
1. If additional messages appear, follow corrective

actions for those messages.
2. If this message recurs:

of cycle.
N/A (LH750 System)
DIFF processor
communication failure. Reset
Analytical Station.
Diff Processor Out Of
Synch.
(current status)
N/A
Yes

System)
Red
light

occurred).
DIFF PROCESSOR card

communication failure.

Representative.
Red
light

U4 on the Diff Power Supply card

failed (outside 5% limit).
1. Power down the Analytical Station:
DIFF processor
Analytical Station.
DIFF PS Card +15 V Error
(current status)
Note: If event severe, this
message may not appear.
DIFF PS CARD
+15V ERROR
Yes

System)
+15 Volts from Diff Power

Supply outside limit. Power
down/up Analytical Station.
a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.

b. At the Power Supply, turn off the MAIN POWER
switch.
2. Power up the Analytical Station:
a. Turn on the MAIN POWER switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
DIFF PS Card -15 V Error
(current status)
DIFF PS CARD
-15V ERROR
Yes

System)
Red
light
-15 Volts from Diff Power

Supply outside limit. Power

U4 on the Diff Power Supply card

failed (outside 5% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Diff RAM Test Failed
N/A
N/A
Yes

System)
Yellow
light
Diff RAM error.

Representative.
DIFF RAM test failed. Rerun

test.
7.2-12
7.2-12
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Diff Timer Test Failed
N/A
Yes
N/A
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Yellow
light
N/A
Diff timer error.

Representative.
Red
light
N/A
transmission failure. This can
happen if the Workstation is turned
off or if the communication cables
between the Workstation and the
Analytical Station loosen while data
is being transmitted.
1. Ensure the communication cables between the

Workstation and the Analytical Station are properly
connected.
2. Turn on or reset the Workstation.
3. Continue normal operation. If message recurs:
Red
light

U2 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply card failed (outside
5% limit).
DIFF timer error. Rerun test.

DIFF Xmit Failure
(current status)
N/A
No

System)
AMC Reported Error - Diff

Transmit Failure.
Dil SOL/OP PS +15V Error
(current status)
DIL SOL/OP PS
+15V ERROR
Yes

System)
+15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card

outside limit. Power down/up
Analytical Station.

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil SOL/OP PS -15V Error

(current status)
DIL SOL/OP PS
-15V ERROR
Yes

System)
Red
light
-15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card

Analytical Station.

5% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil SOL/OP PS 24V Error

(current status)
DIL SOL/OP PS
24V ERROR
Yes

System)
24 Volts on Diluter 2 Card

Analytical Station.
Red
light

8% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
PN 4277219B
7.2-13
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Dil1 Card 5V Error
DIL1 CARD 5V
ERROR
NOT READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)
Red
light

Analytical Station.

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action

U35 on the Diluter 1 card failed

(outside 5% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil1 Card +15V Error
(current status)
DIL1 CARD +15V

ERROR
Yes

System)
Red
light
+15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card

Analytical Station.


(outside 8% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil1 Card -15V Error
(current status)
DIL1 CARD -15V

ERROR
Yes

System)
Red
light
-15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card

Analytical Station.


(outside 8% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil4 Card 12V Error
(current status)
DIL4 CARD
12V ERROR
Yes

System)
Red
light

Analytical Station.


(outside 5% limit).

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Diluter Board Not

Answering
(current status)
N/A
No

System)
Red
light
Stopped - inoperable
Analyzer-to-Diluter communication
error.

Representative.
Analyzer-to-Diluter
Analytical Station.
7.2-14
7.2-14
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Diluter Card 1 Failure
DILUTER CARD 1
FAILURE
NOT READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

occurred).
Diluter 1 card not answering.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Failure to communicate commands

to Diluter.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Diluter echo not understood by

Analyzer.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Generic fatal Diluter error.

Representative.
Red
light

Diluter left power supply defective.

Representative.
Red
light
Internal memory error.

Representative.
Diluter 1 I/O card failure

NOT READY
DILUTER CARD 2
FAILURE
Yes

System)

NOT READY
DILUTER CARD 3
FAILURE
Yes

System)

Diluter Comm. Error
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Diluter communication
failure. Reset Analytical
Station.
Diluter Echo Error
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Diluter communication
Station.
Diluter Error
NOT READY
DILUTER ERROR
Yes

System)
Diluter failure. Reset

Analytical Station.
Diluter Left Power Sup. Bad (current status)
N/A
Yes

System)
Diluter left power supply

Station.
Diluter RAM Fault
SYSTEM FAULT
DILUTER RAM
FAULT
No

System)
Diluter memory failure. Reset

Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B
7.2-15
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Diluter Right Power Sup.

Bad
N/A
Yes
(current status)
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

Diluter right power supply

defective.

Representative.
Red
light
N/A
Communications error during

transmission to the Diluter.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Run stopped.
Diluter front door open during

Automatic mode operation.
Close Diluter front door and continue operation.
Red
light

occurred).
Idle - ready for request or

cycle continues.
DPR malfunction.
1. Continue normal operation and watch for additional

messages.
2. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
actions associated with those messages.
3. If this message persists:
a. Change the test mode to CBC Only.
b. Continue processing CBC only samples.
c. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Red
light
Power Supply valve malfunction.

Representative.
Red
light
Power Supply valve malfunction.

Representative.
Diluter right power supply

Station.
Diluter TxRx Error
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Communication failure during

transmission to diluter. Reset
Analytical Station.
Door Open Run Stopped
(current status)
DOOR OPEN
RUN STOPPED
Yes

System)
Diluter front door open

during automatic sampling
mode operation. Close front
door and continue operation.
DPR Diluter Packet Error
and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Dump Valve Stuck Closed
NOT READY
N/A
Yes
and
NOT READY

System)
Invalid dual port RAM packet

Reset Analytical Station and
rerun sample.
DUMP VALVE
STUCK CLOSED
Yes

System)
Overflow valve malfunction

(remained closed) detected
while turning compressor
ON. Reset Analytical Station.
Dump Valve Stuck Open
NOT READY
DUMP VALVE
STUCK OPEN
Yes

System)
Overflow valve malfunction

(remained open) detected
while turning compressor
ON. Reset Analytical Station.
7.2-16
7.2-16
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-6 System Messages - E through G

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
ETX Rec. Error
N/A
No
NOT READY
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

occurred).
Last character received from

Workstation was not ETX.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Diluter did not receive message

from AMC.
1. Reset the Analytical Station and/or Workstation.

Representative.
Red
light

U3 on power supply 2 defective.
ETX not received from diluter.

Expected Command from
AMC
(current status)
EXPECTED COMMAND
FROM AMC
Yes

System)
Expected command from

AMC, command not received.
Fan Power Bad
(current status)
N/A
Yes

System)
Power Supply 2 defective.

Power down/up Analytical
Station.

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
4. Service Only: Replace the AMC as instructed under
Heading 4.6, ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE
REPLACEMENT.
Fatal DPR Error

and
System only)
PN 4277219B
SYSTEM FAULT
and
NOT READY
N/A
Yes

System)
Red
light

occurred).
DPR malfunction.

Representative.
instrument dual port RAM

memory test failed. Reset
Analytical Station.
7.2-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-6 System Messages - E through G (Continued)

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Flow Cell Clog

and
System only)
FLOW CELL CLOG
Yes
SYSTEM FAULT
and
NOT READY
Log Message and

System)
Red
light
Instrument detected clog in

flow cell and attempted three
times to clear clog without
success. Perform F44
function.

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Data for VCS-affected parameters

incomplete; colons (:::::) appear
in VCS-affected parameter fields if
clog is cleared after autoclearing.
If clog is not cleared, data will not
be available.
Analytical Station detected clog in

flow cell and attempted three times
to clear clog without success.

2. Perform F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1 function.
3. If message recurs, repeat F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1
function.
4. If message recurs, perform F45 FLOWCELL UNCLOG
2 function, up to three times.
CAUTION Risk of instrument damage. Using F46 can

damage the flow cell because it places greater stress
on the flow cell than F44 or F45. Only use F46 if F44
and F45 fail to clear the clog, and never do F46 more
than once unless specifically instructed to do so by
5. If message recurs, perform F46 FLOWCELL UNCLOG
3 function once.
6. Allow Analytical Station to sit idle for 30 minutes. Then
perform F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1 function before
analyzing samples.
Representative.
Function Not Allowed
(current status)
N/A
No

System)
Red
light
N/A
Paused until correct function

entered.
AMC Reported Error Function Not Allowed.
7.2-18
7.2-18
F58 or F59 selected and Analytical

Station does not allow CD4 or CD8
(COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
card switches).
Enter correct function for Analytical Station's mode of

operation.
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-7 System Messages - H

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
HGB Status Error
HGB STATUS
ERROR
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data displayed.
Hgb lamp power supply defective
Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Yellow
light
Data displayed.
Beeps - operation continues.
60 psi relief valve, compressor

and/or pressure transducer
functioning improperly (pressure
is 71 to 80 psi).
1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 1 psi.

2. If 60 psi pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
Yellow
light
Data displayed.

functioning improperly (pressure
is 45 to 49 psi) and/or line leaking.
1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 1 psi.

2. If 60 psi pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
Red
light


defective (compressor shuts OFF
when pressure >80 psi).
1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 1 psi. (If 60 psi

pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative).
2. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF and then
ON. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.


defective (pressure <45 psi) and/or
line leaking.
1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 1 psi. (If 60 psi

pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
2. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF and then
ON.
Representative.
HGB lamp power supply

defective. Call coulter
customer operations.
High pressure High
(current status)
HIGH PRESSURE
HIGH
Yes

System)
60 PSI pressure high. Adjust

pressure. If 60 PSI pressure
reading cannot be adjusted,
call Coulter Customer
Operations.
High pressure Low
(current status)
HIGH PRESSURE
LOW
Yes

System)
60 PSI pressure low. Adjust

pressure. If 60 PSI pressure
Operations.
High Pressure Too High
NOT READY
HIGH PRESSURE
TOO HIGH
Yes

System)
60 PSI pressure out of range

(too high). Adjust pressure. If
60 PSI pressure reading
cannot be adjusted, call
Coulter Customer Operations.
High Pressure Too Low
(current status)
HIGH PRESSURE
TOO LOW
Yes

System)
60 PSI pressure out of range

(too low). Adjust pressure. If
60 PSI pressure reading
cannot be adjusted, call
PN 4277219B
Red
light
or
Stopped.
Depends on when error
occurred.
or
Stopped.
Depends on when error
occurred.
7.2-19
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-7 System Messages - H (Continued)

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
High Vacuum Low
HIGH VACUUM LOW
Yes
READY
Log Message and

System)
Red
light
High vacuum too low. Power


Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action

Run stopped.
Vacuum pump and/or vacuum

transducer defective (vacuum is
<14 in. Hg) and/or line leaking.

switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Histogram Mem. Reset

Error
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Red
light
Analyzer non-communication fatal

error.

2. If message persists, call your Coulter Representative.
Analyzer non-communication
error. Reset Analytical
Station.
7.2-20
7.2-20
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-8 System Messages - I through K

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Illegal Interrupt
and
System only
SYSTEM FAULT
ILLEGAL
INTERRUPT
Intermittent PS1 Supply

Error
SYSTEM FAULT
and
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
NOT READY
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

occurred).
AMC, Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply or DIFF
PROCESSOR cards hardware
malfunction.

Representative.
Red
light

Faulty APS1 card.

Representative.
Red
light

Faulty APS2 card.

Representative.
Red
light
System detected internal

calibration factor error while
receiving S-CAL factors from
Workstation.
AMC, Diluter or DIFF

Processor hardware
malfunction (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Reset Analytical
Station and rerun sample.
N/A
No

System)
Faulty PS1 power supply.

Intermittent PS2 Supply
Error
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)
Faulty PS2 power supply.

Internal Cal. Fac. Error
NOT READY
N/A
No
Calibration Log (GENS

System)
System)
Incorrect calibration factors

received. Reset Analytical
Station and retransmit
calibration factors from
GENS Workstation.
Ireg Hst.
READY
N/A
No
N/A
Keyboard Interrupt Error

and
System only
SYSTEM FAULT
KEYBOARD
INTERRUPT ERROR
Yes

System)
PN 4277219B
and
NOT READY
Red
light
2. At Analyzer, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt

CALIBRATION.
3. Check/re-enter calibration factors and recalibrate.
Data displayed but flagged.
System detected a spike in the

platelet histogram.
1. Continue operation.
2. If message occurs on other samples, call your

occurred).
Stopped - inoperable
Diluter keyboard failure.

Representative.
Diluter keypad failure. Reset

Analytical Station.
7.2-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-9 System Messages - L

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Label Not Read Run

Stopped
LABEL NOT READ

RUN STOPPED
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data not available.
Run stopped
Unable to read cassette label.
1. Clean the bar-code reader.

2. Check the cassette label and clean or replace the label
if necessary.
3. Continue operation. If message persists, use a
different cassette.
Representative.
Red
light


Voltage is 1181 to 1230 Vdc.

messages.
actions associated with the messages.
a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test.
b. Continue processing non-Diff samples.
Red
light

Voltage 1520 Vdc.

messages.
Red
light

Voltage 1180 Vdc.

messages.
Red
light


Voltage is 1470 to 1519 Vdc.

messages.
Unable to read cassette label.

Check label and scanner.
Rerun sample.
Laser Voltage Lower Failed
(current status)
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
Laser voltage below limit
(LH750 (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>).
System)
Laser Voltage Too High
NOT READY
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
Laser voltage too high.
(LH750
System)
Laser Voltage Too Low
NOT READY
N/A
Yes
System) System)
Laser voltage too low.

No
(LH750
System)
Laser Voltage Upper Failed
(current status)
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
Laser voltage above limit
(LH750 (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>).
System)
7.2-22

of cycle.

of cycle.
7.2-22
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-9 System Messages - L (Continued)

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Left Lift Not Up

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only
SYSTEM FAULT
LEFT LIFT NOT UP
Yes
Left Load Fail

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only
SYSTEM FAULT
Left Stack Full
(current status)
and
MANUAL MODE
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Yellow
light

occurred).

Obstruction or faulty sensor.
1. Ensure the left lift is unobstructed.

Yellow
light

occurred).

1. Ensure the left lift is unobstructed.

Red
light

occurred).
Run stopped.
Maximum number of cassettes

(12) already loaded or switch
stuck/failed.
1. If the unloading bay is full (12 cassettes), remove the

cassettes from the unloading bay.
2. If the unloading bay is not full, check the sensor and
ensure it is not stuck. If necessary, gently pull down on
the sensor plate at the top of the unloading bay.
3. Continue normal operation. If the message persists,
call your Coulter Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Cycling inhibited until sensor

error resolved.
Reservoir low on cleaning agent.
1. Replace cleaning agent container.
Red
light

occurred).
Run stopped.
Analytical Station detected a low

fluidic condition that could
produce a level sense problem.
1. Check the reagent containers and replace any that are

low.
Red
light

occurred).

error resolved.
Diluent is low.
1. Replace diluent container.
Red
light

occurred).

error resolved.
Reservoir low on CBC lytic reagent. 1. Replace CBC lytic reagent container.
Rocker bed obstructed (left

lift not up) or faulty sensor
Remove obstruction and
LEFT LOAD FAIL
Yes
and
MANUAL MODE

System)
Rocker bed obstructed (left

lift not down) or faulty sensor
LEFT STACK FULL
Yes

System)
Maximum number of
cassettes (12) already loaded,
obstruction or faulty switch.
Remove at least one cassette
and continue operation.
Level C------
READY
LEVEL C------
Yes
Reagents Log
Reservoir low on cleaner.

Replace cleaner container
and press START/CONT On
Diluter keypad to continue.
Level Check Fail Caused
Stop
(current status)
LEVEL CHECK FAIL

CAUSED STOP
Yes

System)
2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
Replace reagent container.

Level -D-----
READY
LEVEL -D-----
Yes
Reagents Log
Diluent is low. Replace

diluent container and press
START/CONT on Diluter
keypad to continue.
Level --L----
READY
LEVEL --L----
Yes
Reagents Log
Reservoir low on CBC lyse.

Replace CBC Lyse container
and press START/CONT on
PN 4277219B

3. If the message recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
7.2-23
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Log Message and

Level ---P---
LEVEL ---P---
Yes
Reagents Log
READY
(GENS System) Reservoir

low on DIFF PAK . Replace
DIFF PAK container and press
keypad to continue.

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action

occurred).

error resolved.
Reservoir low on diff lytic reagent

and/or diff preservative.
1. Replace DIFF PAK or Stabilyse diff preservative

container.
Red
light

occurred).

error resolved.
Reservoir low on retic stain and/or

retic clearing solution.
1. Replace RETIC PAK or stain container.
Red
light

occurred).

error resolved.
Vacuum overflow tank full.
1. Empty vacuum overflow tank.
Red
light

occurred).

error resolved.
Waste container full.
Yellow
light
Data displayed.
Low vacuum between 5.8-5.9 or

6.1-6.2 in. Hg and/or low vacuum
regulator and/or vacuum pump
defective.
Red
light
(LH750 System) Reservoir

low or Stabilyse level sense
detected. Replace DIFF PAK
or Stabilyse container and
press START/CONT on Diluter
keypad to continue.
Level ----R--
READY
LEVEL ----R--
Yes
Reagents Log
(GENS System) Reservoir
low on Retic PAK. Replace
Retic PAK container and
press START/CONT on Diluter
keypad to continue.
(LH750 System) Reservoir

low or Stain or clearing agent
level sense detected. Replace
Retic PAK or Stain or clearing
agent container and press
keypad to continue.
Level -----V-
READY
LEVEL -----V-
Yes
Reagents Log
Vacuum overflow tank full.

Empty vacuum overflow tank
Level ------W
READY
LEVEL ------W
Yes
Reagents Log
Waste container full. Empty

or replace waste container
Low Vacuum Drifted
(current status)
LOW VACUUM
DRIFTED
Yes

System)
Low vacuum drifted. Adjust

low vacuum. If low vacuum
Operations.
7.2-24
7.2-24
1. Empty or replace waste container.

1. Adjust low vacuum regulator to 6 0.010 in. Hg (if low

vacuum reading cannot be adjusted, call your
Representative.
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Low Vacuum High
LOW VACUUM HIGH
Yes
READY
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

Run stopped.
Low vacuum outside limit (vacuum

>6.21 in. Hg) and/or low vacuum
defective.
1. Use F92 to monitor low vacuum and adjust low

vacuum regulator to 6 0.010 in. Hg. If low vacuum
reading cannot be adjusted, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Representative.
Red
light

Run stopped.
Low vacuum outside limit (vacuum

<5.8 in. Hg) and/or low vacuum
defective.
1. Use F92 to monitor low vacuum and adjust low

vacuum regulator, RG2, to 6 0.010 in. Hg. If low
vacuum reading cannot be adjusted, call your
Representative.
3. Service Only: If problem occurs when cycling RETIC
ONLY samples in the Manual mode a. Starting at VC1, fitting 4, retube this line all the way
to the COUNT VACUUM transducer on the PVT
card, ensuring all feed-thru fittings are open.
b. Completely retube the 3-way pinch valve, VL16A.
c. Close the doors, ensuring no tubing is sharply bent
or restricted.
4. If the problem persists a. Starting at VC1, fitting 7, retube this line all the way
to the low vacuum regulator, RG2, ensuring all
feed-thru fittings are open.
b. Replace the tubing through VL17.
c. Replace the brown-striped tubing through VL12E.
d. Replace the low vacuum regulator restrictor tubing.
Troubleshooting Tip: Usually the correct tubing
with a fitting boot on one end is available in the
customer parts kit, but you must cut it to the
correct length.
e. Replace the tubing to VC16, fitting 8.
5. If the problem still persists, replace the low vacuum
regulator, RG2.
6. If the problem still persists, replace the Pneumatic
Monitor card.
Low vacuum too high. Adjust

Operations.
Low Vacuum Low
READY
LOW VACUUM LOW
Yes

System)
Low vacuum too low. Adjust

Operations.
PN 4277219B
7.2-25
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-10 System Messages - M through O

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Manual Probe Not In
MANUAL PROBE
NOT IN
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data not available.
Aspirator tip, probe wipe

mechanism, and/or sensor
malfunction.
1. Ensure the aspirator tip is unobstructed.

2. Ensure the cleaning truck in the Probe-Wipe module is
correctly aligned with the aspirator tip.
4. Continue normal operation and watch for messages.
actions associated with those messages.
6. If this message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Red
light
DIFF PROCESSOR card monitor

command did not finish.

2. If message persists, call Beckman Coulter Customer
Operations.
Red
light

occurred).
Diluter response command

contained unknown code

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Last character received from

Diluter was not ETX.

2. If message persists, call Beckman Coulter Customer
Operations.
Red
light
Data not available.
Run stopped.
Retic control material used in CBC

or CBC/DIFF test mode.
Change the Analytical Station test mode to RETIC,

CBC/RETIC or CBC/DIFF/RETIC.
Red
light
Beeps.
ID not read by handled scanner or

ID was not available.
Re-enter ID using handheld scanner or enter ID using

Diluter keypad.
Red
light
Beeps.
ID not read by handled scanner or

ID was not available.
Re-enter ID using handheld scanner or enter ID using

Diluter keypad.
Red
light

occurred).
Non-ASCII character received

while exchanging data with Diluter.

Representative.
Manual sampling probe did

not retract (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Check for
obstruction or faulty sensor
and rerun sample.
Monitor Task Did Not Finish SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)
DIFF Processor monitor

command did not finish.
No ACK From Diluter
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Invalid Diluter command.

No ETX
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
ETX not received from Diluter.

No Retics Control In This
Mode (GENS System
only)
READY
No Valid ID (LH750 System

only)
(current status)
No Wand ID (GENS
System only)
(current status)
Non-ASCII From Diluter
NOT READY
N/A
Yes
Event Log
Retic control material used in

CBC or CBC/DIFF test mode.
NO WAND ID
Yes
Instrument Log
ID not read by wand or ID

was not available. Re-enter ID
using wand or manually
using diluter keypad.
NO WAND ID
Yes
Event Log
ID not read by wand or ID

was not available. Re-enter ID
using wand or manually
using diluter keypad.
N/A
No

System)
Invalid Character received

from Diluter. Reset Analytical
station.
7.2-26
7.2-26
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-10 System Messages - M through O (Continued)

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Not Ready For AMC Data
NOT READY
FOR AMC DATA
NOT READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light

occurred).

Representative.
Red
light
Miscommunication between the

Analyzer and the Diluter.
1. Reset the Analytical Station and reposition the

cassette.
Representative.
Diluter not ready to receive

data from AMC. Reset
Analytical Station.
Operator Alert 09
NOT READY
N/A
Yes

System)
AMC Reported Error -Operator Alert 09.
PN 4277219B
7.2-27
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-11 System Messages - P through Q

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
PC Not Receiving
N/A
No
NOT READY
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data not available.
Workstation not receiving data

from Analytical Station.

Representative.
Yellow
light
Data displayed.

Representative.
Yellow
light
Data displayed.

Representative.
Data displayed but flagged.
Platelet fit algorithm failed.
If message occurs on other samples, call your Beckman

Yellow
light
Data displayed.
Obstruction preventing aspirator

tip retraction.
1. Remove obstruction from aspirator tip area.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed.
1. Remove obstruction.
Representative.
Red
light
Data Displayed.
AMC Reported Error - PC not

ready. Reset Analytical
Station.
Peltier Heater Sensor Bad
(current status)
PELTIER HEATER
SENSOR BAD
Yes

System)
Peltier heater sensor

defective or disconnected.
Peltier Temp. Outside
Limits
(current status)
PELTIER TEMP.
OUTSIDE LIMITS
Yes

System)
Peltier temperature outside

limits. Reset Analyzer .
PLT No Fit Aperture X Mode (current status)
Out (GENS System only)
Note: X appears as 1, 2
or 3.
N/A
Probe Obstructed
and
Expected Command from
AMC (LH750 System
only)
(current status)
PROBE OBSTRUCTED
Probe Wipe Down Fail

and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Probe Wipe Failed

and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
7.2-28
No
Event Log
Platelet fit algorithm failed

(<Tube ID>,<Cass/Pos>). If
message occurs on other
samples, call Coulter
Yes

System)
Note (LH750 System):

Depending upon the length of
time the aspirator tip is
obstructed, the operator may
see one or both messages.
Manual sampling probe did

not retract (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Remove
obstruction.
and
PROBE WIPE DOWN

FAIL
Yes
NOT READY
and
NOT READY

System)
Manual sampling probe wipe

obstructed (not down)
Remove obstruction.
PROBE WIPE FAILED
Yes

System)

obstructed (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Remove
obstruction.
7.2-28
r Sensor is obstructed or faulty

r Probe-wipe mechanism is
obstructed or faulty
Representative.
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-11 System Messages - P through Q (Continued)

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Probe Wipe Truck Not

Home
and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
PROBE WIPE TRUCK

NOT HOME
Probe Wipe Up Fail

and
System only
SYSTEM FAULT
PS1 +5V Supply High
SYSTEM FAULT
and
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
NOT READY
and
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Red
light
Data displayed.
PROBE WIPE UP
FAIL
Yes
NOT READY
SYSTEM FAULT

System)
Red
light
Data displayed.
Representative.
Red
light

+5 V power to power supply 1

outside +5% limit.
Red
light


outside -5% limit.
SYSTEM FAULT
Red
light


outside +5% limit.
N/A
No

System)
N/A
No

System)
N/A
No

System)
Red
light


outside -5% limit.
Red
light

-15 V power to power supply 1

outside +5% limit.
Power Supply 1 problem: +15

Volts above limit. Call Coulter
PS1 +15V Supply Low
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

Volts below limit. Call Coulter
PS1 -15V Supply High
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)
Power Supply 1 problem:

-15 Volts above limit. Call
PN 4277219B
r Sensor is obstructed or faulty

r Probe-wipe mechanism is
obstructed or faulty.

obstructed (not up) (<Tube
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). Remove
obstruction.

PS1 +15V Supply High
Probable Cause

obstructed (not home)
Remove obstruction.

PS1 +5V Supply Low

Corrective Action
Representative.
7.2-29
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
PS1 -15V Supply Low
N/A
No
SYSTEM FAULT
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light


outside -5% limit.
Red
light


outside +5% limit.
Red
light


outside -5% limit.
Red
light


outside +5% limit.
Red
light


outside -5% limit.
Red
light


outside +5% limit.
Red
light


outside -5% limit.

-15 Volts below limit. Call
PS2 +5V Supply High
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

PS2 +5V Supply Low
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

PS2 +12V Supply Low
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

Volts Above limit. Call Coulter
PS2 +15V Supply Low
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

7.2-30
7.2-30
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
PS2 -15V Supply High
N/A
No
SYSTEM FAULT
Log Message and

System)
Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light


outside +5% limit.
Red
light


outside -5% limit.
Yellow
light
Processed normally.
Beeps- operation continues.
Harness not connected.

Representative.

-15 Volts above limit. Call
PS2 -15V Supply Low
SYSTEM FAULT
N/A
No

System)

--15 Volts below limit. Call
P/W Harness Not
Connected
(current status)
P/W HARNESS NOT

CONNECTED
Yes

System)
The probe wipe harness is

not connected. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B
7.2-31
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-12 System Messages - R

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Red/White Reset Error
N/A
Yes
NOT READY
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Red and white counter did not

reset to zero value.

Representative.
Red
light
Error during retic data

accumulation.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed

properly.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed

properly.

Representative.
Yellow
light



Representative.



Representative.
transmission failure.

Representative.
Red/white processor
counter(s) did not reinitialize.
Retic Accumulation Not
Finished
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Incomplete Retic collection.

Retic Laser Offset Lower
Failed
READY
N/A
Yes
System) System)
Retic laser offset too low.

No
(LH750
System)
Retic Laser Offset Upper
Failed
Retic Pressure Lower

Failed
READY
(current status)
N/A
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
(LH750
System
Retic laser offset too high.
Yes
one
beep
(GENS
System)

System)
No
(LH750
System
Retic Pressure Upper Failed (current status)
N/A
Yes
one
beep
(GENS
System)
No
(LH750
System
Retic Xmit Failure
(current status)
N/A
No
Retic sample pressure below

limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).

System)
Yellow
light
Retic sample pressure above

limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).

System)
Red
light

of cycle.

of cycle.
AMC Reported Error - Retic

Transmit Failure.
7.2-32
7.2-32
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-12 System Messages - R (Continued)

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
RF Lower Limit Failed
N/A
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
System) System)
No
(LH750
System
RF Upper Limit Failed
(current status)
RF Voltage Low
and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Right Lift Not Down

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Right Lift Not Up

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Right Stack Full
(current status)
N/A
RF VOLTAGE LOW
No
(LH750
System
RF (6.3V) voltage reading

above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
Yes

System)
NOT READY
RIGHT LIFT
NOT DOWN
Yes

System)
Probable Cause
Corrective Action


Reading <5.8 V.

Representative.


Reading >6.7 V.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
RF 300 V power supply low (scaled

down voltage is 4.7 Vdc 2%).

Representative.
Yellow
light

occurred).

Manual mode operable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

mode.
Yellow
light

occurred).

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

mode.
Red
light

occurred).
Run stopped.
Maximum number of cassettes

(12) already loaded or switch
stuck/failed.
1. If the loading bay is full (12 cassettes), remove at least

one cassette.
2. If the loading bay is not full, check the sensor and
ensure it is not stuck. If necessary, gently pull down on
the sensor plate at the top of the loading bay.
3. Continue normal operation. If the message persists,
call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Yellow
light
Yellow
light

of cycle.

of cycle.
Rocker bed obstructed (right

lift not down) or faulty sensor
rerun sample.
RIGHT LIFT
NOT UP
Yes
MANUAL MODE

System)
Rocker bed obstructed (right

lift not up) or faulty sensor
rerun sample.
RIGHT STACK FULL
Yes

System)
Right stack full. remove one

or more cassette(s), or check
switch.
PN 4277219B
RF voltage reading below

limit.
MANUAL MODE
and
Sample Results
RF (6.3V) voltage reading

below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
Yes
System) System)
and
and
Log Message and

7.2-33
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-12 System Messages - R (Continued)

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Run Aborted. PC Not

Ready.
N/A
No
SYSTEM FAULT
and
NOT READY
R/W Data Mem.

Interference
NOT READY
Log Message and

System)
Red
light

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
N/A
AMC to Workstation
communication error. This could
indicate:
1. Ensure the Workstation is on. If not, turn on the

Workstation, log onto the Workstation and go to step
4.
2. Ensure the cables between the Analyzer and the
Workstation are connected. If not, connect the cables
and go to step 4.
3. If the Workstation is turned on, shutdown and restart
it, then go to step 4.
AMC Reported Error - Run

Aborted, PC Not Ready
N/A
Yes

System)
r The Workstation is OFF.

r The cables connecting the
Analyzer and the Workstation
are loose or disconnected.
r A hardware or software
malfunction.
Red
light
Internal memory error.

Representative.
Analyzer memory read/write

Station.
7.2-34
7.2-34
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-13 System Messages - S

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Same Label Read Run

Stopped
SAME LABEL READ

RUN STOPPED
(current status)
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)
Red
light

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Data displayed.
Run stopped.
The cassette did not advance to the

next position, or the same cassette
was put back on the rocker bed
while the rocker bed was still
active.

cassette.
1. Wait for the System to return to READY.

2. Present sample to aspirator tip again. Do not remove
sample until Analytical Station beeps, indicating
aspiration is complete.
Cassette did not advance to

next position. Check for
obstruction.
Sample Removed Too Soon (current status)
SAMPLE REMOVED
TOO SOON
Yes

System)
Yellow
light
Data displayed.
Operator removed sample from

aspirator tip before aspiration was
complete.
Yellow
light
N/A
Tube detector sensor malfunction

or tube detector needs adjustment.
cassette.
mode.
3. Service Only: Adjust the tube detector as instructed
under Heading 4.47, TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT.
Red
light

occurred).
Invalid label type received from

scanner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Yellow
light

occurred).

Scanner stuck.
1. Ensure the scanner is unobstructed.

3. Continue normal operation. If the message recurs, call
Yellow
light



Representative.
Operator removed sample

from probe before aspiration
was complete (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Rerun sample.
Sample Tube Not Detected
(current status)
SAMPLE TUBE
NOT DETECTED
Yes

System)
Sample tube not detected.

Tube detector sensor
malfunction or tube detector
needs adjustment.
Scanner Error
and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Scanning Fault
and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Sheath Pressure Lower

Failed
(current status)
SCANNER ERROR
Yes
and
MANUAL MODE
Invalid tube label type read by

scanner (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Check label.
SCANNING FAULT
Yes
and
MANUAL MODE

System)
Bar code scanner pressure

too low or scanner
obstructed (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Check scanner.
N/A
Yes
System) System)
No
(LH750
System
PN 4277219B

System)
Sheath sample pressure

below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). To verify
pressure, run Daily Checks
background test.
2. Press START/CONT and ensure the cassette

advances on the rocker bed.
mode.
4. Service Only: Perform F07, BAR CODE READER TEST,
to check advancement of the cassette.

of cycle.
Check the label and clean the scanner.

Reset the Analytical Station, then retry the tube.
If message persists, try another tube.
If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
7.2-35
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-13 System Messages - S (Continued)

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Sheath Pressure Upper

Failed
N/A
(current status)
Sheath Tank Not Full

and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
Sheath Tank Still Full

(GENS System only)
and
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
SPC A/D Status Error
NOT READY
and
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
System) System)
No
(LH750
System
Sheath sample pressure

above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). To verify
pressure, run Daily Checks
background test.
SHEATH TANK
NOT FULL
Yes
Event Log
SHEATH TANK
STILL FULL
Yes
SPC A/D
STATUS ERROR
Yes

sheath tank float sensor.
Perform F20 function and
replace diluent container.
NOT READY
and
Log Message and

Event Log
Faulty sheath tank float

sensor. Perform F20 function.
NOT READY

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action



Representative.
Red
light

occurred).

and/or sensor.

replace if necessary.
3. If volume of diluent is adequate or if message recurs:
a. Use F20 to check operation of the sheath tank.
sheath tank.
4. Continue operation. If message persists, call your
Red
light

occurred).

a. Use F20 to check operation of the sheath tank.
sheath tank.
Red
light
N/A
SPC cards A/D status

unsatisfactory.
Yellow
light

of cycle.
Faulty SPC A/D. Power


switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
SPC Power Supply Bad
(current status)
N/A
Yes

System)
Red
light

occurred).
SPC cards power supply defective. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.

Representative.
SPC power supply defective.

7.2-36
7.2-36
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
SPC Status Not Ready
SPC STATUS
NOT READY
NOT READY
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
Log Message and

System)
Red
light

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
N/A
SPC cards status register indicates

a not ready" condition.
Faulty SPC A/D. Power


switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Stack Overflow
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Red
light

occurred).
Internal software problem.

Representative.
Red
light

Run stopped when Retic

cycle is run.

Representative.
Red
light


cycle is run.

Representative.
Red
light


cycle is run.

Representative.
Red
light


cycle is run.

Representative.
Internal software failure.

Stain Heater Disabled
(current status)
STAIN HEATER
DISABLED
Yes

System)
Stain heater disabled for

current cycle. Heater
temperature not within
expected limits. Reset
Analytical Station.
Stain Heater Sensor Bad
(current status)
STAIN HEATER
SENSOR BAD
Yes

System)
Stain temperature sensor

failed. Reset Analytical
Station.
Stain Temp Hi. Heater
Disabled
(current status)
STAIN TEMP. HI
HEATER DISABLED
Yes

System)
Stain temperature high,

heater disabled. Reset
Analytical Station.
Stain Temp Low. Run
Stopped
(current status)
STAIN TEMP LOW.

RUN STOPPED
Yes

System)
Stain temperature low, heater

disabled. Reset Analytical
Station.
PN 4277219B
7.2-37
TROUBLESHOOTING

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Stripper Plate Not In

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
STRIPPER PLATE
NOT IN
SYSTEM FAULT
and
Workstation
Beeps
Yes
MANUAL MODE
Stripper Plate Not Out

and
Diluter Error (GENS
System only)
SYSTEM FAULT
STX Rec. Error
NOT READY
and
Log Message and

System)

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Yellow
light

occurred).

1. Ensure the stripper plate is unobstructed.

Yellow
light

occurred).

1. Ensure the stripper plate is unobstructed.

Red
light
The first character not STX while

receiving K-CAL factors.

2. Retransmit the calibration factors to the Analyzer.
Stopped Inoperable

and/or sensor.

replace if necwssary.
3. If the volume of diluent is adeqaute or message recurs,
check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
reservoir.
Stopped Inoperable

2. If message persisits,
a. Use F50 to check operation of the sweep-flow
reservoir.
b. Check for kinks in the tubing around the reservoir.
4. Service Only: Ensure SW1, Pos.4 on the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH750 System) is set to enable the
sweep-flow reservoir level monitoring. Refer to
Table A.2-12 ( DILUTER PROCESSOR card) or
Table A.2-11 (DILUTER CPU card).
Stripper plate obstructed (not

in) or faulty sensor. Remove
obstruction and restart
Analytical Station.
STRIPPER PLATE
NOT OUT
Yes
MANUAL MODE

System)
Stripper plate obstructed (not

out) or faulty sensor. Remove
obstruction and restart
Analytical Station.
N/A
No
Calibration Log (GENS

System)
System)
Incorrect calibration factor

transmission. Retransmit
calibration factors from
GENS Workstation.
Sweep Flow Reservoir Not
Full
READY
N/A
Yes

System)

tank sensor. Check diluent
and restart Analytical station.
Sweep Flow Reservoir Still

Full
READY
N/A
Yes

System)

tank sensor
7.2-38
7.2-38
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-14 System Messages - T through V

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Log Message and

Three Consecutive
Voteouts (GENS System
only)
N/A
No
Event Log
Two NAKs From Diluter
NOT READY
Three consecutive voteouts

of WBC, RBC, PLT or MCV.
Verify proper connection of
coaxial cables and verify
baths contain diluent.
NOT READY
N/A
No

System
Red
light

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Data available for the three

consecutive samples.
Three consecutive voteouts of

WBC, RBC, Plt or MCV.
ATTENTION: (Service Only) To prevent the Analytical

Station from halting and to display data, change the setting
of SW1 on the COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card. Refer
to Table A.2-7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verify proper connection of coaxial cables.

Verify baths contain diluent.
Verify apertures are not blocked.
Use F03 and ensure no microbubbles are present.
Representative.
7. Service Only: Ensure the BSV is aligned.
Red
light

occurred).
Two NAKs detected while receiving

data from Diluter.

Representative.
Red
light

occurred).
Two NAKs detected while

transmitting data to Diluter.

Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed.
Communication error between

DIFF PROCESSOR card and AMC.

4. If this messages persists:
a. Select the CBC only test mode.
b. Run CBC only samples.
Red
light
Data displayed.
AMC detected invalid error code

transmitted by Diluter.

Representative.
Analyzer-Diluter
Communication failure: two
NAKs sent from Diluter. Reset
Analytical Station.
Two NAKs Sent From AMC
NOT READY
N/A
No

System
Analyzer-Diluter
communication failure: two
NAKs sent from AMC. Reset
Analytical Station.
Unknown Diff Error
Message
(current status)
N/A
Yes

System
failure: unknown. Reset
Analytical Station.
UNKNOWN Diluter Error

(current status)
Message
PN 4277219B
N/A
Yes

System
Analyzer-Diluter
communication failure:
unknown. Reset Analytical
Station.
7.2-39
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-15 System Messages - U

Analytical Station
Workstation
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Beeps
Unknown Diff Error

Message
N/A
Yes
(current status)
Log Message and

System

Sample Results
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Data displayed.
Communication error between

DIFF PROCESSOR card and AMC.

4. If this messages persists:
a. Select the CBC only test mode.
b. Run CBC only samples.
c. Call your Coulter Representative.
Red
light
Data displayed.
AMC detected invalid error code

transmitted by Diluter.

Representative.
Red
light


failure: unknown. Reset
Analytical Station.
(current status)
UNKNOWN Diluter Error
Message
N/A
Vls Air Error
VLS Air Error
NOT READY (GENS

System)
Yes

System
Analyzer-Diluter
communication failure:
unknown. Reset Analytical
Station.
Yes
MANUAL MODE
(LH750 System)

System
VLS Air Error
r Obstruction or faulty sensor.

r Pinched, kinked or cut tubing.
r High vacuum outside limit.

Service Only Note: Resetting the Analytical Station
automatically recalibrates the blood detector.
Representative.
Service Only:
1. Check for tubing kinks at the feed-thru and Y-fittings in
the needle vent/aspiration pathway.
2. After servicing the needle-vent line, do the F79
function to recalibrate BD3.
3. If you moved or replaced any tubing in FD1, recalibrate
the SlideMaker fluid detectors. Refer to Heading 4.9 in
the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
Vls Diluent Error
NOT READY (GENS

System)
MANUAL MODE
(LH750 System)
VLS Diluter Error
Yes

SystemVLS Diluent Error
VLS Diluter Error
Red
light


r Obstruction, faulty sensor or

tubing moved within sensor.
r Pinched, kinked or cut tubing.

Service Only Note: Resetting the Analytical Station
automatically recalibrates the blood detector.
Representative.
Service Only:
1. Check for tubing kinks at the feed-thru and Y-fittings in
the needle vent/aspiration pathway.
2. After servicing the needle-vent line, do the F79
function to recalibrate BD3.
3. If you moved or replaced any tubing in FD1, recalibrate
the SlideMaker fluid detectors. Refer to Heading 4.9 in
the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
7.2-40
7.2-40
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-16 System Messages - W through Z

Analytical Station
Analyzer
Diluter
Screen Message
Workstation
Communications
Timeout
NOT READY
N/A
Wrong Cal. Factors
NOT READY
N/A
Workstation
Beeps
Log Message and


Sample Results
Red
light
No

System)
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Stopped
Communication timeout.
Communication between the
Analytical Station and the
Workstation.is lost.

Red
light
Incorrect calibration factors or

bath voltages.

2. Re-enter the calibration factors and/or aperture
voltages.
Red
light

occurred).
Invalid command received by

Diluter.

Representative.

occurred).

Representative.
Wrong echo received from Diluter

while transmitting data.

Representative.
Incorrect calibration factors

or bath voltages. Re-enter
calibration factors and/or
bath voltages.
Wrong Command
Interpretation
NOT READY
INVALID COMMAND
XX RECEIVED
Yes

System)
Diluter received an invalid

command from the AMC.
Wrong Command
Sequence
NOT READY
NOT READY FOR XX

COMMAND AFTER YY
Yes
N/A
Wrong Echo Xmit
NOT READY
N/A
No

System)
Red
light
failure: wrong echo. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B
7.2-41
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2-42
7.2-42
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES
7.3

Table 7.3-1 Workstation Messages - A through B
Workstation
System Status/Recovery
Applicable
Log
Sample Results System Status
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
A Control Lot number archive file was created.

Internal Message Code:
EV_CONTROL_LOT_ARCHIVED
Control
N/A
Ready
Operator created a control archive file.
Status only; no action necessary.
An archive file with patient samples was created
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator created an archive with a patient sample.
Status only, no action necessary.
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from Analyzer.

EV_CALIB_PRI_MOD_ANLYZ
Calibration
N/A
Ready
Workstation received new automatic CBC calibration factors from

Analyzer.
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S Workstation.

EV_CALIB_PRI_MOD_ADMS
Calibration
N/A
Ready
Operator initiated transmission of automatic CBC calibration

factors.
Auto-Numbering has been disabled.

EV_AUTONUMBER_DISABLED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator disabled the SID Auto-Numbering feature.
Auto-Numbering has been enabled auto number is <Auto-Numbering

Start ID>.
EV_AUTONUMBER_ ENABLED
Event
SID of next run

received will be
replaced by the
current Auto
Numbered SID.
Ready
Operator enabled the SID Auto-Numbering feature.
N/A
Analytical Station
stopped
Autostop was triggered for one of the following reasons:
Acknowledge error to clear Autostop condition.
Ready
A control Autostop condition has occurred.
1. Review the Control History Log to review specific error.

2. Perform corrective action per lab protocol.
Log Message and Icon on Command Center

EV_PATIENT_ARCHIVED
Autostop has been triggered for Analytical Station <Instrument#>.

EV_REPORT_AUTOSTOP
Red
light
Event
AutoStop has been triggered for control folder <lot#>.

EV_CONTROL_AUTO_STOP
Red
light
Controls
N/A
ToDo, Control, XB, or Data/Time error.
Background CBC test values within limits

EV_BACKGROUNDCBC_SUCCESSFUL
Daily Checks
Ready
The background test passed for the test specified.
N/A
Background DIFF test values within limits
Daily Checks
Ready
The background test passed for the test specified.
N/A
N/A
During a background test, one of the test parameters failed. Test

parameters are HGB blank, HGB read, WBC, RBC, HGB, PLT, DIFF,
RETIC, sheath pressure, DIFF pressure, DIFF LS offset, RETIC LS
offset, Laser voltage, RF300 Volts, RF6.3 Volts, and ambient
temperature.
1. Repeat the test.

2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

EV_BACKGROUNDDIFF_SUCCESSFUL
Background: <Background test/parameter> <Background> exceeded

<flag> limit
EV_STARTUP_FAILED
PN 4277219B
Red
light
Event (GENS
System)
Daily Checks
(LH750
System)
N/A
7.3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-2 Workstation Messages - C through G

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Ready
While performing calibration, a run was received with a

calibration factor different from current calibrations factors.
Calibration factors were either corrupted or changed manually.
1. Delete runs from calibration table.

2. Reset the Analyzer.
3. Restart calibration process.
Calibration factors received from analyzer unexpectedly - delete runs &

restart.
EV_CALIB_RCVD_FAC_UNEXPECTEDLY
Red
light
Calibration
Carryover failed: (<List Of Parameters That Failed With Result>).

EV_CARRY_FAILED
Red
light
Carryover
N/A
Ready
At least one parameter for the last carryover test performed on

the specified Analytical Station was outside the predefined limits.
Carryover parameters are WBC, RBC, HGB, PLT, DIFF and RETIC.
1. If the WBC value is out of limits, obtain a different specimen with a WBC
count of 10,000 1,000 and repeat the carryover test.
2. Otherwise, repeat the carryover test with the same specimen.
Carryover passed.
EV_CARRY_PASSED
Carryover
N/A
Ready
All parameters for the last carryover test performed on the

specified Analytical Station were within the predefined limits.
Comment for control folder <lot#>, <comment>, <comment>

EV_CONTROL_COMMENT
Control
N/A
N/A
Operator added a comment to specify control folder.
Control
N/A
Analytical Station
stopped if Control
AutoStop option is
enabled.
The Workstation compared the control run date with the control
folder expiration date and found that the run date is past the
expiration date. This could indicate:
1. Ensure the proper lot number was used for the control.
2. Ensure the expiration date for the control was set up correctly.
3. If you changed the lot number or expiration date, rerun the control.
Otherwise:
a. Discard the control materials.
b. Set up a new control.
c. Run the new control.
Control Folder <Lot #> is expired (<Expiration Date>).

Yellow traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is disabled.
Red traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is enabled.
EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_EXPIRED
Yellow
light
Red
light
r Control number was specified incorrectly.

r Expiration date was set up incorrectly.
r Control material has expired.
Control folder <lot#> created, it must be edited in a system setup for

valid flagging.
EV_CONTROLINSERTSETUP
Controls
Control run saved
Ready
No file setup for control run.
Download the assigned values from the control diskette, or manually enter the
assigned values and limits.
Control folder for lot number <lot #> created.

EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_CREATED
Control
N/A
Ready
Operator created new control folder for the specified lot number
from system Setup [Quality Assurance].
Control folder for lot number <lot #> deleted.

EV_CONTROL_LOT_DELETED
Control
N/A
Ready
Operator deleted control folder for the specified lot number from
System Setup [Quality Assurance].
Control folder for lot number <lot #> was edited.

EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_UPDATED
Control
N/A
Ready
Operator edited control folder from System Setup [Quality

Assurance].
Control
N/A
Analytical Station
stopped if Control
AutoStop option is
enabled.
At least one of the parameter results for the control run received
is outside the expected range (or lab limits). This could indicate:
Refer to the procedure in the Online Help System and in Chapter 3 of the
Operators Guide for what to do when a control is outside its expected ranges or
what to do when a latex control is outside its expected ranges.
Control run for control folder <Lot #> out of range.

Yellow traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is disabled.
Red traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is enabled.
EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_OUT_OF_RANGE
7.3-2
Yellow
light
Red
light
Note: The AutoStop

option only applies to
controls analyzed in the
Automatic Mode.
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
Improper mixing.
Control is stored in the wrong folder.
Control information was set up incorrectly.
Statistical outlier.
Change in the control material.
Bubbles or clog in the flow cell (latex controls only).
Analytical Station problem.
7.3-2
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-2 Workstation Messages - C through G (Continued)

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Control run outside limits condition has cleared
Controls
N/A
Ready
The previous control run was outside the limits, the current
control run is within the limits.
Daily Checks
N/A
Ready
During a Daily Check operation (StartUp), one of the following

Precision test parameters failed: WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, MCV,
MCH, MCHC, RDW, PLT, MPV, *PCT, *PDW.
1. Verify that the baths contain only clean diluent (no bleach or cleaning agent)
and that the diluent covers the apertures.
2. Repeat the Precision test at the Analyzer.
3. If the message recurs, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.

EV_CLEAR_CONTROL_LASTRUNOUT
Daily check precision test failed: (<List Of Parameters That Failed With
Result>).
EV_DAILY_CHECK_PRECISION_TEST_FAILED
Red
light
Daily check ramp test failed: (<List Of Parameters That Failed With
Result>).
EV_DAILY_CHECK_RAMP_TEST_FAILED
Red
light
* Research Use Only

Daily Checks
N/A
Ready
During a Daily Check operation (StartUp), one of the following

Ramp test parameters failed: WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, MCV, MCH,
MCHC, RDW, PLT, MPV, *PCT, *PDW.
* Research Use Only
Demographic information updated for <Sample ID>

EV_PAT_DEMO_UPDATED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed Demographic information for specified sample

ID.
1. Verify that the baths contain only clean diluent (no bleach or cleaning agent)
and that the diluent covers the apertures.
2. At the Analyzer, repeat the Ramp test.
3. If the message recurs, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Duplicate run date and/or run time received (<Run SID>, <Run C/P>).
EV_DUPLICATE_RUN_DATE_TIME
Red
light
Event
N/A
Analytical Station
stopped.
The Workstation received a sample run with an invalid run date

1. Check the clock on the Analyzer screen to see if it is incrementing.
and/or run time or two sample runs with the same date and time. 2. If the clock is not running, reset the Analytical Station.
3. If the clock is still not running, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Flow cell voltages/pressures out of specifications (<Run SID>, <Run

C/P>).
EV_INST_FLOWPRESSVOL
Yellow
light
Event
System Alarm
message printed
in footer of
sample report.
Ready
Analytical Station detected a flow cell problem such as Diff or

Retic sheath pressure or voltages out of specifications.
PN 4277219B
If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
7.3-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Host: Bad Field Count
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission
Ready for next Transmit

or Receive
The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined

format.
See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Host: Bad RCV Buffer End

EV_INTCOL_BAD_RCV_BUFFER
Red
light
Event
N/A
Ready
Data transmitted by Host to Workstation (ToDo List upload) was

unrecognizable or inconsistent.
1. LIS should retransmit.

Host: Bad TestName in TestField
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Host: Date format incorrect. Non Numeric

EV_INTCOL_NON_NUMERIC_DATE
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Host: ID1 Too Long In TestField

EV_INTCOL_ID1_TO_LONG
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Host: ID1 With TestType Pending Duplicate
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
See Host Transmission specification for correct format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.

EV_INTCOL_BAD_FIELD_CNT
Host: Bad Intro Field

EV_INTCOL_BAD_INTRO_FIELD

EV_INTCOL_BAD_FIELD_TEST
Host: Casspos Not 6 Chars In Testfield

EV_INTCOL_CASSPOS_NOT_SIX
Host: CassPos With TestType Pending Duplicate

EV_INTCOL_CASSPOS_DUPLICATE
Host: Date Format Incorrect

EV_INTCOL_BAD_DATE_FORMAT

EV_INTCOL_ID1_DUPLICATE
Host: Illegal Comma In TestField

EV_INTCOL_ILLEGAL_COMMA
Host: Insertion error, Test exists

EV_INTCOL_TEST_EXISTS
Host: Invalid Gender Entry

EV_INTCOL_BAD_SEX
Host: Leading Spaces In Field

EV_INTCOL_LEADING_SPACES
7.3-4
7.3-4
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H (Continued)

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Host: No Comma After Testname In TestField

EV_INTCOL_NO_COMMA
Host: No CRLF at End of Preamble

EV_INTCOL_NO_CRLF
Host: No CRLF At Field End

EV_INTCOL_NO_CRLF_FIELD
Host: No data in transmitted field

EV_INTCOL_LEADING_SPACE
Host: No ID1 Or CassPos

EV_INTCOL_NO_ID1_ORCASS
Host: No SOH in preamble

EV_INTCOL_NO_SOH
Host: No Space after Tag

EV_INTCOL_NO_SPACE_AFTER_TAG
Host: No String Between Commas In TestField

EV_INTCOL_NO_STRING
Host: No Valid Field Tag found

EV_INTCOL_NO_VALID_TAG
Host: Non Alpha Char In Alpha Field

EV_INTCOL_NON_ALPHA
Host: Non Alphanumeric in Alphanumeric field

EV_INTCOL_NON_ALPHANUMERIC
Host: Non Numeric Char In Numeric Field

EV_INTCOL_NON_NUMERIC
Host: Nonnumeric Casspos Char In TestField

EV_INTCOL_CASSPOS_NOT_NUMERIC
Host: Num Of Fields Mismatch in Preamble

EV_INTCOL_PREAMBLE_MISMATCH
PN 4277219B
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
N/A

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
7.3-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H (Continued)

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Host: Number Of Fields Count is 0

EV_INTCOL_0_FIELD_CNT
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Event
N/A

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Event
Abort
transmission

or Receive

format.
Red
light
Host: Test request UPDATED No Valid Patient ID

EV_INTCOL_NO_PAT_ID
Host: Time Format Incorrect

EV_INTCOL_BAD_TIME
Host: Time Format Incorrect Non Numeric

EV_INTCOL_NON_NUMERIC_TIME
Host: Trailing Spaces In Field

EV_INTCOL_TRAILING_SPACES
7.3-6
7.3-6
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-4 Workstation Messages - I through K

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Sample run status

set to
MISMATCH.
Results reported.
Ready
Sample ID (barcode) received does not match the preassigned ID.

This condition can occur only when the Cass/Pos is used as
positive identifier and any of the following occurs:
1. Check the cassette, tube, and labels. Ensure that the tube is in the correct
position and the label is properly placed and readable. If necessary,
reposition the tube or label, or replace the label for future use.
2. Check the sample ID preassignment values. If they are incorrect, edit the
values.
N/A
N/A
ID MISMATCH: Sample ID received does not match pre-assigned ID

(<Run C/P>, <Run SID>), (<Pre-Assigned SID>, <Pre-Assigned C/P>).
EV_ID_MISMATCH
Yellow
light
Instrument has not performed a shutdown in <24> hours. Beckman

Coulter service recommends shutdown every 24 hours. (GENS
System only)
EV_INSTRUMENT_REQUIRES_SHUTDOWN
Yellow
light
Event
Interpreter Collator ABORT. Cannot allocate graphics or Raw Data.

EV_INTCOL_RG_ABORT
Red
light
Event
Discarded
N/A
Memory allocation error at Workstation
Shutdown and restart Workstation.
Interpreter Collator Forced to Reset

EV_INTCOL_RESET
Red
light
Event
Discarded
N/A
Communications error between Workstation and Analyzer.
Shutdown and restart the Workstation.
Interpreter Collator has timed-out indicating a possible Analytical

Station malfunction
EV_INTCOL_TIMEOUT
Red
light
Event
None
Unknown
Communications between the Workstation and the Analytical

Station were interrupted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator or RCS performed an IQAP data collection.
IQAP data collected.

Internal message Code:
EV_IQAP_COLLECTED
PN 4277219B
Event
r Tube is misplaced in the cassette.

r Tube ID is not read.
r Preassigned sample ID is entered incorrectly.
Shutdown time frame was exceeded.
Shutdown
Note: This condition continues and increments on four hour

intervals until Startup is performed.
Reset the Analytical Station

Shutdown and restart the Workstation.
Check cable connections.
If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
7.3-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-5 Workstation Messages - L through N

Workstation

Last Two XB batches are outside limits.
Yellow traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is disabled.
Red traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is enabled.
EV_XBXM_BATCHES_OUTSIDE_LIMITS
Yellow
light
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
XB
N/A
Last XB batch is outside limits.
1. Ensure all results are reportable. If necessary, exclude non-reportable

results from the statistics.
2. Check the results for a nonrandom sample distribution.
Red
light
Analytical Station
stopped if XB AutoStop
option (2 batches out)
is enabled.
r If a nonrandom sample distribution is the problem, document the

problem based on your laboratorys protocol and continue
processing samples.
r Otherwise, troubleshoot for a possible Analytical Station
problem.
Last XB Batch is out of limits.

Yellow traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is disabled.
Red traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is enabled.
EV_XBXM_LASTBATCHOUT
Yellow
light
XB
N/A
Red
light
Analytical Station
stopped if XB AutoStop
option (1 batch out) is
enabled.
The last XB batch is outside limits.
1. Ensure all results are reportable. If necessary, exclude nonreportable

results from the statistics.
2. Check the results for a nonrandom sample distribution.
r If a nonrandom sample distribution is the problem, document the

problem based on your laboratorys protocol and continue
processing samples.
r Otherwise, troubleshoot for a possible Analytical Station
problem.
Last XB batch outside limit conditions has cleared

EV_CLEAR_XBXM_LASTBATCHOUT
XB
N/A
Ready
Last XB batch was out of limits and current XB batch is within

limits.
LIS Upload: Invalid report Profile Requested

EV_HOSTCOM_BADRP
Event
N/A
Ready
Invalid profile was sent to host.
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from Analyzer.

EV_ CALIB_ SEC_ MOD_ ANLYZ
Calibration
N/A
Ready
Workstation received new manual CBC calibration factors from

Analyzer.
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S Workstation.

EV_CALIB_SEC_MOD_ADMS
Calibration
N/A
Ready
Secondary calibration factor was changed.
Reproducibility
Discarded
Ready
User attempted to run more than the maximum allowable

reproducibility cycles.
Change operating mode from Reproducibility to Auto Analysis
Maximum # Of Repro runs Exceeded - Sample Not Stored

EV_REPRO_MAXRUNS_EXCEEDED
7.3-8
Red
light
7.3-8
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-7 Workstation Messages - N

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
No Calibrator lot number. No statistics will be calculated

EV_CALIB_NO_CALIBRATOR
Red
light
Calibration
N/A
N/A
When no lot number has been entered for calibration table.
Enter lot number and save.
No latex Setup Information available, latex sample will not be stored.

EV_SETUP_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
Red
light
Calibration
Discarded
Ready
Operator ran a latex control sample and no latex control file was
set up.
Create a latex control file and rerun the control.
NO MATCH: Sample run received does not match any ToDo list entry
(<Run C/P>, <Run SID>).
Yellow traffic light is displayed until AutoStop condition is reached.
Red traffic light is displayed when AutoStop condition is reached.
EV_RUN_NO_MATCH_TODO_LIST_ENTRY
Yellow
light
Event
Sample run status

set to NO MATCH.
Results reported.
On Systems with
software version 2B1 or
lower: The Analytical
Station stopped after
three consecutive NO
MATCH errors, or a
total of 10 NO MATCH,
NO READ or PART.ASP.
errors.
The sample run received does not match a ToDo List entry. This
could indicate:
Red
light
On Systems with
software version 2C or
higher and the
No Match AutoStop
option selected: The
Analytical Station
stopped after 1 -10 (the
number is user
programmable)
consecutive NO MATCH
errors.
NO READ: Sample run received without proper identification (<Run

C/P>, <Run SID>).
Yellow traffic light is displayed until AutoStop condition is reached.
Red traffic light is displayed when AutoStop condition is reached.
EV_RUN_NO_PROPER_IDENTIFICATION
Yellow
light
Red
light
Event
Sample run status

set to NO READ.
Results reported.
On Systems with
software version 2B1 or
lower: The Analytical
Station stopped after
three consecutive NO
READ errors, or a total
of 10 NO MATCH, NO
READ or PART.ASP.
errors.
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
Preassigned Cass/Pos or sample ID was entered incorrectly.

Sample was run in incorrect test mode
Tube was misplaced in the cassette
Incorrect test assigned in the ToDo List.
Label is smudged.
Label is misplaced.
Bar-code reader is dirty.
The sample run received is not properly identified. This condition

can occur only when the positive identification scheme used is
Cass/Pos and SID.This could indicate:
r Label is smudged.
r Tube or label is misplaced.
r Bar-code reader is dirty.
1. Select
on the Operator Alert window.
2. Check the ToDo list. If identification information is incorrect, edit the
information.
5. If the message persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.
1. Select
on the Operator Alert window.
4. If the message persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.
On Systems with
software version 2C or
higher and the
No Read AutoStop
option selected: The
Analytical Station
stopped after 1-10 (the
number is user
programmable)
consecutive NO READ
errors.
PN 4277219B
7.3-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Operator <Operator ID> added <Location Name> to the location list.

EV_SETUP_LOCATION_ADDED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator added the specified location to the location list.
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physicians First Name, Last Name> to

the physician list.
EV_SETUP_PHYSICIAN_ADDED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator added the specified physician to the physician list.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Analytical Station setup

EV_SETUP_INSTRUMENT_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed Instrument setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Database setup
Event
N/A
Ready
User changed database setup.
Event
N/A
Operator changed Decision Rules setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Display Labels setup

EV_SETUP_DISPLAY_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed SlideMaker labels setup
Operator <Operator ID> changed Institution setup
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed Institution setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed lis/his setup

EV_SETUP_LIS_HIS_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Operator changed LIS/HIS setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed location <Location Name> to

<Location Name>.
EV_SETUP_LOCATION_MODIFIED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator changed the specified location from the location list to

another location.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Parameter setup

EV_SETUP_PARAMETER_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed Parameters setup
Operator <Operator ID> changed physician <Physicians First Name,

Last Name> to <Physicians First Name, Last Name>
EV_SETUP_PHYSICIAN_MODIFIED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator changed the specified physician from the physician list

to another physician.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Print setup

EV_SETUP_PRINT_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed print configuration setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed reagents setup.

EV_REAGENT_CHANGED
Reagent
N/A
Ready
Operator changed the reagent setup information

EV_SETUP_DATABASE_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Decision Rules setup

EV_SETUP_DECISION_CHANGED

EV_SETUP_INSTITUTION_CHANGED
7.3-10
7.3-10
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O (Continued)

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Operator <Operator ID> changed Reporting Units setup

EV_SETUP_REPORTINGUNITS_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed Reporting Units setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Shifts definition: ([HH:MM:SS,

HH:MM:SS, HH:MM:SS] Or [No Shifts]).
EV_SETUP_SHIFTS_CHANGED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator modified the shift setup. Add to the message the

starting time for each shift defined, or No shifts if the operator
decided to work without shifts.
Operator <Operator ID> changed Workstation setup
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator changed Workstation setup.
Operator <Operator ID> changed XB setup.

EV_SETUP_XBXM_CHANGED
XB
N/A
N/A
Operator edited XB target and/or limit values from Setup [Quality

Assurance].
Status only: no action necessary.
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <# of Runs> Run(s) from Control Folder
<Lot #>.
EV_CONTROL_RUNS_DELETED
Control
N/A
N/A
Operator deleted specified runs from selected control folder.
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Location Name> from the location list.
EV_SETUP_LOCATION_DELETED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator deleted the specified location from the location list.
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Physicians First Name, Last Name>

from the physician list.
EV_SETUP_PHYSICIAN_DELETED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator deleted the specified physician to from the physician

list.
Operator <Operator ID> installed <Reagent Type><Coulter/Non-Coulter>

Reagent Lot to: <New Lot#>, opened on <Open Date> with open
expiration <Open Exp>
EV_REAGENT_INSTALLED
Reagent
N/A
Ready
The operator updated information for the reagent <Lot #>.
Operator <Operator ID> requested Research Use Only certification.

EV_SETUP_RESEARCH_USE_ONLY_REQUEST
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator enable the research parameters.
Operator <Operator ID> shutdown the GEN S Workstation.

EV_SHUTDOWN
Event (GENS
System)
N/A
N/A
The defined operator shutdown the Workstation.
Operator <Operator ID> Started RAS

EV_RASSTARTED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator initiated icon.
N/A
Operator <Operator ID> Stopped RAS

EV_RASSTOPPED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator initiated icon.
N/A

EV_SETUP_WORKSTATION_CHANGED
PN 4277219B
Daily Checks
(LH750
System)
7.3-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O (Continued)

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Operator acknowledged stop condition

EV_OPERATOR_ACKNOWLEDGED_STOP
Event
N/A
Analytical Station
previously stopped, will
now analyze samples.
Operator acknowledged the ToDo, Control, XB, or Date/Time error

conditions. The Analytical Station is allowed to analyze samples.
N/A
Operator selected assay limits for control folder <Lot #>.

EV_CONTROL_ASSAY_SELECTED
Control
N/A
N/A
Operator selected assay limits for the specified control folder.
7.3-12
7.3-12
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-9 Workstation Messages - P through V

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Password changed.
EV_SETUP_PASSWORD_CHANGED
Event
N/A
N/A
Operator currently logged on has changed his password.
Precision test values within limits.

EV_PRECISION_SUCCESSFUL
Daily Checks
N/A
Ready
The Precision test passed.
Ramp Test values within limits.

EV_RAMP_SUCCESSFUL
Daily Checks
N/A
Ready
The Ramp test passed
Reagent
N/A
Ready
The reagent(s) mentioned is expired: Diluent, CBC lyse, DIFF Pak,

Retic Pak, and/or cleaner. (The conditions of this error occur
when the Startup cycle is performed on the Analyzer).
Reagent setup dialog is automatically displayed. Verify that reagent expiration

date is correct. Replace reagent if necessary. Enter new reagent lot number and
expirations dates.
Received Host Deletion Request: %1, %2 ToDo List entries were

deleted.
EV_HOST_DELETE_SUCCESS
Event
N/A
N/A
Repro Set Deleted

EV_REPRO_SET_DELETED
Reproducibility
Sample ID portion of the Positive ID has changed

EV_POSITIVEID_CHANGED
Event
N/A
Event
N/A
Reagent <Reagent lot#> is expired

EV_REAGENT_EXPIRED
The C: drive is full. Please clear Print and Transmission buffers from
Run Configuration.
EV_DISK_FULL
PN 4277219B
Yellow
light
Red
light
Status only, no action necessary
The operator cleared the reproducibility table.
Ready
Operator changed the patient sample run positive identification

scheme to SID, Cass/Pos, or SID + Cass/Pos.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7.3-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-13 Workstation Messages - W through Z

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Workload has been automatically reset in the database

EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_AUTOMATICALLY_RESET
Event
N/A
Ready
The workload recording is automatically reset (restart at zero)

after 365 days.
Workload has been manually archived

EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_MANUALLY_ARCHIVED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator initiated an archiving of the workload recording.
Workload has been manually printed

EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_MANUALLY_PRINTED
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator initiated a printing of the workload recording.
Workload has been manually reset

EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_MANUALLY_RESET
Event
N/A
Ready
Operator reset the workload recording (restart at zero) by deleting

the table.
Workload was automatically printed.

EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_AUTOMATICALLY_PRINTED
Event
N/A
Ready
Cycle count results are automatically printed when the operator

resets the workload recording or after 365 days.
Wrong Calibration Type, Latex Sample will not be stored. (GENS

System only)
EV_CALIB_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
Red
light
Calibration
Discarded
Ready
The run received is of Latex type (ie., F55, F56, F57, F58...) and
cannot be received in Carryover mode.
Verify Workstation mode of operation is consistent with sample material.
Wrong Calibration Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample.

EV_CALIB_WRONGTYPE_SAMPLE
Yellow
light
Calibration
Stored as patient
sample
Ready
When running a calibration test the operator changed the

aspiration mode (Automatic vs. Manual).
Rerun the sample in the correct aspiration mode. (Automatic or Manual).
Wrong Carryover Type, latex Sample will not be stored.

EV_CARRY_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
Red
light
Carryover
Discarded
Ready
The run received is of Latex type (ie., F55, F56, F57, F58...) and
cannot be received in Carryover mode.
Wrong Carryover Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample.

EV_CARRY_WRONGTYPE_SAMPLE
Yellow
light
Carryover
Stored as patient
sample
Ready
When running a Carryover test the operator changed the

aspiration mode (Automatic vs. Manual).
Rerun the sample in the correct aspiration mode. (Automatic or Manual).
Wrong Control 5C Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample.

EV_CONTROL_WRONGTYPE_5C
Yellow
light
Controls
N/A
A 5C control was run and the instrument was not in any of the
following modes: CDC, CD, CDR, CR.
Change the instrument to one of the following modes and rerun the control:
CDC, CD, CDR, CR.
Wrong Control Retics Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample.

EV_CONTROL_WRONGTYPE_RETIC
Yellow
light
Controls
Ready
A Retic control was run and the instrument was not in any of the
following modes: CDR, CR, R.
Change the instrument to one of the following modes and rerun the control:
CDR, CR, R.
Wrong Match and Balance Type, latex Sample will not be stored.
Red
light
Calibration
Ready
When running latex particles on Match and Balance table.
Service Only:
Yellow
light
Calibration

EV_CALIB_BALWRONGTYPE_LATEX
Wrong Match and Balance Type, Sample will be stored as a

Patient Sample.
Discarded
Run latex particles on calibration table.

N/A
Ready
When running a sample that does not belong in a Match and

Balance table.
Service Only:
Run sample on Patients results.

EV_CALIB_BALWRONGTYPE_SAMPLE
7.3-14
7.3-14
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-13 Workstation Messages - W through Z (Continued)

Workstation
Applicable
Log
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Repro
N/A
Ready
The run received is of Latex type (ie., F55, F56, F57...) and cannot
be received in the Reproducibility mode.
XB all batches were deleted

EV_XBXM_CLEARALLBATCHES
XB
N/A
Ready
The operator cleared all XB batches.
XB current batch was deleted

EV_XBXM_LASTBATCHDEL
XB
N/A
Ready
The operator deleted the current XB batch.

Wrong Repro Type, latex Sample will not be stored.
EV_REPRO_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
PN 4277219B
Red
light
7.3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3-16
7.3-16
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS
7.4

Summary
This section provides a summary of the instruments power voltages and power voltage signal
lines, timing tables, and flow diagrams of the power-up sequence and the compressors dump
valve check routine, as tools for troubleshooting power-up problems. For a complete
description of the development of electronic power for the Analytical Station and the
power-up sequence, refer to Headings 2.5 and 2.6, respectively.
Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines

Table 7.4-1 summarizes the instrument power voltages and power voltage signal lines.
.
Table 7.4-1 Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines

Voltages
Description
Signal Lines Description
+48 V1
Main 48 V from 48 V1 power supply routed to

the backplane voltage bus.
V1 RETURN
Signal routed to the Bulk Power

Supply to turn on 48 V1 (active low).
48 V1 Return
Floating ground return for 48 V1 power supply.
+48 V2
48 V from 48 V2 power supply routed to the

Motor Controller card to run the
compressor/vacuum pump.
V2 RETURN
Signal routed to the Bulk Power

Supply to turn on 48 V2 (active low).
48 V2 Return
Floating ground return for 48 V2 power supply
+5.2 V Control
Control voltage from 5.2 V control power

supply used to generate the power-up
sequence.
Control Return
Floating ground return for 5.2 V control power

supply.
Power-Up Sequence
The power-up sequence consists of two sequences, the ac power sequence followed by the
instrument power on sequence. Table 7.4-2 describes the ac power sequence (by time);
Table 7.4-3 describes the instrument power on sequence. Figure 7.4-1 is a flow diagram of the
power-up sequence. The legend for the numbered items is below the figure.
Table 7.4-2 AC Power Timing Sequence
Relative Time
(in seconds) Action
0
The circuit breaker on the Power Supply is turned on.
2.5

r
r
r
SPC card CR1 (+48 V2) LED and CR2 (+48 V1) LED turn red.
SPC card CR3 (+5 V CTRL) LED and CR4 (+12 V) LED turn amber.
Circulation fans turn on.
At the Analyzer:
r
r
PN 4277219B
APS1 card LED turns amber.

APS2 card LED turns amber.
7.4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.4-3 Instrument Power-On Timing Sequence

Relative Time
(in seconds) Action
0
The POWER ON button on the Diluter/numeric keypad is pressed.

At the Analyzer, circulation fans turn on.
At the Diluter:
r
r
Diluter 1 card +5, +15, -15 and HGBOK LEDs light.

Diluter 2 card CR3 LEDs light momentarily.
If a laser bar-code reader is installed, the laser ON light comes on for 10 seconds.

r
r
SPC Display turns on.

SPC card CR8 LED turns red then amber as the SPC card is checked for 1 second, then turns
green if all checks pass.
At the Analyzer, APS1 card LED turns red for 1 second and then turns green.
1.5
At the Power Supply, SPC Display starts updating.
At the Analyzer:
r
r
r
APS2 card LED turns red for 0.2 seconds during status check of the card and of the signals it
receives from the SPC, Diff Power Supply, and Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply cards, and
then turns green if all checks pass.
CRT turns on
DIFF PROCESSOR card SWSCAN LED lights.
Note: The SWSCAN LED is located behind the upper white tab of the card.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display turns on and displays the software version for 1 second.
2.5
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to CHECKING CRC for about 10 seconds.
11
The GENS System beeps twice, the LH 750 System beeps once.
12.5
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT for 2 seconds.
14
At the Diluter:
r
r
r
Diluter 1 card SWSCAN LED starts blinking.

Diluter 2 card SCAN LED (on CR3) starts blinking, and the DWSEN lights.
Diluter 3 card SW SCAN LED (CR2) starts blinking.
16
At the Power Supply, compressor/vacuum pump turns on. See Figure 7.4-2.
17
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to PERFORMING MINI PRIME.

Note: The Diluter mini-prime sequence varies depending whether or not a SlideMaker is installed.
101
At the Analyzer:
r
r
AMC SWSCAN LED starts blinking

CRT displays READY.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to READY.
7.4-2
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 7.4-1 Power-Up Sequence

1
A C
T V S
A C
2
B re a k e r
/ P O W E R O F F
N u m e r ic
k e y p a d
A C
E L E C T E M P
7 / P O W E R O N
C O N T R O L R E T U R N
1 1 / P W R F A IL
1 4
/ V 2 R E T U R N
+ 4 8 V 1
1 0
A M C
1 2
1 3
C O N T R O L
R E T U R N
/ S Y S T E M R E S E T
IB U S
S P C
c a rd
4 8 V 2 R E T U R N
+ 4 8 V 2
/ V 1 R E T U R N
D IL P R O C /
D IL C P U
c a rd
4 8 V 1 R E T U R N
B u lk
P o w e r
S u p p ly
5 .2 V C O N T R O L
1 5
M o to r
C o n tr o lle r
c a rd
P N E U T E M P
9
D IL 1
c a rd
G E N
S S y s te m
5 .2 V C O N T R O L 6
D ilu te r
k e y p a d
1 6
C o m p re s s o r/
v a c u u m p u m p
C O N T R O L R E T U R N
7 / P O W E R O N
A P S 1
c a rd
L E D
A P S 2
c a rd
L E D
/ P O W E R O F F
7 2 1 9 0 2 9 B
AC Power Sequence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Circuit breaker on Power Supply is turned on.

Ac input to Bulk Power Supply.
Bulk Power Supply outputs 5.2 V CTRL.
SPC card outputs 5.2 V CTRL to IBUS for distribution throughout instrument.
APS1 and APS2 LEDs turn amber.
On GENS System, Diluter 1 card routes 5.2 V CTRL to Diluter keypad. The Diluter 1 card does not contain any
active components.
Instrument is ready for the POWER ON button on the Diluter keypad to be pressed.
Instrument Power On Sequence
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
POWER ON button on Diluter keypad is pressed.

Low POWER ON signal goes to SPC card.
SPC card routes low V1 RETURN to Bulk Power Supply which outputs +48 V1 to the backplane voltage bus, if ELEC
TEMP is in range. (If ELEC TEMP is out of range, the power-up sequence fails.)
SPC card routes PWR FAIL signal to AMC.
AMC routes SYSTEM RESET to IBUS and digital backplane.
DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GENS System) or DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System) resets and routes START
COMPRESSOR to SPC card. (This signal is on the IBUS in parallel format and cannot be measured without a logic
analyzer.)
SPC card routes low V2 RETURN to Bulk Power Supply if PNEU TEMP is in range. (If PNEU TEMP is out of range
the instrument powers up with an error message.)
Bulk Power Supply outputs +48 V2 to Motor Controller card.
Motor Controller card starts compressor/vacuum pump.
PN 4277219B
7.4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Dump Valve Check Routine

The dump valve check routine detailed in Figure 7.4-2 is done whenever the compressor is
turned on, including at the beginning of the power-up sequence, the reset sequence, and the
startup cycle.
Figure 7.4-2 Dump Valve Check Routine
Compressor
ON valve OFF
Wait for
5 seconds
60 psi reading
<45 psi?
NO
YES
Wait for
Valve OFF
0.5 seconds and 3 seconds
ON 0.3 seconds
for 3 times.
Leave valve ON.
60 psi reading
drop >5 psi?
NO
Generates
DUMP VALVE
STUCK CLOSED
error.
YES
Wait for
3 seconds
60 psi reading
rise >5 psi?
NO
YES
Valve OK
Leaves compressor
OFF and valve ON
Wait for
Valve ON
0.3 seconds and 3 seconds
OFF 0.5 seconds
for 3 times. Leave
valve OFF.
60 psi reading
rise >5 psi?
NO
Generates
DUMP VALVE
STUCK OPEN
error.
YES
Wait for
2 seconds
Valve OFF
Wait for
3 seconds
Continue
7253423D
The flow diagram of this routine (Figure 7.4-2) can be used as an aid in troubleshooting
DUMP VALVE STUCK OPEN and DUMP VALVE STUCK CLOSED errors.
7.4-4
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
48 Volts Failure Isolation

The Bulk Power Supply generates two +48 supply voltages, one for the Analytical Station and
the other for the compressor/vacuum pump. During normal operation two active low
signals from the System Power Controller card, V1 RETURN (Analyzer) and V2 RETURN
(compressor) turn on the 48 V. These two signals are located on connector J6/P6 on the
System Power Controller card, pins 6 and 7. Use the following procedure to determine if a
48 V failure is caused by a defective Bulk Power Supply or by a missing or incorrect
control signal.
Procedure
Supply.
PN 4277219B
1.
2.
To access the System Power Controller card, remove the Power Supply cover and left side
panel as directed under Heading 4.13, beginning at step 2.
3.
Manually force a low condition to turn on the 48 V by placing jumpers between test
points on the System Power Controller card.
a.
If you suspect the Analyzer 48 V, place a jumper between TP19 and TP20. For test
point locations, refer to Figure A.4-4.
a.
If you suspect the compressor 48 V, place a jumper between TP17 and TP18. For
test point locations, refer to Figure A.4-4.
4.
5.
If both 48 V in the Bulk Power Supply are present and the System goes to READY, the
Bulk Power Supply is functioning. Look for problems in other assemblies causing a
missing or incorrect control signal.
6.
When you have finished troubleshooting, power down the Analytical Station and remove
the jumpers.
7.4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4-6
PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2
7.5

The three flow-cell errors, FC (Full Clog), PC1 (Partial Clog 1), and PC2 (Partial Clog 2), are
displayed on the Workstation Patient Tests - Results and Graphics screen, in the upper left
corner of the DataPlot. For all three errors, the diff parameter results (both % and #) are
replaced with the (:::::) code.
PC1 and PC2 are based on the DC count and time. FC is triggered by a special circuit, the
Clog Detector, on the RF/DC Detector Preamp. See Table 7.5-1 for the specific conditions that
trigger a flow-cell error and a list of typical causes.
Table 7.5-1 Flow-Cell Errors
Error
Condition
Typical Causes
FC
Overvoltage is detected in the RF/DC current in the flow

cell. (The current is not flowing correctly between the
two electrodes in the flow cell.)
1. Particulate matter plugging flow cell.
Note: When an FC error occurs, the RF/DC current is

turned off.
When an FC is detected, the instrument stops the cycle
and starts an autoclear. If the FC error is not cleared
after three attempts, the instrument stops.
2. Interruption in RF/DC aperture current from:

r Bubbles.
r Open circuit.
r Coaxial cable problems.
3. Defective RF tube inside the RF/DC Detector
Preamp card.
4. Chemistry problems.
5. Incorrectly adjusted Clog Detector circuit. To adjust
the circuit, refer to Clog Detector Circuit Verification
on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum
Tube under Heading 4.74, RF DETECTOR PREAMP
CARD ADJUSTMENTS.
6. Failure of the Clog Detector circuit.
PC1
The following conditions must exist to generate a

PC1 error:
r The WBC is >1K and <56K.
1. Obstructed sample line to flow cell.

2. Partially plugged flow cell. Purge the flow cell to
remove any partial plugs.
r The DC count time exceeds the expected count time 3. Sample pressure too low (flow not fast enough). To
adjust the sample and sheath pressure, refer to
by greater than 50% where Heading 4.72, INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE
[(7000/WBC) x 10 = Expected Time].
PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS.
For example, if the count time for a WBC of 7,000 is
4. Sheath pressure too high (sample flow restricted).
>15 s (which is 50% more than the expected
To adjust the sample and sheath pressure, refer to
10 seconds), a PC1 occurs.
Heading 4.72, INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE
When PC1 is detected three times consecutively, the
PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS.
instrument initiates an autoclear routine at the end of
5. Pressure leak at mixing chamber.
the third cycle. However, due to the overlap of
instrument cycles, the autoclear routine does not
actually occur until the end of the fourth cycle.
PN 4277219B
7.5-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.5-1 Flow-Cell Errors (Continued)

Error
Condition
Typical Causes
PC2
The following conditions must exist to generate a

PC2 error:
1. Obstructions in the lower sheath input (sample

rushes through the flow cell).
r The WBC is >1K and <56K.

r Either 8192 cells accumulate within <1.0 second or
zero (0) cells accumulate within 1.0 second.
When PC2 is detected, the instrument initiates an
autoclear routine at the end of the cycle. However, due
to the overlap of instrument cycles, the autoclear
routine does not actually occur until the end of the
next cycle.
2. Chemistry imbalance caused by:

r Incorrect diff lytic reagent, diff preservative,
and/or blood-sample volumes. To check the
volumes:
t
Dispensed by the diff lytic reagent

pump, refer to Heading 4.28, DIFF
LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK,
ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT.
Dispensed by the diff preservative

pump, refer to Heading 4.29, DIFF
PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK,
ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT.
Pulled by the aspiration pump, refer to

Heading 4.27, ASPIRATION PUMP
CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT.
r Incorrect mixing in the mixing chamber.

r Incorrect rinsing and/or draining at mixing
chamber.
r Interferences in the blood specimen, such as:
t
Lipemia.
Extreme chemistry imbalances.
Drugs.
r Condition of reagents, such as:

t
Diluent frozen and improperly mixed

after thawing.
Reagents contaminated.
Reagents outdated.
3. Air flowing through the flow cell (no sample or diff

lytic reagent delivered).
7.5-2
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
8
PARTS LISTS, 8.1-1

8.1
MASTER PARTS LIST, 8.1-1
8.2
ILLUSTRATED PARTS, 8.2-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
8.2-1
8.2-2
8.2-3
8.2-4
8.2-5
8.2-6
8.2-7
8.2-8
8.2-9
8.2-10
8.2-11
8.2-12
8.2-13
8.2-14
8.2-15
8.2-16
8.2-17
8.2-18
8.2-19
8.2-20
8.2-21
8.2-22
8.2-23
8.2-24
8.2-25
8.2-26
8.2-27
8.2-28
8.2-29
8.2-30
8.2-31
8.2-32
8.2-33
8.2-34
8.2-35
PN 4277219B
Main Analytical Station Components Illustrated, 8.2-1

Analyzer, Front Door (See Table 8.2-2), 8.2-2
Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-3), 8.2-4
GENS System Diluter, Front Doors and Covers (See Table 8.2-4), 8.2-6
Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Table 8.2-5), 8.2-8
Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-6), 8.2-10
Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-7), 8.2-12
Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-8), 8.2-14
Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-9), 8.2-16
Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-10), 8.2-18
Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-11), 8.2-20
Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-12), 8.2-22
Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-13), 8.2-24
(See Table 8.2-14), 8.2-26
Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Table 8.2-15), 8.2-28
Diluter, Tube Ram Cylinder and Bar-Code Scanners and Cylinder See
Table 8.2-16), 8.2-30
Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Table 8.2-17), 8.2-32
Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Table 8.2-18), 8.2-34
Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Table 8.2-19), 8.2-36
Table 8.2-20), 8.2-38
Diluter, Diff Module (See Table 8.2-21), 8.2-40
Diluter, Retic Module (See Table 8.2-22), 8.2-42
Diluter, BSV Module (See Table 8.2-23), 8.2-44
Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Table 8.2-24), 8.2-46
Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Table 8.2-25), 8.2-48
Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Table 8.2-26), 8.2-50
Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Table 8.2-27), 8.2-52
(See Table 8.2-28), 8.2-54
(See Table 8.2-29), 8.2-56
Check Valves and Chokes (See Table 8.2-30.), 8.2-58
Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Table 8.2-31), 8.2-60
Common Valves (See Table 8.2-32), 8.2-62
Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-33), 8.2-64
(See Table 8.2-34), 8.2-66
Table 8.2-35), 8.2-68
8-i
CONTENTS
8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See
Table 8.2-36), 8.2-70
8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Table 8.2-37), 8.2-72
8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See Table 8.2-38), 8.2-74
8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Table 8.2-39), 8.2-76
8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-40), 8.2-77
8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-41), 8.2-78
8.2-42 Random Access Module Components (See Table 8.2-42), 8.2-80
TABLES
8.1-1
8.1-2
8.1-3
8.1-4
8.1-5
8.1-6
8.1-7
8.1-8
8.1-9
8.1-10
8.1-11
8.1-12
8.1-13
Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List, 8.1-1

Master Parts List - A through B, 8.1-3
Master Parts List - C, 8.1-4
Master Parts List - D through E, 8.1-10
Master Parts List - F through G, 8.1-11
Master Parts List - H, 8.1-15
Master Parts List - I through M, 8.1-19
Master Parts List - N and O, 8.1-21
Master Parts List - P through R, 8.1-22
Master Parts List - S, 8.1-26
Master Parts List - T, 8.1-31
Master Parts List - U through V, 8.1-36
Master Parts List - W through Z, 8.1-37
8.2-1
8.2-2
8.2-3
8.2-4
8.2-5
8.2-6
8.2-7
8.2-8
8.2-9
8.2-10
8.2-11
8.2-12
8.2-13
8.2-14
Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1, 8.2-1

Analyzer, Front Cover (See Figure 8.2-2), 8.2-3
Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Panel and Cover (See Figure 8.2-3), 8.2-5
Diluter, Front Covers (See Figure 8.2-4), 8.2-7
Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Figure 8.2-5), 8.2-9
Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-6), 8.2-11
Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-7), 8.2-13
Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-8), 8.2-15
Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-9), 8.2-17
Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-10), 8.2-19
Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-11), 8.2-21
Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-12), 8.2-23
Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-13), 8.2-25
(See Figure 8.2-14), 8.2-27
Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Figure 8.2-15), 8.2-29
Diluter, Bar-Code Scanner and Tube Ram Cylinder (See Figure 8.2-16), 8.2-31
Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Figure 8.2-17), 8.2-33
Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Figure 8.2-18), 8.2-35
Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Figure 8.2-19), 8.2-37
Figure 8.2-20), 8.2-39
Diluter, Diff Module (See Figure 8.2-21), 8.2-41
8.2-15
8.2-16
8.2-17
8.2-18
8.2-19
8.2-20
8.2-21
8-ii
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
8.2-22
8.2-23
8.2-24
8.2-25
8.2-26
8.2-27
8.2-28
8.2-29
8.2-30
8.2-31
8.2-32
8.2-33
8.2-34
8.2-35
8.2-36
8.2-37
8.2-38
8.2-39
8.2-40
8.2-41
8.2-42
PN 4277219B
Diluter, Retic Module (See Figure 8.2-22), 8.2-43

Diluter, BSV Module (See Figure 8.2-23), 8.2-45
Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Figure 8.2-24), 8.2-47
Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Figure 8.2-25), 8.2-49
Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Figure 8.2-26), 8.2-51
Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Figure 8.2-27), 8.2-53
(See Figure 8.2-28), 8.2-55
(See Figure 8.2-29), 8.2-57
Check Valves and Chokes (See Figure 8.2-30), 8.2-59
Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Figure 8.2-31), 8.2-61
Common Valves (See Figure 8.2-32), 8.2-63
Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-33), 8.2-65
(See Figure 8.2-34), 8.2-67
Figure 8.2-35), 8.2-69
Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See
Figure 8.2-36), 8.2-71
Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Figure 8.2-37), 8.2-73
LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See
Figure 8.2-38), 8.2-75
LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Figure 8.2-39), 8.2-76
LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See
Figure 8.2-40), 8.2-77
LH 750 System Analyzer Components (See Figure 8.2-41), 8.2-79
Random Access Components (See Figure 8.2-42), 8.2-81
8-iii
CONTENTS
8-iv
PN 4277219B
8PARTS LISTS 8
8.1
MASTER PARTS LIST

The components in the master parts list are listed alphabetically by their common names or
categories. Table 8.1-1 lists the common names and categories used, further defines the
categories, and references the table in this section where those components appear. Where
applicable, a component is either cross referenced to its illustration in Heading 8.2 or to a
schematic in Chapter 6, SCHEMATICS.
Note: For most cables and switches, the figures referenced in this section are schematics.
Table 8.1-1 Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List
Common Name/
Category
Category Includes
Table
Actuator
8.1-2
Air water separator
8.1-2
Aperture
WBC and RBC aperture blocks and aperture module.
8.1-2
Bar-code
Scanners
8.1-2
Blood detectors
8.1-2
BSV
All parts of the BSV.
8.1-2
Cable
All electronic wiring.
8.1-3
Cassette transport
Bar-code guide block, cassette advance wheel, lever, ram tip, rocker bed locking assy,
stripper plate and stripper plate button.
8.1-3
Chamber
All liquid, vacuum and pressure chambers except the Hgb cuvette which is listed
separately under Hgb cuvette.
8.1-3
Check valve
8.1-3
Choke
Chokes and choke fittings.
8.1-3
Component
Miscellaneous custom parts such as the arm for the retic mixing chamber and the pin and
pin mount for the center Diluter door.
8.1-3
Compressor and
vacuum pump
8.1-3
Consumable
All customer billable parts such as adhesives, alcohol, bar-code labels, cassettes,
controls, grease, and tape.
8.1-3
Cover
All non-hinged panels, circuit card covers, and component covers and splash shields.
8.1-3
Cylinder
All air cylinders.
8.1-3
Display
Analyzer CRT, Diluter LCD, and Power Supply LED displays and all gauges.
8.1-4
Door
All hinged panels.
8.1-4
Drive
Drives for diff mixing chamber drive and for stain and retic (mixing) chambers.
8.1-4
Fan
Fan guards and fans.
8.1-5
Filter
Air fluid barrier, air water separator, and air filters.
8.1-5
FINAL
Analyzer, Diluter, Power Supply and GENS System.
8.1-5
Fitting
Elbow, feed-thru, muffler, plug, quick-disconnect, T-, union and Y-fittings. Does not
include choke fittings which are listed separately under Chokes.
8.1-5
Flipper
Fuse
8.1-5
Fuse holder and fuses.
Gauge
Hardware
PN 4277219B
8.1-5
8.1-5
Miscellaneous hardware including brackets, guides, clips, Earthquake Tie-Down Kit,

hinges, knobs, latches, plates, standoffs and studs. Does not include fittings, nuts,
screws, and washers which are listed as separate categories.
8.1-6
8.1-1
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-1 Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List (Continued)
Common Name/
Category
Category Includes
Table
Heater
Diff heater.
8.1-6
Hgb cuvette
Keypad
8.1-6
Diluter (GENS System) and numeric (LH 750 System)
Label
Lamp
8.1-7
8.1-7
Lamp for Hgb module.
8.1-7
Laser
8.1-7
Manifold
All manifolds.
8.1-7
Module
Replaceable assemblies. Includes the BSV, Diff, Enclosed Needle Cap Piercer, Hgb, Level
Sense Manifold, Peltier, Piercing Station, Probe-Wipe, Retic, Rocker Bed and Rocker Bed
Belt Assy manifolds. Does not include the Hgb Preamp module or the Light Scatter
Preamp module which are both listed under Preamp, and does not include the Triple
Transducer which is listed under TTM.
8.1-7
Motor
Motors for diff mixing chamber and Probe-Wipe module.
8.1-7
Muffler
8.1-7
Needle
8.1-7
Nut
8.1-7
O-ring
8.1-7
PCB
All printed circuit cards except the RF Detector Preamp card which is listed under Preamp.
Power supply, bulk
8.1-9
8.1-9
Preamp
Hgb Preamp module, Light Scatter Preamp module and RF Detector Preamp card.
8.1-9
Probe-Wipe
Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, cleaning truck bracket and lead screw, and backwash
cup.
8.1-9
Pump
All liquid pumps and dispensers.
8.1-9
Regulator
All pressure and vacuum regulators.
8.1-9
Screw
8.1-10
Sheath flow coil
8.1-10
Software
EPROM kits
8.1-10
Spring
Switch
8.1-10
All types including button, float, magnetic, micro and opto.
Thermistor
8.1-10
8.1-11
Tie wrap
Nylon, loop and clamp tie wraps and tie wrap adhesives.
8.1-11
Tool
Tool box and all tools needed for servicing the instrument.
8.1-11
Tool/Supply
Special supplies purchased for servicing the instrument such as large latex particles.
8.1-11
Tray
8.1-11
TTM
Flow cells, lens block, LS sensor, RF box triode, and TTM LED, plates, shaft and shock
mount.
8.1-11
Tubing
Standard, custom, I-beam, input line, and pickup tubing; and tubing sleeves.
8.1-11
Valve
All valves (except the BSV which is listed as a separate category), the pinch valve mounts,
pinch valve sleeves, and pinch valve deactivator clips.
8.1-12
Washer
Washers and spacers.
8.1-13
.
8.1-2
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-2 Master Parts List - A through B

Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Actuator, 1-tubing pinch valve
6211015
8.2-32
6232447
8.2-15
8.2-32
21
8
Actuator, pilot, 7/16 bore
6232986
8.2-32
Air water separator, w/ fittings
6805386
8.2-35
Aperture block set, RBC
6701589
8.2-9
28
Aperture block set, WBC
6701588
8.2-9
27
Aperture module 2 with electrode and cable for Six-Channel Preamp card (LH 750
System)
6807158
7000696, FRU
Aperture module 2 (GENS System)
6859304
8.2-9
23
Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (laser style bar-code reader)
6807264
8.2-16
23
Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (LED style bar-code reader)

Note: Scanners manufactured with a new adhesive that prevents the LEDs from
moving out of alignment are labeled revision D.
6858081
8.2-16
22
Blood detectors, insulator
6805201
Blood detectors, matched set, Retic module
6859506
8.2-22
27
Blood detectors, matched set, Random Access module
6807365
8.2-42
23
BSV, center pad standoff
1021990
8.2-23
BSV, front pad standoff
1022003
8.2-23
14
BSV, housing
6855650
8.2-23
35
BSV, housing insulator
3104044
8.2-23
34
BSV, lever shaft
1017440
8.2-23
BSV, pad antifriction spacer
1023328
8.2-23
20
BSV, pads, matched set
6706457
8.2-23
19
BSV, shaft lever cap
1017439
8.2-23
BSV, shaft, coated
1017361
8.2-23
21
BSV, shaft, hand detector, threaded ends
6805358
8.2-23
31
BSV, tension spring retainer
1017438
8.2-23
PN 4277219B
8.1-3
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-3 Master Parts List - C
Description
Figure/
Part Number Schematic Item
Cable, 13-valve I/O to solenoid 22
6805075
6322764
6805076
6322764
6805077
6322764
6805074
6322764
Cable, ac input, w/ ac input connector
6859378
8.2-36
Cable, Analytical Station to Workstation, 8
6028660
6322764
Cable, Analyzer to preamp (LH 750 System)
6029111
8.2-41
Cable, Bar Code Decoder card to bar-code scanner
6859437
6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply logic harness
6859421
6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply to Bulk Power Filter card
6859383
6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply to fans
6859377
6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply to filter boards and external connector
6859381
6322764
Cable, Diff Power Supply J1, J2 and J3
6859474
6322764
Cable, diluent sensor extension
6807099
8.2-29
Cable, Diluter 1 and Diff Power Supply card to backplane voltage bus
6028785
6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to Bar-Code Decoder card
6028659
6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to Diff Power Supply card
6028691
6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to RF Preamp card
6805052
6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to Sensor Distribution card
6028656
6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Diluter 4 card
6028685
6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Diluter Solenoid Optics PS card
6028690
6322764
6805082
6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Probe-Wipe interconnect
6859436
6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Reservoir Interface card
6028655
6322764
6805072
6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to MF11
6028658
6322764
6028617
6322764
6028619
6322764
6028618
6322764
6028616
6322764
6028615
6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to Retic module
6028657
6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to RS/Opto card
6028620
6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to Slide Maker and RS/Opto Interface card to Diluter Cable
Adapter card
6028498
6322764
8.1-4
6
14
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-3 Master Parts List - C (Continued)
Description
Figure/
Cable, Diluter 3 card to solenoid 21 and diff mixing motor
6859371
6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 to solenoids 14, 18, 19, 20, 33, 53, 60, 61, 63
6805079
6322764
Cable, Diluter 4 card and Diluter Solenoid Optics PS card to backplane voltage bus
6028784
6322764
Cable, Diluter 4 card to Peltier Thermoelectric Cooler module
6805198
6322764
Cable, Diluter 4 card to stain and diff heaters
6805304
6322764
Cable, Diluter to Analyzer, SCSI
6028481
6322764
Cable, ground, 13
6028263
Cable, ground, 6.5, flow cell
6027956
Cable, ground, 6
6855145
Cable, keypad interface to LCD
6859438
6322764
Cable, keypad, Diluter control (LH 750 System)
6029140
8.2-39
Cable, laser interlock cable w/ LED
6858119
6322764
Cable, Motor Control card harness
6806204
Cable, mounting channel harness
6805221
Cable, needle harness
6806454
Cable, Power Supply to 115 Vac wall outlet
6028683
Cable, Power Supply to backplane voltage bus
6028496
Cable, Power Supply to Diluter Cable Adapter card (for new style Power Supply)
6029113
Cable, Power Supply to Diluter Cable Adapter card (for old style Power Supply)
6028497
Cable, probe harness
6806456
Cable, probe-wipe harness, with sensors and motor (for Probe-Wipe module with
moveable backwash cup)
6807188
8.2-24
Cable, Reservoir Intfc card to backwash, sheath and waste
6805011
6322764
Cable, Retic module harness
6859366
6322764
Cable, RF Preamp card to digital backplane, 78
6028080
6322764
Cable, RF Preamp card to flow-cell, coaxial
6857192
6322764
Cable, RF to 24 V supply
6029069
Cable, rocker bed harness
6854610
6322764
Cable, RS/Opto Interface card to LS Preamp module
6028510
6322764
Cable, RS/Opto Interface card to PVT card and Hgb preamp
6859622
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to Hgb lamp
6859467
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to keypad and Keyboard and Display Interface card
6859432
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to left safety and front door, w/ switches
6859435
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to PVT card
6805286
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to right stack, w/ switches
6859781
6322764
PN 4277219B
6322764
6322764
6322764
20
8.1-5
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to rocker bed P36
6028533
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to rocker bed position, w/ sensors
6859393
6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution to Manual-mode sensors w/ switch
6859427
6322764
Cable, SPC card to external connector (for new style Power Supply)
6029114
Cable, SPC card to external connector (for old style Power Supply)
6028928
6322764
Cable, SPC card to System Controller Display
6028523
6322764
Cable, waste sensor bypass connector
6805629
8.2-28
8.2-29
Cable, Workstation interface, one to four connectors
6028609
6322764
Cassette transport, ram guide block (for laser style bar-code reader)
6807111
Cassette transport, ram guide block (for LED style bar-code reader)
6855431
8.2-16
Cassette transport, cassette advance wheel
1015614
8.2-17
Cassette transport, lever, w/ shaft, screw and bearings
6855039
8.2-17
Cassette transport, ram tip
1023253
8.2-16
Cassette transport, rocker bed front rail assembly
6806521
8.2-17
30
Cassette transport, rocker bed locking assy
6805543
8.2-18
11
Cassette transport, stripper plate button
1024330
8.2-17
25
Cassette transport, stripper plate button (for Analytical Stations with a laser style
bar-code reader)
6807360
Cassette transport, stripper plate, w/ button
6805192
8.2-17
18
Chamber, backwash tank (also used as sweep-flow reservoir)
6858331
8.2-7
8.2-10
4
27
Chamber, bath, RBC and WBC
6855601
8.2-9
25
Chamber, clear plastic, 11 top ports
6805035
8.2-12
32
7000380
8.2-9
8.2-12
1
19
6855639
8.2-9
6859138
8.2-8
8.2-11
8.2-12
11
13
17
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports w/ white ball inside
6805861
8.2-10
29
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, small
6852456
8.2-9
8.2-12
41
31
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, three plugged (VC19, needle vent chamber)
6854848
6858922
8.2-9
8.2-10
15
22
Chamber, diluent/cleaning agent reservoir
6806767
8.2-10
37
8.1-6
12
15
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Chamber, mixing, diff
6858748
8.2-21
Chamber, mixing, retic
6805155
8.2-22
8.2-42
19
19
Chamber, sheath tank
6805016
8.2-11
Chamber, stain
6859121
8.2-22
8.2-42
20
20
Chamber, sweep flow tank
6856877
8.2-10
26
Chamber, vacuum overflow tank
6859096
8.2-7
Chamber, vacuum trap w/ fittings
6859311
8.2-8
10
Choke, fitting, black, 0.010 orifice
6232695
8.2-30
19
Choke, fitting, blue, 0.012 orifice
6232693
8.2-27
8.2-30
13
16
Choke, fitting, brown, 0.006 orifice
6232697
8.2-30
18
Choke, fitting, green, 0.016 orifice
6232694
8.2-30
17
Choke, fitting, red, 0.008 orifice
6232696
8.2-30
20
Choke, metal, black, 0.010 orifice
6213011
8.2-30
11
Choke, metal, blue, 0.012 orifice
6213010
8.2-30
14
Choke, metal, brown, 0.006 orifice
6213009
8.2-30
12
Choke, metal, gold, 0.004 orifice
6213008
8.2-30
15
Choke, metal, green, 0.016 orifice
6213007
8.2-30
13
Choke, metal, red, 0.008 orifice
6213006
8.2-30
10
Choke, plastic, 3 fluid, 0.010 orifice
1022419
8.2-25
Choke, plastic, black, 0.012 orifice
6213020
8.2-30
Choke, plastic, blue, 0.020 orifice
6213013
8.2-30
Choke, plastic, brown, 0.025 orifice
6213015
8.2-30
Choke, plastic, clear, 0.062 i.d. tubing, 0.016 orifice
6232154
8.2-18
14
Choke, plastic, gray, 0.016 orifice
6213012
8.2-30
Choke, plastic, yellow, 0.010 orifice
6213014
8.2-30
Choke, variable, 1/16 i.d.
6213016
8.2-25
29
Component, misc, arm, mixing chamber, retic
6858962
8.2-22
8.2-42
21
21
Component, misc, grounding contact
1020955
8.2-4
Component, misc, pin mount, center Diluter window
1017577
8.2-5
Component, misc, pin, center Diluter window
1017748
8.2-5
6854305
8.2-5
Component, misc, reagent container neck support
7000364
PN 4277219B
8.1-7
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Component, misc, rod pivot
1016063
8.2-16
10
Compressor and vacuum pump, w/ fittings and cable

Note: Revision F of this assembly has a modified design to reduce low frequency
sound output.
6859181
8.2-34
Consumable, adhesive, LOCTITE 222-31
1601065
Consumable, adhesive, LOCTITE 651, 1/3 oz bottle
1601032
Consumable, alcohol
1615069
Consumable, bar-code dispenser
2016172
Consumable, cassette, 16 mm o.d. tube
6857870
Consumable, cassette, HEMOGARD tubes
6858033
Consumable, cassette,13 mm o.d. tube
6858032
Consumable, grease, high vacuum, 3.3 oz tube
1604002
Consumable, LATRON control
7546914
Consumable, LATRON primer
7546915
Consumable, tape
8023259
Consumable, tape, foam
8010009
8.2-9
13
Consumable, tape, Teflon, 0.02
8004007
Cover, Analytical Station, left column (LH 750 System)
6807235
8.2-38
11
Cover, Analytical Station, left side (LH 750 System)
6807055
8.2-38
13
Cover, Analytical Station, right column (LH 750 System)
6807057
8.2-38
Cover, Analytical Station, right side (LH 750 System)
6807054
8.2-38
Cover, Analytical Station, top (LH 750 System)
6807056
8.2-38
Cover, Bar-Code Decoder card
6805100
8.2-26
Cover, bar-code scanner
1015679
8.2-16
21
Cover, bus bar
6805217
8.2-3
8.2-41
26
26
Cover, cassette lifts w/ 8010017 adhesive tape
6855014
8.2-18
Cover, CRT, cover bottom, black strip
6859146
8.2-2
Cover, CRT, cover top, black strip
6859145
8.2-2
Cover, Diluter 4 card
6806602
8.2-27
Cover, Diluter, center (LH 750 System)
6807050
8.2-38
Cover, display, CRT window, clear w/ EMI coating
1022205
8.2-2
Cover, flow cell and lens block
6805630
8.2-19
Cover, keyboard panel, splash
1022544
8.2-4
Cover, lens block and laser
1022206
8.2-19
Cover, level sense manifold, large, diluent
1022948
8.2-27
27
8.1-8
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Cover, level sense manifold, small
1023262
8.2-27
25
Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (new style Power Supply)
6807390
8.2-37
Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (old style Power Supply)
6805277
8.2-37
Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (new style Power Supply)
6807292
8.2-37
Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (old style Power supply)
6859187
8.2-37
Cover, Probe-Wipe Interconnect card
6805009
8.2-23
23
Cover, SlideMaker access (LH 750 System)
6807236
8.2-38
10
Cover, splash shield, dual 4-valve
1025430
8.2-42
29
Cover, splash shield, laser side
1025419
8.2-42
Cover, splash shield, retic pump, CP
1025209
8.2-4
17
Cover, splash shield, retic valves, CP
1024818
8.2-22
33
Cover, splash shield, Solenoid Interconnect module, CP
1025133
8.2-11
Cover, System Controller Display (Power Supply)
6805173
8.2-35
Cover, window, smoked, door, front, center (GENS System)
6805395
8.2-4
Cover, window, smoked, w/ clips, left and right panels (GENS System)
6854517
8.2-4
Cylinder, air, backwash cup (assembly includes associated hardware and moveable
backwash cup)
6707151
8.2-24
22
Cylinder, air, bar-code reader
6805541
8.2-16
Cylinder, air, bed rock
6857929
8.2-15
10
Cylinder, air, bellows contract (for enclosed needle cap piercer)
6232919
8.2-15
14
Cylinder, air, BSV center section
6805648
8.2-23
Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, with sensors
6805597
8.2-23
15
Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, without sensors
6232920
8.2-23
15
Cylinder, air, cassette belt advance
6232127
8.2-17
Cylinder, air, cassette lifts
6232133
8.2-18
Cylinder, air, stripper plate
6232859
8.2-17
22
Cylinder, air, tube ram
6232218
8.2-16
14
PN 4277219B
8.1-9
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-4 Master Parts List - D through E
Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Display, CRT, Scope Module 2 (GENS System)
6859503
8.2-3
Display, CRT, Scope Module with keypad (LH 750 System)
6807370
8.2-41
7000697, FRU
Display, Diluter LCD w/ Keyboard and Display Interface card and keypad
6805302
8.2-4
Display, LCD, Diluter front panel
6805232
8.2-4
Display, LED, Power Supply w/ bracket
6859483
8.2-35
Door, Analyzer front, cover with graphics only (GENS System)
6858990
8.2-2
Door, Analyzer, front (LH 750 System)
6807048
8.2-38
Door, Analyzer, rear
6859069
8.2-3
8.2-41
19
19
Door, Analyzer, right and left
6859067
8.2-3
8.2-39
14
5
Door, Diluter, aperture EMI shield
6805525
8.2-9
38
Door, Diluter, center panel, lower metal door
6859076
8.2-9
35
Door, Diluter, left rear, bottom
6805094
8.2-27
19
Door, Diluter, left rear, top
6805093
8.2-27
Door, Diluter, left side
6858997
8.2-6
8.2-38
1
12
Door, Diluter, lower front (LH 750 System)
6807374
8.2-38
Door, Diluter, lower front, w/o Keyboard and Display Interface card (GENS System) 6858989
8.2-4
16
Door, Diluter, right rear
6805091
8.2-26
Door, Diluter, right side
6858998
8.2-13
8.2-38
3
6
Drive, mixing chamber, diff, FRU
7999687
8.2-21
13
Drive, mixing chambers (stain and retic), Retic and Random Access modules
6859498
8.2-22
8.2-42
30
7
8.1-10
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-5 Master Parts List - F through G
Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Fan, guard, plastic, used w/ 4.69 square fan
2603062
8.2-35
10
Fan,12 Vdc, 4.68 square,1.5 thk, w/ thermistor and connector
2603068
8.2-3
8.2-41
8.2-35
31
31
11
Filter, air fluid barrier, 0.45 , tubing fittings
6232076
8.2-31
24
Filter, air water separator, filter only
6232759
8.2-35
Filter, air, used on rear cover
1022868
8.2-3
8.2-41
16
16
Filter, air, used under Power Supply
1022450
8.2-34
23
Filter, air, used on left and right side of new style Power Supply
6807331
8.2-37
Filter/muffler assembly
7237051
8.2-34
10
FINAL, Analyzer (GENS System), FRU
7000496
FINAL, Analyzer, tested (LH 750 System)
6707184
7000703, FRU
FINAL, Diluter (GENS System), FRU
7000497
FINAL, Diluter, tested (LH 750 System)
6707089
7000702, FRU
FINAL, GENS System
7000498
FINAL, Power Supply, tested (GENS System/LH 750 System)
6707153
7000704, FRU
FINAL, Power Supply (GENS System - old style), FRU
7000499
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd
1005692
8.2-17
6859221
8.2-11
8.2-24
8.2-27
8.2-32
15
13
12
7
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, brass
6232038
8.2-12
8.2-17
24
21
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
6232036
8.2-15
8.2-24
20
27
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss, w/ O-ring
6852910
8.2-11
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, w/ O-ring
6852909
8.2-11
8.2-21
8.2-22
8.2-42
18
14
14
15
Fitting, 0.082 tubing to 0.5 thd
6232379
8.2-18
Fitting, 0.094 i.d. tubing to 0.1/4 npt
6232642
8.2-27
22
Fitting, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
6206006
8.2-35
6216290
8.2-34
8.2-35
18
17
PN 4277219B
8.1-11
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-5 Master Parts List - F through G (Continued)

Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
6232647
8.2-26
Fitting, cross, clear with steel tubes
6858676
8.2-31
25
Fitting, cross, green with metal tubes
6807148
8.2-31
25
Fitting, elbow, 0.187 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
6216128
8.2-12
26
6232191
8.2-8
Fitting, elbow,10-32 thd, male to female
6216002
8.2-10
6232360
8.2-25
27
Fitting, elbow, adjustable, 2 mm (0.08 in.) i.d. hose barb to 10-32
6232829
8.2-42
Fitting, feed thru, 1/8 npt
6232980
8.2-27
8.2-29
31
16
Fitting, feed-thru isolator, white
1016486
8.2-31
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d., w/ 10-22 npt
6216353
8.2-31
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 0.082 tubing
1016929
8.2-31
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.125 i.d., w/ 1/4 npt
6216320
8.2-31
10
Fitting, feed-thru, black
1022081
8.2-31
Fitting, feed-thru, metal, 0.062 i.d. tubing, w/ 10-32 thd
1005697
8.2-9
8.2-31
18
5
1005699
8.2-31
Fitting, muffler,10-32 thd
6216195
8.2-25
31
Fitting, plug for tubing
6232383
8.2-31
28
Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, external hex
6216312
8.2-34
Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, internal hex
6232339
8.2-12
29
Fitting, plug, 10-32 thd
1004645
8.2-25
8.2-42
7
3
Fitting, plug, 10-32, w/ O-ring, 1004645 and 2523062
6856745
8.2-27
10
Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing
6232644
8.2-27
20
Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt
6232716
8.2-36
15
Fitting, quick disconnect, 5/32 o.d. tubing to 1/4 o.d. tubing
6232751
8.2-31
22
Fitting, quick disconnect, 5-tube, TTM, mixing chamber
6805301
8.2-21
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.125 o.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
6232752
8.2-34
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt
6232680
8.2-35
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt, brass
6216018
8.2-34
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 to 0.125
6232773
8.2-27
33
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 tubing to 1/8 mnpt
6232681
8.2-34
Fitting, quick disconnect, female, 0.125 mnpt, 0.125 flow
6232996
8.2-27
32
Fitting, quick disconnect, input door, female, 0.170 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. tubing
6232714
8.2-36
8.1-12
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Fitting, quick disconnect, input lines, small, 0.125 o.d. tubing, almond
6232645
8.2-27
8.2-28
8.2-29
34
4
4
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, cap, white
6232434
8.2-31
17
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, female, white
6232435
8.2-31
18
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, black
6232666
8.2-21
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, blue
6232663
8.2-21
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, green
6232664
8.2-21
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, red
6232665
8.2-21
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, clear
6232660
8.2-31
19
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, white
6232436
8.2-31
19
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, yellow
6232662
8.2-21
Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 i.d. tubing, steel
6232715
8.2-28
8.2-29
8.2-36
5
5
9
Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 tubing to 10/32 thd
6232678
8.2-34
8.2-35
17
15
Fitting, quick disconnect, T, 1/4 o.d. tubing
6232753
8.2-31
23
Fitting, quick disconnect,1/8 o.d. tubing to 5/32 o.d. tubing
6232750
8.2-31
21
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube round, female
6232444
8.2-22
32
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube round, male
6232443
8.2-22
31
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD1)
6805129
8.2-10
19
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD2, QD5, QD6)
6859039
8.2-25
11
6859040
8.2-25
10
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolt (QD4)
6859041
8.2-25
16
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5, QD6)
6859038
8.2-12
23
Fitting, quick-disconnect, T, 0.25 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt
6232676
8.2-34
Fitting, T, 0.062 i.d. tubing, polypropylene
6226008
8.2-31
15
Fitting, T, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125, polyurethane
6232380
8.2-31
13
6232051
8.2-31
16
Fitting, T, 0.156 i.d. tubing, polyurethane
6232584
8.2-31
15
Fitting, T, 0.250 o.d. to 0.250 o.d. to 1/4 mpt, vacuum
6232712
8.2-34
11
Fitting, T, clear w/ metal tubes
6858675
8.2-31
14
Fitting, T, green w/ metal tubes
6807147
8.2-31
14
Fitting, tubing to 10-32 thd
6232362
8.2-8
8.2-27
3
18
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d x 10-32 thd, polypropylene (for aperture top)
1004595
8.2-9
21
PN 4277219B
8.1-13
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d. (reducer)
6232352
8.2-31
11
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.125 i.d tubing, square flange
6232564
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d., clear
6232109
8.2-31
12
Fitting, union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.0125 i.d. tubing, clear
6232246
8.2-31
12
Fitting, union, 0.094 i.d. tubing, Luer quick disconnect (comprises PN 6232435,
PN 6232436, and PN 6232434)
6232399
8.2-31
20
Fitting, union, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d.
6216308
8.2-26
8.2-29
7
14
Fitting, union,10-32 female to female
6216006
8.2-25
30
Fitting, union,10-32 thd to 1-8 npt
6206001
8.2-12
25
Fitting, union,10-32 thd to10-32 thd
6216033
8.2-31
27
Fitting, Y, 0.050 i.d., blue
6232263
8.2-31
16
Fitting, Y, 0.062 i.d.
9909059
8.2-31
16
Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 to 0.125 i.d. tubing, white
1018245
8.2-31
16
Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. tubing, clear
6232259
8.2-31
16
Fitting, Y, 0.125 i.d. tubing, clear (large waste line)
9908085
8.2-31
16
Fitting, Y, 0.125 o.d. tubing, clear
6216081
8.2-31
16
6216181
8.2-31
16
Flipper, left, inner
6807019
8.2-5
Flipper, left, outer
6807022
8.2-5
Flipper, right, inner
6806638
8.2-5
Flipper, right, outer
6807020
8.2-5
10
Fuse holder, 20 A, 250 Vac
9921373
8.2-36
Fuse, 1/16 A, 250 V, 0.25 x 1.25
5102040
Fuse, 15.0 A, 250 V, 25 x 1.25 ceramic, sloblo
5102057
Gauge, pressure, 0 to 60 psi
6232189
8.2-15
24
8.1-14
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-6 Master Parts List - H
Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Hardware, baffle, Power Supply
6807307
8.2-34
25
Hardware, bearing, bushing, shaft, nylon, BSV
2523361
8.2-23
39
Hardware, bearing, Probe-Wipe module
2527689
8.2-24
14
Hardware, belt, 75 grooves
2523221
8.2-21
8.2-22
8.2-42
11
29
8
Hardware, bracket, air cylinder ball mount
1015617
8.2-17
33
Hardware, bracket, air filter, Power Supply
2840060
8.2-34
21
6859466
8.2-34
22
Hardware, bracket, aperture door thumbscrew
6859608
8.2-9
31
Hardware, bracket, bed locking
6855015
8.2-17
27
Hardware, bracket, bed rock air cylinder ball
1015522
8.2-17
32
Hardware, bracket, bubble/blood detector
6805220
8.2-22
26
Hardware, bracket, chamber
2116002
8.2-9
Hardware, bracket, chamber, white coated metal
2851620
Hardware, bracket, coiled tubing, Power Supply
6859722
8.2-35
Hardware, bracket, cover support, Analyzer
6859036
8.2-2
10
Hardware, bracket, dual 14-valve quick disconnect
6805014
8.2-25
Hardware, bracket, fastener, socket ball
1016565
8.2-17
28
Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, left
6805177
8.2-5
24
Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, right
6805156
8.2-5
16
Hardware, bracket, hand detector mount
6805517
8.2-23
27
Hardware, bracket, heater, diff
6805106
8.2-22
8.2-42
24
24
Hardware, bracket, magnetic catch
6859057
8.2-7
Hardware, bracket, mount, 1-3/8 diam
2851244
8.2-9
8.2-11
16
17
Hardware, bracket, mufflers
6805130
8.2-36
17
Hardware, bracket, needle-vent chamber
6805495
Hardware, bracket, pump holder
2838003
8.2-11
8.2-22
8.2-42
12
17
10
Hardware, bracket, pump mounting
6805196
8.2-22
11
Hardware, bracket, QD6
6859132
8.2-10
23
Hardware, bracket, RBC and WBC diluent dispensers
2116001
8.2-7
18
Hardware, bracket, ribbon cable holder
1023221
8.2-19
10
Hardware, bracket, rocker bed air cylinder mount
2851391
8.2-15
PN 4277219B
8.1-15
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-6 Master Parts List - H (Continued)

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Hardware, bracket, rocker bed spring, w/ sensor flag
6855390
8.2-17
12
Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, left
6857466
8.2-18
15
Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, right
6857465
8.2-18
Hardware, bracket, stripper plate
1024475
8.2-17
23
Hardware, bracket, vacuum regulator
6859112
8.2-12
Hardware, bracket,13-valve solenoid valve manifold
6859205
8.2-25
Hardware, bracket,14-valve solenoid valve manifold
6859204
8.2-25
25
Hardware, bushing, piercing station
1023072
8.2-15
15
Hardware, cap, black plastic vinyl isolator (used on VC1)
2523477
8.2-9
Hardware, cassette guide, metal strip
6859008
8.2-5
14
6859009
8.2-5
13
6859010
8.2-5
12
6859011
8.2-5
11
Hardware, cassette guide, left
1024629
8.2-5
23
Hardware, cassette guide, right
1022162
8.2-5
17
Hardware, casters, fixed, used on Power Supply
2523779
8.2-34
24
Hardware, casters, swivel, used on Power Supply
2523780
8.2-34
20
Hardware, clamp, tubing, black nylon ratcheting
2852004
8.2-35
18
Hardware, clip, bed rock cylinder
2852036
8.2-15
Hardware, clip, BSV center section cylinder
2851445
8.2-23
Hardware, clip, BSV Manual-mode aspirator tip cylinder
2851444
8.2-23
17
Hardware, clip, retaining
2837045
8.2-19
12
Hardware, clip, retaining, BSV hand detector mount
2837031
8.2-23
25
Hardware, clip, shaft retaining, tube ram
2837037
8.2-16
11
Hardware, compressor mounting bottom shipping stand (two required)
1022531
Hardware, compressor mounting clip w/ slot
1023479
Hardware, compressor mounting metal strap
1022532
Hardware, Earthquake Tie-Down Kit
6915060
Hardware, gasket, EMI
5704030
8.2-9
34
Hardware, grommet, rubber, 0.250 i.d. x 0.0562 o.d.
2830013
8.2-19
Hardware, hinge, aperture door
1023429
8.2-9
37
Hardware, hinge, Diluter doors, left and right
1022932
8.2-6
Hardware, hinge, front cover, Analyzer
2523647
8.2-2
8.2-39
7
2
Hardware, hinge, lower left door, Diluter
6805102
8.2-27
21
Hardware, knob, black, used on regulators
2523691
8.2-12
28
8.1-16
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Hardware, knob, BSV, shaft
6855617
8.2-23
18
Hardware, knob, vacuum regulator
2406016
8.2-12
Hardware, latch, magnet, Diluter front cover
2840073
8.2-5
8.2-34
22
19
Hardware, latch, magnet, used w/ front cover switch
5111192
Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter front cover
1016023
8.2-5
21
Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter left and right windows
2840053
8.2-11
Hardware, latch, quarter turn, black, Power Supply
2852257
8.2-37
Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch
2851859
8.2-3
8.2-4
8.2-39
8.2-40
8.2-41
15
10
5
1
15
Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch, Diluter left and right doors
2852109
8.2-6
Hardware, magnet, scanner position actuator
2509007
8.2-16
19
Hardware, misc, bar, side panel cover lower mount
1015772
8.2-11
Hardware, misc, bus bar
1022451
8.2-3
8.2-41
24
24
Hardware, misc, front cover mount, Diluter
1022183
8.2-4
8.2-40
13
3
1022442
8.2-4
8.2-40
12
4
Hardware, misc, holdup arm guide, Analyzer
1022315
8.2-3
8.2-41
20
20
Hardware, pin, front cover mount
1022182
8.2-4
8.2-40
14
6
Hardware, plate, BSV and retic area
6859000
8.2-25
17
Hardware, plate, Bulk Power Supply, w/ captive screws
6858805
8.2-36
13
Hardware, plate, compressor, w/ captive screws
6858806
8.2-34
15
Hardware, plate, mounted below cooling coil
6859412
8.2-35
13
Hardware, plate, TTM area
6858982
8.2-19
20
Hardware, plate, TTM laser area
6859227
8.2-19
19
Hardware, slide rack used for front cover
1411145
8.2-4
8.2-40
15
5
Hardware, splash shield support
6807191
8.2-4
17
Hardware, standoff, snap-in
2851407
8.2-10
38
Hardware, stud, ball
1016567
8.2-18
16
1019135
8.2-18
22
Hardware, stud, ball, #10-32
1014681
8.2-23
PN 4277219B
8.1-17
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Hardware, stud, ball, sleeve
1019136
8.2-18
23
Heater, diff
6859463
8.2-22
8.2-42
25
25
Hgb cuvette, glassware only
6103025
8.2-9
12
8.1-18
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-7 Master Parts List - I through M
Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Keypad, membrane, front panel (GENS System)
2016587
8.2-4
Keypad, with LCD, Diluter control (numeric) (LH 750 System)
6807378
7000698, FRU
8.2-38
Kit, GENS Dual Diluent Pickup Tube
6915136
Label, bar-code specimen
7546856
Label, bar-code stripper button labels (for laser style bar-code reader)
2431336
Label, cassette, 0001-0100 (for laser style bar-code reader)
2427065
Label, cassette, 0001-0100 (LED style bar-code reader)
2427112
Label, laser warning
2429637
8.2-19
21
Lamp, Hgb w/ cable
6859621
8.2-9
10
Laser
6805206
8.2-19
Manifold, 6 ports
1007924
8.2-18
18
Manifold, bath bubbler
1019128
8.2-10
11
Manifold, cleaning agent
6805096
8.2-26
Manifold, diluent
6805098
8.2-26
16
Manifold, diluent/cleaning agent
6806758
8.2-10
35
Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings
6232739
8.2-10
8.2-22
34
2
Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF16 w/ Solenoid

Interconnect module)
6233021
8.2-22
8.2-42
2
2
Manifold, solenoid valve, 14-valve, w/ bracket and quick disconnect
6859514
8.2-25
32
Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 3-way, w/ fittings
6214112
8.2-10
Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 4-way
6856996
8.2-10
21
6232740
8.2-21
16
Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF17 w/ Solenoid

Interconnect module)
6233025
8.2-10
8.2-21
28
16
Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/o fittings
6232636
8.2-22
Manifold, solenoid valve, 7-valve, 24 Vdc/30 psi, w/ actuators and pinch valves
6232981
8.2-27
14
6805503
8.2-27
16
6859515
8.2-25
6807498
8.2-42
26
Manifold, solenoid valve, level sense manifold, 7-valve, w/ fittings
6805503
8.2-27
Module, BSV
6859517
8.2-14
Module, Diff Mixing Chamber, w/ drive
6859511
8.2-21
10
Module, diluent/cleaning agent assembly
6805632
8.2-10
36
Module, Enclosed Needle Cap Piercer
6805670
8.2-15
12
Module, Hgb, w/ preamp, cuvette and lamp
6859795
8.2-9
14
PN 4277219B
8.1-19
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-7 Master Parts List - I through M (Continued)

Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Module, Level Sense Manifold
6805306
8.2-27
35
Module, Peltier Thermoelectric Cooler
6805143
8.2-7
Module, Piercing Station
6805084
8.2-16
18
Module, Probe-Wipe, with moveable backwash cup, FRU
7000690
8.2-24
19
Module, Probe-Wipe, with stationary backwash cup
6706396
8.2-24
Module, Random Access (LH 750 System)
6707182
7000695, FRU
8.2-42
Module, Retic (GENS System)
6805200
8.2-14
Module, Rocker Bed
6805184
8.2-14
Module, Rocker Bed Belt Assy
6702887
8.2-17
Module, Solenoid Interconnect
6807073
8.2-11
10
Motor, Diff mixing chamber, w/ filter board
6805817
8.2-21
12
Motor, Probe-Wipe module (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash

cup)
3505048
8.2-24
Motor, Probe-Wipe module, dc, gear (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable
backwash cup)
3533122
8.2-24
21
Motor, retic mixing, w/ filter card
6805818
8.2-22
8.2-42
28
9
Muffler, pneumatic
6218031
8.2-36
16
8.1-20
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-8 Master Parts List - N and O

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Needle, enclosed needle cap piercer (for instruments with or without a SlideMaker)
6807145
8.2-15
11
Nut, #2, 56 UNC
2822050
8.2-6
10
Nut, #4, hex custom
2852066
8.2-2
Nut, clip on, Analyzer rear cover
2852106
8.2-3
8.2-41
28
28
Nut, hex, #10
2822016
8.2-9
8.2-17
20
36
Nut, hex, #10, used on X-axis
2851568
8.2-20
18
Nut, hex, #25
2822040
8.2-17
19
Nut, hex, #25
2822046
8.2-31
Nut, hex, #37-24 UNF, 0.562 AF x 0.328 thk
2822047
8.2-26
2822066
Nut, hex, #4
2822003
8.2-9
30
Nut, hex, #6
2822008
8.2-10
8.2-17
40
13
Nut, hex, #6, w/ washer attached
2852076
8.2-4
Nut, misc, clip on, used w/ quick open screws
2852240
8.2-27
Nut, misc, use with 6857096 pinch valve
2822040
8.2-32
13
Nut, square, #10, used on Y- and Z-axis
2851569
8.2-20
14
O-ring, 0.145 i.d. x 0.281 o.d. x 0.062w (aperture module fitting seal)
2512088
8.2-9
22
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
2523062
8.2-10
8.2-17
8.2-24
8.2-27
8.2-42
6
20
26
11
4
O-ring, 0.301 i.d. x 0.070 w
2512006
8.2-24
11
O-ring, 0.489 i.d. x 0.070 w, aperture seal, large
2512071
8.2-9
24
O-ring, 0.926 i.d. x 0.070 w
2527716
8.2-27
23
O-ring, 10-32 thd fitting
6216345
8.2-17
O-ring, 2.310 i.d. x 0.070 w
1023567
8.2-27
28
O-ring, air water separator seal
2512040
8.2-35
O-ring, aperture seal, small
2512120
8.2-9
26
O-ring, clear plastic flat
2851687
8.2-18
O-ring, motor mount
2512127
8.2-24
O-ring, red, BSV shaft
2512031
8.2-23
10
PN 4277219B
8.1-21
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-9 Master Parts List - P through R
Description
Figure/
PCB, AMC, without software EPROM
6706028
8.2-3
8.2-41
8
8
PCB, Analog 5
6706071
8.2-3
8.2-41
13
13
PCB, Analyzer Power Supply 1
6705984
8.2-3
8.2-41
5
5
6705985
8.2-3
8.2-41
7
7
PCB, API
6705977
8.2-3
PCB, Backplane, Analog (GENS System only)
6859177
8.2-3
23
PCB, Backplane, Analog (LH 750 System)
6707152
8.2-41
23
PCB, Backplane, CRT
6859176
8.2-3
8.2-41
29
29
PCB, Backplane, Digital (GENS System only)
6859175
8.2-3
30
PCB, Backplane, Digital (LH 750 System)
6707154
8.2-41
30
PCB, Backplane, Interconnect
6859178
8.2-3
8.2-41
27
27
PCB, Bar-Code Decoder (for use with LED style bar-code reader)
2016238
8.2-26
PCB, Bar-Code Decoder (for use with laser style bar-code reader)
2016905
PCB, BD ADJ (Remote BD)
6707204
8.2-41
PCB, Bulk Power Filter
6706158
8.2-36
18
PCB, COMM INTFC
6706070
8.2-3
8.2-41
9
9
PCB, GENS Driver 1, daughter card for Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card (replaces 6707073
drivers on U22 and U28)
8.2-6
13
PCB, GENS Driver 2, daughter card for Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card (replaces
drivers on U1, U3, U4, U5, U11, and U23)
6707083
8.2-6
14
PCB, GENS Driver 3, daughter card for Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card (replaces 6707084
drivers on U2, U17, and U21)
8.2-6
12
PCB, Diff Power Supply
6705994
8.2-13
PCB, DIFF PROCESSOR 4, without software EPROM
6706314
8.2-3
8.2-41
12
12
PCB, Diluter 1 (GENS System only)
6706002
8.2-13
PCB, Diluter 1 (LH 750 System)
6707177
8.2-13
PCB, Diluter 2 (GENS System only)
6706003
8.2-6
PCB, Diluter 2 RBD (LH 750 System)
6707207
PCB, Diluter 2 REL (GENS Systems with SW 4.0 and higher only)
6707158
8.2-6
PCB, Diluter 3 (only for GENS Systems without a SlideMaker)
6706157
8.2-6
11
8.1-22
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-9 Master Parts List - P through R (Continued)
Description
Figure/
PCB, Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface (for GENS Systems with or without a

SlideMaker)
6706591
8.2-6
11
PCB, Diluter 3 LH (required for LH 750 Systems with or without a SlideMaker, but
also works on GENS Systems)
6707231
8.2-6
11
PCB, Diluter 4
6706368
8.2-27
PCB, Diluter Cable Adapter
6706036
8.2-6
PCB, DILUTER CPU (LH 750 System)
6707173
8.2-41
10
PCB, DILUTER PROCESSOR, without software EPROM (for use on GENS System
only)
6706631
8.2-3
10
PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS (for use with an RF Detector Preamp card with a
vacuum tube only)
6705993
8.2-6
PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS 2 (required for a solid state RF Detector Preamp
card but can also be used with an RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube)
7000688
8.2-6
PCB, Ground Interconnect
6854923
8.2-10
39
PCB, Keypad and Display Interface (LH 750 System)
6707169
PCB, Laser PS, w/ cover
6706373
8.2-13
14
PCB, Motor Controller, w/ cable
3505052
8.2-36
PCB, Motor Filter, diff mixing chamber drive
6706409
PCB, Plt Processor 2
6706923
8.2-3
8.2-41
2
2
PCB, Probe-Wipe Interconnect
6706382
8.2-23
22
PCB, PVT, w/ bracket
6859703
8.2-13
12
PCB, Red/White Preamp 2 (GENS System only)
6706029
8.2-3
PCB, Red/White Processor (GENS System only)
6705876
8.2-3
PCB, Red/White Processor 2 (LH 750 System only)
6707099
8.2-41
PCB, R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer (LH 750 System only)
6707067
8.2-41
PCB, Reservoir Interface, level sense manifold
6706198
8.2-27
29
PCB, RS/Opto Interface
6706203
8.2-13
10
PCB, RS485 Interface
6707233
8.2-13
PCB, Sensor Distribution
6706196
8.2-13
13
PCB, Six-Channel Preamp (LH 750 System only)
6707057
7000692FRU
PCB, Solenoid Manifold,13-valve I/O
6706190
8.2-25
PCB, System Power Controller (SPC)
6706038
8.2-35
19
PCB, Thermistor w/ cable, to Diluter 4 card
6805508
6322764
PCB, Thermistor w/ cable, to PVT card
6805509
6322764
PN 4277219B
8.1-23
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Power Supply, Bulk w/ cables
6805774
8.2-36
14
Preamp, Hgb
6701652
8.2-9
11
Preamp, LS Preamp 7
6805539
8.2-19
18
Preamp, RF Detector Preamp 6
6859777
8.2-19
Preamp, RF Detector, solid state, FRU
7000700
8.2-19
23
Probe Wipe, backwash cup (moveable)
1025201
8.2-24
25
Probe-Wipe, backwash cup (stationary)
1023249
8.2-24
18
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable
backwash cup)
6707171
8.2-24
23
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary
backwash cup)
6805367
8.2-24
12
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable
backwash cup)
6807327
8.2-24
24
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary
backwash cup)
6858854
8.2-24
17
Probe Wipe, lead screw truck
2852262
8.2-24
10
Pump, 2 mL diaphragm pump
6805481
8.2-11
14
Pump, aspiration, Manual mode 205 L, Automatic mode 285 L
6707119
8.2-25
21
Pump, blood/stain aspiration, 50 L
6232653
8.2-22
8.2-42
12
12
Pump, CBC lytic reagent, 1.06 mL
6859144
8.2-11
16
Pump, diff lytic reagent (Erythrolyse), low volume 350 L, high volume 540 L
6858757
8.2-7
14
Pump, diff preservative (StabiLyse), low volume 131 L, high volume 231 L
6858762
8.2-11
19
Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the
diluent reservoir)
6905043
8.2-7
21
Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent
reservoir)
6859192
8.2-7
20
Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the
diluent reservoir)
6912099
8.2-7
22
Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent
reservoir)
6858979
8.2-7
19
Pump, retic clearing solution, 2 mL
6858756
8.2-7
11
Pump, stain (retic), 200 L
6858073
8.2-22
8.2-42
15
16
Regulator, 25 psi, bar-code scanner cylinder
6856488
8.2-15
23
Note: A solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an Analytical
Station that has a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card (PN 7000688) and
an RF to 24 V supply cable (PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
8.1-24
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Regulator, 30 psi, w/ fittings
6805384
8.2-34
6805385
8.2-34
6805383
8.2-34
Regulator, sheath, diff sample and retic
6232313
8.2-12
27
Regulator, vacuum, w/ attaching nut
6232628
8.2-12
PN 4277219B
8.1-25
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-10 Master Parts List - S
Description
Figure/
Screw, #0 x 80, 0.62 l, hsc-hd, hex
2851669
8.2-18
Screw, #10 x 32, 0.25 l, shoulder-hd
2810138
8.2-2
Screw, #10 x 32, 0.38 l, pan-hd, xrec, w/ cone washer
2852078
8.2-23
Screw, #10 x 32, 0.50 l, pan-hd, xrec
2810017
8.2-10
8.2-34
17
13
Screw, #10 x 32, 2.25 l, hsc-hd, hex, black
2851306
8.2-15
25
2802046
8.2-24
Screw, #2 x 56, 0.3 l, pan-head, xrec
2802019
8.2-20
2802025
8.2-12
Screw, #2 x 56, 0.56 l, pan-hd, xrec, black
2802051
8.2-18
Screw, #2 x 56, 1.0 l, pan -hd, xrec
2802026
8.2-22
8.2-42
13
13
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.12 l, f82-hd, xrec
2804101
8.2-17
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.19 l, f-hd, xrec
2804080
8.2-16
20
2851850
8.2-17
31
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.19 l, pan -hd, xrec
2804077
8.2-9
40
2804005
8.2-9
36
2852223
8.2-23
24
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.3 l, FL82-hd, xrec
2804088
8.2-5
2804119
8.2-5
19
2851844
8.2-17
26
2804045
8.2-12
13
2852022
8.2-2
8.2-39
8.2-40
8.2-42
12
6
2
1
2804067
8.2-16
12
2852226
8.2-5
8.2-24
18
9
2804039
8.2-22
8.2-42
10
27
2804050
8.2-25
18
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.25 l, F82-hd, xrec
2806104
2806009
8.2-9
8.2-20
17
25
2852229
8.2-23
28
2806061
8.2-34
27
8.1-26
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-10 Master Parts List - S (Continued)
Description
Figure/
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.25 l, setscrew, hex
2807038
8.2-12
8.2-20
2
16
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.31 l, fl-hd, xrec
2806021
8.2-17
29
2806136
8.2-15
2852230
8.2-8
13
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.375 l, hex, setscrew
2807024
8.2-22
8.2-42
22
22
2806017
8.2-4
8.2-27
6
26
2852023
8.2-6
8.2-11
8.2-22
8.2-27
8.2-34
8.2-42
3
11
18
4
14
17
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.38 l, w/ locking washer (use with tie wrap mount PN 6011021)
2852093
8.2-12
34
2806090
8.2-23
38
2806139
8.2-15
17
2806075
8.2-10
13
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.75 l, hex-hd, ehex
2806150
8.2-16
2806128
8.2-10
32
2806200
8.2-18
13
2806158
8.2-19
16
2806118
8.2-36
2808080
8.2-36
12
2852083
8.2-18
2808057
2808068
8.2-12
21
2808110
8.2-20
23
2808051
8.2-2
8.2-39
6
1
2852276
8.2-20
19
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, TTM lockdown
2851614
8.2-20
22
Screw, #8 x 32,2.25 l, pan-hd, xrec
2808131
8.2-20
Screw, misc, captive
2852006
8.2-22
8.2-42
18
18
Screw, misc, d-type, female 40
2121896
8.2-36
10
Screw, misc, d-type, female w/ bolt
2104261
8.2-17
14
PN 4277219B
8.1-27
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Screw, misc, flag sensor
2802006
8.2-24
Screw, misc, quick turn, use w/ 2851840, slotted
2852105
8.2-3
8.2-41
17
17
Screw, misc, SCSI, 0.050
2121898
8.2-36
11
Screw, misc, slotted, used w/ quick open screws
2852241
8.2-27
Screw, misc, tamperproof, flow-cell cover
2851566
8.2-19
22
Screw, thumb, nylon, mixing chamber holder
2851830
8.2-21
Screw,1.25 l, #4 x 40, pan-hd, xre
2804036
8.2-16
Screw,1.57 l, #10 x 56, used on Y- and Z-axis
2851567
8.2-20
11
Sheath flow coil
6856819
8.2-11
Software, diskette, Imaging, Utility II for versions 2A, 2B1, 2C1 (required for
installation of any software revision on DTX computers at Rev. C.5 and lower.)
Note: This disk is required for your service tool box.
6417953
Software, diskette, Workstation drivers for C.3 and C.4 hardware profile
6418142
Software, diskette, Workstation video driver for C.5 hardware profile

6418244
Software, flex disk, Image Blaster III
6418265
Software, flex disk, Workstation drivers for C.5 and C.7 hardware
6418281
Software, version 1B, EPROM kit, Analytical Station
6915105
Software, version 1C, EPROM kit, Analytical Station
6915157
Software, version 2A, CD-ROM, Image, English
6417943
Software, version 2A, CD-ROM, Workstation and System Help, English
6417952
Software, version 2A, EPROM kit, AMC
6915259
Software, version 2A, EPROM kit, Diff Processor
6915260
Software, version 2A1, EPROM kit, Analytical Station
6915232
Software, version 2A1, EPROM kit, Diluter Processor
6915231
Software, version 2A2, diskette, Workstation Installation, English
6418088
Software, version 2B1, CD-ROM, Software, English
6418114
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, English
6418184
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, French
6418187
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, German
6418188
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, Italian
6418185
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, Spanish
6418186
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, English
6418190
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, French
6418196
8.1-28
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, German
6418198
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, Italian
6418192
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, Spanish
6418194
Software, version 2C1, EPROM kit, Analytical Station
6915382
Software, version 2D, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, Japanese
6418260
Spring, 0.120 o.d. x 0.75 l x 0.016 w
2523144
8.2-5
Spring, 0.25 i.d. x 0.030 w
2527688
8.2-19
11
Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 1.38 l x 0.026 w, bath retainers
2523291
8.2-9
29
Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 2.00 l x 0.022 w
2523315
8.2-9
32
Spring, bar-code reader cylinder
1016096
8.2-16
Spring, BSV tension
2523294
8.2-23
Spring, compression, 0.210 o.d. x 0.38 l
2515153
8.2-23
26
Spring, compression, 1.14 i.d. x 1.35 l x 0.088 w
1022449
8.2-34
12
Spring, Diluter center window hinge pin
2523264
8.2-5
Spring, gas, Analyzer front door
6807359
8.2-39
Spring, hand detector
2515099
8.2-23
29
Spring, rocker bed return
2515004
8.2-18
10
Spring, stripper plate cylinder
2527823
8.2-17
24
Spring, switch return
2523299
8.2-17
10
Spring, TTM X-, Y-, Z-alignment shafts
2515158
8.2-20
13
Switch, button, Analyzer reset, w/ cable and connector
6028509
6322764
Switch, finger, tube detector (for PN 6805972)
6806144
8.2-17
16
6807003
8.2-17
16
Switch, float, level sense manifold
6859348
8.2-27
18
Switch, Hall effect with LED
6806400
8.2-15
8.2-23
14
15
Switch, magnetic, front door interlock
5116004
6322764
Switch, main power w/ cable and connectors
6859380
6322764
Switch, micro, Manual-mode start
5104077
6322764
Switch, micro, right and left lift up, under left stack, and TTM
5120035
6322764
Switch, micro, right stack loaded
6855620
6322764
Switch, micro, top right and left safety, and stripper plate
5120106
6322764
Switch, micro, under right stack
5120105
6322764
Switch, opto, BSV hand detector w/ black plastic assy
6859611
8.2-23
30
Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, new style
6807168
8.2-17
15
PN 4277219B
8.1-29
PARTS LISTS
Description
Figure/
Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, old style
6805972
8.2-17
15
Switch, opto,1-bit reader, 0.200 gap
4818006
8.2-24
Switch, scanner position, w/ cable and connector
6805089
6322764
Switch, tube detector support, cantilevered (for PN 6805972)
1023839
8.2-17
17
Switch, tube detector support, cantilevered (for PN 6807168
1025196
8.2-17
17
8.1-30
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-11 Master Parts List - T

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Thermistor, w/ cable, w/o connector and fan
2306093
8.2-3
8.2-41
32
32
Tie wrap mount, 0.51 x 0.33 w, w/ #6 hole
6011019
8.2-33
Tie wrap mount, 0.75 x 0.75, adhesive
6027284
8.2-33
Tie wrap mount, 1 x 1, w/ #6 hole, adhesive
6011015
8.2-33
Tie wrap mount, 1.71 x 8 w, w/ #8 hole (use with screw and locking washer
PN 2852093)
6011021
8.2-12
8.2-33
33
1
Tie wrap, black loop, 0.2 diam
6006002
8.2-33
6006014
8.2-33
6006018
8.2-33
Tie wrap, metal clamp
6006006
8.2-33
Tie wrap, multiuse clip, adhesive
6027571
8.2-33
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, 0.5 diam
6027785
8.2-33
12
6027784
8.2-33
13
6027717
8.2-33
15
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 0.5 diam
6027769
8.2-33
16
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 1 diam
6027720
8.2-33
17
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop,1 diam
6027718
8.2-33
14
Tie wrap, nylon, 15 l x 0.2
6011003
8.2-33
20
6011001
8.2-33
18
6011002
8.2-33
19
Tie wrap, ribbon cable clamp, 1, green
6027372
8.2-33
21
6027373
8.2-33
22
6027374
8.2-33
23
Tie wrap, square plastic base for ribbon
6028706
8.2-33
24
Tie wrap, square plastic top for ribbon
6028707
8.2-33
25
Tie wrap, white loop, 0.3 diam, adhesive
6028738
8.2-33
Tie wrap, white loop, 0.5 diam
6028733
8.2-33
26
6028735
8.2-33
10
6028732
8.2-33
27
6028734
8.2-33
11
6028731
8.2-33
28
Tool, brush, aperture cleaning
5406011
Tool, COULTER GENS Imaging kit
6915110
Tool, forceps, curved, 7 1/2
5402104
Tool, Mach Removal
5450423
PN 4277219B
8.1-31
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-11 Master Parts List - T (Continued)

Description
Part Number Figure
Tool, mirror, dental style
5402034
Tool, pin extractor
5450104
Tool, pinch valve removal
5415206
Tool, plastic potentiometer adjustment, metallic shaft, 0.32 tip
5402071
Tool, plastic potentiometer adjustment, nonmetallic shaft (use for C1 adjustment)
5415364
Tool, pliers, needlenose, large
5402030
Tool, pliers, needlenose, small
5402146
Tool, screwdriver, flat, 1/8 x 4
5402033
Tool, screwdriver, Phillips head, small
5402012
Tool, screwdriver, tamperproof
5415219
Tool, stripper plate
5450555
Tool, tool-box, plastic, blue
5402162
Tool, TTM Light Shield Alignment

Note: Only use revision A or revision C of this tool. If you have revision B, order a
new one; the laser alignment is not optimized using revision B.
5401269
Tool, Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse reagent and StabiLyse reagent
5450245
Tool/Supply, acetone, analytical grade acetone (1 ppm)
1615361
Tool/Supply, applicator stick
2527713
Tool/Supply, Isopropyl alcohol (ChromAR), analytical grade 99.5% purity
1606138
Tool/Supply, latex particles DC/RF, large
6605419
Tool/Supply, lens paper
3814123
Tray, BSV cleaning
1023299
8.2-23
32
TTM, flow cell light shield
1022478
8.2-20
TTM, flow cell, coated and tested
6706458
8.2-20
TTM, flow-cell mounting plate
1019356
8.2-20
26
TTM, LED, red
4802024
8.2-19
TTM, lens block
7000551
8.2-20
10
TTM, LS sensor
6706013
8.2-20
TTM, plate, horizontal bolt, CP
1022733
8.2-20
21
TTM, plate, vertical adjustment, CP
1023419
8.2-20
24
TTM, plates, horizontal and vertical slide, S/A
6856153
8.2-20
15
TTM, shaft, X-axis
1017940
8.2-20
17
TTM, shock mount
2523590
8.2-19
13
TTM, triode, RF box
5704031
8.2-19
TTM, module with RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum tube
6859512
8.2-14
8.1-32
Item
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
TTM, module with solid state RF Detector Preamp card, FRU
7000699
8.2-14
Tubing, custom, 10 w/ flare, 0.023 i.d. silicone, Retic module
1021633
6321104
Tubing, custom, critical length red marker
1023153
6321104
Tubing, custom, diff preservative
6805120
6321104
Tubing, custom, diff preservative line, Retic module
1018301
6321104
Tubing, custom, feed thru 90 to solenoid
6805152
6321104
Tubing, custom, flow cell input (cut to 8.9 cm [3.5 in.] for port 5 on flow cell)
7000095
Tubing, custom, sample line, 1.25 l
1022016
6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 15, TTM, mixing chamber
1019301
6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 18 long [used between FF5 and FF20 on units installed
at low altitudes, <2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level]
6859003
6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 4.75 l
1022017
6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 6, TTM, mixing chamber
1017954
6321104
Tubing, custom, segment. Automatic-mode
6859015
6321104
Tubing, custom, silicone, 1.75
6805641
6321104
Tubing, custom, silicone, 3
6805167
6321104
6805168
6321104
6805169
6321104
Tubing, I-beam, 0.062 i.d. x 0.031 w, black stripe
3213197
Tubing, I-beam, 0.079 i.d. x 0.031 w, blue stripe
3213198
Tubing, input line, large, shielded, diluent, flush, and cleaner
6915052
8.2-28
8.2-29
7
8
Tubing, input line, small, shielded, w/ labels
6915053
8.2-28
8.2-29
1
1
Tubing, input line, waste, 12, shielded w/ cable to sensor
6805366
8.2-28
8.2-29
11
12
Tubing, input line, waste, 8, shielded w/o cable to sensor
6859790
8.2-28
8.2-29
10
11
Tubing, nylon, 0.250 o.d. x 0.033 w, black
3230089
Tubing, pickup, 0.5 - 1.9 L universal (Use for CBC lytic reagent, 500 mL and 1 L;
stain; and PAK PRESERVE [StabiLyse])
6706297
8.2-28
8.2-29
2
2
Tubing, pickup, 10 - 20 L universal (Use for diluent; cleaning agent, 10 L; and flush
solution)
6706295
8.2-28
8.2-29
8
9
Tubing, pickup, 20 L, w/ float sensor
5120250
8.2-29
13
Tubing, pickup, 5 L universal (Use for CBC lytic reagent, 5 L; PAK LYSE
[Erythrolyse]; retic clearing solution; and cleaning agent, 5 L)
6706296
8.2-28
8.2-29
3
3
Note: A TTM with a solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an
Analytical Station that has a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card
(PN 7000688) and an RF to 24 V supply cable (PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
PN 4277219B
8.1-33
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
Tubing, pickup, waste
6805636
8.2-28
8.2-29
9
10
Tubing, polyallomer, 1/4 o.d., white
3202048
Tubing, polyallomer, 1/8 o.d., white
3202077
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.023 i.d. x 0.083 o.d., 0.030 w, clear
3213153
3213159
3213062
3213063
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, black solid
3202277
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, black stripe
3202203
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, blue stripe
3202209
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, blue/black,
3202218
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, brown stripe
3202204
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, clear [used between FF5 and
FF20 on units installed at high altitudes, >2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level]
3202036
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, gray stripe
3202211
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, gray/black
3202244
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, green and black
3202217
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, green stripe
3202208
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, orange stripe
3202206
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, red stripe
3202205
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, violet and black
3202243
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, violet stripe
3202210
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, white stripe
3202212
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, yellow and black
3202216
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, yellow stripe
3202207
3202037
3202038
3202039
8.2-28
3202021
3202035
Tubing, restrictor with molded ends
6806417
Tubing, riser, CP (for reagent reservoir)
1024715
8.2-27
30
Tubing, silicone, 0.023 i.d. x 0.103 o.d., 0.040 w, red stripe
3213073
Tubing, silicone, 0.030 i.d., 0.047 w (used on NC port of VL89 to FT9)
3230080
Tubing, silicone, 0.040 i.d. x 0.102 o.d., 0.031 w, green stripe
3203026
8.1-34
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS

Description
Part Number Figure
Tubing, silicone, 0.062 i.d. x 0.124 o.d., 0.031 w, black stripe
3203015
Tubing, silicone, 0.062 i.d. x 0.156 o.d., 0.047 w, yellow stripe
3213163
Tubing, silicone, 0.062 i.d. x 0.186 o.d., 0.062 w, not for pinch valves
3213080
Tubing, silicone, 0.079 i.d. x 0.157 o.d., 0.039 w, yellow stripe
3213176
Tubing, sleeve
6806498
Tubing, thermoplastic, 0.062 i.d. x 0.156 o.d., 0.047 w
3213212
PN 4277219B
8.2-31
Item
25
8.1-35
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-12 Master Parts List - U through V
Description
Part Number
Figure
Item
Valve, 4-way, pneumatic
6214081
8.2-15
18
Valve, Angar, 3-way, # 458002
6232579
8.2-32
10
Valve, Angar, 3-way, # 458005
6232578
8.2-32
11
Valve, check, 0.062 i.d. tubing
6214108
8.2-30
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.082 i.d. tubing
6232605
8.2-30
6214107
8.2-30
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. tubing, w/ black stripe
6232080
8.2-30
Valve, pinch, 1-tube, black
6857096
8.2-32
12
Valve, pinch, 3-tube, white
6856319
8.2-32
14
Valve, pinch, deactivator clip, red, holds pinch valve open
1008315
8.2-32
Valve, pinch, mount
1017501
8.2-32
Valve, pinch, reduced stroke, white (used for VL58A, VL58B, VL59, VL62A, VL62B,
VL64, VL94A, VL94B, VL95A, and VL95B)
6807225
8.2-32
16
Valve, pinch, Retic waste assembly
6706898
8.2-22
23
Valve, pinch, sleeve, blue, CP
1025225
8.2-32
15
Valve, pinch, white, standard
6855763
8.2-32
Valve, pressure bleed off, w/ fittings

Note: Revision D implements changes to prevent the valve from sticking in the
open position.
6805382
8.2-34
8.2-35
16
14
Valve, shear, 2.5 L (LH 750 System)
6707179
8.2-42
7000693-FRU
11
Valve, shear, 31 L (LH 750 System)
6707180
8.2-42
7000694-FRU
14
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ connector and mount
6859244
8.2-10
30
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ connector and O-rings
6859521
8.2-25
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ O-rings
6232342
8.2-10
12
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ seal, for level sense manifold
6232757
8.2-27
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, pneumatic, 0 - 25 psi, 24 Vdc, NC, w/ 24 leads
6233023
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, pneumatic, 50 psi, 24 Vdc
6232985
8.2-27
17
6859245
8.2-7
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, w/ screws and O-ring
6232807
8.2-10
33
Valve, solenoid, 4-way, nc, w/o fittings
6232635
8.2-22
8.2-42
9
28
Valve, solenoid, 5-way
6232376
8.2-18
8.1-36
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-13 Master Parts List - W through Z
Description
Part Number Figure
Washer plate, CP (for Cap Piercer module)
1024318
Washer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thk
6216012
8.2-15
19
Washer, flat, #2, 2.094 i.d. x 0.259 o.d. x 0.020 thk
2827095
8.2-20
2826002
8.2-8
8.2-12
8.2-16
8.2-19
8.2-20
7
12
6
14
5
2827021
8.2-17
8.2-25
34
12
2851840
8.2-3
8.2-41
18
18
2826059
8.2-15
8.2-34
16
26
Washer, flat, #12, 0.250 i.d. x 0.50 o.d. x 0.031 thk, nylon
2826035
8.2-23
37
2827071
8.2-3
8.2-41
21
21
2827113
8.2-12
2852239
8.2-27
2826048
8.2-20
2827157
8.2-24
2843009
8.2-18
12
2827027
8.2-23
13
2851173
8.2-26
17
2827146
8.2-16
2827158
8.2-5
20
2843006
8.2-6
2851460
8.2-23
33
Washer, flat, #4, 0.125 i.d. x 0.250o.d. x 0.031 thk
2827045
8.2-16
13
2827133
8.2-9
39
2827048
8.2-24
16
2827147
8.2-9
2851291
8.2-9
33
2826051
8.2-23
12
2827134
8.2-23
36
2842003
8.2-7
17
2851561
8.2-19
17
2827135
8.2-20
PN 4277219B
Item
8.1-37
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-13 Master Parts List - W through Z (Continued)

Description
Part Number Figure
Item
2842007
8.2-9
2826045
8.2-9
8.2-17
19
35
2827160
8.2-20
12
2827167
Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0 020 thk
2826030
8.2-15
8.2-32
22
3
Washer, lock, spring, 0.164 i.d. x 0.343 o.d. x 0.013 thk
2852270
8.2-20
20
Washer, spacer, #6, 1.25 l, 0.25 round
2842085
8.2-15
Washer, split lock #2
2826001
8.2-24
8.1-38
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
8.2
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
On the illustrations in this section, a number is used to identify the part in the associated
parts list, a letter to indicate detailed illustrations are available for the component or assembly.
Figure 8.2-1 Main Analytical Station Components Illustrated
Figure Reference
A
B
TM
A Card cage and rear panel

and cover, Figure 8.2-3
S
E N
B Front cover, Figure 8.2-2
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95
0000

COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
BP CBC
DIFF
PPNEU
N E U
MAIN
RETICS
TTEMP
E M P
6600 PSI
P S I
3300 PSI
P S I
55 PSI
P S I
VACUUM
AAC
C LINE
L IN E
6600 330.0
0 . 0 44.9
. 9 2288 1115
15
AAC
C
DDCC
C Door, Figure 8.2-6

D Front panel, Figure 8.2-7
Rear panel, Figure 8.2-8

E Front covers,
Figure 8.2-4
H
D
Under front cover,

piercing station, and
rocker bed, Figure 8.2-14
F Front panel, Figure 8.2-9
F
E
G Front panel,
Figure 8.2-11
H Door, Figure 8.2-13
I
Overview, Figure 8.2-34

Covers and panels,
Figure 8.2-37
Door, Figure 8.2-26
K Door, Figure 8.2-27

L Door, Figure 8.2-27
L
Inputs, Figure 8.2-28

6 4 9 8 2 3 4 B
Table 8.2-1 Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1

Title
Number
Diluter Cassette Guide Panels

Check Valves and Chokes
Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware
Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware
Valves, Common
LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors
LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door, and Hardware
8.2-5
8.2-30
8.2-31
8.2-33
8.2-32
8.2-38
8.2-41
8.2-42
PN 4277219B
8.2-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Door (See Table 8.2-2)

2
5
3
13
12
10
12
11
7253072A
8.2-2
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Cover (See Figure 8.2-2)

Item
Part Number Description
6859145
Cover, CRT, cover top, black strip
2852066
Nut, #4, hex custom
1022205
Cover, display, CRT window, clear w/ EMI coating
6859146
Cover, CRT, cover bottom, black strip
6858990
Door, Analyzer front, cover with graphics only (GENS System)
2808051
2523647
2810138
2827071
10
6859036
Hardware, bracket, cover support, Analyzer
11
1022315
12
2852022
13
2851859
PN 4277219B
8.2-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-3)
4
3
5
6
7
8
1 0 , 1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
F R O N T
1 7
1 6
1 9
2 1
2 2
1 8
2 0
3 1 , 3 2
3 0
2 9
2 7
2 4 , 2 5 , 2 6
2 3
2 8
R E A R
6 4 9 8 2 2 8 B
8.2-4
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Panel and Cover (See Figure 8.2-3)
Item
6706029
PCB, Red/White Preamp 2
6706923
6705876
PCB, Red/White Processor
6705977
PCB, API
6705984
6859503
Display, CRT, Scope Module 2
6705985
6706028
6706070
PCB, Comm Intfc
10
6706631
PCB, Diluter Processor, without software EPROM (for use on GENS System only)
11
6707233
12
6706314
PCB, Diff Processor 4, without software EPROM
13
6706071
PCB, Analog 5
14
6859067
15
2851859
16
1022868
17
2852105
18
2851840
19
6859069
Door, Anlayzer, rear
20
1022315
21
2827071
22
2810138
23
6859177
PCB, Backplane, Analog
24
1022451
25
2852023
26
6805217
Cover, bus bar
27
6859178
28
2852106
29
6859176
PCB, Backplane, CRT
30
6859175
PCB, Backplane, Digital
31
2603068
32
2306093
PN 4277219B
8.2-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-4 GENS System Diluter, Front Doors and Covers (See Table 8.2-4)
1
2
3
4
1 7
6
1 6
7 , 8 , 9
1 2
1 5
1 0
1 3
1 1
1 1
1 4
6 4 9 8 2 3 5 B
8.2-6
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-4 Diluter, Front Covers (See Figure 8.2-4)

Item
6854517
Cover, window, smoked, w/ clips, left and right panels (GENS System)
6805395
Cover, window, smoked, door, front, center (GENS System)
1022544
Cover, keyboard panel, splash
2852076
1020955
Component, misc, grounding contact
2806017
6805302
Display, Diluter LCD w/ Keyboard and Display Interface card and keypad
2016587
Keypad, membrane, front panel
6805232
Display, LCD, Diluter front panel
10
2851859
11
2852022
12
1022442
13
1022183
14
1022182
15
1411145
16
6858989
Door, Diluter, lower front, w/o Keyboard and Display Interface card (GENS System)
17
1025209
6807191
Cover, splash shield, retic pump, CP

Hardware, splash shield support
PN 4277219B
8.2-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Table 8.2-5)
8
1
10
2
19
20
21
22
1
11
12
23
17
18
15
24
14
13
18
23
17
18
18
15
16
6498037A
8.2-8
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Figure 8.2-5)

Item
2804088
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.3 l, FL82-hd, xrec
6807022
Flipper, left, outer
2523144
Spring, 0.120 o.d. x 0.75 l x 0.016 w
6807019
Flipper, left, inner
6854305
1017748
2523264
Spring, Diluter center window hinge pin
1017577
Component, misc, pin mount, center Diluter window
6806638
Flipper, right, inner
10
6807020
Flipper, right, outer
11
6859011
12
6859010
13
6859009
14
6859008
15
2852023
16
6805156
Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, right
17
1024630
Hardware, cassette guide, right
18
2852226
19
2804119
20
2827158
21
1016023
Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter front cover
22
2840073
23
1024629
Hardware, cassette guide, left
24
6805177
Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, left
PN 4277219B
8.2-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-6)
L E F T D O O R
1
2
3
2 8 5 2 0 2 3 (4 )
6
5
4
3
9
L E F T C O M P A R T M E N T
1 0
1 1
1 2
3
1 4
1 3
1 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 2 B
8.2-10
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-6)
Item
6858997
1022932
2852023
2852109
2843006
6859783
6706003
6707158
PCB, Diluter 2
PCB, Diluter 2 REL (GENS Systems with SW 4.0 and higher only)
6705993
PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS (for use with an RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube
only)
PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS 2 (required for a solid state RF Detector Preamp card but can also
be used with an RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube)
7000688
9
6706036
PCB, Diluter Cable Adapter
10
2822050
Nut, #2, 56 UNC
11
6706157
6706591
6707231
PCB, Diluter 3 (only for GENS Systems without a SlideMaker)

PCB, Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface (for GENS Systems with or without a SlideMaker)
PCB, Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface (required for LH 750 Systems with or without a SlideMaker,
but also works on GENS Systems.)
12
6707084
PCB, GENS Driver 3, daughter card for Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card (replaces drivers on
U2, U17, and U21)
13
6707073
U22 and U28)
14
6707083
U1, U3, U4, U5, U11, and U23)
PN 4277219B
8.2-11
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-7)

21
22
2
1
13
17
18
20
19
5
15
5
14
5, 6
13
16
5
5
7
11
8.2-12
13
12
10
6498098A
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-7)

Item
2840053
6859057
6859245
6858331
Chamber, backwash tank
6859221
6856745
1015772
6859096
Chamber, vacuum overflow tank
6805143
10
6232036
Fitting, 0.062 i.d.tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
11
6858756
Pump, retic clearing solution, 2 mL
12
2838003
13
2852023
14
6858757
Pump, diff lytic reagent (Erythrolyse), low volume 350 L, high volume 540 L
15
2851244
16
6852909
17
2842003
18
2116001
Hardware, bracket, RBC and WBC diluent dispensers
19
6858979
Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir)
20
6859192
Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir)
21
6905043
Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir)
22
6912099
Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir)
PN 4277219B
8.2-13
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-8)
1
10
7
6
5
1
3
11
11
14
12
13
6498020A
8.2-14
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-8)
Item
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
6859221
6232362
6232807
2804039
2827045
Washer, flat, #4, 0.125 i.d. x 0.250o.d. x 0.031 thk
2826002
6232739
6232191
10
6859311
Chamber, vacuum trap w/ fittings
11
6859138
12
6805143
13
2852230
14
6859244
PN 4277219B
8.2-15
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-9)

41
37
38
40
39
30
31
30
36
32
34
35
30
21
33
22
23
15
10
24
13
16
3
17
11
29
14
12
18
27, 28
26
25
1"
19
20
8.2-16
6498036A
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-9)

Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
7000380
2852023
2826035
2827147
2843006
2842007
2116002
2523477
6855639
6859621
6701652
6103025
8010009
6859795
6858922
2851244
2806009
1005697
2826045
2822016
1004595
2512088
6859304
2512071
6855601
2512120
6701588
6701589
2523291
2822003
6859608
2523315
2851291
5704030
6859076
2804005
1023429
6805525
2827133
2804077
6852456
PN 4277219B
Chamber, clear plastic,11 top ports (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir)
Washer, flat,#8, 0.187 i.d. x 0.438 o.d. x 0.063 thk
Hardware, bracket, chamber
Hardware, cap, black plastic vinyl isolator (used on VC1)
Lamp, Hgb w/ cable
Preamp, Hgb
Hgb, cuvette, glassware only
Consumable, tape, foam
Module, Hgb, w/ preamp, cuvette and lamp
Nut, hex, #10
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d x 10-32 thd,polypropylene (for aperture top)
O-ring, 0.145 i.d. x 0.281 o.d. x 0.062w (aperture module fitting seal)
Aperture module 2
O-ring, 0.489 i.d. x 0.070 w, aperture seal, large
Chamber, bath, RBC and WBC
O-ring, aperture seal, small
Aperture block set, WBC
Aperture block set, RBC
Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 1.38 l x 0.026 w, bath retainers
Nut, hex,#4
Hardware, bracket, aperture door thumbscrew
Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 2.00 l x 0.022 w
Hardware, gasket, EMI
Door, Diluter, center panel, lower metal door
Hardware, hinge, aperture door
Door, Diluter, aperture EMI shield
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, small (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent
reservoir)
8.2-17
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-10)
1
10
11
12
9
3
4
5
15
14
13
7
38
39
40
16
17
18
22
21
36
37
21
20
19
35
Configuration on Analytical Stations
that bypass the diluent reservoir.
23
34
17
29
33
26
31
27
25
30
15
24
14
6
7
8.2-18
32
28
Sweep-flow reservoir
with level sensor
6498088B
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-10)
Item
6859221
1007924
Manifold, 6 ports
6232693
6232694
6232697
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
6232362
6214112
6216002
10
1004645
11
1019128
Manifold, bath bubbler
12
6232342
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ O-rings
13
2806075
14
2826035
15
2827147
16
2826045
17
2810017
18
2827021
19
6805129
20
6859041
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolt (QD4)
21
6856996
Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 4-way
22
6858922
23
6859132
Hardware, bracket, QD6
24
6859038
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5, QD6)
25
6859039
26
6856877
Chamber, sweep-flow tank
27
6858331
Chamber, backwash tank (used as sweep-flow reservoir, VC39)
28
6233025
29
6805861
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports w/ white ball inside
30
6859244
31
2852023
32
2806128
33
6232807
34
6232739
35
6806758
Manifold, diluent/cleaning agent
36
6805632
Module, diluent/cleaning agent assembly
37
6806767
Chamber, diluent/cleaning agent reservoir
38
2851407
Hardware, standoff, snap-in
39
6854923
PCB, Ground Interconnect
40
2822008
Nut, hex, #6
PN 4277219B
8.2-19
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-11)

17
19
2
11
1
18
15
4
16
11
12
15
14
5, 6
7
8
11
12
9
13
10
8.2-20
6498052A
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-11)

Item
6859245
2840053
6859057
6856819
Sheath flow coil
6852910
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss, w/ O-ring
6856745
6805016
Chamber, sheath tank
1015772
1025133
Cover, splash shield, Solenoid Inteconnect module, CP
10
6807073
Module, Solenoid Interconnect
11
2852023
12
2838003
13
6859138
14
6805481
Pump, 2 mL diaphragm pump
15
6859221
16
6859144
Pump, CBC lytic reagent, 1.06 mL
17
2851244
18
6852909
19
6858762
Pump, diff preservative (StabiLyse), low volume 131 L, high volume 231 L
PN 4277219B
8.2-21
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-12)
1, 2
10
7
25230622288204600452((22))
11
12
33
34
32
13
14, 15
16
18
17
30
31
24
14
25
22
23
29
26
21
20
19
27
28
8.2-22
6498050A
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-12)
Item
2406016
Hardware, knob, vacuum regulator
2807038
2827113
6859112
Hardware, bracket, vacuum regulator
6232628
Regulator, vacuum, w/ attaching nut
2802025
6214112
6859221
6232807
10
6232739
11
2827133
12
2826002
13
2804045
14
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
15
6232362
16
2852023
17
6859138
18
2838003
19
7000380
20
6011003
21
2808068
22
6859039
23
6859038
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5)
24
6232038
25
6206001
26
6216128
27
6232313
Regulator, sheath, diff sample and retic
28
2523691
Hardware, knob, black, used on regulators
29
6232339
Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, internal hex
30
2851244
31
6852456
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, small
32
6805035
33
6011021
Tie wrap mount, 1.71 x 8 w, w/ #8 hole (use with screw and locking washer PN 2852093)
34
2852093
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.38 l, w/ locking washer (use with PN 6011021)
PN 4277219B
8.2-23
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-13)
RIGHT DOOR
3
2
1
7
9
RIGHT COMPARTMENT
10
11
12
14
13
7253074A
8.2-24
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-13)
Item
2852023
1022932
6858998
6705994
PCB, Diff Power Supply
6706002
6707177
PCB, Diluter 1 (GENS System)

PCB, Diluter 1 (LH 750 System)
6859783
2843006
2852109
2852023
10
6706203
PCB, RS/Opto Interface
11
2852076
12
6859703
PCB, PVT, w/ bracket
13
6706196
PCB, Sensor Distribution
14
6706373
PCB, Laser PS, w/ cover
PN 4277219B
8.2-25
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-14 Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front
Cover (See Table 8.2-14)
Figure Reference
A Piercing station,
Figure 8.2-15
B Rocker bed, Figure 8.2-17
C Rocker bed mounting

channel, Figure 8.2-18
A
B
D Aspiration Pump module

and manifolds MF4 and
MF13, Figure 8.2-25
E Probe-Wipe module,
Figure 8.2-24
F BSV module, Figure 8.2-23
G Retics module,
Figure 8.2-22
H Diff module, Figure 8.2-21
I
D
7253063E
8.2-26
F
5
H
4
Triple Transducer module,

Figure 8.2-19
I
2
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-14 Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front Cover
(See Figure 8.2-14)
Item
Part Number
Description
6805184
Module, Rocker Bed
6859512
Module, Triple Transducer (TTM) with RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum tube
7000699
Module, Triple Transducer (TTM) with solid state RF Detector Preamp card, FRU
Note: A TTM with a solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an Analytical
Station that has a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card (PN 7000688) and an RF to 24 V
cable (PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
6859511
6805200
Module, Retic
6859517
Module, BSV
PN 4277219B
8.2-27
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Table 8.2-15)
Figure Reference
A Tube ram cylinder and
bar-code scanners and
cylinder, Figure 8.2-16
2
1
A
5
10
25
24
9
8
12
11
23
17
8
22
16
15
13
21
18
19
20
14
6498226B
8.2-28
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Figure 8.2-15)

Item
2806017
6006006
6006014
2842085
Washer, spacer, #6, 1.25 l, 0.25 round
2852036
Hardware, clip, bed rock cylinder
2806136
2851391
Hardware, bracket, rocker bed air cylinder mount
6232038
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
10
6857929
Cylinder, air, bed rock
11
6807145
Needle, enclosed needle cap piercer
12
6805670
Module, Enclosed Needle Cap Piercer
13
6859221
14
6232919
6806400
Cylinder, air, bellows contract (for enclosed needle cap piercer)

Switch, Hall effect with LED (use with PN 6232919)
15
1023072
Hardware, bushing, piercing station
16
2826059
17
2806139
18
6214081
Valve, 4-way, pneumatic
19
6216012
20
6232036
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
21
6232447
22
2826030
23
6856488
Regulator, 25 psi, bar-code scanner cylinder
24
6232189
Gauge, pressure, 0 to 60 psi
25
2851306
Screw, #10 x 32, 2.25 l, hsc-hd, hex, black
PN 4277219B
8.2-29
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-16 Diluter, Tube Ram Cylinder and Bar-Code Scanners and Cylinder See Table 8.2-16)
3
1
2
1 5
1 6
1 7
4
1 4
1 2
1 3
5
6
7
1 1
8
9
1 0
1 8
1 9
1 9
2 0
2 3
2 1
2 2
6 4 9 8 2 2 9 B
8.2-30
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-16 Diluter, Bar-Code Scanner and Tube Ram Cylinder (See Figure 8.2-16)
Item
2806136
1016096
Spring, bar-code reader cylinder
6805541
Cylinder, air, bar-code reader
6855431
Cassette transport, ram guide block
2827146
2826002
2804036
2806150
1023253
Cassette transport, ram tip
10
1016063
Component, misc, rod pivot
11
2837037
Hardware, clip, shaft retaining, tube ram
12
2804067
13
2827045
14
6232218
Cylinder, air, tube ram
15
6232038
16
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
17
6206001
18
6805084
Module, Piercing Station
19
2509007
Hardware, magnet, scanner position actuator
20
2804080
21
1015679
Cover, bar-code scanner
22
6858081
Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (LED style bar-code reader)

Note: Scanners manufactured with a new adhesive that prevents the LEDs from moving out of
alignment are labeled revision D.
23
6807264
PN 4277219B
Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (laser style bar-code reader)
8.2-31
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Table 8.2-17)

1
6
7
4
5
11
9
12
10
36
34
35
33
32
31
13
14
30
18
25
26
24
29
28
27
8.2-32
19
23
22
15
20
21
17
16
7253414E
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Figure 8.2-17)

Item
6702887
Module, Rocker Bed Belt Assy
6232127
Cylinder, air, cassette belt advance
2830013
6216345
O-ring, 10-32 thd fitting
1005692
1015614
Cassette transport, cassette advance wheel
2804005
2804101
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.12 l, f 82-hd, xrec
6855039
Cassette transport, lever, w/ shaft, screw and bearings
10
2523299
Spring, switch return
11
2802006
12
6855390
Hardware, bracket, rocker bed spring, w/ sensor flag
13
2822008
Nut, hex, #6
14
2104261
Screw, misc, d-type, female w/ bolt
15
6805972
6807168
Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, old style

Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, new style
16
6806144
6807003

17
1023839
1025196

18
6805192
Cassette transport, stripper plate, w/ button
19
2822040
Nut, hex, #25
20
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
21
6232038
22
6232859
Cylinder, air, stripper plate
23
1024475
Hardware, bracket, stripper plate
24
2527823
Spring, stripper plate cylinder
25
1024330
Cassette transport, stripper plate button
26
2851844
27
6855015
Hardware, bracket, bed locking
28
1016565
Hardware, bracket, fastener, socket ball
29
2806021
30
6806521
Cassette transport, rocker bed front rail assembly
31
2851850
32
1015522
Hardware, bracket, bed rock air cylinder ball
33
1015617
Hardware, bracket, air cylinder ball mount
34
2827021
35
2826045
36
2822016
Nut, hex, #10
PN 4277219B
8.2-33
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Table 8.2-18)
2
1
19
4
20
21
22
23
18
17
6
7
17
16
10
11
12
13
14
6
15
8
8.2-34
7
7253086A
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Figure 8.2-18)
Item
6232133
Cylinder, air, cassette lifts
6855014
Cover, cassette lifts w/ 8010017 adhesive tape
2852083
2802051
6232376
Valve, solenoid, 5-way
2851669
2851687
O-ring, clear plastic flat
6232379
Fitting, 0.082 tubing to 0.5 thd
6857465
Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, right
10
2515004
Spring, rocker bed return
11
6805543
Cassette transport, rocker bed locking assy
12
2843009
13
2806200
14
6232154
Choke, plastic, clear, 0.062 i.d. tubing, 0.016 orifice
15
6857466
Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, left
16
1016567
17
2808110
18
1007924
Manifold, 6 ports
19
6859221
20
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
21
6232362
22
1019135
23
1019136
Hardware, stud, ball, sleeve
PN 4277219B
8.2-35
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Table 8.2-19)
Figure Reference
A Translation plates and
hardware,
Figure 8.2-20
4
23
3
2
6
7
22
21
22
A
11
10
20
12
19
18
13
14
15
17
6498132B
8.2-36
16
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Figure 8.2-19)

Item
Part Number
Description
6805630
Cover, flow cell and lens block
1022206
Cover, lens block and laser
4802024
TTM, LED, red
6859777
Preamp, RF Detector Preamp 6
5704031
TTM, triode, RF box
2830013
2852023
6805206
Laser
2852022
10
1023221
Hardware, bracket, ribbon cable holder
11
2527688
Spring, 0.25 i.d. x 0.030 w
12
2837045
Hardware, clip, retaining
13
2523590
TTM, shock mount
14
2826002
15
2804005
16
2806158
17
2851561
18
6805539
Preamp, LS Preamp 7
19
6859227
Hardware, plate, TTM laser area
20
6858982
Hardware, plate, TTM area
21
2429637
Label, laser warning
22
2851566
Screw, misc, tamperproof, flow-cell cover
23
7000700
Preamp, RF Detector, solid state

Note: A solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an Analytical Station that has
a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card (PN 7000688) and an RF to 24 V supply cable
(PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
PN 4277219B
8.2-37
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-20 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See Table 8.2-20)
23
1
12
26
25
4
7
13
22
23
20
24
10
9
14
20
11
21
12
13
14
13
18
BOTTOM VIEW
20
15
12
19
17
16
REAR VIEW
6498038A
8.2-38
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-20 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See Figure 8.2-20)
Item
6706458
TTM, flow cell, coated and tested
6706013
TTM, LS sensor
1022478
TTM, flow cell light shield
2827095
2826002
2802019
Screw, #2 x 56, 0.3 l, pan-head, xrec
2808131
2826048
2827135
10
7000551
TTM, lens block
11
2851567
Screw, #10 x 56, 1.57 l, used on Y- and Z-axis
12
2827160
13
2515158
Spring, TTM X-, Y-, Z-alignment shafts
14
2851569
Nut, square, #10, used on Y- and Z-axis
15
6856153
TTM, plates, horizontal and vertical slide, S/A
16
2807038
17
1017940
TTM, shaft, X-axis
18
2851568
Nut, hex, #10, used on X-axis
19
2852276
20
2852270
Washer, lock, spring, 0.164 i.d. x 0.343 o.d. x 0.013 thk
21
1022733
TTM, plate, horizontal bolt, CP
22
2851614
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, TTM lockdown
23
2808110
24
1023419
TTM, plate, vertical adjustment, CP
25
2806009
26
1019356
TTM, flow-cell mounting plate
PN 4277219B
8.2-39
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Table 8.2-21)
15
16
14
10
13
11
9
8
7
4
6
5
12
6498042A
8.2-40
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Figure 8.2-21)

Item
6859038
Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5)
6858748
Chamber, mixing, diff
2851830
Screw, thumb, nylon, mixing chamber holder
6805301
Fitting, quick disconnect, 5-tube, TTM, mixing chamber
6232664
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, green
6232663
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, blue
6232665
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, red
6232666
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, black
6232662
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, yellow
10
6859511
11
2523221
12
6805817
Motor, Diff mixing chamber, w/ filter board
13
7000687
Drive, mixing chamber, diff, FRU
14
6852909
15
6232807
16
6232740
6233025

Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF17 w/ Solenoid Interconnect module)
PN 4277219B
8.2-41
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Table 8.2-22)

3
4
4
2
9
7
5
3
6
7
32
31
10
6
33
12
11
13
14
30
29
17
28
23
15
16
18
27
19
20
24
22
25
26
21
6498053A
8.2-42
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Figure 8.2-22)

Item
2852022
6232739
6233021

Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF16 with Solenoid Interconnect module)
6859221
6232360
6232807
1004645
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
6232636
Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/o fittings
6232635
10
2804039
11
6805196
Hardware, bracket, pump mounting
12
6232653
13
2802026
14
6852909
15
6858073
16
2852023
17
2838003
18
2852006
19
6805155
20
6859121
Chamber, stain
21
6858962
22
2807024
23
6706898
Valve, pinch, Retic waste assembly
24
6805106
25
6859463
Heater, diff
26
6805220
Hardware, bracket, bubble/blood detector
27
6859506
Blood detectors, matched set, Retic module
28
6805818
29
2523221
30
6859498
31
6232443
Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube round, male
32
6232444
Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube round, female
33
1024818
Cover, splash shield, retic valves, CP
PN 4277219B
8.2-43
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Table 8.2-23)

1
11
13
15
14
A Probe-Wipe module,
Figure 8.2-24
16
3
9
12
Figure Reference
10
6
21
18
20
17
19
40
39
38
37
34
33
36
35
32
31
24
25
22
26
23
30
8.2-44
29
28
27
6498138B
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Figure 8.2-23)

Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1017439
1017438
2851445
2523294
6805648
1021990
2852078
1014681
1017440
2512031
2822046
2826051
2827027
1022003
6805597
6232920
6806400
6859221
2851444
6855617
6706457
1023328
1017361
6706382
6805009
2852223
2837031
2515153
6805517
2852229
2515099
6859611
6805358
1023299
2851460
3104044
6855650
2827134
2826035
2806090
2523361
2852023
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PN 4277219B
BSV, shaft lever cap

BSV, tension spring retainer
Hardware, clip, BSV center section cylinder
Spring, BSV tension
Cylinder, air, BSV center section
BSV, center pad standoff
Screw,#10 x 32, 0.38 l, pan-hd, xrec, w/ cone washer
Hardware, stud, ball, #10-32
BSV, lever shaft
O-ring, red, BSV shaft
Nut, hex,#25
BSV, front pad standoff
Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, with sensors
Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, without sensors
Switch, Hall effect with LED (use with PN 6232920)
Hardware, clip, BSV Manual-mode aspirator tip cylinder
Hardware, knob, BSV, shaft
BSV, pads, matched set
BSV, pad antifriction spacer
BSV, shaft, coated
PCB, Probe-Wipe Interconnect
Cover, Probe-Wipe Interconnect card
Hardware, clip, retaining, BSV hand detector mount
Spring, compression, 0.210 o.d. x 0.38 l
Hardware, bracket, hand detector mount
Spring, hand detector
Switch, opto, BSV hand detector w/ black plastic assy
BSV, shaft, hand detector, threaded ends
Tray, BSV cleaning
BSV, housing insulator
BSV, housing
Hardware, bearing, bushing, shaft, nylon, BSV
8.2-45
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Table 8.2-24)

1
Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup

5
2
6
4
7
8
9
13
17
10
11
16
18
19
12
14
15
Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup

21
20 2
6
4
7
8
22
9
11
26
23
24
27
25
6498139B
8.2-46
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Figure 8.2-24)

Item
7000507
Module, Probe-Wipe, with stationary backwash cup, FRU
4818006
Switch, opto,1-bit reader, 0.200 gap
2827157
2802046
3505048
Motor, Probe-Wipe module (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup)
2826001
Washer, split lock #2
2802006
2512127
O-ring, motor mount
2852226
10
2852262
Probe Wipe, lead screw truck
11
2512006
O-ring, 0.301 i.d. x 0.070 w
12
6805367
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup)
13
6859221
14
2527689
Hardware, bearing, Probe-Wipe module
15
2852223
16
2827048
17
6858854
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup)
18
1023249
Probe wipe, backwash cup (stationary)
19
7000690
Module, Probe-Wipe, with moveable backwash cup, FRU
20
6807188
Cable, probe-wipe harness, with sensors and motor (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable
backwash cup)
21
3533122
Motor, Probe-Wipe module, dc, gear (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup)
22
6707151
Cylinder, air, backwash cup (assembly includes associated hardware and moveable backwash cup)
23
6707171
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup)
24
6807327
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup)
25
1025201
Probe Wipe, backwash cup (moveable)
26
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
27
6232036
Fitting, 0.062 i.d.tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
PN 4277219B
8.2-47
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Table 8.2-25)
3
2
4
1
10
12
9
13
14
11
16
17
15
32
28
8
6
24
25
46
8
26
18
27
31
30
19
8
20
8
21
29
22
23
7253066B
8.2-48
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Figure 8.2-25)
Item
6859521
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ connector and O-rings
6706190
PCB, Solenoid Manifold, 13-valve I/O
6859515
6859205
Hardware, bracket, 13-valve solenoid valve manifold
1022419
Choke, plastic, 3 fluid, 0.010 orifice
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
1004645
6859221
6805014
Hardware, bracket, dual 14-valve quick disconnect
10
6859040
Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, base (QD4)
11
6859039
12
2827021
13
2826045
14
2810017
15
6859038
Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5)
16
6859041
Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, plate w/ bolt (QD1, QD4)
17
6859000
Hardware, plate, BSV and retic area
18
2804050
19
6232635
20
2851244
21
6707119
Pump, aspiration, Manual mode 205 L, Automatic mode 285 L
22
6852909
23
2852023
24
6232693
25
6859204
Hardware, bracket, 14-valve solenoid valve manifold
26
6232695
27
6232360
Fitting, elbow, 10-32 thd, male to female
28
6232807
29
6213016
Choke, variable, 1/16 i.d.
30
6216006
Fitting, union, 10-32 female to female
31
6216195
Fitting, muffler, 10-32 thd
32
6859514
PN 4277219B
8.2-49
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Table 8.2-26)

1
3
INSIDE VIEW
4
8
16
15
3
14
12
13
17
11
10
7
8
9
15
6
11
10
14
12
13
7253076D
Note: MF2 and MF5 are not present on Analytical Stations that are configured to bypass the
diluent reservoir.
8.2-50
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Figure 8.2-26)

Item
Part Number
Description
2016238
2016905
PCB, Bar-Code Decoder, for LED style bar-code reader

PCB, Bar-Code Decoder, for laser style bar-code reader
6805100
Cover, Bar-Code Decoder card
2852023
2852241
6805091
Door, Diluter, right rear
2822047
6216308
Fitting, union, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. (external waste fitting)
6232647
Fitting, 0.188 i.d tubing to 1/8 npt
6805096
Manifold, cleaning agent
10
2804045
11
2826002
12
2827133
13
1004645
14
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
15
6859221
16
6805098
Manifold, diluent
17
2851173
PN 4277219B
8.2-51
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Table 8.2-27)

Inside left rear door (upper)
1
7
3
Left rear door (lower)

8
26
35
13
12
27
24
25
28
24
Rear view old

style assembly
29
11
10
15
14
23
16
30
11
31
19
33
32
17
18
20
Rear view new

style assembly
34
4
22
21
4
7253433E
8.2-52
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Figure 8.2-27)

Item
6806602
Cover, Diluter 4 card
6706368
PCB, Diluter 4
6805093
Door, Diluter, left rear, top
2852023
2852240
Nut, misc, clip on, used w/ quick open screws
2852239
2852241
6805503
Manifold, solenoid valve, level sense manifold, 7-valve, w/ fittings
6232757
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ seal, for level sense manifold
10
6856745
11
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
12
6859221
13
6232693
16
6805503
15
6232986
14
6232981
Manifold, solenoid valve, 7-valve, 24 Vdc/30 psi, includes actuators and pinch valves
17
6232985
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, pneumatic, 50 psi, 24 Vdc
18
6232362
19
6805094
Door, Diluter, left rear, bottom
20
6232644
Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing
21
6805102
Hardware, hinge, lower left door, Diluter
22
6232642
Fitting, 0.094 i.d. tubing to 0.1/4 npt
23
2527716
O-ring, 0.926 i.d. x 0.070 w
24
6859348
Switch, float, level sense manifold
25
1023262
Cover, level sense manifold, small
26
2806017
27
1022948
Cover, level sense manifold, large, diluent
28
1023567
O-ring, 2.310 i.d. x 0.070 w
29
6706198
PCB, Reservoir Interface, level sense manifold
30
1024715
Tubing, riser, CP (for reagent reservoir)
31
6232980
32
6232996
Fitting, quick disconnect, female, 0.125 mnpt, 0.125 flow
33
6232773
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 to 0.125
34
6232645
35
6805306
Module, Level Sense Manifold
PN 4277219B
8.2-53
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-28 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir (See
Table 8.2-28)
CBC lytic reagent
2, 3
2
Retic stain
2
3
PAK Preserve
12
VAC
4
WASTE
LEVEL
SENSOR
DISINFECT WASTE
30 PSI
CBC
LYS E
RETIC
CLEAR
RETIC
PACK
PACK
STAIN PRESERVE LYS E
5 PSI
PAK Lyse
CLEANER
DILUENT
5
7
6
7
10
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
VAC
11
Disinfect
8
30 PSI
5 PSI
Waste
Power
Supply
Cleaning
agent
Diluent
3, 8
6498101A
8.2-54
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-28 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir (See
Figure 8.2-28)
Item
6915053
6706297
Tubing, pickup, 0.5 - 1.9 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 500 mL and 1 L; stain; and PAK
PRESERVE [StabiLyse reagent])
6706296
Tubing, pickup, 5 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 5 L; PAK LYSE [Erythrolyse reagent]; retic
clearing solution; and cleaning agent, 5 L)
6232645
6232715
3202039
6915052
6706295
Tubing, pickup, 10 - 20 L universal (use for diluent; cleaning agent, 10 L; and disinfect solution)
6805636
10
6859790
11
6805366
12
6805629
PN 4277219B
8.2-55
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-29 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir (See
Table 8.2-29)
CBC lytic reagent
2,3
2
Retic stain
2
3
PAK Preserve
16
14 15
VAC
4
WASTE
LEVEL
SENSOR
DISINFECT WASTE
30 PSI
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
CLEAR
RETIC
STAIN
PACK
PACK
PRESERVE LYSE
5 PSI
PAK Lyse
CLEANER
DILUENT
5
8
8
11
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
12
Diluent
Waste
POWER
SUPPLY
Cleaning
agent
13
10
3, 9
6498096A
8.2-56
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-29 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir (See
Figure 8.2-29)
Item
6915053
6706297
Tubing, pickup, 0.5 - 1.9 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 500 mL and 1 L; stain; and PAK
PRESERVE [StabiLyse reagent])
6706296
Tubing, pickup, 5 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 5 L; PAK LYSE [Erythrolyse reagent]; retic
clearing solution; and cleaning agent, 5 L)
6232645
6232715
3202039
6807099
Cable, diluent sensor extension
6915052
6706295
Tubing, pickup, 10 - 20 L universal (use for diluent; cleaning agent, 10 L; and disinfect solution)
10
6805636
11
6859790
12
6805366
13
5120250
Tubing, pickup, 20 L, w/ float sensor
14
6216308
Fitting, union, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. (Use with two flat washers, PN 2827167, and hex nut,
PN 2822066.)
15
6805629
16
6232980
PN 4277219B
8.2-57
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Table 8.2-30.)

2
5
BLACK
4
(WITH STRIPE)
10
RED
11
BLACK
12
13
14
15
BROWN
BROWN
GRAY
YELLOW
BLUE
16
BLUE
17
GREEN
18
BROWN
19
BLACK
20
RED
GREEN
BLUE
GOLD
7253083B
8.2-58
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Figure 8.2-30)

Item
6214107
6232605
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.082 i.d. tubing
6214108
6232080
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. tubing, w/ black stripe
6213020
Choke, plastic, black, 0.012 orifice
6213015
Choke, plastic, brown, 0.025 orifice
6213012
Choke, plastic, gray, 0.016 orifice
6213014
Choke, plastic, yellow, 0.010 orifice
6213013
Choke, plastic, blue, 0.020 orifice
10
6213006
Choke, metal, red, 0.008 orifice
11
6213011
Choke, metal, black, 0.010 orifice
12
6213009
Choke, metal, brown, 0.006 orifice
13
6213007
Choke, metal, green, 0.016 orifice
14
6213010
Choke, metal, blue, 0.012 orifice
15
6213008
Choke, metal, gold, 0.004 orifice
16
6232693
17
6232694
18
6232697
19
6232695
20
6232696
Choke, fitting, red, 0.008 orifice
PN 4277219B
8.2-59
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Table 8.2-31)

4
1
2
7
8
9
10
14
13
12
15
11
18
16
17
19
20
21
24
22
23
25
27
28
26
6498069A
8.2-60
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Figure 8.2-31)

Item
1005699
1016486
Fitting, feed-thru isolator, white
6216353
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d., w/ 10-22 npt
1016929
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 0.082 tubing
1005697
1022081
Fitting, feed-thru, black
2822046
Nut, hex,#25
2826051
2827027
10
6216320
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.125 i.d., w/ 1/4 npt
11
6232352
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d.
12
6232246
6232109
Fitting, union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.0125 i.d. tubing, clear

Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d., clear
13
6232380
Fitting, T, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125, polyurethane
14
6858675
6807147
Fitting, T, clear w/ metal tubes

Fitting, T, green w/ metal tubes
15
6226008
6232051
6232584
Fitting, T, 0.062 i.d. tubing,

16
6216081
1018245
6232263
6232259
6216181
9909059
9908085
Fitting, Y, 0.125 o.d. tubing, clear

Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 to 0.125 i.d. tubing, white
Fitting, Y, 0.050 i.d., blue
Fitting, Y, 0.062 i.d
Fitting, Y, 0.125 i.d. tubing, clear (large waste line)
17
6232434
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, female cap, white
18
6232435
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, female, white
19
6232436
6232660
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, white

Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, clear
20
6232399
Fitting, union, 0.094 i.d. tubing, Luer quick disconnect (comprises PN 6232435, PN 6232436, and
PN 6232434)
21
6232750
Fitting, quick disconnect,1/8 o.d. tubing to 5/32 o.d. tubing
22
6232751
Fitting, quick disconnect, 5/32 o.d. tubing to 1/4 o.d. tubing
23
6232753
Fitting, quick disconnect, T, 1/4 o.d. tubing
24
6232076
Filter, air fluid barrier, 0.45 , tubing fittings
25
6807148
6858676
Fitting, cross, green with metal tubes

Fitting, cross, clear with steel tubes
26
6806498
Tubing, sleeve
27
6216033
Fitting, union,10-32 thd to10-32 thd
28
6232383
Fitting, plug for tubing
PN 4277219B
8.2-61
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-32 Common Valves (See Table 8.2-32)

6
(Item 6 for VL100
through VL106 only)
7
7
5
3
4
4
2
1
8
10, 11
(Item 8 for VL17

and VL18 only)
3
9
14
12
3
8
13
15
16
6498057A
8.2-62
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-32 Common Valves (See Figure 8.2-32)

Item
6855763
Valve, pinch, white, standard
1017501
Valve, pinch, mount
2826030
Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0 020 thk
6216012
Washer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thk
6211015
6232986
6859221
6232447
1008315
Valve, pinch, deactivator clip, red, holds pinch valve open
10
6232579
Valve, Angar, 3-way, #458002
11
6232578
Valve, Angar, 3-way, #458005
12
6857096
Valve, pinch, 1-tube, black
13
2822040
Nut, misc, use with PN 6857096 pinch valve
14
6856319
Valve, pinch, 3-tube, white
15
1025225
Valve, pinch, sleeve, blue, CP
16
6807225
Valve, pinch, reduced stroke, white (used for VL58A, VL58B, VL59, VL62A, VL62B, VL64, VL94A,
VL94B, VL95A, and VL95B)
PN 4277219B
8.2-63
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-33)
1
4
6
11
12
10
13
14
15
18
17
16
19
20
21
25
26
27
28
22
23
24
7253138A
8.2-64
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-33)
Item
6011019
6011021
Tie wrap mount, 0.51 x 0.33 w, w/ #6 hole

Tie wrap mount, 1.71 x 8 w, w/ #8 hole (use with screw and locking washer PN 2852093)
6027284
Tie wrap mount, 0.75 x 0.75, adhesive
6011015
Tie wrap mount, 1 x 1, w/ #6 hole, adhesive
6006002
6006014
6006018
6006006
6027571
Tie wrap, multiuse clip, adhesive
6028738
10
6028735
11
6028734
12
6027785
13
6027784
14
6027718
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop,1 diam
15
6027717
16
6027769
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 0.5 diam
17
6027720
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 1 diam
18
6011001
19
6011002
20
6011003
21
6027372
22
6027373
23
6027374
24
6028706
Tie wrap, square plastic base for ribbon
25
6028707
Tie wrap, square plastic top for ribbon
26
6028733
27
6028732
28
6028731
PN 4277219B
8.2-65
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-34 Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators

and Filter (See Table 8.2-34)
1
2
Figure Reference
A Bulk Power Supply,
Motor Controller card,
and mufflers,
Figure 8.2-36
B SPC card and display and
air water separator,
Figure 8.2-35
27
3
26
5
8
2
25
10
2
11
12
13
15
19
14
16
20
17
18
21
14
22
24
15
23
6498022A
8.2-66
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-34 Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators and Filter
(See Figure 8.2-34)
Item
6805385
6216018
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt, brass
6805384
6232676
Fitting, quick-disconnect, T, 0.25 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt
6805383
6232752
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.125 o.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
6232681
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 tubing to 1/8 mnpt
6216312
Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, external hex
6859181
Compressor and vacuum pump, w/ fittings and cable

Note: Revision F of this assembly has a modified design to reduce low frequency sound output.
10
7237051
Filter/muffler assembly
11
6232712
Fitting, T, 0.250 o.d. to 0.250 o.d. to 1/4 mpt, vacuum
12
1022449
Spring, compression, 1.14 i.d. x 1.35 l x 0.088 w
13
2810017
14
2852023
15
6858806
Hardware, plate, compressor, w/ captive screws
16
6805382

Note: Revision D implements changes to prevent the valve from sticking in the open position.
17
6232678
18
6216290
19
2840073
20
2523780
Hardware, casters, swivel, used on Power Supply
21
2840060
22
6859466
23
1022450
Filter, air, used under Power Supply
24
2523779
Hardware, casters, fixed, used on Power Supply
25
6807307
Hardware, baffle, Power Supply
26
2826059
27
2806061
PN 4277219B
8.2-67
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-35 Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See Table 8.2-35)
9
10
11
6, 7
12
3
2
8
13
20
14
18
15
17
16
19
16
7253078E
8.2-68
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-35 Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See Figure 8.2-35)
Item
6805173
Cover, System Controller Display (Power Supply)
6859483
Display, LED, Power Supply w/ bracket
2852229
6805386
Air water separator, w/ fittings
6232680
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt
6232759
Filter, air water separator, filter only
2512040
O-ring, air water separator seal
6206006
6859722
Hardware, bracket, coiled tubing, Power Supply
10
2603062
11
2603068
12
2852078
13
6859412
Hardware, plate, mounted below cooling coil
14
6805382

Note: Revision D implements changes to prevent the valve from sticking in the open position.
15
6232678
16
2852023
17
6216290
18
2852004
Hardware, clamp, tubing, black nylon ratcheting
19
6706038
PCB, System Power Controller (SPC)
20
6859783
PN 4277219B
8.2-69
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See Table 8.2-36)
1
2
3
18
17
15
16
7
1
8
14
9
10
11
5
7
13
12
6498035A
8.2-70
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See Figure 8.2-36)
Item
2806118
2603062
2603068
2852023
3505052
PCB, Motor Controller, w/ cable
6859378
Cable, ac input, w/ ac input connector
9921373
Fuse holder, 20 A, 250 Vac
6232714
Fitting, quick disconnect, input door, female, 0.170 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. tubing
6232715
10
2121896
Screw, misc, d-type, female 4-40 (for 48 V cable)
11
2121898
Screw, misc, SCSI, 0.050 (for ribbon cable)
12
2808080
13
6858805
Hardware, plate, Bulk Power Supply, w/ captive screws
14
6805774
Power Supply, Bulk w/ cables
15
6232716
Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt
16
6218031
Muffler, pneumatic
17
6805130
Hardware, bracket, mufflers
18
6706158
PCB, Bulk Power Filter
PN 4277219B
8.2-71
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Table 8.2-37)
1
30.0
Old style
5
4
6498100A
8.2-72
New style
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Figure 8.2-37)
Item
2852257
Hardware, latch, quarter turn, black, Power Supply
6859187
Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (old style Power Supply)
6807292
Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (new style Power Supply)
6807331
Filter, air, used on left and right side of new style Power Supply
6807390
Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (new style Power Supply)
6805277
Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (old style Power Supply)
PN 4277219B
8.2-73
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors
(See Table 8.2-38)
A
*S Y S T E M
A Analyzer front door

hardware, Figure 8.2-39
B Diluter lower front door
hardware, Figure 8.2-40
R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
Figure Reference
I
II
III
IV
1 3
A L E R T :
M O D E : C /D /R
T E S T M O D E
M A IN
M E N U
VI
VII
VIII
1 2
2
1 1
1 0
4
5
9
6
7
8
8.2-74
6 4 9 8 2 3 2 B
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See Figure 8.2-38)
Item
Part Number
Description
6807048
Door, Analyzer, front (LH 750 System)
6807050
Cover, Diluter, center (LH 750 System)
6807056
Cover, Analytical Station, top (LH 750 System)
6807054
Cover, Analytical Station, right side (LH 750 System)
6859067
6858998
6807057
Cover, Analytical Station, right column (LH 750 System)
6807374
Door, Diluter, lower front (LH 750 System)
6807378
Keypad, with LCD, Diluter control (numeric) (LH 750 System)
7000698, FRU
10
6807236
Cover, SlideMaker access (LH 750 System)
11
6807235
Cover, Analytical Station, left column (LH 750 System)
12
6858997
13
6807055
Cover, Analytical Station, left side (LH 750 System)
PN 4277219B
8.2-75
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Table 8.2-39)
1
2
3
6
6 4 9 8 2 3 0 B
Table 8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Figure 8.2-39)
Item
Part Number
Description
2808051
2523647
6029140
Cable, keypad, Diluter control (numeric) (LH 750 System)
6807359
Spring, gas, Analyzer front door
2851859
2852022
8.2-76
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-40)
4
5
3
2
2
6
6498021B
Table 8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See Figure 8.2-40)
Item
Part Number
Description
2851859
2852022
1022183
1022442
1411145
1022182
PN 4277219B
8.2-77
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-41)
5
7
8
4
3
9
6
1 0 , 1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
F R O N T
1 7
1 6
1 9
2 1
2 2
1 8
2 0
3 1 , 3 2
3 0
2 7
2 9
2 4 , 2 5 , 2 6
2 3
2 8
R E A R
6 4 9 8 2 2 7 B
8.2-78
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Components (See Figure 8.2-41)

Item
Part Number
Description
6707204
PCB, BD ADJ (Remote BD)
6706923
6707099
PCB, Red/White Processor 2
6707067
PCB, R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer
6705984
6807370
Display, CRT, Scope Module with keypad (LH 750 System)
7000697, FRU
6705985
6706028
6706070
PCB, COMM INTFC
10
6707173
PCB, DILUTER CPU (LH 750 System)
11
6707233
12
6706314
PCB, DIFF PROCESSOR 4, without software EPROM
13
6706071
PCB, (VCS) ANALOG 5
14
6029111
Cable, Analyzer to preamp
15
2851859
16
1022868
17
2852105
18
2851840
19
6859069
Door, Analyzer, rear
20
1022315
21
2827071
22
2810138
23
6707152
PCB, Backplane, Analog
24
1022451
25
2852023
26
6805217
Cover, bus bar
27
6859178
28
2852106
29
6859176
PCB, Backplane, CRT
30
6707154
PCB, Backplane, Digital
31
2603068
32
2306093
PN 4277219B
8.2-79
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-42 Random Access Module Components (See Table 8.2-42)

1
7
6
8
3
9
4
1 2
1 0
3 0
1 1
1 3
2 9
2 6
2 8
1 4
1 5
2 7
2 3
1 8
1 9
1 0
2 0
2 4
1 7
1 6
2 2
2 5
2 1
8.2-80
6498231B
PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Table 8.2-42 Random Access Components (See Figure 8.2-42)

Item
Part Number
Description
6707182
7000695, FRU
Module, Random Access
2852022
6233021
1004645
2523062
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
6232829
Fitting, elbow, adjustable, 2 mm (0.08 in.) i.d. hose barb to 10-32
1025419
Cover, splash shield, laser side
6859498
2523221
6805818
10
2838003
11
6707179
7000693-FRU
Valve, shear, 2.5 L
12
6232653
13
2802026
14
6707180
7000694-FRU
Valve, shear, 31 L (LH 750 System)
15
6852909
16
6858073
17
2852023
18
2852006
19
6805155
20
6859121
Chamber, stain
21
6858962
22
2807024
23
6807365
Blood detectors, matched set, Random Access module
24
6805106
25
6859463
Heater, diff
26
6807498
27
2804039
28
6232635
29
1025430
Cover, splash shield, dual 4-valve
30
TBS
Screw, TBS
PN 4277219B
8.2-81
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
8.2-82
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
A
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, A.1-1

Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, A.1-1
Bar-Code Read Rate, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, A.1-1
Flipper Position Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Belt Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Timing Check, A.1-2
Tube Detector Checks, A.1-2
CBC Calibration Limits, A.1-2
CBC Noise Level Limits, A.1-3
Electronic Test Limits, A.1-4
Performance Specifications, A.1-5
Sample Conditions/Specifications, A.1-7
Diff and Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
Diluent/CBC Lytic Reagent Timing, A.1-8
VCS Optimization Limits, A.1-8
Voltage Limits, A.1-10
Volume Specifications, A.1-13
Pumps, A.1-13
A.2
PN 4277219B
ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.2-1

AMC, A.2-1
Jumpers, A.2-1
Switch, A.2-1
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR Card, A.2-2
Switches, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card, A.2-3
Connectors, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, A.2-4
Switches, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card (In Scope Module), A.2-5
Switch, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, A.2-6
Switch, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card, A.2-7
Connector, A.2-7
LED, A.2-7
Switches, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card, A.2-9
Switches, A.2-9
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2, A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card, A.2-12
Connectors, A.2-12
9-i
CONTENTS
9-ii
A.3
DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.3-1

Bar-Code Decoder Card, A.3-1
Connectors, A.3-1
Jumper, A.3-1
Diff Power Supply Card, A.3-2
Connectors, A.3-2
Connectors, A.3-4
LEDs, A.3-4
Connectors, A.3-7
LEDs, A.3-7
Connectors, A.3-9
Connectors, A.3-10
LEDs, A.3-10
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, A.3-11
Connectors, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, A.3-12
Connectors, A.3-12
LEDs, A.3-12
Test Points, A.3-13
Keyboard and Display Interface Card (GENS System), A.3-13
Connectors, A.3-13
Potentiometers, A.3-13
PVT Card, A.3-14
Connectors, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card, A.3-15
Connectors, A.3-15
RS/Opto Infc Card, A.3-16
Connectors, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card, A.3-17
Connectors, A.3-17
LEDs, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card, A.3-18
Connectors, A.3-18
A.4
POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT

DESCRIPTIONS, A.4-1
Bulk Power Filter Card, A.4-1
Connectors, A.4-1
Bulk Power Supply, A.4-2
Connectors, A.4-2
Motor Controller Card, A.4-3
System Power Controller Card, A.4-4
Connectors, A.4-4
LEDs, A.4-4
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
A.5
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS, A.5-1
A.6
DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION

REFERENCES, A.6-1
Summary, A.6-1
Solenoids Valves, A.6-1
Pinch Valves and Asco Angar Valves, A.6-8
Main Diluter Fluidic Components, A.6-9
A.7
GENS SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.7-1
A.8
LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.8-1
A.9
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS, A.9-1
A.10 MENU TREES, A.10-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
A.1-1
CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Timing, A.1-8
A.2-1
A.2-2
A.2-3
A.2-4
A.2-5
A.2-6
A.2-7
A.2-8
A.2-9
A.2-10
AMC Component Locations, A.2-1

API Card Component Locations, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card Component Locations, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card Component Locations, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card Component Locations, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card Component Locations, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-9
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Jumper Locations and Settings, A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card Component Locations, A.2-12
A.3-1
A.3-2
A.3-3
Bar-Code Decoder Card Component Locations, A.3-1

Diff Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-2
Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with Old Diluter
Interconnects), A.3-3
Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with New Diluter
Interconnects)t, A.3-3
Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GENS System SW3A or Lower, without
SlideMaker), A.3-5
Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GENS System SW3A or Lower, with or
without SlideMaker), A.3-5
Diluter 2 REL Card Component Locations), A.3-6
Diluter 2 RBD Card Component Locations, A.3-6
Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-8
Diluter 3 LH Card Component Locations, A.3-8
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Component Location, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-12
A.3-4
A.3-5
A.3-6
A.3-7
A.3-8
A.3-9
A.3-10
1.3-11
A.3-12
A.3-13
A.3-14
PN 4277219B
9-iii
CONTENTS
A.3-15 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Component Locations on the GENS
System, A.3-13
A.3-16 PVT Card Component Locations, A.3-14
A.3-17 Reservoir Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-15
A.3-18 RS/Opto Intfc Card Component Locations, A.3-16
A.3-19 Sensor Distribution Card Component Locations, A.3-17
A.3-20 Six-Channel Preamp Card Component Locations, A.3-18
A.4-1
A.4-2
A.4-3
A.4-4
Bulk Power Filter Card Component Locations, A.4-1

Motor Controller Card Locations and Settings, A.4-3
System Power Controller Card Component Locations, A.4-4
A.7-2
A.7-1
A.7-3
A.7-4
A.7-5
A.7-6
A.7-8
A.7-7
A.7-9
A.7-10
A.7-11
A.7-12
GENS System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.7-1

GENS System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.7-1
GENS System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.7-2
GENS System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.7-2
GENS System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.7-3
GENS System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.7-3
GENS System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.7-4
GENS System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.7-4
GENS System Diluter - Retic Module, A.7-5
GENS System Diluter - Diff Module, A.7-5
GENS System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.7-6
GENS System Diluter- Right Rear Door, A.7-6
A.8-1
A.8-2
A.8-3
A.8-4
A.8-5
A.8-6
A.8-8
A.8-7
A.8-9
A.8-10
A.8-11
LH 750 System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.8-1

LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.8-1
LH 750 System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.8-2
LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.8-2
LH 750 System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.8-3
LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.8-3
LH 750 System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.8-4
LH 750 System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.8-4
LH 750 System Diluter - Random Access Module, A.8-5
LH 750 System Diluter - Diff Module, A.8-5
LH 750 System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.8-6
A.10-1 GENS System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-1

A.10-2 LH 750 System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-2
TABLES
A.1-1 Bar-Code Read-Rate Specifications, A.1-1
A.1-2 Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
A.1-3 Latex Voltage Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-4 Voltage Matching Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-5 Flow-Rate Test Limits, A.1-3
A.1-6 CBC Calibration Factor Limits, A.1-3
A.1-7 Red and White Aperture Impedance, A.1-3
9-iv
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
A.1-8
A.1-9
A.1-10
A.1-11
A.1-12
A.1-13
A.1-14
A.1-15
A.1-16
A.1-17
A.1-18
A.1-19
A.1-20
A.1-21
A.1-22
A.1-23
A.1-24
A.1-25
A.1-26
A.1-27
A.1-28
Red and White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent), A.1-3

DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Limits, A.1-4
RAMP and PRECISION TEST Limits , A.1-4
Parameter Test Limits, A.1-5
Mode-to-Mode Comparison Limits*, A.1-6
Diff Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Limits, A.1-8
LATRON Primer Background Limits, A.1-8
VCS Pressure Variation Limits, A.1-9
Diff/Retic Cell Count Times and Values and Diff Conductivity Noise Limits, A.1-9
Diff/Retic TTM Voltage Noise Limits Verification, A.1-9
LS Offset Voltage, A.1-9
VCS Latex Calibration and Verification Limits, A.1-10
48 V Check, A.1-10
AC Line Input Voltage Specifications, A.1-11
Analyzer Backplane Voltage Test Points, A.1-11
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on GENS System, A.1-11
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on LH 750 System, A.1-11
Clog Detector Threshold Voltage - For RF Detector Preamp Card with Vacuum
Tube, A.1-12
A.1-29 Diluter Card Voltage Test Points, A.1-12
A.1-30 Hgb Voltage Limits, A.1-13
A.1-31 Pump Volume Tolerances, A.1-14
PN 4277219B
A.2-1
A.2-2
A.2-3
A.2-4
A.2-5
A.2-6
A.2-7
A.2-8
A.2-9
A.2-10
A.2-11
A.2-12
A.2-13
AMC Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-1

AMC Card Switch, SW1, Temperature Selection, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card Connectors, A.2-3
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments, A.2-3
CRT4 Display Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-9
R/W/P SC/A Card Connectors, A.2-12
A.3-1
A.3-2
A.3-3
A.3-4
A.3-5
A.3-6
A.3-7
A.3-8
A.3-9
A.3-10
Bar-Code Decoder Card Connectors, A.3-1

Diff Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-2
Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments on the Diluter 2 Card, A.3-7
9-v
CONTENTS
9-vi
A.3-11
A.3-12
A.3-13
A.3-14
A.3-15
A.3-16
A.3-17
A.3-18
A.3-19
A.3-20
A.3-21
A.3-22
Diluter 4 Card Test Points and Adjustments, A.3-11

Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Connectors, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-12
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card LEDs, A.3-12
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Test Points, A.3-13
Keyboard and Display Interface Card Connectors on the GENS System, A.3-13
PVT Card Connectors, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card Connectors, A.3-15
RS/Opto Intfc Card Connectors, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card Connectors, A.3-17
Sensor Distribution Card LEDs, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card Connectors, A.3-18
A.4-1
A.4-2
A.4-3
A.4-4
Bulk Power Filter Card Connectors, A.4-1

System Power Controller Card Connectors, A.4-4
System Power Controller Card Voltage Status LEDs, A.4-4
A.5-1
Diluter F-Key Functions, A.5-1
A.6-1
A.6-2
A.6-3
Solenoid Valve Functions, A.6-1

Pinch and Angar Valve Location References, A.6-8
Diluter Components, A.6-9
A.9-1
A.9-2
Worldwide Released Configurations for the GENS System*, A.9-1

Worldwide Released Configurations for the LH 750 System*, A.9-1
PN 4277219B
AQUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION A

A.1
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS

Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications
Bar-Code Read Rate
Table A.1-1 Bar-Code Read-Rate Specifications
Verification
Adjustment
First Scan
>90%
95 to 100%
Total Scans
>95%
98 to 100%
Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks

The bar-code scanner cylinder stroke should be 12.07 cm 0.64 cm (4.27 in. 0.25 in.).
Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader
Table A.1-2 Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader
Test Points
Ground
Voltage
Acceptable Range
J37-2/4
J36-6
-5 Vdc
0.25 Vdc
J37-7/8
J36-6
+5 Vdc
0.25 Vdc
TP3 with respect to TP2 offset voltage
TP2
0 Vdc
200 mV
TP3 over black
TP2
-10 Vdc
TP3 over white
TP2
-10 Vdc
Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks

The park tab should not protrude from under the bar-code scanner assembly more than
0.318 cm (0.125 in.)
The distance from the bar-code scanner housing to:
r
Cassette label should be 1.300 to 1.366 cm (0.512 to 0.538 in.), verification limits.
Stripper plate should be 0.127 cm to 0.331cm (0.050 in. to 0.130 in.).
Tube or Parallel Cylinder should be t
1.300 to 1.366 cm (0.512 to 0.538 in.), verification limits.
1.323 cm to 1.343 cm (0.521 in. to 0.529), adjustment limits.
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks

Completion of forward stroke = 0.70 seconds 0.20 seconds (0.50 to 0.90 seconds)
Completion of reverse stroke = 0.80 seconds 0.20 seconds (0.60 to 1.00 seconds)
Flipper Position Check
The cassette/flipper overlap should be 1.58 mm (1/16 in.)
Rocker Bed Belt Check
The belt assembly slack (measured by holding assembly upside down) should be about
0.508 cm 0.254 cm (0.20 in. 0.10 in.)
PN 4277219B
A.1-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
Rocker Bed Timing Check

Number of rocks/minute = 52 - 54
Tube Detector Checks
The tube detector LED should:
r
Light when the center of the tube is about 0.178 cm (0.07 in.) to the right of the center
of the stripper plate
Go out when the center of the tube is about 0.127 cm (0.05 in.) to the left of the stripper
plate ball.
The tube cap should be pierced in the center or within 0.127 cm (0.05 in.) from the left of
center.
The tube detector base should be 2.108 0.005 cm (0.830 0.002 in. [53/64 in.]) from the
rocker bed.
CBC Calibration Limits

Table A.1-3 Latex Voltage Test Limits
Parameter
Acceptable Limit
Red - Aperture current voltage
155.6 Vdc* 10.55 (145.05 to 166.15 Vdc)
White - Aperture current voltage
126 Vdc*11.35 (114.65 to 137.35 Vdc)
Red - Latex particle volume (Default = 94.3 fL)
Assay value 1.2
White - Latex particle volume
Assay value 1.2
Red - Volume (RMV) difference between apertures
1 (adjustment), 1.2 (verification)
White- Volume (WMV) difference between apertures
Red - Voltage difference between apertures
5 Vdc maximum difference
White- Voltage difference between apertures
5 Vdc maximum difference
* The maximum adjustment is 210 Vdc.

Table A.1-4 Voltage Matching Test Limits
Parameter
Maximum
RMV
1.8% CV
WMV
3.5% CV
Red - Volume (RMV) difference between apertures
White- Volume (WMV) difference between apertures
1 (adjustment), 1.2 (verification)*
Red - Voltage difference between apertures
White - Voltage difference between apertures
*Note: This specification was established using unimodal 4C cell control. If unimodal 4C cell
control is not available, use latex particles. You may not be able to meet this specification
using a tri-modal sample, such as whole blood.
A.1-2
PN 4277219B
Table A.1-5 Flow-Rate Test Limits

AP1/AP2/AP3
Average
Parameter
%CV
AP Diff
%CV
Diff
WBC
<3.5%
0.3
2.5
0.10
RBC
<1.8%
0.06
0.8
0.03
HGB
N/A
N/A
0.8
0.10
MCV
N/A
0.8
1.00
PLT
<5.0%
12
3.2
6.00
MPV
N/A
0.50
Table A.1-6 CBC Calibration Factor Limits

Automatic Mode Limits
Manual Mode Limits
Parameter
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
WBC Avg
0.984
1.276
0.88
1.12
WBC AP2
0.880
1.120
N/A
N/A
WBC AP3
0.880
1.120
N/A
N/A
RBC Avg
0.926
1.275
0.94
1.06
RBC AP2
0.940
1.060
N/A
N/A
RBC AP3
0.940
1.060
N/A
N/A
Hgb
1.000
1.386
0.88
1.12
MCV
0.880
1.120
0.93
1.07
Plt Avg
0.869
1.234
0.93
1.07
Plt AP2
0.930
1.070
N/A
N/A
Plt AP3
0.930
1.070
N/A
N/A
MPV
0.880
1.141
0.93
1.07
RDW
0.880
1.141
N/A
N/A
CBC Noise Level Limits

Table A.1-7 Red and White Aperture Impedance
Cable
Range with Diluent
Minimum without Diluent
RBC 1, RBC 2, or RBC 3 (across aperture)
22 K to 44 K ohms
10 megohms
WBC 1, WBC 2, or WBC 3 (across aperture)
7.4 K to 39 K ohms
10 megohms
Table A.1-8 Red and White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent)
PN 4277219B
Cable
Minimum
RBC 1 GND to Chassis GND
10 Meg
WBC 1 GND to Chassis GND
10 Meg
A.1-3
Electronic Test Limits

Table A.1-9 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Limits
Parameter
Channel
Range
DC
124
5.2
RF
124
5.2
LS
124
5.2
Table A.1-10 RAMP and PRECISION TEST Limits

Acceptable Limits - GENS System
Acceptable Limits - LH 750 System
Data
Param RAMP TEST 0
PRECISION TEST2 PRECISION TEST3 RAMP TEST
PRECISION TEST
Final Results
WBC
39.10 - 43.78
45.00 - 45.36
52.35 - 52.65
50.5 - 54.5
52.2 - 56.2
RBC
4.029 - 4.099
4.431 - 4.518
5.085 - 5.185
5.42 - 5.62
5.6 - 5.8
HGB
11.02 - 11.10
11.05 - 11.07
11.05 - 11.07
Not tested
Not tested
HCT
72.95 - 75.83
58.61 - 63.21
42.51 - 42.75
Not tested
Not tested
MCV
179.5 - 185.6
131.3 - 140.9
82.86 - 83.14
194.5 - 198.5
151.5 - 156.5
MCH
21.77 - 32.69
24.54 - 24.90
21.40 - 21.68
Not tested
Not tested
MCHC
14.54 - 15.16
17.46 - 18.86
25.17 - 26.73
Not tested
Not tested
RDW
47.57 - 48.91
16.77 - 17.50
14.23
50.97 - 51.97
15.1 - 17.1
PLT
222.6 - 273.2
74.2 - 78.6
685.9 - 689.7
650 - 700
725 - 775
MPV
10.84 - 11.17
4.33 - 7.57
5.77 - 5.83
10.67 11.07
10.6 - 11
PCT
0.2528 - 0.2932 0.0336 - 0.0573
0.3977 - 0.4007
Not tested
Not tested
16.87 - 19.85
10.07 - 10.75
16.43 - 16.47
18.8 - 19.8
16.5 - 17.5
Aperture Raw WBC

Counts
WBC
Wait
PDW
22342 - 22818
24225 - 24285
27313 - 27368
7802 - 7822
7515 - 7535
N/A
N/A
N/A
8143000 8243000
8287000 8387000
RBC
22095 - 22418
24240 - 24270
27338 - 27346
7802 - 7822
7515 - 7535
RBC
Wait
N/A
N/A
N/A
8270000 8370000
8390000 8490000
Histogram
Count
Range*
WBC
1800 - 2300
704 - 1342
4414
2225 - 2275
310 - 410
RBC
1900 - 2300
460.6 - 468.1
6161
2065 - 2115
300 - 380
PLT
1528 - 1740
478.6 - 489.2
1744
1705 - 1755
463 - 473
Histogram
Mean
Range*
WBC
127.0 - 141.6
75.34 - 93.20
121.7
127 - 129
84.7 - 90.7
RBC
127.0 - 133.3
89.86 - 96.76
50.46
126 - 129
94.5 - 104.5
PLT
32.41 - 33.16
25.80 - 38.10
14.84
31.5 - 32.5
30 -33
Histogram
Sigma
Range*
WBC
70.50 - 73.10
17.15 - 18.50
74.79
73.4 - 74.4
15.6 - 17.6
Histogram
Mode*
RBC
69.00 - 71.73
15.36 - 22.17
9.68
72.9 - 74.9
15.7 - 18.7
PLT
17.19 - 17.54
16.75 - 18.63
9.73
18.3 - 18.66
17.5 -18.5
WBC
N/A
N/A
19
N/A
N/A
RBC
N/A
N/A
50
N/A
N/A
PLT
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
* On Histogram statistics screen

Research only parameters
The actual value is 10 times the value shown.
A.1-4
PN 4277219B
Performance Specifications
Table A.1-11 Parameter Test Limits
Parameter/Unit
Range
WBC
Precision
Max %CV
WBC
Precision
Max Diff
WBC
Carryover
Diff
WBC
Carryover
Background R
Diff
Background
R
WBC x 103
cells/mL
3.6 but <4.0
2.30
0.298
0.247
0.2
111
82
4.0 but <5.0
2.12
0.354
0.259
0.2
119
82
5.0 but <6.0
2.00
0.409
0.272
0.2
127
82
6.0 but <7.0
1.92
0.463
0.285
0.2
135
82
7.0 but <8.0
1.85
0.516
0.298
0.2
144
82
8.0 but <9.0
1.80
0.569
0.311
0.2
152
82
9.0 but <10.0
1.76
0.621
0.324
0.2
160
82
10.0 but <11.1
1.72
0.673
0.337
0.2
168
82
Parameter/Unit
Range
RBC
Precision
Max %CV
RBC
Precision
Max Diff
RBC
Carryover
Retic
RBC
Carryover
Background M/R
Retic
Background
M/R
RBC x 106
cells/mL
3.2 but <4.0
0.90
0.116
0.038
0.01
591/750
320/750
4.0 but <5.0
0.84
0.140
0.046
0.01
591/750
320/750
5.0 but <6.2
0.80
0.163
0.054
0.01
591/750
320/750
Parameter/Unit
Range
Parameter Parameter
Precision Precision Parameter
Max %CV Max Diff
Carryover
Parameter
Background
Hgb g/dL
9.9 but <18.0
0.82
0.456
0.29
0.15
MCV fL
70 but <104
0.82
2.74
N/A
N/A
RDW %
10.5 but <15.3
2.25
1.09
N/A
N/A
PLT x 103
cells/mL
101 but <401
3.38
37.7
5.5
MPV fL
6.4 but <11.5
2.25
0.753
N/A
N/A
5-Part Diff - LY%
2.74
5-Part Diff - MO%
2.74
5-Part Diff - NE%
3.04
5-Part Diff - EO%
1.44
5-Part Diff - BA%
1.34
Retics
0% but <0.5%
15%
0.5% but <1.5% 13%
PN 4277219B
1.5% but <4%
10%
4% but <15%
5%
A.1-5
Table A.1-12 Mode-to-Mode Comparison Limits*
Parameter
Max Diff Limit

Max Diff = Abs (Auto-Manual)
% Diff Limit
Percent Diff = Abs (Auto - Manual)/Auto x 100
WBC
0.40
5%
RBC
0.20
2%
HGB
0.30
2%
PLT
20.0
7%
MCV
2.0
RDW
0.7
MPV
0.5
0.6
LY%
4.04
N/A
MO%
4.04
N/A
NE%
4.24
N/A
EO%
2.04
N/A
BA%
2.04
N/A
Ret%
0.50
N/A
*These limits apply to comparisons between whole blood samples ran in both the Automatic
mode and the Manual mode. They do not apply to comparisons between either whole blood
mode and the Prediluted mode available on the LH 750 System, and must not be used for that.
It is the customers responsibility to determine if the Prediluted mode results are acceptable.
Specification for a GENS System and for an LH 750 System referenced to an LH 750 System.
Specification for an LH 750 System referenced to a GENS System.
Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances

Table A.1-13 Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances
Location
Name
Nominal
Verification Range Adjustment Range
Power Supply
60 psi
60 psi
1 psi
0.1
Power Supply
30 psi*
30 psi
0.1 psi
0.1
Power Supply
5 psi
5 psi
0.1 psi
0.1
Power Supply
Vacuum
25 in. Hg
3 in. Hg
N/A
Diluter (back)
Sheath (RG4)
6.5 psi
6.30 to 6.70
0.2
Diluter (back)
Diff sample (RG3)
7.0 psi
6.65 to 7.35
N/A
Diluter (back)
Retic sample (RG6)
7.7 psi
6.9 to 8.5
N/A
Diluter (front)
Bar-Code Scanner
24 psi
1 psi
0.1 psi
Diluter (front)
6 in. Hg
6 in. Hg
0.1 in. Hg
0.02 in. Hg
* The tolerance of the 30 psi when checking against a digital pressure meter is 30 1.2 psi.
A.1-6
PN 4277219B
Sample Conditions/Specifications
Diff and Retic Analysis Conditions
Table A.1-14 Diff Analysis Conditions
Conditions
Low Temp Zone
Normal Temp Zone High Temp Zone
Manual Temp Mode*
AMC SW1-1 OFF

AMC SW1-4 ON
AMC SW1-1 ON
AMC SW1-4 OFF
AMC SW1-1 OFF

AMC SW1-4 OFF
Auto Temp Mode
AMC SW1-1 ON
AMC SW1-4 ON
AMC SW1-1 ON
AMC SW1-4 ON
AMC SW1-1 ON
AMC SW1-4 ON
AMC SW1-5 OFF
15.5C to 21.6C
60F to 71F
20.5C to 26.1C
69F to 79F
25.0C to 32.2C
77F to 90F
AMC SW1-5 ON
15.5C to 21.6C
60F to 71F
20.5C to 28.3C
69F to 83F
27.2C to 32.2C
81F to 90F
Blood Volume
34 L
34 L
34 L
Diff Lytic Reagent Pump Volume
540 L
540 L
350 L
Diff Heater Temperature
100F to 95F
85F to OFF
OFF
Incubation Time of Blood and Diff Lytic Reagent
5.3 seconds
3.3 seconds
4.3 seconds
Mixing Time of Blood and Diff Lytic Reagent (after

1.3 seconds of incubation)
4.0 seconds
2.0 seconds
3.0 seconds
Diff Preservative Pump Volume
205 L
205 L
134 L
Mixing Time of Blood, Diff Lytic Reagent, and Preservative

(at start of incubation time)
2.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
Incubation Time of Blood, Diff Lytic Reagent, and Diff

Preservative
8.5 seconds
10.5 seconds
10.5 seconds
Temperature Mode Selection
Ambient Temperature - pertains to

Auto Temp mode only*
* The temperature zone used in the Manual Temp mode is determined by the AMC SW1-1 and SW1-4 settings.
The temperature zone used in the Auto Temp mode is determined by the AMC SW1-5 setting and the
associated ambient temperature.
The default settings for AMC SW1, positions 1, 4 and 5, are both SW1-1 and SW1-4 ON (the Auto Temp mode)
and SW1-5 ON. For a summary of all the AMC SW1 settings, see Tables A.2-1 and A.2-2.
Hysteresis occurs when switching between temperature zones.
The switch from low to normal occurs at 71F, but the switch back from normal to low occurs at 69.
The switch from normal to high occurs at 79 or 83, but the switch back to normal occurs at 77 or 81F.
Table A.1-15 Retic Analysis Conditions

Conditions
Specifications
Conditions
Specifications
Blood Volume
About 2 L
Stain Temperature
100.8 - 110.8 F
Stain Volume
0.2 mL
Clearing Solution Volume
2.0 mL
PN 4277219B
A.1-7
Diluent/CBC Lytic Reagent Timing

Figure A.1-1 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Timing
LYSE DELIVERY
TIME
T1
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
T3
T2
DILUENT SOLENOID ENERGIZED
TIME
T4
DILUENT DELIVERY TIME
7253062E
Table A.1-16 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Limits
Parameter
Limits GENS System
Limits LH 750 System
30 psi
30 0.1
30 0.1
Lymph mode average*
N/A
Pending
Gran mode average
130 30
Pending
T1 - Start diluent to start of CBC lytic reagent
2.15 0.05
2.15 0.05
T2 - CBC lytic reagent dispensing time
0.75 0.10
0.75 0.10
T3 - End of CBC lytic reagent to end of diluent
0.5 0.15
0.5 0.15
T4 - Diluent dispensing time
3.4 0.15
3.4 0.15
* The lymph mode average must be in the correct location for optimum WBC interference
flagging and for NRBCs. To increase the lymph mode average, you can decrease the lytic
reagent volume slightly (while increasing the diluent volume to keep the dilution ratio
constant), or you can decrease the diluent delivery time, T4.
The gran mode average is a good indicator of correct lysing, but is difficult to use.
To correct WBC flagging problems (particularly at high temperatures) or high WBC background
counts, try increasing the T4 time by increasing the choke on the diluent dispenser. Slowing
the diluent flow increases the lysing strength and reduces bubbles.
VCS Optimization Limits

Table A.1-17 LATRON Primer Background Limits
A.1-8
Performance Specifications
Service Specifications
200
100
PN 4277219B
Table A.1-18 VCS Pressure Variation Limits

Parameter
Nominal
Variation during Count Limits
Verification Range
Sheath
6.5
0.02
6.3 - 6.7 psi
Diff Sample
0.5
0.04
0.15 - 0.85 psi
Retic Sample
1.2
0.04
0.40 - 2.00 psi
Table A.1-19 Diff/Retic Cell Count Times and Values and Diff Conductivity Noise Limits
Expected Count Time
(in Norm Temp mode)
Good Cell Count

Values
Max Peak-to-Peak DC
Conductivity Noise
Parameter
Calibration
Verification
Norm Temp Mode
Norm Temp
Mode
High Temp
Mode
Diff
63/WBC 1*
63/WBC 2.5*
(M) 7992 200
250 mV
350 mV
Retic
65/RBC 2
65/RBC 4.5
(L) 31,768 1000
N/A
N/A
* Where diff analyzed count is >7,792

Where retic displayed count is >31,100
Table A.1-20 Diff/Retic TTM Voltage Noise Limits Verification

Diff TTM Voltages
Retic TTM Voltages
Parameter
Static Vac Tube
Static Solid State
Dynamic
Parameter
Static Vac Tube
Static Solid State
Dynamic
V (DC)
7.5 mV
4.5 mV
12.0 mV
V (DC)
7.5 mV
4.5 mV
12.0 mV
C (RF)
15 mV
4.5 mV
38.0 mV
C (RF)
15 mV
4.5 mV
38.0 mV
S (LS)
3.0 mV
3.0 mV
4.0 mV
S (LS)
9.3* mV
9.3* mV
10.0 mV*
LS Offset
See Table A.1-21
LS Offset
See Table A.1-21
* Retic Dynamic to Retic Static 2 mV

Specifications for Analytical Stations using a RF Detector card with a vacuum tube.
Specifications for Analytical Stations using a solid state RF Detector card.
Table A.1-21 LS Offset Voltage
PN 4277219B
Laser Power
Diff Maximum
Retic Maximum
1.1 - 1.2 mW
0.85 V
0.60 V
1.2 - 1.3 mW
0.90 V
0.65 V
1.3 - 1.4 mW
0.95 V
0.70 V
1.4 - 1.5 mW
1.00 V
0.75 V
1.5 - 1.6 mW
1.05 V
0.80 V
A.1-9
Table A.1-22 VCS Latex Calibration and Verification Limits

Diff and Retic
Diff
Retic
Latex Particles DC/RF Results*
V (DC)
C (RF)
S (LS)
S - Avg 5
S (LS)
S - Avg 5
Calibration Limits
Mean
Assay 1
Assay 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CV%
2.3%
2.3%
N/A
N/A
Mean to Mode
N/A
N/A
Mean
Assay 5
Assay 5
N/A
CV%
2.7%
2.7%
N/A
N/A
Mean-Mode
2.5
3.5
N/A
N/A
Verification Limits
Diff and Retic
N/A
N/A
Diff
N/A
Retic
LATRON Control Results
V (DC)
C (RF)
S (LS)
S - Avg 5
S (LS)
S - Avg 5
Calibration Limits
Mean
N/A
N/A
Assay 2
Assay 0.5
Assay 4
Assay 4
CV%
N/A
N/A
3.8%
3.8%
Mean-Mode
N/A
N/A
-1.2 to +0.6
-2.4 to +1.2
Mean
Assay 1.1
Assay 1.4
Assay 5
CV%
4.5%
6.5%
5%
5%
Mean-Mode
0.5
0.6
-1.3 to +0.7
-2.6 to +1.4
Verification Limits
Assay 4
Assay 10
Assay 8
* Use the large latex particles DC/RF to adjust the DC and RF gains. Ensure the diff and retic right count is 800
minimum.
The limits you should use, calibration or verification, is based on why you are checking the results.
r
If you are collecting this data following DC, RF, or LS gain adjustments; as part of VCS optimization; or at
instrument installation; compare the results to the tighter, calibration limits.
If you are collecting this data for any other reason, compare the results to the verification limits.
Use the LATRON control to adjust the diff and retic LS gains. Ensure the diff and retic right count is 8192 in
less than 20 seconds.
Voltage Limits
Table A.1-23 48 V Check
A.1-10
Location
Acceptable Range
CRT backplane, bus bar E2 to E3
45.5 to 50.5 V
Diff Power Supply card, P4, pins 1 and 4
45.5 to 50.5 V
Diluter 1 card, P7, pins 1 and 3
45.5 to 50.5 V
Diluter 4 card, P3, pins 1 and 3 (using TP5 as ground)
45.5 to 50.5 V
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card, P1, pins 1 and 3
45.5 to 50.5 V
PN 4277219B
Table A.1-24 AC Line Input Voltage Specifications

Volts
Hz
ARMS
Watts
100
47-63
8.6
860
115
47-63
7.5
860
180
47-63
4.8
860
230
47-63
3.8
860
Table A.1-25 Analyzer Backplane Voltage Test Points

Backplane
Voltage
Acceptable Range
Test Point
Ground to Use
Analog
+5 V
+4.85 to +5.15 Vdc
TP2
E1
+15 V
+14.70 to +15.30 Vdc
TP3 or TP8
E1
-15 V
-14.70 to -15.30 Vdc
TP4 or TP9
E1
+12 V
+11.64 to +12.36 Vdc
TP1
E1
+5 V
+4.85 to +5.15 Vdc
TP2
E1
-15 V
-14.70 to -15.30 Vdc
TP3
E1
+15 V
+14.70 to +15.30 Vdc
TP4
E1
-15 V
-14.70 to -15.30 Vdc
TP5
E1
+15 V
+14.70 to +15.30 Vdc
TP6
E1
+5 V
+4.85 to +5.15 Vdc
TP7
E1
+12 V (CRT)
+11.64 to +12.36 Vdc
TP11
TP12
+5.2 Control V
+4.94 to +5.46 Vdc
TP17
TP16
CRT
Digital
Table A.1-26 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on GENS System
TP (Diluter 2 Card)
Ground
Voltage
Adjustment Range
Verification Range
TP4 (front sensor out)
TP12
R25
Value on front sensor cable
0.002 V
0.005 V
TP8 (rear sensor out)
TP12
R44
Value on rear sensor cable
0.002 V
0.005 V
TP3 (front sensor in)
TP12
<7.50 Vdc
TP7 (rear sensor in)
TP12
<7.50 Vdc
TP11 (blood detector

threshold)
TP12
R57
1.1 x (maximum threshold

adjustment value, T1 or T2,
calculated under Heading 4.55)
0.002 V
0.005 V
Table A.1-27 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on LH 750 System
TP (Diluter 2 Card)
Ground
Voltage
Adjustment Range
Verification Range
TP4 (front sensor out)
TP12
R25
10X value on front sensor cable
0.02 V
0.05 V
TP8 (rear sensor out)
TP12
R44
10X value on rear sensor cable
0.02 V
0.05 V
TP11 (blood detector

threshold)
TP12
R57
1.1 x (maximum threshold

adjustment value, T1 or T2,
calculated under Heading 4.55)
0.002 V
0.005 V
PN 4277219B
A.1-11
Table A.1-28 Clog Detector Threshold Voltage - For RF Detector Preamp Card with Vacuum Tube
TP (RF Detector Preamp Card)
Ground
Voltage
Adjustment Range
Verification Range
TP2
TP4
R44
3.5
0.1 V
0.2 V
Table A.1-29 Diluter Card Voltage Test Points

Card
Voltage
Acceptable Range
Test Points
Ground to Use
Diluter 1 (original
card, old Diluter
interconnects)
+5.00 V
+4.75 to +5.25 Vdc
TP23
TP27
+15.30 V
+14.535 to +16.065 Vdc
TP24
TP27
-15.30 V
-14.535 to -16.065 Vdc
TP25
TP27
+6.0 V
+5.52 to +6.48 Vdc
TP26
TP27
+9.00 V
+8.55 to +9.45 Vdc
TP22
TP27
-9.00 V
-8.55 to -9.45 Vdc
TP20
TP27
-5.00 V
-4.775 to -5.225 Vdc
TP17
TP27
+4.75 to +5.25 Vdc
TP2
TP5
+14.61 to +15.98 Vdc
TP3
TP5
-14.61 to -15.98 Vdc
TP1
TP5
+7.2 V
+6.94 to +7.46
TP4
TP5
+9.00 V
+8.55 to +9.45 Vdc
-9.00 V
-8.55 to -9.45 Vdc
-5.00 V
-4.775 to -5.225 Vdc
+6.30 V
+5.922 to +6.678 Vdc
C19
+5.00 V
Diluter 1 (new
card, new Diluter +15.30 V
interconnects)
-15.30 V
Diff Power Supply
WARNING High voltage present that can cause injury from electrical shock. Use caution when
measuring the +300 Vdc.
Diluter 4
+300 V
+282 to +318 Vdc
C12
+12.0 V
+11.40 to +12.60 Vdc
C8
+15.0 V
+14.325 to +15.675 Vdc
C22
-15.0 V
-14.325 to -15.675 Vdc
C13
+24.0 V
+22.92 to +25.08 Vdc
TP8
TP5
+15.0 V
+14.325 to +15.675 Vdc
TP16
TP5
-15.0 V
-14.325 to -15.675 Vdc
TP17
TP5
+12.0 V
+11.22 to +12.78 Vdc
TP4
TP5
+5.00 V
+4775 to +5.225 Vdc
TP14
TP5
* The new Diluter 1 card does not have test points for verifying these voltage specifications.
A.1-12
PN 4277219B
Table A.1-30 Hgb Voltage Limits

Parameter
Range
Hgb Preamp Output Voltage
8.5 V to 9.5 V
Hgb Blank
7.5 V to 9.5 V
Hgb Sample
7.5 V to 9.5 V
Abs (Blank - Sample)
0.07 V
Volume Specifications
Pumps
ATTENTION: If you have a question about the procedure for checking the volume,
troubleshooting, or replacing a pump, refer to the procedure for that pump in Chapter 4.
The following is a checklist to use when testing the volume of a pump.

1.
Always prime the Diluter by doing a startup cycle immediately before doing any pump
volume tests. If necessary, prime the individual pumps by using the appropriate
F-function.
2.
Always prime the extension tubing using the appropriate F-function before measuring
the pump volume and ensure you include the last drop on the tubing in the
measurement.
3.
Use the volume measurement test points to aid in troubleshooting:
4.
5.
Use the delivery endpoint to check the reagent volume at the delivery point,
checking both the pump and the reagent pathway.
Use the pump output to check the reagent volume delivered by the pump only.
Compare the volume measurements to the verification range. If the volume is:
r
Within limits, no adjustment is necessary
Above the limits, adjust the pump
Below the limits, ensure there is no problem in the reagent pathway before adjusting
the pump.
If the reagent pathway is clear and either you cannot adjust the pump to within the
adjustment range or the pump does not hold its adjustment, replace the pump.
Table A.1-31 summarizes the information needed for checking the volume of a pump and for
troubleshooting the pump.
PN 4277219B
A.1-13
Table A.1-31 Pump Volume Tolerances

Pump
Function
Reference Designator/ to
Name
Dispense
PM1
Test Point for

Delivery Endpoint
Test Point for

Pump Output
Pump
Volume*
F21
Polyurethane tubing
from VL45 (NC) at
connection to
I-beam tubing
Tubing at FF101
above SL60
0.140 g
0.015
or
0.134 mL
0.010
F22
Polyurethane tubing
from VL45 (NC) at
connection to
I-beam tubing
Tubing at FF101
above SL60
0.214 g
0.015
or
0.205 mL
0.010
F32
Input lines on sides

of RBC bath
I-beam tubing at 10 g
FF1 above VL8
0.10
0.02
F33

of WBC bath
I-beam tubing at
FF7 above VL7
6g
0.05
0.01
F23
Tubing from VL65 at Tubing at FF3

top of mixing
above SL63
chamber
0.350 g
0.015
0.010
F24
Tubing from VL65 at

top of mixing
chamber
Tubing at FF3
above SL63
0.540 g
0.020
0.015
F25
Tubing from VL89B

at top of stain
chamber
Tubing at FF171
from VL99
0.200 g
0.006
0.002
F26
Tubing from VL95A

at top of stain
chamber
Output tubing
from VL98
2.00 g
0.04
0.01
F27

of WBC bath
Tubing at FF127
above PM7
1.06 g
0.04
0.01
Manual mode
activator
0.205 g
0.010
0.002
START /
CONT
0.285 g
0.010
0.002
2.00 g
+0.50
-0.2
N/A
Diff Preservative
Low Volume
PM1
Diff Preservative
High Volume
PM2
RBC Diluent Dispenser
PM3
WBC Diluent Dispenser
PM4
Diff Lytic Reagent
Low Volume
PM4
Diff Lytic Reagent
High Volume
PM5
Stain
PM6
Retic Clearing Solution
PM7
CBC Lytic Reagent
PM9
Aspiration
Manual Mode
PM9
Aspiration
Verification
Range
Adjustment
Range
Automatic Mode
PM10
Cleaning Agent
F13
N/A
Tubing at FF129
above VL47
* For all reagent volumes except the diff preservative, 1 g is equal to 1 mL. The gram to volume equivalency is different for
diff preservative because of its specific gravity (1.042).
The optimal diff lytic reagent pump and diff preservative pump volumes are dependent on the strength of the reagent lot.
Therefore no absolute target value gives optimum performance, only a target range. In the field, the pump volumes are
adjusted to give high good counts (>8000) indicating sufficient lysing of the red cells along with low conductivity noise.
For example if the strength of the diff lytic reagent is weak, the diff lytic reagent pump is adjusted to dispense enough
reagent to sufficiently lyse all the red cells and then the diff preservative is adjusted to minimize the conductivity noise.
A.1-14
PN 4277219B

ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
A.2

AMC
Figure A.2-1 AMC Component Locations
E29
E35
E36
E58
E57
E11 E6
E67
E68
E69
E53 E52
E25
E24
E23
E50
BATTERY
E54
E51
E5
E4
E10
E71
E70
E72
PWB NO. 1713187E
SW1
E44
E43
6498034A
E21 E18
E9 E3
E17
E8
E66 E65
Jumpers
To enable the battery, set jumpers E4-E5, E18-E21 and E3-E9. If present, also set jumpers
E67-E68 and E70-E71.
Switch
Table A.2-1 AMC Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
1 - ON
2 - OFF
Options Temperature SlideMaker

GENS Selection, see Present
System Table A.2-2
OFF=No
SlideMaker
ON=SlideMaker
present
Options Temperature SlideMaker
LH 750 Selection, see Present
System Table A.2-2
OFF=No
SlideMaker
ON=SlideMaker
present
PN 4277219B
3 - OFF
4 - ON
5 - ON
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Language
Temperature Temperature Transition
Not used Not used Not used
OFF=English Selection, see ON=Low-norm at 69-71F; Must be Must be Must be
ON=Not valid Table A.2-2
Norm-high at 81-83F OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF=Low-norm at 69-71F
Norm-high at 77- 79F
Shutdown
reset flag
OFF=Norm
ON=Reset
flag
Temperature Temperature Transition

Not used Not used Not used
Selection, see ON=Low-norm at 69-71F; Must be Must be Must be
Table A.2-2
Norm-high at 81-83F OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF=Low-norm at 69-71F
Norm-high at 77- 79F
A.2-1

Table A.2-2 AMC Card Switch, SW1, Temperature Selection

SW1, Position 1
SW1, Position 4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Selection
Analyzer Display (Under Mode)
Automatic (Default Settings)

Low Temperature
Normal Temperature
High Temperature
None
/1
/2
/3
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR Card

Figure A.2-2 API Card Component Locations
SW2
SW1
PWB NO.. 1713109D

7253284A
Switches
Table A.2-3 API Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
Options
1- OFF
2 - ON
Test Pulse Width

Selection
3 - OFF
4 - OFF
5 - OFF
6 - OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
7 - OFF
8 - ON
Internal Use ON=Normal

OFF=Test Mode
Table A.2-4 API Card Switch, SW2, Settings

Positions/Settings
Default
Options
A.2-2
1- OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4 - OFF
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF
5 - OFF
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be OFF
PN 4277219B

BD ADJ Card
Figure A.2-3 BD ADJ Card Component Locations
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 3 1 A
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 2 0 4
R 2 5
T P 4
R 4 4
T P 8
T P 1
J 1
T P 5
R 5 7
T P 1 1
J 2
T P 1 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 3 B
Connectors
Table A.2-5 BD ADJ Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Diluter 2 card, J12
J2
Oscilloscope. Not connected except

during CBC lytic reagent and diluent
delivery timing check.
Test Points and Adjustments

Table A.2-6 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments
Functions
Front Detector*
Rear Detector*
Ground
Sensor Output
TP4
TP8
TP12
Sensor Adjust
R25
R44
Sensor Input
TP3
TP7
TP12
Sample Hold Circuit Output
TP1
TP5
TP12
Threshold Value
TP11
Threshold Adjust
R57
TP12
* For adjustment ranges on the LH 750 System, see Table A.1-27.
PN 4277219B
A.2-3

COMM INTERFACE Card

Figure A.2-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Component Locations
SW2
SW1
PWB NO. 1713148D

7253101B
Switches
Table A.2-7 COMM INTERFACE Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
1 - ON
2 - OFF
3 (See below)
4 - OFF
5 - OFF
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Options # Tube/Cass
GENS ON=12 tubes
System OFF=10 tubes
Bar code
OFF=Codabar
ON=NW7
Stop at 3
voteouts
ON=Enabled
OFF=Disabled
Default ON
ID3
Tube label
OFF=Disabled checksum
ON=Enabled
OFF=Enabled
ON=Disabled
CD8
CD4
Not used
OFF=Disabled OFF=Disabled Must be
ON=Enabled
ON=Enabled
OFF.
Options # Tube/Cass
LH 750 ON=12 tubes
System OFF=10 tubes
Bar code
OFF=Codabar
ON=NW7
Not used
Must be OFF.
Default OFF
Not used
Must be OFF.
Not used
Must be OFF.
Tube label
checksum
OFF=Enabled
ON=Disabled
Not used
Must be OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Table A.2-8 COMM INTERFACE Card Switch, SW2, Settings

Positions/Settings
Default
1 - OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4 - OFF
5 - OFF
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Options for
stand-alone
System
HAL cal factors

OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Not used
Must be OFF. Must be
OFF.
Options for
System modified
for lab
automation - HAL
HAL cal factors

OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be ON.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Not used
Must be OFF. Must be
OFF.
A.2-4
PN 4277219B

CRT4 Display Card (In Scope Module)

Figure A.2-5 CRT4 Display Card Component Locations
SW1
1713202D
7253279A
Switch
Table A.2-9 CRT4 Display Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
1- OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4 - OFF
5 - ON
6 - ON
7 - ON
8 - OFF
Options for
GENS System
Not used.
Must be OFF
Not used.
Must be
OFF
Not used.
Must be
OFF
Not used. Keyboard Scope

Beeper
Must be ON=New ON=Installed ON=New
OFF
OFF=Old OFF=None
OFF=Old
Not used.
Must be
OFF
Options for
stand alone
LH 750 System
Dual calibration
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Raw data
accum
speed*
OFF= Norm
ON=Fast
Raw data
accum
criteria
OFF= All
ON=Any

Beeper
OFF
OFF=Old OFF=None
OFF=Old
CRT vert
freq cntrl
OFF=60 HZ
ON=50 Hz
Options for
LH 750 System
modified for
lab automation
- HAL
Dual calibration
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Raw data
accum
speed*
OFF= Norm
ON=Fast
Raw data
accum
criteria
OFF= All
ON=Any

Beeper
OFF
OFF=Old OFF=None
OFF=Old
CRT vert
freq cntrl
OFF=60 HZ
ON=50 Hz
Must be OFF
Must be ON
* Normal means using the same histogram minimum stop count as the GENS System. Fast is for research use
and is only available on the LH 750 System.
All means all three apertures must reach FE before the channelizing is stopped. Any is for research use only.
PN 4277219B
A.2-5

DIFF PROCESSOR Card

Figure A.2-6 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Component Locations
PWB NO. 1713392B
SW1
7253351A
Switch
Table A.2-10 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
1- OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4 - OFF
5 - OFF
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Options
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF.
Not used
Must be
OFF
Not used
Must be
OFF
Not used
Must be
OFF.
A.2-6
PN 4277219B

DILUTER CPU Card

Figure A.2-7 DILUTER CPU Card Component Locations
S W 1
X 2
U 2
X 1
K e y p a d
p re s e n t
J 5
A S S Y 6 7 0 7 1 7 3
P W B 1 7 1 3 7 2 2 B
X 3
6 4 9 8 2 1 5 B
Connector
J5 connects to the Keypad and Display Interface card on the LH 750 System.
LED
KEYPAD PRESENT lights when the numeric keypad is connected.
Switches
Table A.2-11 DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
Options for
stand
alone
LH 750
System
without
SlideMaker
1 - OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4 - ONF
5 - ON
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
HAL
automation
delay*
OFF=Delay
ON=No delay
Must be OFF
Not
used
Must
be OFF.
SmartStart
Recognition
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Sweep-flow
reservoir level
monitoring
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Random
access
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Analytical
Station
timing cycles
for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
BD3
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF
Reset Diluter
table
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Must be OFF
* Adds a 2 second delay after piercing the tube in LH 750 Systems used with the HAL lab automated system.
Disables the full reset. Use for installation and troubleshooting purposes only. Should always be left in the OFF (enabled)
position.
PN 4277219B
A.2-7

Table A.2-11 DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings

Positions/Settings
Default
1 - OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4 - ONF
5 - ON
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Options for
stand
alone
LH 750
System
with
SlideMaker
HAL
automation
delay*
OFF=Delay
ON=No delay
Must be OFF
Not
used
Must
be OFF.
SmartStart
Recognition
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Sweep-flow
reservoir level
monitoring
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Random
access
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Analytical
Station
timing cycles
for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
BD3
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be ON
Reset Diluter
table
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Must be OFF
Options
for LH 750
System
modified
for lab
automation
HAL without
SlideMaker
HAL
automation
delay*
OFF=Delay
ON=No delay
Must be ON
Not
used
Must
be OFF.
SmartStart
Recognition
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Sweep-flow
reservoir level
monitoring
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Random
access
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Analytical
Station
timing cycles
for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
BD3
ON=Enabled
OFF=Disabled
Must be ON
Reset Diluter
table
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Must be OFF
Options
for LH 750
System
modified
for lab
automation
HAL - with
SlideMaker
HAL
automation
delay*
OFF=Delay
ON=No delay
Must be ON
Not
used
Must
be OFF.
SmartStart
Recognition
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Sweep-flow
reservoir level
monitoring
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Random
access
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Analytical
Station
timing cycles
for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be ON.
BD3
ON=Enabled
OFF=Disabled
Must be ON
Reset Diluter
table
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Must be OFF
* Adds a 2 second delay after piercing the tube in LH 750 Systems used with the HAL lab automated system.
Disables the full reset. Use for installation and troubleshooting purposes only. Should always be left in the OFF (enabled)
position.
A.2-8
PN 4277219B

DILUTER PROCESSOR Card

Figure A.2-8 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Component Locations
PWB NO. 17130950D
SW1
7253402B
Switches
Table A.2-12 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default
1 - OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4*
5 - ON
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Options
for GENS
System
without
SlideMaker
SW 2C/3A
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used SmartStart

Must be Recognition
OFF
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Not used
Not used
Analytical
Station timing
cycles for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
BD3
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be
OFF
Options
for GENS
System
with
SlideMaker
SW 2C/3A
Not used
Must be OFF
Not used SmartStart

Must be Recognition
OFF
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Not used
Not used
Analytical
Station timing
cycles for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be ON.
BD3
ON=Enabled
OFF=Disabled
Must be ON
Not used
Must be
OFF
* For GENS Systems with SW 2C/3A and lower, the default setting is OFF. For GENS Systems with SW 4A and
higher and for all LH 750 Systems, the default setting is ON.
PN 4277219B
A.2-9

Table A.2-12 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings (Continued)

Positions/Settings
Default
1 - OFF
2 - OFF
3 - OFF
4*
5 - ON
6 - OFF
7 - OFF
8 - OFF
Options
for GENS
System
without
SlideMaker
SW 4A
HAL system
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Not used SmartStart

Must be Recognition
OFF
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Sweep-flow
reservoir level
monitoring
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Not used
Analytical
Station timing
cycles for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF
BD3
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be OFF
Not used
Must be
OFF
Options
for GENS
System
with
SlideMaker
SW 4A
HAL system
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Not used SmartStart

Must be Recognition
OFF
OFF=Enabled
On=Disabled
Sweep-flow
reservoir level
monitoring
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Not used
Analytical
Station timing
cycles for
SlideMaker
OFF=Disabled
ON=Enabled
Must be ON
BD3
ON=Enabled
OFF=Disabled
Must be ON
Not used
Must be
OFF
* For GENS Systems with SW 2C/3A and lower, the default setting is OFF. For GENS Systems with SW 4A and
higher and for all LH 750 Systems, the default setting is ON.
A.2-10
PN 4277219B

RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2
Figure A.2-9 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Jumper Locations and Settings
E 3 9
E 3 8
E 4
E 2 7 E 2 6
E 3
E 6
E 5
E 2 4 E 2 1 E 2 0
E 1 2 E 1 1
E 2 5 E 2 3
E 1 9 E 1 7 E 1 6
E 1 0 E 9
E 2 2 E 1 8
E 1 5 E 1 4 E 1 3
E 8 E 7
6 4 9 8 2 1 9 B
PN 4277219B
A S S Y
N O . 6 7 0 7 0 9 9
P W B
N O . 1 7 1 3 6 8 2 B
E 2
X 1
E 1
A.2-11

R/W/P SC/A Card
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 6 6 4 B
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 0 6 7
Figure A.2-10 R/W/P SC/A Card Component Locations
J 2
P 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 6 B
Connectors
Table A.2-13 R/W/P SC/A Card Connectors
A.2-12
P No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
P2
Six-Channel Preamp card, P2
J2
Not connected. Provides test points for

checking the card.
PN 4277219B

DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
A.3

Bar-Code Decoder Card
Figure A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Component Locations
TC5516AP - 2
JAPAN 8614HBK
MC6803U4P - 1
7K
147 - 1125P - 12 - 4338
J2
TM68724
J1
B E E P E R
C O N N E C T
TP 5
7253318A
T
P
5
P3
Note: This illustration shows the Bar-Code Decoder card for the
LED bar-code reader. The Bar-Code Decoder card for the laser
bar-code reader looks very similar but does not have a TP5.
Connectors
Table A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
J2
Diluter 1 card
Jumper
To enable beeper, install jumper on P3.
PN 4277219B
A.3-1

Diff Power Supply Card

Figure A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Component Locations
J5
J3
J4
J2
J1
J6
7253382A
Connectors
Table A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
J4
J2
Laser Interlock Switch
J5
RF Detector Preamp card, J69

J3
Diluter 1 card, J2
J6
Diluter 1 card, J9
A.3-2
PN 4277219B

Diluter 1 Card
Figure A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with Old Diluter Interconnects)
J7
PWB NO. 1713120D
J9
TP26
TP27
J8
TP24
J1
TP25
X6
(Jumped)
RS485
MODULE
65 4
98 7
TP22
12 11 10
TP21
J4
15 14 13
TP20
TP23
J6
J3
TP17
J2
X5
(Jumped)
BEEPER
VOLUME
JUMPERS
X1L
X2M
X3H
X4
(Jumped)
J5
6498224B
LEDS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with New Diluter Interconnects)t
J 9
J 7
X 2
J 8
T P 5
J P 2
1
J 1
J P 1
1
3
J P 4
J 6
1
3
J P 3
J 3
1
J 2
J 5
T P 2
P W B
N O . 1 7 1 3 7 2 5 B
T P 1
6 4 9 8 2 1 4 B
PN 4277219B
3
LEDS
X 1
A S S Y
N O . 6 7 0 7 1 7 7
B e e p e r H
v o lu m e M
T P 4
T P 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A.3-3

Connectors
Table A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
J6
Bar-Code Decoder card, J2
J2
Diff Power Supply card, J3
J7
+48 Vdc voltage backplane
J3
RF Detector Preamp card, J104
J8
Not used
J4
Not used
J9
Diff Power Supply card, J6
J5
Sensor Distribution card, J5
LEDs
Table A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card LEDs
LED
Name
Lights when:
LED
Name
Lights when:
CR1
RFON
RF voltage is on
CR6
BEEP
Keypad beeps. Occurs (for

hearing impaired)
CR2
PROBEIN
BSV probe in
CR7
+5V OK
+5 Vdc within limits
CR3
CLGERR
Flow cell clog error detected
CR8
+15V OK
+15 Vdc within limits
CR4
HAND
Hand detector is not obstructed CR9
-15V OK
-15 Vdc within limits
CR5
SWSCAN
Switch scan (blinking)
HGB OK
Hgb voltage within limits
A.3-4
CR10
PN 4277219B

Diluter 2 Card
Figure A.3-5 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GENS System SW3A or Lower, without SlideMaker)
a
J8
a
RS485
MODULE
TP18
SCAN
DWSEN
UPSEN
BLC
BUTH
IBTH
PART
NOBL
CARRY
BUBB
J7
X1
X2
12 13
14 15 16
X3
J6
10 11
J5
X4
b
WASTE
LEDIF
GHOST
STAIN
PAKP
PAK
CLZ
ISO
BACK
SHTH
TP14
17 18 19
J4
X6
5 6
TP13
TP12
J2
PWB NO. 1713121D
TP8
R57 TP11 TP5 TP1
R44 R25
X7
7 8
X5
J1 J3 TP3 TP4 TP7

7253097D
2 3
Figure A.3-6 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GENS System SW3A or Lower, with or without
SlideMaker)
a
J8
a
SCAN
DWSEN
UPSEN
BLC
BUTH
IBTH
PART
NOBL
CARRY
BUBB
X7
b
TP22
TP21
7 8 9
14 15 16 TP16 R44
TP19
RS485
MODULE
TP20
J7
TP23
X1
TP17
12 13
J6
X3
J5
X4
b
WASTE
LEDIF
GHOST
STAIN
PAKP
PAK
CLZ
ISO
BACK
SHTH
X2
10 11
17 18 19
J4
TP7
TP6
TP18
TP15
TP13
29 22 23
X5
1 26 2
X6
3 28 4
X8
27 20 21
TP8
TP4
J2
TP9
TP10
X9
PWB NO. 1713523
R57 TP11 TP14 TP5 TP1 R25 R163 TP2 TP3 TP24 J9 J1 J3 TP12
X10
7253426E
24 25 30
PN 4277219B
A.3-5

Figure A.3-7 Diluter 2 REL Card Component Locations)

J8
T P 1 2
T P 4
J1 0
1 1
P 3
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 1 4 A
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 1 5 8
R 2 5
T P 8
T P
T
T
T
T
J7
R 4 4
P 7
P 1
R 5 7
P 5
E 1 2
J1 1
E 1 3
J6
J5
E 1 0 E 1 1
J4
E 7 E 8 E 9
J3
J1
SCAN
DWSEN
UPSEN
BLC
BUTH
IBTH
PART
NOBL
CARRY
BUBB
b
WASTE
LEDIF
GHOST
STAIN
PAKP
PAK
CLZ
ISO
BACK
SHTH
J2
E 1 7 E 1 8 E 1 9
E 2 4 E 2 5 E 3 0
6 4 9 8 2 1 8 B
E 2 9
E 2 2
E 2 3
E 3
E 2 8
E 4
E 2 7
E 2 0
E 2 1
E 1
E 2 6
E 2
J9
Note: For this Diluter 2 card the bubble/blood detector adjustment test points are located on the upper left edge.
Figure A.3-8 Diluter 2 RBD Card Component Locations

J 8
a
S C A N
D W S E N
U P S E N
B L C
B U T H
IB T H
P A R T
N O B L
C A R R Y
B U B B
b
W A S T E
L E D IF
G H O S T
S T A IN
P A K P
P A K
C L Z
IS O
B A C K
S H T H
J 1 0
b
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 3 2 A
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 2 0 7
T P 1 2
T P 4
J 7
T P 8
T P 1 7
T P 1 1
T P 1
T P 5
J 1 1
E 1 3
E 1 2
J 6
J 5
J 4
E 1 0 E 1 1
J 1 2
J 3
J 1
J 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 7 B
J 9
Note: For this Diluter 2 card the bubble/blood detector adjustment test points are relocated onto the BD ADJ card.
A.3-6
PN 4277219B

Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Front bubble/blood detector
J7
Diluter Cbl Adapter card (IBUS), J3
J2
Probe-wipe interconnect, J2
J8
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card, J4
J3
Rear bubble/blood detector
J9*
BD3 (available on all Diluter 2 cards except the

original)
J4
Diluter 4 card, J2
J10
Sweep-flow reservoir float sensor
J5
J11
Diluter solenoids
J6
Reservoir Interface card, J1
J12
BD ADJ card, J1
* For Systems with a SlideMaker
LEDs
Name
Lights when:
Name
Lights when:
SCAN
Switch scan active (blinking)
WASTE
Waste container full
DWSEN
Probe wipe down
LEDIF
CBC lyse reservoir empty
UPSEN
Probe wipe up
GHOST
Retic clear reservoir empty
BLC
Blood comparator signal
STAIN
Retic stain reservoir empty
BUTH
Bubble threshold signal
PAKP
Pak preserve reservoir empty
IBTH
ISOTON diluent-blood threshold signal
PAK
Diff lyse reservoir empty
PART
Aspiration error - front to rear failure
CLZ
Cleaning agent reservoir empty
NOBL
Aspiration error - no blood detected
ISO
Diluent reservoir empty
CARRY
Aspiration error - carryover detected
BACK
Backwash tank empty
BUBB
Aspiration error - bubbles detected
SHTH
Sheath tank empty

ATTENTION: These test points and adjustments are not available on the Diluter 2 RBD card.
Table A.3-7 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments on the Diluter 2 Card
Functions
Front Detector*
Rear Detector*
Ground
Sensor Output
TP4
TP8
TP12
Sensor Adjust
R25
R44
Sensor Input
TP3
TP7
TP12
Sample Hold Circuit Output
TP1
TP5
TP12
Threshold Value
TP11
Threshold Adjust
R57
TP12
*For adjustment ranges, see Table A.1-26.
PN 4277219B
A.3-7

Diluter 3 Card
Figure A.3-9 Diluter 3 Card Component Locations
J7
J1
TP 3
J2
TP 4
J2
SW
SCAN
LED
J4
J5
TP1
J6
J12
J10
J3
SW
SCAN
LED
J4
TP 2
J5
TP 1
J6
J17
J19
J12
J10
J11
J16
J16
TP8
J15
J8
J8
TP12
TP11
PWB NO. 1713181C
TP 7
TP 6
J11
J15
RS485
INTERFACE
MODULE
TP 3
TP 7
TP 6
J3
J7
J1
RS485
INTERFACE J13
MODULE
J13
TP 4
Figure A.3-10 Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface Card

Component Locations
PWB NO. 1713514D
7253095E
7253425D
Figure 1.3-11 Diluter 3 LH Card Component Locations

J1
J7
J13
TP3
J2
TP6
J20
R5485
Interface
module
TP4
TP7
J21
J3
J23
J22
J18
J28
J27
TP2
J4
J5
J17
TP1
E12
E13
J19
J6
J12
J10
J26
J24
J25
J8
J11
TP8
J16
J15
PWB NO. 1713740A
ASSY NO. 6707231
7219043B
A.3-8
PN 4277219B

Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
J12
MF13
J2*
SlideMaker
J13
RS/Opto Intfc card, J1 (SlideMaker)
J3
MF11, J11
J15
Miscellaneous solenoids, MF1
J4
MF6, J11
J16
Solenoid 21 and J73 (diff mix motor)
J5
MF9, J11
J17*
J1/MF6 on the Sample Access and Reservoir

module
J6
MF16 (Retic module), J11
J18
J7
J19*
SOL120
J8
MF4 (backwash manifold), J14
J20
Diluter 3 LH card only: J20 on the Random

Access module.
J10
MF18 (Retic module), J10
J21
Diluter 3 LH card only: For future use.
J11
MF17, J5
J22 J28
Diluter 3 LH card only: Test equipment. Used

for in-house testing only.
* For instruments with a SlideMaker
PN 4277219B
A.3-9

Diluter 4 Card
Figure A.3-12 Diluter 4 Card Component Locations
J1
PWB NO. 1713407C
CR9
CR8
TP11
J3
TP10
R91
U10
J2
R47
TP3
J5
TP13
TP12
J4
7253096A
CR5
CR6 CR7
Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Peltier module, J1
J4
Diluter ambient temperature sensor
J2
Diluter 2 card, J4
J5
Stain chamber heater, J1, and diff heater, J30
J3
Backplane voltage bus
LEDs
LED
Name
Lights when:
LED
Name
Lights when:
CR5
5DIFFON
Diff heater on
CR8
HEAT
Peltier module heating
CR6
+12 V
+12 V within specifications
CR9
COOL
Peltier module cooling
CR7
STAINON
Stain chamber heater on
A.3-10
PN 4277219B


Table A.3-11 Diluter 4 Card Test Points and Adjustments
Function
Test Points and

Adjustments
Ground
Adjustment
Limits
Verification
Limits
Stain Heater Setpoint
TP10
TP13
8.15 V 0.01
8.15 V 0.02
Stain Heater Setpoint Adjustment
R91
Ambient Temperature Voltage
TP12
TP13
Peltier Temperature Voltage
TP11
TP13
Diff Heater Temperature Voltage
TP3
TP13
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card

Figure A.3-13 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Component Location
J2
50
J1
Left
Door of
Diluter
PWB NO. 1713108C
J4
50
26
26
1
J3
50
25
J4
26
26
1
50
25
J3
25
J2
25
J1
7253104A
Connectors
Table A.3-12 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Connectors
PN 4277219B
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Diluter 3 card, J1
J3
Diluter 2 card, J7
J2
System Power Controller card, J1
J4
A.3-11

Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card

Figure A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Component Locations
J1
PWB NO. 1713118G
TP6
TP5
TP3
CR5
CR4
TP4
CR3
TP2
CR2
CR1
TP7
7253098A
J4
J5
J2
TP1
J3
Connectors
Table A.3-13 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
J4
Diluter 2 card, J8
J2
Diluter 2 card, J5, and solid state RF

Detector Preamp card
J5
Not used
J3
Diluter 3 card, J7
LEDs
Table A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card LEDs
A.3-12
LED
Name
Lights when:
LED
Name
Lights when:
CR1
+5V
+5 V is not present
CR4
-15V
-15 V is not present
CR2
-5V_OPT
+5 V optics is not present
CR5
+24V
+24 V is not present
CR3
+15V
+15 V is not present
PN 4277219B

Test Points
Table A.3-15 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Test Points
Test Point
Voltage
Ground to Use
TP1
+24 V
TP3, analog ground
TP2
+15 V
TP3, analog ground
TP4
-15 V
TP3, analog ground
TP5
+5 V
TP6, digital ground
TP7
Not used
Not used
Keyboard and Display Interface Card (GENS System)

Figure A.3-15 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Component Locations on the GENS System
J2
J5
J1
PWB 1713105
R3
J3
6498055A
Connectors
Table A.3-16 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Connectors on the GENS System
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
J3
Membrane keypad
J2
LCD Display module, J1
J5
LCD Display module
Potentiometers
ATTENTION: Adjusting R3 too low turns off the display completely, making the LCD Display
module appear defective.
R3 varies the display contrast on the LCD Display module in the GENS System. R3 is
accessed through an opening in the splash shield mounted on the rear of the Diluter control
keypad.
PN 4277219B
A.3-13

PVT Card
Figure A.3-16 PVT Card Component Locations
J4
J6
J5
R35
COUNT
VACUUM
DIFF
PRESSURE
(RG 3)
RETIC
PRESSURE
(RG 6)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
(RG 4)
PWB NO. 1713400B
7253094A
Note: R35 is not present on newer versions of the PVT card.

Connectors
Table A.3-17 PVT Card Connectors
A.3-14
J No.
Connects to:
J4
Diff ambient temperature thermistor
J5
J6
PN 4277219B

Reservoir Interface Card

Figure A.3-17 Reservoir Interface Card Component Locations
J2
J3
J9
J4
J5
J10 J6
J11
J7
J12
J8
J14
J13
J16
J15
J1
PWB NO. 1713205B

7253100A
Connectors
Table A.3-18 Reservoir Interface Card Connectors
Reagent/Waste
Sensor
Connector
Reservoir
Solenoid
Solenoid
Connector
N/A
PN 4277219B
Diluter 2 Card
Connector
J1
Diluent
J9
SL100
J2
Cleaning agent
J10
SL101
J3
Diff lytic reagent
J11
SL102
J4
Diff preserve
J12
SL103
J5
Retic stain
J13
SL104
J6
Retic clearing reagent
J14
SL105
J7
CBC lytic reagent
J15
SL106
J8
Waste, backwash tank and sheath tank
J16
A.3-15

RS/Opto Infc Card

Figure A.3-18 RS/Opto Intfc Card Component Locations
J2
J5
J9
J6
J7
J8
Right
Door of
Diluter
PWB NO. 1713210C

7219042B
Rear of Diluter right panel
J3
J1
J4
Connectors
Table A.3-19 RS/Opto Intfc Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Diluter 3 card, J13
J6
Digital backplane (IBUS), J19
J2
Digital backplane (SBUS), J27
J7
Diluter 1 card (IBUS), J1
J3
Workstation
J8
J4
Laser Power Reference card, J1
J9
Light Scatter Preamp module, J78
Diluter 1 card, J2
J5
PVT card J5
Hgb Preamp module
A.3-16
PN 4277219B

Sensor Distribution Card

Figure A.3-19 Sensor Distribution Card Component Locations
CR2
J4
CR1
J9
CR3
J2
J7
J10
J6
PWB NO. 1713204D

J3
J8
J1
J5
7253099A
Connectors
Table A.3-20 Sensor Distribution Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Keyboard and Display Interface card, J1 (on

GENS System with old Diluter interconnects)
J6
Right stack loaded and top right safety sensors
J2
Top left safety, front door and vacuum overflow

sensors
J7
Probe position, J33, and hand detector, J32,

sensors, and manual-mode start switch
J3
Bed position sensors
J8
Rocker bed sensors at P36 (under right and left

stack, stripper plate and tube detector sensors)
J4
Hgb lamp, J11
J9
PVT card, J6
J5
Diluter 1 card, J5
J10
(Bar-Code) scanner position, J11, bellows up,

bellows down, left lift, and right lift sensors.
LEDs
Table A.3-21 Sensor Distribution Card LEDs
PN 4277219B
LED
Lights when:
CR1
Rocker bed is horizontal.
CR2
Rocker bed is forward.
CR3
Rocker bed is backward.
A.3-17

Six-Channel Preamp Card

Figure A.3-20 Six-Channel Preamp Card Component Locations
P 1
U 1 9
P 2
U 1 7
6 4 9 8 2 3 6 B
J 6
J 5
J 4
J 3
J 2
J 1
Connectors
Table A.3-22 Six-Channel Preamp Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
P No.
Connects to:
J1
Red aperture 1
J5
White aperture 2
J2
Red aperture 2
J6
White aperture 3
J3
Red aperture 3
P1
Not connected. Provides test points for checking

the card.
J4
White aperture 1
P2
R/W/P SC/A card, P2
A.3-18
PN 4277219B

POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
A.4

Figure A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Component Locations
J11
J16
PWB NO. 1713179C
J15
J13
J14
J10
J12
7253352A
Connectors
Table A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Connectors
PN 4277219B
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J10
Bulk Power Supply, WM 25/26
J14
J11
System Power controller card, J4
J15
J12
J16
J13
Rear of Power Supply, J4 to Analyzer

A.4-1

Bulk Power Supply

Figure A.4-2 Bulk Power Supply Connectors
WM26 WM25 WM1 WM2
26 25
P18
WM23
P18
WM24
23
24
WM22
P20
P20
22
P19
WM21
21
WM9
P19
10 11 12
WM10
WM11
20 19
WM12
WM20
WM19
P17
P17
7253381A
Connectors
Table A.4-2 Bulk Power Supply Connectors
A.4-2
WM or P No.
Connects to:
19/20
J21 and J22, exhaust and intake fans
23/24
Bulk Power Filter card, J14
21/22
25/26
1/2
Dump valve solenoid
18, 19, 20
PN 4277219B

Motor Controller Card

Figure A.4-3 Motor Controller Card Locations and Settings
Lower card
Upper card
JP1
3
2
1
P5
1 2 3
7253424D
PN 4277219B
A.4-3


Figure A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Component Locations
J1
+5.2 V CONTROL(CR3) J6
J2
J3
CR8
PWB NO. 1713137G
60 PSI
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
7253403E
J4
+48 V1 +48 V2 +12 V TP19

TP18
TP17
(CR2) (CR1) (CR4)
TP20
J7
J5
Connectors
Table A.4-3 System Power Controller Card Connectors
J No.
Connects to:
J No.
Connects to:
J1
Rear of Power Supply (J5)
J5
Ac input line
J2
RS485 Module
J6
Bulk Power Supply
J3
System Controller Display
J7
Compressor/vacuum pump
J4
LEDs
Table A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Voltage Status LEDs
Color of LED (after Power On)
LED
Indicator For
Green
Red
Amber
CR1
+48 V2 dc Compressor
Defective LED
Not present
Within tolerance
CR2
+48 V1 dc Analyzer
Defective LED
Not present
Within tolerance
CR3
+5 Vdc Control
Defective LED
Not present
Within tolerance
CR4
+12 Vdc
Defective LED
Not present
Within tolerance
CR8
Internal A/D converter status
Ready
Power On
Zero adjust done, gain adjust not done
A.4-4
PN 4277219B

DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
A.5
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
Table A.5-1describes the functions available using the F-key on the Diluter control keypad.
To access the F-key functions, press F, the numbers of the option and then ENTER. For most
functions, you press ENTER again to repeat the function and STOP to exit the function. Any
exceptions to this are noted in Table A.5-1.
.
Table A.5-1 Diluter F-Key Functions

Function
Display
Description
F01
CLEAN APERTURES
Activates burn circuit.
F02
PRIME CBC LYSE
Primes CBC lytic reagent:

1. Drains both baths.
2. Dispenses six aliquots of CBC lytic reagent into WBC bath.
3. Drains baths.
4. Dispenses another six aliquots of CBC lytic reagent for a total of
twelve.
5. Drains baths.
6. Fills both baths with diluent.
F03
RBC & WBC MIX
Energizes WBC sample mix and RBC sample mix solenoids which
dispense mixing bubbles into the WBC and RBC baths, respectively.
F04
DILUENT DISPENSE
Dispenses about 1 mL of diluent from Manual-mode aspirator tip.
F05
SOLENOID XXX
Allows activation of individual solenoid. Solenoid returns to original

position (state) when this routine is exited.
Enter the solenoid number and press ENTER to activate the solenoid.
Press ENTER as necessary to change the state of the solenoid.
Press STOP to exit the routine for the selected solenoid. Press STOP
again to exit this function.
F06
RELEASE BSV
Drains baths, bleeds off pressure, and rotates BSV back and forth five
times.
F07
BAR CODE READ
Pierces the tube and scans the bar-code label.
F08
PRIME SWEEP FLOW
Primes sweep-flow lines.
F09
ZAP APERTURES
Zaps the apertures to burn off protein or debris.

1. Applies pressure behind baths.
2. Drains baths.
3. Primes baths with cleaning agent.
4. Activates burn circuit 10 times.
5. When finished:
r Select 1 to repeat
r Select 0 to remove cleaning agent and exit.
F10
MASTER....
SLAVE...
On the LH 750 System only.

1. Displays the versions of the microprocessors on the DILUTER CPU
card (master) and the Display Interface card (slave).
2. After 2.5 seconds, returns to F10.
F11
PN 4277219B
EXTENDED PRIME
Pulls liquid through apertures to the vacuum isolator chamber for

44 seconds.
A.5-1

DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
Table A.5-1 Diluter F-Key Functions (Continued)

Function
Display
Description
F12
EXTENDED CLEAR
Applies 5 psi to rear of the apertures for 60 seconds.
F13
PURGE MODE
Clears air or debris from flow cell by dispensing cleaning agent from
cleaning agent pump.
1. Fills lower section of flow cell with cleaning agent.
2. Fills upper section of flow cell with cleaning agent, fills lower section
with diluent.
F14
PRIME DIFF LYSE
Primes diff lytic reagent pump lines.
F15
PRIME DIFF
PRESERVE
Primes diff preservative pump lines.
F16
PRIME DILUENT
Primes diluent lines.
F17
PRIME CLEANER
Primes cleaning agent pump lines.
F18
PRIME RETIC
STAIN
Primes retic stain pump lines.
F19
PRIME RETIC
CLEAR
Primes retic clearing solution pump lines.
F20
SHEATH TANK
CHECK
Fills and drains sheath tank, checking the sheath tank level sensors to
verify they work correctly.
F21
DIFF PRESERVE
LV DISPENSE
Used to measure the low volume (LV) of diff preservative dispensed.

Dispenses one aliquot of diff preservative to the mixing chamber.
F22
DIFF PRESERVE
HV DISPENSE
Used to measure the high volume (HV) of diff preservative dispensed.

Dispenses one aliquot of diff preservative to the mixing chamber.
F23
DIFF LYSE
LOW VOLUME DISPENSE
Used to measure the low volume (LV) of diff lytic reagent dispensed.
Dispenses one aliquot of diff lytic reagent to the mixing chamber.
F24
DIFF LYSE
HIGH VOLUME DISPENSE
Used to measure the high volume (HV) of diff lytic reagent dispensed.
Dispenses one aliquot of diff lytic reagent to the mixing chamber.
F25
RETIC STAIN
Used to measure the volume of stain dispensed. Dispenses one aliquot

of stain to the stain chamber.
F26
RETIC CLEAR
Used to measure the volume of retic clearing solution dispensed.

Dispenses one aliquot of retic clearing solution to the retic chamber.
F27
CBC LYSE
Used to measure the volume of CBC lytic reagent dispensed. Dispenses

one aliquot of CBC lytic reagent to the WBC bath.
F28
CHECKING PROBE WIPE
Activates probe-wipe mechanism to verify probe-wipe mechanism is

working correctly:
1. Retracts Manual-mode aspirator tip.
2. Moves cleaning truck up and down a full stroke.
3. Moves the cleaning truck up about 1/4 of the way and then returns to
the down position.
4. Extends the aspirator tip.
F30
BACKWASH TANK
CHECK
Fills and drains backwash tank, checking the backwash tank level
sensors to verify they work correctly.
F31
PRIME RESERVOIRS
Fills the reagent reservoirs if needed. Press ALARM RESET to exit.
A.5-2
PN 4277219B

DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS

Function
Display
Description
F32
RBC PUMP
DISPENSE
Used to measure the volume dispensed by the RBC diluent dispenser.

Drains the baths, then dispenses one aliquot of reagent from the RBC
diluent dispenser into the RBC bath.
F33
WBC PUMP
DISPENSE
Used to measure the volume dispensed by the WBC diluent dispenser.

Drains the baths, then dispenses one aliquot of reagent from the WBC
diluent dispenser into the WBC bath.
F40
SYSTEM FLUSH
Initiates cycling of solution through the disinfect port on the rear of the
Diluter.
NEEDLE CLEANING
F41 (LH 750
System only)
Cleans the sample aspiration and the vent sides of the needle.
MINI PRIME
F42 (LH 750
System only)
Quickly flushes the diff and retic reagent and sample lines and does a
short prime of the flow cell.
F44
FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1
Initiates the flow-cell clear cycle 1:

1. Purges flow cell with cleaning agent.
2. Applies sample pressure and vacuum alternately to aperture.
3. Turns on RF current.
4. Fills flow cell with diluent.
F45
FLOWCELL UNCLOG 2

2. Applies 30 psi to top of aperture.
4. Fills flow cell with diluent.
F46
FLOWCELL UNCLOG 3

2. Applies 30 psi to top of aperture.
4. Fills flow cell with cleaning agent; ideally cleaning agent should
remain in flow cell for 30 minutes.
F50
PRESS 0/1 FOR

DIL HW 3A-/3B+
SWEEP FLOW TANK
CHECK
ATTENTION: Only available on GENS Systems with software 4A and

higher and on LH 750 Systems.
Fills and drains sweep-flow reservoir, checking the sweep-flow reservoir
level sensor to verify it works correctly.
1. Turns on SL16 for 5 seconds to drain VC1.
2. Turns on SL11 to pull diluent from the sweep-flow reservoir.
3. Checks the level sensor in the sweep-flow reservoir every second for
up to 30 seconds to determine if it senses the low diluent level.
r If the sensor is triggered, the test passed.
r If the sensor is not triggered, the test failed.
4. Turns off SL11.
5. Turns on SL16 to drain VC1.
6. Refills sweep-flow reservoir.
PN 4277219B
A.5-3

DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS

Function
Display
Description
F55
PRESS MANUAL
or CLEAR APERT
Used to run LATRON primer or control in the Diff mode.
Then displays
LATEX-DIFF....
F56
PRESS MANUAL
or CLEAR APERT
Then displays
LATEX-RETIC....
F57
PRESS MANUAL
or CLEAR APERT
Then displays:
LATEX-DIFF + RETIC....
r To cycle Primer, press CLEAR APERT, then initiate cycle.

r To cycle control, initiate Manual-mode cycle.
Used to run LATRON primer or control in the Retic mode.
r To cycle Primer, press CLEAR APERT, then initiate cycle.
Used to run LATRON primer or control in Diff and Retic mode.
r To cycle primer, press CLEAR APERT, then initiate cycle.
F67
DILUTER INITIAL PRIME
Primes all reagent lines except cleaning agent.
F68
DRY ALL
Drains all reagents from system. Press RESET to end.
F79
VENT LINE CALIBRATION

INITIALIZING VENT LINE
On systems with a SlideMaker, calibrates BD3, the blood detector for the
vent line.
When done displays:

VENT CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL
1. Backwashes diluent through the needle vent line.

2. Calibrates BD3 on the diluent.
3. Dries the needle vent line.
4. If calibration passed, displays READY. If calibration failed, generates
an error message.
RELEASE CVL85/126
F85 (LH 750
System only)
F86
TRANSPORT TEST
RELEASE CVL87/127
F87 (LH 750
System only)
F90
SOLENOID XXX
Moves the ceramic pads in CVL85/126 back and forth ten times.
Tests functioning of cassette transport assembly.
Allows activation of individual solenoid. Has memory - solenoid remains

in selected position when this routine is exited
Enter the solenoid number and press ENTER to activate the solenoid.
Press ENTER as necessary to change the state of the solenoid. Press
STOP to exit the routine for the selected solenoid. Press STOP again to
exit this function.
F92
LOW VAC X.XXX.
RELEASE CVL93/128
F93 (LH 750
System only)
Displays real-time low vacuum. Used to adjust low vacuum.

F95
SOLENOIDS FREE
Turns off solenoids pneumatically; that is, any solenoid valve with a
normally open pneumatic line is repositioned to close the line.
F96
TUBE ADVANCE
Moves a cassette through the piercing station, one tube position at a

time.
Press STOP to halt the advance of the cassette. When F96 appears,
press ENTER to repeat function, press STOP to exit this function.
A.5-4
PN 4277219B

DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS

Function
Display
Description
F98
KEYBOARD TEST
Allows operator to press any key on the Diluter keypad and ensure the
name is displayed on the Diluter display.
Press STOP three times to exit this function.
F99
WAIT EN/DISABLED
Enables or disables the WAIT function. When WAIT is enabled, the

operator can put the GENS System in WAIT by pressing the blank key
(key between F and ID) on the Diluter keypad.
When WAIT ENABLED or WAIT DISABLED appears, press ENTER to
switch between the options. When F99 appears, press ENTER to repeat
function, STOP to exit.
PN 4277219B
A.5-5

DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
A.5-6
PN 4277219B

DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION REFERENCES
A.6

Summary
Most of the Diluter functions are accomplished by fluidic components that are interconnected
by tubing and controlled by timed solenoid signals. This section briefly describes the
functions of these components.
r
See Solenoids Valves for information about the solenoid valves.
See Pinch Valves and Asco Angar Valves for information about the pinch valves and
Angar valves.
See Main Diluter Fluidic Components for information about the remaining fluidic
components.
Illustrations of the Diluter panels and modules - with the fluidic components identified - are
included under Heading A.7 (GENS System) and Heading A.8 (LH750 System), and are
cross-referenced from the tables in this section.
Solenoids Valves
Solenoids valves are electronic valves that are energized or de-energized to perform a function
or to activate other components in the Diluter. The function of each solenoid in the Diluter
and the components it activates is listed in Table A.6-1 and on the instruments
pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6. Use the figures referenced in Table A.6-1 to
locate the solenoid valves.
Table A.6-1 Solenoid Valve Functions
Figure Reference
SL No. Function
Components Activated
GENS System LH 750 System
Rinse Needle
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
Backwash Probe
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
CBC Lyse Pump
PM7, VL3
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
Hgb Drain Valve
VL4A, VL4B, VL4C
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
Backwash Pressure
Backwash Tank (VC23)
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
Hgb and Waste Drain
VL6
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
WBC Dispense
PM3, VL7
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
RBC Dispense
PM2, VL8
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
Whole Blood Aspirate
PM9, VL9A, VL9B
A.7-8
A.8-8
10
WBC Count
VL10
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
11
RBC Count
VL11A, VL11B
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
* Ensure rocker bed is in the horizontal position before energizing.

Ensure rocker bed is in the forward position before energizing.
Process controlled solenoid. No direct access.
PN 4277219B
A.6-1

Table A.6-1 Solenoid Valve Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
SL No. Function
12
Baths Drain
VL12A, VL12B, VL12C, VL12D,

VL12E, VLF
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
13
Probe/Needle drain
VL13
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
14
Cleaning Agent
VL14A, VL14B
A.7-4
A.8-4
15
Sample Valve Return
VC14, CL2
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
16
Vac Isolator Drain
VL16A, VL16B
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
17
Segment Sample
VL17, CL2
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
18
Hgb Blank Dispense
South Bend, 2-way
A.7-4
A.8-4
19
WBC Sample Mix
WBC Bath (VC3)
A.7-4
A.8-4
20
RBC Sample Mix
RBC Bath (VC2)
A.7-4
A.8-4
21*
Right Lift
CL5
A.7-7
A.8-7
22*
Left Lift
CL4
A.7-7
A.8-7
23
Needle Interlock
L3
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
24
Manual Probe In
PM9, CL1
A.7-8
A.8-8
25
Tube Ram/Needle Bellow Down
CL6, CL3, VL25A
A.7-1
A.8-1
26
Bar Code Reader
VL26, CL7
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
27
Backward Bed Rock
CL8
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
28
Bed Lock
L1, L2
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
29
Stripper Plate
CL10
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
30
Forward Bed Rock
CL8
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
31
Flipper Retract
L41, L42
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
32
Reservoir Refill Request
Logic Signal To Trigger Reservoir

Refill
N/A
N/A
33
Needle Vent Vacuum
VL33
A.7-4
A.8-2
34
Manual Probe Out (N.O.)
CL1
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
35
Not used
N/A
N/A
36
Belt Advance
CL9
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
37
Needle Bellow Up
CL3
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13

A.6-2
PN 4277219B


Figure Reference
SL No. Function
38
Not used
39
Vacuum Overflow Dump
40

N/A
N/A
VL39, VC22
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
Stop Vacuum
VL40
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
41
Reverse Flush
VL41
A.7-10, MF17
A.8-10, MF17
42
Rinse - Diff
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
43
Diff Lyse (PAK Lyse)
PM4
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
44
Sample Disable - Retics
VL44
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
45
Diff Preserve (PAK Preserve)
PM1, VL45
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
46
Flush
VL46A, VL46B
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
47
Cleaning Agent Pump
VL47A, VL47B, PM10
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
48
5 Diff Mixing Chamber Drain
GENS System: VL48A, VL48B
A.7-4, MF6
N/A
LH 750 System: VL48B
N/A
A.8-4, MF6
A.7-6, MF11
N/A
LH 750 System: VL49A
N/A
A.8-6, MF11
49
Exit - Flow Cell
50
Vacuum to Diff Chamber
VL50A, VL50B
A.7-10, MF17
A.8-10, MF17
51
Sample Pressure/Vent - Diff
VL51
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
52
Sample Disable - Diff
VL52
A.7-10, MF17
A.8-10, MF17
53
Drain Diff/Retics Waste
GENS System: VC13
A.7-6
N/A
LH 750 System: VL53A, VL53B,

VL53C, VL53D, VC13, VC26
N/A
A.8-6
54
Sheath Flow
VL54
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
55
Forward Flush
VL55
A.7-6, MF11
A.8-6, MF11
56
Vacuum to Retic Chamber
VL56
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
57
Probe/Needle Drain Vacuum
GENS System: VL57A, VL57B,

VL57C
A.7-6, MF11
N/A
LH 750 System: VL57A, VL57C
N/A
A.8-6, MF11
GENS System: Aspiration Enable and VL58A, VL58B

Lyse Disable
A.7-9, MF17
N/A
LH 750 System: Latex Sample Enable

- Diff
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
58
VL58

PN 4277219B
A.6-3


Figure Reference
SL No. Function
59
Backwash Disable
VL59
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
60
Diff Preserve (PAK Preserve)

Dispense/Refill Enable
South Bend, 3-way
A.7-5
A.8-5
61
Backwash Tank/Sweep Flow Reservoir VL61

Purge
A.7-2
A.8-2
62
GENS System: Aspiration Enable and VL62A, VL62B

Stain Disable
A.7-9, MF18
N/A
LH 750 System: Back Aspiration

Enable
VL62
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
63
Diff Lyse (Pak Lyse) Dispense/Refill

Enable
South Bend, 3-way
A.7-1
A.8-1
64
GENS System: 5 Diff and Retic

Segment (N.O.)
VL64
A.7-7, MF13
N/A
LH 750 System: Front Aspiration

Enable (N.O.)
VL64
N/A
A.8-7, MF13
65
Diff Lyse (Pak Lyse) to Diff Chamber

Disable
VL65
A.7-10, MF17
A.8-10, MF17
66
Mixer - Retics
Logic Signal to Trigger Retic Mixing

Motor
N/A
N/A
67
Vent Chamber Drain
VL67
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
68
Backwash Needle/Segments
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
69
Backwash Flow Cell
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
70
Sheath Tank Refill Request
Logic Signal to Trigger Sheath Tank

Refill
N/A
N/A
71
Clog Detector On
Logic Signal to Trigger Clog

Detector On
N/A
N/A
72
RF On
Logic Signal to Trigger RF On
N/A
N/A
73
Mixer - Diff
Logic Signal to Trigger Diff Mixing

Motor
N/A
N/A
74
Count - Diff/Retics
Logic Signal to Trigger Diff/Retics

Count
N/A
N/A
75
Rinse Retic Chamber
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
76
Sample Pressure - Retics
VL76
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
77
Diluent Sense
Logic Signal to Trigger Diluent

Sense
N/A
N/A
78
Blood Flow
Logic Signal to Trigger Blood Flow

Monitoring
N/A
N/A
79
Blood Sense
Logic Signal to Trigger Blood Sense N/A
N/A

A.6-4
PN 4277219B


Figure Reference
SL No. Function
80
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
Retic Chamber Drain

82
Pak Volume - Low
PM4, PM1
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
83
Probe Wipe Error Reset
Logic Signal to Trigger Probe Wipe

Error Reset
N/A
N/A
84
Probe Wipe Enable

Enable
N/A
N/A
85
LH 750 System: Diff Sample Segment

Valve Return
CVL85/126
N/A
A.8-4, MF10
86
GENS System w/ SW 4A and higher

and LH 750 System: Sweep Flow
Reservoir Refill
VL86
A.7-4, MF10
A.8-4, MF10
87
LH 750 System: Retic Sample

Segment Valve Return
CVL87/127
N/A
A.8-4, MF10
88
Latex Sample Enable - Retics (N.O.)
VL88
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
89
Blood/Stain to Stain Chamber
VL89
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
90
Tip Wipe Enable
Logic Signal to Trigger Tip Wipe

Enable
N/A
N/A
91
Backwash Tank Refill Request
Logic Signal to Trigger Backwash

Tank Refill
N/A
N/A
92
Blood/Stain Aspiration Pump
PM11
A.7-9
A.8-9
93
GENS System: 5 psi to Stain

Chamber
VL93A, VL93B
A.7-9, MF16
N/A
LH 750 System: Segment 2 L

Blood/Stain
CVL93/128
N/A
A.8-9, MF16
GENS System: Segment 2 L

Blood/Stain
VL94A, VL94B
A.7-9, MF18
N/A
LH 750 System: Enable 2 L

Blood/Stain Aspiration
VL94A
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
GENS System: Toggle Waste/Retic

Chamber
VL95A, VL95B
A.7-9, MF18
N/A
LH 750 System: Ghost Pump
PM6, VL95*
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
94
95
Note: On LH 750 Systems this is

labeled VL95/98. It is activated by
SL98 on the GENS System, and by
SL95 on the LH 750 System.
96
Rinse Stain Chamber
Lee Valve

PN 4277219B
A.6-5


Figure Reference
SL No. Function
97
GENS System: VL97A, VL97B,

VC30
A.7-9, MF16
N/A
N/A
A.8-9, MF16
PM6, VL98*
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
Drain Stain Chamber
98
GENS System: Ghost Pump
Note: On newer GENS Systems

this is labeled VL95/98. It is
activated by SL98 on the GENS
System, and by SL95 on the
LH 750 System.
LH 750 System: Segment Valves
Self-Cleaning
VL98
N/A
A.8-9, MF16
99
Stain Pump
PM5, VL99
A.7-9, MF16
A.8-9, MF16
100
Diluent Level Refill
VL100
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
101
Cleaning Agent Level Refill
VL101
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
102
Pak Lyse Level Refill
VL102
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
103
Pak Preserve Level Refill
VL103
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
104
Stain Level Refill
VL104
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
105
Ghost Level Refill
VL105
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
106
CBC Lyse Reagent Refill
VL106
A.7-11, MF3
A.8-11, MF3
107
Backwash Tank Refill
VL107A, VL107B
A.7-2, MF9
A.8-2, MF9
108
Sheath Tank Refill
VL108
A.7-4, MF6
A.8-4, MF6
110
Probe Wipe Rinse
Lee Valve
A.7-7, MF4
A.8-7, MF4
111
Probe Wipe Vacuum
VL111
A.7-7, MF13
A.8-7, MF13
112
GENS System: Disinfectant (SW 3A

and lower)
Not used (SW 4A and higher)
VL112
A.7-7, MF13
N/A
LH 750 System: Not used
N/A
N/A
N/A
GENS System: Diluent Reservoir

Vent (SW 3A and lower)
Not used (SW 4A and higher)
VL113
A.7-7, MF13
N/A
LH 750 System: Not used
N/A
N/A
N/A
Needle Vent Side Isolator (SlideMaker

Option)
VL114
In the Sample Access and

Reservoir Module. Refer to the
Slide Making Modules FSM.
113
114

A.6-6
PN 4277219B


Figure Reference
SL No. Function
115
VC19 Isolator 1 (SlideMaker Option)
VL115

116
GENS System: VC19 Isolator 2 (SM

and SW 3A and lower)
VC19 Isolator 2 (SW 4A and higher)
VL116

LH 750 System: VC19 Isolator 2
VL116

117
SlideMaker Aspiration Line Isolator

(SM)
VL117

118
Reservoir SW1 (SM) (N.O. RES1)
VL118

119
Not used
120
Duplicate SlideMaker Aspiration Line

Isolator (SM) (Duplicate of SL117)
VL120

121
VLS Check
Logic Signal to Trigger VLS Check
N/A
N/A
122
GENS System: Sweep Flow

Reservoir Refill (SW 4A and higher)
Logic Signal to Trigger Sweep Flow

Reservoir Refill
N/A
N/A
LH 750 System: Sweep Flow

Reservoir Refill
Logic Signal to Trigger Sweep Flow

Reservoir Refill
N/A
N/A
123
Probe Wipe Block Up

Block Up
N/A
N/A
124
Probe Wipe Block Reset

Block Reset
N/A
N/A
125
GENS System: Probe Wipe Rinse

Cup (SW 4A and higher)
CL11
A.7-4, MF10
N/A
LH 750 System: Probe Wipe Rinse

Cup
CL11
N/A
A.8-4, MF10?
126
LH 750 System only: Segment 31 L

Diff Sample
CVL85/126
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
127

Retic Sample
CVL87/127
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
128

Blood/Stain Return
CVL93/128
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
129
LH 750 System only: Clearing

solution line protection (N.O.)
VL129
N/A
A.8-9, MF18
130
LH 750 System only: Not used
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

PN 4277219B
A.6-7

Pinch Valves and Asco Angar Valves

Pinch valves and Angar valves, which are controlled by solenoids, route pressure, vacuum
and reagents throughout the Diluter. Use the figures referenced in Table A.6-2 to locate the
valves. To activate a valve, energize the solenoid with the same number as the valve.
Table A.6-2 Pinch and Angar
Valve Location References

A.6-8
GENS
System
VL3
A.7-5
VL4A
A.7-3
VL4B
A.7-7
Figure Reference
Figure Reference
Figure Reference
Valve

Valve
GENS
System
LH 750
System
Valve
GENS
System
LH 750
System
VL46B
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL86
A.7-4
A.8-4
A.8-3
VL47A
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL88
A.7-9
A.8-9
A.8-7
VL47B
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL89
A.7-9
A.8-9
A.7-5
VL93A
A.7-9
VL93B
A.7-9
VL94A
A.7-9
A.8-9
LH 750
System
VL4C
A.7-7
A.8-7
VL48A
VL6
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL48B
A.7-10
VL7
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL49A
A.7-5
VL8
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL49B
A.7-5
VL94B
A.7-9
A.8-9
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL95A
A.7-9
N/A
A.8-5
VL9A
A.7-8
A.8-8
VL50A
VL9B
A.7-8
A.8-8
VL50B
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL95B
A.7-9
N/A
VL10
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL51
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL95/98
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL11A
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL52
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL97A
A.7-5
N/A
A.8-5
VL97B
A.7-9
A.8-9
VL11B
A.7-4
A.8-4
VL53A
VL12A
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL53B
N/A
A.8-5
VL98
A.7-1
A.8-9
VL12B
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL53D
N/A
A.8-6
VL99
A.7-9
A.8-9
VL12C
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL54
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL100
A.7-11
A.8-11
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL101
A.7-11
A.8-11
VL12D
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL55
VL12E
A.7-6
A.8-6
VL56
A.7-9
A.8-9
VL102
A.7-11
A.8-11
VL12F
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL57A
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL103
A.7-11
A.8-11
VL13
A.7-8
A.8-8
VL57B
A.7-5
VL104
A.7-11
A.8-11
A.7-8
A.8-8
VL105
A.7-11
A.8-11
A.8-9
VL106
A.7-11
A.8-11
VL107A
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL14A
A.7-6
A.8-6
VL57C
VL14B
A.7-4
A.8-4
VL58A
A.7-9
VL16A
A.7-3
A.8-3
VL58B
A.7-9
VL16B
A.7-4
A.8-4
VL59
A.7-9
A.8-9
VL107B
A.7-1
A.8-1
N/A
A.8-2
VL108
A.7-5
A.8-5
A.8-9
VL111
A.7-8
A.8-8
VL112
A.7-12
N/A
VL17
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL61
VL25
A.7-8
A.8-8
VL62A
A.7-9
VL26
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL62B
A.7-9
VL33
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL64
A.7-9
A.8-9
VL113
A.7-11
N/A
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL129
N/A
A.8-9
VL39
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL65
VL40
A.7-1
A.8-1
VL67A
A.7-3
A.8-3
VLBCR
A.8-3
VL41
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL67B
N/A
A.8-5
VLRLF
A.8-6
VL44
A.7-9
A.8-9
VL76
A.7-9
A.8-9
A.7-5
A.7-9
VL45
A.7-10
A.8-10
VL80A
VL46A
A.7-5
A.8-5
VL80B
A.8-9
PN 4277219B

Main Diluter Fluidic Components

With the exception of the solenoids, pinch valves and Angar valves, the main fluidic
components in the Diluter are described in Table A.6-3. Table A.6-3 also includes the
reference designator for the component, where applicable, and a figure reference for locating
the component.
Table A.6-3 Diluter Components
Figure Reference
Reference
Designator Component
Functions
GENS
System
LH 750
System
Aspirator tip
Input pathway for sample aspiration in Manual mode.
A.7-8
A.8-8
Cleaning truck
Cleans the outside of the aspirator trip between each

sample.
A.7-8
A.8-8
Diff heater
Heats diff lytic reagent.
A.7-9
A.8-9
Needle assembly
Input pathway for sample aspiration in the Automatic

mode.
A.7-8
A.8-8
Probe-Wipe module
Cleans the outside of the aspirator tip in the Manual

mode.
A.7-8
A.8-8
Solenoid Interconnect
module
Provides a splash shielded connection point for the

solenoids mounted on MF16 and MF17.
A.7-5
A.8-5
Sweep-flow tank
Regulates diluent delivery through the sweep flow lines

behind the RBC apertures.
A.7-4
A.8-4
BD1
Front blood detector
In the Automatic mode, monitors the fluid in the

aspiration line entering the BSV.
A.7-8
A.8-8
BD2
Rear blood detector
In the Automatic mode, monitors the fluid in the

aspiration line leaving the BSV.
A.7-8
A.8-8
BSV
Blood sampling valve
Isolates blood for the RBC/Plt and WBC/Hgb dilutions,

and routes the blood samples, diluent and rinse to the
RBC and WBC bath.
A.7-8
A.8-8
CL1
BSV cylinder
Rotates the front section of the BSV to align the paths for A.7-8
the aspiration mode selected, Automatic or Manual.
A.8-8
CL11
Backwash cup cylinder
Moves the backwash cup up to the aspirator tip during

the backwash.
A.7-8
A.8-8
CL2
BSV cylinder
Rotates the center section of the BSV to isolate the

A.7-8
portions of the blood sample needed for blood dilutions.
A.8-8
CL3
Bellows cylinder
Expands and retracts the bellows to cover and uncover

the piercing needle.
A.7-3,
A.7-8
A.8-3,
A.8-8
CL6
Tube-ram cylinder
Pushes the specimen tube out of the cassette and onto

the piercing needle.
A.7-3,
A.7-4
A.8-3,
A.8-4
CL7
Bar-code scanner cylinder
Moves the bar-code scanner over the tube and cassette

labels.
A.7-3,
A.7-4
A.8-3
A.8-4
CVL85/126
Diff sample valve
Isolates blood for the diff dilution, and routes the blood
sample to the mixing chamber (VC25).
N/A
A.8-9
PN 4277219B
A.6-9

Table A.6-3 Diluter Components (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference
Functions
GENS
System
LH 750
System
CVL87/127
Retic sample valve
Isolates blood for the initial (stained) retic dilution, and

routes the blood sample to the stain chamber (VC24)
N/A
A.8-9
CVL93/128
Stained retic sample valve
Isolates stained blood for the final retic dilution, and

routes the blood sample to the retic chamber (VC17)
N/A
A.8-9
MF1
Reagent reservoir manifold Stores reagents in reservoirs.
A.7-11
A.8-11
MF10
Contains solenoids SL85, SL86, SL87, and SL125

(GENS System) or SL127 (LH 750 System).
A.7-4
A.8-4
MF11
Contains solenoids SL3, SL31, SL45, SL46, SL47, SL49,

SL51, SL54, SL55, and SL57.
A.7-6
A.8-6
MF12
Contains solenoid SL53
A.7-6
A.8-6
MF13
Contains solenoids SL23, SL26, SL27, SL28, SL29,

SL30, SL34, SL36, SL37, SL64, SL88, SL111, SL112,
and SL113.
A.7-7
A.8-7
MF16
Contains solenoids SL44, SL56, SL59, SL76, SL80,

SL89, SL93, SL97, SL98, and SL99.
A.7-9
A.8-9
MF17
Contains solenoids SL41, SL50, SL52, and SL65.
A.7-10
A.8-10
MF18
Contains solenoids SL58, SL62, SL94, and SL95.
A.7-9
A.8-9
MF2
System flush/cleaning
agent input manifold
Determines the input source for the system

flush/cleaning agent input manifold.
A.7-12
N/A
MF3
Reagent solenoid manifold
Distributes vacuum to solenoids used to refill reagent

reservoirs. Contains solenoids SL100 through SL106.
A.7-11
A.8-11
MF4
Backwash manifold
Delivers pressurized diluent or cleaning agent to rinse

the aspiration pathways, and the diff mixing, stain and
retic chambers. Contains solenoids SL1, SL2, SL42,
SL68, SL69, SL75, SL96, and SL110.
A.7-7
A.8-7
MF5
System flush/cleaning
agent output manifold
Routes cleaning agent or flush solution to VL14B for

routing to the diluent/cleaning agent chamber for
distribution in the Diluter.
A.7-12
N/A

SL17, SL48, SL67, and SL108.
A.7-4
A.8-4
Distributes 5 psi.
A.7-4
A.8-4
MF8
Contains solenoids SL19 and SL20.
A.7-4
A.8-4
MF9

SL40, SL43, SL82, and SL107.
A.7-2
A.8-2
MF6
MF7
5-psi manifold
PLB1
Peltier module
Heats or cools retic clearing solution.
A.7-2
A.8-2
PM1
Diff preservative pump
Dual-volume pump that dispenses diff preservative to

the mixing chamber.
A.7-5
A.8-5
A.6-10
PN 4277219B


Figure Reference
Reference
Functions
GENS
System
LH 750
System
PM10
Cleaning agent pump
Delivers cleaning agent to flow cell during flow cell

cleaning functions.
A.7-5
A.8-5
PM11
Blood/stain aspiration
pump
Pulls the stained sample from the stain chamber through

a cross fitting that is used to isolate the stained sample
for the final dilution for retic analysis.
A.7-9
A.8-9
PM2
Dispenses diluent to RBC bath for RBC dilution and to

the WBC bath to rinse bath.
A.7-1
A.8-1
PM3
Dispenses diluent to WBC bath for the WBC dilution and

to the RBC bath to rinse bath.
A.7-1
A.8-1
PM4
Diff lytic reagent pump
Dual-volume pump that dispenses diff lytic reagent

through the diff heater and the diff blood sample
segment to the mixing chamber.
A.7-1
A.8-1
PM5
Stain pump
Delivers stain and retic blood sample to stain chamber.
A.7-9
A.8-9
PM6

pump
Delivers retic clearing solution through Peltier module to

retic chamber.
A.7-1
A.8-1
PM7
CBC lytic reagent pump
Delivers CBC lytic reagent to WBC bath to lyse RBCs and

react with the hemoglobin.
A.7-5
A.8-5
PM9
Aspiration pump
Dual-volume pump that aspirates blood in both

aspiration modes.
A.7-8
A.8-8
QD1
Quick disconnect 1
A.7-4
A.8-4
QD2
Quick disconnect 2
A.7-6
A.8-6
QD4
Quick disconnect 4
A.7-7
A.8-7
QD5
Quick disconnect 5
A.7-7
A.8-7
QD6
Quick disconnect 6
A.7-4
A.8-4
QD7
Quick disconnect 7
A.7-9
QD8
Quick disconnect 8
A.7-9
QD9
Quick disconnect 9
A.7-10
A.8-10
RG2
Vacuum (low) regulator
Regulates the low (6 in. Hg) vacuum used to pull the

dilutions through the RBC and WBC apertures.
A.7-6
A.8-6
RG3
Diff sample pressure

regulator
Regulates pressure for diff sample flow through the flow

cell.
A.7-6
A.8-6
RG4
Sheath pressure regulator
Regulates pressure for sheath fluid.
A.7-6
A.8-6
RG5
Bar-code scanner cylinder

pressure regulator
Regulates pressure flow to bar-code reader cylinder

controlling speed of bar-code reader movement.
A.7-3
A.8-3
RG6
Retic sample pressure

regulator
Regulates pressure for retic sample flow through the

flow cell.
A.7-6
A.8-6
PN 4277219B
A.6-11


Figure Reference
Reference
Functions
GENS
System
LH 750
System
VC1
Vacuum isolator chamber
Distributes low vacuum (6 in. Hg) to pull dilution

through the apertures in both baths, high vacuum to
scavenge the sweep flow lines to the RBC bath, and
pressure (5 psi) to clear the WBC and RBC apertures.
A.7-3
N/A
VC10
Bath overflow chamber
Collects any liquid that overflows from the WBC or RBC

baths.
A.7-3
A.8-3
VC11
Waste chamber
Collects waste from the Diluter.
A.7-3
A.8-3
VC12
Sheath flow restrictor
During sample analysis, restricts the upper sheath flow

and directs it into flow cell port 3. This flow moves cells
away as they exit the aperture, preventing them from
swirling back into the sensing area.
A.7-5
A.8-5
VC13
Diff waste chamber
Collects waste from the aspiration station and mixing

chamber.
A.7-6
A.8-6
VC14
Foam trap (waste

chamber)
Collects any foam or liquid overflow from the waste

chamber.
A.7-5
A.8-5
VC15
Sheath tank
Provides pressurized diluent for sheath flow through the

flow cell.
A.7-5
A.8-5
VC16
Vacuum chamber
Distributes vacuum within the Diluter.
A.7-6
A.8-6
VC17
Retic chamber
Mixing chamber for incubating retic clearing solution

with stained blood sample for retic analysis.
A.7-9
A.8-9
VC18
Flow cell
Houses and provides path to VCS aperture.
A.7-7
A.8-7
VC19
Needle vent chamber
Collects any blood aspirated into the needle vent line and
the diluent or cleaning agent used to clean the needle.
A.7-8
A.8-8
VC1-R
RBC vacuum isolator

chamber

through the apertures in the RBC bath, high vacuum to
scavenge the sweep- flow lines, and pressure (5 psi) to
clear the RBC apertures.
A.7-3
A.8-3
VC1-W
WBC vacuum isolator

chamber

through the apertures in the WBC bath and pressure (5
psi) to clear the WBC apertures.
A.7-3
A.8-3
VC2
RBC bath
Holds RBC dilution for mixing and for collection data of

RBCs and Plts.
A.7-3
A.8-3
VC21
Vacuum trap
Traps any liquid in the vacuum lines, preventing the

liquid from traveling back to the pump in the Power
Supply.
A.7-2
A.8-2
VC22
Vacuum overflow tank
Distributes vacuum in the Diluter and traps any liquid

overflow into the vacuum lines.
A.7-1
A.8-1
VC23
Backwash tank
Distributes pressurized diluent or cleaning agent to the

A.7-1
backwash manifold and diluent to the Hgb cuvette for the
Hgb-blank reading.
A.8-1
A.6-12
PN 4277219B


Figure Reference
Reference
Functions
GENS
System
LH 750
System
VC24
Stain chamber
Mixing chamber for incubating retic blood sample and

retic stain.
A.7-9
A.8-9
VC25
Mixing chamber, diff
Chamber for mixing and incubating blood and reagents

for diff analysis.
A.7-10
A.8-10
VC26
Waste chamber
Collects waste from the flow cell.
A.7-6
A.8-6
VC27
Vacuum chamber
Distributes vents and vacuum to the needle-vent

chamber, VC19.
A.7-2
A.8-2
VC28
chamber
Distributes diluent (startup and sample cycles) or

cleaning agent (shutdown cycle) to the diluent
dispensers and the backwash tank.
A.7-4
A.8-4
VC29
Traps bubbles and distributes diluent to the sweep-flow

tank.
A.7-4
A.8-4
VC3
WBC bath
Holds WBC dilution for mixing and for collection data of

WBCs.
A.7-3
A.8-3
VC30
Foam trap (blood/stain

aspiration pump)
Collects waste from the blood/stain aspiration pump,

PM11, and dispenses it to waste.
A.7-6
N/A
VC31
Foam trap (reagent

reservoirs)
Collects any foam or liquid pulled into the vacuum

supply line to the reagent reservoirs, isolating the liquid
from the vacuum system.
A.7-11
A.8-11
VC32
manifold
Routes diluent and cleaning agent in the Diluter.
A.7-4
A.8-4
VC37
Foam trap (backwash tank) Collects any foam or liquid in lines between SL5 and the
backwash tank VC23.
A.7-2
A.8-2
PN 4277219B
A.6-13

A.6-14
PN 4277219B

GENS SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS
A.7

Use the illustrations in this section to identify the fluidic components on the GENS Systems
Diluter panels and modules. For the functions of these components, refer to Heading A.6.
Figure A.7-1 GENS System Diluter - Left Front Panel
VL7
SL63
VL107A
VL33
PM4
VL8
VC23
PM2
VL107B
PM3
PM2
PM3
Style used on Analytical

Stations that bypass the
diluent reservoir.
VL40
VL39
VC22
SL25
VL98
VL26
PM6
6498097A
Note: On newer GENS Systems VL98 is labeled VL95/98. It is activated by

SL98 on the GENS System, and by SL95 on the LH 750 System.
Figure A.7-2 GENS System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel
MF9
VC37
VC21
SL5
VC27
SL107
SL7
SL8
SL82
SL43
SL61
SL39
SL40
SL10
6498011A
PN 4277219B
PLB1
SL11
A.7-1

Figure A.7-3 GENS System Diluter - Center Front Panel

V L 1 1 A
V L 6 7 A
V C 1
V L 1 2 D
V L 1 0
V L 1 6 A
C L 6
V L 1 2 F
V C I-R
C L 7
V L 1 2 C
V C I-W
C o n fig u r a tio n o n A n a ly tic a l

S ta tio n s th a t b y p a s s th e
d ilu e n t r e s e r v io r .
V L 6
V L 5 7 A
V C 2
V C 3
V C 1 1
R G 5
a n d g a u g e
V C 1 0
C L 3
V L 1 2 A
V L 4 A
V L 1 2 B
6 4 9 8 0 9 0 A
Figure A.7-4 GENS System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel

VL14B
SL14 VC28
CL6
CL7
VC32
SL33
Configuration on Analytical Stations

that bypass the diluent reservoir.
MF8
MF7
VC29
SL19
VL11B
SL20
SL125
SL86
MF10
VL86
with level sensor
SL16
SL67
SL6
SL12
SL4
SL13
SL15
SL17
SL108
SL48
VL11B
SL14
VL14B
VC28
SL18
A.7-2
MF16 VL16B
VC29 Sweep-Flow
Tank
QD6
QD1
6498087B
PN 4277219B

Figure A.7-5 GENS System Diluter - Right Front Panel

V L 4 9 A
V L 5 1
V L 8 0 A
V L 9 7 A
V L 5 4
V L 5 5
V L 4 6 A
V C 1 2
S L 6 0
P M 1
R G 2 k n o b
V L 5 7 B
V L 4 7 B
P M 7
V L 1 7
V L 3
P M 1 0
V C 1 5
V L 4 7 A
V L 4 9 B
V C 1 4
V L 1 0 8
V L 4 8 A
S o le n o id
In te rc o n n e c t
m o d u le
6498001A
Figure A.7-6 GENS System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel
VL12E
SL53 (MF12)
RG2
MF11
VC26
SL55
SL54
SL51
SL49
SL57
VL14A
SL31
SL3
VC30
SL47
VC13
SL45
SL46
RG4
PN 4277219B
RG3
RG6
QD2
VC16
2826002(2)
6498008A
A.7-3

Figure A.7-7 GENS System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview
A Sampling Station,
Figure A.7-8
VL4B VL4C
SL69
SL68
SL2
SL1
B Retic module,
Figure A.7-9
SL96
SL75
SL42
SL110
MF4
QD4
SL22
QD5
C Diff module,
Figure A.7-10
VC18
MF13
SL30
SL23
SL37
SL27
SL34
SL88
SL64
SL112
SL113
SL36
SL111
SL29
SL28
SL26
46
TTM
SL21
6498004A
Figure A.7-8 GENS System Diluter - Sampling Station

VL57C
VC19
VL25
Needle
assembly
CL3
BD2
BD1
Probe Wipe
module
BSV
VL111
VL13
CL1
CL2
SL9 VL9B
VL9A
PM9
SL24
Aspirator tip
CL11

(For details refer to the
Slide Making Modules Service Manual)
A.7-4
Cleaning
truck
BSV and Probe-Wipe modules
6498005B
PN 4277219B

Figure A.7-9 GENS System Diluter - Retic Module
VC17
MF16
MF18
VC24
VL44
QD8
SL98 SL56
SL44 SL76
QD7
SL93 SL99
SL97 SL80
SL59 SL89
VL89
PM11,
VL95A
SL92
VL93B
VL95B
VL94A
VL56
VL64
BD2
VL62B
VL58B
SL94
SL95
SL58
SL62
VL76
VL93A
PM5
VL99
(Behind
STAIN PUMP)
VL62A
BD1
VL80B
VL59
VL58A
VL88
VL94B
VL97B
Diff heater
6498007B
Figure A.7-10 GENS System Diluter - Diff Module
SL52
SL50
SL41
MF17
SL65
VL50A
VL65
VL45
VL46B
VL41
VL50B
VC25
QD9
VL52
VL48B
6498006A
PN 4277219B
A.7-5

Figure A.7-11 GENS System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door

VL105
VL104
VL103
VL102
VL106
VL101
VL100
MF1
VL113
MF1
SL106
SL105
SL104
SL103
SL102
SL101
SL100
VC31
SL106
SL105
SL104
SL103
SL102
SL101
MF3
SL100
New style
MF3
Old style
6498013A
VL113
Note: VL113 is not present on Analytical Stations that are configured to bypass the diluent reservoir.
Figure A.7-12 GENS System Diluter- Right Rear Door
MF2
VL112
MF5
6498012A
Note: MF2, MF5 and VL112 are not present on Analytical

Stations that are configured to bypass the diluent reservoir.
A.7-6
PN 4277219B

LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS
A.8

Use the illustrations in this section to identify the fluidic components on the LH750 Systems
Diluter panels and modules. For the functions of these components, refer to Heading A.6.
Figure A.8-1 LH 750 System Diluter - Left Front Panel
V L 7
S L 6 3
V L 1 0 7 A
V L 3 3
P M 4
V L 8
V C 2 3
P M 2
V L 1 0 7 B
P M 3
V L 4 0
V L 3 9
V C 2 2
S L 2 5
V L 9 5 /9 8
V L 2 6
P M 6
6 4 9 8 1 0 3 B
Figure A.8-2 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel

SL61
SL33
MF9
VC21
SL5
SL107
VC37
VC27
SL7
SL8
SL82
VL61
SL43
SL39
SL40
SL10
6498102B
PN 4277219B
PLB1
SL11
A.8-1

Figure A.8-3 LH 750 System Diluter - Center Front Panel

V L 1 1 A
V C 1 -R
V C 1 -W
V L 1 2 D
V L 1 0
V L 1 6 A
C L 6
V L 1 2 F
V L B C R
C L 7
V L 1 2 C
V L 6
V L 5 7 A
V C 2
V C 3
V C 1 1
R G 5
a n d g a u g e
C L 3
V C 1 0
V L 1 2 A
V L 4 A
V L 1 2 B
6498106B
Figure A.8-4 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel

SL15
SL87 SL85 SL86 SL127 SL17
SL4
SL6
SL48
SL13 SL12 SL16 SL108 SL67 CL6
CL7
MF10
VL16B
MF8
MF6
SL19
SL20
VL11B
SL14
VL14B
MF7
VC28
VC32
SL18
A.8-2
VL86
VC29
Sweep-flow
tank
QD6
QD1
6498107B
PN 4277219B

Figure A.8-5 LH 750 System Diluter - Right Front Panel

V L 4 9 A
V L 5 1
V L 4 7 B
V L 1 7
V L 5 4
V L 5 5
V L 4 6 A
V C 1 2
S L 6 0
V L 6 7 B
P M 1
R G 2 k n o b
V L 5 3 A
P M 7
V L 3
P M 1 0
V C 1 5
V L 4 7 A
V C 1 4
V L 1 0 8
V L 5 3 B
S o le n o id
In te rc o n n e c t
m o d u le
6498104B
Figure A.8-6 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel

M F 1 1
S L 4 6
S L 4 5
S L 4 7
S L 3
S L 3 1
S L 5 7
S L 4 9
S L 5 1
V L 1 2 E
S L 5 3 (M F 1 2 )
R G 2
V L 5 3 D
V L R L F
V L 1 4 A
V C 2 6
S L 5 4
S L 5 5
V C 1 3
6 4 9 8 1 0 5 B
PN 4277219B
R G 4
R G 3
R G 6
Q D 2
V C 1 6
A.8-3

Figure A.8-7 LH 750 System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview
A Sampling Station,
Figure A.8-8
B Random Access
module,
Figure A.8-9
VL4B VL4C
SL96
SL75
SL42
SL110
MF4
SL69
SL68
SL2
SL1
QD4
SL22
C Diff module,
Figure A.8-10
QD5
VC18
MF13
SL30
SL23
SL37
SL27
SL34
SL88
SL64
SL112
SL113
SL36
SL111
SL29
SL28
SL26
46
TTM
SL21
6498110B
Figure A.8-8 LH 750 System Diluter - Sampling Station

VL57C
VC19
VL25
Needle
assembly
CL3
BD2
BD1
Probe Wipe
module
BSV
VL111
VL13
CL1
CL2
SL9 VL9B
VL9A
PM9
SL24
Aspirator tip
CL11

(For details refer to the
Slide Making Modules Service Manual)
A.8-4
Cleaning
truck
BSV and Probe-Wipe modules
6498005B
PN 4277219B

Figure A.8-9 LH 750 System Diluter - Random Access Module
SL44
SL76
SL98
SL56
VC17
VL94B
Right side
underneath
CVL93/128
MF16
SL99
SL93
VL44
VC24
SL80
VL129
SL97
VL94A
SL89
VL89
SL59
SL58
SL62
SL92
SL129
PM11 (SL92)
VL58 (behind PM5)
VL88
PM5
MF18
BD1
SL95
SL126
SL127
SL128
VL99
VL56
VL59
VL80
VL97B
VL76
VL98
CVL87/127
VL62
VL64 CVL85/126 Diff heater
BD2
6498108B
Figure A.8-10 LH 750 System Diluter - Diff Module
SL52
SL50
SL41
MF17
SL65
VL50A
VL65
VL45
VL46B
VL41
VL50B
VC25
QD9
VL52
VL48B
6498006A
PN 4277219B
A.8-5

Figure A.8-11 LH 750 System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door

VL105
VL104
VL103
VL106
VL102
VL101
VL100
MF1
VC31
SL106
SL105
SL104
SL103
SL102
SL101
MF3
SL100
A.8-6
6498109B
PN 4277219B

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS
A.9
When installing a GENS System or an LH 750 System, always verify that the Analytical
Station software and Workstation software combination are a released configuration.
Table A.9-1 lists the current released configurations for the GENS System, Table A.9-2 for
the LH 750 System.
Table A.9-1 Worldwide Released Configurations for the GENS System*
Analytical Station Software
Configuration
Analyzer (CRT) Display Diluter (LCD) Display
Workstation Software
2C AS/2C1 WS
2C
2C
2C1
2C AS/3A WS
2C
2C
3A
4A AS/4A1 WS
4A/GENS
4A
4A1
* Refer to the appropriate service memo for software configurations released after 4A1.
Table A.9-2 Worldwide Released Configurations for the LH 750 System*

Analytical Station Software
Configuration
Analyzer (CRT) Display Diluter (LCD) Display
Workstation Software
1A AS/1A WS
1A AS/1A WS
1A AS/1A WS
1A AS/1A WS
* Refer to the appropriate service memo for software configurations released after 1A.
PN 4277219B
1.
To display the Analytical Station software versions, press the Analyzer reset button and
observe the displays on the Analyzer (CRT) and the Diluter/numeric keypad (LCD).
2.
To display the Workstation software version, select Help tt About from any customer
application except Run Configuration.
3.
If the combination is not released, install a currently released software combination.
A.9-1

A.9-2
PN 4277219B

MENU TREES
A.10 MENU TREES

Figure A.10-1 GENS System Analyzer Menu Summary
1.
1.
2.
3.
6.
7.
8.
CALIBRATION
ANALYZER
FUNCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
MAIN
MENU
HGB READINGS (BLANK

& SAMPLE VOLTAGES)
START UP
TESTS
HGB LAMP ADJUST

TRANSMIT TO PC
DATE AND TIME
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
1.
2.
6.
7.
8.
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FACTORS

MANUAL CALIBRATION FACTORS
RECEIVE AVERAGE CALIBRATION FACTORS
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
6.
7.
8.
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
1.
2.
3.
6.
7.
8.
RAMP TEST
PRECISION TEST
BACKGROUND TEST
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
ALARM SETUP
2.
2.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2.
NUMBER OF
BAR CODE
DIGITS (2 OF 5) 3 - 11
3.
3.
BLOOD DETECTOR:
OFF/ON
6.
7.
8.
4.
FLOW CELL ERRORS AUTO STOP

OFF/ON
7.
SYSTEM RUN
ELECTRONIC
TESTS
2.
HISTOGRAM
STATISTICS
RAMP TEST 0
PRECISION TEST 1
PRECISION TEST 2
PRECISION TEST 3
PRECISION TEST 4
COUNT
RETURN
COUNT MEAN SIGMA MODE
8.
CBC ONLY
MODE
FORMAT
MM/DD/YY(US)/DD/MM/YY(EUROPEAN)/
YY/MM/DD(JAPANESE)
SET DATE & TIME
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
1.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
MONTH
DAY
YEAR
HOURS
MINUTES
SECONDS
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
RETURN
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
LATEX
CALIBRATION
5.
6.
7.
8.
CHANGE VALUES
AP CUR ON/OFF
APERTURE 1/2/3
ASPIRATE SAMPLE
RETURN
DIFF CALIBRATION
OTHER THAN
CBC ONLY
MODE
DILUTER SWITCH PANEL ALARM:

ENABLED/DISABLED
LONG ALARM:
ENABLED/DISABLED
CONTINUOUS ALARM:
ENABLED/DISABLED
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ASPIRATE
RECOUNT
VCS
V/C/S
PHASE ADJ
LS DRIFT
D/R/S
QUIT
SERVICE
MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
CRT DISPLAY TEST

RAM TEST
ROM TEST
ECHO TEST
SENSOR TEST
DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES
7. SERVICE MENU
8. RETURN
8.
3.
TEST MODE
5.
TURN PNEUMATICS OFF
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
CBC/DIFF/RETIC
CBC/DIFF
CBC ONLY
CBC/RETIC
RETIC ONLY
SYSTEM RUN
8.
PN 4277219B
PRESS KEY #7 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SERVICE MENU
SYSTEM
RUN
6.
7.
8.
COMPUTE
ASPIRATE SAMPLE
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
AP CUR ON
AP CUR OFF
REPEAT CALIBRATION
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
BED BACKWARD
BED FORWARD
BED HORIZONTAL
0
0
1
WASTE LEVEL FULL

DILUENT LEVEL FULL
CLEANER LEVEL FULL
0
1
1
SCANNER POSITION
TUBE DETECTED
STRIPPER PLATE
1
0
1
DIFF LYSE FULL

DIFF PRESERVE FULL
CBC LYSE FULL
1
1
1
BELLOWS UP
BELLOWS DOWN
HAND DETECTOR
1
0
0
RETIC STAIN FULL

RETIC CLEAN FULL
SHEATH TANK FULL
1
1
1
PROBE POSITION
PROBE WIPE UP
PROBE WIPE DOWN
0
0
1
BACKWASH TANK FULL 1

OVERFLOW TANK FULL 0
FRONT DOOR
0
RIGHT LIFT UP
LEFT LIFT UP
RIGHT STACK LOAD
0
0
0
TOP RIGHT SAFETY

TOP LEFT SAFETY
UNDER R. STACK
UNDER L. STACK
0
0
RETURN
PRESS KEY #6 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SCOPE MENU
7.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
LATEX CALIBRATION
TEST MODE
ASPIRATIONS/TUBE XX
MAIN
6.
8.
SCOPE
MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
CBC/DIFF
CBC ONLY
DIFF ONLY
F55 TEST (FAST/SLOW)
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
1.
2.
4.
N
F
RETURN
5.
SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS
6.
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS
7.
8.
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
MORE
DIAGNOSTICS
RETURN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

PLATELET NO FIT (MEAN)
DIAGNOSTICS DUMP
7.
SYSTEM RUN
CRT KEY TEST
CRT ALIGNMENT TEST
SERVICE MENU
8.
RETURN
RETURN
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
RAM/ROM TEST
PLT FIT ANALYSIS
PLT NOFIT ANALYSIS (MODE)
HGB VOLTAGE
RETURN
1.
7.
8.
VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES
RETURN
1.
SERVICE MENU
7.
RETURN
0
0
1.
2.

DIFF TIMER TEST
3.
4.
7.
8.

SERVICE MENU
RETURN
DUMP APERTURES
I/O BUFFER
MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX (in minutes)
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
1.
7.
8.
ZAP
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
7 2 1 9 0 4 4 B
A.10-1

MENU TREES
Figure A.10-2 LH 750 System Analyzer Menu Summary
I
I
CALIBRATION
ANALYZER
FUNCTIONS
II
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FACTORS

MANUAL CALIBRATION FACTORS
RECEIVE AVERAGE CALIBRATION FACTORS
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
VI
VII
VIII
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
HGB READINGS (BLANK

& SAMPLE VOLTAGES)
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
MAIN
MENU
I
II
III
VI
VII
VIII
I
II
III
VI
VII
VIII
START UP
TESTS
HGB LAMP ADJUST

TRANSMIT TO PC
DATE & TIME
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
II
VI
VII
VIII
RAMP TEST
PRECISION TEST
BACKGROUND TEST
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
I
II
II
II
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
NUMBER OF
BAR CODE
DIGITS (2 OF 5) 3 - 11
III
BLOOD DETECTOR:
OFF/ON
IV
FLOW CELL ERRORS AUTO STOP

OFF/ON
V
VII
VIII
III
VI
VII
VIII
ELECTRONIC
TESTS
II
HISTOGRAM
STATISTICS
III
FORMAT
MM/DD/YY(US)/DD/MM/YY(EUROPEAN)/
YY/MM/DD(JAPANESE)
SET DATE & TIME
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
ALARM SETUP
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
RAMP TEST
PRECISION TEST
COUNT
RETURN
I
III
VI
VIII
COUNT MEAN SIGMA MODE
III
IV
V
VIII
CBC LATEX
CALIBRATION
MONTH
DAY
YEAR
HOURS
MINUTES
SECONDS
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
DILUTER SWITCH PANEL ALARM:

ENABLED/DISABLED
LONG ALARM:
ENABLED/DISABLED
CONTINUOUS ALARM:
ENABLED/DISABLED
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
CRT DISPLAY TEST

RAM TEST
ROM TEST
ECHO TEST
SENSOR TEST
I
II
III
IV
V
SERVICE
MENU
VI
VIII
IV
CALIBRATION FACTORS REG/CLA

SYSTEM RUN
VI
RETURN
VI
VII
TURN PNEUMATICS OFF
PRESS KEY #6 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SCOPE MENU
PRESS KEY #7 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SERVICE MENU
SCOPE
MENU
I
II
III
IV
VII
VIII
CBC/DIFF
CBC ONLY
DIFF ONLY
F55 TEST (FAST/SLOW)
SYSTEM RUN
RETURN
I
II
IV
MORE
DIAGNOSTICS
VIII
SYSTEM
RUN
VII
VIII
SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS
VI
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS
VII
DIFF CALIBRATION
N
F
RETURN
0
0
1
WASTE LEVEL FULL

DILUENT LEVEL FULL
CLEANER LEVEL FULL
0
1
1
SCANNER POSITION
TUBE DETECTED
STRIPPER PLATE
1
0
1
DIFF LYSE FULL

DIFF PRESERVE FULL
CBC LYSE FULL
1
1
1
BELLOWS UP
BELLOWS DOWN
HAND DETECTOR
1
0
0
RETIC STAIN FULL

RETIC CLEAN FULL
SHEATH TANK FULL
1
1
1
PROBE POSITION
PROBE WIPE UP
PROBE WIPE DOWN
0
0
1
BACKWASH TANK FULL 1

OVERFLOW TANK FULL 0
FRONT DOOR
0
RIGHT LIFT UP
LEFT LIFT UP
RIGHT STACK LOAD
0
0
0
TOP RIGHT SAFETY

TOP LEFT SAFETY
UNDER R. STACK
UNDER L. STACK
0
0
I
II
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
II
III
IV
V
VII
VIII
RAM/ROM TEST
HGB VOLTAGE
RETURN
VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES
RETURN
VII
VIII
I
II
III
IV
VII
VIII

DIAGNOSTIC DUMP
CRT KEY TEST
VII
SYSTEM RUN
CRT ALIGNMENT TEST
SERVICE MENU
VIII
RETURN
RETURN
VII
VIII
I
0
0

DIFF TIMER TEST
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
I/O BUFFER
MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX (in minutes
CLENZ REMOVAL TIME (hrs)XX
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
ZAP
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
SERVICE MENU
VII
RETURN
RETURN
MODE
ASPIRATIONS/TUBE XX
MAIN
A.10-2
RETURN
I
IV
V
VI
VIII
VIII
SERVICE MENU
RETURN
BED BACKWARD
BED FORWARD
BED HORIZONTAL
DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES
VIII
CHANGE VALUES
AP CUR ON/OFF
APERTURE 1/2/3
RETURN
A.10-2
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
ASPIRATE
RECOUNT
VCS
V/C/S
PHASE ADJ
LS DRIFT
D/R
QUIT
6498112B
PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
ABBREVIATIONS, ABBREVIATIONS-1
GLOSSARY, GLOSSARY-1
PN 4277219B
10-i
10
CONTENTS
10-ii
PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS
The following list is a composite of the abbreviations, acronyms and reference designators used in this
manual. When the same abbreviation (or reference designator) is used for more than one word (or type of
component), all meanings relevant to this manual are included, separated by semicolons.
SYMBOLS
assy - assembly
- approximately
auto - automatic
> - greater than
autocal - automatic calibration
- greater than or equal to
aux - auxiliary
< - less than
avg - average
- less than or equal to

- micron
A - micro amperes
BA - basophils
f - microfarad
BCD (card) - Bar-Code Decoder
f-hd - microfarad head
BCS - bar-code scanner
L - microliter
blk - black
- - minus
BNC (connector) - bayonet Neil-Concelman
# - number
BSV - blood sampling valve
% - percent
Btu - British thermal units
+ - plus
BUBB - bubble
- plus or minus
BVB - backplane voltage bus
A - ampere
C - centigrade; capacitor
abs - absolute (difference)
Cable Adpt (card) - Diluter Cable Adapter
ac - alternating current
CAL - calibration
accum - accumulate
CBC - complete blood count
ACK - acknowledge
cass/pos - cassette/position
A/D - analog to digital
cbl - cable
adpt - adapter
CD - CBC and diff
adj - adjustment
CDD - Coulter Diagnostics Division
AGC - automatic gain control
CDR - CBC, diff and retic
AMC - ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER card
CDRH - National Center for Devices and

Radiological Health
ANA - Analyzer
AP - aperture
API - aperture current
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR (card) - Aperture
Current Signal Generator
CE - clear entry
Ch -channel
CK - choke
CL - cooling coils; cylinder
APS1 (card) - ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1
cm - centimeter
APS2 (card) - ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2
CMOS - complementary metal oxide

semiconductor
ARMS - amps root mean square

PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS-1
ABBREVIATIONS
Comm Intfc (card) - COMMUNICATION

INTERFACE
EDTA - ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
CP - custom part
ELYSE - Erythrolyse
C/P - cassette/position number
EMC - electromagnetic compatability
CPU - central processing unit
EMI - electromagnetic shield
CR - CBC and retic; current regulator

(semi-conductor device)
EO - eosinophils
ehex - external hex
CRT - cathode ray tube
EPROM - erasable programmable read-only

memory
CTRL - control
ESD - electrostatic discharge
CTA - cassette transport assembly
ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
CUR - current
ETX - end of text
CV - coefficient of variation
F
F - Fahrenheit; fast; function; fuse
D - dimensional (2D and 3D DataPlots)
FCC - Federal Communication Commission
DAC - digital to analog converter
FF - feed-through fitting; flip flop
dc - direct current
FIFO - first in, first out
DC - direct current (for VCS technology)
fL - femtoliter
DCN - document control number
FL - air water separator; filter
diam - diameter
fl-hd (screw) - flat head
Diff - difference; differential
FRC - field replaceable component
Diff Proc (card) - Differential Processor
FRU - field replaceable unit
DIFF PROCESSOR (card) - Differential Processor
ft - feet
Dil - Diluter
FT - T-fitting
Dil Proc (card) - DILUTER PROCESSOR
FX - cross fitting
Diluter Cbl Adapter (card) - Diluter Cable Adapter
FY - Y-fitting
Diluter Solenoid Optics PS (card) Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply

DIP switch - dual in-line package switch
G
g - grams
disp - display
GA - gauge
dL - deciliter
GND - ground
DMM - digital multimeter
GR - granulocytes
DNSEN - down sensor (for Probe-Wipe module)

DPR - dual port RAM
DUART - dual universal asynchronous receiver

transmitter
Hct - hematocrit
DVM - digital volt meter
E
2-ABBREVIATIONS
hd - head
Hg - mercury
Hgb - hemoglobin
HI - high
PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS
HRLS -high light scatter reticulocytes
m - meter; middle
hsc-hd (screw) - hex-socket head
mA - milli-amperes
HV - high voltage; high volume
MALS - median light scatter
Hz - Hertz
max - maximum
MCH - mean corpuscular hemoglobin
I
IA - aperture current
MCHC - mean corpuscular hemoglobin

concentration
IBUS - instrument bus
MEM - memory
i.d. - internal diameter
MF - manifold
ID - identification
MHz - megahertz
in. - inches
min - minimum
I/O - input/output
misc - miscellaneous
IRF - immature reticulocyte fraction
mL - milliliter
Ireg Hst. - irregular histogram
mm - millimeter
MN - mean
MO - monocytes
J - receptacle connector
MON - monitor
MPV - mean platelet volume
MSCV - mean spherical cell volume
K - constant; thousand
MSD - most significant digit
L
l - long
L - left; liter; lock
laser - light amplification by stimulated emission of
radiation
Laser PS - Laser Power Supply
LCD - liquid crystal display
LED - light emitting diode
LIS - laboratory information system
LLS - linear light scatter
LO - low
LS - light scatter
LSD - least significant digit
LS Preamp (module) - Light Scatter Preamplifier
LV - low volume
LY - lymphocytes
M
PN 4277219B
msg - message
MUX - multiplexer
mV - millivolts
MV - mean volume
N
N - normal
N/A - not applicable
NAK - not acknowledged
NC (nc) - normally closed
NE - narrow element; neutrophils
NE DC - neutrophil direct current
NE OP - neutrophil opacity
NE RLS -neutrophil rotated light scatter
nm - nanometer
npt - national pipe thread
N.O. - normally open
norm - normal
ABBREVIATIONS-3
ABBREVIATIONS
NOBL - no blood
RAM - random access memory
NRBC - nucleated RBC
RAS - remote access services
NSD - next significant digit
RBC - red blood cell count; red blood cell

RCS - remote communication service
RDW - red cell distribution width
o.d. - outer diameter
RED PRE-AMP (card) - Red (cell) Pre-Amplifier
op amp - operational amplifier

OP - opacity
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP (card) - Red (cell)/White

(cell) Pre-Amplifier
OPT - optics
REF - reference
oz - ounces
REG - regulator
RET - reticulocytes; return
Retic - reticulocytes
P - plug connector
RF - radio frequency
PAL - programmable array logic
RF Preamp (card) - RF Detector Preamp
pan-hd (screw) - panhead
RG - pressure regulator
param - parameter
Rgt Res Intfc (card) - Reservoir Interface
PART - partial (aspiration)
Rgt Res (module) - Reagent Reservoir
PCB - printed circuit board (card)
RIA - red (cell) aperture current
Pct - plateletcrit
RLS - rotated light scatter
PDW - platelet distribution width
RMS - root mean square
PLD - programmable logic device
RMV - red (cell) mean volume
Plt - platelet
ROM - read only memory
Plt Proc (card) - PLATELET PROCESSOR
R/P - red (cell)/platelet
PM - pump
RS/O Intfc (card) - RS/Opto Interface
PN - part number
RV - relief valve
PNEU - pneumatics
R/W Proc (card) - RED (cell)/WHITE (cell)

PROCESSOR
ppm - parts per million

preamp - preamplifier
PS - power supply
psi - pounds per square inch
PVT - pressure, vacuum, temperature
P/W (harness) - probe wipe
PWR - power
Q
QD - quick disconnect
R/W/P SC/A (card) - red (cell)/white (cell)/platelet

signal conditioner/analyzer
S
S - slow
S/A - subassembly
SBUS - System bus
SC/A (card) - signal conditioner/analyzer
SCSI - small computer system interface
SD - standard deviation
shoulder-hd (screw) - shoulder head
R - potentiometer; resistor; right
SID - sample identification
4-ABBREVIATIONS
PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS
SIMM - single in-line memory module
Vls - vent line sensor
SL - solenoid
VL - valve
SLYSE- StabiLyse
volt - voltage
SM - SlideMaker
SOL - solenoid
Sol/Opt PS (card) - Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power

Supply
w - wide
SP - stretched pulse
w/ - with
SPC (card or Display) - System Power Controller
WBC - white blood cell count; white blood cell
ss - stainless steel
WE - wide element
STX - start of text

SUP - supply
WHITE PRE-AMP (card) - White (cell)

Preamplifier
SVP - system verification procedure
WHT (wht) - white
SW - software; switch
WIA - white (cell) aperture current
W - watt
WM - wire marker
WMV - white (cell) mean volume
T - time
w/o - without
TEMP - temperature
thd - thread
thk - thick
xmit - transmit
TP - test point
xrec - cross recess
TTL - transistor-transistor logic
x - times
TTM - Triple Transducer module

TVS - transient voltage suppressor
U
U - integrated circuit package
UNC - unified coarse thread
UNF - unified fine thread
UL - Underwriters Laboratory
UPSEN - up sensor (for Probe Wipe module)
V
V - volts
Vac - volts alternating current
vac - vacuum
VC - vacuum chamber
VCS - volume, conductivity, (light) scatter
Vdc - volts direct current
PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS-5
ABBREVIATIONS
6-ABBREVIATIONS
PN 4277219B
GLOSSARY
Absolute count - Concentration of a cell type expressed as a number per volume of whole
blood.
Accuracy - Ability of the instrument to agree with a predetermined reference (true) value.
Anticoagulant - A substance added to blood to prevent clotting.
Aperture - An opening of a specific size and length through which cells pass for counting and
sizing.
Assay values - Values established for a control by extensive analysis of that material.
Basophil - A mature granulocytic WBC with granules that contain heparin and vasoactive
compounds. The granules stain purple-blue with Wrights stain.
Calibration - The adjustment of an instrument reading or measurement to a known physical
constant.
Calibrator - A substance with values obtained by reference instruments and used to calibrate
instruments.
Carryover - The amount, in percent, of sample remaining in the system and picked up by the
next sample cycled. Low-to-high carryover is the amount of sample with low cell
concentrations carried over to samples with high cell concentrations, such as diluent to
blood. High-to-low carryover is the amount of samples with high cell concentrations carried
over to samples with low cell concentrations, such as blood to diluent.
Coefficient of Variation (CV) - An expression, in percent, of data spread as related to the
mean.
SD
CV% = -------------- 100
Mean
Coincidence correction - Mathematical adjustment of cell count and size for coincidence
error.
Coincidence error - Errors produced in counting and sizing by the presence of more than one
cell within the aperture sensing area at the same time. The system senses these as one large
cell rather than as two distinct cells.
Control (material) - A substance with predetermined values used as a standard to verify
accuracy of instrument results.
Default - Original setting in the instrument.
Differential count - The distribution (in percentage and/or absolute number) of the different
populations of WBCs on a stained blood smear.
Eosinophil - A mature granulocytic WBC that responds to parasitic infections and allergic
conditions. Granules stain a bright reddish orange with Wrights stain.
Erythrocyte (red blood cell) - A biconcave disc, 6 to 8 , that carries oxygen to the tissues in
the body and carries carbon dioxide away from the tissues.
PN 4277219B
GLOSSARY-1
GLOSSARY
Hematocrit - Red cell packed volume. The percentage of packed red cells compared to the
entire blood sample.
Hemoglobin - A protein component of red cells that carries oxygen and carbon dioxide.
Histogram - A graphical display of the cell size distribution of a blood sample, where size is
on the A-axis and frequency is on the Y-axis.
Indices - In hematology, refers to the following calculated values for red cell properties: MCV,
MCH and MCHC.
In vitro - Outside of a living organism, such as in a laboratory or in an artificial container.
In vivo - Inside a living organism, associated with the physiological system.
Linearity - The ability of an instrument to recover expected results at varying levels of
concentration.
Leukocyte (white blood cell) - Cells that defend the body against disease.
Lymphocyte - WBC originating in the lymph system. The key to the bodys immune system,
the lymphocyte recognizes and eliminates foreign pathogens in the body.
Lyse - To break apart or dissolve.
Mean - Arithmetic average of a group of data.
Mean corpuscular hemoglobin (MCH) - The weight of hemoglobin in the average red blood
cell expressed in picograms.
Mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration (MCHC) - The weight of hemoglobin in the
packed red cell volume expressed in g/dL or g/L.
Mean cell volume (MCV) - Average volume of red blood cells expressed in fL.
Mean platelet volume (MPV) - Average volume of platelets expressed in fL.
Micron () - One millionth of a meter.
Mode - The cycle used to run a sample (Aspiration mode) or the tests selected for analysis
(Test mode). Also, the number (or set of numbers) that occur most frequently, for example
the peak on a histogram.
Monocyte - A large, mononuclear, phagocytic WBC found in the peripheral blood and in the
lymphoid system.
Nanometer (nm) - a unit of linear measurement, equal to 10-9 meter.
Neutrophil - A mature granulocytic WBC characterized by a segmented nucleus. The
cytoplasm of this phagocyte stains pinkish to beige with faint granules in Wrights stain.
Nucleated red blood cell (NRBC) - Immature form of the red blood cell characterized by the
presence of a nucleus.
2-GLOSSARY
PN 4277219B
GLOSSARY
Outlier - Control results that fall outside the expected or established range.
Parameter - Component of blood that the instrument measures and reports.
Platelet (thrombocyte) - The cytoplasmic fragments of megakaryocytes, circulating as small
discs in the peripheral blood, and an essential component for blood clotting.
Platelet distribution width (PDW) - An index of the variation in platelet size.
Precision - The ability of the instrument to produce similar results when the same specimen
is run repeatedly. The precision of the instrument is calculated as a CV (or an SD for
differential results). Also called reproducibility.
Quality control - A set of procedures performed to ensure that the instrument results are
accurate and precise.
Range - The difference between the highest and lowest measurement in a series.
Red blood cell (erythrocyte) - A biconcave disc, 6 to 8 , that carries oxygen to the tissues in
the body and carries carbon dioxide away from the tissues.
Red cell indices - In hematology, refers to the following calculated values for red cell
properties: MVC, MCH and MCHC.
Red distribution width (RDW) - An index of the variation in red blood cell size.
Reproducibility - Ability of the instrument to produce similar results when the same
specimen is run repeatedly. The reproducibility is calculated as a CV (or an SD for differential
results). Also called precision.
Reticulocyte (retic) - An immature form of red cell that, in the maturation process, falls
between a nucleated RBC and a mature RBC. As the nucleated RBC matures, the nucleus
shrinks and eventually is shed, and the RNA in the cytoplasm breaks down. The red cell
without a nucleus but still containing remnants of the RNA is a reticulocyte. Mature RBCs
contain no RNA. Stains, such as new methylene blue, precipitate the RNA, differentiating the
reticulocytes from mature RBCs and other cells.
Shift - Consecutive values that abruptly move from one level (mean) to another and then
maintain a constant level.
Standard deviation - A measurement of deviation from the mean.
Threshold settings - The lower and upper size limits set for a particle count to distinguish
between different particles, and between particles and debris or electronic noise.
Thrombocyte (platelet) - The cytoplasmic fragments of megakaryocytes, circulating as small
discs in the peripheral blood, and an essential component for blood clotting.
Trend - Consecutive values that increase or decrease gradually.
White blood cell (leukocyte) - Blood cells that defend the body against disease.
PN 4277219B
GLOSSARY-3
GLOSSARY
4-GLOSSARY
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Numerics
5C cell control
5C Control material used in Retic or SUBSET
modes, 7.2-1
5C Not Allowed In This Mode, 7.2-1
5-diff lyse pump. See diff lytic reagent pump
5 psi
development, 2.9-3
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-25
6-Channel Preamp card. See Six-Channel Preamp
card
+15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12
-15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12
+15 Volts on Diluter 1 card outside limit, 7.2-14
+15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13
30 psi
development, 2.9-2
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
PN 4277219B
part number, 8.1-25

48 Volt bulk or pneumatic Power Supply
defective, 7.2-9
48 Volt power outside 10% limit, 7.2-3
48 volts fault isolation, 7.4-5
60 psi
development, 2.9-2
distribution, 2.9-2
60 PSI pressure high., 7.2-19
60 PSI pressure low, 7.2-19
60 PSI pressure out of range (too high), 7.2-19
60 PSI pressure out of range (too low), 7.2-19
60-psi regulator (RV1)
part number, 8.1-25
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
286 Board Communication Error, 7.2-1
A
A Control Lot number archive file was created, 7.3-1
abbreviations
ac input voltage specifications, table of, A.1-11
AC Line Voltage Bad, 7.2-2
AC line voltage below 90 Volt limit, 7.2-2
ACK Not Received By Diluter, 7.2-2
adjustment procedures
ambient temperature display, 4.65-2
aperture voltage, 4.9-1
bar-code scanner position sensor for laser style
bar-code scanner position sensor for LED style
bar-code scanner, laser style bar-code
reader, 4.51-8
bar-code scanner, LED style bar-code
reader, 4.51-1
bed backward sensor, 4.44-2
bed forward sensor, 4.44-4
bed horizontal sensor, 4.44-3
bellows down sensor, 4.57-2
bellows up sensor, 4.57-2
CBC calibration factors, 4.10-1
cleaning truck, 4.58-5
Clog Detector circuit, 4.74-3
CRT intensity on the GENS System, 4.34-1
INDEX-1
INDEX
CRT intensity on the LH750 System, 4.34-2

Diluter keypad display (contrast), A.3-13
flippers, loading bay, 4.42-1
flippers, unloading bay, 4.42-1
flow-rate (sheath, diff sample and retic sample
regulators), 4.73-1
Hgb lamp voltage, 4.32-2
pressures, 4.72-1
left lift up switch activator, 4.40-3
LS gain, 4.77-1
probe position sensor, 4.60-4
right lift up switch activator, 4.40-3
rocker bed belt tension, 4.36-1
rocker bed position flag, 4.44-1
rocker bed rock rate, 4.45-2
stain pump, 4.24-1
tube detector, 4.47-1
air water separator (FL1)
cleaning, 4.16-1
filter, part number, 8.1-11
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-3
replacement, 4.16-2
alarms, audible
descriptions, 4.5-1
how to turn off, 7.1-1
testing, 4.5-1
Ambient Temp Sensor Bad, 7.2-2
Ambient temperature sensor defective or
disconnected, 7.2-2
AMC
determining Hgb results on the GENS
System, 2.24-4
determining MCV results on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
2-INDEX
determining Plt and MPV results on the GENS

System, 2.24-3
determining RBC counts on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
determining RDW results on the GENS
System, 2.24-3
determining WBC counts on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
function, 2.3-1, 2.11-2
generating Plt histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-3
generating RBC histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
generating WBC histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
jumpers settings, A.2-1
part number, 8.1-22
power up signals simplified schematic, 2.6-5
replacement, 4.6-1
RESET signal block diagram, 2.11-3
switch settings, tables of, A.2-1
AMC Did Not Reply, 7.2-2
AMC Never Sent Start Command, 7.2-2
AMC reported error - ASCII Receive Error, 7.2-3
AMC Reported Error - Diff Transmit Failure., 7.2-13
AMC Reported Error - Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18
AMC Reported Error - PC not ready., 7.2-28
AMC Reported Error - Retic Transmit Failure, 7.2-32
AMC Reported Error - Run Aborted, PC Not
Ready, 7.2-34
AMC Reported Errors -- Operator Alert 09., 7.2-27
AMC Requested Stop, 7.2-2
AMC, Diluter or DIFF Processor hardware
malfunction (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-21
AMC-DIFF communication failure: 286 board, 7.2-1
AMC-DIFF communication failure:
unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40
AMC-DIFF communication failure: wrong
echo., 7.2-41
An archive file with patient samples was created, 7.3-1
ANA. See Analyzer
ANALOG 5 card
function, 2.21-6
inputs, 2.21-7
PN 4277219B
INDEX
outputs, 2.21-7
part number, 8.1-22
See also ANALOG card
analog backplane
function, 2.3-1
of, A.1-11
ANALOG card
function, 2.3-2
replacement, 4.6-1
See also ANALOG 5 card
Analytical Station
alarm, turning off, 7.1-1
audible alarms, description, 4.5-1
connecting to the Workstation on the GENS
System, 3.4-7
connecting to the Workstation on the LH 750
System, 3.15-1
decontaminating, 5.3-2
description, 2.1-2, 2.1-5
extended shutdown and startup
procedures, 5.2-1
main units, 2.1-2, 2.1-5
power down/power up procedure, 4.1-1
Analytical Station messages
"and" condition, 7.1-2
Analyzer
accessing and using the SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1
accessing and using the SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1
backplane voltage test points, A.1-11
function, 2.3-1
installation, GENS System. See installation
procedure, GENS System
installation, LH 750 System. See installation
procedure, LH 750 System
See also Analyzer, GENS System; Analyzer,
LH 750 System
PN 4277219B
Analyzer +48V Bad, 7.2-3

Analyzer Error, 7.2-3
Analyzer fans
function, 2.3-1
replacement, 4.12-3
Analyzer Fans Failed, 7.2-3
Analyzer Fans Power Supply Defective, 7.2-3
Analyzer fans power supply defective, 7.2-3
Analyzer keypad. See CRT buttons; Numeric
keypad
Analyzer memory read/write failure., 7.2-34
ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER card. See AMC
Analyzer non-communication error, 7.2-20
Analyzer power supplies
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1, 2.7-3
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-4
input, 2.7-5
monitors, 2.7-6
outputs, 2.7-5
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
test points, 2.7-6
Zap circuit, description of, 2.7-4
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-6
input, 2.7-7
monitors, 2.7-8
outputs, 2.7-7
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
test points, 2.7-8
Analyzer stopped, 7.2-2
Analyzer, GENS System
INDEX-3
INDEX

See also Analyzer
Analyzer, LH 750 System
component locations, front view, cover
down, 2.3-4
See also Analyzer
sent from AMC, 7.2-39
sent from Diluter., 7.2-39
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure:
unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40
Analyzer-to-Diluter communication failure., 7.2-14
Angar valves
function, A.6-8
part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63
aperture blocks and module, part numbers, 8.1-3
aperture gain matching procedure. See latex voltage
calibration
aperture impedance
red and white isolation with diluent, table of
limits, A.1-3
red and white with diluent, table of limits, A.1-3
red and white without diluent, table of
limits, A.1-3
Aperture Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-3
Aperture voltage reading above limits, 7.2-3
Aperture voltage reading below limits, 7.2-3
Aperture Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-3
Aperture voltage(s) out of range (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-9
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-1, 2.7-3
input, 2.7-2
monitors, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
outputs, 2.7-2
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
4-INDEX

ASCII Rec. Error, 7.2-3
Aspiration -B--, 7.2-4
Aspiration ---C, 7.2-4
aspiration modes
Aspiration N---, 7.2-5
Aspiration --P-, 7.2-5
aspiration pump (PM9)
aspiration state, Automatic mode, 2.17-3
aspiration state, Manual mode, 2.17-3
function, 2.17-1
high (Automatic-mode) adjustments,
high (Automatic-mode) volume check, 4.27-3
low (Manual-mode) adjustments, illustration
of, 4.27-2
low (Manual-mode) volume check, 4.27-1
module, exploded view of, 8.2-48
part number, 8.1-24
of, 2.17-1
replacement, 4.27-6
aspiration station
Aspiration Timeout, 7.2-6
Aspiration timeout, 7.2-6
aspirator tip
function, A.6-9
location, 2.17-17
attention
definition, 1.1-4
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from

Analyzer., 7.3-1
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from GEN
S Workstation., 7.3-1
Automatic Mode Disabled, 7.2-6
Automatic sampling mode disabled., 7.2-6
Auto-Numbering has been disabled., 7.3-1
Auto-Numbering has been enabled auto number is
<Auto-Numbering Start ID>., 7.3-1
Autostop - check Workstation, 7.2-6
AutoStop Check Workstation, 7.2-6
Autostop check Workstation, 7.2-6
Autostop has been triggered for Analytical Station
<Instrument#>, 7.3-1
AutoStop has been triggered for control folder
<lot#>., 7.3-1
AutoStop Requested, 7.2-6
B
BA#
BA%
Background CBC test values within limits, 7.3-1
Background DIFF test values within limits, 7.3-1
Background: <Background test/parameter>
<Background> exceeded <flag> limit, 7.3-1
Background: <Background test/parameter> , 7.3-1
backplane interconnects
function, 2.3-1
backplane voltage bus
function, 2.3-1, 2.5-3
backplane voltage bus distribution
block diagram for the GENS System, 2.5-3
block diagram for the LH 750 System, 2.5-4
backplanes
analog. See analog backplane
CRT. See CRT backplane
digital. See digital backplane
backwash cup
function, 2.17-17
marker, 2.16-7
PN 4277219B
stationary vs moveable, 2.17-17

backwash cylinder (CL11)
backwash manifold (MF4)
function, 2.13-9, 2.17-12
See also manifolds
backwash tank (VC23)
choke, CK15, location, 3.1-5, 3.10-5
function, 2.13-8
monitoring the reagent level of, 2.13-8
Backwash Tank Not Full, 7.2-7
backwash tank sensor
function, 4.81-1
testing, 4.81-1
Backwash Tank Still Full, 7.2-7
Bar code scanner pressure too low or scanner
obstructed (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-35
components locations, A.3-1
for LED style bar-code reader, part
number, 8.1-22
function, 2.4-1
jumper location, A.3-1
jumper setting, A.3-1
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.7-1
bar-code reader
bar-code label specifications, 2.14-5
function, 2.14-3
read-rate specifications, A.1-1
types of bar codes used, 2.14-5
bar-code reader, laser style
description, 2.14-4
bar-code reader, LED style
description, 2.14-3
INDEX-5
INDEX

bar-code scanner
adjustment locations for LED style bar-code
reader, 4.51-6
adjustments, laser style bar-code reader, 4.51-8
adjustments, LED style bar-code reader, 4.51-1
alignment with oscilloscope, 4.54-1
allowable distance from bar-code housing, A.1-1
electrical check for LED style bar-code
reader, 4.52-2
electrical checks, table of test points and
acceptable ranges, A.1-1
function, 2.4-1
location, 2.15-5
park tab length tolerance, A.1-1
position sensor adjustment for laser style
position sensor adjustment for LED style
speed check for LED style bar-code
reader, 4.52-1
stoke timing specifications, A.1-1
location, 4.51-4
bar-code scanner cylinder (CL7)
acceptable pressure, A.1-6
function, 2.15-5
location, 2.15-5
replacement, 4.50-1
stroke specifications, A.1-1
bar-code scanner cylinder pressure regulator (RG5)
part number, 8.1-24
bar-code scanner position sensor
location, 4.53-1
Bar-Code Test screen, illustration, 4.49-1
basophil
See also BA#; BA%; diff parameters
bath overflow chamber (VC10)
BCD card. See Bar-Code Decoder card
BCS. See bar-code scanner
6-INDEX
BD ADJ card
adjustment locations, A.2-3
replacement, 4.6-1
replacement, illustration, 4.6-2
BD1
function, A.6-9
BD2
function, A.6-9
bed backward sensor
adjustment, 4.44-2
function, 4.81-1
location, 2.15-2
testing, 4.81-1
bed forward sensor
adjustment, 4.44-4
function, 4.81-1
location, 2.15-2
testing, 4.81-1
bed horizontal sensor
adjustment, 4.44-3
function, 2.15-2, 4.81-1
location, 2.15-2
testing, 4.81-1
bed locks
description, 2.15-2
function, 2.15-2
location, 2.15-2, 2.15-7
Bed Not Advanced, 7.2-7
Bed Not Backward, 7.2-7
Bed Not Forward, 7.2-7
Bed Not Level, 7.2-8
bed position flag
adjustment, 4.44-1
bed position sensors
location, 2.15-2
See also bed backward sensor; bed forward
sensor; bed horizontal sensor
PN 4277219B
INDEX
bed rock cylinder (CL8)

function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
location, front and rear views, 4.45-1
replacement, 4.45-1
bed rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2
bellows cylinder (CL3)
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12
bellows down sensor
adjusting, 4.57-2
function, 2.17-12, 4.81-2
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1
testing, 4.81-2
bellows interlock
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12
Bellows Not Down, 7.2-8
Bellows not extended, 7.2-8
Bellows Not Up, 7.2-8
bellows up sensor
adjusting, 4.57-2
function, 2.17-11, 4.81-1
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1
testing, 4.81-1
belt advance cylinder (CL9)
function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
belt drive assembly
allowable slack, A.1-1
belt tension adjustment, 4.36-1
location, 2.15-3
part number, 8.1-20
removal, 4.35-1
replacement, 4.35-1
biological hazards
BLD DET ADJ card
function, 2.3-1
location, 2.3-4
block diagrams
distribution, new Diluter
distribution, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-3
PN 4277219B

GENS System, 2.5-3
bar-code reader, laser style, 2.14-4
bar-code reader, LED style, 2.14-3
CBC analysis on the GENS System, 2.18-1
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.18-2
new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
card, 2.8-4
Electronic Power Supply, 2.5-1
Hgb signal flow, 2.18-8
R/W/P SC/A card], 2.7-3
bypass the diluent reservoir, 2.13-7
use the diluent reservoir, 2.13-6
RESET signal, 2.11-3
RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum
tube, 2.21-3
RF Detector Preamp card, solid state, 2.21-3
sample data flow on the LH 750 System from
Specimen Transport system, 2.14-1
System Control overview, 2.11-1
System Power Controller card and System Power
Controller Display, 2.10-1
VCS optimization procedure flow, 4.71-2
VCS Technology system overview, 2.21-1
blood detectors. See bubble/blood detectors
INDEX-7
INDEX
Blood front and rear sensors detected partial

aspiration (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-5
blood sampling valve. See BSV
blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11)
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
part number, 8.1-24
BSV
function, 2.17-5, A.6-9
port descriptions, table of, 2.17-6
port locations, 2.17-6
positions, table of, 2.17-5
replacement, 4.60-1
See also BSV cylinders; BSV module
BSV cylinders (CL1 and CL2)
CL1 replacement, 4.60-3
function, 2.17-5
location, 4.60-2
BSV module
component replacement, 4.60-1
component replacement, illustration of, 4.60-1
part number, 8.1-19
bubble detectors. See bubble/blood detectors
bubble/blood detectors
aspiration messages, table of, 2.17-15
checks and adjustments, 4.55-3, 4.55-7
function, 2.17-13
location, 2.17-13
operation, 2.17-14
part number, 8.1-3
replacement, 4.55-1, 4.55-5
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2
part number, 8.1-22
8-INDEX
replacement, 4.21-1
Bulk Power Supply
48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
input, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2
outputs, 2.5-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.20-1
BVB. See backplane voltage bus
C
C1 adjustment, 4.74-4
Cable Adpt card. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
cables, part numbers, 8.1-4
calibration
CBC. See CBC calibration
VCS. See VCS optimization
Calibration factors received from analyzer
unexpectedly - delete runs & restart., 7.3-2
calibration procedures
CBC. See CBC calibration procedures
VCS. See VCS optimization procedures
Carryover failed, 7.3-2
Carryover passed, 7.3-2
cassette advance wheel
function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
Cassette did not advance to next position., 7.2-35
Cassette Not Lowered Onto Bed, 7.2-9
cassette transport assembly
alignment checks, 4.48-1
component locations, GENS System, 2.4-4
component locations, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
function, 2.4-1, 2.14-2
moving a cassette, 2.15-1
caution
definition, 1.1-3
CBC Analysis system
analyzing the RBC, WBC and Plt data, 2.19-1
applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
PN 4277219B
INDEX
CBC analysis on the GENS System block

diagram, 2.18-1
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System block
diagram, 2.18-2
delivering CBC samples in the Automatic mode,
delivering CBC samples in the Manual mode,
determining the CBC parameters, 2.19-7
determining the Hgb, 2.18-8
function, 2.18-1
making the sample dilutions, 2.18-2
System that bypasses the diluent reservoir,
system that uses the diluent reservoir,
sample processing components on the LH 750
System, illustration, 2.18-4
timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
CBC aperture checks
procedure, 4.70-1
CBC Bath Voltages Out Of Range, 7.2-9
CBC calibration
automatic-mode calibration factor limits, table
of, A.1-3
conditions that require calibration, table
of, 2.25-8
flow-rate test limits, table of, A.1-3
latex voltage test limits, table of, A.1-2
manual-mode calibration factor limits, table
of, A.1-3
mode-to-mode comparison limits, A.1-6
procedures, overview, 2.25-1
tests available from CBC Calibration
window, 2.25-1
voltage matching test limits, table of, A.1-2
when to calibrate, 2.25-8
why calibrate, 2.25-1
See also CBC calibration procedures
CBC calibration procedures
flow rate, 4.10-1
latex voltage, 4.9-1
PN 4277219B
matching Manual mode-to-Automatic

mode, 4.11-1
CBC lytic reagent
and diluent delivery timing check, 4.31-1
conditions affecting delivery timing, table
of, 4.31-4
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.18-2, 2.18-8
CBC lytic reagent and diluent delivery timing check
conditions affecting timing, table of, 4.31-4
equipment hookup for,
illustration, 4.31-2, 4.31-3
scope settings for, 4.31-3
timing specifications, A.1-8
CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7)
function, 2.18-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.22-5
CBC noise checks
limits, A.1-3
CBC parameters
System, 2.24-2
System, 2.24-5
test limits, A.1-5
See also CBC Analysis system
CBC Xmit Failure, 7.2-9
check valves
chokes
part numbers, 8.1-7, 8.2-59
circuit cards
AMC. See AMC
ANALOG. See ANALOG card
ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER. See AMC
POWER SUPPLY 1 card
INDEX-9
INDEX

POWER SUPPLY 2 card
Analyzer, replacement procedure, 4.6-1
Analyzer, table of special replacement
instructions, 4.6-4
API. See API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR. See API-SIGNAL
GENERATOR card
Bar-Code Decoder. See Bar-Code Decoder card
Bar-Code Scanner. See Bar-Code Scanner card
BCD. See Bar-Code Decoder card
BLD DET ADJ. See BLD DET ADJ card.
Bulk Power Filter. See Bulk Power Filter card
Cable Adpt. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
COMM INTERFACE. See COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE card
Comm Intfc. See COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE card
CRT4 Display. See CRT4 Display card
Diff Power Supply. See Diff Power Supply card
Diff Proc. See DIFF PROCESSOR card
DIFF PROCESSOR. See DIFF PROCESSOR card
Diff PS. See Diff Power Supply card
Dil Proc. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card
Diluter Cable Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter
card
Diluter Cbl Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter
card
DILUTER CPU. See DILUTER CPU card
DILUTER PROCESSOR. See DILUTER
PROCESSOR card
Diluter, replacement procedure, 4.7-1
Diluter, table of special replacement
instructions, 4.7-4
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply. See
Keyboard and Display Interface. See Keyboard
and Display Interface card
Laser Reference 4. See Laser Reference 4 card
10-INDEX
Motor Controller. See Motor Controller card

Newbar. See Newbar card
PLATELET PROCESSOR. See PLATELET
PROCESSOR card
Plt Proc. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card
PVT. See PVT card
R/W Proc 2 card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR
card
R/W Proc. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
R/W/P SC/A. See R/W/P SC/A card
SC/A card
Red Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP. See RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2. See RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR 2 card
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR. See RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card
Reg Res Intfc. See Reservoir Interface card
Reservoir Interface. See Reservoir Interface card
RF Detector Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp
card
RF Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp card
RS/O Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
RS/Opto Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
SC/A. See R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer
card
Sensor Distribution. See Sensor Distribution
card
Six-Channel Aperture Preamp. See Six-Channel
Preamp card
Six-Channel Preamp. See Six-Channel Preamp
card
Sol/Opt PS. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card
SPC. See System Power Controller card
System Power Controller. See System Power
Controller card
VCS ANALOG. See VCS ANALOG card
White Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
cards
circuits
Clog Detector. See Clog Detector circuit
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater, 2.12-11
Peltier and Ambient Temperature, 2.12-10
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Stain Chamber Heater, 2.12-10

Zap, 2.7-4
CL1 (Diluter)
function, A.6-9
CL1 (Power Supply)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
CL2
function, A.6-9
CL3
function, A.6-9
See also bellows cylinder
CL4. See left lift cylinder
CL5. See right lift cylinder
CL6
function, A.6-9
See also tube-ram cylinder
CL7
function, A.6-9
See also bar-code scanner cylinder
CL8. See bed rock cylinder
CL9. See belt advance cylinder
CL10. See stripper plate cylinder
CL11
function, 2.17-17, A.6-9
See also backwash cylinder
cleaning agent
GENS System, 3.5-3
LH 750 System, 3.13-3
cleaning agent pump (PM10)
replacement, 4.26-3
PN 4277219B

cleaning procedures
flow cell, 4.79-1
lens block, 4.80-1
System flush, 5.3-2
cleaning truck
adjustment, 4.58-5
cleaning, 4.58-2
function, A.6-9
location, 2.17-17
replacement, 4.58-2
Clog Detector
error generated by, 7.5-1
Clog Detector circuit
adjustment, 4.74-3
function, 2.21-2
threshold voltage limits, A.1-12
coaxial cables, Analyzer
connecting, 3.4-2
coefficient of variation
COMM INTERFACE card. See
Comm Intfc card. See COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE card
Comment for control folder <lot#>, <comment>,
<comment>, 7.3-2
COMMON ROM AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
interconnect, 7.2-2
Communication failure during transmission to
diluter, 7.2-16
function, 2.3-2, 2.11-4
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
role in analyzing Hgb data, 2.18-8
Communications error, 7.2-2, 7.2-3
Compressor +48V Bad, 7.2-9
Compressor Too Hot, 7.2-9
INDEX-11
INDEX
compressor. See compressor/vacuum pump

compressor/vacuum pump
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-8
replacement, 4.14-1
conductivity (RF)
VCS measurement, description, 2.20-1
consumables, part numbers, 8.1-8
Control Folder <Lot #> is expired (<Expiration
Date>), 7.3-2
Control folder <lot#> created, it must be edited in a
system setup for valid flagging., 7.3-2
Control folder for lot number <lot #> created, 7.3-2
Control folder for lot number <lot #> deleted, 7.3-2
Control folder for lot number <lot #>edited, 7.3-2
Control run for control folder <Lot #> out of
range, 7.3-2
Control run outside limits condition has cleared, 7.3-3
block diagram, new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
block diagram, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
Coulter Principle, instrument application
aperture current, 2.18-4
aperture vacuum, 2.18-5
sensing area, 2.18-4
sensing area, illustration, 2.18-5
covers, instrument
removal of. See removal procedures
CRC Error, 7.2-10
CRT backplane
range, A.1-10
function, 2.3-2
part number, 8.1-22
of, A.1-11
CRT buttons
function, 2.3-2
CRT, Analyzer
intensity adjustment on the GENS
System, 4.34-1
intensity adjustment on the LH 750
System, 4.34-2
CRT4 Display card
12-INDEX

function, 2.11-7
CTA. See cassette transport assembly
current, leakage specifications. See leakage current
specifications
CV
CVL43
location, A.8-5
See also diff sample valve
CVL85/126
function, A.6-9
CVL87/127
function, A.6-10
CVL93
function, A.8-5
See also stained retic sample valve
CVL93/128
function, A.6-10
CVL99
location, A.8-5
CVL993
See also retic sample valve
cylinders
bed rock. See bed rock cylinder
bellows. See bellows cylinder
belt advance. See belt advance cylinder
BSV. See BSV cylinders
left lift. See left lift cylinder
part numbers, 8.1-9
right lift. See right lift cylinder
stripper plate. See stripper plate cylinder
tube ram. See tube ram cylinder
D
Daily check precision test failed, 7.3-3
Daily check ramp test failed, 7.3-3
data collection, List mode, 4.33-1
data collection, timing
Plt histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
RBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
WBC and RBC count data, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
WBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
dc power cable
DC. See volume (DC)
PN 4277219B
INDEX
deactivator clips for pinch valves. See pinch valves

decontamination
of the Analytical Station, procedure, 5.3-2
Demographic information updated for <Sample
ID>, 7.3-3
Diagnostic Mode, 7.2-11
Did not detect rocker bed backward position., 7.2-7
Did not detect rocker bed forward position., 7.2-7
Did not detect rocker bed horizontal position., 7.2-8
diff ambient thermistor
function, 2.22-5
location, 2.22-5
acceptable ranges, table of, A.1-4
procedure, 4.4-1
diff chamber mixing motor
replacement, 4.69-1
Diff communication failure., 7.2-11
diff heater
function, A.6-9
part number, 8.1-18
replacement, 4.67-1
DIFF heater defective or disconnected., 7.2-11
Diff Heater Disabled, 7.2-11
Diff heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-11
Diff Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-11
Diff Laser Offset Lower Failed, 7.2-11
Diff Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-11
diff lytic reagent
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.22-4
diff lytic reagent pump (PM4)
function, 2.22-6
PN 4277219B

part number, 8.1-24
of, 2.22-8
replacement, 4.28-8
diff mixing chamber (VC25)
function, 2.22-1, 2.22-3
location, 4.68-1
replacement, 4.68-1
Diff module
diff mixing chamber replacement, 4.68-1
function, 2.4-1
part number, 8.1-19
diff parameters
test limits, A.1-5
Diff PC Communication Failed, 7.2-11
Diff Power Supply card
range, A.1-10
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
function, 2.4-1, 2.8-1
input, 2.8-2
monitors, 2.8-2
outputs, 2.8-2
part number, 8.1-22
INDEX-13
INDEX
diff preservative
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.22-4
diff preservative pump (PM1)
function, 2.22-6
part number, 8.1-24
of, 2.22-8
replacement, 4.29-8
volume optimization, 4.66-1
volume optimization, peak-to-peak DC
conductivity noise limits, A.1-9
diff preserve. See diff preservative
Diff Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-11
Diff Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-12
Diff Proc card. See DIFF PROCESSOR card
DIFF PROCESSOR card
function, 2.3-2, 2.21-7
inputs, 2.21-8
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.6-1
DIFF processor communication failure, 7.2-12
Diff Processor Does Not Answer, 7.2-12
14-INDEX
DIFF Processor monitor command did not

finish., 7.2-26
Diff Processor Out Of Synch., 7.2-12
DIFF PS Card +15 V Error, 7.2-12
DIFF PS Card -15 V Error, 7.2-12
Diff PS card. See Diff Power Supply card
Diff RAM Test Failed, 7.2-12
diff sample pressure
regulator. See diff sample pressure regulator
transducer (DIFF PRESSURE) location, A.3-14
DIFF sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-12
DIFF sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-11
diff sample pressure regulator (RG3)
function, 2.22-4
part number, 8.1-25
diff sample valve (CVL43)
diff segment valve
function, 2.17-7
DIFF timer error., 7.2-13
Diff Timer Test Failed, 7.2-13
diff waste chamber (VC13)
DIFF Xmit Failure, 7.2-13
differential parameters. See diff parameters
Differential Power Supply card. See Diff Power
Supply card
digital backplane
GENS System, 3.4-6
LH 750 System, 3.12-7
function, 2.3-2
PN 4277219B
INDEX

of, A.1-11
Dil Proc card. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card
Dil SOL/OP PS +15V Error, 7.2-13
Dil SOL/OP PS -15V Error, 7.2-13
Dil SOL/OP PS 24V Error, 7.2-13
Dil1 Card 5V Error, 7.2-14
Dil1 Card +15V Error, 7.2-14
Dil1 Card -15V Error, 7.2-14
DIL4 Card 12V Error, 7.2-14
diluent
and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing
check, 4.31-1
conditions affecting delivery timing to WBC
bath, table of, 4.31-4
GENS System, 3.5-3
LH 750 System, 3.13-3
diluent and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing
check. See CBC lytic reagent and diluent
delivery timing check
diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser; WBC
diluent dispenser
Diluent front and rear sensors detected carryover
Diluent level low or faulty backwash tank float
sensor., 7.2-7
Diluent level low or faulty sheath tank float
sensor., 7.2-36
Diluent level low or faulty tank sensor, 7.2-38
diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28)
function, 2.13-7
diluent/cleaning agent manifold (VC32)
function, 2.13-7
inputs, 2.13-2, 2.13-7
Diluter
accessing F-key functions, A.5-1
Angar valves. See Angar valves
F-key functions, table of, A.5-1
PN 4277219B

GENS System, A.7-2
GENS System, A.7-5
GENS System, A.7-1
door, GENS System, A.7-6
door, LH 750 System, A.8-6
fluidic component locations, Random Access
module, A.8-5
fluidic component locations, Retic
module, A.7-5
GENS System, A.7-3
fluidic component locations, right rear
door, A.7-6
GENS System, A.7-4
GENS System, A.7-4
fluidic components, table of descriptions and
function, 2.4-1
INDEX-15
INDEX

System; installation procedure, LH 750
System
main components, table of descriptions and
location references, 2.4-1
pinch valves. See pinch valves
solenoid valves. See solenoids valves
See also Diluter, GENS System; Diluter, LH 750
System
Diluter 1 card
range, A.1-10
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
function, 2.4-1, 2.12-4
input, 2.12-5, 2.12-8
monitoring, 2.12-5
outputs, 2.12-5, 2.12-8
part number, 8.1-22, 8.2-25
power supply distribution, illustration of, 2.12-4
replacement, 4.7-3
<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-15
Diluter 2 card
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-6, 2.12-8
inputs, 2.12-7
monitoring, 2.12-7
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.7-3
16-INDEX

<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
Diluter 2 RBD card
Diluter 2 REL card
Diluter 3 card
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-8
inputs, 2.12-9
part number, 8.1-22
replacement, 4.7-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card
part number, 8.1-23
See also Diluter 3 card
Diluter 4 card
range, A.1-10
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater circuit, illustration
of, 2.12-11
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-9
inputs, 2.12-11
PN 4277219B
INDEX
part number, 8.1-23

Peltier and Ambient Temperature circuit,
replacement, 4.7-3
Stain Chamber Heater circuit, illustration
of, 2.12-10
Diluter ambient thermistor
function, 2.22-5
location, 2.22-5
Diluter Board Not Answering, 7.2-14
Diluter Cable Adapter card
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-3
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
Diluter Cbl Adapter card. See Diluter Cable Adapter
card
Diluter Comm. Error, 7.2-15
Diluter communication failure, 7.2-15
Diluter Control system
Diluter 2 card, 2.12-6, 2.12-8
Diluter keypad, 2.12-11
function, 2.12-1
numeric keypad, 2.12-11
overview, 2.12-1
DILUTER CPU card
function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2
replacement, 4.6-1
vs DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-6
Diluter CPU card
part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-79
Diluter Echo Error, 7.2-15
Diluter Error, 7.2-15
Diluter failure., 7.2-15
Diluter front door open during automatic sampling
mode operation., 7.2-16
PN 4277219B
Diluter keypad
component locations, exploded view, 2.12-12
contrast adjustment, 2.12-11, A.3-13
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-11
location, 2.4-4
Diluter keypad failure., 7.2-21
Diluter Left Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-15
Diluter left power supply defective, 7.2-15
Diluter memory failure, 7.2-15
Diluter not ready to receive data from AMC., 7.2-27
Diluter not receiving data from AMC, 7.2-2
Diluter power supplies
card, 2.8-3
component locations, A.2-7, A.2-9
function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2
part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-5
replacement, 4.6-1
switch location, A.2-7, A.2-9
vs DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-6
Diluter RAM Fault, 7.2-15
Diluter received an invalid command from the
AMC., 7.2-41
Diluter Right Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-16
Diluter right power supply defective, 7.2-16
Diluter TxRx Error, 7.2-16
Diluter, GENS System
keypad. See Diluter keypad
main component locations, front panels, 2.4-4
closed, 2.4-4
compartment, 2.4-6
main component locations, left rear doors, 2.4-7
compartment, 2.4-5
main component locations, right rear door, 2.4-6
cover, 2.4-5
See also Diluter
INDEX-17
INDEX
Diluter, LH 750 System

main component locations, center rear
panel, 2.4-9
main component locations, front panel, 2.4-8
closed, 2.4-8
compartment, 2.4-10
main component locations, left rear
doors, 2.4-11
compartment, 2.4-10
main component locations, right rear
door, 2.4-11
cover, 2.4-9
See also Diluter
range, A.1-10
function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3
input, 2.8-3
LED locations, illustration, A.3-12
monitors, 2.8-4
outputs, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23
test point locations, illustration, A.3-12
test points, table of expected values, A.3-13
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply card
GENS System, 3.4-4
LH 750 System, 3.12-5
replacement, 4.7-3
disinfect
procedure, 5.3-2
dispensers, diluent. See RBC diluent dispenser,
Door Open Run Stopped, 7.2-16
door, front
18-INDEX
doors, instrument, part numbers, 8.1-10

DPR Diluter Packet Error, 7.2-16
dump valve (VL1)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
replacement, 4.15-1
Dump Valve Stuck Closed, 7.2-16
Dump Valve Stuck Open, 7.2-16
Duplicate run date and/or run time received, 7.3-3
E
electronic forms
available in Workstation, 4.61-1
Instrument Reference Report, using, 4.61-2
System Installation Report, using, 4.61-2
System Verification Report, using, 4.61-1
electronic hazards
Electronic Power Supply
Electronic Power system
distribution block diagram, new Diluter
distribution block diagram, old Diluter
+5.2 V control voltage distribution, table of
components and functions, 2.6-4
ac power timing sequence, table of, 7.4-1
Analyzer power supplies, 2.7-1
control voltage development, 2.6-1
block diagram, new Diluter
block diagram, old Diluter
control voltage distribution, 2.6-1
description, 2.5-1
Diluter power supplies, 2.8-1
function, 2.5-1
instrument power on timing sequence, table
of, 7.4-2
main cable connections on the GENS
System, 3.4-1
main cable connections on the LH 750
System, 3.12-1
PN 4277219B
INDEX
power development and distribution, 2.5-1

power off signals, 2.6-6
power up sequence block diagram, 7.4-3
power voltages and power voltage signal lines,
table of, 7.4-1
SYSTEM RESET signal block diagram, 2.6-6
electronic test limits
for DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, A.1-4
for RAMP TEST 0, A.1-4
EO#
EO%
eosinophil
See also EO#; EO%; diff parameters
erythrocyte
See also RBC
Erythrolyse. See diff lytic reagent
ETX not received from diluter, 7.2-17
ETX not received from Diluter., 7.2-26
ETX Rec. Error, 7.2-17
EXPECTED COMMAND FROM AMC, 7.2-17
Expected Command from AMC, 7.2-17
Expected command from AMC, command not
received., 7.2-17
extended shutdown
procedure, 5.2-1
when to do, 5.2-1
F
F-key functions
accessing, A.5-1
descriptions, table of, A.5-1
Fan Power Bad, 7.2-17
fans
Analyzer. See Analyzer fans
Power Supply exhaust. See Power Supply
exhaust fan
Power Supply intake. See Power Supply intake
fan
PN 4277219B
Fatal DPR Error, 7.2-17

Faulty backwash tank float sensor, 7.2-7
Faulty diluter memory., 7.2-10
Faulty PS1 power supply., 7.2-21
Faulty PS2 power supply, 7.2-21
Faulty sheath tank float sensor, 7.2-36
Faulty SPC A/D, 7.2-37
Faulty SPC A/D., 7.2-36
FC, 7.5-1
filters, part numbers, 8.1-11
fittings
part numbers, 8.1-13, 8.2-61
FL1 (Power Supply). See air water separator
flippers
allowable cassette overlap, A.1-1
location, loading bay, 2.15-3
location, unloading bay, 2.15-7
flippers, loading bay
flippers, unloading bay
float sensor, backwash tank. See backwash tank
sensor
float sensor, sheath tank. See sheath tank sensor
float sensor, sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow
reservoir sensor
float sensor, VC22
function, 2.9-5
float sensor/reservoir cap
replacement, 4.30-1
float sensors, backwash tank
function, 2.13-8
location, 2.13-8
float sensors, diluent (for Analytical Stations that
bypass the diluent reservoir)
function, 2.13-5
location, 2.13-3
float sensors, reagent reservoirs
function, 2.13-4
location, 2.13-3, 2.13-4
replacement. See float sensor/reservoir cap,
replacement
float sensors, sheath tank
function, 2.13-9
location, 2.13-10
float sensors, sweep-flow reservoir
function, 2.13-10
INDEX-19
INDEX
float sensors, waste

function, 2.13-11
location, 2.13-11
flow cell (VC18)
cleaning procedure, 4.79-1
errors, troubleshooting, 7.5-1
port functions, table of, 2.20-5
ports, illustration of, 2.20-4
Flow Cell Clog, 7.2-18
Flow cell voltages/pressures out of
specifications, 7.3-3
flow rate balancing procedure. See flow rate
calibration
flow rate calibration
procedure, 4.10-1
flow rate matching procedure. See flow rate
calibration
foam trap (VC14)
foam trap (VC30)
foam trap (VC31)
foam trap (VC37)
forms
Instrument Reference Report, using
electronic, 4.61-2
Notice of Information Update, when used, 1.1-1
System Installation Report, using
electronic, 4.61-2
System Verification Report, using
electronic, 4.61-1
System Verification Report, using electronic
form, 4.61-1
front door sensor
function, 4.81-2
testing, 4.81-2
Front sensor detected air bubbles (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4
Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18
fuses, Electronic Power Supply
function, 2.5-2
20-INDEX
G
gain matching procedure. See latex voltage
calibration
GENS Cell
defined, 2.1-1
procedure, 5.9-1
illustration, 3.1-2
See also instrument
GENS System
procedure, 5.9-1
illustration, 3.1-1
See also instrument
ghost pump. See retic clearing solution pump
ghost reagent. See retic clearing solution
H
hand-detector assembly
function, 2.17-16, 4.81-2
location, 2.17-17
replacement, 4.59-1
testing optosensor, 4.81-2
handheld scanner
hazards
biological, 1.2-1
electronic, 1.2-1
laser beam, 1.2-2
laser radiation, 1.2-2
Hct
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
heater, diff. See diff heater
PN 4277219B
INDEX
heater, stain. See stain heater

hematocrit
See also Hct
hemoglobin
See also Hgb
Hgb
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
signal flow block diagram, 2.18-8
function, 2.4-2
Hgb lamp
connector, location, 4.32-1
part number, 8.1-19
replacement, 4.32-1
voltage adjustment, 4.32-2
HGB lamp power supply defective, 7.2-19
Hgb module
part number, 8.1-19
Hgb preamp, part number, 8.1-24
HGB Status Error, 7.2-19
High pressure High, 7.2-19
High pressure Low, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too High, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too Low, 7.2-19
High Vacuum Low, 7.2-20
High vacuum too low., 7.2-20
Histogram Mem. Reset Error, 7.2-20
histograms
Plt. See Plt
RBC. See RBC
WBC. See WBC
HLR#
HLR%
Host: Bad Field Count, 7.3-4
Host: Bad Intro Field, 7.3-4
PN 4277219B
Host: Bad RCV Buffer End, 7.3-4

Host: Bad TestName in TestField, 7.3-4
Host: Cass/pos Not 6 Char In Testfield, 7.3-4
Host: Cass/Pos With Test Type Pending
Duplicate, 7.3-4
Host: Date Format Incorrect, 7.3-4
Host: Date format incorrect. Non Numeric, 7.3-4
Host: ID1 Too Long In Test Field, 7.3-4
Host: ID1 With Test Type Pending Duplicate, 7.3-4
Host: Illegal Comma In Testfield, 7.3-4
Host: Insertion error, Test exists, 7.3-4
Host: Invalid Gender Entry, 7.3-4
Host: Leading Spaces In Field, 7.3-4
Host: No Comma After Testname In TestField, 7.3-5
Host: No CRLF at End of Preamble, 7.3-5
Host: No CRLF At Field End, 7.3-5
Host: No data in transmitted field, 7.3-5
Host: No ID1 Or CassPos, 7.3-5
Host: No SOH in preamble, 7.3-5
Host: No Space after Tag, 7.3-5
Host: No String Between Commas In TestField, 7.3-5
Host: No Valid Field Tag AC found, 7.3-5
Host: Non Alpha Char In Alpha Field, 7.3-5
Host: Non Alphanumeric in Alphanumeric field, 7.3-5
Host: Non Numeric Char In Numeric Field, 7.3-5
Host: Nonnumeric Cass/pos Char In Testfield, 7.3-5
Host: Num Of Fields Mismatch in Preamble, 7.3-5
Host: Number Of Fields Count is 0, 7.3-6
Host: Test request UPDATED No Valid Patient
ID, 7.3-6
Host: Time Format Incorrect, 7.3-6
Host: Time Format Incorrect, Non Numeric, 7.3-6
Host: Trailing Spaces In Field, 7.3-6
I
IBUS
function, 2.12-3
IBUS cable
ID MISMATCH: Sample ID received does not match
pre-assigned ID, 7.3-7
ID not read by wand or ID was not available., 7.2-26
Illegal Interrupt, 7.2-21
important
definition, 1.1-3
Incomplete Retic Collection, 7.2-32
Incomplete Retic collection., 7.2-32
INDEX-21
INDEX
Incorrect calibration factor transmission, 7.2-38

Incorrect calibration factors or bath voltages., 7.2-41
Incorrect calibration factors received, 7.2-21
installation procedure, GENS System
electronic report form, using, 4.61-2
GENS Cell, illustration, 3.1-2
GENS System with SlideMaker,
illustration, 3.1-2
Workstation, 3.8-1
installation procedure, LH 750 System
22-INDEX

LH 750 Cell, illustration, 3.10-2
LH 750 System with SlideMaker,
Workstation, 3.17-1
installation procedure, on the LH 750 System
instrument
ac input voltage specifications, A.1-11
Analytical Station. See Analytical Station
auto-start feature, SmartStart
recognition, 2.15-1
description, 2.1-2
electronic forms available, 4.61-1
fan locations, 3.10-3
fan locations, GENS System, 3.1-3
function, 2.1-1
functional systems, 2.1-2
installation procedure, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
installation, GENS System procedure, 3.2-1
mode-to-mode comparison limits, table
of, A.1-6
operating modes, 2.1-6
parameters generated, 2.1-1
performance specifications, A.1-5
preinstallation checklist, GENS System, 3.1-1
tolerances and limits, A.1-1
whole blood verification procedure, 5.4-1
Workstation. See Workstation
See also GENS System; GENS Cell; LH 750
System; LH 750 Cell
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Instrument 1 NO READ Sample received without

proper identification [...,....], 7.2-6
Instrument detected clog in flow cell and attempted
three times to clear clog without
success., 7.2-18
Instrument dual port RAM memory test failed., 7.2-17
Instrument has not performed a shutdown in <24>
hours., 7.3-7
Instrument Reference Report, using electronic
form, 4.61-2
interface bus
function, 2.12-3
Internal Cal. Fac. Error, 7.2-21
Internal software failure, 7.2-37
Interpreter Collator ABORT., 7.3-7
Interpreter Collator Forced to Reset, 7.3-7
Interpreter Collator has timed-out indicating a
possible Analytical Station malfunction, 7.3-7
Invalid character received from Diluter, 7.2-26
Invalid Diluter command., 7.2-26
Invalid dual port RAM packet (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-16
Invalid tube label type read by scanner (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
IQAP data collected., 7.3-7
Ireg Hst., 7.2-21
IRF
J
jumpers
locations and settings. See specific circuit card
K
Keyboard and Display Interface card
function, 2.3-2, 2.4-2
potentiometer R3, function, A.3-13
Keyboard Interrupt Error, 7.2-21
L
Label Not Read Run Stopped, 7.2-22
PN 4277219B
labels
laser warning, location, 1.2-3, 1.2-4
laser, part number, 8.1-19
lamp, Hgb. See Hgb lamp
laser
and flow cell alignment procedure, 4.76-1
function, 2.4-2
part number, 8.1-19
power supply. See Laser Power Supply
laser electromagnetic shield, location, 1.2-4
laser hazards
laser interlock switch
function, 2.8-2
location, 1.2-4
Laser offset too high., 7.2-11
Laser offset too low., 7.2-11
Laser Power module
function, 2.8-3
Laser Power Supply
function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3
input, 2.8-3
Laser Power module, 2.8-3
Laser Reference 4 card, 2.8-3
monitors, 2.8-3
outputs, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23
Laser PS. See Laser Power Supply
function, 2.8-3
laser tamper-proof screws, location, 1.2-4
Laser voltage above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
Laser voltage below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Too High, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Too Low, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-22
Last Two XB batches are outside limits, 7.3-8
Last XB Batch is outside limits, 7.3-8
Last XB batch outside limit conditions has
cleared, 7.3-8
latex voltage calibration
procedure, 4.9-1
INDEX-23
INDEX

LATRON control
acceptable verification limits, A.1-10
used to verify VCS gain settings, 4.78-1
LATRON primer
background limits, A.1-8
leakage current specifications
computers, 2.1-5
GENS System and LH 750 System, 2.1-5
left lift cylinder
replacement, 4.40-1
left lift cylinder (CL4)
function, 2.15-7
location, 2.15-7
Left Lift Not Up, 7.2-23
left lift up switch
function, 2.15-7, 4.81-2
location, 2.15-7
replacement, 4.39-1
testing, 4.81-2
Left Load Fail, 7.2-23
Left Stack Full, 7.2-23
leukocyte
See also WBC
Level C------, 7.2-23
Level Check Fail Caused Stop, 7.2-23
Level -D-----, 7.2-23
Level --L----, 7.2-23
Level ---P---, 7.2-24
Level ----R--, 7.2-24
Level -----V-, 7.2-24
Level ------W, 7.2-24
LH 750 Cell
See also instrument
24-INDEX
LH 755 System
defined, 2.1-1
See also instrument
light scatter (LS)
Light Scatter Preamp module
function, 2.4-2, 2.21-4
inputs, 2.21-5
outputs, 2.21-5
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.7-3
light scatter sensor. See LS sensor
linear light scatter (LLS)
LIS Upload: Invalid report Profile Requested, 7.3-8
List mode data collection procedure, 4.33-1
LLS. See linear light scatter (LLS)
loading bay
long term shutdown
procedure, 5.2-2
when to do, 5.2-1
Low Vacuum Drifted, 7.2-24
Low Vacuum High, 7.2-25
Low Vacuum Low, 7.2-25
Low vacuum too high., 7.2-25
Low vacuum too low., 7.2-25
LS Preamp module. See Light Scatter Preamp
module
LS sensor
function, 2.21-4
regions, illustration of, 2.21-4
LS. See light scatter (LS)
LY#
LY%
lymphocyte
See also LY#; LY%; diff parameters
PN 4277219B
INDEX
M
manifolds
functions, A.6-10
manual
abbreviations used in, ABBREVIATIONS-1
conventions, 1.1-4
intended audience, 1.1-1
numbering format, 1.1-3
organization, 1.1-2
reference designators used
in, ABBREVIATIONS-1
scope, 1.1-1
special headings, 1.1-3
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from
Analyzer., 7.3-8
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S
Workstation., 7.3-8
Manual mode-to-Automatic mode calibration
procedure, 4.11-1
Manual Probe Not In, 7.2-26
Manual sampling probe did not retract (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-26, 7.2-28
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-28
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not down)
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not home)
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not up)
Manual-mode activator
location, 2.17-17
Manual-mode aspiration station
Manual-mode start switch
function, 4.81-2
location, 2.17-17
testing, 4.81-2
manuals, customer
part numbers, 1.1-1
manuals, service
online version, part number, 1.1-1
Slide Making Modules, part number, 1.1-1
Slide Staining Modules, part number, 1.1-1
Workstation, part number, 1.1-1
PN 4277219B
Maximum # Of Repro runs Exceeded - Sample Not

Stored, 7.3-8
Maximum number of cassettes (12) already loaded,
obstruction or faulty switch., 7.2-23
MCH
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
MCHC
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-7
MCV
System, 2.24-3
System, 2.24-5
mean cell volume
See also MCV
mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin
See also MCH
mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin concentration
See also MCHC
mean platelet volume
See also MPV
meniscus
how to read correctly, illustration of, 4.22-3
menu trees
Analyzer, A.10-1
MF. See manifolds
MF4. See backwash manifold
mixing chamber, diff. See diff mixing chamber
mixing motors. See motors, mixing
MO#
MO%
INDEX-25
INDEX
mode to mode comparison. See Manual

mode to mode matching procedure. See Manual
modules
Aspiration Pump. See Aspiration Pump module
BSV. See BSV module
Diff. See Diff module
Hgb. See Hgb module
Peltier. See Peltier module
Probe Wipe. See Probe-Wipe module
Random Access. See Random Access module
Retic. See Retic module
Solenoid Interconnect. See Solenoid
Interconnect module
Triple Transducer. See Triple Transducer
module
Monitor Task Did Not Finish, 7.2-26
monocyte
See also MO#; MO%; diff parameters
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.17-1
motor, Probe-Wipe module. See Probe-Wipe
module motor
motor, retic mixing. See retic mixing motor
motors, mixing
diff. See diff chamber mixing motor
retic. See retic mixing motor
MPV
System, 2.24-3
MRV
MSCV
N
NE#
26-INDEX
NE%
needle
location, 2.17-12
part number, 8.1-21
needle assembly
function, 2.17-11, A.6-9
location, 2.15-5
modules
Needle-Cap Piercer. See Needle-Cap Piercer
module
needle vent chamber
function, 2.16-1
needle vent chamber (VC19)
location, 2.17-12
Needle-Cap Piercer module
part number-Needle Cap Piercer, 8.1-19
replacement, 4.57-1
neutrophil
See also NE#; NE%; diff parameters
Newbar card
LED and switch locations, 4.51-10
location, 4.51-10
No ACK From Diluter, 7.2-26
No Calibrator lot number. No statistics will be
calculated, 7.3-9
No ETX, 7.2-26
No latex Setup Information available, latex sample
will not be stored., 7.3-9
NO MATCH: Sample run received does not match any
Todo list entry, 7.3-9
NO READ: Sample run received without proper
identification, 7.3-9
No Retics Control In This Mode, 7.2-26
No Valid ID, 7.2-26
No Wand ID, 7.2-26
noise checks
CBC aperture checks, procedure, 4.70-1
CBC, limits, A.1-3
VCS, limits, A.1-9
VCS, procedure, 4.75-1
Non-ASCII From Diluter, 7.2-26
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Not Ready For AMC Data, 7.2-27

note
definition, 1.1-4
Notice of Information Update form
when used, 1.1-1
NRBC#
NRBC%
Numeric keypad
function, 2.3-2
location, 2.3-4
numeric keypad
contrast adjustment, 2.12-11
contrast adjustment location, 2.12-12
function, 2.12-11
O
OP. See opacity (OP)
opacity (OP)
Operator <Operator ID> added <Location Name> to
the location list, 7.3-10
Name, Last Name> to from physician
list, 7.3-11
Name, Last Name> to the physician list, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed <Physicians First
Name, Last Name> to <Physicians First Name,
Last Name>, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Analytical Station
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Database
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Decision Rules
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Display Labels
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Institution
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed lis/his setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed location <Location
Name> to <Location Name>., 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Parameter
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Print setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed reagents
setup, 7.3-10
PN 4277219B
Operator <Operator ID> changed Reporting Units

setup, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> changed Shifts
definition, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> changed Workstation
setup, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> changed XB setup, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <# 0f runs> Run(s)
from Control Folder <Lot #>, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Location Name>
from the location list., 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> installed <Reagent
Type><Coulter/Non-Coulter> Reagent Lot to:
<New Lot#>, opened on <Open Date> with open
expiration <Open Exp>, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> requested Research Use Only
certification, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> shutdown the GEN S
Workstation, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> Started RAS, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> Stopped RAS, 7.3-11
Operator acknowledged stop condition, 7.3-12
Operator Alert 09, 7.2-27
Operator removed sample from probe before
aspiration was complete (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
Operator selected assay limits for control folder <Lot
#>, 7.3-12
O-rings, part numbers, 8.1-21
Overflow valve malfunction (remained closed)
detected while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
Overflow valve malfunction (remained open) detected
while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
OVERLARY AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
P
P/W Harness Not Connected, 7.2-31
parameters
CBC, 2.1-1
differential, 2.1-1
research only, 2.1-2
retic, 2.1-1
parameters, research only
part numbers
actuators, 8.1-3
Analytical Station, list
of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
INDEX-27
INDEX
9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.137

aperture blocks and modules, 8.1-3
BSV components, 8.1-3
cables, 8.1-4
cassette transport assembly components, 8.1-6
chambers, 8.1-6
chokes, 8.1-7
circuit cards, 8.1-22
consumables, 8.1-8
covers, 8.1-10
custom components, 8.1-7
customer documents, 1.1-1
cylinders, 8.1-9
displays, 8.1-10
doors, 8.1-10
drives, 8.1-10
engineering schematics, 6.1-1
fans, 8.1-11
filters, 8.1-11
fittings, 8.1-7, 8.1-13
flippers, 8.1-14
fuses, 8.1-14
hardware, nuts, 8.1-21
hardware, screws, 8.1-26
hardware, washers and spacers, 8.1-37
heaters, 8.1-18
labels, 8.1-19
lamps, 8.1-19
laser, 8.1-19
manifolds, 8.1-19
modules, 8.1-19
motors, 8.1-20
muffler, 8.1-20
needle, 8.1-21
O-rings, 8.1-21
preamps, 8.1-24
Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck
components, 8.1-24
pumps, 8.1-24
regulators, 8.1-25
Service Resource Kit, 1.1-1
sheath flow coil, 8.1-28
Slide Making Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1
Slide Staining Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1
28-INDEX
software, 8.1-28
springs, 8.1-29
switches, 8.1-29
thermistors, 8.1-31
tie wraps, 8.1-31
tools, 8.1-31
Triple Transducer module components, 8.1-32
tubing, 8.1-33
valves, Angar, 8.1-36
valves, pinch, 8.1-36
valves, relief (pressure bleed off), 8.1-36
Workstation, 1.1-1
parts
common names and categories used in parts list,
table of, 8.1-1
replaceable, master list
of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.137
parts, illustrated
Analyzer and Diluter front and side covers and
doors, LH750 System, 8.2-74
GENS System, 8.2-4
LH 750 System, 8.2-78
Analyzer, front door and hardware, GENS
System, 8.2-2
Analyzer, front door hardware, LH 750
System, 8.2-76
check valves, 8.2-58
chokes, 8.2-58
Diluter, Aspiration Pump module, MF4 and
MF13, 8.2-48
Diluter, bar-code scanner and tube ram
cylinder, 8.2-30
Diluter, BSV module, 8.2-44
Diluter, cassette guide panels, 8.2-8
Diluter, center front panel, 8.2-16
Diluter, Diff module, 8.2-40
Diluter, hydraulic inputs, 8.2-54, 8.2-56
Diluter, left door and compartment, 8.2-10
Diluter, left front panel, 8.2-12
Diluter, left rear door, 8.2-52
Diluter, lower front door hardware, LH 750
System, 8.2-77
Diluter, piercing station assembly, 8.2-28
Diluter, piercing station, rocker bed, and
components under front cover, 8.2-26
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Diluter, Probe-Wipe module, 8.2-46

Diluter, rear of center front panel, 8.2-18
Diluter, rear of left front panel, 8.2-14
Diluter, rear of right front panel, 8.2-22
Diluter, Retic module, 8.2-42
Diluter, right door and compartment, 8.2-24
Diluter, right front panel, 8.2-20
Diluter, right rear door, 8.2-50
Diluter, rocker bed, 8.2-32
Diluter, rocker bed mounting channel, 8.2-34
Diluter, Triple Transducer module, 8.2-36
Diluter, Triple Transducer module translation
plates and hardware, 8.2-38
fittings, 8.2-60
hardware, mounting, 8.2-64
Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor
Controller card and mufflers, 8.2-70
Power Supply, covers and panels, 8.2-72
Power Supply, overview and
compressor/vacuum pump, regulators and
filters, 8.2-66
Power Supply, SPC card, System Power
Controller Display and air water
separator, 8.2-68
Random Access module, 8.2-80
tie wraps, 8.2-64
valves, common, 8.2-62
Password changed, 7.3-13
PC Not Receiving, 7.2-28
PC1, 7.5-1
PC2, 7.5-2
Pct
System, 2.24-4
system, 2.24-6
PDW
System, 2.24-4
System, 2.24-6
internal check on Plt parameters, 2.1-2
used as internal check, 2.1-2
Peltier Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-28
Peltier heater sensor defective or disconnected, 7.2-28
Peltier module
cross-section view, 2.23-6
PN 4277219B
front and rear views, 4.64-1

function, 2.23-6, A.6-10
part number, 8.1-20
replacement, 4.64-1
Peltier Temp. Outside Limits, 7.2-28
Peltier temperature outside limits., 7.2-28
P-flag
when bubble/blood detectors disabled, 2.17-15
piercing station
pinch valves
function, A.6-8
part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63
platelet
See also Plt
Platelet fit algorithm failed (<Tube
ID>,<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-28
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-6
inputs, 2.19-7
location, LH7 50 System, 2.3-4
replacement, 4.6-1
PLB1
function, A.6-10
See also Peltier module
Plt
System, 2.24-3
System, 2.24-6
histogram, timing of data
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
INDEX-29
INDEX
PLT No Fit Aperture X Mode Out, 7.2-28

Plt Proc card. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card
PLT PROCESSOR card
part number, 8.1-23
PM1 (Diluter)
function, A.6-10
See also diff preservative pump
PM1 (Power Supply)
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
See also compressor/vacuum pump
PM2
function, A.6-11
See also RBC diluent dispenser
PM3
function, A.6-11
See also WBC diluent dispenser
PM4
function, A.6-11
See also diff lytic reagent pump
PM5
function, A.6-11
See also stain pump
PM6
function, A.6-11
See also retic clearing solution pump
PM7
function, A.6-11
See also CBC lytic reagent pump
PM9
function, A.6-11
See also aspiration pump
PM10
function, A.6-11
30-INDEX

See also cleaning agent pump
PM11
function, A.6-11
See also blood/stain aspiration pump
PMI procedure, 5.9-1
Pneumatic Power Supply
component locations, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
overview, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power system
function, 2.9-1
pneumatic levels and status monitors, 2.9-3
pneumatic on signals simplified schematic, 2.9-4
pressure development, 2.9-2
pressure distribution, 2.9-4
PVT card, 2.9-5
temperature monitoring, 2.9-3
vacuum development, 2.9-3
vacuum distribution, 2.9-4
Pneumatics/Power Supply overheated or
defective, 7.2-9
Power Development Control system
function, 2.10-1
power down/power up procedures
for Analytical Station, 4.1-1
for Workstation, 4.1-1
power supplies, local
function, 2.5-4
See also Analyzer power supplies; Diluter power
supplies
Power Supply
conditions that shut it down, 2.10-4
cover removal, 4.13-1
function, 2.2-1
System
left side panel removal, 4.13-1
PN 4277219B
INDEX

limit, 7.2-29
limit, 7.2-29
Power Supply 2 defective, 7.2-17
limit, 7.2-30
limit, 7.2-30
limit, 7.2-30
limit, 7.2-30
Power Supply exhaust fan
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2
replacement, 4.12-1
Power Supply intake fan
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
replacement, 4.12-2
preamps
Hgb, part number, 8.1-24
light scatter. See Light Scatter Preamp module
RF detector. See RF Detector Preamp card
precision
PRECISION TEST 2
PRECISION TEST 3
Precision test 3
definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
Precision test values within limits, 7.3-13
preliminary procedures, CBC calibration
overview, 2.25-1
pressure
5 psi. See 5 psi
30 psi. See 30 psi
PN 4277219B
60 psi. See 60 psi

diff sample. See diff sample pressure
for bar-code scanner cylinder. See bar-code
scanner cylinder
retic sample. See retic sample pressure
sheath. See sheath pressure
VCS variation limits, table of, A.1-9
preventive maintenance procedure, 5.9-1
Probe Obstructed, 7.2-28
probe position sensor
adjustment, 4.60-4
function, 4.81-2
location, 4.60-2
orientation, illustration, 4.60-4
testing, 4.81-2
Probe Wipe Down Fail, 7.2-28
Probe Wipe Failed, 7.2-28
Probe Wipe Truck Not Home, 7.2-29
Probe Wipe Up Fail, 7.2-29
probe-wipe down sensor
adjustment, 4.58-6
function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3
replacement, 4.58-2
testing, 4.81-3
Probe-Wipe module
cleaning truck cleaning/replacement, 4.58-2
cleaning truck component part numbers, 8.1-24
differences between two styles, 2.17-17
function, 2.17-17, A.6-9
monitoring, 2.17-18
motor replacement, 4.58-2
part number, 8.1-20
sensor replacement, 4.58-2
Probe-Wipe module motor
location, 2.17-17
part number, 8.1-20
replacement, 4.58-2
probe-wipe optical sensors
locations, 2.17-17
See also probe-wipe down sensor; probe-wipe up
sensor
probe-wipe up sensor
adjustment, 4.58-6
INDEX-31
INDEX
function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3

replacement, 4.58-2
testing, 4.81-3
procedure summaries
GENS System installation, 3.9-1
LH 750 System installation, 3.18-1
pump volume checks, A.1-13
VCS optimization, 4.71-2
procedures
adjustment. See adjustment procedures
calibration. See CBC calibration procedures;
cleaning. See cleaning procedures
installation. See installation procedures
noise checks. See noise checks
power down/power up, See power down/power
up procedures
preventive maintenance, 5.9-1
removal. See removal procedures
replacement. See replacement procedures
timing. See timing procedures
troubleshooting. See troubleshooting
procedures
verification. See verification procedures
PS. See Power Supply
pumps
blood/stain aspiration (PM11). See blood/stain
aspiration pump
CBC lytic reagent (PM7). See CBC lytic reagent
pump
cleaning agent. See Cleaning agent pump
pump
32-INDEX
pump
diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser;
retic clearing solution (PM6). See retic clearing
solution pump
stain (PM5). See stain pump
vacuum. See compressor/vacuum pump
volume check procedure summary, A.1-13
volume tolerances, table of, A.1-14
pumps, dual volume
pump
pump
PVT card
function, 2.4-2, 2.9-5
inputs, 2.9-6
monitors, 2.9-6
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
Q
QD. See quick disconnects
quench. See diff preservative
quick disconnects
R
R/W Data Mem. Interference, 7.2-34
RAMP TEST 0
Ramp Test values within limits., 7.3-13
Ramp test, definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
function, 2.4-2
location, 2.4-9
part number, 8.1-20
RBC
PN 4277219B
INDEX

System, 2.24-2
System, 2.24-5
diluent dispenser. See RBC diluent dispenser
generating histograms on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generating histograms on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
RBC bath (VC2)
RBC diluent dispenser (PM2)
function, 2.18-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.23-6
RBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-R)
function, 2.18-4
RDW
System, 2.24-3
Reagent <Reagent lot #> is expired, 7.3-13
Reagent Handling system
backwash manifold, 2.13-9
backwash tank, 2.13-8
diluent/cleaning agent chamber, 2.13-7
function, 2.13-1
pickup tube
connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3
reagent distribution, 2.13-6
Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-7
Analytical Stations that use the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-6
PN 4277219B
reagent input
connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3
reagent input ports, 2.13-1
Stations that bypass the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-2
Stations that use the diluent
reservoir), 2.13-1
reagent level monitoring, 2.13-4
Reagent Reservoir module, 2.13-2
sheath tank, 2.13-9
sweep-flow reservoir, 2.13-10
System-Flush cycle, 2.13-11
waste collection, 2.13-11
waste level monitoring, 2.13-11
installation, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
waste output connection, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
Reagent level sense, pressure or voltage error
detected., 7.2-11
reagent reservoir component replacement. See float
sensor/reservoir cap, replacement; reagent
reservoir solenoids, replacement; Reservoir
Interface card, replacement
Reagent Reservoir module
component locations, new style, 2.13-4
component locations, old style, 2.13-3
function, 2.4-2, 2.13-2
monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-4
reagent reservoir solenoids
replacement, 4.30-3
Received Host Deletion Request
%1, %2 ToDo List entries were deleted, 7.3-13
red blood cell. See RBC
red distribution width
See also RDW
Red Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
cards
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
connecting coaxial cables, 3.4-2
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-1
inputs, 2.19-2
location, 2.3-3
outputs, 2.19-2
INDEX-33
INDEX
replacement, 4.6-1
RED/WHITE PREAMP cards
part number, 8.1-23
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-5
input, 2.19-6
location, 2.3-4
replacement, 4.6-1
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-3
input, 2.19-5
location, 2.3-3
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.6-1
Red/white processor counter(s) did not
reinitialize., 7.2-32
Red/White Reset Error, 7.2-32
reference designators
Reg Res Intfc card. See Reservoir Interface card
regulator
regulators
diff sample pressure. See diff sample pressure
regulator
retic sample pressure. See retic sample pressure
regulator
sheath pressure. See sheath pressure regulator
vacuum (low). See vacuum regulator
relief valve (RV1)
part number, 8.1-36
removal procedures
Power Supply cover, 4.13-1
Power Supply left side panel, 4.13-1
rocker bed, 4.43-1
Replace reagent container, 7.2-23
replacement procedures
AMC, 4.6-1
ANALOG card, 4.6-1
Analyzer fans, 4.12-3
Analyzer front door gas springs, LH 750
System, 4.82-1
34-INDEX

Bar-Code Decoder card, 4.7-1
bar-code scanner cylinder, 4.50-1
BD ADJ card, 4.6-1
bed rock cylinder, 4.45-1
BSV, 4.60-1
BSV module components (housing, insulator,
O-ring, shaft and spring), 4.60-1
Bulk Power Filter card, 4.21-1
cleaning agent pump, 4.26-1
diff chamber mixing motor, 4.69-1
diff heater, 4.67-1
diff mixing chamber, 4.68-1
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply
card, 4.7-3
dump valve, 4.15-1
float sensor/reservoir cap, 4.30-1
hand detector assembly, 4.59-1
Hgb lamp, 4.32-1
left lift cylinder, 4.40-1
left lift up switch, 4.39-1
Needle-Cap Piercer module, 4.57-1
Peltier module, 4.64-1
Power Supply exhaust fan, 4.12-1
Power Supply intake fan, 4.12-2
Probe-Wipe module motor, 4.58-2
PN 4277219B
INDEX

PVT card, 4.7-3
reagent reservoir solenoids, 4.30-3
retic chamber, 4.63-1
retic mixing motor on the Random Access
module, 4.62-2
retic mixing motor on the Retic module, 4.62-1
right lift cylinder, 4.40-1
right lift up switch, 4.39-1
R/W/P SC/A card, 4.6-1
Scope Module, 4.6-1
stain chamber, 4.63-1
stain pump, 4.24-1
System Power Controller card, 4.18-1
top left safety switch, 4.41-1
top right safety switch, 4.41-1
tube detector assembly, 4.46-1
under left stack switch, 4.37-1
under right stack switch, 4.38-1
Repro Set Deleted, 7.3-13
reproducibility
function, 2.4-2, 2.13-5
inputs, 2.13-5
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.30-4
Reservoir low on CBC lyse., 7.2-23
Reservoir low on cleaner., 7.2-23
Reservoir low on DIFF PAK., 7.2-24
Reservoir low on diluent, 7.2-23
Reservoir low on Retic PAK., 7.2-24
Reservoir low or Stabilyse level sense detected, 7.2-24
PN 4277219B
Reservoir low or Stain or clearing agent level sense

detected., 7.2-24
reset signals, 2.6-5
RESET switch
function, 2.11-2
location, 2.11-3
RET#
RET%
Retic Accumulation Not Finished, 7.2-32
retic chamber (VC17)
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2
replacement, 4.63-1
retic clearing solution
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.23-5
retic clearing solution pump (PM6)
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.25-6
Retic control material used in CBC or CBC/DIFF test
mode., 7.2-26
Retic laser offset too low., 7.2-32
Retic Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-32
retic mixing motor
part number, 8.1-20
replacement on the Random Access
module, 4.62-2
replacement on the Retic module, 4.62-1
Retic module
function, 2.4-3
location, 2.4-5
part number, 8.1-20
stain chamber and retic chamber
replacement, 4.63-1
INDEX-35
INDEX

retic parameters
test limits, A.1-5
Retic Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-32
Retic Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-32
retic sample pressure
regulator. See retic sample pressure regulator
transducer (RETIC PRESSURE) location, A.3-14
Retic sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32
Retic sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32
retic sample pressure regulator (RG6)
function, 2.23-5
part number, 8.1-25
retic sample valve (CVL99)
retic segment valve
function, 2.17-7
retic stain pump. See stain pump
retic stain. See stain
Retic Xmit Failure, 7.2-32
reticulocyte
See also RET#; RET%; retic parameters
reticulocyte parameters. See retic parameters
RF (6.3V) voltage reading above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33
RF (6.3V) voltage reading below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33
RF box. See RF Detector Preamp card
adjustment, 4.74-1
adjustment locations, 4.74-3
Clog detector circuit. See Clog Detector circuit
connection to digital backplane, 4.74-2
connection to digital backplane on the GENS
System, 3.4-5
36-INDEX
connection to digital backplane on the LH 750

System, 3.12-6
function, 2.4-3, 2.21-2
inputs, 2.21-2
monitoring, 2.21-4
outputs, 2.21-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.7-3
solid state, block diagram, 2.21-3
with vacuum tube, block diagram, 2.21-3
RF Lower Limit Failed, 7.2-33
RF Preamp card. See RF Detector Preamp card
RF Upper Limit Failed, 7.2-33
RF Voltage Low, 7.2-33
RF voltage reading below limit., 7.2-33
RF. See conductivity (RF)
RF/DC Detector Preamp card
possible cause of an FC error, 7.5-1
RG1 (Power Supply)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
RG2 (Diluter)
function, A.6-11
See also vacuum regulator
RG2 (Power Supply)
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
RG3
function, A.6-11
See also diff sample pressure
RG4
function, A.6-11
See also sheath pressure regulator
RG5
function, A.6-11
PN 4277219B
INDEX
See also bar-code scanner cylinder pressure

regulator
RG6
function, A.6-11
See also retic sample pressure regulator
Rgt Res module. See Reagent Reservoir module
right lift cylinder
replacement, 4.40-1
right lift cylinder (CL5)
function, 2.15-3
location, 2.15-3
Right Lift Not Down, 7.2-33
Right Lift Not Up, 7.2-33
right lift up switch
function, 2.15-3, 4.81-3
location, 2.15-3
replacement, 4.39-1
testing, 4.81-3
Right Stack Full, 7.2-33
right stack loaded switch
function, 2.15-1, 4.81-3
location, 2.15-1
testing, 4.81-3
RLS. See rotated light scatter (RLS)
rocker bed
air cylinder. See bed rock cylinder
belt drive assembly. See belt drive assembly
belt. See belt drive assembly
position flag. See bed position flag
position sensors. See bed backward sensor; bed
forward sensor; bed horizontal sensor
removal, 4.43-1
rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2
rocks per minute, acceptable range, A.1-2
Rocker bed did not advance., 7.2-7
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not down) or faulty
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not up) or faulty sensor
Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not down) or faulty
PN 4277219B
Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not up) or faulty

rotated light scatter (RLS)
RS485 Interface modules
function, 2.12-3
RS/O Intfc card. See RS/Opto Intfc card
RS/Opto Intfc card
connections to digital backplane on the GENS
System, 3.4-6
connections to digital backplane on the LH 750
System, 3.12-7
function, 2.4-3, 2.11-5
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
Run Aborted. PC Not Ready., 7.2-34
RV1
function, 2.9-2
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
R/W Proc card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
R/W/P SC/A card
function, 2.3-2
inputs, 2.7-4
location, 2.3-4
outputs, 2.7-4
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.6-1
SC/A card
S
safety precautions
biological, 1.2-1
electronic, 1.2-1
laser, 1.2-2
Same Label Read Run Stopped, 7.2-35
INDEX-37
INDEX

Sample Acquisition system
aspirating a sample in the Automatic
mode, 2.16-1
aspirating a sample in the Manual mode, 2.16-5
aspiration path in the Automatic mode,
aspiration path in the Manual mode, illustration
of, 2.16-5
aspiration path through the BSV in the
aspiration path through the BSV in the Manual
blood sampling valve (BSV), 2.17-5
cleaning the blood pathways in the Automatic
mode, 2.16-3
cleaning the blood pathways in the Manual
mode, 2.16-7
function, 2.16-1
hand-detector assembly, 2.17-16
needle assembly, 2.17-11
overview, 2.16-1
Probe-Wipe module, 2.17-17
segmenting the sample in the Automatic
mode, 2.16-2
segmenting the sample in the Manual
mode, 2.16-6
Sample ID portion of the Positive ID has
changed, 7.3-13
Sample Removed Too Soon, 7.2-35
Sample Reporting system
CBC analysis parameters on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
CBC analysis parameters on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
diff analysis parameters, 2.24-7
diff analysis three-dimensional DataPlot,
example, 2.24-8
diff analysis two-dimensional DataPlot,
example, 2.24-8
function, 2.24-1
retic analysis DataPlot, example, 2.24-10
retic analysis parameters, 2.24-9
diagram, 2.24-1
38-INDEX
sample data flow on the LH750 System from

diagram, 2.24-2
sample flags, codes and messages, 2.24-10
Sample Tube Not Detected, 7.2-35
Sampling Station
function, 2.4-3
SC display test
procedure, 4.19-1
S-CAL calibrator
Scanner Error, 7.2-35
scanner position switch
function, 2.15-5, 4.81-3
location, 2.15-5
testing, 4.81-3
scanner, handheld
Scanning Fault, 7.2-35
schematics, engineering
Analog Backplane, GENS System, DCN, 6.1-1
Analog Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
Backplane Interconnect, GENS System,
DCN, 6.1-1
CRT Backplane, GENS System, DCN, 6.1-1
Digital Backplane, GENS System, DCN, 6.1-1
Digital Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
GENS Cable Interconnection Diagram,
DCN, 6.1-1
GENS Pneumatic/Hydraulic Schematic
Diagram, DCN, 6.1-1
GENS System Signal Interconnection Diagram,
DCN, 6.1-1
included in Chapter 6, list of, 6.1-1
LH 750 Pneu/Hydr, DCN, 6.1-1
LH 750 System Signal Interconnect, DCN, 6.1-1
Pneu/Hydr layout, Power Supply, DCN, 6.1-1
when updated in manual, 6.1-1
schematics, simplified
pneumatic on signals, 2.9-4
POWER ON signal, 2.6-4
power up signals, 2.6-5
Scope 1 card
function, 2.11-7
PN 4277219B
INDEX
Scope 2 card
function, 2.11-7
SCOPE MENU, Analyzer
accessing, 4.3-1
modes and display speeds available, table
of, 4.3-3
See also SCOPE MENU, example displays
SCOPE MENU, example displays
CBC ONLY, 4.3-7
CBC/DIFF, 4.3-7
conductivity, 4.3-5
count test, 4.3-4
Diff Analog Pulses Test, 4.3-4
DIFF ONLY, 4.3-7
electronic test, 4.3-3
F55, 4.3-6
light scatter, 4.3-5
light scatter drift, 4.3-6
phase adjust, 4.3-6
VCS LATRON control, 4.3-4
volume, 4.3-5
Scope Module
function, 2.3-2
replacement, 4.6-1
Scope module
CRT intensity adjustment
on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
CRT intensity adjustment on the GENS
System, 4.34-1
Scope Module 2
function, 2.11-6
inputs, 2.11-7
See also Scope Module
screws, part numbers, 8.1-26
SD
Sensor detected diluted blood or non-blood sample
connected to VC22 float sensor, 2.9-5
function, 2.4-3, 2.14-5
input, 2.14-6
PN 4277219B

part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-3
sensors
backwash. See backwash tank sensor
bar-code scanner position, location, 4.53-1
bed backward. See bed backward sensor
bed forward. See bed forward sensor
bed horizontal. See bed horizontal sensor
bellows down. See bellows down sensor
bellows up. See bellows up sensor
diff ambient thermistor. See diff ambient
thermistor
Diluter ambient thermistor. See Diluter ambient
thermistor
float. See float sensor, VC22; float sensors,
reagent reservoirs
front door. See front door sensor
hand detector. See hand detector assembly
LS. See LS sensor
probe position. See probe position sensor
probe-wipe down. See probe-wipe down sensor
probe-wipe up. See probe-wipe up sensor
sheath. See sheath tank sensor
sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow reservoir
sensor
tube in position. See tube in position sensor
vacuum overflow tank. See vacuum overflow
tank sensor
waste. See waste level sensor
SERVICE MENU, Analyzer
accessing, 4.2-1
options available. See service options, Analyzer
service options, Analyzer
on DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-4
on DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-6
on DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU,
table of descriptions, 4.2-6
on ELECTONIC TESTS MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-4
on MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-5
on SERVICE MENU, table of descriptions, 4.2-2
on SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU, table of
descriptions, 4.2-5
shear valves
hardware description, 2.17-7
INDEX-39
INDEX
ports, 2.17-10
See also diff sample valve; retic sample valve;
stained retic sample valve
sheath flow restrictor (VC12)
sheath pressure
regulator. See sheath pressure regulator
transducer location, A.3-14
Sheath Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-35
sheath pressure regulator (RG4)
function, 2.13-9
part number, 8.1-25
Sheath Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-36
Sheath sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-36
Sheath sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
sheath tank (VC15)
function, 2.13-9
monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-9, 2.13-10
Sheath Tank Not Full, 7.2-36
sheath tank sensor
function, 4.81-4
testing, 4.81-4
Sheath Tank Still Full, 7.2-36
shift
shutdown procedures
extended, 5.2-1
long term, 5.2-2
function, 2.4-3, 2.19-2
location, 2.4-9
part number, 8.1-23
replacement, 4.7-2
Six-Channel Preamp cards
inputs, 2.19-3
outputs, 2.19-3
40-INDEX
SlideMaker
AMC switch settings for, A.2-1
Diluter Processor card switch settings
for, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10
SlideStainer
SmartStart recognition
enabling, 2.15-1
function, 2.15-1
hand detector part of, 2.17-16
software
procedure for displaying versions, A.9-1
released version configurations for the GENS
System, A.9-1
released version configurations for the LH 750
System, A.9-1
Solenoid Interconnect module
function, A.6-9
part number, 8.1-20
solenoid valves
functions and location references, table of, A.6-1
solenoids valves
reagent reservoir, replacement
Sol/Opt PS card. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card
spacers, part numbers, 8.1-37
SPC A/D Status Error, 7.2-36
SPC card. See System Power Controller card
SPC Display. See System Power Controller Display
SPC Power Supply Bad, 7.2-36
SPC power supply defective, 7.2-36
SPC Status Not Ready, 7.2-37
special headings
attention, 1.1-4
caution, 1.1-3
important, 1.1-3
note, 1.1-4
Specimen Transport system
detecting a tube at the piercing station, 2.15-4
function, 2.14-1
identifying the specimen, 2.15-5
PN 4277219B
INDEX

moving a cassette to the unloading bay, 2.15-6
moving the cassette across the rocker
bed, 2.15-3
overview, 2.14-1
piercing the cap of the specimen tube, 2.15-5
placing the cassette on the rocker bed, 2.15-3
positioning the tube for sample
acquisition, 2.15-4
pushing the tube back into the cassette, 2.15-6
retrieving the cassette from the loading
bay, 2.15-1
springs, part numbers, 8.1-29
StabiLyse. See diff preservative
Stack Overflow, 7.2-37
stain
GENS System, 3.5-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.23-5
stain chamber (VC24)
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3
location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2
replacement, 4.63-1
stain heater
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6
Stain Heater Disabled, 7.2-37
Stain heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-37
Stain Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-37
stain pump (PM5)
adjustments on the Random Access module,
adjustments on the Retic module, illustration
of, 4.24-4
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.24-7
Stain Temp Hi. Heater Disabled, 7.2-37
Stain Temp Low. Run Stopped, 7.2-37
PN 4277219B
Stain temperature high, heater disabled., 7.2-37

Stain temperature low, heater disabled., 7.2-37
Stain temperature sensor failed., 7.2-37
stained retic sample valve (CVL93)
stained retic segment valve
function, 2.17-9
standard deviation
start switch. See Manual-mode start switch
startup after extended shutdown
procedure, 5.2-2
startup after long term shutdown
procedure, 5.2-2
startup procedures
after extended shutdown, 5.2-2
after long term shutdown, 5.2-2
stripper plate
function, 2.15-4
location, 2.15-4
stripper plate cylinder (CL10)
function, 2.15-4
location, 2.15-4
Stripper Plate Not In, 7.2-38
Stripper Plate Not Out, 7.2-38
Stripper plate obstructed (not in) or faulty
sensor., 7.2-38
Stripper plate obstructed (not out) or faulty
sensor., 7.2-38
stripper plate position switch
function, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-4
testing, 4.81-4
STX Rec. Error, 7.2-38
SVP
procedure, 5.1-1
using electronic form for, 4.61-1
Sweep Flow Reservoir Not Full, 7.2-38
Sweep Flow Reservoir Still Full, 7.2-38
sweep-flow reservoir (VC29)
function, 2.13-10
sweep-flow reservoir sensor
testing, 4.81-4
INDEX-41
INDEX
sweep-flow tank
function, A.6-9
switches
laser interlock. See laser interlock switch
left lift up. See left lift up switch
Manual-mode start. See Manual-mode start
switch
on circuit cards. See specific circuit card
RESET. See RESET switch
right lift up. See right lift up switch
right stack loaded. See right stack loaded switch
scanner position. See scanner position switch
settings for System with
SlideMaker, A.2-1, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10
stripper plate position. See stripper plate
position switch
top left safety. See top left safety switch
top right safety. See top right safety switch
under left stack. See under left stack switch
under right stack. See under right stack switch
System Control overview
System Control system
AMC, 2.11-2
function, 2.11-1
overview, 2.11-1
System flush
procedure, 5.3-2
System Installation Report, using electronic
form, 4.61-2
System messages
tables of, 7.2-1
See also individual messages
A/D converter status monitor, 2.10-3
Bulk Power Supply voltage monitors, 2.10-3
function, 2.2-1, 2.10-1
input line voltage monitors, 2.10-2
inputs, 2.10-2
42-INDEX
jumper settings for 48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5

location, 2.2-2
part number, 8.1-23
pneumatic level monitors, 2.10-2
POWER ON signal simplified schematic, 2.6-4
replacement, 4.18-1
temperature monitors, 2.10-2
voltage status LEDs, table of indications, A.4-4
electronic and pneumatic level displays, 2.10-4
function, 2.2-1, 2.10-3
location, 2.2-2
replacement, 4.19-1
status displays, 2.10-4
testing, 4.19-1
system verification procedure. See SVP
System-Flush cycle
description, 2.13-11
function, 2.13-11
systems
CBC Analysis. See CBC Analysis system
Diluter Control. See Diluter Control system
Electronic Power. See Electronic Power system
functional, listing of, 2.1-2
GENS System. See GENS System
LH 750 System. See LH 750 System
Pneumatic Power. See Pneumatic Power system
Power Development Control. See Power
Development Control system
Reagent Handling. See Reagent Handling system
Sample Acquisition. See Sample Acquisition
system
Sample Reporting. See Sample Reporting system
Specimen Transport. See Specimen Transport
system
System Control. See System Control system
VCS Technology. See VCS Technology system
T
tanks
backwash. See backwash tank
sheath. See sheath tank
sweep-flow. See sweep-flow tank
temperature
ambient, adjusting display of, 4.65-2
changes that require verification of
calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1
PN 4277219B
INDEX
required for instrument operation, 3.1-4, 3.10-4

requirements for calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1
role of Diluter ambient in diff analysis, 2.22-5
role of Peltier module in retic analysis, 2.23-6
role of stain heater in retic
analysis, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6
test modes
The C: drive is full. Please clear Print and
Transmission buffers from Run
Configuration., 7.3-13
The probe wipe harness is not connected., 7.2-31
thermistors
diff ambient. See diff ambient thermistor
Diluter ambient. See Diluter ambient thermistor
part number, 8.1-31
Three Consecutive Voteouts, 7.2-39
Three consecutive voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or
MCV., 7.2-39
thrombocyte
See also Plt
tie wraps
part numbers, 8.1-31, 8.2-65
timing procedures
bar-code scanner cylinder stroke, A.1-1
CBC lytic reagent and diluent
delivery, 4.31-2, 4.31-3
tools, part numbers, 8.1-31
top left safety switch
function, 2.15-6, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-6
replacement, 4.41-1
test, 4.41-2
testing, 4.81-4
top right safety switch
function, 2.15-2, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-1
replacement, 4.41-1
test, 4.41-2
testing, 4.81-4
transient voltage suppressor
function, 2.5-1
trend
function, 2.4-3
PN 4277219B

part number, 8.1-32, 8.1-33
voltage noise tolerances, table of, A.1-9
troubleshooting procedures
+48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
flow-cell errors, 7.5-1
LED style bar-code scanner speed and electrical
checks, 4.52-1
power up problems, 7.4-1
stain pump, 4.24-1
TTM. See Triple Transducer module
tube detector
adjustment, 4.47-1
allowable distance to rocker bed, A.1-2
LED, when it should light, A.1-2
where cap is pierced when adjusted
correctly, A.1-2
tube detector assembly
function, 2.15-4
location, 2.15-4
replacement, 4.46-1
tube in position sensor
function, 2.15-4, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-4
testing, 4.81-4
tube ram cylinder (CL6)
function, 2.15-5
location, 2.15-5
tubing, part numbers, 8.1-33
TV3. See transient voltage suppressor
Two NAKs From Diluter, 7.2-39
Two NAKs Sent From AMC, 7.2-39
U
Unable to read cassette label., 7.2-22
under left stack switch
function, 2.15-6, 4.81-5
location, 2.15-6
replacement, 4.37-1
testing, 4.81-5
INDEX-43
INDEX
under right stack switch

function, 2.15-2, 4.81-5
location, 2.15-1
replacement, 4.38-1
testing, 4.81-5
Unknown Diff Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40
UNKNOWN Diluter Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40
unloading bay
V
vacuum
pump. See compressor/vacuum pump
See also vacuum, high; vacuum, low
vacuum isolator chamber (VC1)
function, 2.18-4
vacuum overflow tank (VC22)
function, 2.9-5
sensor testing, 4.81-5
Vacuum overflow tank full., 7.2-24
vacuum overflow tank sensor
function, 4.81-5
testing, 4.81-5
vacuum regulator (RG2)
part number, 8.1-25
vacuum trap (VC21)
vacuum, high
development, 2.9-3
vacuum, low
distribution, 2.9-5
transducer (COUNT VACUUM)
location, A.3-14
44-INDEX
valves
Angar. See Angar valves
blood sampling. See BSV
check. See check valves
dump. See dump valve
pinch. See pinch valves
relief. See relief valve
shear. See shear valves
solenoid. See solenoids valves
VC1
function, A.6-12
See also vacuum isolator chamber;VC1-R;
VC1-W
VC1-R
function, A.6-12
See also RBC vacuum isolator chamber
VC1-W
function, A.6-12
See also WBC vacuum isolator chamber
VC2
function, A.6-12
See also RBC bath, A.6-12
VC3
function, A.6-13
See also WBC bath, A.6-13
VC10
function, A.6-12
VC11
function, A.6-12
VC12
function, A.6-12
VC13
function, A.6-12
PN 4277219B
INDEX

VC14
function, A.6-12
VC15
function, A.6-12
See also sheath tank
VC16
function, A.6-12
VC17
function, A.6-12
See also retic chamber
VC18
function, A.6-12
See also flow cell
VC19
function, A.6-12
See also needle vent chamber
VC21
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12
VC22
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12
VC23
function, A.6-12
See also backwash tank
VC24
function, A.6-13
VC25
function, A.6-13
PN 4277219B
VC26
function, A.6-13
VC27
function, A.6-13
VC28
function, A.6-13
See also diluent/cleaning agent chamber
VC29
function, A.6-13
See also sweep-flow reservoir
VC30
function, A.6-13
VC31
function, A.6-13
VC32
function, A.6-13
See also diluent/cleaning agent manifold
VC37
function, A.6-13
VCS calibration. See VCS optimization
VCS measurements
conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
light scatter (LS), 2.20-1
linear light scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
opacity (OP), 2.20-1
rotated light scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
volume (DC), 2.20-1
VCS noise checks
limits, A.1-9
procedure, 4.75-1
VCS optimization
diff and retic count time specifications, table
of, A.1-9
INDEX-45
INDEX
diff and retic sample pressure variation limits,

table of, A.1-9
diff preservative pump volume optimization,
peak-to-peak DC conductivity noise
limits, A.1-9
latex calibration adjustment and verification
limits, table of, A.1-10
LS offset voltages limits, table of, A.1-9
overview, 4.71-1
procedure flow, block diagram, 4.71-2
VCS static and dynamic noise, table of
See also VCS optimization procedures
diff lytic reagent pump volume checks, 4.28-1
diff preservative pump checks, 4.29-1
flow-cell cleaning, 4.79-1
flow-rate adjustment, 4.73-1
pressure adjustments, 4.72-1
laser and flow-cell alignment, 4.76-1
LATRON verification procedure, 4.78-1
lens block cleaning, 4.80-1
LS gain adjustment, 4.77-1
preliminary checks, 4.71-5
RF Detector Preamp card adjustments, 4.74-1
VCS noise checks, 4.75-1
VCS technology parameters. See diff parameters,
retic parameters
VCS Technology system
applying the VCS technology, 2.20-2
COULTER IntelliKinetics
application, 2.22-5, 2.23-5
delivering diff and retic samples in the
delivering diff and retic samples in the Manual
determining the diff parameters, 2.22-10
determining the retic parameters, 2.23-6
diff analysis conditions, table of
diff analysis reagent system, 2.22-4
46-INDEX
diff lytic reagent and diff preservative

pumps, 2.22-6
diff sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.22-4
electronic overview, 2.21-1
electronic overview block diagram, 2.21-1
flow cell port functions, table of, 2.20-5
flow cell ports, illustration of, 2.20-4
function, 2.20-1
light scatter (LS) sensor, 2.21-4
GENS System, 2.22-1
LH 750 System, 2.22-2
GENS System, 2.23-1
LH 750 System, 2.23-3
retic analysis conditions, table of
retic analysis reagent system, 2.23-5
retic sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.23-5
delivery to retic chamber, GENS System,
delivery to retic chamber, LH 750 System,
stain heater block diagram, 2.23-6
VCS measurements, 2.20-1
VCS technology, instrument application
DC and RF currents, 2.20-2
flow-cell hydraulics, 2.20-3
PN 4277219B
INDEX
hydrodynamically focused cells, illustration

of, 2.20-4
laser light source, 2.20-2
light scatter path, illustration of, 2.20-3
verification procedures
bar-code performance, 4.49-1
diff and retic, 5.6-1
LATRON, 4.78-1
Power Supply, 5.7-1
precision, 5.5-1
System, 5.1-1
whole blood, 5.4-1
VIC. See vacuum isolator chamber
VL1 (Power Supply). See dump valve
Vls Air Error, 7.2-40
Vls Diluent Error, 7.2-40
volume (DC)
Volumetric Cylinder
reading correctly for diff lytic reagent pump
volumes, 4.28-3
reading correctly for diff preservative pump
volumes, 4.29-3
Voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or MCV, 7.2-6
W
warning
definition, 1.1-3
washers, part numbers, 8.1-37
waste
collection, description, 2.13-11
level monitoring, description, 2.13-11
See also waste level sensor
waste container
GENS System, 3.5-3
LH 750 System, 3.13-3
Waste container full., 7.2-24
waste drain
connection to Diluter on the GENS
System, 3.5-3
PN 4277219B
connection to Diluter on the LH 750

System, 3.13-3
waste level sensor
function, 4.81-5
testing, 4.81-5
installation on the GENS System, 3.5-3
installation on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
location on the GENS System, 3.5-3
location on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
WBC
System, 2.24-2
System, 2.24-5
diluent dispenser. See WBC diluent dispenser
generating histogram on the GENS
System, 2.24-2
generating histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
WBC bath (VC3)
WBC differential parameters
WBC diluent dispenser (PM3)
function, 2.18-2
part number, 8.1-24
replacement, 4.23-6
WBC preserve. See diff preservative
WBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-W)
function, 2.18-4
white blood cell. See WBC
White Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
cards
whole blood verification
procedure, 5.4-1
Workload has been automatically reset in the
database., 7.3-14
INDEX-47
INDEX
Workload has been manually archived, 7.3-14

Workload has been manually printed, 7.3-14
Workload has been manually reset in the
database, 7.3-14
Workload was automatically printed., 7.3-14
Workstation
GENS System, 3.4-7
LH 750 System, 3.15-1
determining Hgb results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-7
determining MCV results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
GENS System, 2.24-3
LH 750 System, 2.24-5
determining Plt and MPV results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-6
determining RBC counts on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
determining RDW results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-6
determining WBC counts on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
GENS System, 2.24-3
LH 750 System, 2.24-5
thew LH 750 System, 3.16-4
error messages, 7.3-1
generating Plt histogram on the LH750
System, 2.24-6
generating RBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generating WBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
installation, GENS System, 3.2-1
installation, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
power down/power up procedures, 4.1-1
screens. See Workstation screens
Workstation comms timeout, 7.2-41
48-INDEX
Workstation messages
Workstation screens
Bar-Code Test, illustration of, 4.49-1
capture procedure, 4.33-1
Latex Voltage, illustration of, 4.9-2
Voltage Matching, illustration of, 4.9-3
Wrong Cal Factors, 7.2-41
Wrong Calibration Type, Latex Sample will not be
stored., 7.3-14
Wrong Calibration Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Carryover Type, latex Sample will not be
stored., 7.3-14
Wrong Carryover Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Command Interpretation, 7.2-41
Wrong Command Sequence, 7.2-41
Wrong Control 5C Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Control Retics Type, Sample will be stored as a
Wrong Echo Xmit, 7.2-41
Wrong Match and Balance Type, latex Sample will not
be stored., 7.3-14
Wrong Match and Balance Type, Sample will be stored
as a Patient Sample., 7.3-14
Wrong Repro Type, latex Sample will not be
stored., 7.3-15
X
XB all batches were deleted, 7.3-15
XB current batch was deleted, 7.3-15
PN 4277219B
TRADEMARKS
The BECKMAN COULTER logo, 4 C PLUS, 5C, AccuGate, ACCUVETTE, COULTER,
COULTER CLENZ, Erythrolyse, GENS, GENS SM, GENS ST, IntelliKinetics, ISOTON,
LATRON, RCS, S-CAL, SCATTER PAK, SmartStart, and Stabilyse are trademarks of
Beckman Couter, Inc.
All other trademarks, service marks, products, or services are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
PN 4277219B

Service Manual Coulter GEN&#39;S

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Coulter GEN&#39;S

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COULTER Analytical Stations

COPYRIGHT 1989 - 1995

60 30.0 4.9 28 115

PN 4277219B (July 2001)

Might cause injury.

MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1

INTRODUCTION TO THE GENS AND LH 750 SYSTEMS, 2.1-1

POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.2-1

ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.3-1

DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.4-1

ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND

ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP, 2.6-1

ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE

ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE

PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM, 2.9-1

Pressure Distribution, 2.9-4

DILUTER CPU CARD, 2.12-2

Backwash Tank, 2.13-8

2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, 2.16-1

RBC Histogram, 2.18-6

RF Detector Preamp Card, 2.21-2

CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.24-5

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1

GENS SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.1-1

INSTALLING THE GENS SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.2-1

UNPACKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.3-1

INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GENS SYSTEM, 3.4-1

CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GENS SYSTEM, 3.5-1

SETTING UP THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.6-1

CHECKING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.7-1

TESTING THE GENS SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

GENS SYSTEM AND GENS CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.9-1

3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.10-1

3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.11-1

SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1

POWER DOWN/POWER UP, 4.1-1

ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS, 4.2-1

ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS, 4.3-1

DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, 4.4-1

AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS, 4.5-1

ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.6-1

DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.7-1

CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES, 4.8-1

CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE, 4.9-1

4.10 CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, 4.10-1

4.22 CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

4.28 DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.33-1

Lift Function Test, 4.40-3

Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-2

Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment, 4.58-6

4.65 HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.65-1

4.72 INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS, 4.72-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.79-1

GENS System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and

Stain Chamber Heater Circuit, 2.12-10

2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode, 2.17-3

Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GENS System, 3.4-1

Opening the Diluter Side Doors, 3.12-1

Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card

Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump, 4.25-6

4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate, 4.45-2

Service Manual Coulter GEN'S

Service Manual Coulter GEN'S